Can I collaborate with others on pixel art projects?

Some pixel art programs offer collaborative features that allow multiple users to work on a single project simultaneously. However, the specific collaboration capabilities depend on the software you are using, so it's crucial to check with the respective documentation or support. In some cases, sharing files between users can be an alternative method for collaboration.

Can Blender addons/plugins slow down the overall performance of Blender?

While addons/plugins offer additional functionality, excessive use can potentially slow down Blender's performance, especially on low-end hardware. It is recommended to enable only the addons you currently need for your project to optimize performance.

How can I troubleshoot Blender addon/plugin issues?

If an addon/plugin is causing issues, try the following steps: Update Blender and the addon/plugin to their latest versions Disable other addons to determine if there is a conflict Consult the addon/plugin's documentation or contact the developer for technical support.

What are some techniques used for creating art with colored pencils

Common techniques include hatching, cross-hatching, stippling, and scumbling. Artists may also use layering, burnishing, and blending for richer, more dimensional results. Experimenting with different techniques can open up a range of creative possibilities with colored pencils.

Are there any prerequisites for taking ZBrush tutorials and courses?

Most beginner ZBrush tutorials and courses have no prerequisites. However, some basic knowledge of 3D modeling concepts, computer skills, and familiarity with other 3D software may be helpful in enhancing your learning experience.

Will coloring in adult coloring books help me improve my artistic skills?

While coloring can help develop your understanding of color theory and shading techniques, it might not substantially improve your drawing abilities. However, consistent practice in coloring and exploring other artistic mediums can contribute to overall artistic growth.

Can I use the same paper for colored pencils and other mediums?

Some papers, like mixed-media or heavyweight drawing papers, can handle various mediums, including colored pencils. However, performance may vary, and it's typically best to use papers specifically designed for the type of media you'll be working with.

Page 26 – Homesthetics

Q: How does hanging outdoor Christmas lights on the rain gutter or eaves work?

You can hang outdoor Christmas lights on your eaves or rain gutter using clips, hooks, or adhesive tape specifically designed for outdoor use. Be mindful of the electrical connector and lead. Make sure to use a sturdy ladder and have someone hold it steady while you work.

Q: Can I use indoor Christmas lights for outdoor use?

It is not recommended to use indoor Christmas lights for outdoor use. Indoor lights are not designed to withstand the elements and may be a safety hazard. Instead, choose lights specifically labeled for outdoor use with an IP code indicating resistance to moisture and weathering.

Q: What is a diode, and how does it affect outdoor Christmas lights?

A diode is an electronic component that allows current to flow in only one direction. In outdoor Christmas lights, light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are used to control the direction of current flow, resulting in efficient and long-lasting lights.

Q: How can I conserve energy when using outdoor Christmas lights?

Consider using laser LED lights, which use less energy than traditional incandescent lights. You can also use a timer or smart plug, such as the ones offered by Walmart and Amazon, to control when the lights are on and make sure to turn them off when not in use.

Q: What are quick clip Christmas lights, and how can I use them for outdoor Christmas decorations?

Quick clip Christmas lights are designed to easily attach to gutters, shingles, glass, doors, and other surfaces without the need for hooks or other hardware. To use them for outdoor Christmas decorations, simply clip the fairy lights onto the desired surface and plug them in.

Q: How do I ensure that my outdoor Christmas lights are moisture-resistant?

To ensure that your outdoor Christmas lights are moisture-resistant, look for lights with an IP code indicating resistance to moisture and weathering. Avoid placing the lights in areas prone to pooling water or where they may come into contact with the soil.

Q: What Are The Benefits Of Ductless Mini Splits?

There are various benefits of ductless mini splits but the main advantages are their flexible zoning ability, size, and precise cooling of individual rooms. Moreover, you can find many ductless ACs that allow up to four indoor air handling units for one outdoor heat pumping system. So, you can cool up to four rooms with a single ductless mini split - how cool is that? And if you have more rooms or zones to cover, you can simply add more mini splits to support more indoor air handlers. We recommend consulting your AC installer to best indoor handler configuration to optimize the temperature of your home.

Q: Are The Ductless Mini Split Components Connected To Each Other?

Regardless of whether you have one or more than one indoor air handlers, they’re all connected to the outdoor unit by components called the ‘line set.’ To form this connection, your AC installer will drill a hole (about two or three inches in diameter) in the exterior wall. This helps the line consisting of copper tubes and electrical wires run between the components. You can also find tubes and casts in local hardware stores to hide these lines in case you’re worried about messing up the aesthetics of the exterior wall.

Q: Are Ductless Mini Splits More Energy Efficient Than AC Units With Ducts?

Air conditioning systems with ducts are responsible for significant energy loss during the cooling process. Central air conditioners that utilize multiple ducts for circulating cool air often face this issue, and require frequent sealing of the ducts to maintain efficiency. Using ductless splits will eliminate AC ducts altogether, so you won’t need to worry about high energy bills or sealing them every other year. Ductless units are also constructed with energy efficient components and technology that further help you save money and energy while cooling your home.

Q: How To Control Ductless Mini Splits?

All ductless mini splits come with built-in control panels that allow you to seamlessly adjust the temperature and utilize different settings. They also have remote control technology with each indoor air handler unit, so you set each zone at a different temperature remotely. These methods of control are much more efficient than the traditional thermostat control found in central air conditioning systems.

The subject of perspective in art is extremely vast and requires a lot of dedicated studying and even more drawing practice to get a firm grasp on it.

Artists often spend years studying the subject before it fully clicks, and even more on applying the concepts in their artworks. It is not something you learn in a day, but something that you need to study thoroughly and then put your ideas into practice over time.

If you're a beginner in the world of art, you most likely do not possess a lot of knowledge on this subject. However, it is one of the fundamentals that you absolutely need to learn as an artist.

Perspective is what defines how your artwork looks from different points of view. It applies to everything that you create in your art, be it a character or an environment.

While the subject is exceptionally detailed, there are plenty of books out there that can help you get a decent grasp on the subject in a fairly short amount of time.

Mastery will take time, but these books will definitely help you get started!

Listed below are the 5 best perspective books from our list:

Perspective Made Easy: Especially suitable for beginners, this book simplifies perspective's complexity and is celebrated for its affordability and easy-to-understand material.

How to Draw: Designed for intermediate artists seeking an in-depth understanding of perspective, it covers basic to advanced concepts, making it an ideal choice for artists past the beginner phase.

The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium: This comprehensive guide offers a nifty blend of simple and complex techniques useful for artists at any skill level, creating a thorough analysis of perspective drawing.

Perspective Drawing Handbook: With a concise structure, this handbook provides an efficient shortcut toward mastering perspective drawing and is suitable for both beginners and experienced artists.

Perspective! For Comic Book Artists: This book focuses on perspective drawing specifically for comic artists, offering strategies for landscapes, characters, and animals, making it the go-to resource for comic book artists looking to enhance their perspective work.

Here is the list of the 10 best perspective books to help you hone your skills and perfect the technique of perspective drawing.

1. Perspective Made Easy - Best for Absolute Beginners

When it comes to understanding perspective in art, Norling's Perspective Made Easy is one of the best books for beginners to get started with!

At present, it is widely regarded as the best introductory text for beginners who wish to master this complicated subject. There are very few books out there on this subject that explain perspective in such a simple and straightforward manner as Ernest R. Norling has managed to do in this book.

Apart from being an extremely easy read, this book is also highly affordable. So if you're someone who has no idea where to get started on this topic, I highly recommend you get your hands on this.

Perspective Made Easy is one of the first books out there that was entirely devoted to clarifying the laws that govern perspective. The book begins with clear and concise discussions on topics such as vanishing points, horizons, and the relationship between eye levels to perspective drawings.

Irrespective of how much experience or pure talent you possess, you'll almost certainly be able to apply the techniques taught in this book instinctively once you're done studying it!

2. How to Draw - Best for Intermediate Artists

How to Draw by Scott Robertson is a book that I keep on recommending to artists who are looking to get in-depth with the different concepts of perspective. It is a practical guide to constructing and seeing different objects in perspective and is primarily aimed at teaching how to draw from your imagination while inventing perspective.

Robertson, who currently teaches at Pasadena's renowned ArtCentre, is one of my favorite authors when it comes to Concept Art. His teaching style is one of the most unique that I've come across, and the vastness of his knowledge becomes evident as soon as you go through a few chapters of this book.

In this book, you'll learn all the basics of perspective, such as 1-point, 2-point, and 3-point perspective, apart from a lot of advanced concepts that require a lot of dedicated study. Every chapter follows the previous one with each of them building on top of one another.

While this book is one of the best on this subject, it's not exactly something that I'd recommend to complete newbies. If you have no prior experience in perspective drawing, you'll find it quite hard to go past the first few lessons. But if you've gone past the beginner phase, this is one of the best books to go for!

3. The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium - Best Comprehensive Guide

The Art of Perspective by Phil Metzger takes a very different route on teaching perspective, making it a must-have for all those of you who want to get a detailed analysis of the subject.

This is a relatively new book on perspective drawing, and also one of the most simple and straightforward ones I've come across in a long time. In this book, you'll be guided through a series of exercises and mini-lessons that will help you grasp the different notions associated with perspective.

The author has taken a brilliant approach towards demystifying perspective. The book offers simple but effective techniques that will help you achieve a convincing illusion of distance and depth, irrespective of whether it's only a few inches or miles.

You'll start with simple, intuitive techniques and atmospheric perspectives and then slowly make your way towards more sophisticated challenges such as curves, stairways, and reflections. It is one of the most effective texts for all those artists who are getting started with perspective drawing.

4. Perspective Drawing Handbook - Best Concise Handbook

This is one of the most concise books on perspective drawing that you'll find out there with only 96 pages worth of information. But don't let the tiny size fool you, this is one of the most effective resources to have by your side when you're doing perspective drawings!

This short and sweet guide on perspective drawing provides tons of insights and shortcuts to efficiently sketching perspectives. It's also an extremely versatile text that both beginners and experienced users can learn from.

The early chapters of this book by Joseph D'Amelio cover concepts such as foreshortening, diminution, convergence, and shading. As you gradually make your way deeper into the text, you'll come across discussions on more advanced techniques, and how you can master them quickly.

Apart from the written discussions, there are more than 150 illustrations throughout the book that explain every single feature in great detail. So irrespective of whether you are an experienced artist or just starting out, this is a book that you should get your hands on.

5. Perspective! For Comic Book Artists - Best for Comic Artists

As the title suggests, this book by David Chelsea is primarily dedicated to comic artists who wish to learn perspective drawing and apply different techniques in their work. It is one of the few books out there that teach perspective with a particular focus on Comic Artists.

The book was first published in 1997 and is widely considered one of the best texts for learning the fundamentals of perspective art and its subsequent application in comic strips. It teaches various core concepts such as landscapes, characters, animals, and the different techniques you can adopt to draw almost everything from a realistic perspective.

With this book, you'll learn how to draw the spectacular landscapes and fantastic interiors that you find in comic books. It's one of the best books for comic artists to step up their game and improve their artwork significantly.

However, I do not recommend this book to total beginners that are just getting started. This is for those of you who have a decent bit of experience with perspective drawing and wish to start doing comic strips.

6. Perspective for Artists

For all those of you who are looking to learn drawing and concept art on a budget, Dover Art Instructions has some of the best resources for you to choose from. Perspective for Artists is among a few of the publisher's best books on perspective drawing with over 400 diagrams and illustrations spread throughout the book.

Rex Vicat Cole has managed to make the process of learning perspective a highly fascinating and enjoyable experience through this book. The book comes with concise instruction, clear and straightforward language, and tons of illustrations to make learning a lot of fun.

You'll come across over 80 illustrations of drawings by old masters, as well as the author himself that demonstrate how perspective is utilized practically. The illustration problems are so well depicted that you'd not even need to depend on the text references to solve them at all.

However, since the book was written over a hundred years ago, some of the illustrations and the language may feel outdated. Apart from that, this is one of the best books out there for beginners to get started with.

7. Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators

Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators by Ernest W. Watson is one of the more advanced books in this list that is targeted mainly towards more experienced artists. This is not a text that you'll be able to grasp without a strong knowledge of the fundamentals of Perspective drawing.

You might have noticed how most illustrators, animators, and cartoonists exaggerate perspective in their artworks. With this book, you know how you can master this art while still abiding by the rules of perspective drawing.

The author, Ernest W. Watson, is a master on the subject having taught at Pratt for over 20 years. His style of writing is very clear, and he knows how exactly to reach his students through this text.

In this book, he teaches some of the more complicated techniques that can be used to manipulate perspective while still being consistent throughout your art. It is full of diagrams and illustrations by real artists to help you get a firm understanding of the complexities of perspective.

8. Perspective Without Pain

Perspective without Pain is one of Phil Metzger's best works, and also one of the simplest books on perspective drawing that you'll find in the market. This is one of the author's older works and is recommended for beginners looking for an introductory text on perspective drawing.

As the title suggests, 'Perspective without Pain' attempts to teach new artists how to create perspective without complicated equations, mechanical terms, and T-Squares. The book adopts a hands-on approach with simple instructions to teach students how to create depth and perspective in their drawings and paintings.

The earlier chapters cover different techniques that will help you impart a sense of depth to your paintings by gradually decreasing the distances between similar objects and then decreasing their sizes. You'll learn how to manipulate color and value and draw from any viewpoint.

It covers pretty much everything that you'd need to learn as a beginner, and a lot more!

9. Basic Perspective Drawing: A Visual Approach

Basic Perspective Drawing by John Montague is one of the most comprehensive guides on perspective drawing that you can find. It is incredibly detailed and covers a vast array of techniques, concepts, and theories that artists of all skill levels can make use of.

If you're looking forward to learning perspective drawing right from the basics to some fairly advanced concepts, this is one of the best books to go for. There are loads of illustrations, apart from tons of links that lead you to video tutorials to supplement the theories written in the book.

The thing that makes this book so effective at teaching perspective is the step-by-step approach adopted by the author. The book progresses gradually from simple concepts to distinct tools and methods, illustrating how to create perspective one step at a time.

Apart from the written theories and illustrations, there are also plenty of exercises wherein the readers can shade and highlight sections to reinforce their understanding of the book's contents.

10. Theory and Practice of Perspective

This book by G.A. Storey is considered to be one of the best books on perspective drawing, covering almost everything that an artist should know regarding the subject. This comprehensive guide on perspective drawing will help you understand and examine the theories of perspective from all angles.

G.A. Storey has designed the scores of chapters in this book in a highly concise format, thus covering a wide range of topics on the subject. There are discussions on theories that are both scientific as well as informal, apart from over 300 diagrams and illustrations.

Once you're done with the text, you'll master how to reproduce distance, shape, shade, proportion, shadows, reflections, and other effects that enhance two-dimensional works with realistic and lifelike qualities.

What is the Best Book for Perspective?

Subsequent is a comparison table, meticulously organized to highlight the salient features of the finest books that impart perspective. The table dissects factors including the author, publisher, edition, date of publication, number of pages, format, dimensions, weight, and the presence of other formats.

Book	Author	Publisher	Edition	Publishing Date	Number of Pages	Format	Dimensions	Weight	Other Format/s
Perspective Made Easy	Ernest R. Norling	Dover Publications	Republication Edition	January 19, 1999	224	Paperback	5.39" x 0.47" x 8.46"	0.65lbs	Hardcover, Audiobook, Kindle
How to Draw	Scott Robertson, Thomas Bertling	Design Studio Press	1st Edition	December 15, 2013	208	Paperback	9.1" x 0.8" x 11.03"	2.5lbs	Hardcover
The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium	Phil Metzger	North Light Books	N/A	June 12, 2007	208	Paperback	8.53" x 0.55" x 11"	1.81lbs	Kindle
Perspective Drawing Handbook	Joseph D’Amelio	Dover Publications	Republication Edition	May 17, 2004	96	Paperback	8.2" x 0.3" x 10.7"	0.6lbs	Hardcover, Kindle
Perspective! For Comic Book Artists	David Chelsea	Watson-Guptill	N/A	October 1, 1997	176	Paperback	7.05" x 0.48" x 9.98"	0.98lbs	N/A
Perspective for Artists	Rex Vicat Cole	Dover Publications	Republication Edition	June 1, 1976	288	Paperback	5.38" x 0.56" x 8.58"	0.65lbs	Kindle
Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators	Ernest W. Watson	Dover Publications	Republication Edition	January 14, 1993	160	Paperback	8.35" x 0.39" x 10.94"	0.76lbs	Kindle
Perspective Without Pain	Phil Metzger	North Light Books	Reprint Edition	March 15, 1992	144	Paperback	8.5" x 0.47" x 11"	1.25lbs	Kindle
Basic Perspective Drawing: A Visual Approach	John Montague	Wiley	6th Edition	January 29, 2013	288	Paperback	8.4" x 0.8" x 10.8"	1.7lbs	Kindle
Theory and Practice of Perspective	G.A. Storey	Dover Publications	N/A	February 10, 2006	288	Paperback	5.25" x 0.75" x 8.25"	0.85lbs	Kindle

Can I use these perspective books alongside other art courses?

Yes, you can use these perspective books alongside other art courses. In fact, combining the knowledge gained from these books with additional courses can help reinforce your understanding of the concepts and techniques, allowing you to develop a well-rounded skill set.

It is essential, however, to ensure that the courses you choose complement the books and provide consistent information so that the combined learning experience is effective and meaningful.

How can these perspective books improve my overall drawing skills?

These perspective books can improve your overall drawing skills by providing detailed explanations, step-by-step instructions, and exercises to teach you the techniques and principles of perspective drawing. By learning and mastering these concepts, you will be able to create a realistic sense of depth, distance, and dimension in your artwork, enhancing the overall quality and appeal of your drawings.

These books cater to various skill levels and artistic styles, so you can find one that suits your needs and helps you improve your perspective drawing abilities effectively.

Are there any books on the subject of perspective drawing specifically for comic book artists?

“Perspective! For Comic Book Artists” by David Chelsea is a book dedicated to comic artists who wish to learn perspective drawing and apply various techniques in their work. This book covers the fundamentals of perspective drawing and its application to comic strips, making it a great resource for artists in this specific field.

Are there any books that focus on teaching perspective drawing without complicated equations and technical terms?

“Perspective Without Pain” by Phil Metzger is a book that aims to teach new artists how to create perspective without complicated equations, mechanical terms, or T-squares. The book adopts a hands-on approach with simple instructions, making it an enjoyable way to learn perspective drawing.

Is it necessary to have prior knowledge of perspective drawing techniques before using advanced books like "Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators"?

Having a strong understanding of the fundamentals of perspective drawing is recommended before delving into more advanced books like “Creative Perspective for Artists and Illustrators.” These advanced books often discuss complex techniques and concepts that might be challenging for beginners without a solid foundation in the subject.

As we reach the end of our journey through the top perspective books for artists, it becomes clear that the ideal book depends on your skill level, focus, and preference. Each book has its unique strengths, catering to different needs and expertise levels.

From the above 10 best perspective books, here are the top three expert recommendations:

The book Perspective Made Easy is an ideal option for absolute beginners. Ernest R. Norling's simple and straightforward approach makes understanding and mastering perspective achievable for newcomers to the subject.

How to Draw by Scott Robertson is a good option for intermediate artists, focusing on in-depth concepts and teaching how to draw from your imagination while inventing perspective. This book will help you elevate your skills and polish your techniques.

Lastly, The Art of Perspective: The Ultimate Guide for Artists in Every Medium is the right choice for artists seeking a comprehensive guide. Phil Metzger's book offers an effective combination of easy-to-follow instructions and challenging exercises, accommodating artists of all levels in their journey toward mastery.

No matter the stage of your artistic growth, the perfect perspective book awaits you, ready to help unlock your full potential and spur your creativity to new heights. Happy drawing!

Are you fond of finishing Lego projects but hate when the blocks come apart? Don't worry, we have a solution for you.

Most of us have played with Lego blocks as kids and have good memories attached to them. There must have been times when we really liked a project but couldn't keep it together as the blocks got loose over time.

Luckily, the adhesives industry has advanced since then, and now we have a number of glue options that can bond Lego bricks easily. Having said that, the numerous options can make it challenging to pick the perfect product, especially for newbies.

Therefore, we thought of creating a list with some of the best glue for Legos available on the market to help you out. We have even included a handy buying guide so that you can narrow down your options with ease.

So, without further ado, let's get started.

Listed below are the 5 best glues for Legos from our list:

Gorilla® Super Glue: This glue stands out for its no-mess application due to its thick gel consistency and anti-clog cap, which prolongs its usability. It's fast-drying and the compact bottle design is comfortable to handle, however, using too much can result in visible gaps between Lego blocks.
Loctite® Super Glue: This brand is known for its versatile and durable formula that includes features such as precise application and fast drying. A standout feature is its rubber-toughened glue that remains flexible yet resistant to heavy impact and vibration, though the applicator needs frequent cleaning to prevent clogging.
GLUEMASTERS® Professional-Grade Adhesive: Noted for its industrial-grade formula that works well for various projects including Lego construction. The precise applicator and different viscosity levels make it versatile and highly effective. Use in well-ventilated spaces is recommended due to its strong formulation.
Rhino Glue®: Its fast drying time and clear result make it a great choice for Lego constructions. The extra-strong formulation creates a shock-resistant bond that ensures longevity, yet its strong smell might be off-putting to some users.
Krazy Glue® All-purpose glue: This glue offers a strong bond that remains effective over a long period. The precision applicator allows for a smooth application process, and the stay-fresh container ensures multiple uses. Product quantity in individual packs might be less for bigger projects.

To help keep your Lego masterpieces intact, there are various types of glue available in the market that are specifically designed for use with Legos. But with so many options out there, it can be tough to determine which one to use. That's why we've put together a list of the 7 best glues for Legos, to help you choose the right one for your needs.

1. Gorilla - Best for Precision

Let's start with a brand that most people know — Gorilla, a manufacturer that has consistently produced the best quality adhesives. And if you want glue for permanent Lego constructions, then this product is bound to be a good choice.

There are several things to like about this Gorilla super glue. But, first, we would like to divert your attention toward its consistency. Unlike any other liquid glue, this formula comes in a thick gel, making it easy to apply on vertical and horizontal Lego pieces. That said, the no-mess Gorilla glue makes the application process easy as the glue won't get everywhere.

Another key feature of this glue is its packaging. You can now hold the cleverly designed compact plastic bottle in your hand for long hours while working on an intricate project.

However, what probably stands out the most is the anti-clog cap, which keeps the Gorilla glue from drying out, thus allowing multiple uses with each bottle.

Furthermore, the Gorilla super glue gel takes between ten to forty-five seconds to set, based on the amount of glue used. And, as it gets fully cured in 24 hours, you wouldn't need to wait for days before handling the Lego construction.

Overall, this is one of the best permanent glues for Lego blocks. But, our only concern is that laying down a thick layer of Gorilla glue may leave a visible gap between the blocks. So, you need to be a bit more careful while using the glue and only apply a few drops.

What We Like

Easy to use
Dries transparent
Ideal for intricate projects
Versatile adhesive

What We Don't Like

Thick layer may increase the space between pieces

2. Loctite - Best for Flexibility

For the last 50 years, Loctite has remained a leading brand of permanent glues available on the market. The best thing about this product is its innovative formula that promises versatility and durability. And, as it's widely available from different retailers, you won't have a hard time searching for this super glue.

To begin with, what pulled us towards this product was the packaging. We really liked the bottle design, which is equipped with squeezable sides to make the application process easier. What's more, the sides have grooves to help you maintain a better grip on the bottle. Not to mention how the precise nozzle lets you apply drops of glue even on the tiniest of Lego bricks.

However, the property that truly makes this permanent adhesive a worthy product is its unique formulation. That said, it is a rubber-toughened glue that allows bonds to be flexible while also giving it the ability to resist heavy impact and vibration.

Moreover, this glue dries clear, so you wouldn't need to worry about any traces showing through the Legos, especially between darker-colored pieces. On that note, the transparency provides a seamless look to the blocks when the right amount of glue is applied.

One of our only concerns with this glue is that the product may build up on the applicator if it isn't cleaned after every use. So, you should always remember to wipe off the applicator with a paper towel to prevent it from clogging. Also, refrain from keeping the bottle uncapped for long periods.

What We Like

Easy to dispense
No clamping required
Suitable for vertical Lego surfaces
Fast drying

What We Don't Like

Applicator needs to be cleaned after every use

3. GLUEMASTERS - Best for Industrial Use

Are you in search of a permanent glue that won't lose its bond even after years? If yes, you can try this adhesive from GLUEMASTERS, which boasts an industrial-grade formula. This makes the glue excellent for all kinds of projects, from Lego construction to fixing heavy-duty machines. So, let's check out its features.

If you are a hobbyist who likes to indulge in different projects, it's a must to have this GLUEMASTERS professional-grade adhesive. It comes in various viscosity levels to choose from, but we recommend the thick variant for Legos as it works well for vertical surfaces. Nevertheless, this glue is available in different quantities, including an 80 oz bottle.

However, the best feature of this glue has to be its precise applicator. The nozzle allows you to place the smallest drop of adhesive on the Lego blocks before attaching the plastic pieces. Additionally, the bottles are only filled to two-thirds of the total capacity to give you more control while applying the glue.

Besides its function as a glue for Legos, this professional-grade glue is quite versatile. You can use it to bond materials like rubber, ceramic, wood, metal, and other plastic objects. Needless to say, it's a helpful glue to have in your toolbox.

Although not a dealbreaker, its industrial formulation is only suitable for use in a well-ventilated space. The manufacturer also suggests using protective gear, like gloves and goggles, to keep yourself safe from coming in contact with the glue. Apart from this, we don't have any complaints about this permanent glue.

What We Like

Durable bond
Applicator doesn’t clog
Available in larger sizes
Versatile adhesive for different materials

What We Don't Like

Needs to be used in a well-ventilated area

4. Rhino Glue

Have you been looking for cyanoacrylate-based hobby glues for permanently bonding your Lego construction? If so, this heavy-duty Rhino glue can be an excellent choice to finish the task as fast as possible without the Lego set falling apart. This glue is also part of the Pro series by Rhino, guaranteeing top-notch quality.

Right off the bat, what we liked about this glue was its fast drying time. Notably, the drying time is exceedingly swift compared to other permanent glues. Rhino categorizes this product as a tough-instant glue, and it does live up to the claims. So, while using this product, you won't need to wait for hours as the glue cures within 20 minutes.

Moreover, the Rhino glue dries completely clear. Hence, there's no need to worry about needing to paint over the adhesive to match the color of the Legos. And, as applying a few drops does the job, your Lego bricks won't have a thick layer of glue between them.

Furthermore, one of the critical features of this glue has to be the unique formula that makes it stronger than other glues. Because it's a maximum-strength adhesive, your Lego bricks will remain glued together permanently. Plus, the glue has been toughened to make it shock-resistant and maintain a strong bond under pressure.

When it comes to this glue, the only drawback we found was its strong smell. It can be a bit overwhelming for people who may be averse to the smell of adhesives. So, we recommend wearing a proper mask while using this glue to keep yourself from inhaling it.

What We Like

Strong bond
Easy application method
Dries rapidly
Shock-resistant

What We Don't Like

Strong smell

5. Krazy Glue

If you didn't know already, Krazy Glue comes from the house of Elmer's, so we were really thrilled about trying this product. And, this super glue didn't fail our expectations when it came to gluing together Lego bricks, as it does the job quite smoothly. So, let's learn a bit about its features.

Are you tired of using superglues that seem to lose their bond over time? Don't worry, as Krazy Glue has got you covered. The strong all-purpose bond of this glue helps to keep the blocks attached even after a long time has passed. So, your Lego piece won't suddenly crumble apart after a few weeks after you accomplish the whole building process.

Having said that, for us, the best feature of the Krazy Glue was the applicator which is perfect for attaching Legos, particularly the tiny pieces. The precision tip places a small dab that's enough to give a strong bond. And, as the tube is compact, the application process is pretty smooth.

On top of that, the glue comes in a stay-fresh container, so it remains viable for multiple uses. However, do make sure to cap it properly after every use.

To be honest, this is one of the best glues for Legos that we have tried out. However, our only complaint is that the individual packs have very little product. So, you'll certainly need to buy more than one tube of the Krazy Glue for a bigger Lego art piece.

What We Like

Straightforward application
Strong adhesive
Compact-sized tube
Doesn’t dry out after single use

What We Don't Like

Less quantity

6. Le-Glue Temporary Glue

Did you know that a kid made the Le-Glue non-permanent glue? Yes, this product was designed by Tripp Phillips when he was in the third grade. Unlike the other Lego glues mentioned by us, this one can be safely used by kids to create their own fun Lego projects. So, let's check it out.

First of all, let's focus on the use of the Le-Glue temporary glue. As you can understand, this glue is meant to bond the Legos temporarily. But, that doesn't mean your blocks will fall apart, as this glue from Le-Glue has a hold that's twelve times stronger than other temporary glues.

Moreover, it works for all kinds of building blocks, including Lego, Nano Blocks, and Mega Blocks. You just need to apply a small dab of this temporary glue on one block and press the other block on it for some time to get a reliable bond.

Furthermore, Le-Glue temporary glue comes in a non-toxic and solvent-free formula. And, it's made from all-natural ingredients. So, your kids can safely play with it for as long as they want without facing any health issues.

Plus, it's pretty easy to break the bond of the Le-Glue temporary glue as all you need to do is soak the blocks or project in warm water.

One of the only problems with this product is that the application can quickly get messy, especially for kids. As this glue comes in plastic packaging, you need to pour it into a container before starting your project. However, the good thing is that it's easy to get rid of this glue from your clothes or skin, and it doesn't leave any residue.

What We Like

Easy to use
Cures within 24 hours
Safe for use by kids
Dissolving glue is hassle-free

What We Don't Like

Application can get messy

7. BrickShield

Have you been looking for a semi-permanent glue that's easy to apply? If so, then check out this non-toxic and kid's safe glue from BrickShield that has been designed specifically for Legos. It comes in a handy spray bottle that lets you apply the glue directly on the bricks without needing any applicator.

Straight away, what we liked about this product was the packaging which makes applying the glue pretty easy. Do follow the directions specified by the brand, and you'll be able to glue Legos with precision. A nice thing about the bottle is that the kids face no problems in spraying, and it doesn't hurt their hands.

Moreover, this glue has been specially designed for plastic blocks of all kinds, including Lego. And, it drastically reduces the time needed to glue Legos for elaborate projects because of its fast application.

Another one of the key features of this temporary brick glue is its non-toxic and kid-safe formula. This is rarely seen in aerosol products made for kids, so we were pretty impressed with this adhesive.

Plus, the brand provides a 100% satisfaction guarantee with this spray glue. So, if, for some reason, you're not happy with this product, there's an option to contact customer care to receive a refund.

We would like you to know that this isn't really a drawback that's exclusive to this glue as it's common in all spray glue products. When you spray to apply the glue from a distance, there's bound to be some wastage. This means that it's always better to keep a backup of this glue to avoid running out of it.

What We Like

Ease of application
Dries and cures quickly
Glue washes off easily with soap and water
Dissolves in warm water

What We Don't Like

Does have wastage

What is the Best Glue For Legos?

This section provides a straightforward comparison of leading glues for Legos. The table below outlines key Lego adhesive specifications, including type, cure time, bond strength, heat resistance, gap-filling capability, viscosity, and waterproofing.

Product	Type	Cure Time	Bond Strength	Heat Resistance	Gap Filling	Viscosity	Waterproof
Gorilla	Cyanoacrylate	10-30 sec.	High	No	No	Gel	No
Loctite	Epoxy	5 Minutes	High	Yes (up to 300°F)	Yes	Thick	Yes
GLUEMASTERS	Cyanoacrylate	5-15 sec.	High	No	No	Thin	No
Rhino Glue	Cyanoacrylate	10-30 sec.	High	No	Yes	Thin	Yes
Krazy Glue	Cyanoacrylate	10-30 sec.	High	No	No	Thin	No
Le-Glue Temporary Glue	Temporary	N/A	Low	No	No	Thick	No
BrickShield	Silicone	24 Hours	Medium	Yes (up to 500°F)	Yes	Thick	Yes

Buying Guide for the Best Glue for Legos

When choosing the best glue for Legos, you need to know some essential points that'll help to make the right decision. As gluing the Legos is often based on specific projects, skipping any points may leave you with completely unusable glue. So, let's check out these key points.

1. Viscosity

One of the most important features to look for in glue is its viscosity. A thin consistency may prove to be challenging while gluing Legos as it may cause the blocks to slide around. Hence, it's better to opt for glue with thick viscosity or a gel texture for attaching the Legos easily.

Moreover, thicker glues are easier to apply on vertical surfaces. As Lego projects can have a mix of vertical and horizontal planes, opting for glues with thick viscosity proves to be an excellent choice. And it makes the process less messy.

2. Permanence

Would you like the Lego set to have a permanent bond? If so, it's best to choose a glue that comes with the capacity to bond the surfaces permanently. While choosing a permanent glue, make sure to handle your Lego construction properly before it cures properly.

However, while researching the glue for Legos, we found out that some people prefer semi-permanent or non-permanent glue. These options are better to display the completed project for a certain period. It also leaves you with the choice to dismantle the Lego structure whenever needed.

On that note, while choosing a non-permanent or temporary adhesive, don't forget to check the process of breaking the bonds. Typically, the glues are water-soluble and dissolve in warm water, but some may require the application of certain chemicals to come off the Legos entirely.

3. Curing Time

Another point to check while looking for the best glue for Legos is the curing time. As you may know, there's a wait time for most glues when it comes to handling the pieces after attaching them. In the case of Legos, we want it to be as fast as possible to avoid detaching the pieces.

Now, the cure time or the total time taken for the glue to dry is usually between 24-48 hours, depending on the brand and consistency of the adhesives. Superglues take the least time, while white glue takes the longest. So, make sure not to forget about the curing time while ordering your Lego glue.

4. Ease Of Application

On searching for how to glue Legos, a common suggestion you'll notice tells you to look for a suitable glue. And, that's why it's important to choose a Lego glue that comes with ease of application.

You don't want it to be too messy, as it can make working with small blocks frustrating. At the same time, try to find a product with a precise applicator to avoid using too much glue.

Having said that, the application technique does vary depending on the project, so try to find a product that fits your demands from the adhesive.

Can glue be used on all types of Legos?

Most Lego types, such as regular and Duplo Legos, can be bonded with glue. Nevertheless, ascertain that the glue implemented is compatible with the plastic material constituting your Legos for seamless application.

How do I remove glue from Legos?

The process of glue removal from Legos can prove problematic, with the potential for damage to the plastic. Usage of a solvent like acetone or nail polish remover is a common approach, but caution is advised as these substances could render the plastic brittle.

Can I take apart Legos after using glue?

Taking apart glued Legos is typically not feasible, as the glue tends to create a permanent bond. Thus, you’re advised to think carefully before deciding whether to permanently adhere your Legos together using glue.

Is glue safe to use on Legos?

Applying glue to Legos is perfectly safe, however, it’s crucial to use glue explicitly designed for Lego use. This ensures the adhesive won't inflict damage to the plastic, maintaining its structural integrity.

Tower air conditioners often deliver better airflow when compared to regular air conditioners due to their narrow, tower-like design. They are usually placed on a round base that enables them to circulate air uniformly at 90 degrees.

With summers getting hotter and longer due to global warming, it’s becoming increasingly difficult to bear the summer heat. And what's worse than an exhausting summer day? Lack of a functional HVAC system.

To help you out, I have compiled a list of the nine best tower air conditioners to keep your room cool and save you from high power bills.

Listed below are the 5 best tower air conditioners from our list:

Air Choice Swamp Cooler: This product stands out for its double water tanks and bladeless fans, making it not only efficient in cooling larger rooms but also child-safe and easy to clean; moreover, its built-in timer and energy-efficient feature contribute to cost-saving.
VAGKRI Portable Air Conditioner: This air conditioner shines because of its instant cooling feature and in-built temperature sensors, making it the best choice for quick and efficient cooling; additionally, it comes with an LED control panel and an energy-saving eco-mode, enhancing user experience and energy efficiency.
Dreo Evaporative Air Cooler: Ideal for spacious areas, this air cooler excels with its multi-layer cooling mechanism and 80-degree oscillating fan blades, providing extensive and efficient cooling; its easy-to-clean design and adaptive humidifier feature amplifies its desirability.
TRUSTECH Evaporative Cooler: This cooler distinguishes itself for its energy efficiency, wide-angle cooling, and quiet function; its safe design, multi-functional oscillating fan, and timer add to the overall user comfort, making it the top choice for reducing power consumption without compromising on performance.
Paris Rhône Evaporative Cooler: As a multi-functional product, this cooler provides effective cooling with its 3-in-1 function, large water tank, and variety of fan speeds; accompanied by a 15-hour programmable timer and user-friendly settings, it offers exceptional operational convenience.

Here's the list of the 9 best tower air conditioners, designed to deliver better airflow and combat the scorching summer heat while keeping your energy costs in check.

1. Air Choice Swamp Cooler - Best For Greater Coverage

What I Like

Bladeless fans
Budget-friendly
Energy-efficient
In-built timer
Cools larger rooms

What I Don't Like

Faint water-level indicator

Air Choice designed the Swamp cooler with double water tanks to cater to a wide variety of people. This feature makes the product the best tower air conditioner for pregnant women and senior citizens, enabling them to enjoy the cool breeze.

You don't have to worry about those extra hot days. Add two ice boxes to each of the tanks, and the cooler will cool the warm air in no time. The air conditioning unit is a 43-inch tall cooler with 20-inch air outlets to handle larger wind coverage.

This portable AC also features oscillation, which further enables it to cool larger living rooms with ease. And if you wish to use it at night, you can set a timer on the cooler, after which it will turn off automatically. The shortest timer is an hour, and the longest is 12 hours, giving you sufficient time to cool the room without using it all night.

But if you're worried about catching a cold from prolonged use, the cooler does not filter cool air consistently, so this possibility is minimal. It is also energy efficient so that you can say goodbye to expensive power bills.

What makes this product one of the best portable air conditioners is its versatility, and it is also safe to use around kids. The fans do not comprise any blades, and you don't have to worry about your child getting injured. This also makes the fan much easier to clean and maintain, thus prolonging its lifespan.

Item weight: 16.17 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 60 watts | Special Features: Oscillating and bladeless

2. VAGKRI Portable Air Conditioner - Best For Instant Cooling

What I Like

Instant cooling
Wide-angle airflow
In-built temperature sensors
24-hour timer
Readable LED control panel

What I Don't Like

Loud compressor

The VAGKRI portable air conditioner is multi-functional with a maximum airflow of 350 m/hour. This makes it easier for the portable AC to cool down hot air in large rooms in an instant. Its cooling features make this one of the best portable air conditioners for harsh summer days since it cools the room faster.

This portable air conditioner has three different settings: cool, dehumidifier, and fan mode, all of which provide dehumidification and ventilation. The product also features in-built temperature sensors that keep the overall temperature in check to cool a room accordingly.

Additionally, it comes with a Smart Eco mode and Auto mode that prove handy when the portable air conditioner is switched on for prolonged periods. This also minimizes your energy consumption and reduces the overall power bill.

The fan comprises three-speed settings along with auto-swing fan blades that cool a room in all directions. It also has an impressive 80-degree wide-angle airflow that can be adjusted to ensure air is flowing evenly throughout the room. Moreover, the LED panels are designed to be readable, even in dark rooms and from a distance.

When you don't want to get out of your bed or couch to turn the cooler on or off, you can use the remote that comes with the air conditioner. The remote control allows you to set a timer, with the maximum time being 24 hours, for a comfortable experience.

Plus, these portable AC units can be transported from your living room to your bedroom with the help of 4 universal wheels on it.

Item weight: 63.1 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 1,200 watts | Special Features: Auto-mode, 3-in-1 mode, and LED touch control

3. Dreo Evaporative Air Cooler - Best Oscillating AC

What I Like

Powerful cooling systems
Optimized impeller wheels
Easy cleaning and maintenance
Adaptive humidifier
Little to no compressor noise

What I Don't Like

Priced high

The Dreo portable air conditioner can cool any corner of the floor space, irrespective of how far away it is. Delivering 1,300 RPM, this air cooler is a powerful machine to keep your home cool during hot days. The British Thermal Units (BTU) stands at 12000

It also comprises 80-degree oscillating fan blades that blow cool air in all directions, complemented by its multi-layer cooling mechanism. With an optimized impeller wheel and a cooling pad, the portable AC allows more airflow, which can be beneficial for extra humid and hot rooms. Generally, the airflow volume ranges up to 13,000 cubic feet per hour.

Cleaning a tower air conditioner can be a challenging task, but with the Dreo cooler, this process is much easier. The cooler's water tank is detachable and can be removed from the portable AC for cleaning.

Additionally, you can remove the cooling and rear grille to ensure that it is dust and debris-free. This keeps the air coming out clean and safe while prolonging the product's life due to regular maintenance.

In terms of comfort, this is the best portable air conditioner and passes the dry, warm air through the damp cooling pad, which ultimately absorbs the heat. As a result, the air that is circulated back into the room is much cooler and lowers the humidity levels.

You can also use the fan-only mode during the night since it is designed to be extremely quiet.

Item weight: 13.2 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 50 watts | Special Features: Remote controlled, bladeless, oscillating, timer

4. TRUSTECH Evaporative Cooler - Best Energy-Efficient Cooler

What I Like

Safe Design
Energy-efficient
Wide-angle cooling
Oscillating fan
Quiet functioning

What I Don't Like

Maintenance is cumbersome

The TRUSTECH is the best portable air conditioner with an all-in-1 system that can be used as is or like an evaporative air cooler. It comprises a water curtain system that contains tanks with a capacity of 2 liters, along with two ice boxes. This allows the product to deliver efficient cooling and air circulation in a room size of up to 120 square footage.

Moreover, it absorbs the humidity in the air and helps achieve a comfortable temperature. The multi-functional oscillating fan also has 70 degrees of oscillation and can cool down large areas with high ceilings in no time. For better cooling, the air conditioners come with three different cooling modes(normal, natural, and sleep) as well as three different speeds (low, medium, and high).

If you plan on using the portable AC when you go to bed, you can set a timer for up to 8 hours. And you don't have to worry about any noises from the cooler as it is designed to be ultra-quiet. In terms of energy efficiency, TRUSTECH portable air conditioners are an affordable way to cool your room since they use less energy to function.

It is much more environment-friendly and can further reduce your power bills if placed near a window. It even reduces overall power consumption by 50% and ensures your home can stay cool without burning your pocket.

The product is lightweight and portable, so you can move your cooler from one place to another without any trouble. It is also bladeless and you won't have any safety concerns, especially when children operate it.

Item weight: 11.97 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 65 watts | Special Features: Oscillation, bladeless, energy-efficient

5. Paris Rhône Evaporative Cooler - Best Multi-functional Cooler

What I Like

3-in-1 cooling system
Large 6L water tank
Four fan speeds
15 hours programmable timer
User-friendly settings

What I Don't Like

Loud fan noises

The Paris Rhône Portable air conditioner is a device that has all 3, fan, humidifier, and cooler, in one product. This 3-in-1 function along with the oscillating fans, keeps your room extremely cool and comfortable even in dry climates. It also regulates the humidity in the air, maximizes airflow, and lets out a cool, calming breeze, all with the help of a single portable AC.

To access the cool mode, all you have to do is use the ice packs that are provided or add cold water to the tank. This, in turn, enhances the cooler's cooling power and allows it to produce quick and large quantities of cool air that lowers the room temperature and provides relief.

The fan blades have an oscillation of 80 degrees and comprise 19-inch extra-long air outlets that can blow air across the room with a velocity of 25 square feet. This not only ensures maximum coverage but also allows you to stay cool even if you're seated at the opposite corner of the room.

The 6-liter water tank capacity makes this device a great portable air conditioner for prolonged use without needing refilling at frequent intervals. Additionally, you can adjust the fan speeds up to 4 different degrees and use any of the three wind modes included. If you wish to use the air cooler when you go to bed, you can set a timer for up to 15 hours.

These additional features can be accessed through the user-friendly control panel situated at the top of the device. And if you're a little too comfortable in your bed or couch to do that, simply use the provided remote to change the settings.

Item weight: 30 pounds | Number of speeds: 4 | Wattage: 65 watts | Special Features: 3-in-1 cooler, 80-degree oscillation, four wind speeds, 19-inch air outlet

6. Balko Portable Evaporative Cooler - Best Allergy-Friendly Cooler

What we like

Lightweight
Allergy-friendly
Portable ACs
Six wind effects
Removable cartridges

What I Don't Like

The water tank has to be refilled often

An energy-efficient cooling system that can dehumidify the room is a mandatory requirement in every house. This is where Blako, one of the best portable air conditioners, comes into play. All you need to do is pour some water into the device's water tank, and you're good to go. For more intense cooling, you can add a couple of frozen ice boxes, which enhances the cooling effect.

This portable AC is beneficial if you have larger living rooms since it is a windowless air conditioner. Additionally, its 70-degree vertical and horizontal oscillation further ensures your better-moving air and that your room can stay cool no matter how large it is. The cooler comes with two different modes (natural and cooling) and three (low, medium, and high) fan speeds. However, what makes this product different is its six wind effects that you can control according to your needs.

The Balko cooler is by far the lightest cooler compared to other models, and its exterior linear design adds to its lightweight nature. Unlike other portable ACs, these portable air conditioners comprise an A4-sized body, which takes up little to no space in your room.

To add to the portability factor, the portable ACs have 360-degree wheels on all four ends, which makes moving around much easier. If you require functional portable ACs that can not only cool your home efficiently but also look good with your furniture, this is the product for you.

The cooler also consists of a thick cartridge that purifies and allows you to breathe fresh air. Additionally, these cartridges are removable and can be washed to ensure safety. This feature, particularly, can be pretty helpful for people with allergies pertaining to dust and certain bacteria.

Item weight: 10.36 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 60 watts | Special Features: Adjustable speed, Auto shut-off

7. Costway Portable Evaporative Cooler - Best For Low-Noise Operation

What I Like

Easy to operate
Smart touch display
Silent functioning
Personalized cooling effects
Bladeless and stable design

What I Don't Like

The timer limit is 9 hours
Ice boxes can be hard to remove

With a 7-degree oscillating function, the Costway portable air conditioner provides even and effective airflow control throughout the room. For further enhanced cooling, you can use the evaporative cooler along with an HVAC system or central air conditioner, which can not only save energy but also increase the effect of cooling. The device comprises three wind modes as well as three fan speeds to choose from.

The modes range from natural, normal, and sleep, whereas the speed settings range from low, medium, and high. This way, you can personalize the cooler to your preferred settings and enjoy efficient cooling effects. To access the cooling system, all you have to do is add some water to the tank and press the "cooling" button. This will let out a stream of cool air along with regulated humidity that can make you feel comfortable.

Though this is a powerful air conditioning unit, it runs pretty slow and quiet, with a noise level of less than 45 DB, close to white noise. This ensures you get a good night's rest without being woken up by sweat or loud compressor noises. Additionally, to further improve your sleep, you can set a timer for the cooler to turn off. This cools the room in such a way that you can go to bed in a thoroughly cooled room. The maximum timer setting is, however, 9 hours.

Costway is one of the best portable air conditioners since they are relatively user-friendly, with smart touch panels, an LED display, and a remote control. And if you're worried about using the cooler near your kids or pets, you can do so without worry thanks to its bladeless design. To improve safety, the air conditioning unit comprises a stable round base that prevents any tumbling over.

Item weight: 11 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 45 watts | Special Features: Portable units, lightweight, bladeless, oscillating

8. HIFRESH Evaporative Air Cooler - Best Personalized Cooling Effects

What I Like

Personalized Cooling
Functional remote controls
User-friendly
12-hour programmable timer
Noiseless functioning

What I Don't Like

Unclear water-level marker

An economical solution to cooling your living space is needed, and the HIFRESH evaporative cooler provides just that. This 80W portable air conditioner allows your room to cool in less than 3 seconds so that you can say goodbye to those extra hot, sweaty days. It can also be used alongside a central air conditioner for optimal cooling. Additionally, it does not require any exhaust hoses or windows to be installed.

This mode enables you to get sound, comfortable sleep without waking up from loud, cooler noises. To further ensure sound sleep, you can set a timer up to 12 hours before bed and wake up feeling comfortable and refreshed.

These portable ACs feature an upgraded motor that blows gentle air into your room and regulates humidity as well as airflow. And don't worry about getting out of bed or the couch to change the settings. You can simply use the remote control that is equipped with the cooler. This remote has a sensitive response and ultra-long sensing distance so you can be comfortable in every aspect.

However, what makes this product different is its personalized cooling effects. With modes such as normal, nature, sleep, and cool, you can personalize the cooling effect in any way you want. Additionally, the fan comprises three speeds, which further increases the personalization aspect. Be it for a casual day, a powerful breeze, an after-workout break, or hot summer days, you can customize the cooling effects accordingly.

Item weight: 12.82 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 80 watts | Special Features: Dual control, 12-hour timer, oscillation, 1-Gallon water tank

9. TRUSTECH Portable Air Cooler - Best For Easy Storage

What I Like

Compact design
Lightweight and portable
Rapid cooling
Bladeless
Swing function

What I Don't Like

Complicated controls

The TRUSTECH is a 3-in-1 portable air conditioner that is bladeless and comes with the latest cooling technology. So, you can bid adieu to those hot summer days and warm air. These portable air conditioners can be used either as a fan or for humidification purposes, which can cool down and humidify the air in just 5 seconds. They can also be used alongside a central air conditioner for better cooling.

Apart from the impressive cooling power, this product is extremely safe to use and child/pet friendly. Since these portable ACs are bladeless, you won't have to worry about your toddler or pet getting hurt accidentally, especially when you're not around. Furthermore, it is designed to not blow dust into the environment, thus making it a more environmentally sustainable alternative compared to other models of air conditioning.

The fan covers a large portion of your room and dissipates cool air to each and every corner, even if it has high ceilings. This is made possible by its swing function, which directs air in various directions. In terms of customization, this portable air conditioner offers three-speed settings that you can choose based on your needs.

The timer on the fan can be set to a maximum of 8 hours, which results in a significant reduction in your overall energy consumption and power bill. This timer feature also lets you get a good night's rest without having to wake up in the middle to turn the fan off. It can also be cleaned relatively quickly with the help of a soft cloth.

However, what makes it stand out is its compact form. This smaller unit is easier to store away when not in use and move around if and when needed.

Item weight: 14.77 pounds | Number of speeds: 3 | Wattage: 65 watts | Special Features: Portable, Bladeless, Compact

What is the Best Tower Air Conditioner?

This section presents a comparison of leading tower air conditioners. The table below outlines essential product specifications, including item weight, number of speeds, wattage, and special features

Tower Air Conditioners	Item Weight	Number of Speeds	Wattage	Special Features
Air Choice Swamp Cooler	16.17 pounds	3	60 watts	Oscillating and bladeless
VAGKRI Portable Air Conditioner	63.1 pounds	3	1,200 watts	Auto-mode, 3-in-1 mode, and LED touch control
Dreo Evaporative Air Cooler	13.2 pounds	3	50 watts	Remote-controlled, bladeless, oscillating, timer
R.W. Flame Portable Air Cooler	15 pounds	3	70 watts	Bladeless, three cooling modes, In-built ionizer
TRUSTECH Evaporative Cooler	11.97 pounds	3	65 watts	Oscillation, bladeless, energy-efficient
Paris Rhône Evaporative Cooler	30 pounds	4	65 watts	3-in-1 cooler, 80-degree oscillation, four wind speeds, 19-inch air outlet
Balko Portable Evaporative Cooler	10.36 pounds	3	60 watts	Adjustable speed, Auto shut-off
Costway Portable Evaporative Cooler	11 pounds	3	45 watts	Portable units, lightweight, bladeless, oscillating
HIFRESH Evaporative Air Cooler	12.82 pounds	3	80 watts	Dual control, 12-hour timer, oscillation, 1-gallon water tank
Laluztop Portable Air Conditioner	11.73 pounds	3	70 watts	3-in-1 cooling system, Oscillation, Eco-friendly
TRUSTECH Portable Air Cooler	14.77 pounds	3	65 watts	Portable, Bladeless, Compact

Buying Guide For The Best Tower Air Conditioner

Before you get a tower air conditioning unit, there are some factors you have to consider to ensure you get a product based on your needs. These factors include:

Blades vs. Bladeless

Though tower air conditioners look much more complicated than a regular fan with a circular head, both these portable air conditioners rely on blades. Even the most popular bladeless fan, like the Dyson Tower fan, still has blades.

The only reason you cannot see them is that they are covered in a casement. However, these blades aren't as prominent as regular blades, which means they do not need constant cleaning. And even if you do clean, it can be done so easily unlike regular fans where it can be cumbersome to reach each individual blade.

Apart from the occasional, slight noise levels from the fan, you may hear squealing noises, especially when the air conditioning unit is switched on. This is a sign that your device is in need of repair or further maintenance to function smoothly.

Sound Output

This is an especially important factor to consider when you're using a tower air conditioner for your bedroom. You can pay attention to the decibel rating of the unit since it corresponds to noise levels that the device omits. Generally, people opt for coolers and fans with a maximum decibel rate of 50 and 60 decibels. This noise level is quite similar to that of a normal conversation or white noise. If the air conditioning system is any louder than this, it can be too distracting.

CFM Rating

CFM or cubic feet meter is what determines how well a fan can maneuver air in the room. When the CFM ratings are higher, it generally means they do a better job at moving the air. However, do remember to take into consideration the oscillation of the fan. Fan blades oscillate, which further help the portable AC units dissipate air evenly throughout the room instead of in a single direction.

Oscillation

Oscillation determines how the airflow is distributed throughout the room. CFM generally measures the strength of the airflow, whereas oscillation ensures that the air is dissipated in more than just a particular direction. Though most fans come preoccupied with oscillation, consider the supported oscillation angle, the overall length of the tower's fan portion, and the number of grates provided.

Additional Features

To make the air conditioning more intuitive, tower fans come equipped with several additional features. The most common ones are two fan speeds or more, oscillating, swing, and static positioning modes, as well as added air purifiers and dehumidifiers.

If you plan on using the air conditioning generally during night-time, you'll need a timer and remote control options. Additionally, you would also need a fan that has a night mode and does not have bright LED displays that cannot be turned off.

Are tower air conditioner units considered portable?

Tower air conditioners are differentiated from portable air conditioners as they consist of two units, one situated inside and the other outside. The external unit is devised to disperse warm air outward and is linked to the internal unit via a conduit. The mobility of a tower air conditioner is consequently limited by the length of the connecting hose.

Do tower air conditioners outperform air coolers?

Indeed, tower air conditioners generally outshine air coolers due to their design resembling a tower and their high structure fostering improved airflow. Moreover, their placement on a revolving base enables them to disseminate air throughout a room at a 90-degree angle. In addition to that, they exhibit an attractive and stylish outlook, adding a pleasing touch to indoor decoration.

How do tower air conditioners operate?

Tower air conditioners incorporate cooling towers, which employ evaporative cooling to diminish the temperature of a continuous water stream. Cooling towers are devised in a large box-like structure to maximize evaporation, attributed to the presence of materials such as PVC plastic sheets internally. These sheets amplify the surface area, boosting evaporation and thereby enhancing cooling.

What are the various types of cooling towers used in air conditioners?

Three principal types of cooling towers utilized in air conditioners, categorized based on their passage of water or air, include crossflow, counterflow, and hyperbolic towers. Furthermore, two additional types of cooling towers are delineated according to the airflow: passive draft and induced draft.

Which cooling tower is deemed the most efficient?

Among cooling towers, counterflow systems are considered the most effective as they utilize induced draft technology. Contrarily, crossflow systems employ forced draft towers to distribute water at 90-degree angles to the airflow, whereas counterflow systems disseminate water in direct correspondence to the airflow.

CR123A batteries have become a primary power source for wireless devices and various home devices such as alarm systems. Since CR123A batteries are extremely compact and powerful, they fit easily in all types of alarm systems.

Nowadays, many alarm manufacturers are making alarm sensors and systems that run on CR123A batteries.

Notably, alarm systems that use standalone batteries don’t require any wired connection. As such, you can easily place them wherever you want without any hassle. Besides, CR123A batteries can be used by many appliances, such as web cameras, smart doorbells, and others.

So, in this guide, we have listed some of the best CR123A batteries for alarm systems on the market. So, let’s begin!

Listed below are the 5 best CR123A batteries from our list:

Duracell CR123A 3V Lithium Battery: This lithium battery stands out with a 10-year shelf life and compatibility with a variety of wireless devices, besides being offered by a trusted brand.
Panasonic Lithium 3V Batteries: These affordable, efficient batteries by Panasonic feature a 10-year shelf life and are versatile enough to support most household appliances.
Voniko CR123A Lithium Batteries: Known for their robust safety measures and leak-free design, these batteries also offer operation in extreme temperatures and are environmentally friendly.
Rapthor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries: These high-capacity batteries provide more power than regular batteries; they feature overheat and overcurrent protection, carry a 10-year shelf life, and come with a one-year free replacement guarantee.
AHJ Cr123A 3V Lithium Battery: Providing a stable output for high-current appliances, these batteries outperform regular alkaline batteries by lasting three to five times longer and come with multiple layers of protection.

1. Duracell CR123A 3V Lithium Battery

Duracell is one of the most trusted brands on the list since it designs some of the best batteries in the industry. The Duracell CR123A 3V lithium battery is designed to be compatible with a wide range of wireless devices, such as lighting equipment, wireless sensors, alarm sensors, security systems, photography devices, etc.

In addition, it has a shelf life of 10 years, which is rare to find in modern batteries. As such, you can easily store extra units for a long period without having to worry about them getting spoiled.

Another thing worth noting is that the batteries come in packages of 1, 2, 4, 6, and 12. Thus, you can stock up as much as you want for emergencies. Also, the battery comes in a standard battery size which makes it a universal power source.

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1550 | Voltage: 3

2. Panasonic Lithium 3V Batteries

If you are looking for something affordable and efficient, then you should try the Panasonic BAT002 3V lithium batteries. Apart from making batteries, Panasonic also designs various household appliances such as TVs, air conditioners, music systems, and many more. The ultimate goal of the brand is to bring a smile to every customer’s face through innovative and high-performance products.

The Panasonic BAT002 3V Lithium batteries have an average shell life of 10 years, so you can store them for future use. Moreover, each battery is capable of delivering 3.0 volts and has a size of 0.67” Dia X 1.36” H, making it compatible with most household appliances. The brand also offers a reliable after-sales service if you face any problems while using the batteries.

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1400 | Voltage: 3

3. Voniko CR123A Lithium Batteries

The Voniko CR123A lithium batteries come in a pack of 6, with each battery weighing around 3.84 ounces. One of the things we liked about these batteries is the RoHS certification. As such, each battery has PTC protection, circuit overcurrent protection, and an intelligent voltage surge safeguard to prevent accidents. This also protects your home appliances from getting destroyed.

Another handy feature of these batteries is the leak-free design. Therefore, you can store them anywhere without having to worry about them leaking in the future. Besides, the batteries can operate in extreme temperatures ranging from -40℉ to 140℉. Plus, the battery is environmentally friendly since it lasts longer and doesn’t cause any environmental hazards.

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1500 | Voltage: 3

4. Rapthor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries

Next on our list is Rapthor, a brand that specializes in producing high-capacity batteries. Each CR123A 3V lithium battery has a high capacity of 1650mAh, which is more than a regular battery can offer. As such, it can deliver 10% more power than a normal battery. Apart from that, the batteries have an in-built PTC protection design which prevents the batteries from getting damaged by overheating and overcurrent.

The batteries also have a low discharge rate which gives them a shelf life of 10 years. Thus, you can easily store extra units for future use. However, you must ensure to store them in the right temperature condition given by the brand.

Unlike most brands that don’t offer a warranty for the battery, Rapthor offers a one-year free replacement if the batteries show any defect. You can also ask for a refund if you are unsatisfied with the product.

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1650 | Voltage: 3

5. AHJ Cr123A 3V Lithium Battery

AHJ CR123A batteries have one of the most steady voltage curves when it comes to delivering stable power for high-current home appliances and devices. As such, the batteries last three to five times longer than regular alkaline batteries. Besides, they are compatible with a wide range of appliances such as medical equipment, toys, smoke detectors, alarm systems, digital cameras, and more.

Each battery comes with multiple layers of protection which protects them from overheating, overpressure, and over-voltage. They also offer protection against corrosion, leakage, and explosion, making them safe for long-term use.

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1600 | Voltage: 3

6. Enegitech CR123A Non-Rechargeable Batteries

Enegitech is an eco-friendly brand that produces reliable power sources that don’t cause any harm to the environment. Each battery has a capacity of 1600mAh, which is more than a standard battery can offer. The low self-discharge feature ensures that the cell doesn’t discharge quickly while storing them. This further ensures that the batteries last longer without losing any power.

Apart from that, the battery has a smart protection chip that provides advanced protection against power surges and overheating. The brand also offers a small family comic on the packaging, which provides interesting facts about the batteries through funny images and jokes.

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1600 | Voltage: 3

7. EEMB CR123A Batteries

EEMB is a well-known battery manufacturer that has provided some of the best battery and power solutions since 1995. It designs a wide range of products ranging from lithium batteries to rechargeable batteries. In fact, EEMB is one of the best battery manufacturers on the global market.

The batteries have a reliable shelf life of 10 years without having a memory effect. This ensures that batteries don’t lose much power while staying ideal. Besides, each battery has received a UL certification, making them safe for household use. Additionally, the batteries have a high energy density core which allows them to deliver three to five times more power than regular alkaline batteries.

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1700 | Voltage: 3

8. Bevigor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries

Bevigor CR123A 3V lithium batteries have a capacity of 1500 mAh, which makes them ideal for various power-intensive home appliances such as security systems, flashlights, and many more. In fact, these batteries can last five times longer than normal alkaline batteries. Apart from that, the batteries have a self-discharge rate of less than 2% per year.

As such, the batteries will have plenty of power to spare even if you use them after a couple of years or so. Similarly, the new winding structure ensures that the batteries are protected against corrosion and leaking.

Type: Lithium Ion | mAh: 1500 | Voltage: 3

What is the Best CR123A Battery for Alarm Systems?

This section presents a comprehensive comparison of the top-performing CR123A batteries tailored for alarm systems. The ensuing table gives you each product specification such as battery type, milliampere-hour (mAh) rating, and voltage specifications.

Product	Type	mAh	Voltage
Duracell CR123A 3V Lithium Battery	Lithium Ion	1550 mAh	3 volts
Panasonic Lithium 3V Batteries	Lithium Ion	1400 mAh	3 volts
Voniko CR123A Lithium Batteries	Lithium Ion	1500 mAh	3 volts
Rapthor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries	Lithium Ion	1650 mAh	3 volts
AHJ Cr123A 3V Lithium Battery	Lithium Ion	1600 mAh	3 volts
Enegitech CR123A Non-Rechargeable Batteries	Lithium Ion	1600 mAh	3 volts
EEMB CR123A Batteries	Lithium Ion	1700 mAh	3 volts
Bevigor CR123A 3V Lithium Batteries	Lithium Ion	1500 mAh	3 volts
Streamlight CR123A Lithium Batteries	Lithium Ion	1500 mAh	3 volts
Westinghouse CR123A Industrial Lithium Batteries	Lithium Ion	1300 mAh	3 volts

CR123A Batteries For Alarm Systems Buying Guide

Nowadays, most household electronic products and modern gadgets are dependent on CR123A batteries since they are a portable power source. Some devices that require CR123A batteries are music players, cameras, high-density flashlights, and home security systems. Moreover, these batteries are extremely efficient and capable of delivering high performance while being small and compact.

However, each battery type delivers a different performance, which makes it tough to choose the right one for the alarm system. As such, we have listed a few factors that can help you find the best batteries according to your requirements.

1. Battery Life

While choosing CR123A batteries for the alarm system, you should always ensure that they are durable and have long battery life. Most brands provide all the necessary information related to the battery life on the packaging. As such, you should always check the packaging to see which brand offers a longer battery life.

A longer-lasting battery is not only durable but also great value for money since you don’t have to replace it frequently. One of the best ways to check a battery life is to see the power rating score on the packaging. Batteries with high power rating scores can serve a longer lifespan without causing any hazard or harm to your home appliance.

In fact, some devices mention which power rating score batteries they require to run efficiently. For example, high power rating CR123A batteries are ideal for Arlo cameras. Thus, you should always choose the one that is compatible with your device.

2. Affordability

Apart from being durable and long-lasting, you should ensure that the batteries are affordable. If the brand sets a high price for the batteries, you might not be able to purchase multiple batteries for your home appliances and electronic products. Nevertheless, you should never compromise by purchasing a cheaper battery with a poor power rating or short battery life.

But, if a brand offers more units for a slightly lower capacity, you take the deal since you can power more devices through one set of batteries. The excess batteries that are left out can be stored and used later on when old batteries run out. Such sets are actually more affordable since you can purchase a bunch of batteries at an affordable price.

3. Shelf Life

Another important factor to consider is the shelf life of the battery. This is especially important if you are planning to store excess batteries for a longer period. In general, CR123A batteries are well known for having a long shelf life since they don’t go out easily. As such, the backup supplies can stay ideal on the shelf for about 10 years or so.

In addition, high-capacity batteries are capable of lasting for a decade without having any drops in performance. On that note, it is advisable to check the shelf life of the batteries if you are planning to stock them for a long time. Some brands even offer rechargeable batteries, but they tend to be a bit more expensive than regular CR123A batteries.

Just ensure that the excess units are stored in a cool and dry area since excess heat and humidity can damage the cells within the battery.

4. Eco-Friendly Design

Lastly, you should always consider purchasing an eco-friendly product that doesn’t harm or cause any harmful pollution. Most brands prefer to design eco-friendly batteries since they cause less pollution and help to bring down e-waste significantly. Instead of purchasing use-and-throw batteries, you can always opt for rechargeable batteries that can last for a long time.

Normally, a regular dead battery contains harmful chemicals such as lead, lithium, cadmium, and more, which can be hazardous to your health as well as the environment. Fortunately, a lot of brands are now shifting to more sustainable and eco-friendly alternatives.

What is a CR123A battery?

A CR123A battery is a type of lithium primary battery commonly used in photographic equipment, flashlights, and home security systems due to its high energy output and long shelf life.

What appliances use CR123A batteries?

CR123A batteries are commonly used in a variety of devices such as cameras, flashlights, smoke detectors, alarm systems, and various medical equipment.

How long does a CR123A battery last?

The lifespan of a CR123A battery can vary depending on usage, but on average, it tends to have a shelf life of 10 years.

Are CR123A batteries rechargeable?

Typical CR123A batteries are not rechargeable. However, there is a rechargeable version of this battery known as an RCR123A or a 16340 battery. Always ensure the device can accommodate rechargeable versions before use to avoid damage.

What is the voltage output of a CR123A battery?

A standard CR123A battery outputs 3 volts.

Can different brand CR123A batteries be mixed in a device?

It is generally not recommended to mix batteries of different brands, types, or levels of charge in a device, as this might lead to leakage or damage.

What makes a battery like the Rapthor CR123A stand out?

The Rapthor CR123A stands out due to its high capacity of 1650mAh, which delivers more power than a standard battery, and its built-in protection design against overheating and overcurrent.

What are the safety measures for using CR123A batteries?

When using CR123A batteries, one should avoid short-circuiting, disassembling, or disposing of them in fire to prevent potential hazards. Also, brands like Voniko and AHJ CR123A batteries provide additional safety features like protection against overheating, overpressure, and over-voltage.

One classic way to make your living space more elegant is by hanging up some photos on the wall.

It may be family photos or some paintings by a local artist. In any case, what you want is to put the frames in the correct manner. You want the frames to be leveled correctly and evenly.

Now the task at hand may be trickier than you’d imagine. And when you are renovating your entire living place, and have dozens of photos to put up around the house, it can quickly escalate to a cumbersome job.

What makes this job a little more convenient are laser levels. These devices make level checking an extremely straightforward job. You won’t ever need to walk back after putting up a frame, tilt your head, and judge if it’s put the right way. Laser levels will make sure that the job is done perfectly every time.

But laser levels come in several varieties and it can be a difficult job to get the right one. Don’t sweat it though because we’ve come up with some of the best laser levels in the market for you!

Let’s get started, shall we?

Listed below are the 5 best best laser levels from our list:

Bosch GLL 1P Laser Level: Renowned for its user-friendliness and bright, accurate projections, this device can be affixed easily due to its versatile mounting accessories and serves as a spirit level too, making it suitable for level and alignment tasks, yet its working range and suitability for outdoor use could be improved.
Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level: Exceptionally compact and robust, this laser level features triple-positioned leveling bubbles along with a measuring tape and ruler, providing versatile usability and excellent operation, though the dimness of the laser light restricts its application to indoor use.
Bosch GLL40-20G: Noted for its enhanced visibility and Visimax technology allowing up to 40 feet of line laser visibility, the GLL40-20G Self-Leveling Cross-Line Laser projects horizontal, vertical, and cross lines, equipping it for various indoor tasks, yet struggles with visibility in sunny outdoor conditions.
Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603: Designed to simplify leveling tasks like fixture installations and picture hanging, this laser level offers compatibility with common tripods and delivers impressive accuracy, despite lacking a comprehensive instruction manual and not being suited for outdoor use.
BLACK+DECKER BDL190S: This laser level, appreciated for its lightweight structure, comes with a hanging pin and a stud sensor, making it easily usable without a tripod and suitable for detecting studs, metal, and live A/C wires, despite lacking a vertical laser feature.

Whether you're a professional contractor or a DIY enthusiast, here's the list of the best laser levels that will help you hang pictures perfectly straight and level every time.

1. Bosch GLL 1P Laser Level - Best Overall

The Bosch GLL 1P is a laser level designed and manufactured by the well-known company Bosch, which is renowned for delivering high-quality tools and equipment to homeowners and professionals alike. In this comprehensive review, we'll discuss what makes this laser level stand out from the competition and what could be improved, all to help you make an informed decision.

What we found endearing about the Bosch GLL 1P was its simplicity, making it very user-friendly. This laser level comes with versatile mounting accessories that facilitate an easy setup. Its mounting thread enables compatibility with most universal tripods, and it also includes a magnetic mounting base for added versatility.

The projected light of the Bosch GLL 1P is bright and sharp, ensuring accuracy and precision as you work. It also excels in ease of use, as changing batteries and general handling of the tool are incredibly convenient.

Notably, this laser level also doubles as a spirit level with the inclusion of two vial bubbles. This feature makes it a valuable asset, even for projects unrelated to hanging picture frames or other leveling tasks.

Despite having many commendable features, the Bosch GLL 1P could benefit from a longer working range and suitability for outdoor use.

What We Like

High-quality design and manufacturing
Simple operation and straightforward use
Features spirit levels for added functionality

What We Don't Like

Limited working range and unsuitable for outdoor applications

2. Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level - Best Multipurpose Option

The Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level is a versatile device designed for a range of projects. It offers multiple features such as triple-positioned leveling bubbles, a fine-tuned measuring tape, and a sideways ruler for quick measurements. This review will cover our experience with this laser level, discussing the aspects we liked and the areas that could be improved.

We appreciated the Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level for several reasons. Its compact and durable design meant that handling this tool was a breeze, contributing to its overall ease of use. Its straightforward operation also makes it a favorite, with only a simple on and off switch required.

The triple-bubble spirit level works excellently, making it suitable for any DIY project in your home as well as professional endeavors, such as carpentry or construction.

In our experience, this laser level performs well across multiple services. The included 8-foot measuring tape proves to be a handy addition, although it might require an extra hand for uneven surfaces.

The main downside of the Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level is the dimness of the laser light, making this device only suitable for indoor use.

What We Like

Compact, sturdy, and well-built design
Efficient triple-bubble spirit level
Equipped with an 8-foot measuring tape

What We Don't Like

Dim laser light, best suited for indoor use only

3. Bosch GLL40-20G - Best for Enhanced Visibility

Bosch is recognized as one of the top laser-level brands due to its durable and task-specific designs. The Bosch GLL40-20G laser level can help you complete various tasks at home quickly and efficiently.

The GLL40-20G Self-Leveling Cross-Line Laser is equipped with Bosch's Visimax technology, providing up to 40 feet of line laser visibility in standard working conditions. With simple laser setup modes, it can project horizontal, vertical, and cross lines to help with tasks like hanging pictures, installing curtain rods, aligning cabinet doors, and other interior decorations. It has a Smart Pendulum Self-Leveling System, making it an easy-to-use tool with better accuracy than traditional spirit levels.

Although the Bosch GLL40-20G works well for indoor tasks, it struggles outdoors on sunny days as the laser line becomes less visible.

What We Like

2x Brighter green beam laser lines
IP54 rated to withstand rain and dust in tough job site conditions
Long laser line range, accurate and easy to use
Flexible mounting device for quick setup

What We Don't Like

The laser line isn't clearly visible outdoors

4. Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603

The Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603 Self-Leveling Cross-Line Laser Level provides an easy and efficient way to hang pictures and align-items horizontally and vertically, making it perfect for various indoor leveling tasks.

This laser level is designed for a range of indoor leveling projects, such as fixture installations, wall picture hanging, and cabinetry. Its compatibility with most common tripods thanks to a 1/4"-20 thread makes it even more versatile. This tool was invaluable during a bathroom renovation, helping complete work that would have been time-consuming using a bubble level.

The Johnson 40-6603 doesn't come with an instruction manual, which means relying on online tutorials to get started. Also, it's not suitable for outdoor use.

What We Like

A 3/16-inch accuracy with a 30 feet laser range
Designed in a compact, durable build quality
Manual mode for non-level applications like stairs

What We Don't Like

A tripod isn't included in the package

5. BLACK+DECKER BDL190S

The BLACK+DECKER BDL190S BullsEye Auto-Leveling Interior Line Laser/Stud is designed to be lightweight and sturdy, perfect for various indoor leveling tasks.

The BDL190S is equipped with a hanging pin, allowing for easy use without a tripod. It features a horizontal laser line mode and a stud sensor feature, making it suitable for hanging pictures and detecting metal, live A/C wires, wood, and studs during interior decor projects. The LCD digital screen makes the process even quicker and simpler.

The lack of a vertical laser may be a deal-breaker for some DIYers or interior remodelers, but the stud sensor feature makes the BDL190S suitable for basic indoor leveling and alignment tasks.

What We Like

An auto-leveling laser that works well
Convenient stud finder features
Built-in a compact, durable design
Inbuilt stud finder

What We Don't Like

Doesn't include plumb/vertical laser mode

What is the Best Laser Level for Hanging Pictures?

This section provides a detailed comparison of laser levels tailored for precision picture hanging. The following table meticulously scrutinizes critical attributes including type, accuracy, laser color, laser class, self-leveling capability, and battery life.

Product	Type	Accuracy	Laser Color	Laser Class	Self-leveling	Battery Life
Bosch GLL 1P Laser Level	Point	+/- 1/8 in at 33 ft	Red	2	No	15 hours
Qooltek Multipurpose Laser Level	Line	+/- 1/8 in at 30 ft	Red	2	Yes	12 hours
Bosch GLL40-20G	Cross-line	+/- 5/16 in at 30 ft	Green	2	Yes	15 hours
Johnson Level & Tool 40-6603	Cross-line	+/- 1/8 in at 30 ft	Red	2	Yes	12 hours
BLACK+DECKER BDL190S	Line	+/- 3/16 in at 20 ft	Red	2	Yes	6 hours

Buying Guide for the Best Laser Levels for Hanging Pictures

A laser level is an indispensable tool for hanging pictures with precision, ensuring your pictures are aligned correctly on your walls, creating a neat and clutter-free appearance. To help you pick the best tool for your needs, we've put together this comprehensive buying guide, outlining the essential factors to consider when purchasing a laser level for hanging pictures.

1. Type of Laser Level

There are primarily three types of laser levels available:

Dot Lasers: Emit a single point or multiple points in different directions. These are best suited for basic leveling tasks.
Line Lasers: Project a straight line across a surface. Perfect for tasks such as hanging pictures, installing shelves, and aligning tiles.
Rotary Lasers: Emit a 360-degree horizontal or vertical line. While they offer more versatility, they may be overkill when it comes to hanging pictures.

For most picture-hanging tasks, a line laser level is an ideal choice.

2. Accuracy

Accuracy is crucial when using a laser level. Look for models that offer an accuracy of ±1/8 inch or better at a range of 30 feet. A more accurate laser level ensures your pictures will hang straight and level.

3. Range

Check the maximum distance at which the laser level can project a visible line. While hanging pictures inside your home may not require a vast range, it's wise to select a laser level with at least a 30-foot range to account for larger rooms or future projects.

4. Battery Life

Consider how long the laser level can operate on a single battery charge. Most laser levels utilize AA or AAA batteries or come with rechargeable lithium-ion batteries. Longer battery life means less frequent replacement or charging, ensuring your projects won't be interrupted.

5. Mounting Options

A secure and stable mounting option is crucial. Most laser levels offer a mounting thread compatible with a standard camera tripod. Others include built-in wall mounts or come with a separate mounting bracket. Some even have magnetized mounts or clamps, allowing easy attachment to metallic surfaces.

6. Indoor vs. Outdoor Visibility

If you plan on using your laser level outdoors, consider one that's visible in sunlight or comes with a detector to assist in locating the projected lines. However, for hanging pictures indoors, a regular indoor laser level should suffice.

7. Durability & Warranty

Choose a laser level made from high-quality materials, such as a durable plastic or aluminum body. A good warranty period, typically ranging from one to three years, is also an indicator of the manufacturer's confidence in their product.

Important Tip

When using a laser level, it's best to calibrate it before use. This can be done by placing the laser level on a flat, level surface and checking the alignment of the projected lines against a carpenter's level or bubble level. A well-calibrated laser level will ensure that your pictures are hung straight, level, and look great on your walls.

How to Use Laser Levels

Usually, you just need to press two buttons to use a laser level.

First, level your laser level correctly. Some laser levels have an auto-leveling system and you can set those up pretty easily. While others require you to check the included spirit level. Once it’s leveled, all you need to do is project the light on the surface you want to work on. Use this laser light to align whatever you need to align like picture frames or wallpapers.

Voila! The job is done.

Safety Tips While Using a Laser Level

Laser levels are highly specialized devices that should be used with utmost care. Like most hardware tools, laser levels can hurt the user as well if not handled responsibly. Lasers are harmful to the eyes and sometimes, even the skin.

Here are some safety tips to keep in mind while using a laser level.

Be cautious about your eyes

Eyes are extremely vulnerable to laser beams and can get heavily damaged under direct exposure. So it's advisable to wear safety glasses that are meant for protection from laser beams.

Serious hazard to children

Be sure to keep laser levels from the reach of small children. Playing around with a tool like this can cause serious injuries to their eyes.

Flame inducing

Make sure that you don’t leave the laser level active and unattended. If it focuses for too long on any inflammable object, it can induce fire quickly.

Are there different types of laser levels for hanging pictures?

Yes, there are various types of laser levels, including line lasers and point lasers. For hanging pictures, a line laser is typically used as it provides a straight horizontal or vertical reference line.

How do I choose the right laser level for hanging pictures?

Consider factors like the size of the pictures, the distance at which you'll be working, and any additional features you may need (such as self-leveling or multiple laser lines). It's also important to choose a laser level with adequate accuracy.

Do I need a self-leveling laser level for hanging pictures?

While a self-leveling laser level is convenient, it's not strictly necessary for hanging pictures. A manual leveling laser can also be used effectively, but it requires more precision in setup.

How do I ensure that the laser level is accurate?

It's important to set up the laser level on a stable surface and ensure it is calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions. Additionally, avoid placing the laser level on surfaces that may vibrate or shift during use.

Can a laser level be used for hanging pictures on uneven walls?

Yes, a laser level can still provide a straight reference line on uneven walls. However, it's important to adjust for any irregularities by using shims or adjusting the placement of hanging hardware.

Can I use a laser level outdoors for hanging pictures on an exterior wall?

Yes, there are laser levels designed for outdoor use. Look for models with higher laser power output and features like a pulse mode for visibility in bright light conditions.

Staining your walls with lovely colors and reinforcing them with a polyurethane finish has become so much easier. Just take a roller, dip it in paint, and apply.

But before we get deep into discussing rollers, let’s know what polyurethane is. It is a wooden finish that can add to the beauty of your kitchen walls, deck flooring, tabletops, cabinets, and other wooden surfaces.

Not only does it add a stunning look to it, but it also protects the surface against uneven moisture and seals even scratched surfaces. Rather than using a paintbrush, you can use a roller for its easy application.

You will find a whopping collection of these rollers both offline and online. But does each product deliver a perfectly even and smooth polyurethane finish to your surface?

We know it will be difficult for you to select a suitable roller for your painting job. But don’t worry, as we have prepared a list of the best rollers for polyurethane application. So, without further ado, let’s dig in!

Listed below are the 5 best rollers for polyurethane from our list:

FOAM PRO 184: A compact yet versatile foam roller known for its durability and reusable quality, it excels at giving a smooth, spray-like finish and covers a commendable area with a single dip, ensuring a durable, even coating, especially when applying polyurethane, even though initial grip familiarity takes a bit of time.
FoamPRO 164: Esteemed for its detailed coverage given to small projects or hard-to-reach areas, this roller pairs well with oil-based finishes and offers a sturdy grip that ensures a consistent, lint-free finish, though its usability is somewhat limited to smaller workspaces and its lint needs regular replacement.
Katzco: A top-tier paint roller offering professional working experience and lint-free finishing, its foam cover provides an even finish with each stroke while the free-spin movement reduces paint splatter, earning brownie points for working in compact spaces, even though it's less compatible with thicker paints.
Bates: Providing a comprehensive painting package, this Bates Choice model comes with a lightweight roller and handle brush that holds more paint, thus offering extensive coverage and using synthetic filaments for a fine finish, even though those fibers can wear off over time.
Pro Grade Paint Roller Set: The Pro-Grade set is a thorough 10-piece kit designed for interior and exterior painting needs, known for the effortless application of paint and the ability to cover large areas swiftly for a smooth finish. However, it tends to leave behind brush strokes which can necessitate additional coats.

1. ‎FOAM PRO 184

Foam Pro 184 mini roller is a multi-functional polyurethane foam roller. Besides its small size and functionality, its durability and repeated usability make it one of the best available models to complete your painting jobs effortlessly and effectively. Without wasting much time, let’s dive into the features of this unit.

When it comes to painting, this mini roller works like a pro and gives a smooth and gleaming finish to your walls. In fact, people might get deceived by the finish, which is equivalent to spray works.

In terms of functionality, the roller does everything from varnishing to painting. The foam applier absorbs an adequate amount of paint giving it a lint-free and consistent finish. Besides, foam can retain its finish for a longer time. As the roller absorbs more paint, it will be possible to cover more space with a single dip.

It can be considered the best foam roller on the market to apply polyurethane. The rounded sleeve edge leaves a thick and spotless coating that ensures greater durability of the finish, making the roller a perfect finishing tool for wooden surfaces. In hindsight, the combination of this roller and polyurethane can prolong the life of your wood floors, furniture, or other wooden surfaces.

Lastly, it has a washable build, and you can use it more than once. Moreover, you get two refill sleeves free on purchasing this unit.

Although the roller secures a firm grip, you might need some time to get used to the application process. Other than that, we have not found any major disadvantage of the product, as it can surely deliver the expected high-quality finish to your walls.

What We Like

Gives a spray-touch finish
Quick and easy application
Easy to clean
Provides solid coverage
Leaves no steak on the finish

What We Don't Like

Users might need time to get used to the grip

Size: 4" | Weight: 4 Oz | Material: N/A | Tray: No

2. FoamPRO 164

FoamPro has always committed to making it easy for people to complete their painting jobs in less time and achieve better results. And they have taken the FoamPro 164 to the next level in terms of functionality and ease of use. It provides a smooth, even, and glossy finish to your wooden furniture and other surfaces. Plus, you can have an effortless and exceptional painting experience by covering a large area with a single dip.

This unit by FoamPro goes perfectly with any oil-based finish and works wonders with varnish, paint, stain, and polyurethane. It provides an even and smooth finish with detailed coverage. Hence, it becomes a suitable choice for smaller projects, which require more attention to detail.

Being small-sized, it can cover hard-to-reach places and give users greater control over the painting. But that doesn’t mean it lacks speed. The greater soaking capacity of the foam allows you to have sufficient liquid in a single dip, thereby allowing you to work without interruptions. Also, the sleeve can easily be cleaned and dried out for subsequent uses.

Using this foam roller, you won’t have to worry about the grip and it glides smoothly with hand movements, thereby leaving a spotless finish with each swipe. A tight grip also means it doesn’t release a nap during application and a thick coating ensures greater durability. Moreover, you wouldn’t have to worry much about lint in the finish.

Despite being a quality high-density roller, it certainly has some downsides. The roller has limited usability and is more suitable for detailed works in small spaces. Also, you might need to change the lint regularly to make the most out of it.

What We Like

Smooth and clear oil-based finish
Leaves no lint on hardwood floors
Covers narrow areas
Gives lint-free finish
Easy cleaning and application

What We Don't Like

Limited usability
Regular changing of the lint can be a burden

Size: 4" | Weight: 2.08 Oz | Material: N/A | Tray: No

3. Katzco

Katzco, a household products manufacturing company, has been delivering innovative solutions to its customers. And this paint roller is no different. It provides a professional painting experience to users and ensures quality results without the need for too many coats. You can have a lint-free finish using this unit.

If you want a professional and quick painting experience, then the Katzco 743841487844 is tailor-made for you. Its design is such that the foam cover is secured with a 5-wire cage frame.

Moreover, this unit can fit in any cover due to its small size and interlocking pattern, which enables better absorption and release of paint. As a result, a user achieves an even finish with each stroke and can ensure that the paint is applied quickly.

Added to it, the free-spin movement of the roller minimizes splatter during painting, which ensures quicker application and cleanly. You can rest assured about obtaining a smooth and glossy finish every time.

Last but not least, it is suitable for any tight areas due to its small size and free-spin movement. Also, it can cover a large area with a single dip, which means you need not invest more in buying paints.

Despite providing impeccable performance in terms of finish and application, it is only suitable for small-area applications. Apart from that, the roller might not be suitable for extra thick paints. However, if you are looking for rollers to paint a smaller area and a clean finish, then this one will definitely fit the bill.

What We Like

Smooth and quick application
Leaves no lint
Low spatter application
Reusable foam cover
Matt-free finish

What We Don't Like

Is only suitable for painting small areas
Not usable with thick paints

Size: 9" | Weight: 12 Oz | Material: Acrylic | Tray: Yes

4. Bates

Bates Choice has always been passionate about manufacturing and producing high-quality paint equipment like paint sprayers, paint brushes, rollers, and others at prices that won't break the bank. Its Le23 roller is one such high-quality polyurethane roller that delivers faster and long-lasting painting results.

his comprehensive package by Bates Choice is a true luxury for DIY workers. It includes everything you will need to paint your house and make it shine. The professional-quality foam paint roller is meant to deliver guaranteed satisfaction due to its high-quality, durable, and superior finish. What else would one want from a roller?

Both the roller and the wooden handle brush are lightweight and easy to maneuver, ensuring that you can carry on with those prolonged and tedious paint jobs with ease. Moreover, the paintbrush made of synthetic filaments is designed to hold more paint at a time.

Its top-quality ½-inch nap is perfect for painting a house and is durable and long-lasting. This means it saves time and gets the finish you are looking for. Long story short, it saves your money and is easy to use, meaning you do not have to be a professional to use it.

Although this paint roller is bound to deliver a durable, smooth, and long-lasting finish, there might be some issues if you use it for a longer time. The synthetic filaments of the roller might come off readily, thereby making it messy and time-consuming. In that case, you will need to change it after a few uses.

What We Like

A complete paint set
Easy to handle and apply
Provides extra coverage
Gives a lint-free finish
Covers a variety of painting needs

What We Don't Like

Synthetic filaments may wear off easily

Size: 9", 4", & 2" | Weight: 3.52 Oz | Material: Micro-Fiber | Tray: Yes

5. Pro Grade Paint Roller Set

This 10-piece all-in-one painting set by Pro-Grade is best for achieving professional quality painting results for anyone. This is just the perfect set if you are struggling with your staining projects. Just guide the rollers and brush to get excellent results every single time.

This complete painting set makes your work look professional and provides you with an easy application experience. You can use it to decorate the house with the colors of your choice.

The Pro-Grade set is designed to serve all of your interior and exterior painting needs, from walls, and ceilings to fences. Its applicators are made of high-quality materials and glide smoothly with your hand movements. Hence, you can carry out your tedious painting jobs with ease and ensure a smooth paint application.

Apart from that, these paint rollers are extra-durable, washable & made for repeated use. You can easily wash these rollers and use them again and again. Moreover, its no-shed covers ensure a lint-free finish or perfect paint for stunning results.

Last but not least, the roller leaves thick layers in a single coating and covers large areas in a short time. You no longer have to apply a final coat and save the liquid. These roller sleeves also retain more polyurethane for delivering a smooth and spotless finish in each stroke.

The toolset can be very convenient for DIYers, but it isn’t perfect. Its rollers leave brush strokes behind it, making walls look messy and dull. You might need to apply further paint coats of polyurethane to cover the brush marks, making it a costly affair.

What We Like

Extra durable and long-lasting polyurethane rollers
Perfect stain finish
Washable rollers ensure repeated usability
Covers a range of painting needs

What We Don't Like

Leaves brush strokes behind it

Size: 9", 4", & 2" | Weight: 1.82 lbs | Material: Micro-Fiber | Tray: Yes

6. ROLLINGDOG 3” paint roller

Rollingdog focuses on providing a range of quality and affordable paint applicators to its customers worldwide. Super-micro rollers of the company can be an excellent choice for a painter who will use them more than once. This durable, reusable, and washable paint roller provides you with a professional painting experience and gives your surface a satin finish.

An all-around paint roller by Rolling Dog is a pocket-friendly choice for anyone who provides professional painting services or who does a single-term painting project. It does not leave brush marks or lines on your surface and gives a clean and smooth polyurethane finish.

The unit is easy to hold, which makes it glide smoothly over rough or flat surfaces according to your needs, and provides the right balance and control for perfect application. Additionally, its high paint retention ability gives a thick and beautiful solid coating that enhances the durability of hardwood floors, walls, furniture, and other surfaces.

This unit can be regarded as the best polyurethane roller for arts and craftworks. Moreover, it serves as an optimal choice for people owing to its easy application and ability to deliver a satisfying experience.

Although the rolling hand roller provides an easy and smooth painting experience and a durable frame, many customers have complained about the poor quality of the main part. They claimed that small roller pieces start falling off and stick to the surface after a few uses. You need to pick up the pieces yourself, which can be a hassle.

What We Like

Best for interior paintwork
Heavy-duty steel roller frame ensures durability
Works with all paints
Can be attached to an extension pole

What We Don't Like

Poor quality roller

Size: 3" | Weight: 6.4 Oz | Material: Micro-Fiber | Tray: Yes

7. Microfiber Nap Rollers

Microfiber Roller Kits are specially designed for professional painters, woodworkers, carpenters, and epoxy artists who always expect the best results. This multi-functional roller is capable of doing a wide number of tasks from painting to varnishing.

A countertop paint kit is everything one needs to complete a painting job quickly and with a superior polyurethane finish. The microfibers of the foam cover don't allow the solvent to stick in and are perfect for applying finish in tight areas.

The ergonomic and comfortable handle of the unit is designed for easy usability and therefore ensures a smooth finish even in tough-to-reach areas. Along with that, its durable arm lasts through a number of painting jobs while providing an even and solid finish. Its multi-functionality and durability allow users to perform a wide range of jobs using a single roller.

Furthermore, the high-density roller ensures retaining more paint for a longer period and avoids any dripping, thereby minimal or no wastage of paint. The light, small but durable roller covers rough and flat surfaces in one coat, without any bubbling or stippling.

Apart from its exciting features, it might present a number of disadvantages to a user. The major one is that it leaves many odd dot traces after finishing and bits of lint. Other than that, it might not be suitable for all epoxy resin and people might find it easy to use. However, as stated above, this product is mainly suitable for professional painters and workers.

What We Like

Perfect for wet or dry rolling
Can be used for a range of jobs and projects
Easy to use on edges and trims
Easy to attach with extension poles
Ergonomic and comfortable handle ensures a firm grip

What We Don't Like

Leaves traces of odd dots
Not suitable for all epoxy resins and difficult to clean

Size: 6.5" | Weight: 8.1 Oz | Material: Micro-Fiber | Tray: No

What is the Best Roller for Polyurethane?

This section presents a comprehensive comparison of top-rated rollers designed for polyurethane applications. The table below meticulously outlines critical attributes, encompassing size, weight, material composition, and tray specifications.

Product	Size	Weight	Material	Tray
FOAM PRO 184	4"	4 Oz	N/A	No
FoamPRO 164	4"	2.08 Oz	N/A	No
Katzco	9"	12 Oz	Acrylic	Yes
Bates	9", 4", & 2"	3.52 Oz	Micro-Fiber	Yes
Pro Grade Paint Roller Set	9", 4", & 2"	1.82 lbs	Micro-Fiber	Yes
ROLLINGDOG 3” paint roller	3"	6.4 Oz	Micro-Fiber	Yes
Microfiber Nap Rollers	6.5"	8.1 Oz	Micro-Fiber	No

Roller for Polyurethane Buying Guide

Now that you have gone through our comprehensive list of the best polyurethane rollers on the market, it might help you make an informed choice of purchasing one according to the task at hand. However, prior to purchasing a roller that gives a lustrous shine to your surface, you need to look at the same thing from various angles. So what are these angles?

Not all rollers are suitable for applying polyurethane and using any traditional roller, you will see a lot of brush marks or lines on your surface no matter how well it is being prepared. In order to get a smooth finish, you need to look into factors including roller frame, length, cover material, and others. Let's get into the details.

Roller Frame

The material of the roller determines its durability and how long you can use it for polyurethane painting projects. Besides, a good and sturdy design will ensure a tight hold over the sleeve and prevent it from wobbling during the application of paint. It ensures a better workflow with minimum splatters and that your hands do not get strained from holding it for a long time.

Best polyurethane rollers are made of heavy-duty steel which keeps the rollers intact and ensures better paintwork. Also, these frames are easy to wash off compared to wooden ones.

Length

A mini roller is suitable for applying polyurethane paint in small areas and ensures a smooth application. Also, it is suitable for staining corners and edges. On the other hand, long stick rollers are best suited for long area applications, like walls or a hardwood floor.

Cover Material

Roller covers come in different fabrics and sizes. Besides, the sleeve edge impacts the quality of the finish as well.

Wool cover absorbs and releases a better paint finish during application and can cover a greater area in a shorter time despite its small size. Wool roller sleeves are perfect for polyurethane paints and provide more gloss to your surface.

The foam cover holds a lot of paint at a time and delivers an impenetrable coating with each stroke. In terms of absorbing liquid better and getting an even finish, foam rollers tend to be a better choice.

On the other hand, a fiber paint roller works well with all kinds of paints respect rather than specializing in one. These covers deliver a smooth and shiny finish with all kinds of urethane. Besides, they are more long-lasting and easy to wash. Additionally, these rollers prevent lint or dust from mixing with the finished surface.

Nap Size

The nap size of a roller determines the uniformity of the finish. In this case, a thin one can deliver a lint-free and even finish compared to a thick one.

Resistance Capability

Synthetic and wool covers come in double-layer sleeves and their core is composed of highly resistant fabric. It prevents any waterborne urethane and solvents from sipping in. This in turn enhances the texture and durability of covers. As a result, using these covers will enable you to save money and cleaning time.

Clean Finish

In the end, the quality and texture of the finish matter. A polyurethane roller that delivers a spotless polyurethane finish without shedding on the surface will be most suitable. Therefore, it will be viable to look for a roller that gives a lint-free and bubble-free finish during polyurethane application.

How are polyurethane rollers made?

Polyurethane rollers are typically made through a process called casting or molding. Liquid polyurethane is poured or injected into molds and allowed to cure. The resulting material is then machined to achieve the desired specifications.

Can polyurethane rollers be customized to specific applications?

Yes, polyurethane rollers can be customized in terms of size, shape, hardness, and other properties to suit specific applications. Customization may be necessary for specialized machinery or unique operating conditions.

How long do polyurethane rollers typically last?

The lifespan of a polyurethane roller depends on factors like the application, load, and environmental conditions. Generally, they have a longer lifespan compared to rollers made from other materials due to their wear resistance.

How do I choose the right hardness for a polyurethane roller?

The hardness of a polyurethane roller is measured in durometers. Softer durometers provide better traction and are suitable for applications with delicate surfaces. Harder durometers are used for heavy-duty applications. Consider factors like load, speed, and environment when choosing.

Cosplay is one of the most interesting and characterful hobbies you can have. However, cosplay does take a lot of effort - and a significant part of the effort you put goes into painting.

Paints are the final link between living the character and simply dressing up as one; hence, you should get to work with paints as frequently as you can and put in as much effort as possible!

To make your life a little bit easier, we now put together a list of some of the best paints and brands that are on offer today.

They all offer the same economical yet vibrant painting experience, though they are all unique in the value that they provide. Without saying more, let’s jump right into the reviews.

Listed below are the 5 best body paints for cosplay from our list:

Mehron Face & Body Paint: Offers vibrant, high-quality pigments and shades using safe and soft materials, but comes with a high price tag, which may limit its appeal to those on a budget.
Snazaroo: Known for its long-lasting wear, this brand provides a great variety of paint shades at affordable prices, catering to a broader audience but may lack the pigment concentration found in some other brands.
Graftobian ProPaint Kit: This is a standout option for sensitive skin due to its high-quality and safe ingredients, providing great value despite its premium price.
TAG Face Paint: This reasonably priced set offers vibrant and punchy shades that can be used both for face and body painting, making it a versatile choice for cosplayers.
Mosaiz Face Paint: As a unique offering of easy-to-apply, hypoallergenic, and non-toxic paint sticks, this product is cost-effective and travel-friendly but may not be sufficient for a full cosplay look.

These body paints have been carefully selected based on their quality, durability, and ease of use. So, whether you're a seasoned cosplayer or a newbie, here's the list of the 6 best body paints for cosplay that will help you create the perfect look for your next event.

Mehron Face & Body Paint - Best for Vibrant Colors

If you’re looking for the best in the business - a manufacturer who has known the product long enough that they are a reason for the popularity of face paints today, you’re in the right place. With over 90 years of experience, they’re bastions of the body paint industry. Their pigments and shades are highly punchy and bright, and the raw materials are par excellence as well.

Experience

Mehron has been behind countless circus shows, Broadway shows, and theater performances - you name it, Mehron has been a part of it. Their credibility is beyond reproach, and their products still follow the winning formula they’ve been using for decades. This formula uses wonderful, extremely safe, and soft raw materials that can last for hours on the skin easily.

Coupled with a few sprays of a setting spray, it lasts for hours easily. The only thing that will pinch is the price. These are among the most expensive products on the market, but these will never fail you whether it comes to quality, the softness of paint on your skin, or the safety of paint.

If you do not consider the price and focus solely on the quality of the product, these are about the best cosplay paints money can buy.

What We Like

Extremely safe and soft, comes loaded with moisturizers like cocoa seed butter and avocado oil
Vegan-friendly, hypoallergenic, rated safe by the FDA
With a setting spray, you can last through a single competition with ease

What We Don't Like

Mighty expensive, perhaps the most expensive mass-produced body paint

Type: Cake Paint | Palette Size: 8 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

Snazaroo - Best for Long-Lasting Wear

Snazaroo has consistently been placed among the topmost brands when it comes to cosplay and body paints in general. Their face paints have been rated as some of the best on the market today. The reason behind almost universal praise is not belonging to the professional side of the market entirely - they make something for everyone and that too at affordable prices!

Experience

Snazaroo’s entire range of products is rated as being extremely safe, whether you see if it’s safe for sensitive skin or being approved by the FDA on all major parameters. This, coupled with the value that they bring by getting you around 36 varieties of paint, gets you a fantastic overall experience that is simply unbeatable for the price.

Whether it’s Overwatch characters, your favorite Anime protagonist, or the superhero you’re cosplaying - these colors are available in a variety of shades, so you have nothing to worry about. The only compromise that comes, is in the form of a little bit less pigment concentration than we generally like to see in face paints - but it’s sufficient for any cosplay convention!

All in all, Snazaroo has been around on the market long enough to establish itself as a reliable, safe, and reasonably priced body paint brand.

What We Like

Comes with a number of paint shades, enough for you to find your own unique shade easily
Paints can be ordered individually as per need
Extremely safe and delivers a satisfying yet economical experience

What We Don't Like

Some paint shades lack the concentration that’s offered by some other brands

Type: Water-Based | Palette Size: 32 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

Graftobian ProPaint Kit - Best for Sensitive Skin

If you’re looking for a competitor to the Mehron face painting kit, this is an equally wonderful offering from Graftobian. The pigment quantity and quality are second to none, while the paints last incredibly long compared to most other paints on the market.

With a wide variety in paint shades and superb quality of paints, the Graftobian is a contender for the top spot among cosplay paints!

Experience

The quality of the paints on offer is beyond reproach. Besides Mehron, no one else delivers such high-quality ingredients in their paints. They are also FDA-compliant, so you can be sure that your skin will not bear the brunt of poor-quality body paints. You get 12 shades in this set, which can be easily mixed to create new shades as per your specifications.

These paints are water-based, making them easier to apply and remove from the skin. The paints are manufactured on-site in the USA, so you can forget about lax safety standards. Interestingly, the president of Graftobian provides their phone number on each box - we’ve never seen such commitment to consumer satisfaction in this segment before!

This kit requires that you can digest the premium it asks for over many others. At the same time, do bear in mind that you’re getting the best experience from a very premium cosplay paint brand.

What We Like

Comes with 12 vibrant shades, water-based
Paints come in a luxurious box
Water-based to aid removal and application

What We Don't Like

Fairly expensive

Type: Cake Paint | Palette Size: 12 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

TAG Face Paint

While not branded as a “body” paint, you can easily apply these TAG face paints while cosplaying all over your body if you wish. These almost escaped our radar, since these paints are not advertised as cosplay paints. However, a number of cosplayers have reported strong results, and the quantity is also sufficient for at least a full body paint of each color.

Experience

This paint set delivers in terms of safety, quality, and value. This set comes in at around a fifth of the price of Mehron’s individual paints if you consider the per-paint price, though it will last half as much too. The quality of these paints is solid, so you will not face any issues relating to longevity or safety.

Another point that plays out in the favor of the TAG Face Paints is the compactness of these paints - the box measures 10” x 4”, which can easily fit inside any bag, handbag or purse. You can easily carry these around to conventions directly!

Out of the 12 shades that you get, 9 are basic and three are special paint shades that you’re unlikely to find elsewhere. Thus, as an unconventional but ultimately economical choice, TAG Face Paints delivers well.

What We Like

Much cheaper than Mehron and even Snazaroo if you get the kit
Paint shades are vibrant and punchy, paints are FDA-approved
Paints are hypoallergenic and non-toxic

What We Don't Like

Nothing notable

Type: Water-Based | Palette Size: 6 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

Mosaiz Face Paint

Having covered a number of water-based liquid cosplay paints, we now come to paint sticks, a.k.a crayons. These body painting crayons are rated safe, are much easier to apply and remove compared to liquid cosplay plants - and are cheaper too! The only caveat is that finer details are much harder to pull off with paint sticks - all in all, a wonderful combination.

Experience

These cosplay paints are very useful for getting the details right or providing rudimentary outlines or accents to your cosplay attire. These are incredibly safe and reliable when it comes to paint quality, and are likely to last you multiple cosplaying sessions and events. These paints also come with two metallic shades, which gives them an edge over the others reviewed.

When it comes to safety, these are hypoallergenic, non-toxic, FDA-approved, and food-grade permitted - which makes this set ideal for those with sensitive skin. These are all around 3” long, which makes them perfect for traveling around with. While these may not be enough for a full cosplaying experience, it’s a must-have in any case.

What We Like

Comes in a number of colors including metallic paints for accents
Perfect to carry around while traveling and to deliver some last-minute touches
As safe as the safest paints around today

What We Don't Like

Cannot suffice for a full-fledged liquid cosplaying paint kit

Type: Water-Based | Palette Size: 12 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: Yes

Ben Nye Magicolor Liquid Paints and Glitters

Ben Nye is perhaps the most popular cosplay supplies brand and for good reasons. These paints easily deliver one of the most well-rounded painting experiences, whether you consider the quality, safety, reliability, long-lasting nature of the paint or the overall value delivered by the paint.

Experience

Unlike most other brands listed here, Ben Nye products are generally available individually. The paint bottles are available in a number of sizes, and the one-ounce bottle can easily last between 20 to 70 painting sessions depending on your use. With the paint, you can also get their highly-rated range of glitters, which are also every bit as safe and as vibrant.

Ben Nye makes a number of products that are considered the de facto standard. You can easily get hair paints, face paints, body paints as well as glitters. However, the face and body paints which are available in a huge variety of shades are in a different league entirely.

What We Like

Paints sold individually and are among the safest on the market
Can be coupled with Ben Nye glitters and hair color for the most comprehensive cosplay look
Paints last longer than most other brands at an equivalent price

What We Don't Like

Cannot be had as a kit, may cause some logistical issues

Type: Cream Paint | Palette Size: 4 Colors | Water-Resistant: Yes | Vegan: No

With this, we come to the end of our discussion on the top 6 brands and paint kits for cosplaying. However, we now move to an equally important part of cosplay painting which often gets ignored - the extras you need in order to cosplay like a pro. Paints themselves aren’t enough to last you through conventions without nature playing spoilsport.

What is the Best Body Paint for Cosplay?

This section is dedicated to evaluating and identifying the top-quality body paints specifically tailored for cosplay enthusiasts. The ensuing table meticulously examines crucial attributes including type, palette size, water-resistance, and vegan-friendliness.

Product	Type	Palette Size	Water-Resistant	Vegan
Mehron Face & Body Paint	Cake Paint	8 Colors	Yes	Yes
Snazaroo	Water-Based	32 Colors	Yes	Yes
Graftobian ProPaint Kit	Cake Paint	12 Colors	Yes	Yes
TAG Face Paint	Water-Based	6 Colors	Yes	Yes
Mosaiz Face Paint	Water-Based	12 Colors	Yes	Yes
Ben Nye Magicolor Liquid Paints and Glitters	Cream Paint	4 Colors	Yes	No

Buying Guide for the Best Body Paints For Cosplay

Cosplaying, a beautiful art form where enthusiasts recreate their favorite characters or create entirely new ones, is a craft that requires skill, creativity, and attention to detail. One of the most important aspects of cosplay is body paint, as it adds an extra dimension to the character. In order to make your cosplay truly stand out, it's crucial to choose the right body paint. This buying guide will provide you with the most important factors to consider when purchasing body paint for cosplay.

1. Type of Body Paint

There are several types of body paint available in the market, and it's essential to select the best one for your needs:

Water-based Paints: These paints are easy to apply, non-toxic, and straightforward to remove. They are best for sensitive skin and provide a matte finish. However, they can be less durable as they may smudge or wear off with sweat.
Alcohol-based Paints: These paints offer excellent durability, smudge and sweat-proof coverage, and a smooth finish. However, they can be tough to remove and may not suit sensitive skin.
Cream-based Paints: These provide excellent coverage, blend easily, and have a long-lasting effect. They can sometimes feel heavy and may require touch-ups throughout the day.
Hybrid Paints: These are a mix of water-based and alcohol-based paints. They offer the advantages of both types with better durability than water-based paints and a more skin-friendly approach than alcohol-based paints.

2. Pigmentation and Coverage

High-quality body paint should provide rich pigmentation and even coverage. Coverage should be consistent and not streak, crack, or fade easily. Always look for reviews and test the product before purchasing to ensure that it provides the desired level of pigmentation.

3. Application Method

Body paint can be applied using different methods such as brushes, sponges, airbrushing, or fingers. Consider the complexity of your character's design and which application method would work best for you.

4. Skin Type and Safety

Consider your skin type when choosing body paint. Alcohol-based paints can be drying, while cream-based paints may clog pores. Additionally, ensure that the paint is non-toxic, hypoallergenic, and FDA-approved. A patch test is recommended for those with sensitive skin to check for any adverse reactions.

5. Ease of Removal

While some paints are designed to last all day, they should still be easy to remove after your event. Water-based paints are easiest to remove, while alcohol-based paints may require special removers.

6. Budget

Body paint prices can vary widely, so it's essential to set a budget and strike a balance between quality and affordability. Often, mid-range products provide good quality without breaking the bank.

7. Availability

Make sure that the body paint is widely available, either in-store or online, and factor in shipping time if necessary.

Important Tip

Always perform a patch test with any new body paint to check for possible allergic reactions. Apply a small amount to your skin, let it dry, and wait for at least 24 hours to see if any irritation occurs.

By considering these factors and adhering to the tips provided, you'll be well-equipped to find the perfect body paint for your next cosplay event.

Essential Extras for Cosplay Painting

Setting Spray

The Setting Spray is used both before and after the application of paints. It acts just like a second skin, where it protects the paint from chipping and breaking off your own skin. It is generally made using a combination of alcohol and water and is crucial in making the paints stick to all parts of the skin - especially when it comes to the face which is more oily.

A coat of setting spray applied before the paint brings out the best properties of the paint - pigmentation, vibrance, punchiness, etc. If you intend to take lots of pictures and make the paint last as long as possible, you have to get setting spray as well.

You won’t notice its presence so it’s hard to miss - but only until a few hours pass, by when you will really want to have applied a layer before.

High-Density Sponge

For the most uniform painting experience, you should also have sponges at hand always. For maintaining evenness and to ensure the paint does not streak, the sponge is the best tool on the market. A word of advice: apply only thin layers as far as possible. This will help your paint stick around for longer times without chipping. Paint around your joints will last much longer this way!

Brushes [kabuki/artist-grade paints]

You should be very particular when it comes to brushes. You will need a larger brush (e.g. a kabuki brush) to get the larger details just right - however, you will also need thinner brushes for the finest of details. For this, synthetic artist-grade brushes are the de facto standard. You want to have a number of stroke varieties as well as brush styles at hand for a unique look.

Remover [for oil-based paints]

Finally, we come to a particular chemical solution for the oil-paint removal problem. Oil-based paints can be notoriously difficult to remove, and that’s why you must always have a remover at hand (especially for the times when the artist goofs up). The remover can be any of a heavy-duty bar of soap, a waterproof make-up remover, or a strong facewash.

You might notice that we’ve only reviewed water-based products. This is simply because of our personal preference for water-based paints, which are much easier to apply and remove compared to oil paints.

8. Budget

Another important consideration while getting cosplay paints is the budget. If you’re not a professional cosplay artist yet, you’re not expected to have perfectly painted cosplay attires as well - and hence, you should get a set that doesn’t break the bank. Go for the best if you’re a professional - nothing else would suffice.

9. Colors

This can be a deciding factor if you’re confused among equivalent sets of cosplay paint kits. Some kits come only with generic paint shades, while others offer you just the right shade you need to make your character look as realistic as possible. Hence, think about the color first and then the budget.

Remember, an expensive shade which is an approximation is worse than an accurate but cheaper paint shade.

What type of body paint is best for cosplay?

The best type of body paint for cosplay depends on your specific needs and the character you are portraying. Some popular options include water-based face and body paints, alcohol-activated paints, and silicone-based paints.

How do I apply body paint for cosplay?

The application process for body paint can vary depending on your paint type. Generally, starting with clean, dry skin and applying a base layer of paint before adding any details or designs is recommended. You can use brushes, sponges, or airbrushes to apply the paint and seal it with a setting spray or powder.

How do I remove body paint after cosplay?

The best way to remove body paint is to use a gentle cleanser or makeup remover that is safe for use on the skin. You can also use baby oil or coconut oil to help dissolve the paint before washing it with soap and water.

Can body paint cause skin irritation or allergies?

Yes, some people may experience skin irritation or allergies when using body paint. It’s important to test the paint on a small area of skin before applying it to larger areas and to look for hypoallergenic options if you have sensitive skin.

How long does body paint last on the skin?

The longevity of body paint can vary depending on the type of paint used, the application method, and other factors such as sweating or rubbing. Generally, water-based paints may last for several hours while alcohol-activated or silicone-based paints can last for up to 24 hours or longer.

Can I swim or shower while wearing body paint?

Swimming or showering while wearing body paint is not recommended, as water can cause the paint to break down and smear. If you need to remove the paint, it’s best to do so before getting wet.

Oil pastels are one of the easiest mediums to work with since they don’t require extra work to get started.

If we think about paint mediums that are great for a number of surfaces, oil pastels are one of them. With good preparation on a fine platform, these mediums can give any surface a colorful and rich appealing look regardless you are using canvas or other heavy-weight papers. And in the case of paper surfaces, oil pastels give out exceptional results even though it depends on the type and quality of the paper.

Finding the best paper surface for oil pastels artwork can be tricky especially when you’re a beginner and not certain which one will best meet your expectations. There are many good brands out there that offer a wide range of papers for oil paints. Speaking of which, we have a list of 9 paper surfaces that we personally find to be the best in the market.

Listed below are the best papers for oil pastels:

Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad: The Strathmore pastel paper has an 80 lb paper weight, acid-free composition, and different size options. Its light surface texture is less capable of enabling thick layers of oil pastels compared to Faber-Castell's smoother texture.
Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad: A paper that shines with a unique black canvas that boasts a 74 lb paper weight and a smooth texture, excellent for bringing out bright colors. The tooth is very shallow, unlike the Canson Mi-Tientes, limiting the creation of effects and textures.
U.S. Art Supply's Premium Pastel Paper Pad: The U.S. Art Supply pastel paper pad has a paper weight of 80 lb and offers a medium texture. Its requirement for fixatives for long-term paint preservation is a weak point compared to other options.
Canson Mi-Teintes Pad for Pastels: The Canson Mi-Tientes is a pastel paper with a 98 lb weight that excels in versatility, catering to both dry and wet medium artists. It's more expensive than most other options.
Hahnemuhle Bugra Oil Pastel Paper: Hahnemuhle Bugra oil pastel paper is crafted in Germany. With an 88 lb weight, it's notable for its high lightfastness and acid-free features. It needs fixatives like the U.S. Art Supply pastel paper for paint durability, which is a drawback.

1. Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad - Best for Budget-friendly Versatility

Strathmore is a brand that has been around for 100 years and above and is very popular among students. It would be a rare case if any dedicated art student has not heard of the brand before. Their products are available in most art stores.

The reason they are widely used by students and art schools is the price of their products - and it’s no exception with the Assorted Pastel Paper Pad as well.

Experience

One might think that because the price is reduced, the quality is also compromised. No doubt, it would drop by a certain extent since the price is meant to be affordable for students. But the fact stands that these pastels still produce amazing pieces.

We find the availability of these pastel pads in almost every local art store very convenient.

First of all, it saves the artist a lot of time from hunting for decent papers all over, especially if it’s someone with a tight schedule.

Secondly, we don’t personally prefer to buy art supplies online because then we get to inspect the products firsthand before purchasing unless, of course, the items are not available anywhere else besides online.

This is because sometimes the products you expect are nowhere near the real ones. So, we find the Strathmore pastel pads to be very useful for artists with similar preferences.

Besides the availability, these pads are also wallet-friendly and great for artists who like to try out papers with other colors for their artwork. The colors of the papers inside this pad are medium brown, green, blue, pink, cream, and white.

The feature we love most about paper pads is their versatility. Although they work wonders with oil pastels, they are also great for other mediums such as soft pastels, chalk pastels, and even crayons.

Besides that, they can take some liquid paints too except for heavy watercolor projects since these papers are more on the lightweight side.

They are also available in three different sizes, which leaves us with more options to choose from.

But given these are light paper pads, we find there is only a little amount of tooth. Nonetheless, there are many artists who prefer light teeth when working with a few layers of oil pastels.

All in all, the Strathmore 400 Series pastel papers are great for archival purposes because they are acid-free.

What We Like

Easily available in many local art stores
Affordable
Works well with other pastel mediums

What We Don’t Like

Lacks tooth for thick layering on paper

Paper Weight: 80 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches, 11 x 14 inches, 18 x 24 inches

2. Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad - Best for Highlighting Bright Colors

In the world of art, any form of creativity is always welcomed. And today we have the Faber-Castell Black Paper Pad which as the name suggests, is black in color.

This may not seem like the traditional paper one would look for but with the thought of getting totally different results, you might just love the idea of having this in your collection of oil pastel surfaces.

Experience

First off, this is perfect for all those bright colors we’ve always kept aside for a long time. The black background just enhances those shades which would normally go unnoticed on regular white paper.

Although it totally depends on your preferred techniques, this truly brings out the unique appeal which you don’t get with bright-colored papers.

We also noticed that this paper is quite versatile with other mediums besides pastels because of its thickness and color itself. Media such as crayons, gel sticks, and metallic pencils can be used on this surface. Even when it comes to papers for crafts, this also makes a great pick for fancy DIY projects.

We would recommend keeping liquid mediums away from them as much as possible. Since they are meant for oil pastels, it is not expected that they can’t take any kind of liquid paint. However, through research and experiments, we found these papers can take acrylic paints given that they are not too watery.

But overall, we like that the papers are not that expensive which means they are great for students and artists who are on a budget. Not only that, but they are also ideal for young artists and children to practice on.

Since it is a black paper pad, it is already obvious that it will not highlight dark colors as it does with bright colors. However, we can say that the only setback we found with this paper is that it has a very shallow tooth which is not ideal when working on effects and textures.

But keeping that aside, the paper’s quality is amazing for archival purposes.

What We Like

Ideal for bright shades & other dry mediums
High quality with archival properties
Affordable for students, budget artists, & kids

What We Don’t Like

Minimal tooth in paper challenges effect creation

Paper Weight: 74 lb | Texture: Smooth | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

3. U. S. Art Supply Premium Oil Pastel Paper Pad - Best for Mixed Media Enthusiasts

Similar to Strathmore, U. S. Art Supply is a brand that is easily available mostly everywhere. From its great quality and high-performance products to its affordable prices, the brand has become very popular among students and learning artists.

Their Premium Pastel Paper Pad in Natural Tone Colors is great for both professionals and beginners because it is easy to use and delivers good-quality artwork.

Experience

We will first look into the natural tones of the papers. They include light beige, cream white, beige grey, and eggshell white.

We find every single color perfect for doing beautiful landscape pieces. All these colored papers make great backgrounds for such portraits. Apart from that, they also work well with other preferred concepts.

The quality of these papers is smooth, yet still, has enough thickness in terms of mixing paint mediums. They can actually accept mixed mediums in case the artist wants to try out different effects.

You can tell from the touch of the sheet how much moisture it can accept because if the paint is too runny, it can cripple and damage the paper. We would suggest having a separate page for testing the consistency if you are unsure while using mixed mediums.

Keep in mind that liquid mediums such as acrylic paints can be used while watercolors can pose a risk to the paper.

As we have mentioned earlier, the paper has a perfect combination of texture/tooth and smoothness which makes it easy and pleasurable to use throughout the painting.

But the papers require the use of fixatives if we plan to keep the pieces in the long run.

Overall, the sheets are very affordable and great for self-taught beginners and art students.

What We Like

Balances smoothness & tooth for exceptional art
Thick paper receptive to mixed media
Affordable papers suitable for students & beginners

What We Don’t Like

Fixatives needed for long-lasting paint adherence

Paper Weight: 80 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

4. Canson Mi-Teintes Pad for Pastels

Being one of the popular brands that produce quality art supplies, Canson is a name that we’re sure everyone in the art world knows.

Because they have been focusing on this line for about 450 years now, you can be sure the pastel sketchpad too is of the best quality.

It not only serves oil pastels but markers, soft pastels, colored pencils, charcoal, and crayons as well.

Experience

We can’t help but appreciate the versatile feature of this paper. Unlike other oil pastel papers, with this one, we can actually venture into using a wider range of mediums. Because it is made from cotton with just the right level of thickness, it also receives liquid paints such as oils and watercolors.

This helps save the artist a few bucks to purchase surfaces for each and every media they own. In fact, they can use this with almost any kind of paint medium.

Furthermore, what sets this sketchpad apart from the rest is the papers that come in delicate colors such as moonstone, buff, champagne, eggshell white, light blue, and steel gray.

In addition to its wide versatility, we can also use these colored papers for our DIY crafts which saves us time looking for some.

From a lot of reviews and research, this paper earns a gold standard in quality and performance when working with oil pastels.

We hardly need to rely on the paints because this paper is truly magnificent in highlighting and enhancing even the most average mediums.

With a more than enough deep tooth, the artist can manipulate the effects as much as they want with no unnecessary concerns about the pigments wearing off too soon or the binder popping up to the surface.

Working with oil pastels, we always tend to focus on layering bit by bit. And with a tooth like this, there is no problem adding multiple layers to our piece.

Coming to a very similar feature, the paper excels in providing texture as well. On one side of the sheet, we have a rough texture while on the other, a fine one.

This is an aspect that most of the other papers don’t offer. If you want to work on different surfaces every now and then, this would be a great choice since this and many other features are included.

They are also available in two different sizes which gives us a choice to pick out one that best suits our requirements. Besides, we can always cut them into our preferred sizes.

And the best part of this pad is that it contains sheets with 50 different tones so you can choose the one that is best for the artwork every time.

Finally, the papers are available for purchase both in a pad and individually. This way, if you ever run out of your favorite tone, there is no need to buy the whole pad anymore instead, you pay only for the desired one.

It would be no surprise if the price of this sketchpad costs more than most of the other pads out there given its variety of great features. However, we would recommend this if you are looking for a worthy investment.

What We Like

Versatile for dry, wet, & non-oil pastel mediums
50 toned papers for diverse color selection
Sheets sold individually or in a pad
Sheets feature rough & fine textures

What We Don’t Like

Price is significantly above the average range

Paper Weight: 98 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches, 12 x 16 inches, 16 x 20 inches

5. Hahnemuhle Bugra Oil Pastel Paper

Here is a paper that is crafted in Germany.

The Hahnemuhle Bugra Pastel Paper is dual-sided and is entirely made up of alpha-cellulose. Similar to the Mi-Teintes Pad, this sheet also has one side with a rough texture and a fine one on the other.

Although it is made of color charcoal and pastels, it also works pretty well with graphite, pencils, and other dry mediums.

Experience

We like that these sheets are highly lightfast because most of the time, papers with poor composition face degradation as years pass by.

The good news is these papers contain pigments that resist UV light for a long period of time. Therefore, our paintings remain good as new for years to come.

Along with that, we can say these papers aim to last for a very long time because they are acid-free as well. There is no need to worry about discoloration or brittles as long as the papers are assured to have a normal pH balance.

We also find the size to be pretty much convenient for normal-sized artwork with just the right thickness to use oil pastels.

The amount of tooth and fine binder makes the process of creating effects very simple and easy. Other artists find that they have more control over the texture.

One downside would be that the surface is not able to hold the paints for long without the help of both workable and final fixatives.

All in all, we would highly recommend this for oil pastels if you’re searching for long-lasting papers.

What We Like

Paper's surface gives artists control over texture & effects
High lightfastness & acid-free for long-term artwork preservation

What We Don’t Like

Fixatives needed to stop future paint cracking

Paper Weight: 88 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 33 x 41 inches

6. Sennelier Oil Pastel Card Pads

Sennelier is a French-based high-end brand that produces one of the best art supplies. From research, we found that many famous artists like Picasso and Van Gogh used art products by Sennelier.

And coming to pastel papers, we know exactly the kind of quality we expect from them.

The Sennelier Oil Pastel Card Pads is a perfect substitute for the Canson Mi-Teintes except that it’s more expensive.

Experience

We can list down many reasons why this paper is favored by artists all over.

First of all, the sheets come in 4 different sizes to meet the normal requirements of the artist. This already provides us with more options than most papers would.

Before we move further, the pad only contains 12 sheets in white color which are too less compared to the price tag.

But keeping those aside, there are more advantages to these sheets. For instance, the pad is not glued but spiral bound which is good to preserve for future use.

With glue, there is always a chance of the chemicals or acids interfering with the quality of the paper in the long run, but that is not the case with spiral binding. Another advantage of this particular binding is that they are relatively strong.

But the best part about the pad is the glassine paper. If you have not heard of it before, it is a glossy and smooth paper sheet that is used by laying it on the artwork to prevent pigments from transferring to the immediate sheet while the work is paused.

Glassine also acts as an alternative protection layer to fixatives whose price is much higher.

To sum it up, all the paper’s features - from the spiral binding to the glassine - are made to serve the artist who loves to work and travel. Also, the papers are thick enough to resist wear and tear while hitting the road.

What We Like

Available in four sizes for variety
Spiral-bound pad for longevity & damage prevention
Includes glassine sheets to protect unfinished work

What We Don’t Like

Pricey for a pad with only 12 sheets

Paper Weight: 160 lb | Texture: Medium | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 11.75 x 15 inches

7. Art Spectrum Colourfix Coated Pastel Paper

Art Spectrum is an Australian brand whose product quality is very similar to that of UArt, which we shall review in a minute.

This is a sanded paper which is good for both beginners and intermediates since the price of each sheet is only $2.69. Along with that, they also provide discounts for purchasing in bulk.

Experience

With their inexpensive price tag and high-quality sheets, we would absolutely recommend these for any artist who is looking for a steal deal.

There are 20 sheets in total, each with a different tone. Although the colors seem less than other papers we reviewed, we find that they complement any kind of desired artwork with the right application of oil pastels. And the results this pad delivers are excellent and stunning.

Since Art Spectrum uses high-quality binders, the papers have a strong grip over the oil pastels, as well as they are acid-free. We love this aspect because it is perfect for archival purposes, allowing the piece to stay fresh for years to come without any yellowing issues.

One of the most preferable features of these papers is that they are sanded in medium-coarse grit type. This is the reason why oil pastels can stay on paper for a long time without cracking.

These are available in two sizes: 9” x 12” and 5” x 27.5”. For normal pieces, these two will work out perfectly, otherwise, we would suggest looking at other brands for larger sizes.

We find that the tooth is fine and deep enough to allow the artist to manipulate the outcome as much as possible. While layering can be tough with other inferior-quality binders, these papers make the process seem simple and easy.

Most importantly, both intermediate artists and beginners love using these papers because they meet all the requirements one has while learning the art of oil pastel work. But rather than buying one sheet after another, it is better to get them in bulk quantities since the price would be lesser.

What We Like

Quality binders in pad enable desired effects
Affordably priced for beginners & intermediate artists
Features uniquely toned papers for any artwork

What We Don’t Like

Only 20 sheets of paper within the pad

Paper Weight: 140 lb | Texture: Coarse | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

8. UArt Premium Sanded Paper Drawing Pad

Within the period of time spent searching for the best oil pastel surfaces, we found that UArt is one of the most highly-rated companies that produce art supplies.

Among many of their endless list of products is the Premium Sanded Paper.

Experience

This is another sanded paper that we find perfect for oil pastel artworks because of its ability to cover all the requirements that we look for in our oil pastel surface.

But the first thing worth mentioning is that out of all the other papers we have seen, UArt offers its papers in 6 different sizes. That is more than enough options to match our basic intentions.

On top of this, every paper has unique grit options which make these papers even better when it comes to versatility. If our artworks call for a moderate or a fine grit size, we can choose any one of these papers without any hassle.

However, the only setback is that the papers come only in two colors: dark and natural. Although the natural tone will undoubtedly go with any art concept, it still won’t serve artists who like to explore other creative ideas for their pieces.

On the other hand, the dark-tone paper will be perfect when working with bright oil pastels since it serves as a perfect background.

But what most artists usually would look for in an oil paper surface is its texture or tooth. With this paper, we are not even a tad worried about the tooth since it is deep enough to let the artist work smoothly and has full control over the effects.

Therefore, if you are looking for a fine tooth that can grab the paints tightly without having to worry about them flaking or peeling off, we would recommend going for this option and not getting disappointed.

What We Like

Six unique sizes for diverse artwork needs
Papers come in various grits for specific effects
Deep, flexible tooth ideal for oil pastels

What We Don’t Like

Limited to two tones

Paper Weight: 400 lb | Texture: Coarse | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

9. Arches Watercolor 140 lb Hot Press Papers

So far, we only discussed surfaces that are made for oil pastels purposes.

But like the Arches Watercolor 140 lb Hot Press Paper, there are many surfaces out there that are not meant for this sole purpose but surprisingly fill the position very well.

Hence, we find this paper to be highly versatile and we are sure you will too.

Experience

As the name suggests, these are originally made for watercolor projects but we cannot deny that it works magic when it comes to oil pastels as well.

In case you’re wondering about its versatility, this paper can be used for printmaking, calligraphy, and digital printing as well. It is a multipurpose paper and it saves us from spending money.

The reason we find this perfect for oil pastels is because of so many reasons. Firstly, besides the multipurpose aspect, the papers come with the most amount of surfaces, grits, and textures on this list.

If you do not like the idea of having to look for other brands frequently in order to find the right paper size or texture, then this is the best pick we found.

Secondly, knowing that they are also acid-free ensures that our artworks will stay safe and fresh for a very long time, and not worry about the improper aging process.

Since this is not an oil pastel paper surface, we’re not surprised if it does not include all the features of oil pastels. One of them being the paper is only available in the color ‘Natural White’ which limits the artist to work with only suitable projects.

But if you want to save a decent sum of money and look for an inexpensive oil pastel as well as a multipurpose paper, we would suggest giving the Arches Watercolor 300lb Hot-Press Paper a try.

What We Like

Multipurpose for non-oil pastel or watercolor uses
Varied sizes, textures, & grits available
Price is relatively inexpensive

What We Don’t Like

Limited to natural white tone only

Paper Weight: 140 lb | Texture: Smooth | Acid-free: Yes | Size Options: 9 x 12 inches

What is the Best Paper for Oil Pastels?

If you're looking for the best papers for oil pastels, listed below is a table that compares paper weight in pounds, texture, whether it's acid-free, and available size options measured in inches.

Product	Paper Weight	Texture	Acid-free	Size Options
Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad	80 lb	Medium	Yes	9 x 12 inches, 11 x 14 inches, 18 x 24 inches
Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad	74 lb	Smooth	Yes	9 x 12 inches
U. S. Art Supply Premium Oil Pastel Paper Pad	80 lb	Medium	Yes	9 x 12 inches
CANSON Mi-Teintes Pad for Pastels	98 lb	Medium	Yes	9 x 12 inches, 12 x 16 inches, 16 x 20 inches
Hahnemuhle Bugra Oil Pastel Paper	88 lb	Medium	Yes	33 x 41 inches
Sennelier Oil Pastel Card Pads	160 lb	Medium	Yes	11.75 x 15 inches
Art Spectrum Colourfix Coated Pastel Paper	140 lb	Coarse	Yes	9 x 12 inches
UArt Premium Sanded Paper Drawing Pad	400 lb	Coarse	Yes	9 x 12 inches
Arches Watercolor 300lb Hot-Press Papers	140 lb	Smooth	Yes	9 x 12 inches

Buying Guide for the Best Paper for Oil Pastels

Before getting oil pastel paper surfaces, there are a few things that require some considerations to ensure the surface is right for you and your artwork.

Tones

The tone is nothing different from the wash you create with liquid paints - it highlights the painting. So, always make sure the tone you get will go along well with any concept, or find one that is perfect for your piece.

Type of Paper Surfaces

For oil pastels, papers are available in the form of pads, sheets, or sanded.

Because papers can come either as an individual or a pad, you would want to purchase them in bulk quantity so that you can get a lot of discount with it.

Sanded paper, on the other hand, is harder and stronger than the two. A single unit will also cost higher. But we still recommend buying them in bulk for a pretty good discount.

Texture and Tooth

As we have stated, the top features most artists would first look for is the tooth or texture of the paper. The final look of the piece depends on how much control the artist has over it.

Also keep in mind that with a fine or deep tooth, the paint will stay firmly onto it, preventing them from cracking. But most importantly, artists get to create different effects and textures with a good tooth.

Versatility

If you’re on a tight budget, finding versatile papers can really help. Although it does not have to be as versatile as the Arches Hot-Pressed paper (unless you own a printing studio as well), one that works for other mediums is more than enough.

Interestingly, we find that the thickness or weight of a paper is pretty responsible for making it versatile. For example, if the paper is too thin, it will not work with wet mediums. So, we advise looking for one that is about 160 gsm.

While you can use regular paper for oil pastels, it's not typically recommended because regular paper lacks the necessary tooth or grain for the pastels to adhere properly, and it may not hold up well to the oil content in the pastels. Specialized pastel paper or canvas, which has a textured surface for better pigment grip and is more durable, is generally a better choice for oil pastel artwork.

The difference between sanded paper and pastel paper lies primarily in their texture and durability. Sanded paper has a gritty surface that holds more layers of pastel and can withstand erasing or heavy application of pastels without getting damaged. Pastel paper, on the other hand, has less grain and a lighter texture, which might not hold as many layers of pastel but provides a delicate touch for lighter pastel works.

Yes, you can use watercolor paper for oil pastels. Watercolor paper, particularly rough or cold-pressed variants, have a textured surface that can hold the oil pastel quite well. Due to the oil content of pastels, some artists prefer to use a barrier such as a pastel ground or gesso to prevent the oil from seeping into the paper over time.

Choosing the right paper for oil pastels involves considering the paper's texture and its weight. Paper with a texture or 'tooth' will allow the pastels to adhere better, leading to richer color application. Heavier weight paper (like cardstock) or specially designed pastel paper is preferable as oil pastels can be heavy and regular paper might tear. The choice may also depend on your personal style and the intended effects of your artwork.

Yes, you can use acrylic paint on oil pastel paper. Oil pastel paper typically has a texture that can hold paint well, and its heavier weight can withstand the water in acrylics without warping. That being said, you should still consider using a primer, such as gesso, to seal the paper and stop the paint from soaking in and causing the paper to degrade over time.

To prevent oil pastels from smudging on paper, artists often use a fixative spray. This substance is lightly sprayed onto the completed artwork and forms a protective layer that helps keep the pastel pigments in place, reducing smudging. Another method is to place a piece of glassine paper, a smooth, inert paper, over the artwork to protect it from being disturbed.

Thank you for taking the time to explore our comprehensive article on some of the best papers for oil pastels. We are confident that you found the information valuable, and now have a better understanding of what to look for when purchasing oil pastel papers. Now that you're equipped with this valuable knowledge, you're ready to create beautiful masterpieces with your favorite oil pastels.

Out of these 9 best papers for oil pastel, here are our top three recommendations:

Strathmore Assorted Pastel Paper Pad is an ideal option for artists on a budget in search of a versatile and easily available paper. It works well with different mediums, offering convenience and variety.
Faber-Castell Black Oil Paper Pad is a good option for artists looking to highlight bright colors and experiment with unconventional backgrounds. This affordable paper works best with dry mediums and can be effectively used for fancy DIY projects.
U. S. Art Supply Premium Oil Pastel Paper Pad is the right choice for those who appreciate a perfect balance of smoothness and tooth in their pastel paper. It works well with mixed media and is suitable for students and beginners.

With these recommendations, we trust that you will have an exciting and exhilarating time creating vibrant and unique artwork on your chosen oil pastel papers. So, go ahead, unleash your creativity, and let your imagination soar with every stroke of oil pastel on these incredible papers. Happy painting!

Scale modeling, an enduring pastime since the 1950s, has its roots reaching back to humanity's earliest days. Realistic scale models serve as the culminating phase in the evolution of a design, providing a tangible manifestation of a concept. They are invaluable for their precise depiction of scale and volume, offering an immediate visualization that closely mirrors reality and provides an accurate sense of dimension.

Contemporary history has witnessed the transformation of realistic scale models from purely functional prototypes to forms of art. While retaining their foundational purpose, these models have acquired an aesthetic dimension, transcending their role as mere technical tools.

Below are dioramas that defy verbal description, their beauty transcending language.

When integrated into the planning phase, realistic scale models engage viewers interactively, much like toys captivate children, allowing for an intuitive grasp of the object’s true form and scale. This characteristic is not only pivotal in the design phase of an object but also vital for our imaginative faculties, enabling the sharing of a vision where the object is realized, operational, and fully functional. The unique attribute of realistic scale models is their ability to depict anything in a static or mobile form.

Static models offer a snapshot, portraying objects as if time has stood still. They provide a fixed view that, unlike mobile models, does not grapple with replicating motion—a task that can sometimes lead to a loss of immersive experience due to scale-related discrepancies. While mobile models may be better suited for digital animations where real-world physics can be challenging to replicate, static models have recently reached an extraordinary fidelity in detail, approaching miniature replicas of reality. They cover an array of themes, from the quotidian to the fantastical, requiring diverse techniques to authentically recreate the desired atmosphere.

Realistic scale models come in various scale ratios—1/48 and 1/32 for aircraft, and 1/35 for vehicles being the standard. Larger scales such as 1/16 or 1/24 are often reserved for cars and some aircraft, but the universal scale for all types is 1/72. These scales cater to the true dimensions of the models, as different objects have different real-life sizes. For example, a military vehicle's gun may measure between 5.25 to 5.75 meters, which equates to a manageable 15 to 16 centimeters on 1/35 scale—a size conducive to desktop display. The choice of scale typically aligns with ease of manufacturing and the ability to produce well-proportioned models that comfortably fit in a display case or on a shelf. The thematic range is vast, spanning from the Napoleonic era to the Cold War for figures, with military vehicles and cars predominantly featuring designs post-1920s, with a particular prevalence of World War II and Cold War-era military models, and automotive models from the 1940s to the 1980s.

The following examples delve into various dioramas, particularly those representing military vehicles and aircraft. They illustrate the art of capturing life in miniature, highlighting the skill of rendering scenes from reality with convincing authenticity.

Shoe storage ideas are a hot commodity online, especially DIY shoe storage that is clever, quick, and inexpensive considering that the average person owns 12 pairs of shoes. Getting creative with DIY shoe storage solutions is a great way to neatly organize your footwear and reclaim space in your home. Read on for 19 genius DIY shoe storage ideas you can implement to keep your shoe collection tidy and impress your guests.

Metal Sticks Behind The Wardrobe Door

Keep shoes hidden but easily accessible by installing metal sticks on the back of a closet door. Hang shoes by their heels for an organized display.

Cardboard Shoe Storage

Get creative with cardboard boxes to DIY customized shoe cubbies on a budget. This modular storage solution can be scaled to your space and replaced as needed.

Pallet Shoe Shelves

Repurpose wooden pallets into shelving units for an easy shoe organization project. Stack and arrange pallets to fit your space.

Shoe Box Storage

Store shoes in their original boxes and label them with photos for a neat, personalized storage system.

Wall-Mounted Coat Hooks

Install wall hooks designed for coats to hold shoes and free up floor space in small rooms.

Ladder Bookcase Shoe Storage

Upcycle a wooden ladder into a leaning bookcase. Add shelves to store shoes creatively.

Crate Shoe Storage

Stack vintage crates or buy new collapsible ones to hold shoes in a rustic cubby storage unit. Arrange crates vertically or horizontally.

Cardboard Pipe Shoe Storage

Get crafty with cardboard tubes or PVC pipes cut to size. Lean tubes against a wall or stack them to create DIY cubbies.

Metal Grid For Heels

Install a metal pegboard and use hooks to neatly store heels and keep them in view.

Corner Wall Shelves

Optimize wasted space by installing corner shelves. Use them to neatly store shoes vertically.

Display Shoes On Shelves

Show off your favorite pair by dedicating a shelf to artfully arrange shoes. Add lights for dramatic effect.

Build A Walk-In Shoe Closet

For the ultimate shoe storage, construct a customized walk-in closet with plenty of shelves and cubbies. Add a window for natural light.

Dedicate Dresser Drawers To Shoes

Make use of furniture you already own by storing shoes in empty dresser drawers. Line drawers with fabric for a tidy presentation.

Shoe Display Shelves

Build or buy shelving units specifically to showcase your most prized shoes. Add lighting for extra flair.

Shoe Wall Decor

Get creative by arranging shoes into wall art patterns and designs. Paint or stain shoes to complement your décor.

Laundry Room Shoe Storage

Install shelves or cubbies in your laundry room to store shoes near the entryway. Keep shoes off the floor to avoid tracking in dirt.

Rotating Shoe Display

Get the most out of your walk-in closet by installing a rotating shoe rack. Spin to view all your pairs with ease.

Garage Shoe Storage

Keep garage floors clear by mounting panels or shelving to hold shoes. Add hooks for hanging bulky shoes.

Repurposed Furniture Shoe Storage

Give old furniture new life by refinishing and using it to hold shoes. An old dresser or cabinet works great.

Open Shelving Units

An open storage design allows you to easily view all shoes. Keep shelves near the entryway for convenience.

Hallway Built-In Shelves

Maximize hallway space with built-in shelving that spans the length of the wall. Store shoes of every height.

Luxury Walk-In Closet

Go all out with a professionally designed walk-in closet complete with plentiful shoe storage. Consider glass doors to admire your collection.

Custom Pull-Out Drawers

Make use of wasted cabinet space by installing custom pull-out shelves just for shoes. Keep shoes hidden but easily accessible.

Organized Shoe Closet

Invest in a closet system with plenty of shelves, cubbies, and drawers to neatly accommodate all your footwear.

Repurposed Furniture Shoe Storage

Upcycle old wooden pallets or metal file cabinets into DIY shoe racks. Stack and arrange them to fit your space.

Minimalist Shoe Shelves

Adopt a minimalist style by dedicating a small shelving unit near the entryway to neatly store shoes out of the way.

Bathroom Shoe Storage

Make use of vertical space in your bathroom by mounting shelving on the wall to attractively display shoes.

With some creativity and elbow grease, you can implement any of these storage solutions to keep your shoe collection neat. Find a method that fits your space and style. Your feet (and guests) will thank you

Do you think gluing plexiglass is difficult? Well, it isn't if you have the correct glue and know the right method.

Plexiglass is often used as an alternative to glass in various projects because it is transparent and, unlike glass, it can tolerate high pressure easily. Needless to say, this flexible and durable material might find multiple uses in and around the home.

Unfortunately, many people are still not sure how to glue it.

Actually, Plexiglass does not glue in the regular sense at all. It requires a chemical weld that allows two surfaces to melt and can fuse into each other. This creates an irreversible bond that you cannot separate, no matter how hard you try. So, today we've created a list of the best glues for acrylic Plexiglass to help you find the perfect choice for your project.

Listed below are the best glues for acrylic plexiglass:

J-B Weld: J-B Weld sealant and adhesive is renowned for its robust adhesion and forms a tough, weather-resistant seal. It takes 4-6 hours to dry, longer than other options like Loctite and Gorilla and has delicate packaging which may cause some glue to squirt out.
Loctite: Loctite is a cyanoacrylate superglue that is recognized for its high-temperature resistance. It has a fast-setting, moisture and chemical-resistant formula. The smaller packaging limits its use in larger projects.
Gorilla: The Gorilla super glue gel sets within 1 minute and requires no clamping. Its high viscosity makes it easy to apply without making a mess, compared to thinner solutions like Starbond. Not entirely transparent when dry.
Starbond: The Starbond glue offers low-viscosity instant adhesive properties. It has a quick drying time and a clog-free stopper for smooth application. Due to its thin consistency, it's more prone to spills and messes, unlike Gorilla.
Super Glue: Super Glue is an economical epoxy adhesive that sets in about 10 minutes and cures fully in 24 hours, allowing for a longer working time. It appears slightly yellowish upon drying.

1. J-B Weld - Best Overall

Who could skip out on the world's strongest bond available in a conveniently sized tube? This 100% silicone sealant by J-B Weld is as strong as commercial glues get. They come in compact packaging weighing 90 ml and in several colors.

J-B Weld is one of the more popular brands we included on our review list. With over 40 years of experience and hundreds of great reviews of this product online, we decided to test it on Plexiglass to see what we get.

One of the first things we noted was that this glue is an RTV (Room Temperature Vulcanized) silicone sealant, which sets at room temperature.

Apart from that, it is almost effortless to use. Also, we found that the silicone forms a tough, waterproof, weather-resistant seal on almost all surfaces, especially Plexiglass. After a few days of using it, we saw no sign of shrinkage or cracks, and the glue was strong enough to hold larger pieces.

Moreover, we found that it worked well on automotive products, ceramic, cloth, carpet, rubber, windows, door frames, and so on. That said, this product is versatile enough for diverse projects around the house and beyond.

And finally, this product sets clear within an hour and is resistant to mold and mildew.

We decided to include this product on our list after testing its versatile uses, beyond its adhesive properties on Plexiglass. And it certainly did not disappoint. However, we wish the seams were sealed more tightly.

That said, some amount of glue squirted out when we squeezed it. So, buyers should ensure that they handle the product delicately.

What We Like

Weather-resistant
Perfect for household DIY projects
Sets in one hour
Precise nozzle

What We Don’t Like

Delicate packaging

2. Loctite - Best for High Temperatures

This adhesive might sound familiar to those who often work with home improvement products. That said, the 1365882 model is a professional-grade liquid superglue by the well-known brand Loctite. As the name suggests, this superglue is incredibly strong and quick, making it one of the most reliable options we found.

Many people have superglue lying around the house, but can it be used to glue Plexiglass? Yes, absolutely. Therefore, we couldn't skip this versatile superglue by Loctite as we set out to find the best glues for Plexiglass.

Although you can use this glue for DIY projects at home, the ingredients are professional-grade and ideal for heavy-duty repairs.

Often an issue DIYers face while using glue is the drying up of the adhesive at the nozzle. To prevent such problems, this glue comes in compact packaging with a pinpoint nozzle for precise and drip-free application.

Another positive aspect of the bottle design is that the screw-on cap sits perfectly in place and seals the nozzle to prevent clogging.

Moreover, it has a fast-setting formula that is resistant to moisture and chemicals, so you can use this adhesive on Plexiglass projects using water. Speaking of which, an essential aspect of Plexiglass is the clarity after drying. And, this product offers just that- transparency after drying, without any clamping required.

Overall, this product checked all the boxes of a high-quality adhesive. However, we wanted a little bit more of it.

So, if there were one thing that needed improvement, it would be the lack of size options. That said, we wish the product were available in a larger bottle for bigger projects.

What We Like

Sets without clamping
It comes with a screw-on cap
Compatible with multiple surfaces
Quick-drying

What We Don’t Like

Small packaging

3. Gorilla - Best Dry Time

Next, we have another popular favorite - the 7700104 glue by Gorilla. This glue comes in a tiny bottle containing 0.71 ounces of the product. But the quantity may be sufficient for most jobs because one drop is enough for about one square inch of most surfaces. So, if you are looking for a quick-drying glue that requires no clamping, consider this option.

First off, the glue began solidifying within 30 seconds of application and did not need any clamps to hold it in place. While this feature comes in handy for DIY projects, you need to be quick while working with it because it dries in under a minute.

Also, the superior Gorilla formula does not run if the tube is held vertically, giving you ultimate control over the amount to apply.

Furthermore, a lesser-known fact about this product is that it contains tiny rubber particles, which improve its bond with materials. So, after using it for your Plexiglass project, you can use the same adhesive for various other purposes.

That said, this versatile formula works equally well on plastic, metal, rubber, ceramic, fabric, and paper.

For best results, use this product after shaking the bottle first and then tapping the bottom to bring the contents near the nozzle. Next, apply one drop of glue for one sq. inch of material and lightly press the object for 30 seconds. Rest assured, this is enough to form strong and long-lasting bonds.

While we had no major qualms with this product, there was a slight difference that we noticed over the course of testing it.

Although the glue sets pretty fast, the dried and finished result is not clear like other adhesives. Still, this is not a big deal and can be overlooked.

What We Like

Sets within one minute
Bond various surfaces
Resistant to impact
Mess-free application

What We Don’t Like

It is not entirely transparent

4. Starbond

Are you wondering which glue type is superior - superglue or CA glue? In fact, the two are more or less the same substance, but with different names.

That said, this CA glue has instant adhesive properties with medium viscosity, just like super glue. At the same time, this glue flows like oil from the tube, allowing for a smooth application on various materials.

Right off the bat, what's different about this product is its viscosity. While other glues are thicker with a consistency similar to honey or even more viscous, this one is much thinner. In fact, it has a viscosity measurement of 150 cPs, similar to the consistency of motor oil. However, the fluidity of this option has its pros and cons.

So, while it flows easily and is better to apply, it is also more prone to spills and messes. But the positive aspect is that it dries in a short amount of time, relieving you of the work required to clamp it. And since the product is made of cyanoacrylate, it has the brilliant ability to form bonds quickly.

Moreover, one of its additional features involves the inclusion of two cap applicators of different types. You can also switch to the other in case one gets clogged up. Not to mention how it also comes with a clog-free stopper and a bunch of micro tips for precise application.

As we mentioned earlier, the motor oil-like consistency is a double-edged sword. On the one hand, it allows the product to flow through a very fine micro tip for smooth application. On the other hand, it has a higher chance of clogging up.

What We Like

100% refund guarantee
Convenient application
Perfect for arts and repairs
Waterproof finish

What We Don’t Like

Prone to clogging

5. Super Glue

Next, we have a fast-setting plastic fusion glue that sets in a mere ten minutes. As the name suggests, the Super Glue Plastic Fusion Epoxy Adhesive works well on plastics. At the same time, it works equally well on Plexiglass. However, the USP of this product is the unique syringe feature that helps it release glue in a controlled manner.

First of all, it is easy to be fooled by the low cost of this product. But the results of this adhesive are far from average, and we say this from our first-hand experience.

If you know a thing or two about glues, you might've heard about epoxy adhesives too. Epoxies are one of the strongest and most reliable glues, and this product is no different.

That said, the 15277-12 model has 4000 PSI strength holding power, which is more than enough for bonding materials. Once you apply the glue, it starts bonding within the first eight minutes of application, and the curing process takes about 24 hours to complete.

Another feature we wanted to highlight is the unique bottle the contents come in. Upon a closer look, the dispenser is designed like a syringe with two different compartments carrying different materials. Once you press the syringe, one part releases the resin while the other removes the hardener. Both of them combine to form a super solid glue for Plexiglass and other materials.

One of the things we liked about this glue is the long working time it provides. But if you are in a hurry to fix repairs within a time limit, this option might not be the best one. So, choose wisely if you have such a project in mind. Also, the glue isn't completely clear; instead, it appears slightly yellowish upon drying.

What We Like

Allows a longer working time
Reasonably priced
Cures completely within 24 hours
Works on various surfaces

What We Don’t Like

It takes longer to dry

6. WELD-ON

What do you look for when you need glue exclusively for Plexiglass? You need glue that fuses the materials together as if they have been welded. This is precisely what you get with this model by Weld-on. Simply put, it is a clear formula that bonds materials with a cement-like strength.

One of the things we wondered about while reviewing these glues for acrylics was how specific these adhesives could get. It's one thing to say that glue is multipurpose and can be used on various surfaces. And, it's another to claim that the adhesive is specifically designed to form irreversibly strong bonds with Plexiglass.

This got us intrigued enough to give Weld-on a shot. For starters, consider how multipurpose glues are excellent at holding two pieces together, but they do not actually fuse the surfaces.

On the other hand, Weld-on changes the molecular structure of the acrylic and softens its surface when applied. After joining two pieces of Plexiglass, these two parts harden again as if they have been welded into each other.

The product itself is thin, like a liquid, with a consistency similar to water, so you may even pour it into the dispenser. But it dries up pretty quickly, giving you only one minute of working time and three minutes before it sets.

Upon testing, we found that this glue dries and sets pretty fast, along with being an excellent choice for Plexiglass. Yet, there was one issue that we could not overlook. That said, the glue is so thin that it is prone to spillage, and thus it's possible to mess up the work area if you're not careful.

What We Like

Easy application
It doesn’t leave white marks
Made especially for acrylics and Plexiglass
Two-year shelf life

What We Don’t Like

Prone to spillage

7. SCIGRIP

Now that you have seen a few types of glue, it's time to check out a slightly different bonding agent - acrylic cement. This is one of the easiest solutions to work with because it is pretty thick and easy to apply. Not to mention how this is one of the best options for beginners.

One of the first aspects we noticed was the thickness of the product, which is medium-bodied compared to others that are much thinner. Due to this consistency, it becomes easy for newbies to use this glue on Plexiglass.

Also, this product is a high-strength solvent that does not need much time to set. Merely five minutes after the application, you have a dry surface that is transparent without a yellowish tinge. The good thing about this product is that it achieves 80% of its strength within 24 hours of application. But, the drying begins within minutes, eliminating the need to use clamps.

Furthermore, the adhesive is a low-VOC product which indicates a significantly lower release of harmful chemicals in the air. And while we liked this aspect, what impressed us even more, was its ability to securely bond objects apart from Plexiglass. Indeed, this adhesive works well on PVC, butyrate, polycarbonate, ABS, and styrene.

Overall, this product did not have any flaws worth pointing out, so it is safe to say that we were pretty pleased with its results. However, we can think of something that might be bothersome for some people. Despite its thickness, it is pretty messy to work with because of its container.

What We Like

Low-VOC content
Bonds rigid materials easily
Leaves no residue
Beginner-friendly

What We Don’t Like

Messy application

8. Aron Alpha

We decided to include another quality adhesive on our list. This glue is the AA490 model by the brand Aron Alpha. The product comes in simple packaging, which users need to squeeze for careful application. Also, the glue dries clear so that you can apply it in visible areas for decoration.

If you are someone who is engaged in frequent art projects or uses glues regularly, then this option might be worth considering. When we received this glue, the first thing we wanted to do was test it directly on Plexiglass. The results were pretty good, and we found that the glue set quite fast.

After that, we tried testing it on various other materials to find if it was compatible with different types of surfaces. When it came to paper and plastics, this glue could bond those surfaces reasonably quickly.

But when it came to metal, the story was slightly different. After applying the glue, the metal pieces didn't show any sign of bonding, and it was only after an hour or so that the glue dried out. Apart from this, the glue bottle was easy to use and glide over surfaces.

Although this option performs decently across the board, it isn't as durable as others on this list. While other glues are resistant to heat and impact, this one does not provide any such benefit. In fact, the glue bottle clearly states that it must be stored away from heat.

What We Like

Compatible with plastic and metal
Mess-free
Affordable
Convenient applicator

What We Don’t Like

Sensitive to heat

What is the Best Glue for Acrylic Plexiglass

If you're in the market for the best glue for acrylic plexiglass, the table below provides a side-by-side comparison of bond type, drying time (in hours, minutes, and seconds), viscosity, volume measured in fluid ounces, temperature resistance range in Celsius, water resistance, and chemical resistance.

Product	Bond Type	Drying Time	Viscosity	Volume	Temperature Resistance	Water Resistance	Chemical Resistance
J-B Weld	Epoxy	4-6 hours	Thick/high viscosity	3 fl oz	-40°C to 200°C	Yes	Resistant to fuels, oils, and other chemicals
Loctite	Cyanoacrylate	< 30 seconds	Thin/low viscosity	0.7 fl oz	-55°C to 120°C	Yes	Resistant to mild acids and alkalis
Gorilla	Cyanoacrylate	< 10 seconds	Thick/high viscosity	0.7 fl oz	-45°C to 90°C	Yes	Resistant to water and most chemicals
STARBOND	Cyanoacrylate	< 10 seconds	Thin/low viscosity	2 fl oz	-51°C to 80°C	Yes	Resistant to water and most chemicals
Super Glue	Epoxy	30 minutes	Thick/high viscosity	1 fl oz	-40°C to 100°C	Yes	Resistant to most chemicals
WELD-ON	Solvent-based	10-20 minutes	Medium viscosity	4 fl oz	-30°C to 80°C	No	Resistant to most chemicals
SCIGRIP	Solvent-based	10-20 minutes	Medium viscosity	1.5 fl oz	-30°C to 80°C	No	Resistant to most chemicals
Aron Alpha	Cyanoacrylate	< 10 seconds	Thin/low viscosity	0.7 fl oz	-50°C to 80°C	Yes	Resistant to most chemicals

Buying Guide for the Best Glue for Acrylic Plexiglass

Here are a few things to consider before buying glue for bonding Plexiglass:

Glue Type

The most crucial step is to read and check the label to find out the glue type before purchasing. While some glues can bond to almost any object, some are only specific to one or two materials.

You'll need to figure out if the glue you pick can indeed bond something as tricky as Plexiglass. Sometimes, people pick up a glue type that is the strongest at joining two surfaces, but it would still not be enough to hold Plexiglass.

As we mentioned before, two acrylic surfaces need to fuse together instead of simply joining. So, which type of glue would be the best for Plexiglass?

Here are a few options:

- Cyanoacrylates or Superglue

The most common types are called CAs or cyanoacrylates and are also known as superglue. These glues are compatible with Plexiglass and are very quick to dry. They do not require any curing or setting time. But they might be difficult for beginners to use because they do not allow much time to work with the surface.

- Epoxy Glues

Another type of glue that is often used is epoxy glue, which comes in two parts. There are epoxies that come as one component, but they are not adequate for gluing Plexiglass, so you must avoid those.

On the other hand, two-component epoxies consisting of resin and hardener are very effective when it comes to bonding acrylics.

Drying and Curing Time

Drying time can vary vastly depending on the type of glue. Super Glue bonds are pretty much instant, and only a few minutes should be enough to fuse Plexiglass together. On the other hand, epoxy glues take hours to dry and a minimum of 24 hours to cure completely.

If you need a stronger bond, a longer cure time will definitely help. Generally, epoxy bonds are much stronger than superglues, so make your selection wisely.

Also, some glues may require additional pressure to encourage bond formation. This additional time is known as clamp time. It is essentially the time needed to hold the two surfaces together.

Details about the drying, curing, and clamping time should be mentioned on the back of the glue bottle. If you are purchasing it online, make sure to read the description before finalizing your decision.

Surface Residue

If you need to glue decorative pieces, the color of the glue should not ruin the look of the item. Thus, it is best to go for an adhesive that turns transparent after drying. Since Plexiglass is clear anyway, a yellow or grey residue film from the glue would not be aesthetically pleasing.

Can I use superglue on acrylic Plexiglass?

Yes, you can use superglue on acrylic Plexiglass. It's important to note that superglue can sometimes cause a noticeable fogging effect around the joint, which might not be desirable in some uses. For cleaner bonds, consider using acrylic cement, which is specially designed for bonding acrylic materials.

Can I use epoxy on acrylic Plexiglass?

Yes, you can use epoxy on acrylic Plexiglass and can create a strong bond. Keep in mind that since epoxy is not as clear as some other adhesives, it can be visible when cured. For applications requiring a clear, nearly invisible bond, a specialized acrylic adhesive may be a better choice.

Can I use silicone on acrylic Plexiglass?

Yes, you can use silicone on acrylic Plexiglass, particularly for sealing purposes. For bonding or gluing acrylic plexiglass, silicone is not usually the adhesive of choice due to its flexibility and lower bonding strength. In such cases, a solvent-based adhesive designed for acrylics, such as acrylic cement, would be recommended.

How do I remove glue from acrylic Plexiglass?

To remove glue from acrylic Plexiglass, use specialized adhesive removers or a mild solution of soap and water. It's important to avoid using abrasive tools or harsh chemicals that can scratch or damage the acrylic surface. Always test the cleaning method on a small inconspicuous area first to ensure it does not harm the Plexiglass.

Is it possible to glue acrylic to wood?

Yes, it is possible to glue acrylic to wood. Epoxy or a specialized plastic-to-wood adhesive is commonly used for this purpose because of its strength and versatility. Ensure both surfaces are properly prepared and clean for the best adhesive performance.

So that was our list of the best glues for Plexiglass available on the market. We hope this review-based guide helps you find the correct adhesive for your next project.

And while all the products we listed performed well - both in quality and functionality, we had a couple of favorites that we'd like to mention.

Our first pick has to be the 31310 glue by J-B Weld. This option was the overall best and also worked on most surfaces. What’s more, it is incredibly strong, long-lasting, and versatile enough to replace all your other glues.

Another one of our top favorites would be the 1365882 model by Loctite. The highlight of this fantastic product was its pinpoint nozzle for delicate applications and its resistance to high temperatures.

And that’s it for today, see you next time!

Venturing into the world of glues for plastic eyeglass frames may seem challenging. The J-B Weld Plastic Bonder excels in bonding strength, while the versatile and quick-drying Gorilla Super Glue is another standout. Skim through our precise reviews for a well-informed selection.

The best possible solution during this time is to either fix them yourself or get hold of someone who can do the job for you. And in case you are planning to do it all by yourself, it is best to select a glue that can fix the eyeglass in no time. Sometimes fixing them is the only option as completely replacing the glass might not be a choice.

But when you go to the market, you will surely get perplexed by the number of options out there. So, to bail you out of the situation, we have designed this guide with the top 5 products worth trying. You will also find a buyer’s guide towards the end so that you don’t miss out on any important details.

Listed below are the best glues for plastic eyeglass frames:

J-B Weld Plastic Bonder: J-B Weld Plastic Bonder is a glue that stands out for its exceptional bond strength of 3770 PSI. It sometimes struggles with inconsistent adhesive distribution.
Gorilla: Gorilla super glue offers 10 to 45 seconds of drying time which is one of the fastest among the options, making it superior in cases that demand quick fixes, with a maximum cure time of 24 hours. The quantity is smaller than the J-B Weld.
Aleene's: Aileene's glue has wide surface compatibility, from porous to semi-porous materials. The super-strong nature can result in unwanted adhesion if not carefully applied.
E6000: The E600 adhesive has a unique resistance to high temperatures and the ability to alter its color post-drying, it stands out for its versatility. The lack of an applicator can make the application process challenging.
Starbond EM-150: The Starbond EM-150 is a lab-tested glue that is accompanied by additional micro applicators, ensuring precision in small crack repairs, a feature not commonly available in the list. Its weak packaging can potentially lead to damage during delivery.

1. J-B Weld Plastic Bonder - Best for Quick-setting Repairs

One of the first recommendations that we have for you is the J-B Weld 50139 Plastic Bonder which is best known for its quick-setting formula. You can rest assured that once you repair the eyeglass frames with this solution, they will last for a long time. Within no time, it will get cured to form a robust and permanent bond.

What we liked the best about this product is that not only does it fix your glasses, but it also fills the gap. Hence, you can have your glasses fixed in no time. If you do not want to go to the shop to fix your glass and engage in DIY plastic repairs, this is one of the best options. And the best part is that it comes with a sealable cap, which prevents the glue from drying out when not in use.

On top of that, the strength of this plastic bonder is noteworthy. With a strength of 3770 PSI, you can rest assured that this glue works as an excellent adhesive. Once you fix your eyeglasses with this glue, they will stay that way for a long time.

Moreover, it is pretty simple to work with this item. Once you apply it, all you have to do is wait for about 15 minutes for the glue to set in. Long story short, it reduces your work time considerably.

Some users find the application process of J-B Weld 50139 Plastic Bonder challenging due to the dispenser's unequal adhesive distribution, despite its straightforward working process and quick setting time.

What We Like

Highly durable
Does not dry up too fast
Easy to use
Sealable cap protects the formula

What We Don’t Like

Inconsistent adhesive distribution

Quantity: 1 Double Syringe | Volume: 0.85 fl oz | Cure Time: 30 Minutes | Dry Color: Black | Resistance: Resists Shock, Vibrations, Shrinkage, Expansion

2. Gorilla - Best for Precision & Versatility

The Gorilla ‎7805001 super Glue is one of the best adhesives that you can get your hands on for fixing plastic eyeglass frames. Because it includes a variety of tips in its package, you can use it for a range of applications, and that too completely mess-free. It does not matter how small the surface is; you can apply it anywhere you need to with utmost precision.

Once this glue dries up, you won’t even understand that it had been applied in the first place. It offers a seamless application and a discreet appearance. So, be it plastic sunglasses or eyeglasses, you can fix all kinds of eyewear with it.

Even better, the glue hardly takes any time to dry up. You can expect it to dry up within a span of 10 to 45 seconds and get cured entirely within 24 hours. So, you will be ready to wear your fixed eyeglass in under a day’s time.

Other than that, we were really impressed with how this glue can be used to fix a range of materials and not only plastic. We could not help but appreciate how versatile this item is, as we could use it on rubber, leather, ceramics, or wood. Irrespective of where you apply it, the bond will be quite strong.

Despite showing brilliant performance, we were not really happy with the quantity delivered. The tube is pretty small and is good to fix eyeglasses only. But in case you are planning to use it on bigger surfaces, you might need more than one bottle. Otherwise, you may run out of glue sooner than later.

What We Like

Dries fast
Provides resistance to impact
Versatile use
Seamless look

What We Don’t Like

Quantity is less

Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 0.53 oz | Cure Time: 24 Hours | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Resists Impact

3. Aleene's - Best for DIY Jewelry Makers

Next up on the list, we have Aleene's 94830 29131 jewelry & metal glue. This super glue is best if you are looking for an adhesive that provides a good hold and a strong bond. This is best for DIY jewelry makers and is an excellent option for fixing your eyewear too. With this, you can fix your broken eyeglass in a matter of a few minutes.

What is really noteworthy about this item is that it can work on a range of surfaces. Be it semi-porous or porous materials; this item can perform its wonders anywhere. So, you do not have to restrict yourself to using it just on eyeglasses. If you are feeling experimental, feel free to try it on glass beads, rubber, stones, and even beads.

Moving on to the appearance, we would score it a perfect 10. Once the glue dries up, the finish is excellent and is undetectable. As it becomes completely clear when it dries up, it does not look blotchy and won’t feel like the eyeglass has been repaired. And even if you apply it on any other surface other than plastic, the finish will be the same.

Also, the quantity provided in the package is pretty good. You can use it for all your DIY projects with much ease. And you do not need to buy multiple packs to wrap up the project as you get not 1 but 3 tubes in the pack.

There’s only one downside to this item. It is super sticky, and you should be a little careful with the application process. We had applied it on Swarovski and because the glue was so strong that some parts of the crystal came off. We suggest that you check the strength of the glue before applying it.

What We Like

Can be used on a range of surfaces
High durability
Excellent finish
Good quantity

What We Don’t Like

Can be too strong

Quantity: 3 Tubes | Volume: 0.10 fl oz Each | Cure Time: N/A | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof

4. E6000

If you are on the lookout for an adhesive that is popular for its toughness and durability, the E6000 230010 craft adhesive is the best bet. Irrespective of the kind of substrate that you apply it on, this item will indeed work its magic. This provides a perfect bond, and you will be able to fix everything with it.

While the tubes might look tiny, the adhesive is pretty powerful. This unique formula is well-suited to deliver top-notch performance and is preferred by users for both industrial-level and craft projects. So, you can understand how efficiently it can fix your plastic eyewear.

Moreover, you can turn it into any color that you want once the glue dries up. So, it gets easy to make it match the color of the substance that you put it on. This makes it convenient for you to put it on any surface of your choice, as you can make it in any color.

Furthermore, this item is entirely non-inflammable when it gets cured. Once it gets cured, you can rest assured that it can handle a wide range of temperatures. To be honest, it is entirely temperature-resistant. So, if you use it for any DIY project that involves using high heat, it will handle it well.

There's no doubt that the product scores perfectly when it comes to performance. However, keep in mind that the application might seem a little difficult. The tube does not come with an applicator, and unless you apply it carefully, it might get blotchy.

What We Like

Strong bond
Versatile
Durable finish
Resistant to high temperatures

What We Don’t Like

Application is not easy

Quantity: 1 Tube | Volume: 3.7 fl oz | Cure Time: At Least 24 Hours | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof, Temperature-resistant

5. Starbond EM-150

For a high gloss finish that provides a clear and hard coat, you should give the Starbond EM-150 ‎CECOMINOD040312 a try. This is a great opinion for fixing your plastic eyewear and also for filling wood cracks and the like. You can rest assured that this premium glue will provide nothing but outstanding output.

The best part about this item is that the manufacturer did not compromise on the quality at all. In fact, special attention has been paid to ensuring that the quality of this adhesive is top-notch. This industrial-grade adhesive undergoes proper tests in the lab before it gets packaged. So, there's no doubt that you can handle challenging projects with this item.

On top of that, the application process of this product makes it very impressive. You will find additional applicators, stoppers, and a collection of tips for precise application, all included in the package. As a result, you do not have to visit the local supermarket for additional supplies. You can easily fix the tiniest of the cracks with micro-applicators.

Moreover, this glue comes with a good shelf life. So, even if you do not end up using the entire file in one go, you can keep it saved for future use. It won't disappoint you as it will remain in the exact same condition for years if you store it well.

Despite scoring well on performance, we were not really impressed with the way this item was packaged. The box in which it arrived was a little torn, and we were worried that it got damaged. In case you face a similar problem, you can contact their customer support team to ask for a replacement.

What We Like

Comes with additional supplies
Multi-purpose use
Lasts for a long time
Not viscous

What We Don’t Like

Poor packaging

Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 2 oz | Cure Time: N/A | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Waterproof

What is the Best Glue for Plastic Eyeglass Frames?

If you're looking for the best glue for plastic eyeglass frames, the table below provides a comparison of the quantity per package in units, volume measured in fluid ounces, cure time in hours and minutes, dry color, and resistance properties.

Product	Quantity	Volume	Cure Time	Dry Color	Resistance
J-B Weld Plastic Bonder	1 Double Syringe	0.85 fl oz	30 Minutes	Black	Resists Shock, Vibrations, Shrinkage, Expansion
Gorilla	1 Bottle	0.53 oz	24 Hours	Clear	Resists Impact
Aleene’s	3 Tubes	0.10 fl oz Each	N/A	Clear	Waterproof
E6000	1 Tube	3.7 fl oz	At Least 24 Hours	Clear	Waterproof, Temperature-resistant
Starbond EM-150	1 Bottle	2 oz	N/A	Clear	Waterproof

Buying Guide for the Best Glue for Plastic Eyeglass Frames

Before you can decide which item to go for, we would like to let you know about a few other important considerations. This will help you pick the best adhesive for your plastic eyeglasses. Let's take a look!

Curing Time

Most of the glues that we have mentioned on our list are super quick to dry. So, when you fix the eyeglasses with them, you can go back to wearing them in a few minutes.

However, be cautious about selecting a glue that does not dry up too fast. In case you have shaky fingers, this will become a problem as you will hardly get any time to adjust the pieces. If that's the case with you, consider going with UV light glues.

Simplicity of Use

Unless you are a pro, handling difficult-to-use glues means only one thing- mess. And we are sure that you would not like that.

In order to avoid messy situations, it is best that you find an adhesive that involves an easy application process. Unless it is easy to apply, the results can turn out blotchy too. In case there is no micro-applicator included in the package and if you are planning to fix the eyeglasses with it, we suggest that you get some from the market.

Durability

What good is a product if it does not last long? And adhesives are no different. So, it is always best to look for glues whose bond will not deteriorate soon. There are a few adhesives whose bonds start to weaken within a few months.

We strongly advise that you remain cautious and not buy a product that comes with a similar problem. It is essential to fix your eyewear correctly so that it does not keep troubling you time and often. So, glue that lasts for a long time should be your ideal choice.

Can I use regular household glue to repair my plastic eyeglass frames?

No, regular household glue is not recommended for repairing plastic eyeglass frames because it may not provide the necessary strength or longevity. Instead, use adhesives specifically designed for plastic materials.

Are glues for plastic eyeglass frames safe to use around the lenses?

Yes, glues for plastic eyeglass frames are generally safe to use around lenses, as long as the lenses do not come into direct contact with the adhesive. It's recommended to remove the lenses before a repair, if possible, to avoid potential damage.

Will gluing my plastic eyeglass frames together be as strong as a professional repair?

Gluing plastic eyeglass frames together will not be as strong as a professional repair. Professional services use specific techniques and materials optimized for durability in eyewear repairs.

How can I ensure a clean and precise repair job?

To ensure a clean and precise job, carefully clean the surfaces to be glued using rubbing alcohol or a mild detergent. Apply a minimal amount of adhesive using a toothpick, needle, or fine applicator to ensure accuracy and prevent messes.

The Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler is an outdoor air conditioner capable of cooling a large outdoor space at an affordable rate. That said, other coolers like the VAGKRI Evaporative Cooler and Hessaire MC18M may also be preferable, depending on the user’s needs.

Outdoor cooling can be a troubling prospect, particularly during the summers when the heat just won’t let up. Fortunately, you can use outdoor air conditioners to cool your outdoor patio, deck, or porch. The selection of outdoor air conditioners on the market is huge, which makes choosing one that fits your needs perfectly difficult. What follows is a comprehensive look at the 14 best outdoor AC units that you can consider when looking for a new cooling device.

Listed below are the best outdoor air conditioners:

Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler: The Hessaire MC37M air cooler is excellent for large spaces with its ability to cool about 950 square feet and a high CFM rating of 3,100. Its high power may result in noticeable noise compared to Honeywell's portable evaporative cooler.
VAGKRI Evaporative Cooler: An air cooler boasting three cooling methods - water, air, and ice. Powerful cooling for up to 700 square feet. While its 8-gallon water tank allows for long-duration cooling, the instruction manual's clarity lags behind other models.
Honeywell Portable Evaporative Cooler: The Honeywell evaporative cooler has a compact design, ideal for medium-sized outdoor spaces. The smaller size and coverage area of only 350 square feet make it less effective for larger spaces compared to the Hessaire MC37M.
Hessaire MC18M Portable Evaporative Cooler: The Hessaire MC18M is an affordable and lightweight option. It can cool medium to semi-large spaces, covering up to 500 square feet. This cooler has fewer secondary features, in comparison with the VAGKRI evaporative cooler.
Honeywell CO48PM Evaporative Cooler: Honeywell CO48PM is an evaporative cooler characterized by high-power cooling suitable for large areas and a hefty 10.6-gallon water tank for extended use. Mobility might become an issue due to its weight, unlike the lightweight Hessaire MC18M.

1. Best Overall: Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

Low-weight and highly mobile
High-power evaporative cooler
Continuous-fill option
High-coverage area

What We Don't Like

It can be a little loud at times

The Hessaire MC37M evaporative cooler is an air conditioner geared for outdoor usage with a low-weight build for easy mobility. It is designed to be compact yet has enough power to cool about 950 square feet of space with no issues.

This portable air conditioner comes with four heavy-duty locking casters, further leaning into the mobility aspect of the air conditioner. I found that I could move it around my patio without much trouble, even with a full tank. If it suits your fancy, you can take the cooler along on a camping trip, as it is light and mobile enough for RVs.

As for its cooling capacity, the MC37M has a high CFM rating of 3,100. The fan in this cooling unit has three speeds and oscillating louvers for even distribution, comfort, and coverage. Both of these components can be controlled separately, allowing you a degree of control over the intensity of cooling. That said, I did find the cooler to be a little louder than what would be ideal.

The three sides of the unit have high-density cooling pads that increase evaporative surface area and spread cooler air. Moreover, you can attach a garden hose to the float adapter to make use of the continuous fill option. With this, you needn’t worry about repeated refills, as the cooler will do it for you.

Coverage Area: 750 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 3,100 | Power Consumption: 250 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.3 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

2. Best Powerful Cooler for a Moderate Price Range: VAGKRI Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

8-gallon water tank
Includes a remote control
Ice compartment for extra cooling
A continuous fill hose attachment

What We Don't Like

The instructions manual may be a bit unclear

The VAGKRI evaporative cooler uses three cooling methods to provide you with cool air: water, air, and ice. It can reduce ambient temperature, add humidity, and act as a fan when using these modes.

As for its power, the VAGKRI portable swamp cooler can cover up to 700 square feet of area at the rate of 2,100 CFM, which makes for powerful cooling with decent area coverage.

Furthermore, it has an intake panel on three of its sides that allows quick cooling and delivery of cold air through a powerful motor. Additionally, it has an 8-gallon water tank large enough to provide sufficient cooling, and it can store ice in a compartment for a chilling effect. The water tank can be filled manually or by using the continuous fill option that keeps the cooler running for hours on end.

Lastly, the portable air conditioner features a digital display paired with an electronic control panel to keep the operation simple. For secondary features, the VAGKRI cooler has multiple fan speeds to choose from, a timer for auto-shutdown, and a fully functional remote control. I did find the instructions manual to be a little unclear about the functionalities of the swamp cooler, however.

Coverage Area: 700 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 2,100 | Power Consumption: 105 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 7.9 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

3. Best Compact Outdoor AC: Honeywell Portable Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

Compact design
Detachable water tank
Top-loading ice compartment
Outdoor-safe

What We Don't Like

May not be effective for larger spaces

For medium-sized outdoor spaces, the Honeywell Portable Evaporative Cooler may be an option to look into. It is constructed with three primary components: a fan, a pump, and a honeycomb-shaped absorbent panel.

Being geared for medium-sized spaces, the Honeywell portable air conditioner is appropriately small. Thus, it can be moved around with ease and placed anywhere you like, so long as it has access to a power outlet. And because of its smaller size, the cooler doesn’t cover as large an area.

Covering 350 square feet, the Honeywell portable air conditioner can provide a cool breeze for lounging on your patio on summer days. It comes with three humidity settings to keep you comfortable while it runs: fan, ice, and water.

The water tank on this cooler is detachable, allowing you to fill it up separately without having to move the whole unit. And much like the VAGKRI outdoor air conditioner before it, the Honeywell cooler features an ice compartment for cooler air distribution in hotter spaces.

For secondary features, the cooler comes with a remote control and a timer that is programmable for up to 7.5 hours.

Coverage Area: 350 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 806 | Power Consumption: 288 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 7.9 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

4. Best Affordable Outdoor AC: Hessaire MC18M Portable Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

Affordable portable air conditioner
Lightweight design
Low electricity consumption
Decent water tank capacity

What We Don't Like

Few secondary features

The Hessaire MC18M is an affordable option that is designed to cool spaces that are medium and semi-large. It functions as a humidifier in dry climates, using low electricity to increase condensation and air delivery.

At 16 pounds, the unit can be lifted up and moved around without any issues. It does include caster wheels to improve mobility when the water tank is full. And despite its small size, it is capable of covering a relatively large area of 500 square feet.

This model features knob-style controls that can be used to switch between two fan speeds. Moreover, you can combine high and low fan speeds with the pump to create the humidifying environment needed.

Hessaire has included both the manual and continuous fill for water filling, much like the MC37M that I reviewed earlier. The cooler can run for about four hours on a single manual refill, which is a decent water tank capacity. That said, the lack of any additional features may be a point of contention for some.

Coverage Area: 500 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 1,300 | Power Consumption: 85 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 4.8 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 2

5. Best Weather-resistant Outdoor AC: Honeywell CO48PM Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

High build quality
High cooling capacity
Large water tank
Weatherproof and UV-resistant

What We Don't Like

Mobility can be a bit of an issue

The Honeywell CO48PM is a high-power evaporative controller intended to be used in large spaces. This tower-type outdoor air conditioner can be used in patios, garages, decks, backyards, and more.

It makes use of honeycomb pads on three of its four sides to maximize coverage. And combined with its powerful cooling, the CO48PM can be placed anywhere in a large area without sacrificing cool air.

To sustain this high cooling capacity, the Honeywell cooler comes with a large 10.6-gallon tank. Moreover, the tank can be connected to a garden hose for continuous refilling, enabling it to run for hours uninterrupted.

The body of this outdoor air conditioner is weatherproof as well as UV resistant, meaning it can withstand being outside for a good while. Its high build quality means that the unit will continue to function for a long time.

As for mobility, the CO48PM can’t be lifted without help, but it does come with caster wheels to help with it. Even so, it may be difficult to move around because of its weight. It also has a long electrical cord that allows you to move it without interrupting the airflow. Additionally, you can avoid messy tangles with the dedicated cord storage.

Coverage Area: 1037 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 1,702 | Power Consumption: 150 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.6 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

6. Best Battery-powered Outdoor AC: EEIEER Portable Air Conditioner

What We Like

Small and lightweight design
Affordable
Battery-powered
Quick cooling

What We Don't Like

Runs out of water quickly

The EEIEER Portable Air Conditioner is a small and affordable cooling fan that can sit on a desk in an outdoor office. It is targeted towards personal use and so, its fan covers a relatively small area.

This model combines the functionalities of a table fan, an air cooler, a humidifier, and night lights for a complete home office cooling solution. It comes with three distinct wind speed functions in the form of natural, cold, and strong wind that cater to different needs.

Much like most other outdoor air conditioners on this list, the EEIEER cooler uses water evaporation for fast cooling. While it doesn’t have a dedicated ice storage compartment, you can add ice to the water tank to further speed up the cooling process.

But unlike most other electric outdoor air conditioners on this list, the EEIEER cooler runs on a 4,000 mAh battery. Combined with its lightweight and low power consumption, the desk cooler can be taken to summer camps and other travels as the primary cooling device. The small water tank also means that it can run out of water very quickly.

For secondary features, the EEIEER air conditioner comes with a remote controller that is fairly responsive, along with a 2/4 H timing setting.

Coverage Area: 120 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 700 | Power Consumption: 10 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 0.11 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

7. Best Humidifying Cooler: Paris Rhone Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

High-cooling capacity
Large water tank
High moisture output as a humidifier
Large air spread area

What We Don't Like

The top-fill design may not be very effective

If you want to maximize cooling in your outdoor space, you may look at the Paris Rhone cooler as an option. This is a swamp cooler that comes with four ice packs to spread moisturized and cool air across a wide area.

The Paris Rhone portable air conditioner is a 2,943 CFM outdoor air conditioner that features a maximum air velocity of 29.5 ft/s. This is paired with a large 11.9-gallon water tank that can keep the air conditioner going for up to 24 hours at low speed. It has a top-fill design for refilling, although I am not quite sold on its effectiveness.

You can use the Paris Rhone cooler as a humidifier as well which has a moisture output of 6 L/h for refreshing and humidified air. It comes with three wind speeds to choose from that spread air across the area with both auto and manual oscillation.

Despite the weight, the cooler can be moved around with the caster wheels. You can position the air conditioner in a manner that keeps it closer to the garden hose for the continuous fill feature.

And lastly, it has an easy-to-use remote control, along with a touch-operated panel.

Coverage Area: 1470 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 2,943 | Power Consumption: 25 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 1.58 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

8. Best Build Quality: Uthfy Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

Sheet metal body
High cooling capacity
High-density cooling pads
High water tank capacity

What We Don't Like

The cooler may be a bit too heavy

The Uthfy Evaporative Cooler is a high-powered swamp cooler that comes with three ice boxes and a large water tank to facilitate cooling. Its body is made from sheet metal that is impact and corrosion-resistant and easy to clean.

It features a powerful fan with a high cooling capacity of 3531 CFM, which is combined with three fan speeds and auto side-to-side oscillation. The fan works in tandem with the three rigid high-density cooling pads that increase the evaporative surface area for spreading cooler air. And with the included ice boxes, the cooling effect increases even further.

The large 10.6-gallon water tank can be filled both manually and by using the continuous fill option. It can fit a standard garden hose with the water pipe joint included on the body. Additionally, it features a drainage port at the bottom to make cleaning and maintenance easy.

As for operation, the Uthfy air conditioner has four independent round buttons that control fan speed, from low to medium and high. The console also includes a built-in oscillation button that controls the side-to-side oscillation. For vertical adjustment, you can manually move the louvers up and down as required. These functions can also be accessed from the remote control.

It is a little heavier than most portable air conditioners, but it remains mobile with four heavy-duty caster wheels. Two of these feature brakes as well for easy maneuverability.

Coverage Area: 1715 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 3,531 | Power Consumption: 200 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.6 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

9. Best Small Evaporative Cooler: Sharper Image Portable Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

LED water level display
Detachable water tank
Doubles as a humidifier
Built-in timer

What We Don't Like

Low water tank capacity

The Sharper Image Portable Evaporative Cooler is a small cooler geared towards relatively smaller spaces. It strives to maintain a comfortable space with an evaporative system both indoors and outdoors.

This model features three different speed settings to choose from, namely low, medium, and high. The Sharper Image cooler can be used as a humidifier as well to improve the air quality of your patio or room.

You can find the swing and oscillation features in this cooler, in addition to the built-in timer settings. The timer ranges from 0.5 hours to 9.5 hours, with an interval of 30 minutes between each set. Additionally, this cooler has an energy-saving mode to further reduce the amount of power it consumes during operation.

Featuring a detachable water tank capacity of 1.6 liters, the Sharper Image cooler can run for a few hours without interruption. That said, the tank capacity does leave a bit to be desired. You can view the water level on an LED display to get a better idea of when to refill it.

Lastly, it comes with a wireless remote control that allows you to control all of these functions from a distance.

Coverage Area: 250 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 750 | Power Consumption: 90 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 0.42 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

10. Best Premium Outdoor Air Conditioner: Big Ass Fans Cool Space 400

What We Like

3,600-floor area coverage
Powerful cooling fan
Long run time without refills
Effective cooling media

What We Don't Like

May be priced too high for some

It is indeed a big fan with a high cooling capacity! The Big Ass Fans Cool Space 400 is a premium high-power portable air conditioner that covers a large floor area without much trouble. It makes use of a refrigerant to power its cooling even further.

Using its 36-inch fan, the Big Ass Fans cooler can cover an area of 3,600 square feet comfortably. Boasting a CFM rating that ranges from 6,400 to 9,700, the portable air conditioner is capable of cooling down air up to 33 degrees Fahrenheit.

It has a 46-gallon tank that can keep the fan running for up to 10 hours without needing a direct connection to a water source. That said, you can keep it connected to a garden hose to make use of the continuous fill function to keep it running endlessly.

The cooling media used by the Big Ass Fans cooler is 8 inches thick, long-lasting, chemically treated, and coated in a thermosetting resin. This makes it resistant to algae and dirt, which can reduce the effort needed to clean the media. Dirt and other particles cannot penetrate into the substrate, which can be convenient for maintenance.

As is the standard, the Cool Space 400 has variable speed controls that allow you to maintain the desired temperature. It comes with locking swivel casters, automatic low-water shutoff, and a drain plug for maintenance.

These features don’t come in an affordable price tag, though. This means that the Cool Space 400 may be priced too high for some users just looking for a moderately-sized cooler.

Coverage Area: 3,600 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 6,400 to 9,700 | Power Consumption: 515 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 46 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 10

11. Outdoor AC With Best Evaporation Rate: Portacool Cyclone 140

What We Like

High-power portable air conditioner
Effective evaporative media
900 square feet of coverage
40-gallon reservoir

What We Don't Like

Single speed fan

The Portacool Cyclone 140 is a portable outdoor cooler designed to be used in patios, garages, and outdoor spaces. It’s a portable air conditioner that sits in the premium price range, featuring many options to customize your cooling preferences.

Equipped with Kuul Comfort evaporative media, the Portacool Cyclone 140 has a high rate of water evaporation to provide cooling comfort. It is powerful enough to cool up to 900 square feet of area, along with a cooling capacity of 3,900. The lack of different fan speeds does leave a bit to be desired.

Facilitating this cooling is the large 40-gallon water reservoir, which comes with an LED water level indicator that pinpoints when you need to refill it. The reservoir can be filled manually or using the continuous fill option for continuous use.

Moreover, the Cyclone 140 can be moved around using the caster wheels without any issues. It can be placed where needed so long as it is within range of a power outlet.

Coverage Area: 900 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 4,200 | Wattage: 480 | Reservoir Capacity: 40 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 2

12. Quietest Evaporative Cooler: MEPTY Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

Designed to maximize cooling
Easy to move
Quiet fan
Wide oscillation system

What We Don't Like

Remote battery compartment is not easily accessible

Designed to be fast and effective at cooling, the MEPTY evaporative cooler features three high-density cooling pads for maximum evaporative surface area. Combined with a high-powered fan, the MEPTY cooler is capable of quickly reducing the ambient temperature.

The 3,531 CFM portable air conditioner can cool outdoor areas and rooms up to 900 square feet while spreading 3,100 cubic feet per minute of cool air. Using a wide oscillation system, the cold breeze can be distributed throughout the personal space with no trouble.

Featuring a built-in 10.6-gallon water tank, the MEPTY cooler can keep working for several hours. The large water tank leans into the cooling aspect of the evaporative air conditioner, spreading even more cool wind.

Besides, it has a top-refill design that ensures the water hits the cooling medium more effectively. Moreover, the water tank level will be visible to you as you refill it, giving you an idea of when to stop refilling.

As for other features, the MEPTY portable air conditioner has four universal wheels with brakes on two for mobility. It can be moved around on a flat surface with relative ease in large spaces without needing help to lift it up. And for operation, the cooler has round buttons for fan speeds, as well as three switches for swing, cooling, and power options. Its remote battery compartment was surprisingly difficult to access, I must add.

Coverage Area: 900 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 3,531 | Power Consumption: 200 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 10.6 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

13. Best for Customizable Cooling: Yescom Evaporative Cooler

What We Like

Easy to move
120-degree vertical wind direction adjustment
Customizable wind speed
Built-in auto timer

What We Don't Like

The cooling power may not be high enough

Sitting in the low-to-medium price range, the Yescom Evaporative Cooler is an option to look at as an outdoor air conditioner. It is geared towards efficient energy consumption, meaning that it consumes very little power to cool down a given area.

This is a portable remote control-operated cooler that can switch between fan and humidifier modes quickly. With its 17-liter water tank capacity, the cooler can keep going for several hours.

It comes with three fan speed options and a built-in timer to turn the machine on and off automatically. You can choose from 13.5 m/s on high, 10 m/s on medium, and 7.5 m/s on low for fan speeds. This can work with the timer, with the latter featuring a 1-8 hour customizable window, along with a 120-degree wind direction adjustment function.

The Yescom cooler has side handles on top, along with four caster wheels on the bottom for mobility. These features make the cooler highly mobile, requiring little effort to move around the space. Though its power may feel relatively low in comparison to other portable air conditioners.

Coverage Area: 650 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 525-729 | Power Consumption: 200 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 4.49 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

14. Best Low-priced Outdoor Table Fan: HIFRESH Small Evaporative Air Cooler

What We Like

Small, lightweight design
360-degree auto-oscillation
LED touch control panel
Continuous mist spray as a humidifier

What We Don't Like

Does not cover a large area

Designed for outdoor office usage, the HIFRESH evaporative air cooler is a small desk fan that can sit unobtrusively on your table. It is a small portable cooler that can be moved around easily and features 360-degree auto oscillation.

The HIFRESH cooler works using a 4,000 mAh battery that can be recharged using an ordinary USB-C type cable. You can charge it on the go in your car or from a power bank if needed, further adding to its portability. It can be operated with the LED touch panel that sits on top of the cover.

Its water tank can hold up to 16 fluid ounces of water, which is sufficient to keep the air conditioner going for some time. Additionally, you can add ice cubes to the tank to add a little oomph to the cooling. That said, it doesn’t have a particularly large coverage area.

The HIFRESH evaporative air cooler can also double as a humidifier by toggling the humidification mode on. It sprays a continuous mist to simulate humid climates that can help reduce nasal congestion, dry skin, and cough that a dry summer day can cause.

Coverage Area: 300 Square Feet | CFM Rating: 700 | Power Consumption: 5 Watts | Reservoir Capacity: 0.12 Gallons | Number of Fan Speeds: 3

What is the Best Outdoor Air Conditioner?

If you're on the lookout for the best outdoor air conditioner, the table below displays specifications detailing the coverage area measured in square feet, the CFM rating, power consumption in wattage, reservoir capacity measured in gallons, and the number of fan speeds available.

Outdoor ACs	Coverage Area	CFM Rating	Power Consumption	Reservoir Capacity	Number of Fan Speeds
Hessaire MC37M	750 Square Feet	3,100	250 Watts	10.3 Gallons	3
Vagkri Evaporative Cooler	700 square feet	2,100	105 Watts	7.9 Gallons	3
Honeywell Portable	350 square feet	806	288 watts	7.9 Gallons	3
Hessaire MC18M Portable	500 square feet	1300	85 watts	4.8 Gallons	2
Honeywell CO48PM	1037 square feet	1702	150 watts	10.6 Gallons	3
EEIEER Portable AC	120 square feet	700	10 watts	0.11 Gallons	3
Paris Rhone Evaporative Cooler	1470 square feet	2943	25 watts	1.58 Gallons	3
Uthfy Evaporative Cooler	1715 square feet	3531	200 Watts	10.6 Gallons	3
Sharper Image Portable	250 square feet	750	90 Watts	0.42 Gallons	3
Big Ass Fans Cool-Space 400	3600 square feet	6400 to 9700	515 watts	46 Gallons	10
Portacool PACCY140 Cyclone 140	900 square feet	4,200	480 watts	40 Gallons	2
MEPTY Evaporative Cooler	900 square feet	3,531	200 Watts	10.6 Gallons	3
Yescom Evaporative Cooler	650 square feet	525 to 729	200 Watts	4.49 Gallons	3
HIFRESH Small Evaporative Cooler	300 square feet	700	5 Watts	0.12 Gallons	3

Buying Guide for the Best Outdoor Air Conditioner

Unlike indoor Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) units, outdoor air conditioners make use of an evaporation system to cool air in a space. Since there are no walls to contain the cool air outdoors, these units have to function in a manner that is fundamentally different.

Unlike a central air conditioner, the British Thermal Unit is not used to determine how capable an outdoor cooling unit is. A different unit, named “CFM” (short for cubic feet per meter), is used to gauge the cooling capabilities of an outdoor air conditioner.

Thus, picking the right air conditioner for your outdoor space is fundamentally different from picking one for your living room or bedroom. Here’s a comprehensive look at the factors that make for a good outdoor air conditioner.

Water Tank Size

Outdoor air conditioners make use of a water tank as a part of their evaporation system. The larger this tank is, the longer your air conditioning unit will be able to cool your room down.

Now, the water tank should only be as large as what is needed to consistently cool the required area. Any smaller, and you will need to refill it frequently to keep the air conditioner working well. And an oversized one will consume too much water and electricity, on top of potentially simulating humid climates.

Some models come with an autofill or continuous fill feature that requires the unit to be connected to a garden hose. The air conditioner will draw water from the exhaust hose when the tank goes below a certain water level, circumventing the need to refill it repeatedly. And, if you need quick fills, you may also find dual hose models on the market.

Air Conditioner Size

The size of an outdoor air conditioner directly affects its mobility, and units with large water tanks will be difficult to move around. Ideally, if you want the unit to not be a semi-permanent fixture in your patio, you will want it to be as light as possible. A tower-type air conditioner may also work here, provided that it is designed for outdoor use. This includes the weight of the water in its tank as well.

Something that is of extreme importance to outdoor air conditioners is their ability to handle weather conditions. Some models can handle the sun when placed outside, but it’s generally a good idea to keep them away from direct exposure. You will need the air conditioner to be mobile enough to circumvent this issue.

CFM Rating

The CFM rating is a metric that determines how efficiently an air conditioner moves air in any given space. Outdoor conditioners with high CFM ratings are highly efficient at moving surrounding air in said space. Be sure to match your space with a unit that has the appropriate CFM rating.

Advanced Features

Secondary features add to the quality-of-life aspect of outdoor conditioners. These features are not strictly necessary for an outdoor AC to perform its task as necessary, but having them adds to their overall value. Some of them can be:

Fan oscillation
Fan speeds
Programmable timers
Auto-shutdown feature
Humidifier
Remote controls

A small caveat associated with air conditioners that come with these features is that they, too, require regular maintenance to function properly. Evaporators, condensers, and compressors are all vital parts of the air conditioner that must be taken care of properly every once in a while. Doing so will keep every part of your AC working properly for a long while.

Electronic and Mechanical Air Conditioners

Electronic air conditioners are the most common type of portable outdoor air conditioner. These include all the features mentioned earlier in order to perform their function in a convenient manner. But if you don’t want to commit to the relatively high maintenance needs of such devices, you could look into an alternative.

Mechanical air conditioners feature analog controls and mechanically controlled vents that work in a way similar to electronic portable air conditioners. The key difference here is that these are more affordable and simplified options that only require very occasional maintenance. Owing to their simplified nature, mechanical portable air conditioners can also be DIY-fixed, which is usually not possible with their electronic counterparts.

Moreover, these portable air conditioners have a mechanical air cleaner that uses a fibrous mesh that clears the air passing through them. It does so by trapping the particles onto the surface of the fibers, where they remain immobile.

You may also find mechanical outdoor air conditioners to be energy efficient, saving you some money on the electricity bill.

How long can I keep my evaporative cooler on?

Yes, you can keep your evaporative cooler on continuously for long periods if necessary, although it's essential to ensure adequate water supply. To prolong its lifespan and maintain efficiency it is advisable to turn it off when the desired temperature is reached or when not in use. Routine maintenance and inspections should also be carried out to ensure optimal operation.

How do I extend the lifespan of my outdoor air conditioner?

To extend the lifespan of your outdoor air conditioner, regular maintenance is crucial, including cleaning or replacing the filter, inspecting refrigerant levels, and ensuring the unit is clear of debris. Periodic professional servicing can catch small issues before they become bigger problems. Moreover, reducing the workload on the unit by using it judiciously and improving home insulation can also increase its lifespan.

Can I run an evaporative cooler without water?

While it is physically possible to run an evaporative cooler without water, it is not recommended. The primary function of an evaporative cooler, also known as a swamp cooler, is to cool the air through the evaporation of water. Running it without water will cause the unit to simply circulate air without cooling it, and continuous operation in this manner can potentially damage the system.

Are outdoor air conditioners environmentally friendly?

The environmental friendliness of outdoor air conditioners depends on factors such as the type of refrigerant they use and their energy efficiency. Traditional models that use HFC refrigerants can contribute to global warming if the refrigerant is released into the atmosphere. Newer models are becoming more energy-efficient and use environmentally friendly refrigerants, which can reduce their environmental impact.

For the simple fact that evaporative air coolers require more power to function correctly, gauging how powerful yours needs to be is a bit tricky. There is no shortage of options for a great portable air conditioner, after all.

During my testing, I found the Hessaire MC37M Evaporative Cooler to be the best outdoor air conditioner. It offers everything that an evaporative fan needs at an affordable rate without consuming too much power.

That said, evaporative coolers from brands like VAGKRI and Honeywell are not far behind, offering something similar while trading out a feature or two. They serve slightly different needs, and they may just be what you need.

At the end of the day, there is no correct answer when it comes to the conundrum of choosing a portable outdoor air conditioner. As a customer, what you need out of the evaporative cooler is all that matters, after all.

Science fiction is that unique genre in any literary or artistic medium that brings the best out of an artist’s mind. It juxtaposes whatever abstract thoughts the mind produces, forming the most extraordinary shapes and shadows and grotesque structures with a practical line of scientific thought and explanation.

This is interesting as although the scientific and rational mind strives to explain these strange figures to lessen their terrific effect on the psyche; ironically, it ends up pulling these fascinating thoughts to the verge of reality which intensifies the horror of the unreal!

And this is precisely why, humankind has always had a horrifying fascination with science fiction and fantastical interpretations, more in the area of visual renditions than in any other medium, driven by the inspirational effect it can have on an individual's imagination.

This is precisely why artists have turned towards sci-fi and fantasy art books time and again to be thrilled and to be inspired enough to be as thrilling in creativity as the mind that creates the most unbelievable of all unusual things.

Here's the list of the 21 best sci-fi art books for artists, curated to ignite the imagination and unleash the creative potential by exploring the captivating world of science fiction and fantastical interpretations through visual renditions.

1. The Art of Ian Miller - Best for Gothic Art

The ‘Art of Ian Miller’ is an extensive retrospective and analysis of Miller's unconventional artwork. Miller has been greatly influenced by the master storyteller and artist of gothic and fantastical fiction, HP Lovecraft himself which stunningly reflects in his creations.

Most of Miller’s grotesque, fantastical outlines and gothic imagery have been used on HP Lovecraft’s book covers and Games Workshop publications along with incorporating his signature style into the concept art used in films.

Miller’s mastery of the techniques of making the art of macabre seems to hold no hostage when it transforms his imagination into magnificent visual art forms. The book contains everything from some of his most disturbing and haunting depictions to enchanting Tolkien-esque characters and unnerving illustrations that may remind of the etching by Gustav Dore.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.29 x 0.73 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 2.62 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

2. H.R Giger’s Necronomicon - Best for Sci-Fi Art

Published in the year 1977, ‘Necronomicon’ was the first significant compendium of images that were created by prestigious Swiss artist, H.R Giger. This book was subsequently given to Ridley Scott during the pre-production of his movie, Alien, after which he hired Giger to create the conceptual designs and artwork for the film.

Sphinx Verlag first published the book. Thereafter, Morpheus International took it upon themselves to republish the book in the year 1993 along with a significant part of the designs produced by Giger for Alien.

A second collection of Giger’s images came out in print in 1985, known as the Necronomicon 2 which was published by Edition C in Switzerland.

Interestingly the title of Giger’s book is named after H.P Lovecraft’s fictional grimoire, “Necronomicon” which he invented and used as a “plot device” for his stories. Lovecraft’s “Necronomicon” is a compendium of “pre-human” lore enmeshed in Gothic elements of storytelling and depiction that was compiled by Arab Abdul Alhazred, a fictional mad Arab of Lovecraft’s creation, circa 700.

The fact Giger’s book of images has been republished and produced in numerous sci-fi art books makes it a unique and precious object for all lovers of the genre.

Length: 92 pages | Dimensions: 12.25 x 0.5 x 17 inches | Weight: 3.69 pounds | Publisher: Morpheus International

3. The Art of Chesley Bonestell by Ron Miller - Best for Space Art

Co-written with Frederick C. Durante with a forward from Sir Arthur C. Clarke, ‘The Art of Chesley Bonestell’ displays over 300 images by famed space artist and architect, Ron Miller.

These include drawings from the illustrations of the chief engineer’s plans for the Golden Gate Bridge for the benefit of investors. It also contains one of his favorite paintings from the ones that he had himself made, ‘The Engulfed Cathedral A Fantasy’ and his pre-space-travel lunar along with Martian landscapes created for magazines such as ‘Galaxy and Astounding.’

It can be safely remarked that if you aren’t an astronaut for real, then all your conceptions of how outer space might look have probably been formed by Chesley Bonestell's super-realistic paintings of the planetary scenes. And this was also the fact that caused a tremendous sensation when some of the images were published by ‘Life’ in 1944.

Length: 256 pages | Dimensions: 9.1 x 1.1 x 11.65 inches | Weight: 3.54 pounds | Publisher: Paper Tiger

4. The Art Of John Harris: Beyond The Horizon - Best for Science Fantasy Art

John Harris is unquestionably a name to reckon with when it comes to science fantasy fiction, and we could definitely tell why, as he grew up with books written by legends such as Arthur C Clarke, Isaac Asimov, and Alfred Bester. The influence of such writers on Harris has been profound, and the effect seen is unmistakable in his art books.

Harris is known as one of the most influential contributors to the sci-fi genre, creating a myriad of spectacular visual imagery in his books since the mid-’70s.

The Art Of John Harris: Beyond The Horizon stands to be a celebrated example of artwork that includes everything from vast and expansive landscapes and tower cities to ethereal, floating cities. This marvelous hardback consists of illustrations created by Harris over a span of four hefty decades that sound like an absolute treasure-house of imagery.

Although Harris worked mainly with watercolors taking them as his essential color medium for all sorts of illustrations, he was also known to experiment extensively with acrylics. He also has a book containing illustrations in colored pencils that capture his surrealistic take on fantastic world scenery.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.35 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 2.59 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

5. Middle-Earth Envisioned - Best for Tolkien-inspired Art

Few authors have been known to aspire and achieve the kind of creative grandeur that Tolkien had with his unbelievable portrayal of the magical Middle Earth in his equally mystical and unparalleled fantasy fiction, The Lord Of The Rings.

This literary milestone has been impacting and influencing art for decades and continues to inspire spectacular visual adaptations.

‘Middle-Earth Envisioned’ captures the wide spectrum of Tolkien-inspired art from the first unauthorized Canadian broadcast in 1953, comic books, Peter Jackson, and letter-known adaptations such as one for Russian TV.

All in all, this is one book that all fans of Tolkien’s fan should have by means.

Length: 216 pages | Dimensions: 10.5 x 1 x 12.38 inches | Weight: 3.55 pounds | Publisher: Race Point Publishing

6. The Art of Jim Burns: Hyperluminal

Hyperluminal celebrates 40 years’ worth of Jim Burns’s works and stands to be one of the most precious sources of inspiration for all die-hards of the fantasy art genre. Burns is known for the covers that he has created for some of the most esteemed contributors to the fantasy-fiction genre such as Peter F Hamilton, Anne McCaffrey, and George RR Martin.

And if you find these to be some of the finest works of Burns, then do get yourself a copy of Hyperluminal right away. This is one book that will help widen your perspective of the fantasy world, helping you to understand how artists can draw distinct parallelism between it with the mundane world.

The art of Jim Burns shows all the proofs of having transitioned and transcended the traditional techniques of art, pervading and imbibing all the essentials of Photoshop and methods of digital illustration, truly establishing as a prolific artist in the field.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.3 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 1.25 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

7. E338: The Art Of Loic Zimmermann

The cinematic art genius Loic Zimmerman is a celebrated and greatly sought-after visual artist for renowned filmmakers who have redefined cinematic art in itself! Zimmerman’s profound knowledge and incredibly deft handling of both 2D and 3D mediums has not only influenced other subgenres of fantasy in cinema substantially but has also earned him the reputation of having a “hotch-potch punk” attitude towards his work. This is because of the rebellious spirit that is often reflected in his works.

Zimmerman's own nature is not very different from the nature of his art itself. A unique and quirky character himself, Loic Zimmerman brings a new perspective to legendary pop culture icons that include names like Wolverine and Bob Dylan.

This reflects the extent of his imagination, his understanding of the subject, and his skills as an artist. E338, made from equal parts surrealism, eroticism, and nightmarish horror, stands to be magnificent proof of Zimmerman’s genius.

Length: 152 pages | Dimensions: 10 x 0.5 x 10 inches | Weight: 2.25 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing

8. Substrata: Open World Dark Fantasy

The game, Darksiders by Vigil Games had shot up high in fame owing to its stunning art and battle levels that were created and developed by the esteemed game illustrator, Paul Richards. After the eventual collapse of the game, Richards gathered over 80 artists who have previously created some of the top video games ever from all corners of the world, together compiling what is known as the book of “what-if” on the Darksiders 3 concept art.

In the absence of studio constraints, the genre of dark fantasy fiction saw the unrestrained flow of imagination and absolute creative genius of the artists’ minds which came together to give birth to some of the most beautifully gruesome characters that there could ever have been.

These included monsters, designs, vast open spaces and locations, monsters, and all that a video game fan can ever dream of seeing in print. Also, one of the best things about this book is that it provides you with precious insight into their WIPs and gives you an idea of the world of video game concept design.

Length: 240 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 1 x 12 inches | Weight: 2.56 pounds | Publisher: Udon Entertainment

9. The Art Of Greg Spalenka

Greg Spalenka is no short of being a legendary illustrator who has produced simply bewitching visual art in his career that spanned more than four decades in time. His level of expertise involved creating concept film art and illustrating boxing heroes as well as marvelous Polaroid photographs. There is simply no section in the field Spalenka has not been known to have experimented with.

The Art of Greg Spalenka chronicles and showcases almost all of the artworks that Spalenka has produced in his entire career up until the point where he gracefully transitions into the world of digital illustration.

The highlights of the book include all that we would want to have from Spalenka, including the spectacular vistas and characters from the Chronicles of Narnia: The Voyage of the Dawn Treader illustrations!

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.34 x 0.79 x 12.5 inches | Weight: 2.72 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

10. Sci-Fi and Fantasy Oil Painting Techniques by Patrick Jones

Patrick Jones during his learning days had been influenced and inspired by prominent names in art such as Frank Frazetta and Boris Vallejo which compelled him to leave his native Ireland and settle in London where he pursued his artistic career.

Over time Jones developed a brilliant understanding of traditional methods of art including a steady focus on oils, eventually exploring the field of digital art mediums, with Corel Painter becoming his favorite software.

His profound understanding of both forms of art foregrounds some of the crucial rules for getting it just right in fantasy oil paintings. So, if you’re aspiring to learn more about the traditional art methods in the fantasy genre, then this is a book that you should use as a definitive guide and reference tool for the purpose.

Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.9 x 11 inches | Weight: 2.13 pounds | Publisher: Korero Press

11. Spectrum 25 The Best in Contemporary Fantastical Art

The Spectrum 25 is almost hailed as essential for fantasy art as anything can ever be in the field itself for all ardent admirers of the sci-fi and fantasy art genre. The edition that was launched on the book’s 20th anniversary is also the last book that was written and compiled by its celebrated author and illustrator, Laurie Lee Brom.

With the kind of magically beautiful visual art that the artist creates for the book, it would just be a mistake not to have a copy of it if you’re a fan of mystical and fantastical art. And this is precisely what makes Brom every bit a worthy recipient of the Grand Master Award along with the reputation of having been featured on the cover of every issue.

The book contains all that our imagination can spell out when it comes to fantasy art and all forms of it be it in comics, editorials, or even unpublished works. You will find a new, curious character on every page waiting for you to get to know the story of their origin.

Length: 304 pages | Dimensions: 9.35 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches | Weight: 1 pound | Publisher: Flesk Publications

12. Guillermo del Toro: Cabinet of Curiosities

Guillermo del Toro needs no introduction. The Mexican filmmaker has acquired enough accolades for the world to know of his brilliant works as a master storyteller and an artistic genius. And in this semi-autobiographical book, you will all of the works of del Toro that speak of his admiration and fascination with occult art.

The ‘Cabinet of Curiosities’ is replete with scribbled notes, sketches, doodles, storyboards, collections, and interestingly enough, “obsessions” that take us on a tour of del Toro’s enlightened, mystic mind from which he fashions a strategy of infusing all of his absolute masterpieces with the essence of the supernatural.

The book also gives us a visual slice of his sprawling mansion in LA that is considered almost like a museum containing oddities full of film memorabilia and original props, portraying del Toro’s larger-than-life imagination.

Length: 611 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Publisher: Harper Design

13. Sexy Robot by Hajime Sorayama

‘Sexy Robot’ was that work that had extolled Hajime Sorayama’s genius as an artist and brought him global recognition. The author paints a very organic picture of robotic forms inspired by pin-up art, where the “feminoid” robots appear as chrome-plated gynoids striking suggestive poses.

His next science fiction book, ‘Pin-up’ also follows the same pattern. The works of the author seem to follow similar themes involving figures in suggestive poses with one that includes a substantially realistic depiction of leather and latex. Sorayama’s art is considered to be highly explicit and meant strictly for adults. The futuristic and erotic illustrations resonate loudly in the mind’s eye owing to their hyperrealistic nature, creating the kind of visual landscape that is impossible to achieve in photography alone.

Length: N/A | Dimensions: 9.25 x 0.25 x 11.5 inches | Weight: 1.5 pounds | Publisher: Books Nippan

14. Journeyman: The Art of Chris Moore and Stephen Gallagher

The illustrative book, ‘Journeyman’ was the first collection by Chris Moore, a globally recognized science fiction illustrator, that included a stunning range of paintings, complete with book covers, albums, and posters. These were hyper-realistically created fantastical depictions of simple as well as elaborated colored sketches that foregrounded the versatility of Chris Moore’s illustrative universe.

It is an absolute feast for the senses that is bestowed with the best of expressions penned by the critically acclaimed author of the thriller genre, Stephen Gallagher, through a series of conversations in the book.

These conversations tell the story of the modern-day journeyman and during the course of the story reveal interesting details about the process of creating art.

Length: 112 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 0.75 x 10.75 inches | Weight: 1.74 pounds | Publisher: Paper Tiger

15. Frank Kelly Freas: The Art of Science Fiction by Frank Kelly Freas

It is a belief amongst a section of the community that is formed of ardent lovers of sci-fi art and literature that Frank Kelly Freas could possibly be the best sci-fi artist to have ever lived. And we certainly have solid reasons to believe so, as everything ever created by Kelly Freas has lived to define an entire era of science fiction in itself. And this immense adoration and fascination with science fiction are lovingly represented in this sci-fi artbook.

Freas’s work is unconventional and somewhat, way ahead of its time in its depiction of a state of being that celebrated an upliftment of emotions and humanity, connecting all of his illustrated characters whether human or otherwise with a much broader perspective on relationships and life. This grand scale of art could be seen in some of the earliest sci-fi covers that he had created for the likes of Algis Budrys’s work, ‘Who?’ and Tom Godwin’s ‘The Gulf Between.’

Length: 120 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: 1 pound | Publisher: The Donning Company

16. Sci-Fi Art Now by John Freeman

John Freeman brings a refreshing mix of the finest sci-fi illustrations created by some of the most distinguished figures in the science fiction genre. These cutting-edge art forms and illustrations hail a revolutionizing impact on budding and aspiring artists everywhere through the spectacular images and concept designs it opens up for the world to see.

Freeman had been a former editor for official magazines for projects and franchises such as Babylon 5, Doctor Who, Star Trek, and Star Wars. The successive phases in his career saw him turning his outstanding takes and understanding of science fiction and everything related to magnificent pieces of art.

And this is precisely what you can expect from this ornately illustrated anthology to show you: the creative processes of speculative fiction’s latest and coolest upcoming stars. The book also celebrates some renowned creators who have continuously been breaking and creating new turf to expand the vividly colored and portrayed territories to great extents!

Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 9.9 x 0.9 x 9.8 inches | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Publisher: Harper Design

17. The Art of John Berkey by Jane Frank

John Berkey was an immensely respected and inspiring space artist who was also considered one of the titans in the history of science fiction history who did have a prolific and richly productive career producing celestial fantasy art that began sometime in the 1950s.

He had initially been one of the leading creative heads for concept art working for many different studios up till the point he got into Brown & Bigelow, the famed calendar-publishing company spending eight formatives mastering his definitive style under his mentors.

It was at this place and time in his life that he developed extensively his stunning landscape skills that were depicted in scenes of Americana and similar genres.

When he turned to freelance, he made complete use of his marvelously evocative neo-impressionist style in the area of science fiction which made him a revered figure for all in the community of science fiction.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.5 x 11.25 inches | Weight: 1.9 pounds | Publisher: Paper Tiger

18. The Mind’s Eye: The Art of Omni by PowerHouse Books

Omni had always been a gem among popular science magazines during 1978-1998. Magazines such as Science News, Scientific America, Discover, and Science Digest might have been favorites for armchair scientists, but Omni had been that innovative and masterful cutting edge of conventional science news and fiction that could stun and mesmerize all of its readers.

With just the perfect amount of flashy graphic design coupled with the images created by a generation of artists who were completely free from the restraints of general rules and principles with just a touch of sex, Omni topped quite a few charts when it came to sci-fi artwork.

It was created by the legendary artist Bob Guccione, the founder of Penthouse. Guccione handpicked all the illustrators and artists who eventually made Omni happen, turning it into a legacy, creating works ignited by intellect and passion which were two of Guccione’s principle ideas. ‘The Mind’s Eye: The Art of Omni’ extolls the spectacular work that has appeared throughout the history of publication.

Length: 180 pages | Dimensions: 12.38 x 1.23 x 11.29 inches | Weight: 4.67 pounds | Publisher: PowerHouse Books

19. Star Trek: The Art Of The Film By Mark Cotta Vaz

J.J. Abrams takes an entirely different approach to the greatest space adventure ever: Star Trek! It features a younger crew selected straight right out of the academy. Abrams has created a completely new rendition of Star Trek even while paying homage to those sci-fi storytellers who are known for their versions of the famous spaceship, The U.S.S.Enterprise of the 20th century.

The film quickly became a critical as well as a commercial success across the world.

This visage of Abram’s new vision is stunningly portrayed in this brilliant sci-fi art book, which traces the evolution of the film’s productions through a spectacular collection of concept art and designs that the world had not seen previously.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 9.35 x 0.72 x 12.2 inches | Weight: 2.7 pounds | Publisher: Titan Books

20. The Art Of The Barbarian by Arthur Suydam

The image of the Barbarian reflects raw, elemental power, brute force, and the vicious spirit of survival. The “seductive” imagery from the genre in a way, romanticizes this raging and violent era in the history of human evolution.

Arthur Suydam is notable for his fascinating work in this genre that depicts primal clashes on the battlefield, vivid shades of carnelian, and the thunderous gnashing of the swords done with astonishingly precise details.

The vividness and vibrancy of the images make almost a tangible visual impact where one can almost smell the fear, blood, and rage prevailing in the very atmosphere of the time.

And all of these are wonderfully assembled for you to enjoy in the ‘The Art Of The Barbarian.’

About Arthur Suydam, it has been famously remarked that the artist has been known to explore his own opinions and approaches on the primeval character of the Barbarian that expertly renders in a style that belonged to the old Dutch Masters.

The book is a highly resonant and reflective masterpiece done in fabulous shades that foreground Suydam’s immense caliber and justifiable global recognition for his works on the characters of Tarzan and Conan.

It brings you an in-depth and extensive analysis of the creative genius and inspiration of the artist.

Length: 64 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.25 x 11 inches | Weight: 0.6 pounds | Publisher: Image Comics

21. Progressions: The Art Of John Foster by John Foster

John Foster is known and globally celebrated for his hauntingly beautiful imagery that reflects immense visual power. His works include the renowned Dark Horse Comics where the Star Wars covers created by him have become a “collectors’ favorites” item and the sensational images of ‘Dungeons and Dragons’ portrayed bewitchingly by his deft hand.

You get to see all of it in ‘The Art Of John Foster’ which is a transfixing, yet at times, quite unnerving, provocative compilation of his best works. It is not for nothing that they say that Foster indeed knows the ways to capture the soul with his art!

Length: 80 pages | Dimensions: 8.75 x 0.5 x 10.75 inches | Weight: 1.3 pounds | Publisher: Steve Jackson Games

What is the Best Sci-Fi Art Books for Artist?

This table provides an overview of various Sci-Fi Art Books, including information on page count, dimensions (in inches), weight (in pounds), and publisher details.

Product	Length	Dimensions	Weight	Publisher
The Art of Ian Miller	160 pages	9.29 x 0.73 x 12.5 inches	2.62 pounds	Titan Books
H.R Giger’s Necronomicon	92 pages	12.25 x 0.5 x 17 inches	3.69 pounds	Morpheus International
The Art of Chesley Bonestell by Ron Miller	256 pages	9.1 x 1.1 x 11.65 inches	3.54 pounds	Paper Tiger
The Art Of John Harris: Beyond The Horizon	160 pages	9.35 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches	2.59 pounds	Titan Books
Middle-Earth Envisioned	216 pages	10.5 x 1 x 12.38 inches	3.55 pounds	Race Point Publishing
Hyperluminal: The Art Of Jim Burns	160 pages	9.3 x 0.7 x 12.5 inches	1.25 pounds	Titan Books
E338: The Art Of Loic Zimmermann	152 pages	10 x 0.5 x 10 inches	2.25 pounds	3DTotal Publishing
Substrata: Open World Dark Fantasy	240 pages	9 x 1 x 12 inches	2.56 pounds	Udon Entertainment
The Art Of Greg Spalenka	160 pages	9.34 x 0.79 x 12.5 inches	2.72 pounds	Titan Books
Sci-Fi and Fantasy Oil Painting Techniques by Patrick Jones	192 pages	8.5 x 0.9 x 11 inches	2.13 pounds	Korero Press
Spectrum 25 The Best in Contemporary Fantastical Art	304 pages	9.35 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches	1 pound	Flesk Publications
Guillermo del Toro: Cabinet of Curiosities	611 pages	N/A	N/A	Harper Design
Sexy Robot by Hajime Sorayama	N/A	9.25 x 0.25 x 11.5 inches	1.5 pounds	Books Nippan
Journeyman: The Art of Chris Moore and Stephen Gallagher	112 pages	9 x 0.75 x 10.75 inches	1.74 pounds	Paper Tiger
Frank Kelly Freas: The Art of Science Fiction by Frank Kelly Freas	120 pages	N/A	1 pound	The Donning Company
Sci-Fi Art Now by John Freeman	192 pages	9.9 x 0.9 x 9.8 inches	2.35 pounds	Harper Design
The Art of John Berkey by Jane Frank	160 pages	8.5 x 0.5 x 11.25 inches	1.9 pounds	Paper Tiger
The Mind’s Eye: The Art of Omni by PowerHouse Books	180 pages	12.38 x 1.23 x 11.29 inches	4.67 pounds	PowerHouse Books
Star Trek: The Art Of The Film By Mark Cotta Vaz	160 pages	9.35 x 0.72 x 12.2 inches	2.7 pounds	Titan Books
The Art Of The Barbarian by Arthur Suydam	64 pages	8.5 x 0.25 x 11 inches	0.6 pounds	Image Comics
Progressions: The Art Of John Foster by John Foster	80 pages	8.75 x 0.5 x 10.75 inches	1.3 pounds	Steve Jackson Games

Buying Guide for the Best Sci-Fi Art Books for Artists

The best sci-fi art book for artists is subjective and depends on your personal preferences and artistic goals. Use this buying guide as a starting point to explore different options, and choose the book that resonates with you the most.

Content and Variety

Look for books that offer a diverse range of artwork, including illustrations, concept art, landscapes, character designs, and more. The book should showcase the artist's versatility and provide a comprehensive overview of their work. This variety can inspire you to explore different techniques and subjects within the sci-fi and fantasy art genres.

Book Length and Dimensions

Consider the length and dimensions of the book. Longer books with more pages often provide a more in-depth exploration of the artist's work. Larger dimensions can also enhance the visual impact of the artwork. However, keep in mind that larger books may be less portable and harder to handle.

Weight and Binding

Check the weight of the book, especially if you plan to carry it around or travel with it. Heavy books can be cumbersome and may not be suitable for frequent use or mobility. Additionally, consider the type of binding used. Hardcover books tend to be more durable and long-lasting, while softcover books may be more affordable.

Reviews and Recommendations

Read reviews and seek recommendations from fellow artists or art communities. Their insights can provide valuable information about the quality, content, and usefulness of the book. Consider the credibility of the sources and look for reviews that align with your specific interests and needs.

Price and Budget

Set a budget for your purchase and compare prices across different platforms and sellers. Keep in mind that high-quality art books with extensive content and premium features may come at a higher cost. Consider the value you will gain from the book and prioritize quality over affordability if possible.

What are the essential elements to consider when choosing a sci-fi art book?

When choosing a sci-fi art book, consider the content and variety of artwork, book length, and dimensions, weight and binding, reviews and recommendations, as well as the price and your budget.

What should I look for in terms of content and variety in a sci-fi art book?

Look for books that offer a diverse range of artwork, including illustrations, concept art, landscapes, character designs, and more. The book should showcase the artist’s versatility and provide a comprehensive overview of their work.

Does the length of a sci-fi art book matter?

The length of a sci-fi art book can influence the depth of exploration into the artist’s work. Longer books with more pages often provide a more extensive collection of artwork and insights. However, shorter books can still offer valuable inspiration and guidance.

How important is the weight and binding of a sci-fi art book?

The weight of a sci-fi art book is crucial, especially if you plan to carry it around or travel with it. Heavy books can be cumbersome and may not be suitable for frequent use or mobility. Additionally, consider the type of binding used – hardcover books tend to be more durable, while softcover books may be more affordable.

Should I prioritize quality over affordability when choosing a sci-fi art book?

If possible, it is advisable to prioritize quality over affordability when choosing a sci-fi art book. High-quality art books with extensive content and premium features may provide more inspiration and value in the long run. However, it’s essential to find a balance between your budget and the value you expect to gain from the book.

Introducing the top recommendations for sci-fi art books, we have explored a vast selection of titles that cater to different artistic preferences. After careful consideration and analysis, we present the three standout choices.

For artists seeking inspiration in gothic art, "The Art of Ian Miller" is an ideal option, showcasing Miller's unconventional and haunting creations influenced by HP Lovecraft. If you're looking for sci-fi art, "H.R Giger's Necronomicon" is a good choice, with its iconic images and conceptual designs from renowned artists. Finally, for those interested in space art, "The Art of Chesley Bonestell" is the right choice, featuring over 300 super-realistic images that have shaped our visions of outer space.

And with that, we come to the very end of this vast and extensive guide on some of the best sci-fi and fantasy art books that will tickle and enrich the imagination and soul of every artist in every corner of the world.

We hope you liked our endeavor as much as we loved making this effort for you.

Hope to see you soon! Till next time!

Glues are a must-have item in every household as they can be applied to repair broken things in a jiffy.

However, with the availability of a ton of options on the market, zoning in on a single product can be quite challenging and time-consuming. That’s why we have tried to make the task easier for you by reviewing 2 products from the 2 best glue brands on the market.

Furthermore, we have provided an in-depth comparison between the two packs of glue to help accelerate your decision-making. So, without further chit-chat, let’s jump in and find out which glue holds better.

Read on to find out everything!

In this section, we’ll take a look at both the brands and their respective products in detail so that you can understand the fundamental difference between the two.

1. JB WELD 8281

For over 40 years, JB Weld has been manufacturing glues that hold firmly to a range of surfaces such as metal, plastic, and concrete in even the harshest environmental conditions. And naturally, the 8281 Twin Pack of resin and hardener is no different.

This two-part epoxy system was originally designed as an alternative to torch welding. So, it should come as no surprise that they offer extremely strong and lasting repairs to a wide variety of surfaces and produce a bond that’s even stronger than steel. Understandably, that makes it an ideal choice for craft, marine, DIY household, and automotive repair.

Additionally, when the two-part epoxy is mixed together, it forms a glue that takes 24 hours to cure, which is pretty decent, given it's not super glue. And the best part? Once it’s cured, it can be further drilled, molded, sanded, filled, and tapped. In other words, you can do whatever you please with it after waiting overnight.

Apart from this, the JB Weld glue is steel-reinforced, offering a tensile strength of around 5,020 PSI. Long story short, it is extremely durable and can withstand temperatures up to 550 degrees Fahrenheit without breaking a sweat. Not to mention, it is waterproof and resistant to acid, chemicals, and petroleum.

Now, as far as the application is concerned, you can apply it to a wide range of materials, including fiberglass, metal, concrete, wood, ceramic, PVC, and tile. And that’s why both the product and the brand have earned a loyal following from DIYers, repair professionals, and mechanics alike.

What We Like

Forms a solid adhesive layer
Can be used for bonding wood, metals, and other materials
Ideal for gap-filling on porous surfaces and non-porous surfaces
Heat-resistant
Perfect choice for DIYers and professionals

What We Don't Like

Takes a while to cure

2. Gorilla Glue 5002801

This company has been manufacturing high-quality glues for over 2 decades, and the 5002801 Original Gorilla Glue is yet another prestigious addition to its wood glue repertoire. Over the years, it has built a name for itself in the industry, primarily because of its outstanding versatility and holding power. Let’s learn a bit more about it in the coming sections.

Unlike other glues, this water-activated polyurethane expands into adhesive materials to create a strong bond that can adhere to virtually everything. Besides, it’s entirely waterproof and safe for use both outdoors and indoors. Rest assured, it can easily withstand the various weather elements quite conveniently.

Once cured, you can stain it, paint it, and sand it as per your requirement and give the project a completely new and finished look, which is great.

However, ensure that the surface is dampened and clean, tight-fitting, and dust-free before applying. And for shiny surfaces like glass, you need to sand the material a bit so that the glue holds onto it.

Since it’s water-resistant, it doesn’t break down when it comes in contact with moisture, which is truly remarkable. Needless to say, it is heat-resistant and can therefore withstand temperature in tough conditions.

Overall, this flexible glue is one of the top-rated and best gluing materials on the market.

What We Like

Ideal for professionals and DIYers alike
Expands to provide a long-lasting and powerful bond
Can withstand extreme temperatures
Easy to apply
Can be used on a variety of materials like leather, plastic, wood, etc.
Cures to a yellowish color

What We Don't Like

Offers a limited shelf life once opened

In-depth Comparison: JB Weld VS Gorilla Glue

Now that you know what both the products are all about, it’s time we made an in-depth comparison between the two of them. So, let’s jump right in.

1. Cleanup

As far as cleanup is concerned, both products are known to give users a tough time. That is because both of them feature solid adhesive materials. Note that the Gorilla Glue doesn’t need to be mixed with 2 different materials before application.

On the other hand, you have to mix different components of JBL Weld, which naturally makes it messy. So, we think it’s safe to say that the former is relatively easier to clean away than the latter.

2. Strength

If you are looking for an option that provides unmatched strength, then the JB Weld could be your best bet as it has a higher tensile strength than Gorilla glue. On top of that, it’s way more resistant to weather elements, which is no less than a bonus in the books of those who intend to use glue outdoors.

However, this doesn’t mean that the Gorilla glue is weaker or susceptible to cracking or shrinking; it’s just that it is not as durable as the two-part epoxy JB Weld. Additionally, the bond formed by the JB Weld is difficult to break regardless of where it has been applied or prevailing weather conditions.

So, the winner here is JB Weld.

3. Materials

The JB Weld two-part epoxy is highly versatile and can bond a wide range of surfaces together, such as jewelry, beads, metals, plastic, fabrics, and wood. DIY enthusiasts and loyal followers of JB Weld often claim that it can bond all materials.

Gorilla Glue is a polyurethane-based glue, which means that it is mainly used to glue wood together. However, this wood glue can bond together with other materials, such as fabrics, paper, metals, and a few other materials.

4. Health Concerns

The JB Weld features a non-toxic formula, which means it won’t kill you if you happen to accidentally eat it. On the contrary, the Gorilla Glue is extremely toxic and can cause death if ingested. So, in this regard, JB Weld is the winner.

5. Applications

Now, let’s see how each product performs in terms of applications.

The JB Weld glue is mainly used for repairs because it has a tensile strength of over 5,000 PSI, which is a lot. On top of that, it is water-resistant, solvent-acid, and petroleum-proof, meaning it is an ideal choice for craft, marine, and automotive repairs. Additionally, it is temperature-resistant and can be sanded or painted as per requirements.

As far as the Gorilla Glue is concerned, it is a polyurethane glue mainly used to bond wood. So, when it comes to wood repairs and carpentry, it can deliver unparalleled results without a hassle.

That said, keep in mind that it can bond together with other materials; as such, you can use it for small repairs and arts and crafts projects.

6. Cost

The JB Weld glue is more expensive than Gorilla Glue since its quality is a notch higher than its counterpart. However, in the long run, JB Weld can help you save a good amount of money as you can use it in place of a screw when you need two lighter materials to be held together.

Speaking of Gorilla Glue, it is less expensive than JB Weld since it is not meant for heavy repairs.

Quick Recap

Now, let’s do a quick recap on the basic differences between the two products.

JB Weld cures to a grayish color, whereas the Gorilla Glue cures to a yellowish color
Gorilla Glue is polyurethane-based wood glue, while JBL Weld glue is a two-part epoxy

What will the JB Weld glue not stick to?

It will not stick or bond to any surface that’s rubbery or flexible. This is because it is specifically made to provide incredibly durable and long-lasting repairs on solid surfaces such as cars, ships, etc.

How long do I have to wait for Gorilla Glue to dry?

Even though it doesn’t take too long to dry, we strongly recommend that you wait for at least 24 hours before you sand or paint it.

That was pretty much everything you needed to know about JB Weld and Gorilla Glue.

Now, coming to the main question, which one is a better adhesive? For us, it has to be the JB Weld glue because it is more durable and safe to use than Gorilla Glue. And even though the price is a bit higher, this product can help you cut costs in the long run.

That being said, it’s important to note that the Gorilla Glue is not a bad glue by any means. If you are looking for an adhesive for wooden materials, you can’t go wrong by choosing the polyurethane-based Gorilla Glue.

So, that’s all for today; we hope this guide has helped you choose the right glue based on your requirements. Until next time, take care!

A retractable awning is a great addition to the outdoor living space, such as a front porch, RV, or trailer. It protects residents from harmful UV rays from sun exposure and high winds while maintaining a low indoor temperature.

Living in a windy area has made me install retractable awnings to protect my outdoor furniture from high wind speeds. Thankfully, there are some brands manufacturing the best retractable awnings catering to windy locations.

Wind-resistant retractable awnings are very useful for both homes and businesses in case of storms or general bad weather. Moreover, awnings made from metal can withstand wind and protect the space from flying debris.

Retractable awnings protect your outdoor and indoor space from heat, heavy rain, high winds, and fading due to sun exposure. I researched and tested the best retractable awnings to determine how much current they can withstand. So, today, I’m going to review the best retractable awnings for windy areas…

Best Retractable Awnings For Windy Areas

Here’s my list of the 8 best retractable awnings for windy areas:

1. AECOJOY Patio Awning Retractable Sun Shade - Best for UV Protection

What we like

UV resistance and sun protection
Sturdy steel frame material
Fully assembled
Free replacement

What we don't like

Few color options

Aecojoy is known for being America’s leading patio furniture brand, with over one million buyers. This brand’s 10'ⅹ 8' Patio Awning Retractable Sun Shade gives an elegant look to any outdoor space. I used this for a family gathering on my patio, and it delivered what it promised.

It is unique for its UV-resistant high-quality polyester fabric, which provides 50+ sun protection. I could easily use this for sunbathing in my backyard without worrying about getting sunburned or too tanned. This retractable patio awning also claims to be windproof and fade-resistant.

Moreover, it has a steel frame material with an aluminum alloy body which gives it better durability for both outdoor and indoor usage. I also checked the retracting system, which cranked quite well with its 59” long manual hand crank.

Each of these awnings comes fully assembled with a pre-set pitching angle that is universally convenient. However, adjusting the angle with a few manual steps was easy.

This manual awning also has good customer service that guarantees free replacement in case of damage, as well as quick after-service. They also entertain questions regarding any mounting issue anytime.

Material: Aluminum, Alloy Steel | Available Sizes: 10' x 8', 8.2' x 6.5', 13' x 8', 13' x 10' | Dimensions: 5.1' Depth x 8.6', Projection Width x 7.8' Height | Color: Beige

2. ALEKO Manual Retractable Patio Awning - Best for Increased Air Flow

What we like

Anti-rust steel material
Increased airflow
Mildew resistant
Good customer support

What we don't like

Requires additional screws and bolts for installation

ALEKO Manual Retractable Patio Awning is another affordable outdoor deck and porch option. It is built with anti-rust steel material, a powder-coated aluminum frame, and anti-chip paint, giving this awning better longevity.

Besides providing UV protection, the canopy fabric reduces trapped heat and moisture, making it mildew-resistant. I noticed an increased air flow when put up, unlike other manual awnings that make the space a little stuffy.

ALEKO’s retractable awning is compatible with different wall materials, such as concrete, brick walls, and wooden frames. However, installing it on wooden walls requires lag screws or carriage bolts.

Moreover, it has an easy pitch system with a 6.5-foot maximum projection length. The retractable awning comes with a masonry screw box, fabric cords, and a detailed manual for quick and easy installation.

Although it is durable enough, I had to retract it when the wind ran too high since there was a lot of pressure on the frame. However, this family-owned and operated company provides a 30-day money-back scheme, with good customer support, multi-package delivery, and quick tech support.

Material: Powder-coated steel, Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 10' x 8', 12' x 10', 13' x 10' | Dimensions: 9.4' x 8.2' (Awning Fabric), 9.8' x 8' (Frame) | Color: Burgundy, Gray, Green, Red, Yellow, Sand

3. Best Choice Products Retractable Awning - Best for Large Canopy Area

What we like

Large canopy area
Lightweight
All-weather coverage
Corrosion resistant

What we don't like

Expensive

Best Choice Products’ Retractable Awning is a family-friendly lightweight option for balconies, patios, windows, and doors. It is built with a durable, powder-coated aluminum frame that features a PU coating, making it water and corrosion-resistant.

This retractable awning claims to provide all-weather coverage and protection from UV rays. Well, it did provide shade sufficiently and give enough coverage during both heavy and light rain.

It comes with an accessible 60-inch hand pole that smoothly extends and retracts the awning. Moreover, the mounting hardware is delivered along with the retractable awning that can be used for proper installation on vinyl, wood, stucco, or any other balcony or patio.

Lastly, the canopy is quite large, ranging up to 54 square feet when fully extended. And it can thrive with minimal support structures. If you have a big family or large occasion coming up, this might be the ideal retractable awning.

However, it only comes in one elegant beige color.

Material: Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 8.2' x 6.6' | Dimensions: 8.2' Fabric Length x 6.6' Fabric Width x 6.5' Flexible Height | Color: Beige

4. VEVOR Beige Retractable Awning - Best for Privacy Screen

What we like

Flame retardant and waterproof fabric
Easy to install
Affordable
Doubles as a privacy screen

What we don't like

Only for light rain and a slight breeze

VEVOR Beige Retractable Awning is a multi-purpose side awning that acts as a privacy screen for a patio, terrace, backyard, garden, office, studio, etc.

It is built with an alloy aluminum frame that is lightweight and corrosion-resistant. The PU-coated canopy fabric is flame-retardant, breathable, and waterproof and offers complete protection from UV rays.

I was quite impressed with this because it is an ideal awning for people who want more privacy and sun protection at the same time. I could use it as an umbrella, a sun shade, and a divider to block sight.

This retractable awning features a screen handle, providing better stability since it is free-standing. For easy storage, it can be placed into the aluminum roller and stored in a dark place.

Installing the privacy screen was super easy for me, especially with all the mounting accessories, including mounting brackets provided. All you need to do is fix the support post to the base plate and then mount the entire thing onto the concrete wall or wood deck.

Moreover, it has different size options for various walls and spaces.

Material: Aluminum Alloy, Polyester | Available Sizes: 5.2' x 9.8', 5.2' x 19.6', 5.9' x 9.8' | Dimensions: 5.2' Height x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width | Color: Beige

5. MCombo Manual Retractable Awning - Best for Corrosion Resistance

What we like

Corrosion resistant
Lightweight
Plastic steel hand crank
Warranty and money-back guarantee

What we don't like

Hard to install on surfaces like vinyl, double brick, vinyl facing, etc.

MCombo Manual Retractable Awning has a solid structure made of an entirely corrosion-resistant aluminum frame and plastic steel hand crank that is easy to adjust.

These wind-resistant awnings have a wind rating of resident Beauport scale 4. It has a lightweight steel frame with PU-coated fabric that is anti-UV rays and water resistant. Moreover, I tested this awning during high wind speeds, and it was sufficiently sturdy. Its 50+ sun protection is also impressive.

MCombo provides the product along with mounting brackets, an instruction manual, and other mounting hardware for the installation process. You will only need a power drill, tape, and wrench to complete the installation.

I could also adjust the height of the retractable brackets according to my needs. It is advisable, however, to install this awning on concrete walls, hard wooden or brickwork walls. If you need to install it on other materials, consider booking professional help.

Overall, it is a high-quality retractable awning with a 100% money-back guarantee and a three-month warranty. It also comes in various colors, making color-coordinating your outdoor space easier.

Material: Aluminum Alloy, Polyester Fabric, Steel Tube | Available Sizes: 12' x 10' | Dimensions: 9.8' Fabric Length x 11.6' Fabric Width x 8' Flexible Height | Color: Beige, Brick Red, Burgundy, Coffee Brown, Dark Blue, Green

6. STEELAID Manual Retractable Awning - Best Multi-Purpose Retractable Awning

What we like

Lightweight
Adjustable height
Higher heat protection
Easy to install

What we don't like

Less area coverage

The STEELAID Manual Retractable Awning is the perfect small-sized option for the occasional sun baths and small gatherings. The canopy is 100% polyester, which is water and UV-resistant.

It is a unique pop-up canopy with a 46" coverage. Moreover, its easily adjustable hand crank allowed me to adjust the canopy even up to 122", which is quite impressive and higher than most retractable awnings.

This retractable awning decreases outdoor temperature, which I noticed since I put this up on a very sunny day. It is also comfortable to use and does not require too much effort to retract and extend.

Furthermore, its adjustable poles can be attached to almost any surface, which is a plus. There’s no requirement for drilling holes in your walls, either!

The retailers send this awning in a compact package that saves more time during installation. Moreover, the awning canopy also has a decorated edging to offer an elegant look.

It is also convenient for RVs, trailers, and tents.

Material: Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 4.9', 6.5', 9.8', 11.5', 13' | Dimensions: 9.8' Hand Crank x 3.9' Fabric Width x 6.5' Canopy Length | Color: Gray

7. XtremepowerUS Patio Manual Retractable Awning - Best Design

What we like

Steel hand crank
Elegant design
UV resistant
Good for commercial use

What we don't like

Expensive

The XtremepowerUS Retractable Awning has an overall secured coverage along with an elegant look. It is ideal for shading balconies, windows, and doors with better protection from bad weather and UV resistance.

It is built with a high-quality powder-coated aluminum frame which securely holds the canopy fabric made of 100% polyester to the front bar. The fabric also claims to be water and heat-resistant.

I liked the superior quality steel hand crank they provide since it feels very strong and sturdy. Moreover, the extension and retraction process was also sufficiently smooth.

Since this retractable awning is closed off in its structure, it provides suitable resistance against high wind speeds and extreme heat.

However, XtremepowerUS does not include any additional mounting hardware, so you have to buy them from a local store. If installing gets too difficult, consider booking a professional installation. But their installation manual got me through.

This is not a very affordable retractable awning for the average homeowner. But this can work wonders as a side awning for back porches and side patios of cafes and restaurants. This is because the structure of this awning can create a personal space that many customers might like.

Material: Polyester, Aluminum, Steel | Available Sizes: 10' x 8', 8' x 6' | Dimensions: 7' Hand Crank x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width x 7' Flexible Fabric Length | Color: Beige

8. Uyoyous Retractable Patio Side Awning - Best for Easy Installation

What we like

Easy installation process
UV stabilization
Affordable
People can use it for landscaping and home gardens

What we don't like

Lower heat protection

This retractable patio awning doubles as a privacy fence while blocking harmful sun rays and high wind speeds. It is very easy to install, given its cartridge wall-mounted design, which requires only a few steps to mount.

All I did to install the set-up was to stick the support post to the base plate first and then fix the entire thing on my wall. But remember that for better stability, installing it on cement, hardwood, or brick walls is advisable.

The canopy fabric is made of breathable and waterproof polyester. It is built with an aluminum frame and oxidized paint, making it rust-proof while giving it an elegant, sleek finish. It is also easy to clean.

The product description further promises advanced UV stabilization for better heat protection and a corrosion-resistant aluminum pole for retraction.

I used this awning similarly to the previous privacy screen, and this one also had a smooth retraction system. Overall, it looks hardy and will last a long time.

The best way to use this retractable awning is for landscaping, home gardens, walkways, front yards, and patios.

Material: Alloy Steel, Aluminum, Polyester | Available Sizes: 9.8' x 5.9', 9.8' x 5.2'| Dimensions: 9.8' Fabric Length, 5.8' Flexible Height | Color: Creamy-White

Best Retractable Awning For Windy Areas Comparison Table

Product	Material	Available Sizes	Dimensions	Color
AECOJOY Patio Awning	Aluminum, Alloy Steel	10' x 8', 8.2' x 6.5', 13' x 8', 13' x 10'	5.1' Depth x 8.6', Projection Width x 7.8' Height	Beige
Outsunny Patio Retractable Awning	Aluminum, Steel, Polyester Fabric	8' x 7'	7.5' Fabric Width, 6.6' Full Extension, 8.2' Case Width	Brown, Green, Khaki, Red
ALEKO Retractable Patio Awning	Powder-Coated Steel, Aluminum, Polyester	10' x 8', 12' x 10', 13' x 10'	9.4' x 8.2' (Awning Fabric), 9.8' x 8' (Frame)	Burgundy, Gray, Green, Red, Yellow, Sand
Best Choice Products Retractable Awning	Aluminum, Polyester	8.2' x 6.6'	8.2' Fabric Length x 6.6' Fabric Width x 6.5' Flexible Height	Beige
VEVOR Beige Retractable Awning	Aluminum Alloy, Polyester	5.2' x 9.8', 5.2' x 19.6', 5.9' x 9.8'	5.2' Height x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width	Beige
MCombo Manual Retractable Awning	Aluminum Alloy, Polyester Fabric, Steel Tube	12' x 10'	9.8' Fabric Length x 11.6' Fabric Width x 8' Flexible Height	Beige, Brick Red, Burgundy, Coffee Brown, Dark Blue, Green
Outsunny Retractable Awning	Steel, Aluminum, Polyester	12' x 8'	8.2' Flexible Height x 11.8' Fabric Dimension x 4.8' Hand Crank	Beige Stripes, Wine Red, Green, Tan, Brown
Tangkula Retractable Awning	Aluminum, Fabric	8' x 6.6', 10' x 8.2', 8.2' x 6.5', 12' x 10', 13' x 8'	8' Length x 6.6' Fabric Width	Beige, Brown
STEELAID Manual Retractable Awning	Aluminum, Polyester	4.9', 6.5', 9.8', 11.5', 13'	9.8' Hand Crank x 3.9' Fabric Width x 6.5' Canopy Length	Gray
XtremepowerUS Retractable Awning	Polyester, Aluminum, Steel	10' x 8', 8' x 6'	7' Hand Crank x 9.8' Flexible Fabric Width x 7' Flexible Fabric Length	Beige
Uyoyous Retractable Patio Side Awning	Alloy Steel, Aluminum, Polyester	9.8' x 5.9', 9.8' x 5.2'	9.8' Fabric Length, 5.8' Flexible Height	Creamy-White

Buying Guide For The Best Retractable Awning For Windy Areas

Besides the wide variety of options for purchase, choosing the right retractable awning may be challenging without knowing its basic properties. Different customers look for different features – while some may want better sun and heat protection, others may want one that is easy to install. For this reason, I have gathered a set of properties you may consider when purchasing a retractable awning for your home or business.

1. Types of Retractable Awnings

The two main kinds of retractable awnings are manual retractable awnings and motorized retractable awnings.

Manual retractable awnings have hand cranks for adjusting the height and angle. You can do this by rotating them clockwise or anti-clockwise for retraction and extension, respectively. Such awnings are convenient for places with frequent power outages or low electric ratings.

Motorized retractable awnings are expensive but very useful for high wind ratings. They can be easily rolled and extended with automated features like remote control and apps that help you adjust the settings of the awning. This might be the one for you if you’re looking for remote control operation.

2. Wind Resistance Classification

Retractable awnings that offer wind resistance are widely divided into four categories by manufacturers. These classes are based on how well they perform in a real situation with different wind speeds.

Class 0 - These awnings are untested and offer no guarantee of wind resistance.
Class 1 - Awnings categorized in this group can withstand wind speeds of 12 mph with 15 mph gusts.
Class 2 - This category can sustain winds of 20 mph with 25 mph gust strength.
Class 3 - These awnings can sustain wind up to 30 mph with 38 mph.

I advise you to ask the salesperson or manufacturer about the classification of their products before purchase. I find that often campaign videos are misleading when they show retractable awnings withstanding hurricanes and extreme winds. No homeowner should leave their retractable awnings out during severe storms or hurricanes.

3. Size

Buying awnings that fit on the required wall or surface is essential. To ensure this, measure the dimensions of the wall where you want to install the retractable awnings before checking the products. For easy retracting and extending features, always go for extendable ones that provide more extensive coverage.

4. Material

The material of an awning determines its longevity and ease of use. Canopy fabrics of awnings are usually made with polyester, canvas, or acrylic with PA or PU coating for protection from the sun’s UV rays and heavy rainfall.

The frames that support the canopies are made from either steel or aluminum, both of which are durable. Moreover, these fabrics are washable, with some featuring dirt-repellant and water-resistant fabric. They come in various textures, colors, and patterns.

5. Suitability For Home and Business

I highly recommend metal awnings that can withstand up to 80 mph wind for better wind resistance and protection. However, it is also important to know the types of fabric used in awnings if you prefer these.

The two kinds of retractable fabric awnings are loose-frame retractable awnings and permanently closed-frame awnings. Closed-frame ones have an aluminum or steel metal frame that covers the sides with vinyl siding or canvas and is attached with grommets.

Closed-frame awnings do not offer good wind resistance since the fabric can get caught up in the wind and put pressure on the joints. Loose frame awnings are better suited because they are connected both at the residence and the front bar.

After testing several retractable awnings, I have begun to prefer motorized retractable ones since they come with automatic wind sensors that retract the awnings when the wind speed is too high.

Thus, it is a better fit for homeowners like me who need not worry about their awnings getting damaged even when they are absent. Moreover, a motorized awning makes the best retractable awning for camper vans.

Meanwhile, business establishments like restaurants require slightly different features. Since the awnings cannot be closed during storms when customers are in the building, the retractable awning needs to be incredibly wind-resistant.

I suggest using commercial motorized awnings with galvanized steel material and adhesive vinyl. This combination will make the motorized retractable awnings much sturdier than the residential ones.

6. Weatherproofing Features

Whether your awning is weatherproof depends on the material and fabric of the canopy. Various fabrics provide different types of protection – some resist heat, while others can sustain high wind and rain. Look for awnings with materials that suit your local climate. While most of the awnings prevent heat build-up, wind-resistant awnings feature better weatherproofing.

7. Angle

A retractable awning can be used both as a flat canopy and a shade that drops at an angle. Awnings for balconies, patios, windows, or doors have different angle requirements based on their construction. While awnings have flexible installation and can be installed on every surface, some models aren’t compatible with wood and vinyl surfaces. If that’s your requirement, look for awnings specifically catering to those surfaces.

8. Price

Although manual awnings are affordable and easy to install, most of them cannot withstand extreme weather. They are good for light showers and heat protection, but you can find motorized awnings with better protection if you increase your budget. Electric and motorized awnings can sustain high winds with their wind sensors and other convenient features.

9. Customer Service And Online Support

Besides high-quality materials, it is always better to choose well-known brands with good customer service. Online customer support can help if anything goes wrong during the installation or if the product is damaged. Some brands also offer maintenance services and professional repairs.

Maintaining A Retractable Awning

Purchasing a sturdy and convenient retractable awning alone will not help the product last for a long time. To maintain your retractable awning, there are certain methods to follow and additional equipment to add. Here’s what I do.

I always fully extend my awning when in use so that the fabric does not end up sagging in the long run. I also make sure to clean the metal frame, hand bar, and roller is also something I make sure to do. These parts also need oil or wax treatment annually for smoother extension and retraction. Spraying lubricant is also feasible.

If your awning has been retracted for more than a week, clean the fabric with a water hose or washing machine before extending it to avoid dirt stains. Likewise, before storing it away, clean it with mild soap to prevent mildew or bad smell. Moreover, always store the awnings in breathable boxes or plastic bags, so they do not accumulate dust.

It is crucial for awnings close to plant beds and gardens like mine to keep plant and soil matter away from them. The acid present in most leaves can damage the canopy fabric and stain it. Ensure not to place awnings near trees and trim down vines before they can reach the awning.

Although most retractable awnings offer weatherproofing and wind protection, I suggest not putting too much pressure on them. Extreme weather conditions like hail, thunderstorms, or cyclones can harm the fabric fibers and permanently damage the retraction system.

Remember that most warranties do not cover damages due to bad weather conditions!

Installation of an awning can be somewhat challenging, due to the precautionary measures you ought to take for the wind. It’s often best to have a professional install the awning.

Indeed, the fabric’s thickness and material type can influence the wind resistance of the awning. Thicker and heavier fabrics tend to withstand stronger winds than lighter materials. However, the awning’s structural components also play a primary role in wind resistance.

It’s not recommended to leave your retractable awning extended during high winds or storms. Extreme wind can cause stress on the awning’s components and could lead to both fabric and mechanical damage.

While retractable awnings are designed for resilience against the elements, it’s advisable to retract them during heavy rain, snow, or hail. Prolonged exposure to harsh weather can shorten the lifespan of the awning.

Conclusion

According to my research, the best retractable awning on the market right now is AECOJOY Patio Awning Retractable Sun Shade. My preference is based on its high-quality fabric, solid build and design, multi-functionality, and excellent customer service.

However, the other 8 products also made their mark, so I have listed them in order of preference– they fit various needs for durability, easy installation, budget, and customer service.

My evaluation also included customer reviews, brand popularity, and product research to give you a more holistic idea of each product. I hope my guide helps you choose the perfect retractable awning for your needs!

If you like such reviews and guides, check out another one of my informative articles titled “How To Manually Retract Electric Awning.”

That said, I’ll be signing off now. Stay safe!

Concept art is about the illustration of an idea, that is later fleshed out to create characters, landscapes, buildings, etc.

Finding the right book to learn concept art can be tricky since this field is vast. You need to find guides that cover- the fundamentals of art, skills for technical painting, and conceptual ideas and give you a clear picture of the career prospects in the concept art industry.

You need to be well-armed with your skills in traditional art to use different painting software, create your portfolio, and build a professional network. These days concept art has a lot to do with workflow, speed, and accuracy, but the main focus lies in design.

It is essential to understand how things are designed. If you look at any of the animated movies, will you be able to describe what went into making that film roughly? Or at least guess the ideas behind the creation of each scene?

If you can answer them correctly, then you are on the right footing.

For a budding artist, it's challenging to create a masterpiece with an undeveloped set of art skills. When time is invested in learning the basics and practicing exercises given in the books, your skills will improve gradually.

Let's look into the list of different books that can help to build your base in concept art!

Best Concept Art Books for Artists

Here's the list of the 25 best concept art books for artists everywhere, encompassing essential guides that cover the fundamentals of art, technical painting skills, conceptual ideas, and valuable insights into the concept art industry.

Art Fundamentals

If you're an aspiring concept artist, it's essential to understand the fundamentals of art. For every piece that you create, you'll have to use the skills that you gain from the fundamentals. The skill set includes measuring, figure drawing, light and shadow, rendering, perspective, colors, forms, and several others.

1. Light for Visual Artists

The concepts of light and shadow can get a little tricky if you're new to the field of art. These concepts relate to value and how values are rendered in a painting or drawing. Light for Visual Artists will help you to understand the artistic techniques and raw scientific points of getting the benefits down correctly.

As you read through the given resources and tips, the concept of light will be crystal clear. However, you cannot expect to become an expert at rendering value or a master draftsman by just reading this book. Constant practice of the ideas that are given in this book will help you to improve your skills.

Lighting plays a massive role in every piece that you're trying to create. We advise you to get this book if you're having any problems with light in your artwork, the book explains the intricate details of this subject.

Length: 176 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 0.75 x 11 inches | Weight: 1.95 pounds | Publisher: Laurence King Publishing

2. How to Draw - Best for Perspective & Imagination

If you want to learn about perspective and drawing from the imagination, then this book by Scott Robertson will come of great use. He is an educator to digital artists and concept artists at the Art Center and also conducts various presentations all across the US.

For a concept artist, it's essential to learn about imaginative drawing and realist life drawing as these concepts amalgamate to help you create any piece from your mind with realistic rendering.

The teaching style of the author is pretty detailed yet pristine at the same time. If you're a novice or an inexperienced artist, then it can get a little tricky to get your concepts clear from this book. However, if you're ready to put in an ample amount of practice, then the lessons will get easier to follow.

Length: 208 pages | Dimensions: 9.1 x 0.8 x 11.03 inches | Weight: 2.5 pounds | Publisher: Design Studio Press

3. Figure Drawing for Artists: Making Every Mark Count - Best for Foundation & Tips

When you focus on learning about figure drawing from a book, it's more like learning to cook from a book. You cannot gain these practical skills until you get hands-on practice with them.

Moreover, several books share different tricks and techniques of figure drawing that can be effectively applied while you practice this art. Figure Drawing for Artists by Steve Huston will help you get the basics right for every figure drawing that you create.

If you're a new artist facing trouble in analyzing the figure or rendering it correctly on paper, then this book will act as your guide. Steve has included his figure drawings in this book to give you a visual presentation of the techniques that he has employed.

But you cannot rely on just this book to improve your skills, because implying the techniques in the studio will be your most excellent teacher. However, we advise you to get this book if you want to know the foundational concepts or pick up a few tips on figure drawing.

Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 8.63 x 0.75 x 10 inches | Weight: 1.5 pounds | Publisher: Rockport Publishers

4. Art Fundamentals: Color, Light, Composition, Anatomy, Perspective, and Depth

In this concise publication of 272 pages, the purpose was to introduce the reader to the fundamental topics. There is no in-depth information on the main fundamentals of art, like perspective, anatomy, or form.

The book will help you understand the different techniques and their importance to digital art. However, this book is suitable for beginners to get the basics right, but it cannot be used as a professional study guide.

Length: 272 pages | Dimensions: 8.5 x 1.25 x 12 inches | Weight: 2.55 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing

5. Human Anatomy for Artists: The Elements of Form - Best for Mastering Anatomy

The Human Anatomy for Artists by Eliot Goldfinger has everything you want to know about mastering the human figure. It is one of the most detailed books that you can find on human anatomy.

If you want to draw something from your imagination, then focus on studying the general concepts of your subject- looks, behavior, and the way it operates. To gain explicit knowledge of human anatomy can be difficult, but for drawing a figure, it's vital to master every part of the anatomy.

As you have a good understanding of the muscles, facial features, and poses, then your figure drawing will turn out to be perfect. Human Anatomy for Artists is a scientific manual that gives all the lessons on muscles, bones, and tendons. Every professional artist has learned all these bits and pieces to become an expert in what they create.

Length: 368 pages | Dimensions: 12.32 x 9.32 x 1.11 inches | Weight: 3.79 pounds | Publisher: Oxford University Press

Digital Painting

As you complete the fundamentals of art, you'll gradually want to move into painting. Few artists will get into the traditional medium (oil paints), but if you're interested in concept art, then you should focus on digital painting.

The three aspects of digital painting are:

To gain an understanding of how the graphics tablet should be used.
To understand your choice of painting software.
Focus on your skillset and goal.

1. Digital Painting for the Complete Beginner

The book focuses on the process of transitioning from the traditional medium to digital painting. It will be of more value for artists who are into oil painting than for the ones who have experience in drawing with a pencil.

However, an aspiring digital artist having a base knowledge of the fundamentals and experience in the different mediums of traditional art should read this book. The methods and goals of painting are the same in a conventional and digital forum. This book will help you understand the change in techniques and medium when you're new to digital art.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 8.28 x 0.49 x 9.28 inches | Weight: 1.16 pounds | Publisher: Watson-Guptill

2. Beginner's Guide to Digital Painting in Photoshop

If you're starting with digital painting, then you should pick up Beginner's Guide to Digital Painting in Photoshop. The fundamentals of working with Photoshop in a creative studio have been covered in detail in this book.

Many artists prefer to select their software for painting, but animation studios and game studios mostly prefer Photoshop. The painting canvas and the brush panel are clearly explained in this book by 3DTotal.

The book has a few exercises that will help you understand the groundwork of painting in the Photoshop environment. If you're going to pick up this book, then you should have some artistic experience. Moreover, without the fundamentals, you will not understand much about painting from this book.

Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 11.5 x 0.25 x 8 inches | Weight: 2.19 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing

3. Digital Painting with Krita 2.9

Photoshop comes with a big price tag, but everyone might not have that kind of budget. So, Krita, a free and open-source painting software, will be a good option that works on all operating systems.

If you want to start using this software, then Digital Painting with Krita 2.9 by Scott Petrovic will greatly help. The book begins with a clear description of the interface in Krita and gradually moves into the techniques for digital painting.

Once you cover the basics, the book moves into the shortcuts along with a few quick tips that will help to broaden your knowledge. The book appears more like a Krita software book and less like a book on digital painting.

The author also mentions the different techniques that can be used to improve your workflow in digital painting. We recommend this book for semi-experienced artists who have an idea to paint on a tablet, but it might not be of great help to beginners.

You need to know the proper use of a graphics tablet before you dive into this book. Scott has done an excellent job of presenting Krita, but do watch a few tutorials to understand if this software will come of use to you.

Length: 232 pages | Dimensions: 6 x 0.55 x 9 inches | Weight: 0.7 pounds | Publisher: Louvus Media

4. Digital Painting Techniques

The goal of this book is not to help you master the skills and techniques that you will require while painting digitally. This book of 288 pages is a gem that targets semi-experienced advanced artists.

There is sufficient practical information given in this book to paint different objects and render them accurately. This book is from 3DTotal, and it's part of a more extensive series. You should start with this book, but we advise you to read the other books in this series too to understand the teaching style.

As you get your hands on the other volumes, you'll be able to learn a lot about the 3DTotal staff while the given exercises will enhance your painting skills.

Length: 286 pages | Dimensions: 10.9 x 8.5 x 0.6 inches | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Publisher: Routledge

5. Digital Painting Fundamentals with Corel Painter X3

If you're looking for another alternative to Adobe Photoshop for digital painting, then a quality substitute is Corel Painter. This book does an outstanding job introducing Corel Painter. The 256 pages in this book cover various fundamental topics like color theory, mixing of colors, balance, and composition.

You can probably learn the entire interface of Corel Painter, through the given practice exercises. Most of the projects focus on shortcuts and techniques in Painter to help you progress in this field.

For a beginner, this book will be of great use if they are ready to put in the required effort to learn about digital painting. The fundamental concepts are given a lot of focus throughout the book, which makes this piece great for any artist.

Length: 288 pages | Dimensions: 7.5 x 0.75 x 9.25 inches | Weight: 1.54 pounds | Publisher: Cengage Learning PTR

Concept Art

If you have an excellent foundational knowledge of art and you know how to paint, then it's all about practice. As you repeat the techniques that you have learned, you'll gain a clear insight which will lead to constant growth by fixing the gaps

Concept art act is the guideline, inspiration, and mood that is prevalent for film or game production. We have a list of a few concept art books you can use to construct new ideas and make a mark in this field. However, if you want to gain some excellent skills in concept art, then these books will be your guide.

1. The Art Of Mulan

In this book, you'll find that the main text has been broken down into four parts which have been detailed pretty well. This book gives a clear description of how this movie was created. Disney puts a significant emphasis on the story, and that is prevalent in this book. Some subtle and exquisite pieces of art are present in the first two sections of the book.

The research process that was followed by the artist is an exciting part of the book, as they visit China, and travel throughout the country. For a book from the nineties to have such details about the research trip will you keener towards following them on this journey. The artists explain the learning process and how they were inspired to create every different scene.

This large piece explains the philosophy and details that went into the story, art, and production of the film Mulan.

The design and layout of the book are fantastic as they connect well with the world of the film. If you're an ardent fan of animation, then we advise you to treat yourself to this book.

Length: 192 pages | Dimensions: 10.5 x 1 x 13.5 inches | Weight: 4.46 pounds | Publisher: Hyperion

2. The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts

When we think of a book by Pixar, it's pretty normal to expect some playful and funky concept art. Unlike the other books on concept art, this piece features an extensive collection of color scripts.

Many of us got to know about color scripts only after Pixar books made this concept famous.

This book goes beyond the intricate details in the images and the artistic style used in each of the color scripts. The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts is a visual anthropology, which is made by the art directors from the most influential studio of filmmaking.

Length: 320 pages | Dimensions: 9.25 x 1.25 x 11.25 inches | Weight: 4.3 pounds | Publisher: Chronicle Books

3. Surf's Up: The Art and Making Of A True Story

This book is filled with sketches, concept art, movie stills, and 3D WIP imagery. You will find an adequate amount of character designs of penguins, along with the color keys and concepts of different sequences from the film.

The various extracts from the film that are present in bits and pieces within the book make the book and the reader travel along with the film.

You are also given a small sneak peek into the character creation phase, where you'll get to see the different stages from 3D models to concept sketches.

On the whole, if you love animation, then this is a must-have book for your collection!

Length: 148 pages | Dimensions: 10.5 x 1.1 x 11.3 inches | Weight: 3.1 pounds | Publisher: Insight Editions

4. The Art Of Robots

This book is similar to any other art book by Pixar. As you take a glance at the images, you'll understand the amount of thought that was put into highlighting every intricate detail.

The selection of art and the quality of the designs in this book is vast. There is a lot of sets and character design. Interestingly, you'll also find pages with photos of materials and characters that were used for texturing the 3D models.

If you're already a fan of the Art of Pixar books, then you'll enjoy this piece. This art book has some of the most amazing, talented, and awe-inspiring pieces of work.

Length: 144 pages | Dimensions: 9.2 x 0.8 x 11.4 inches | Weight: 2.38 pounds | Publisher: Chronicle Books

5. The Skillful Huntsman: Visual Development Of A Grimm Tale

The three artists Mike Yamada, Khang Le, and Felix Yoon share their experiences as students of the Art Center in Pasadena, CA. They explain their journey and the unique sketches that eventually paved their way into the entertainment industry.

As you read this book, you'll realize how it feels more as though you're going through a student project or a journal. Each of the concept artists has created the characters, props, environment, and other paintings for The Skillful Huntsman by following the Brothers Grimm story.

In this jam-packed book, you'll get a collection of design techniques and beautiful concept art. The book is filled with conceptual sketches, where you can see the process of an idea giving birth to an entire piece.

With this book, you'll be able to get a glimpse inside the minds of the three artists as they continue to develop their vision and create a well-known story.

Scott Robertson, who is a renowned teacher from the Art Center, leaves comments beneath each page where he critiques and gives an insight into the work. It's amusing to see how a teacher continues to critique the piece being created by his students.

The descriptions are brief enough and will not take your focus away from the designs. It is also exciting to read how the students of concept art create a piece that is based on an existing storyline.

If you love interpreting folklore and creating stories, then this book will be a gem in your collection.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 10.28 x 0.77 x 10.24 inches | Weight: 2.55 pounds | Publisher: Design Studio Press

6. The Art Of Star Wars Episode II: Attack Of The Clones

This part of the trilogy has more details about concept art than The Art Of Star Wars Episode I: The Phantom Menace. In this book, the pages are filled to the brim with environmental paintings, storyboards, character designs, ships, and sculptures.

The book shows how the different aspects- the weapons, the characters, the location, and the crafts had evolved in various stages before it came on screen.

Every page has captions given by the artists which describe the idea that they are trying to put across through every image. It is like the artist is providing you with behind-the-scenes details to present an artistic side to help you understand the movie-making process.

As usual, the sketches and character designs in this book appear larger than life, especially the environment paintings. Moreover, you'll get the entire script of the movie at the back of the book.

We recommend this book to Star Wars fans, concept artists, and sci-fi artists. You'll be amazed by the talent that was put into effect to create such a stunning piece of concept art.

Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 9.5 x 0.88 x 12.25 inches | Weight: 2.95 pounds | Publisher: Del Rey

7. The Disney Archives Series: Design

The Design edition of The Disney Archives Series is one fantastic book that will take you through the complete visual development history of Disney Animation. The book also has a few excerpts from other abandoned projects.

Try looking into The Disney Archives Series: Design, which is a concept art book that was written way further than the last decade. We advise you not to compromise on your creative potential, by just focusing on books from this decade.

Length: 256 pages | Dimensions: 13 x 11 inches | Weight: 5.4 pounds | Publisher: Disney Editions

8. The Art of How to Train Your Dragon

The character designs in this book are not over-rendered they have been well-balanced with some epic environments and high-resolution pieces.

The book features around 350 pieces of development artwork, which includes concept paintings, story sketches, and character designs.

If you're looking to have reference material that will guide your sketching work, then getting this book will help you to a great extent.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: 11.5 x 1 x 10.5 inches | Weight: 0.22 pounds | Publisher: Newmarket Press

9. The Art of Monsters, Inc.

The Art of Monsters, Inc. is filled with a ton of set drawings and character designs. Other than the credits and caption in this book, there is no other text that you can find.

The various art concepts in this book are very colorful, and you'll enjoy every panel of the pastel drawing by Ralph Eggleston and Dominique Louis. With this book, you can get inspired as you observe the excellent quality of skills used in creating art.

This collection of concept art has been created by using different mediums, and it was made before digital painting came into the arena.

Length: 144 pages | Dimensions: 9.4 x 0.9 x 11.4 inches | Weight: 2.35 pounds | Publisher: Chronicle Books

10. The Nine Old Men & The Art of Animation

The Nine Old Men & The Art of Animation has some expert animation drawings, and it consists of the grandfathers who are part of the history of Disney's animation.

Each chapter in this book talks about the projects and careers of each of the animators along with sequences that give you more explanation.

When we consider how rare, strong draftsmanship has become these days, we understand that such pieces of books are essential to set the standard in concept art.

Length: 310 pages | Dimensions: 9.25 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches | Weight: 4.86 pounds | Publisher: Disney Editions

11. Big Bad World of Concept Art for Video Games

If you're studying art and you choose to make your career in the field of concept art, then you'll love this book. In this book, the author Professor Eliott Lilly speaks about the student's work and his experience of teaching young minds who aspire to be artists.

The Big Bad World of Concept Art for Video Games offers a few distinct tips for selecting the right classes, the right school, and the practice exercises to focus on, along with suggestions to help you improve your portfolio. There are also tips shared by the author on how a young artist wanting to make a career in the video game industry can get jobs.

The works of students and professionals are widespread in this book to help you understand the level of progress and quality skills of different artists. By following this book, you'll gain the required knowledge to prepare you for the competitive path in the life of a concept artist. This will, in return, help you to hone your skills as an artist.

The author is straightforward and transparent with his thoughts, which helps to make this piece a good read. It is going to inspire you to learn different techniques to improve in the field of concept art, or it will make you second guess your career choice.

Irrespective of the outcome, we believe that this book will be of great use for you to understand the field of concept art.

Length: 144 pages | Dimensions: 8.7 x 1 x 11.2 inches | Weight: 1.6 pounds | Publisher: Design Studio Press

12. Imaginative Realism: How to Paint What Doesn't Exist

If you're an aspiring concept artist, then you should read Imaginative Realism. The book will help you understand how you can paint the things that don't exist and gives you different tricks over 224 pages.

Every concept artist is paid to create designs of things and characters that don't exist in real life. You might find that the book is not written for concept artists, but only if you focus on the details hidden behind each page will it be helpful for you.

In this book, James Gurney shares different techniques for helping you render various concepts like humans, creatures, buildings, the environment, and more.

It's simple to have different imaginative ideas in your mind, but the real test comes when you have to render them correctly. With this book, you'll understand how to represent your ideas on paper.

Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 9 x 0.6 x 10.5 inches | Weight: 2.01 pounds | Publisher: Andrews McMeel Publishing

13. Drawing Basics and Video Game Art

If you're into video game art and you want to use your skills with a purpose, then you should try to give this book a read. You'll understand how concept art is applied to the world of video games.

The complex and rich history of gaming, along with a description of the different artistic styles have been covered in this book. A large portion of the book focuses on describing how video game art can be efficiently interwoven with fine art and how this concept has advanced over the past decades.

Many sections in this book talk about the different fundamentals of art like lighting, figures, composition, and general techniques used for sketching. This is an artist's book, even though it takes a dip into gaming.

Drawing Basics and Video Game Art has more to do with the history of game art and is not much of a drawing book.

Length: 240 pages | Dimensions: 8.49 x 0.67 x 10.02 inches | Weight: 1.97 pounds | Publisher: Watson-Guptill

14. How to Become a Video Game Artist

Sam R. Kennedy, who is a renowned game artist, has several years of experience and fellow workers who are employed in the gaming industry. The help that was rendered by his colleagues was put to productive use by the author in making How to Become a Video Game Artist.

In every chapter, you'll find a description of the different jobs in the field of concept art- animators, environment art, character art, and GUI designers. Each of the chapters consists of stories from professionals who are employed in this industry and the advice given in this book helps to guide aspiring concept artists.

The book describes the skills, requirements, and demands of each job, which gives you a clear overview of the professions. The last chapter has tips by the author for aspiring concept artists to refine their portfolios and how they should be preparing themselves for the field of game art.

Length: 160 pages | Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Publisher: Watson-Guptill

15. Beyond Art Fundamentals

When you have covered the basics of traditional art, you'll be left wondering how you can advance toward concept art from an ideal point of view.

When you plan to design a piece, it should be technically creative along with it being philosophical to a certain extent. The topics that have been covered in Beyond Art Fundamentals cannot be easily found in any other book.

In this book, you'll find several professional artists sharing their opinions and views gestures, moods, and emotions, and giving you ideas to create designs that will fit in perfectly with the storyline.

According to the view of professional artists, every image should have a specific emotion, purpose, and feeling associated with it. This book helps you to understand these subtle nuances that need to be incorporated into your artwork and the different approaches that you should use for creating every piece.

Length: 224 pages | Dimensions: 8.25 x 0.5 x 11.5 inches | Weight: 2.12 pounds | Publisher: 3DTotal Publishing

What is the Best Concept Art Book?

This section provides an informative comparison of top-rated concept art books. The accompanying table highlights key specifications for each product, including their length, dimensions, weight, and publisher.

Product	Length	Dimensions	Weight	Publisher
Light for Visual Artists	176 pages	8.5 x 0.75 x 11 inches	1.95 pounds	Laurence King Publishing
How to Draw	208 pages	9.1 x 0.8 x 11.03 inches	2.5 pounds	Design Studio Press
Figure Drawing for Artists: Making Every Mark Count	192 pages	8.63 x 0.75 x 10 inches	1.5 pounds	Rockport Publishers
Art Fundamentals: Color, Light, Composition, Anatomy, Perspective, and Depth	272 pages	8.5 x 1.25 x 12 inches	2.55 pounds	3DTotal Publishing
Human Anatomy for Artists: The Elements of Form	368 pages	12.32 x 9.32 x 1.11 inches	3.79 pounds	Oxford University Press
Digital Painting for the Complete Beginner	160 pages	8.28 x 0.49 x 9.28 inches	1.16 pounds	Watson-Guptill
Beginner’s Guide to Digital Painting in Photoshop	224 pages	11.5 x 0.25 x 8 inches	2.19 pounds	3DTotal Publishing
Digital Painting with Krita 2.9	232 pages	6 x 0.55 x 9 inches	0.7 pounds	Louvus Media
Digital Painting Techniques	286 pages	10.9 x 8.5 x 0.6 inches	2.35 pounds	Routledge
Digital Painting Fundamentals with Corel painter X3	288 pages	7.5 x 0.75 x 9.25 inches	1.54 pounds	Cengage Learning PTR
The Art Of Mulan	192 pages	10.5 x 1 x 13.5 inches	4.46 pounds	Hyperion
The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts	320 pages	9.25 x 1.25 x 11.25 inches	4.3 pounds	Chronicle Books
Surf’s Up: The Art and Making Of A True Story	148 pages	10.5 x 1.1 x 11.3 inches	3.1 pounds	Insight Editions
The Art Of Robots	144 pages	9.2 x 0.8 x 11.4 inches	2.38 pounds	Chronicle Books
The Skillful Huntsman: Visual Development Of A Grimm Tale	160 pages	10.28 x 0.77 x 10.24 inches	2.55 pounds	Design Studio Press
The Art Of Star Wars Episode II: Attack Of The Clones	224 pages	9.5 x 0.88 x 12.25 inches	2.95 pounds	Del Rey
The Disney Archives Series: Design	256 pages	13 x 11 inches	5.4 pounds	Disney Editions
The Art of How to Train Your Dragon	160 pages	11.5 x 1 x 10.5 inches	0.22 pounds	Newmarket Press
The Art of Monsters, Inc.	144 pages	9.4 x 0.9 x 11.4 inches	2.35 pounds	Chronicle Books
The Nine Old Men & The Art of Animation	310 pages	9.25 x 1.25 x 12.25 inches	4.86 pounds	Disney Editions
Big Bad World of Concept Art for Video Games	144 pages	8.7 x 1 x 11.2 inches	1.6 pounds	Design Studio Press
Imaginative Realism: How to Paint What Doesn’t Exist	224 pages	9 x 0.6 x 10.5 inches	2.01 pounds	Andrews McMeel Publishing
Drawing Basics and Video Game Art	240 pages	8.49 x 0.67 x 10.02 inches	1.97 pounds	Watson-Guptill
How to Become a Video Game Artist	160 pages	N/A	N/A	Watson-Guptill
Beyond Art Fundamentals	224 pages	8.25 x 0.5 x 11.5 inches	2.12 pounds	3DTotal Publishing

What Is Concept Art?

Concept art is a form of illustration used to convey an idea for use in films, video games, animation, or comic books before it is put into the final product. It typically consists of sketches, paintings, and 3D models that help the creators visualize the world and characters of their stories.
Characters, places, stories, and entire worlds that do not exist are shaped as concept art through numerous iterations.
A concept is the first step in any design process.

Buying Guide for the Best Concept Art Books for Artists

When purchasing concept art books, it's crucial to consider several factors to ensure you make the right choice. The following comprehensive buying guide will help you navigate through the options and find the best concept art books for your needs.

Content and Focus

Look for books that cover the fundamentals of art, including figure drawing, perspective, color theory, composition, and rendering. Consider the specific focus of the book, whether it's character design, environment design, creature design, or general concept art techniques. Choose books that align with your interests and goals.

Author's Expertise and Reputation

Research the authors of the concept art books you're considering. Check their credentials, experience, and reputation within the industry. Look for books written by established concept artists or industry professionals who have worked on notable projects. Their insights and knowledge will be valuable.

Demonstrations and Step-by-Step Guides

Books that provide detailed demonstrations and step-by-step guides are highly beneficial for learning and practicing new techniques. Ensure the book includes clear explanations, visual examples, and exercises that allow you to apply the concepts and improve your skills.

Variety of Art Styles and Artists

Choose concept art books that showcase a range of art styles and feature different artists. Exposure to diverse styles will broaden your understanding and inspire creativity. Look for books that include interviews or profiles of successful concept artists, providing insights into their creative process and career paths.

Quality of Artwork Reproduction

Check the print quality and paper type of the book. High-quality reproductions of artwork will allow you to appreciate the details and nuances in the illustrations. Consider books with large, clear images that effectively showcase the artwork, making it easier to study and learn from.

Industry Relevance and Application

For aspiring concept artists, it's crucial to choose books that are relevant to the current industry trends and practices. Look for books that discuss digital painting techniques, software applications commonly used in the industry, and workflow processes for concept art production.

Reviews and Recommendations

Read reviews and seek recommendations from trusted sources, such as professional concept artists or reputable art communities. Consider joining online forums or communities where artists discuss and recommend concept art books based on their personal experiences.

Important Tip: Continual Practice and ApplicationWhile concept art books can provide valuable guidance and knowledge, remember that practice and application are crucial for skill development. Here's an important tip to keep in mind:

Regularly practice the techniques and exercises provided in the books to strengthen your foundation and improve your art skills. Apply what you've learned to personal projects and create your concept art to build a diverse portfolio that showcases your unique style and ideas. Seek feedback and critique from fellow artists or mentors to identify areas for improvement and refine your work.

Remember, concept art is a constantly evolving field, so keep learning, experimenting, and staying updated with the latest industry trends to excel in your journey as a concept artist.

What are some recommended concept art books for understanding light?
Light for Visual Artists” is a highly recommended book for understanding light in art. It provides insights into artistic techniques and the scientific aspects of rendering light and value in paintings or drawings.

Are there any books recommended for beginner artists to learn the basics of art?

Art Fundamentals: Color, Light, Composition, Anatomy, Perspective, and Depth” is a good book for beginner artists to grasp the basics of art. It covers various fundamental topics and techniques, providing a solid foundation for further study.

What book is suitable for beginners transitioning from traditional to digital painting?

Digital Painting for the Complete Beginner” is a book that focuses on helping artists transition from traditional to digital painting. It offers valuable insights and techniques for adapting to the digital medium.

What book is suitable for advanced artists looking to improve their digital painting skills?

Digital Painting Techniques” by 3DTotal is a book recommended for advanced artists looking to enhance their digital painting skills. It offers practical techniques and exercises for painting different objects.

Are there any books specifically about concept art?

Yes, there are several concept art books available. “The Art of Mulan,” “The Art of Pixar: The Complete Color Scripts,” “Surf’s Up: The Art and Making Of A True Story,” and “The Art Of Robots” are some examples of concept art books that provide insights into the creation of specific films and animation.

Conclusion

Use these books to your benefit to help you develop the fundamental skills of art, a professional network, and the right portfolio. These will pave the way for you to become a professional concept artist. There is no better way to learn than practicing religiously and following the experiences of other artists in this field.

From the above 25 best concept art books for artists, the top three expert recommendations are as follows: "Light for Visual Artists: Understanding & Using Light in Art" is an ideal option for comprehending light and shadow in artwork,

"How to Draw: drawing and sketching objects and environments" is a good choice for enhancing perspective and imagination, and "Figure Drawing for Artists: Making Every Mark Count" is the right selection for building a solid foundation and improving figure drawing skills.

These books provide valuable insights and practical tips to aid artists in their artistic journey and creative development.

Till next time keep exploring the field of art!

Top-freezer refrigerators are BUDGET-FRIENDLY options for moms, homeowners, and kitchen connoisseurs alike.

These refrigerators may not have the fanciest accessories and features. Yet, there are many reasons why people opt for this style.

Specifically, they're best for shoppers on a budget who want more fridge than freezer space. Additionally, it's a good choice for users with little space to spare at home.

If these three things resonate with you while searching for a new fridge, a top-freezer refrigerator could be your best bet!

To simplify your shopping experience, I've reviewed several brands and came up with the five top-freezer refrigerators of 2023.

A top-freezer refrigerator features a freezer compartment at the top of the unit and a fridge compartment at the bottom.

Top freezer refrigerators are the most basic fridge models you can purchase. As mentioned, they don't have fancy attachments and features; most are very STRAIGHTFORWARD, yet some offer more spice to their fridge models.

1. Whirlpool WRT518SZFG 18.2 cubic feet Top Freezer Refrigerator - Best Overall

This 18.2 cubic-foot, stainless steel top freezer from Whirlpool comes first on my list despite not having as many unique features and attachments as the other products listed.

While it lacks a deli drawer and only offers an optional ice maker model, I can say it's justifiable at its LOW PRICE of only $729.

It offers ample storage space for all your groceries, especially with the flexi-slide bins that quickly move side-to-side to make room for taller items.

Additionally, it has two crisper drawers with selectable humidity levels to keep fruits and veggies fresh, plus customizable door bins.

It also features a freezer temperature control that allows you to adjust the cold air in the freezer shelf. Hence, you can use it as an additional refrigerator compartment when you need more space.

The Whirlpool top-freezer also has an electronic temperature control, so you can set your fridge's coolness depending on the food you're storing.

What We Like

Large refrigerator capacity and flexible storage space
Customizable temperature
400 kwh/year estimated energy use
Bright interior light

What We Don't Like

No deli shelf and ice maker included
Not Energy Star-certified

Capacity: 18.2 cubic feet | Dimension: 67.13 x 28 inches (HxW) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 30.5 inches | Finish: Fingerprint-resistant, stainless steel coating

2. LG LRTLS2403S 20.2 Top-Freezer with Ice Maker - Best Value for Money

This stainless steel LG top-freezer fridge is pricier, but I assure you it's worth every dollar.

It offers a HUGE refrigerator capacity, featuring 24 cubic-foot storage for both the fridge and freezer spaces. It also has an ice maker plus an internal water dispenser — a rare find in most traditional models!

I also like the multi-flow air technology that maintains superior humidity and temperature levels to keep food fresh. Its linear compressor also REDUCES temperature fluctuations.

Food storage in this LG top-freezer model is also impressive. It features spill-proof shelves designed to contain spills in the fresh food section. These glass shelves are also height adjustable, so you can customize them to your liking.

Aside from the adjustable glass shelves, it also offers door-in-door bins, a folding shelving system to fit in taller items, and a 3-tier freezer space.

One major thing that sets it apart from other top-freezer models is its integration with the LG ThinQ app. Yes, it's SMART-ENABLED! This allows you to set the temperature using your smart devices.

What We Like

Large fridge and freezer spaces
Impressive shelving system
Well-maintained humidity and temperature
Smart enabled
Energy Star certified
Ice-maker and water dispenser-ready

What We Don't Like

Pricey
Might require more maintenance than other models

Capacity: 23.8 cubic feet | Dimension: 68 x 33 inches (HxW) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 34 inches (excluding handles) | Finish: Fingerprint-resistant, stainless steel coating

3. LG LTCS20020S Top Freezer Refrigerator w/ Multi-Air Flow and Reversible Door - Best Energy-Efficient

This 20 cubic-foot stainless steel fridge from LG is your best bet if you want to go for ADDITIONAL STORAGE SPACE.

It has two crisper drawers with superior humidity and temperature controls, adjustable shelves, and 2-gallon door bins.

Additionally, its reversible door lets you decide if a left or right door swing fits your space and minimizes installation issues.

I can also say that this fridge is thoughtfully designed since it features contoured doors, hidden hinges, bright LED lighting, and other great internal features, which make it look and feel sophisticated.

It is also equipped with a digital sensor and smart diagnosis to consistently monitor the conditions of the fridge, maintain its cool temperature, and even help you troubleshoot issues.

What We Like

Energy Star certified
Safe and spill-proof glass shelving
Frost-free design
Bright LED interior lighting

What We Don't Like

Minimal storage space
No other added features
Limited shelf adjustment

Capacity: 20.2 cubic feet | Dimension: 65.5 x 29.75 inches (HxW) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 33.8 inches (excluding handles) | Finish: Stainless steel

4. Frigidaire FFHT1425VV 13.9 cubic feet Top Freezer Refrigerator - Best for Small Spaces

If you live in a small home and don't need as much storage space, this 13-cubic-foot stainless steel fridge from Frigidaire is your best choice.

For a $500 fridge, you get two full-width glass shelves, a half-width deli drawer to store your meat products, and humidity-controlled crisper drawers.

It also has three full-width racks for door storage, a glass shelf for the freezer, and two freezer door racks to store all your frozen foods.

The EvenTemp technology on this fridge also ensures that its airflow is evenly optimized for a consistent temperature.

What We Like

Energy Star certified
Ample storage capacity
2-gallon storage on the door bins
Meets the standards set by the Department of Energy

What We Don't Like

Does not freeze quickly
Attracts fingerprints

Capacity: 13.9 cubic-foot capacity (10.0 cu. ft. fridge and 3.9 cu. ft. frozen foods) | Dimension: 59.88 x 27.63 inches (H x W) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 31.25 inches | Finish: Stainless steel

5. GE GIE18GSNRSS 17.5 Cu. Ft. 28-Inch Top-Freezer Refrigerator - Best for Ice Maker Feature

This top-notch appliance stands out from the crowd with its functionality and convenience, setting a high standard in the refrigerator market. Let's delve into exploring the attributes, qualities, and benefits of this product.

GE GIE18GSNRSS defies the norms of top-freezer refrigerators by coming with a factory-installed ice maker. This automatic, energy-conscious system generates ice into a convenient storage bin, a feature often seen in appliances priced considerably higher.

The spaciousness of this model is undeniable, allocating 17.5 cubic feet of storage space in an intuitive design that maximizes utility. The lower section offers a hefty 13.49 cubic feet for fresh foods, with ample room in two crispers, a deli drawer, a butter keeper, and versatile shelves and door bins. The top section, designed for frozen goods, includes an adjustable wire shelf, allowing you to bifurcate the 4 cubic feet space to suit your needs.

Aesthetics are given due consideration with four available finishes; modern slate, as well as the more traditional black, white, and stainless steel. These choices allow for seamless integration with any kitchen décor.

To top it all off, this unit is Energy Star certified, marking it as an energy-efficient appliance designed to reduce environmental impact and save on utility bills.

Despite the numerous beneficial attributes, the GE GIE18GSNRSS Refrigerator is somewhat on the expensive side, which might deter a cost-conscious customer. Additionally, it would have added value if this model was designed to be garage-friendly, increasing the utility factor even more.

What We Like

Built-in ice maker with energy-efficient design
Spacious 17.5 cu. ft. capacity with smart organization
Energy Star certified for excellent energy savings
Comes in four attractive finishes for various decors

What We Don't Like

Slightly higher price may deter some cost-conscious customers
Not garage-friendly, limiting location options

Capacity: 17.5 cubic feet | Dimension: 67.38 x 28 inches (HxW) | Installation depth: Standard depth | Depth: 30.5 inches (excluding handles) | Finish: Stainless steel

Which Top-Freezer Refrigerator Is Best for Your Needs?

The table below provides a comprehensive comparison of the best Top-Freezer Refrigerators for 2023. It outlines essential details, including capacity, dimensions, installation depth, depth (measured in inches), and finish, for each notable model.

Top-Freezer Refrigerators	Capacity	Dimension	Installation Depth	Depth	Finish
Whirlpool WRT518SZFG	18.2 cubic feet	67.13 x 28 inches (HxW)	Standard depth	30.5 inches	Fingerprint-resistant, stainless steel coating
LG LRTLS2403S	23.8 cubic feet	68 x 33 inches (HxW)	Standard depth	34 inches (excluding handles)	Fingerprint-resistant, stainless steel coating
LG LTCS20020S	20.2 cubic feet	65.5 x 29.75 inches (HxW)	Standard depth	33.8 inches (excluding handles)	Stainless steel
Frigidaire FFHT1425VV	13.9 cubic feet	59.88 x 27.63 inches (H x W)	Standard depth	31.25 inches	Stainless steel
GE GIE18GSNRSS	17.5 cubic feet	67.38 x 28 inches (HxW)	Standard depth	30.5 inches	Stainless steel

What is a Top-Freezer Refrigerator?

As previously mentioned, top-freezer refrigerators feature a freezer compartment at the top of the unit and a fridge at the bottom — they're the most similar to traditional styles of refrigerators and come in counter-depth and standard sizes.

Top-freezer fridges are straightforward, simple, and budget-friendly. Most top-freezer models don't include as many attachments and special features as other options.

A top-freezer refrigerator offers adjustable shelves, compartments, storage bins, and LED lighting. It also offers MORE FRIDGE SPACE than freezer shelf space.

Benefits of Top-Freezer Refrigerators

Despite its straightforward design and functionality, many prefer purchasing a top-freezer model for their homes.

If you're looking for more reasons why you should go for top-freezer fridges, here are some of the benefits these models offer:

Cost-effective - given its simple and traditional style, top-freezer fridge manufacturers didn't spend too much time and resources to re-design these models, making them budget-friendly options for shoppers—most top-freezer refrigerators' costs range from $600 and $1000. You can already get a decent and highly functional fridge at this price point.
Simplistic design - although it doesn't have as many attachments and special features as other refrigerator styles, the simplistic design makes it easier for users to access the freezer and fridge of these models. They're not too complicated to use and don't require the user to bend over to access the fridge and freezer compartments. Additionally, these types of fridges are not difficult to clean and maintain. With fewer repairs and maintenance issues, you're also ensured that your fridge will last long.
Space-saving - most top freezer refrigerators are designed to be compact, plus there are counter-depth options to choose from. They are great for users living in small apartments with less room to spare. They're also not difficult to install, unlike other refrigerator styles on the market.
Extra storage capacity - if you're looking for a unit that offers ample storage space, a top-freezer fridge might be a good choice. The freezer in some models can even be converted and used as a fridge alone, which means it can provide adequate space to keep food cold and fresh and also makes it a good fit as a second fridge.

Factors to Consider When Choosing a Top-Freezer Refrigerator

At this point, you already know why you should (or shouldn't) consider buying a top-freezer fridge for your kitchen, plus great models to choose from, as provided in this list.

But it's still crucial that you know the factors and minute details you shouldn't miss when shopping for the best top freezer refrigerator.

This way, you can choose the model that would fit your and your family's needs. I suggest that you always look for these details to narrow down your choices:

Dimensions

Considering the size of the top freezer fridge is essential in ensuring it will fit your space. Should you get a counter-depth or standard-depth fridge?

While a larger fridge means greater storage capacity, you should note the maximum dimensions your place can cater to.

Hence, before shopping, measure the space where you plan to install your new fridge. Additionally, ensure that it can handle the width of an open-door swing.

Capacity

Top-freezer models are designed to be smaller and more compact compared to modern styles, such as French door models.

A top freezer has an average storage space of 16 cubic feet for your groceries, with the freezer occupying four cubic feet of this space. You can already picture that this is ideal for smaller family sizes or couples.

High-capacity top freezers offer up to 24 cubic feet and an adjustable shelving system to free up the fridge and provide more storage space. But we can't deny the fact that its capacity is generally limited.

Cost

You must also consider your budget when shopping for a new refrigerator. If you are looking for budget-friendly options, you've hit the jackpot; this is probably the best fridge you can get.

Plenty of top-freezer models you can choose from are HIGHLY FUNCTIONAL at a low price. But these don't come with modern features like the others.

The less sophisticated the fridge is, the lower the cost. But, if you're looking for additional attachments and features, like built-in ice makers and a sliding deli drawer, you should expect they'd cost a bit more.

Style

These traditional refrigerators aren't as impressive when it comes to style. Its color options are limited to black, stainless steel, and white. Other brands offer several colorways (black stainless steel, red, and bisque), yet rarely.

The style would also determine how to install the fridge in your home.

Others are meant to sit on your counter (like a counter-depth fridge), making it appear like it's built-in. This is contrary to the standard-depth fridge that needs to sit on the floor.

Energy Efficiency

One of the benefits of top-freezer fridges is energy efficiency because of their freezer placement.

You can also check if the fridge you're eyeing is Energy Star-certified to ensure that the fridge model is indeed energy-saving.

By saving energy, you're not only being eco-friendly. You're also cutting the cost of your utility bills!

Deli Drawer

If you don't know it yet, a deli drawer is used to store meat products to keep them fresh.

This is common in the side-by-side, French door, and bottom fridges but not in traditional models, so adding this to top-freezer models makes it a stand-out feature.

When integrated into top-freezer refrigerators, it mostly features a half-width deli drawer which might not be enough for some. So, try looking for a model that offers a full-width deli drawer.

Flexible Interior Storage System

Freezers are supposed to consistently have low temperatures to maintain the freezing point. Some models allow you to adjust the internal temperature to double as a refrigerator compartment and increase capacity.

From 0, you can crank it up to 32 degrees Fahrenheit, so it will be cool enough to store food and keep it fresh without freezing it completely.

Note

If your freezer refrigerator has this feature, make sure to give it enough time to adjust to the newly set temperature before stashing in fresh food, extra produce, or leftovers.

Ice Maker

An ice maker is a total giveaway for fridges. Many people like options with a built-in ice maker or those suitable for an ice maker kit. This is a great feature, especially when you like preparing drinks at home.

Having a built-in ice maker in your fridge eliminates the need for separate ice cube trays or the hassle of installing one separately.

Just a heads up; an automatic ice maker is NOT COMMON for top-freezer refrigerators. If you ever find one, you shouldn't be surprised it would cost more than the other top-freezer models.

Temperature Control and Cooling Performance

Temperature control and cooling performance are probably the most important criteria you shouldn't miss.

Obviously, if you're looking for the best top-freezer refrigerator, you should choose one with outstanding cooling performance since that's the primary purpose of a fridge.

Cooling performance is indicated by the EQUAL DISTRIBUTION of cold air in the fridge, compressor performance, and integrated cooling technology.

Warm spots in a fridge are a major red flag, and it's less likely to keep your food fresh for a long time.

Additionally, you should be able to control the temperature to adjust to seasonal temperature swings and maintain the performance of your fridge despite hot weather.

Top-freezer refrigerators feature a freezer shelf at the uppermost part of the unit, contrary to bottom-freezer refrigerators. However, aside from freezer placement, they also differ in energy consumption.

Top-freezer refrigerators use 10% to 25% LESS ENERGY, making them energy-efficient choices and cheaper to operate. But, if you’re looking for more freezer space, bottom-freezer fridges are the one to go for.

Most freezer fridges are built to last between 10 and 15 years due to their lack of attachments and other features that need frequent maintenance. Compared to modern fridges that last 6 to 8 years, this is a great bargain.

An average top freezer costs between $600 and $1000. Other brands and models are a bit cheaper, while the others are more expensive and can exceed $1000.

The price greatly depends on the brand, features, and technology integrated into the fridge.

Conclusion

That's a wrap! I hope you can find the best top freezer of your choice in this article. If not, it's your call! Just remember to consider the important factors when shopping for one.

Feel free to refer to this guide if you have more top-freezer concerns.

Happy shopping!

Drawing is much more than just putting pencil to paper and sketching what's in front of you.

Professional artists will tell you that it's a medium for exploring human emotions and evoking real-life feelings in a 2D medium. So, you can understand the challenge that artists face and realize now why famous paintings sell for millions.

If you're a budding artist looking to make a name in the world of art, it would be best to read a few books about drawing concepts and techniques. To help you, we have narrowed down the 50 best drawing books for beginners that explore various ways of bringing art forms to life.

Best Drawing Books for Beginners

Here's the list of the 50 best drawing books for beginners, a comprehensive collection that will inspire and guide you on your artistic journey.

1. Keys To Drawing - Best for Beginners

To become proficient in different drawing techniques, it's important to practice, and that's where Bert Dodson's book comes in handy. It focuses on simple techniques so that you can create your own style.

All the techniques are easy to follow and suitable for new artists to help them apply clean strokes by controlling the movement of their hands and elbows. You'll find that the realistic drawing exercises have been divided into several lessons for quick understanding.

2. Drawing On The Right Side Of The Brain - Best for Realistic Drawing

This book acts as a portal to the world of professional artists, especially for budding painters who need to practice realistic drawing exercises. Published in 1979, it’s a bestseller in the USA and has been translated into several languages.

The author, Betty Edwards, taught at California State University and has provided essential tips and tricks to be a successful painter. There's even a section about using the left and right sides of the brain to good effect.

3. Drawing For The Absolute Beginner - Best for Easy Learning

Every famous artist was once a beginner, but you will have a slight advantage because they didn't have the luxury of reading this book. Written by Mary and Mark Willenbrik, it will help improve your drawing skills in short, effective strokes.

All the methods in this book are pretty straightforward, while the narrative tone is simple. We came across several useful tips that will help you grasp basic art forms and styles with ease.

4. Drawing For The Absolute And Utter Beginner - Best for Nature & Portrait Drawing

Novice artists who one day aspire to bring various art forms to life will love this book by Claire Watson Garcia. You can learn to draw nature, people, still life, objects, textures, and basic shapes. The best part is that it has a separate section on charcoal shading and graphite pencil sketches for drawing realistic portraits.

5. Light For Visual Artists - Best for Understanding Light & Shadow

To make your drawings stand out, it's essential to understand the interplay between light and shadow. We recommend studying the techniques in this book by Richard Yot but don't worry because it's not difficult to understand. The book isn't filled with complicated terminology despite talking about technical concepts.

It's perfect for creating detailed illustrations in visual art and proves to be a valuable resource for animators, photographers, novice artists, and professional painters.

6. Perspective Made Easy

At times, the best way to leave your mark as a painter is to look at things from a different perspective. To explore new drawing techniques, you can read this book about perspective drawing, which contains more than 250 line drawings related to the vanishing point and horizon.

Ernest R. Norlingod discusses the importance of seeing things at eye level to create shadows, shapes, objects, and figures to build your foundation as a painter.

7. The Natural Way To Draw

Another bestseller for art study is this book about drawing objects and figures by taking inspiration from real life. If you're committed to gathering practical knowledge, then follow the exercises carefully crafted by the author, Kimon Nicolaides, from his experiences.

Having learned from stalwarts like Sloan, Bridgman, and Miller, he explores his passion for teaching art in this detailed book. We found that it's ideal for beginners and slightly advanced painters.

8. Vilppu Drawing Manual

As far as figure drawing books go, the Vilppu Drawing Manual is one of the best and helps beginners make life drawings with ease. The author was employed at Disney for 15 years and passed on his knowledge by writing this comprehensive art course.

We found that the three main topics in this book are: gesture drawing, form construction, and hand action.

9. Figure Drawing For All It's Worth

As professional painters will tell you, there's no need to look far for inspiration because humans are some of the most interesting subjects. If you want to draw a life-like human figure, we recommend Andrew Loomis' book to make this seemingly difficult task easy.

He details the intermediary steps involved in the process so that you can draw figures by maintaining the correct proportions of different body parts. Even though the methods described might appear outdated, they are extremely useful.

10. Traveling With Your Sketchbook

Serious art teachers will always encourage you to travel because there's so much to see and paint. But don't forget to carry this sketchbook to capture the emotions of different places and their people. Instead of taking photos, this old-school technique of recording memories will help you develop human connections.

Thanks to its unique combination of lessons, the book discusses the techniques for painting nature, the environment, and urban scenes.

11. How To Draw What You See

Suppose you chance upon an interesting scene while on a beach and want to paint it, but don't know how. It so happens that artists often fail to replicate the objects in front of them, so this book helps make that easier. We believe it's ideal for sketching objects in still life and explains how to add detail with each stroke.

12. A Foundation Course In Drawing

This book written by Terry Rosenberg and Peter Stanyer will be great reference material for serious art students. It extensively discusses drawing skills involving space, shape, light, and texture.

Several fun exercises keep you engaged and prove most suitable for artists who have some proficiency. You'll especially love topics covering landscape, movement of figures, abstract subjects, and still life.

13. Framed Ink

If you're a budding storyteller, this book will hold great value for your career. It's one of the rare books for graphic novelists who wish to engage with the audience through their illustrations. And, thanks to Marcos Mateu-Mestre, a comic artist himself, you'll get to know about composing engaging shots through single images.

Apart from art techniques, readers will have clarity about choosing a relevant topic and using light to depict day/night scenes.

14. Learn To Draw And Paint

The absolute beginner should know that drawing and painting are two different mediums, even though they share many similarities. To learn about them both, order your copy of this book today since it highlights how drawing and sketching can improve your painting skills.

You'll find hands-on lessons discussing charcoal and pencil sketches by drawing lines, scales, patterns, depths, contours, and perspective exercises. Best of all are the multiple color illustrations to describe art-making.

15. How To Draw

Drawing doesn't simply mean sketching nature or still life; in fact, model building is one of the most interesting concepts covered in drawing fundamentals. You can read this book which focuses primarily on design and the various model processes of rotations, volumes, and ellipses.

We loved the images and video tutorials that made the different techniques easier to understand.

16. Drawing The Head And Hands

This is another book by Andrew Loomis that discusses the artistic techniques of drawing different body parts. To be more precise, he talks about the skills needed for drawing heads and hands by developing your perspective through the topics covered in the book.

All the methods are pretty simple, and you'll get a clear idea of how to sketch a proportionate human being with heads and arms that don't seem out of place.

17. Figure Drawing

Although there are several books on figure drawing, very few tackle the subject from an anatomical standpoint. Michael Hampton understood this and believed that knowing about human anatomy would help people sketch life-like figures. The book discusses the mechanical techniques of sketching a human figure, and you can also transfer these techniques to other mediums.

It is divided into several sections for easy understanding and explores various skill sets for the benefit of budding artists.

18. Figure Drawing For Artists

No, we aren't reviewing the same book twice - this is a different book by Steve Huston that explores figure drawing. You'll learn how to add detail to artwork, thanks to the author's instructions and advice to focus on the tiny things.

It's a comprehensive guide for intermediate and advanced artists discussing the importance of gesture, light, perspective, and structure. Most importantly, you'll find artworks by famous artists for inspiration.

19. Anatomy For The Artist

As we have discussed earlier, it's crucial to know the human anatomy for figure drawing, and this is another book that believes in that school of thought. There are diagrams and photos, including translucent overlays, to help you understand the skeletal structure.

Sara Simbet explores the various muscle groups and encourages artists to capture the balance, poise, and grace of the human form. And all the illustrations are pretty detailed to help you draw a model accurately.

20. Successful Drawing

Beginners can read Andrew Loomis' book - Successful Drawing, which explores a realistic and clean style so that you can master 3D drawing. He discusses some pretty advanced skills related to proportion, planes, perspective placement, and patterns in the book.

We especially liked the emphasis on light and scale, the major components of three-dimensional drawings. After reading it, you should have a better idea about construction, character, contour, consistency, and conception.

21. Drawing People

Whenever we think of people, we think about adults, but Barbara Bradley teaches us that even babies and teenagers can be intriguing and fun subjects. The professional artist was a Director of Illustration in San Francisco for the Academy of Art College. So, you can trust her when she discusses how to realistically draw people and their clothing in this book.

Particularly interesting is the attention to detail, with regards to the folds on clothing and how they respond to the environment.

22. Drawing The Living Figure

Circling round to anatomy again, this book talks about surface anatomy and how it's influenced by anatomical infrastructure. In short, Joseph Sheppard's book discusses figure drawing from the point of view of muscles and bones related to their position and movement.

It's pretty interesting, and artists get to examine the surface structure of live models. You can view a finished figure in two forms - its muscles and skeletons.

23. Human Anatomy For Artists

Master artists need to be aware of their surroundings and how it holds their drawing together, believes Eliot Goldfinger in the book Human Anatomy For Artists. It's considered by many artists to be the definitive guide for drawing a human figure.

The author is a well-known sculptor and has experience drawing bones, muscles, and skeletons. This book analyzes the human form in detail and discusses all the essentials for drawing realistic figures.

24. A Handbook Of Anatomy For Art Students

Even though the title may sound complicated, this is not a scientific or medical-themed book. It's pretty easy to read, thanks to the life-like illustrations of models in different poses, coupled with the position of their muscles.

Like the previous book, you also get to understand the surface anatomy of the human figure through photos and illustrations. Arthur Thomson has years of art experience and knows how to convey a thought easily.

25. Pen And Ink Drawing

An often unexplored technique is drawing with pens, as it delivers a vibrant appearance unmatched by most pencils. But a valid concern among artists is that they won't be able to erase the lines, which is where this book proves useful.

It provides an in-depth view of using pens and has several beautiful drawings to awaken the artist in you. We read the book and found it thoroughly entertaining due to the lucid language.

26. Draw Great Characters

To draw great characters, you need proper knowledge about body language, shape, facial expressions, and interactions between various elements. Beverly Johnson's book talks about all this by looking at a subject from different angles based on the setting. And there are plenty of practical exercises for much-needed practice.

27. Art Fundamentals

Understanding the fundamentals of art involves having a working knowledge of the various theories, concepts, and conventions. But don't worry, you can refer to this book to become a successful artist, owing to its diverse topics, such as the rule of thirds and divine proportions.

You'll also find discussions on subtle nuances for depicting human emotions.

28. Beginners Guide To Life Drawing

Life drawing involves accurate representations of the human body on paper, for which this 100-page book comes in handy. There are detailed instructions about tone, texture, position, line, and shade. Beginners will love the step-by-step depictions, especially since it doesn't have complicated terminology to overwhelm them.

29. Sketching From The Imagination: Creatures And Monsters

We often get caught up with drawing a perfect landscape or a human face, but even drawing from imagination has its challenges. This book talks about sketching creatures and monsters and displays the work of 50 artists from across the world. You'll find the mechanical structures of dragons, fairies, etc., represented in black and white.

30. Pocket Art

Alongside figure drawings, one of the important techniques to learn for a serious artist is how to draw portraits. This book focuses on the essential steps of portrait drawing to make it easier for beginners by exploring different techniques and analyzing the subtleties of structure and facial expression.

31. The Sketch Encyclopedia

Sometimes you need ideas for drawing practice, so this book has over 1,000 art projects to tingle the little gray cells in your brain. The primary concepts covered include sketching, line drawing, building up, and completing the finished figure. It also has topics discussing famous landmarks, buildings, vehicles, and nature.

32. Drawn To Life

Once beginners have grasped the concept of still-life drawings, they can focus on the gesture drawing process to bring human emotions to life. You should note that the entire book is a compilation of lectures by Walt Stanchfield, the famous Disney animator. Rest assured, it will help you capture the moment through sketches.

33. How To Draw Comics The Marvel Way

If you aren't interested in drawing, you will be now, thanks to this book that teaches artists to draw their favorite Marvel characters. To sketch the superheroes that Stan Lee conceptualized, you'll learn about shot selection, composition, character dynamics, and perspective. All of these useful traits are depicted through vibrant color illustrations.

34. Drawing The Head And Figure

Figure drawing isn't as easy as it seems, and you can refer to this book to learn about drawing the head and body in perfect proportion. There are tons of illustrations and a step-by-step guide, which many artists believe is easier to follow than Andrew Loomis' methods. You won't face any shortage of helpful tips.

35. The Silver Way

Developing character traits is important to be well-known as an artist, and what better person to learn from than Stephen Silver, the designer of shows like Kim Impossible. This book details simple steps and explains the best drawing techniques for encouraging, guiding, and inspiring you to sketch a character.

36. Modern Cartooning

Cartooning as concept art is an intricate form, and Christopher Hart will help you tap into your real potential through his brilliant book. You'll find simple methods to design cartoons but especially pleasing is the attention to bodies, faces, and backdrops. All these bring any cartoon to life.

37. The Illusion Of Life: Disney Animation

For concept artists, one of the keys to drawing animations is to take inspiration from photos, storyboards, sketches, and paintings. This book by two well-known Disney animators, Frank Thomas, and Ollie Jonhston, talks about the 12 principles of animation while providing helpful tips to design your own characters.

38. Designing Creatures And Characters

To learn all the fundamentals of designing a graphic novel, you can read this book about sketching creatures and characters from your imagination. We found many projects and exercises that you can practice for drawing any creature to bring the novel to life.

You'll also like the beautiful illustrations and tips that the author offers from his own experience as an artist.

39. The Artist's Complete Guide To Figure Drawing

The best drawing books often talk about how to draw, but Anthony Ryder takes a different approach and discusses what you should draw. He builds on the idea of capturing what an artist sees rather than what they expect to see. You'll especially like the topics covering life, form, shape, and lines to create realistic drawings.

40. Force: Dynamic Life Drawing For Animators

To apply the fundamentals of figure drawing in real life, Mike Mattesi talks about sketching the human body in its purest form. But he also discusses how attention to clothes can elevate the artwork to another level. This book is the perfect guide for people to convey emotions through art.

41. A Foundation Course In Drawing

An important book for art study is A Foundation Course In Drawing, with university lecturers Terry Rosenberg and Peter Stanyer co-writing it. The book contains many realistic exercises to help students grasp the concept of different art forms and apply them to their projects. It's ideal for beginners to learn real-life applications of various drawing techniques.

42. The Skillful Huntsman

Any concept artist will find this book to their liking as it discusses visual development through various sketching techniques. It mostly deals with creating fantasy worlds comprising castles, forests, huntsmen, and monsters by encouraging artists to explore their creativity. However, some of the concepts about perspective might be a little complex.

43. The Art Of Perspective

This is a fairly new book published in 2007 and focuses on atmospheric perspective to explain how values and colors can add depth to any artwork. There are topics covering one, two, and three-point perspectives, while the author also deals with unique perspective-related problems like wheels, reflections, and stairs.

44. The Master Guide To Drawing Anime

If you want to draw popular anime characters, you can't go wrong with this book. It's most suitable for beginners and will help you draw school girls and boys, villains, and fantasy characters. Most of all, it offers detailed insight into developing emotions and sketching accessories.

45. Drawing Manga Animals, Chibis, And Other Adorable Creatures

This is another popular book for drawing Manga and other fictional creatures like Pokemon to help you capture figure poses quickly. The primary discussion revolves around accurately depicting their facial expressions, shapes, sizes, and unique character traits to leave a mark on the audience.

46. Mastering Manga

Both beginners and advanced Manga artists will enjoy the topics covered in this book, including character development and setting a scene. After reading it, you can expand your skill set and draw exquisite Manga characters, thanks to the detailed illustrations.

47. Classic Human Anatomy

This is a classic drawing book for developing anatomical sense, thanks to the 800 illustrations depicting the movement of muscles and bones in the body. We found that it's divided into three sections - muscles and their actions, skeleton, and movement.

It's ideal for an intermediate artist, and the easy instructions make it convenient for you to quickly grasp the subject.

48. The Big Book Of Realistic Drawing Secrets

You can buy this comprehensive book when you aspire to draw realistic figures of animals, humans, inanimate objects, and the environment. Co-written by Rick and Carrie Stuart Parks, this book takes a deep dive into the basics of drawing.

You'll find topics on anatomy, form, and structure with several helpful tips to improve your drawing skills. And both advanced and novice artists will like the friendly narration.

49. An Illustrated Life

Out of all the books we have reviewed, this is one of the rare ones that only contains pictures of artistic inspiration. Various artists have shared their creations from their library, which makes An Illustrated Life unique.

As you can understand, it's not a tutorial on how to draw, even though there are certain helpful tips. This is down to the author's interviews with the artists, where they talk about their creative process.

50. The Artist's Complete Guide To Drawing The Head

Who knew that drawing the head could be so challenging? That's because William Maughan discusses Leonardo Da Vinci's chiaroscuro technique, which is the interplay between light and dark.

Artists will learn about using toned paper, and dark and white pencils to create shadow, light, and other interesting forms. There's even a detailed guide on drawing accurate facial features through soft pastels for visual awareness.

Best Drawing Books for Beginners Comparison Table

Product	Number of Pages	Dimensions	Weight	Publisher	Publication Date	Book Format
Keys To Drawing	224 pages	8.47 x 0.45 x 11 inches	1.6 lbs	North Light Books	August 15, 1990	Paperback
Drawing On The Right Side Of The Brain	291 pages	8 x 0.75 x 9.5 inches	1.45 lbs	Tarcher	August 30, 1999	Paperback
Drawing For The Absolute Beginner	128 pages	8.51 x 0.37 x 10.86 inches	0.22 lbs	North Light Books	November 2, 2006	Paperback
Drawing For The Absolute And Utter Beginner	160 pages	8.5 x 0.4 x 11.1 inches	1.31 lbs	Watson-Guptill	October 1, 2003	Paperback
Light For Visual Artists	176 pages	8.8 x 0.75 x 11.2 inches	1.59 lbs	Laurence King Publishing	July 16, 2019	Paperback
Perspective Made Easy	224 pages	5.39 x 0.47 x 8.46 inches	0.58 lbs	Dover Publications	January 19, 1999	Paperback
The Natural Way To Draw	240 pages	6.88 x 0.69 x 9.25 inches	1.13 lbs	Mariner Books	February 1, 1990	Paperback
Vilppu Drawing Manual	177 pages	N/A	1.3 lbs	Vilppu Studio	January 1, 1997	Spiral-bound
Figure Drawing For All It's Worth	208 pages	9.2 x 1.02 x 12.3 inches	2.8 lbs	Titan Books	May 31, 2011	Hardcover
Traveling With Your Sketchbook	200 pages	8.5 x 0.5 x 11 inches	1.01 lbs	Butterfly Books	April 1, 1991	Paperback
How To Draw What You See	303 pages	N/A	N/A	N/A	Watson-Guptill	September 7, 2011
A Foundation Course In Drawing	240 pages	8.5 x 0.75 x 12 inches	1.7 lbs	Watson-Guptill	January 1, 2003	Paperback
Framed Ink	128 pages	8.56 x 0.55 x 10.95 inches	1.45 lbs	Design Studio Press	August 31, 2010	Paperback
Learn To Draw And Paint	320 pages	8 x 1 x 10.25 inches	2.2 lbs	Watson-Guptill	October 1, 2003	Paperback
How To Draw	208 pages	9.1 x 0.8 x 11.03 inches	2.5 lbs	Design Studio Press	December 15, 2013	Paperback
Drawing The Head And Hands	160 pages	9.2 x 0.8 x 12.3 inches	2.19 lbs	Titan Books	October 25, 2011	Hardcover
Figure Drawing	235 pages	10 x 7.5 x 1.2 inches	1.89 lbs	M. Hampton	December 27, 2009	Paperback
Figure Drawing For Artists	192 pages	8.63 x 0.75 x 10 inches	1.5 lbs	Rockport Publishers	June 1, 2016	Flexibound
Anatomy For The Artist	255 pages	10.25 x 1.25 x 12 inches	3.65 lbs	DK Publishing	October 1, 2001	Hardcover
Successful Drawing	160 pages	9.3 x 0.9 x 12.2 inches	2.3 lbs	Titan Books	May 8, 2012	Hardcover
Drawing People	176 pages	8.7 x 0.7 x 11.1 inches	2.15 lbs	F+W Media	October 27, 2003	Hardcover
Drawing The Living Figure	144 pages	8.33 x 0.46 x 11.17 inches	0.91 lbs	Dover Publications	May 1, 1991	Paperback
Human Anatomy For Artists	368 pages	12.32 x 9.32 x 1.11 inches	3.79 lbs	Oxford University Press	November 7, 1991	Hardcover
A Handbook Of Anatomy For Art Students	624 pages	5.5 x 1.25 x 8.5 inches	1.36 lbs	Dover Publications	November 24, 2011	Paperback
Pen And Ink Drawing	166 pages	8 x 0.38 x 11 inches	0.9 lbs	Three Minds Press	December 11, 2015	Paperback
Draw Great Characters	144 pages	8.5 x 0.5 x 11 inches	1.42 lbs	IMPACT Books	December 3, 2019	Paperback
Art Fundamentals	288 pages	8.19 x 0.94 x 11.57 inches	2.8lbs	3DTotal Publishing	May 12, 2020	Paperback
Beginners Guide To Life Drawing	96 pages	8.56 x 0.27 x 11.06 inches	0.94 lbs	Search Press	June 4, 2019	Paperback
Sketching From The Imagination: Creatures And Monsters	320 pages	8 x 0.75 x 9 inches	2.1 lbs	3DTotal Publishing	June 25, 2019	Paperback
Pocket Art	112 pages	5.25 x 0.75 x 8.2 inches	0.55 lbs	Rockport Publishers	April 24, 2018	Flexibound
The Sketch Encyclopedia	504 pages	9 x 1.5 x 11 inches	4.14 lbs	3DTotal Publishing	October 30, 2018	Hardcover
Drawn To Life	403 pages	10.8 x 8.4 x 1 inches	2.99 lbs	Routledge	March 23, 2009	Paperback
How To Draw Comics The Marvel Way	192 pages	8.5 x 0.4 x 11 inches	0.85 lbs	Atria Books	September 14, 1984	Paperback
Drawing The Head And Figure	128 pages	8.2 x 0.3 x 10.8 inches	0.65 lbs	TarcherPerigee	January 15, 1982	Paperback
The Silver Way	248 pages	12 x 1 x 9 inches	3.1 lbs	Design Studio Press	April 7, 2017	Paperback
Modern Cartooning	160 pages	8.51 x 0.44 x 10.87 inches	1.42 lbs	Watson-Guptill	March 26, 2013	Paperback
The Illusion Of Life: Disney Animation	576 pages	10.66 x 1.4 x 11.39 inches	6.28 lbs	Disney Editions	October 19, 1995	Hardcover
Designing Creatures And Characters	192 pages	8 x 0.55 x 10.01 inches	1.45 lbs	IMPACT Books	October 12, 2016	Paperback
The Artist's Complete Guide To Figure Drawing	160 pages	8.25 x 0.39 x 10.79 inches	0.95 lbs	Watson-Guptill	June 1, 1999	Paperback
Force: Dynamic Life Drawing For Animators	211 pages	8.4 x 0.6 x 10.9 inches	1.84 lbs	CRC Press	March 29, 2017	Paperback
A Foundation Course In Drawing	408 pages	7 x 1.5 x 9.5 inches	2.15 lbs	Watson-Guptill	October 1, 1999	Hardcover
The Skillful Huntsman	N/A	N/A	N/A	N/A	January 1, 2008	Hardcover
The Art Of Perspective	208 pages	8.53 x 0.55 x 11 inches	1.81 lbs	North Light Books	June 12, 2007	Paperback
The Master Guide To Drawing Anime	144 pages	9 x 0.5 x 10 inches	1.2 lbs	Drawing with Christopher Hart	July 7, 2015	Paperback
Drawing Manga Animals, Chibis, And Other Adorable Creatures	160 pages	8.5 x 0.48 x 9.99 inches	1.35 lbs	Watson-Guptill	November 17, 2009	Paperback
Mastering Manga	128 pages	8.5 x 5.43 x 0.3 inches	1.1 lbs	IMPACT Books	March 8, 2012	Paperback
Classic Human Anatomy	304 pages	9.33 x 0.91 x 11.23 inches	3.21 lbs	Watson-Guptill	December 23, 2008	Hardcover
The Big Book Of Realistic Drawing Secrets	224 pages	8.51 x 0.5 x 10.84 inches	1.99 lbs	North Light Books	June 13, 2009	Paperback
An Illustrated Life	272 pages	10 x 0.6 x 8 inches	2.2 lbs	HOW Books	December 1, 2008	Paperback
The Artist's Complete Guide To Drawing The Head	160 pages	8.31 x 0.4 x 10.99 inches	1.26 lbs	Watson-Guptill	January 1, 2004	Paperback

Buying Guide for the Best Drawing Book for Beginners

Now let’s look at the factors that will help you choose the best drawing books for novice artists. But before that, here are the answers to a few common questions that budding artists usually have.

A. Easy to Understand

The best drawing books are easy to understand despite the complex concepts and structures of shape, light, and form. This will help beginners grasp the concepts quickly and apply them to their painting projects.

It will help if you look for books that explain how to use different painting mediums to evoke subtle expressions. For instance, a slight tilt of the eyebrow can draw your attention to a person's face, which enhances their facial expressions.

B. Wide Range of Topics

To hold value for beginners, drawing books should cover a wide range of topics even when the book's primary focus is on a singular feature. You have seen in our reviews that many books deal with drawing the head or arms, but even then, they are pretty detailed.

They cover concepts of proportions, reflections, perspectives, etc., to bring your sketches to life. Moreover, search for books that discuss brush strokes, color gradients, and adding depth to the drawings.

C. Price

Although you would want to buy the best drawing books, we are not recommending that you spend a fortune on them. We understand that buying art accessories is pretty expensive, so you want to look for an affordable book.

Most of the books in our guide are reasonably priced, and books for the slightly advanced artist are priced higher. So, depending on your proficiency, you may have to spend a little extra to purchase a relevant book.

As a beginner, you must first learn about perspective to skillfully portray 3D objects on 2D paper. There are different perspective techniques that visual artists use for life drawing to make their work stand out.

The five basics of drawing that complete beginners should know about are:

Perspective
Color schemes
Proportions
Edges
Putting thought into action

What are some important drawing methods?

The four most crucial drawing methods are:

Hatching and cross-hatching
Rendering light
Shading and blending
Adding highlights

Conclusion

That's all the drawing books we had to cover for beginners; hopefully, now, you can choose one based on the skills you want to develop.

It's essential to keep innovating and pushing yourself to learn about the latest techniques and trends in the world of art, so reading the best drawing books will be worthwhile. You can take inspiration from the pictures and illustrations in many of them to incorporate them with your unique sketching style.

Also, don't forget to try out pencil, pen, and brush strokes, as each medium adds something new to a drawing. With that, we will leave you to brainstorm for your upcoming project, so take care and read this guide before purchasing drawing books.

Related Articles

111 Best, Fun and Cool Things to Draw

8 Best Cartooning Books

11 Best Perspective Books

21 Best Manga Drawing Books

5 Best Hand Drawing Reference

16 Best Maya Books

25 Best Concept Art Books

11 Best Adult Coloring Books

11 Best Color Theory Books

Best Watercolor Painting Books

Are you searching for an incredible way to create a unique space in your home that caters to your personality and interests? Look no further than your basement: an often overlooked area that has the potential to be transformed into an impressive and personalized bar. By turning your focus to basement bar ideas, you can make your house truly feel like home.

In planning your dream basement bar, it's crucial to consider available space and any necessary improvements. Ensure your basement is dry and safe, addressing waterproofing, ventilation, and insulation to create an inviting environment. Don't forget that soundproofing and acoustics, particularly for the basement ceiling, are key aspects in achieving a comfortable and functional space. Effective ceiling soundproofing will ensure the fun in the basement doesn't disturb the rest of the house and vice versa.

With proper planning and optimization, your basement can be more than just storage or technical space, its natural soundproofing qualities make it a perfect location for an enjoyable and relaxing retreat. Take inspiration from the 43 insanely cool basement bar ideas featured in this article and let your imagination run wild. Incorporate a game room, and you've got yourself a fantastic bachelor pad or entertainment hub for friends and family — all while maintaining a peaceful atmosphere for the rest of your home.

Cool Basement Bar Ideas for Your Home

1. Simple and cozy basement bar idea

1. SIMPLE AND COZY BASEMENT BAR IDEA

2. Using light to make the bar more inviting

2. USING LIGHT TO MAKE THE BAR MORE INVITING

3. Combining materials adds flavor

3. COMBINING MATERIALS ADDS FLAVOR

4. A black bar is always striking

4. A BLACK BAR IS ALWAYS STRIKING

The coolest basement bar ideas don't need to be big, but they all need to make justice to the space they occupy, they simply need to be capable of properly entertaining.

5. Space-efficient basement bar design

I love this idea because it makes use of a residual basement space that would otherwise be used as a simple storage space if not for nothing at all. A small bar opened in your basement will present new options, and it will lead to great opportunities when it comes to entertaining your friends and family.

5. SPACE EFFICIENT BASEMENT BAR DESIGN

6. Stunning rustic basement bar

Old buildings were made primarily of bricks. If that's the case for your basement, simply paint it or leave it natural and complement the whole with a wooden bar, the brick and wood combination will make the place charming.

Basement bars are cool by default but with exposed brick, rustic wooden accents, and industrial stools, your basement will go to a whole other level.

6. STUNNING RUSTIC BASEMENT BAR

7. Make the bar more visible by using warm light

7. MAKE THE BAR MORE VISIBLE BY USING WARM LIGHT

8. Lovely wine storage wood structure

If your wine collection is something that you cherish then the storage solution deserves special attention. Common rectangular storage units will always do the job but to make the place special you need something that catches the eye and removes the ordinary attribute.

Here the bar shelf displays the liquor while the splendid geometric shelves differentiate wine types in a pattern that can even be called wine art by enthusiasts.

8. LOVELY WINE STORAGE WOOD STRUCTURE

9. White always suggests elegance

It's not just the color though. The proportions, the wooden frames, and small details, here, the shape of the handles, contribute to turning this into a very stylish basement bar idea. Also, imagine how surprised your guests will be when you open the doors to what looks like a normal cabinet to reveal an extraordinary basement bar.

9. WHITE ALWAYS SUGGEST ELEGANCE

Your entire bar and the bar shelves can be hidden in a cabinet to declutter your ambiance.

10. Choosing contrasting colors makes the bar stand out

10. CHOOSING CONTRASTING COLORS MAKES THE BAR STAND OUT

While this home basement bar looks simple and neat do note that your bar shelf can have lights incorporated within. That not only enhances visibility but also puts great emphasis on the best bottles in your collection that might reside on these shelves.

11. Retro design is not something you see every day

12. Space-conscious bar design idea

You don't need an entire room to fit the home bar that you've always dreamed of having. Even a small wall will do. It's the design that counts more and the way it connects to the rest of the room. By fitting it with a mirror, you'll make the space feel bigger and the bar more interesting.

via The Creativity Exchange

13. An illuminated countertop is a must

The upper cabinet was fitted with small lights that illuminate the countertop, it is where the magic happens and the bar comes to life. It doesn't only look good but it's also very practical, helping you prepare any drink you want.

Storing different beverages efficiently might seem a difficult task in small spaces but with the right drawer, this changes rapidly, you`ll have all the drinks in sight, easily accessible, and the entire home bar in one place.

14. Small bar cart Ikea Hack

15. The black bar - a courageous and remarkable setup

If the home bar itself isn't special enough, then you can make it even more alluring by going for an all-black design. It's still pretty uncommon and people generally don't opt for it because it's a slightly unusual thing to have. It's very subjective though, for example, Holland nestles many black designs that look great. If you're gonna do it, do it properly, choose something unique.

via Summit Signature Homes, Inc. and Denise Hauser Design Co.

16. Epic bar built in Victorian-styled cabinet

17. Trendy drink serving table

18. Gorgeous mini bar cabinet for small spaces

19. Appealing built-in wall white bar

This great basement bar idea is perfect for adding a touch of style to your home. The confined space could have been a drawback but instead, it has led to a very clean and clear solution. The fact that the setup is contained just like a frame would constrain a picture makes the home bar look very intimate and inviting. It's the perfect example for supporting the idea that bigger isn't always better.

via Benjamin Moore Smoke Embers. & John K. Anderson Design

20. It's the surprise that counts - the great space-saving idea

And, on top of that, just look at it! It's so simple and yet fits so well in the room, making it so much more interesting. Every guest will be curious and intrigued by it. What makes this object look this good is the way the wood textures blend together, keeping the design looking unitary. The colors are different but don't vary much in tone and saturation. Too much contrast and you will lose the elegant, discreet effect.

21. Enhance the setup by adding a contrasting background

What if the wall was white? Would the home bar look the same? Definitely not. The chalkboard wall now highlights a powerful contrast and by adding a respectable amount of light into the scene the designer created a very appealing basement bar.

via Elle Decor

22. Get a smooth white cabinet for a discreet bar

23. Adding a stone pattern was never easier

24. Polished drink trolley for great flexibility

25. Bar - pool table combination is a definite thrill

This one speaks for itself. All we can do is admire and dream of having a basement like this for ourselves. I know where I'd spent most of my time. Notice the difference in color and materials between the bar, the pool table, and the rest of the room and the way the bar is built into the wall, making it a special place in comparison to the rest of the room.

26. Wonderful all-black modern bar design

via KraftMaid

27. Applying a different texture makes the bar stand out

28. Combine wood and marble for exquisite results

29. Add unique details for exceptional and personal designs

If you think about it, most people have access to the same materials and ideas as you. The designs can be very different of course but if you really want to personalize your bar you'll have to infuse your own personality. Something that was invented and, even better, created by you.

30. Amazing combination of wood, marble, metal, and light

This design is in a league of its own. Can it get better than this? Maybe yours will. The designer has definitely put a lot of thought into it by choosing the right materials and proportions for each element. Analyze it and be inspired.

31. Crafty wooden bar embedded in the kitchen cabinet

32. Fill that unused corner with a cozy bar

33. No better way of storing the fancy wine collection

34. Ingenious drink storage solution

via heidipiron.com

35. An all-white classy design

36. Awesome pipe design for storing wine bottles

This is what we mean by one-of-a-kind ideas that can personalize your home bar and make it special. You might have to put a lot of thought into finding the right idea but your bar will be the only one fitted with it.

37. Fresh bar design idea for a great relaxed atmosphere

It's all about the atmosphere that you wish to create. After all, that's the part that the visitors feel, and experience the most. Not everybody will notice the details or the color matching match but everybody will remember the way it made them feel.

via petitepassport.com

38. A secret bar for the spy in you

39. Add epic juicy-unique details

Your basement bar can have small epic details incorporated, unique details that will grant it authenticity and memory.

40. Build a frame for increased notability

There are several aspects that make this example brilliant. First of all, there's a combination of materials. Not just the right types but the right kind. Perhaps using the same dark wood for the horizontal glass supports would have looked good as well but by adding a third texture, the material becomes so much more luminous and charming. Secondly, there's the way the bar was built, not in the middle of the wall but in a special area that marks its position and makes it more noticeable, important, and special. Thirdly, there's the lighting that makes the whole feel welcoming and inviting.

41. Add colored lights for great special effects

42. Little details, big design

43. Add a darts board to your bar

Sometimes a drink isn't enough and you ought to combine it with another activity like watching a football game or playing something. Add a little flavor to your room with a dedicated dartboard area for a better atmosphere.

The designs above are covering an extraordinary range of designs, from small tricks to immense bars, they ought to inspire the individual to pursue the things that they love, things that they really like, from a good beer and a darts game up to a sophisticated cocktails, art venues, and classical music.

How are you using your space? We would love to hear from you!

Related Articles

8 Best Basement Cement Floor Paints

11 Best Paint For Concrete Walls In Basements

11 Ideas for Basement Kitchens and Kitchenettes

43 Super Cool Bar Top Ideas to Realize

43 Insanely Cool Basement Bar Ideas for Your Home

The best way to soundproof a room is to use soundproofing materials and techniques along with sound absorbers like acoustic foam, acoustic panels, wall hangings, and furniture. Here it’s important to note that using sound absorbent materials alone is not enough, as they can’t guarantee actual soundproofing.

Getting time alone with your thoughts is a luxury that most people fail to enjoy because of unwanted outdoor noise. To avoid such situations and make your home a safe space to relax and reenergize, consider soundproofing the rooms in your house.

Today's guide looks at some popular techniques for soundproofing a room to help you live comfortably. Most of these are DIY methods, and you won't need many resources.

Cheapest Ways to Soundproof a Room

Soundproofing Basics

Usually, people think that the best way to soundproof a room is to block sound waves, but an effective technique to cut out unwanted noise is to absorb sound. To absorb noise in your apartment, you can implement one or more of the following methods -

Hanging acoustic panels to soundproof walls
Sound absorbing foam
Soundproofing curtains
Sound-blocking blankets over the bedroom door and other entry points

For the best results, it's important to install the sound-absorbing materials directly in the path of the source to dampen noise. But for a detailed idea of how to soundproof a room from the inside, check out the following points:

1. Source

When thinking about how to soundproof a room, the most important consideration for absorbing sound waves is location. The reason it's recommended to soundproof a room from the inside is that it's easy.

But you must determine whether you are trying to minimize sound coming from just one source, like a TV, or multiple locations. Once you identify the source, minimizing noise by diluting or muting it will be convenient.

2. Point Of Entry

Knowing the point of entry is essential to stop noise from entering the room in the first place. However, to block noise, you need to determine whether the incoming sound comes from adjacent rooms or through the existing walls. This is usually the case in shared apartments or condos having the same wall.

You must also soundproof exterior windows to prevent unwanted sounds from entering the room.

3. Reflection Point

Note that when the incoming sound enters the room, sound reflection occurs at an angle similar to the point of entry. That's why to cut out sound transmission, people sometimes opt for soundproofing walls at the end of the footboard and the entire wall of the headboard.

When the angle of entry is a straight line, the sound waves will bounce between the headboard and footboard until they dissipate. Therefore, to absorb sound waves effectively, make sure to soundproof a room based on these 3 points.

How To Soundproof Different Parts Of A Room

For maximum sound reduction in your apartment, there's no need to opt for expensive construction work. I have listed some effective Do-It-Yourself techniques to help cut down on outside noise and enhance absorption (acoustics) within the room.

1. Commercial Acoustic Foam

While many people prefer using egg crate foam for sound absorption, it doesn't possess the required mass to do a good job. That's why I suggest using commercial acoustic foam, which looks similar but delivers better results to reduce noise pollution.

In a music recording studio, it's recommended to have a minimum foam thickness of 2 inches. So, anything less or similar to this should prove ideal for normal soundproofing.

installing acoustic foam to increase soundproofing and noise reduction in a room — © Homesthetics - Sayok Das

Moreover, the pattern of the acoustic foam panels doesn't impact the effectiveness of acoustic treatment. You can shape the foam in multiple ways, such as egg crate, wavy, mushroom, wedges, and scored squares.

To choose the best soundproofing materials, you need to check the Noise Reduction Coefficient(NRC). It’s a scale between 0 and 1, with 1 being the best soundproofing. In some cases though, I’ve seen results showing higher than 1 for some materials.

This effectively says that the material absorbs more than 100% of the sound. However, these results are usually due to anomalies caused by sample size in the reverb chamber during the test (such as edge absorption).

Depending on the purpose, such as soundproofing a room for watching movies or noise control for gaming, you should know that regular carpeting or foam doesn't absorb frequencies below 250 Hz. For such instances, it would be better to opt for a bass trap for lowering bass sounds, or you can install 4-inch foam.

2. Soundproofing Techniques For Windows

When you want to block sound from filtering into a room, I suggest cutting airborne noise by treating the windows first. Thanks to easy and cost-effective solutions, you can create a tight seal around windows to restrict sound coming from outside.

Although there are several options to choose from, thick curtains and drapes are ideal for soundproofing a room. It becomes easier to absorb sound when you hang heavy curtains with noise-canceling properties or opt for a blackout curtain.

Most importantly, heavy curtains make it easier to trap energy and maintain a comfortable room temperature throughout the year. Some consumers further prefer weather-stripping and use adhesive plastic or rubber to form a tight seal around window borders.

The goal is to block gaps or holes, so air and sound do not get through. You can cut soundproof foam into the desired shape and thickness to fit it into the window frame.

3. Soundproofing Interior Doors

The easiest way to cut out the noise and absorb sound coming from adjacent rooms or outside is to install a soundproof door. But for more affordable solutions, there are several DIY methods you can try.

A. Hardwood Door Slab

You can fit the room with a slab door that's durable, thanks to the solid hardwood construction. There are also hollow units available on the market that are highly cost-effective, but they have poor noise reduction ability compared to hardwood, which is denser.

B. Door Sweep

Another popular method to soundproof wood doors is installing a door sweep made of plastic or rubber at the bottom of the door. This serves the dual purpose of reducing sound and providing insulation, or you can fit door jambs to dampen noise while improving energy efficiency.

C. Caulk

For stubborn sound, an extra layer of caulk around the door frame helps seal the crevasses and seams.

D. Door Seal

You can use weather-stripping to seal the edges around the door frame, so be careful to take accurate measurements and angle the edges where they meet the corners. Moreover, the seal won't cause obstructions when closing the door without compromising on the fit.

Other than these techniques, you can install acoustic panels by following the steps mentioned below -

The first step is removing the hinges and doorknob
Install the foam panel with Impaler clips or an adhesive
Use a utility knife to trim the panels for sound masking
Check whether you can install the door hardware or trim further
Once you are satisfied, install the hardware
Check if the door opens and closes as usual

4. Soundproofing Floors

Are your downstairs neighbors complaining about a creaky floor or excessive noise? This might be because you have hardwood floors, so a simple technique would be to use commercial floor mats, underlayment, and liners to reduce impact noise.

Carpets and rugs also serve a similar purpose, but a better option is using natural rubber gym flooring, foam tiles, and mats. Such soundproofing methods are most common in home gyms and theaters, lowering disturbance for you and others.

Soundproofing Floors detailed layers for floors noise reduction — © Homesthetics - Sayok Das

Therefore, it proves convenient to dampen the low frequencies of a sound system or absorb vibration and noise coming from a treadmill. For enhanced soundproofing, you can even add a rug for the second layer of protection against impact noises.

The best part is that rugs and carpeting are budget options that don't require a lot of money or resources. All you need is to use them with a liner, for which soundproofing rug pads and carpet liners come in handy.

But for hard surfaces, installing an underlayment that matches the lamination, hardwood, or foam tiles would be best. However, installing them during a renovation or new construction work would be ideal.

5. Soundproofing Walls

One of the most important things to consider when blocking noise in a room is how to soundproof the existing wall. Compared to other soundproofing methods, absorbing noise through walls is more labor-intensive, especially when you have existing drywall.

But here are some easy methods you should know about -

A. Furniture

Make use of the existing furniture, such as a bookcase or large wardrobe, by pushing them against the wall after locating the source. Since sound absorption increases depending on the mass, using large furniture is ideal.

B. Sealant

A sealant proves useful for tackling minor noise problems, for which you can apply a water-based acoustic sealant to fill the gaps or cracks in walls. You must also use a product with a color similar to the wall to maintain the quality of the interior décor or choose a sealant that permits repainting.

C. Wallpaper

Most people may not be aware, but applying wallpaper is just as good as other soundproofing techniques. Several soundproofing wallpapers are available on the market made from sound-absorbent foam to minimize noise.

how to soundproof a room for free or cheaply with tapestry — © Homesthetics - Sayok Das

D. Tapestry

You can hang a decorative tapestry or rug on the walls like a thick blanket. This technique has been used since ancient times to soften impact noise, keep the interiors warm, and prevent echoes, it is a sure way to add sound absorption, soundproofing to a room cheaply, probably the only free way to soundproof a room.

E. Acoustic Panels

Acoustic panels and soundproofing go hand-in-hand, and they are easy to install, thanks to impaling clips or adhesives. But there are a few things you need to keep in mind before using wall panels -

Removing acoustic panels often requires repairing the wall
Adhesives can damage the drywall or paint, but the panels won't be affected
Impaling clips take longer to install but don't require much maintenance

hang acoustic panels to soundproof a room cheaply and easily — © Homesthetics - Sayok Das

I must mention that impaling clips are metal fasteners with a flat shape, accompanied by metal prongs to hold the foam and attach it to the wall. If needed, you can also apply foam to the screws sticking out of the walls.

Usually, using impaling clips means you must only patch holes in the walls. But prior to that, apply packing tape on the panels and walls to remove the foam before applying the adhesive again to the shiny surfaces.

Note that you may still face issues with noise pollution but using this installation technique will allow you to take down the panels hassle-free.

F. Insulation

One of the best ways to make a room soundproof is by adding insulation to the walls, which isn't as difficult as it may seem.

The first step is removing the drywall to expose the wall studs
You can then apply fiberglass insulation, cotton batt, or other material between the studs
The last step is replacing the drywall for sound insulation

G. Wall Frame

When you don't want to remove the drywall and reinstall it, you can add another drywall or wall frame to block the noise. This will make the room smaller but will provide a quality solution.

Fix the wall frame to the studs
You can also add resilient channels or sound clips to the studs
Finally, apply a new layer of drywall over them.

For those who don't know, resilient channels are metal frames, providing greater control over sound absorption.

6. Soundproofing Ceilings

Learning how to soundproof a room would be incomplete if you don't know how to treat the ceiling to reduce sound. But fixing ceilings is easier, thanks to insulation clouds and acoustic ceiling tiles available in multiple designs and colors to enhance the interior décor.

A. Acoustic Tiles

A simple yet highly functional solution for reducing noise is installing thick acoustic panels over the existing ceiling.

B. Cloud

A ceiling cloud is best suited for tall rooms, whereby the acoustic lining or canopy cuts out the excess noise. Moreover, given the shape of the hanging structure, it has the appearance of a cloud.

Given the multiple benefits of ceiling clouds, you will find them installed in recording studios. So, if professionals prefer to use them, you certainly can. However, once again, these will only absorb the sound, and not block it entirely from traveling across the walls.

C. Soundproofing During Construction

Most people don't think about soundproofing until later, but it never hurts to be proactive. Soundproofing during the construction stage is easier and reduces the hassle of making frequent alterations -

Before installing the ceiling, attach soundproofing material over the studs
Apply sealant to the gaps for maximum noise absorption
Install new drywall or patch the existing wall to cover the ceiling

7. Reducing Noise Reflection

Sometimes, the noise level increases in the entire room when you play music because it reflects off hard flooring and other surfaces. When sound bounces inside the room you need an absorbent material for sound masking the floor by reducing reflection. The thumb rule to go by is that for each doubling of absorption, the ambient sound levels will reduce by about 3dB.

So, cover the walls and ceilings with a soft material to muffle the sounds of barks, voices, or noise from a vacuum cleaner. This is where a shag rug for ceilings and rubber textile mats for the walls helps keep decibel levels down inside a room.

Most Affordable Ways To Soundproof A Room

I have highlighted several ways how to soundproof a room, but here are some affordable solutions that you can consider.

1. Window Treatments And Curtains

Curtains provide privacy while blocking outside noise, for which thick drapery and hanging plush prove useful. Moreover, they further absorb ambient noise inside a room for greater comfort.

2. Area Rugs

Area rugs are especially useful in main living rooms and or when there is much noise in an apartment. You can also add a pad under thick rugs to mask the sound further without compromising the available space.

3. Upholstered Furniture

The more upholstered furniture you have, the higher the chances of a quiet room because there are more areas for sound absorption. I have seen that sound doesn't bounce much in such rooms, so make sure to add plush pillows and thick blankets.

4. Background Noise

Even though it may feel counterproductive, there is some logic to this madness. Background noises are highly effective and affordable in making a room soundproof.

If there's something else you can listen to, such as white noise or instrumental music, you can mute or drown out other annoying sounds.

A. Sound Masking

Many people have sound machines that can produce various background noises, like rain, sounds of nature, or white noise; this is known as masking. But this is a temporary fix since such machines don't eliminate the noise entirely.

B. Air Purifier

Air purifiers help remove impurities from the air and produce enough noise to drown out surrounding sounds. You will need a medium-sized unit for the best results so that noise from the other room doesn't filter in.

C. Fans

Box fans, ceiling fans, and modular fans increase airflow and add white noise inside the room to dampen other sounds. Plus, you won't have to choose an expensive or fancy unit since the primary purpose is to generate more background noise.

How To Soundproof A Room Conclusion

After reading my guide, you can choose multiple techniques to soundproof a room effectively.

But based on your living situation, everyone may not enjoy similar results. For instance, if you live in a rented apartment, it might be difficult to get permission for construction or changes to the interior makeup of the room.

You can still use fans or sound machines to cut out unwanted noise. However, if you want a more permanent solution, ask the building contractor to add insulation to the walls before installing the drywall.

So, take your pick and make your home sound free with any of these easy methods!

Tip

When soundproofing a room, don’t forget to install air vents since they guarantee comfort and safety when working for extended periods. To make room for ductwork, you will need to measure a 6-inch hole in the wall for quiet ventilation.

To wallpaper around windows, start by measuring the wall and cutting the wallpaper to fit, allowing extra for trimming. Clean and prime the wall, and mark guidelines with a plumb line. Apply the wallpaper, smooth it out, and let it overlap with the window’s edges. Make diagonal cuts at the corners and adhere the flaps to the window's sides, trimming any excess with a sharp knife. Use high-quality adhesive and be precise with placement to ensure a seamless look. Remove any residual adhesive immediately.

Wallpaper, a decorative material sold in rolls, is used to adorn the interior walls of various buildings and is adhered with wallpaper paste. It can serve as plain lining paper to prime walls for painting or to mask imperfections, offering a refined surface. Wallpaper may be textured, like Anaglypta, bear regular repeating patterns, or, more rarely, portray a unique design spanned across multiple sheets. The smallest tiling rectangle to complete the pattern is termed the pattern repeat. However, the application can become intricate around windows due to the presence of sills, overhangs, and reveals, requiring precision and care to ensure a seamless finish.

What is a Window Sill?

A window sill is the horizontal base of a window frame, integral to the window structure, projecting outward from the wall at the bottom of the window, often serving to hold objects and protect the building fabric from water penetration, thereby playing a crucial role in water management and structural integrity.

What is a Window Overhang?

A window overhang, an architectural element found inside or outside a window, serves dual purposes. Externally, it shields and diverts rain, protecting the structure. Internally, it blends utility and aesthetics, concealing fixtures or hosting lights, adding an artistic flair to functionality.

What is a Window Reveal?

A window reveal is a structural element, it's the side of the window aperture, a surface between the outer wall surface and the window frame, highlighting the thickness of the wall. It plays a crucial role in the aesthetic finish of the window, providing depth and shadow, and enhancing architectural detailing, and it often interacts with light to create varying visual effects, subtly merging functionality and visual appeal.

How to Hang Wallpaper Around Windows

Recessed Window

1. Position the wallpaper length above the window, allowing an overhang into the window recess. Affix and smooth it several inches above the window recess top.

2. Execute a horizontal cut above the window reveal's edge.

3. Make a corresponding cut below the window sill, folding the paper to conceal the reveal’s side.

4. Use a smoothing tool or brush to adhere and smooth the paper onto the reveal.

5. Utilize a utility knife and a guide to eliminate excess paper.

6. Measure, cut, and attach the subsequent wallpaper piece to address the overhang and above wall. Install another strip for the wall below the window.

7. On the window's opposite side, adapt the wallpaper around the other reveal, replicating procedures in steps 1-5.

8. For the unpapered upper corners of the window overhang, measure, cut, and align an 'off cut' piece with an extra 20mm at each end, ensuring pattern continuity.

9. Secure and streamline the paper above the window recess, overlapping existing paper, and ensuring pattern alignment. Execute a double cut, remove the underlying layer, fix the new strip, and fold it onto the overhang, trimming the excess.

10. Repeat for any other areas of overhang needing wallpaper, ensuring precise application and trimming around the window areas.

Wallpapering Around a Flush Window

Wallpapering around a flush window is notably a less complex procedure. This guide will walk you through the streamlined process:

1. Position your wallpaper strategically above the window, smoothing and securing it to the wall, ceasing just above the window frame.

2. Remove the majority of the surplus paper in front of the window, retaining 1-2 inches of wallpaper protruding over the frames at the top, bottom, and side of the window.

3. Align the wallpaper onto the frame and employ your finger to discern the outer corner of the frame.

4. Implement a 45° angled cut into this corner, facilitating the accommodation of the paper around the external edges of the frame.

5. Affix the paper firmly to the wall, nesting it where the frame and wall converge, using a smoothing brush or a plastic smoother.

6. Trim the peripheral wallpaper around the frame utilizing a wallpaper edge trimmer and a utility knife or alternatively, score the wallpaper in the intersection of the frame and wall with scissors, peel back, and discard the excess.

7. Adjust the edges of the wallpaper back into their designated positions.

8. Progress on all sides until the wallpaper application around the window is impeccably accomplished.

Types of Wallpaper

Vinyl wallpapers, known for durability, are a top pick for kitchens and bathrooms, including variants like enduring solid vinyl and appealing vinyl-coated. Non-woven wallpapers are acclaimed for breathability and eco-friendliness, ideal for living areas and bedrooms due to their mold resistance and easy removal. Textile wallpapers imbue luxury with their fabric finish in low-traffic, dry areas, and traditional paper wallpapers, diverse and affordable, excel in environments with minimal moisture.

Diversity in wallpaper types extends to flocked wallpapers, offering velvety elegance; foil wallpapers, reflecting modern metallic brilliance; and bamboo wallpapers, infusing spaces with natural, sustainable charm. To further broaden the selection, there are also grasscloth wallpapers for those seeking a textured, organic appeal, and mural wallpapers that turn walls into visual narratives, each contributing to the expansive and varied world of wallpaper types, catering to a myriad of aesthetic and functional preferences.

Concluding, the variety in wallpaper types is extensive, each offering a unique blend of aesthetic and functional benefits, whether it’s for a bathroom, kitchen, or a cozy living room. So, what type of unique wallpaper are you considering? Whether your windows are recessed or flush, which wallpaper will you choose to breathe new life into your spaces today? We’d love to hear about your selections and experiences!

For those who are working professionally with tools or on a smaller scale as a home project, the rotary tool has now become a staple.

With all the attachments that a rotary tool offers, no wonder they are favored as a multi-purpose tool. The compact machines pack a punch to overcome any challenge you may come across while working on a project.

A well-known and respected brand for its rotary tools, Dremel offers two unique models of their Dremel rotary tool-the 4300 and 4000. Taking these model names at face value, it seems that one is just an upgraded version of the other.

However, while both models have their similarities, there are also unique features to each that merit a closer look. These differences can make or break the choice between the 4300 and 4000, so which is the right option for you? Find out!

Dremel 4300 Vs 4000

Dremel 4300

A rotary tool with a 1.8-amp motor that can move at speeds of 5,000-35,000 rpm, the 4300 is powerful and versatile. The kit is bundled with a number of attachments for the 3-jaw chuck attached to the Dremel.

Using a 3-jaw chuck design has allowed the 4300 to have attachments without the need to use a collet. It is a new version of the previous collet lock designs, maintaining durability and ease in switching between attachments for the Dremel.

Utilizing a 360-degree ergonomic design is a staple of the Dremel brand, and the 4300 is not lacking in this department. With an all-around comfortable grip, it places the controls at your fingertips in a comfortable spot.

Now, when it comes to the kits available for this model, there are currently two in the market: the 9/64 and the 5/40. This means one kit has nine attachments with 64 accessories or five attachments with 40 accessories.

The number of attachments and accessories in a kit may not always equate to a superior kit. So, it is essential to know what these attachments and accessories are and whether they would be helpful in your projects.

Some useful accessories that the 4300 comes with are listed below.

Shield Attachment

This attachment protects you from any debris that may be thrown by the rotary drill. It is a great safety feature to have when working with dangerous materials that can cause harm.

High-Speed Cutter

A standard accessory when it comes to rotary drills - the high-speed cutter is a circular cutting wheel that can break down materials with minimal overheating. Additionally, the 4300 comes with cut-off wheels, a multi-purpose spiral cutting bit, and a lock-wood cutting wheel.

Cleaning Brush

An underrated accessory to have, a cleaning brush is helpful in cleaning the material being worked on. Be it rust removal or just a polishing finish; the cleaning brush accessories can bring a higher quality finish to your projects.

Sanding/Grinding Bit with Guide

Another common accessory, the sanding, and grinding bits make wearing away material a more accessible experience with a handheld machine like the rotary drill.

These bits are available in a range of various sizes to provide precision or a larger working area where it is needed. The range of bits included goes from ½” 60-grit sandpaper to a ⅜” aluminum oxide grinding stone.

Additionally, Dremel has included a guide that will enhance the precision you have while sanding or grinding. Utilizing this with the speed-control of the 4300 and any material you have will be easy to mold and wear away.

Flexible Shaft and Detailer’s Grip

The 4300 has excellent flexibility right off the bat to work at different angles. To extend this flexibility even further, the shaft can be extended to reach tighter areas for detailed work.

On the topic of detailing, the detailer’s grip will ease the comfort and stability when using the 4300 to have a steady hand. This is essential for the precise work required when detailing a piece.

Tool Sharpener

Having the ability to touch up the included bits in the kit is a helpful touch. By sharpening the bits, you can extend their lifespan and save money by replacing them when they get dull. What’s more, there is a specific sharpener accessory to touch up your gardening tools.

Pivot Light

Arguably the standout feature of the 4300, the included pivot light is a newer addition to rotary drills from Dremel. This light can illuminate darker areas to increase precision and navigate the drill better.

Additionally, the light can rotate around the drill, so it never obstructs your view in tight spaces. It is built into the drill itself, so there is no need to attach or remove it; it is always ready to go.

Drawbacks of the 4300

While the Dremel 4300 has many great features, it is not without its share of drawbacks. They may be few, but they are still worth noting to ensure a more informed decision can be made on which model to pick up.

One issue with the 4300 that some may have is the storage case provided for the drill and attachments. If compact storage space is a requisite for you, then this model may disappoint.

With a hard storage case, it does feel large when carrying around. This may not be a deal-breaker for many, but it can become a hassle to lug the bulky case around for those who need to move the drill regularly. However, it does offer the benefit of protection and more space to keep the bits and drill organized.

Another aspect that may deter some from the 4300 is the price point it comes at. It is definitely an investment, similar to any tool purchase. While the price may be steep for some, the value that it brings in performance is worth the expense.

Dremel 4000

The Dremel 4000 is admittedly an older model of the 4300, yet it still holds up in many ways to its newer counterpart.

It has many features that laid the foundation for the development of the 4300, such as the 5,000-35,000 variable speed RPM. On the other hand, some features are a slight step down from the 4300, for example, the 1.6 amps of power.

Furthermore, the attachment set-up on the 4000 model is an older collet lock system. This collet lock is more than adequate and ensures the attached bits are locked into the drill securely. An EZ twist nose cap with this collet lock makes removing and attaching bits and accessories easier to access.

Sporting an older system of attachment, the 4000 model offers a wider variety of bits and accessories. It comes with the standard attachments in the included kit, such as a right-angle attachment, shield guard, dust blower, and more.

If there is a particular bit or attachment you need for a specific project or material you are working with, a number of different kits are available. A specialized kit for cutting may not have the same bits as the carving and engraving kit.

These specialized kits may not have many attachments and bits. However, they have been curated by Dremel to provide all the necessary accessories you may need for a specific project or job.

Four kits are available for the Dremel 4000, with a varying number of attachments and specific catering to specific tasks for the rotary drill-a 2/30 kit, 3/34, 4/34, and a 6/50 kit are available. The first number being the number of attachments, and the second being how many accessories are included.

There is a customized kit with the attachments you need to get the job done no matter the job. Otherwise, the all-purpose kit has a range of bits to cater to any general task you may have for the rotary drill.

An ergonomic handle gives the 4000 rotary drills a comfortable fit in the hand even when used extensively or at various angles. The button layout has been made to keep the power and speed control separate. As a result, the adjustment of the drill’s speed can be made precisely and with little to no thought.

Another great feature is the ability to replace the motor brushes. By replacing the worn-out brush in the drill with a new one, the life of the 4000 rotary drills can be extended for many years.

Drawbacks of the 4000

As the Dremel 4000 is an older model than the 4300, there are bound to be a number of drawbacks that were improved upon in the newer model.

One such drawback is the collet lock attachment system. While it is able to accommodate a wide variety of bits and attachments, the collet lock is of a fixed size. This indicates that smaller or larger bits may not be able to be securely attached.

In order to fit bits of a different size than the collet lock, the entire lock must be removed and replaced with an adequately sized collet lock for the attachment. The whole process can be a hassle, especially when working with a number of differently-sized bits in succession.

Another area that the 4000 model suffers in is the air circulation within the drill. When used for an extended period, there is a considerable heat spike. The temperature is not so high as to be uncomfortable when holding the drill, but it is significant enough to be worrisome.

Of course, this rise in temperature occurs only if the drill is left running under strain for a more extended amount of time. For light users of the 4000 rotary drill, they should face no issues with overheating.

Comparing Dremel 4300 Vs 4000

Looking at both these rotary drills side by side, they share many similarities. Dremel has kept features that worked well in the 4000 model in their newer 4300 model. Similarly, there are some features that were improved upon or entirely new added to the 4300.

Build

The saying “Don’t fix it if it isn’t broken” is very relevant in the case of the Dremel rotary drills. Both the 4000 and the 4300 have the same ergonomic design for a secure grip no matter how you hold the drill.

Admittedly, the 4300 has a slightly thinner build than the 4000, but it is not a drastic change in design. This design choice makes the 4300 more comfortable to hold for extended periods of time.

Attachment System

An area where there is a drastic overhaul of the 4000 design in the 4300 is the attachment system design. With the traditional system of a collet lock, the 4000 was prone to regular dismantling to accommodate larger or smaller bits and accessories in the drill.

What’s more, it became necessary to purchase a separate differently sized collet lock just to use some attachment. The extra expense, along with the specialized accessories, can be a hassle just for a unique task or job.

Of course, switching out a collet lock for another size is not a regular occurrence but rather for specific tasks. Attaching and removing bits is made easy with the EZ twist nose cap system, giving fast transitions between different attachments while keeping them securely fixed.

Comparatively, the new three-jaw chuck design in the 4300 improved the collet lock system by removing the need for additional tools to change the attachments. There is no need to buy different-sized collets just to attach a specific bit to the drill with the 4300.

The three-jaw chuck design saves on not only money but also time and energy spent attaching certain bits. This can be especially useful for projects requiring different bits and accessories.

Furthermore, the strength and security that the three-jaw chuck design brings in securing attachments is on par with that of the collet lock system; easily a notable upgrade from the 4000.

Diversity of Attachments

Moving from the attachment systems to the attachments themselves, there are differences in the kits available for each model. As the attachment systems were overhauled in the 4300, the bits had to be reconfigured to accommodate the three-jaw chuck design.

Not only is the attachment design different, but the number of attachments in the kits has changed. In the 4000 model, the largest kit available is the 6/50 kit with 50 accessories and six attachments.

Comparing this to the 4300’s largest kit available, the 9/64 kit with 64 accessories and nine attachments. When it comes to Dremel rotary drills, the more available attachments, the more versatile your drill will be.

Of course, this is just an illustration as not everyone will be using every single attachment; you should get a kit that caters to the purpose you need the drill for. Any extra accessories included in the kit will become a safety net should you need them in future projects.

Power

Looking at the power of both models, there is not much of a difference on paper. The 4000 comes in at 1.6 amps, while the 4300 sports 1.8 amps. Despite the difference in power output, both models are capable of variable speeds from 5,000 to 35,000 rpm.

This incremental difference may not seem like much, but there is a noticeable difference in performance when each is pushed to its limit.

With a higher power output, the 4300 can operate at higher speeds for heavy-duty jobs for an extended amount of time. As opposed to the 4000 model, which is prone to overheat when used extensively for more extended amounts of time.

Due to the complex nature of the many jobs a rotary drill is used for, this slight difference in power between the 4300 and 4000 can make all the difference in getting a quality result.

Noise Level

A small difference that may be inconsequential to some is the noise level at which both models operate. If noise is a factor that you need to consider when deciding on a model, the 4300 is the better option.

The older 4000 operates with average noise levels for a rotary drill, but the airflow is not as ideal as the 4300. This causes the drill to make more noise compared to the 4300, which is quieter and runs cooler.

LED Swivel Light

Perhaps the most significant difference between both models is the built-in LED light in the 4300. This is a newer addition to the Dremel rotary drill design and brings an added level of efficiency when using the rotary drill.

By illuminating dark areas, the LED light can help guide the drill through tight spaces. Furthermore, it is battery-powered, so even if the drill becomes unplugged, the light will still function.

As it is built into the drill, the LED light can pivot around the tip to change the angle of the light on the piece being worked on. This is especially useful for close-up detailing work where the shadow of the rotary drill can obstruct the view.

The rotation of the built-in light is a feature that is lacking in the 4000 model. While not a deal-breaker, it is still a helpful feature to have and is a standout feature for the 4300.

Value

Pricing of each model is where the differences between features are made evident of whether it is worth it or not. The 4300, being a newer model, is priced higher than the older 4000; however, it does not require additional purchases of different collets to attach various sizes of accessories and bits.

Depending on what task the rotary drill is being used for, the actual value for money varies. If all the features are utilized extensively, then the investment can be worth the money. However, it is not necessary to splurge if you are not going to use the unique features offered by the 4300.

Choosing the Right Model for You

When choosing between the 4300 and 4000 models, there is little that sets them apart from each other. They both sport a six-foot cord and a comfortable ergonomic handle. Furthermore, the rotation speed is the same in both models.

To ensure the most informed decision can be made, different aspects of where each rotary drill model shines or falls short must be considered. Other aspects such as price and convenience are a consideration to be taken into account.

Unique Features

Having certain features in your rotary drill can change the entire experience you have working with it. If these features are what you need to elevate the quality of work or just to ease convenience, then the newer 4300 model is the clear winner.

It has an in-built pivot LED light that can help to guide your bit while working in dark areas. Not only useful for dark spots, but it is also a helpful feature to have to keep a clear view of what you are working on. Better visibility increases the performance capability.

Additionally, the newer three-chuck attachment system is an upgrade from the 4000’s collet lock system. It saves time and energy when using multiple bits by removing the need to constantly change collets to fit different-sized bits.

Power

For those who require more power from their rotary drill, the 4300 is the ideal choice. Having a 1.8 amp power output, this is only slightly higher than the 4000’s 1.6 amp power output.

Both rotary drills work at a speed of 5,000 to 35,000 rpm, so the performance of either model is dependent upon the power source. The slightly higher power output in the 4300 allows it to work at the maximum rpm for an extended period of time with no heating issues.

As the 4000 model has a slightly weaker power output than the 4300, it struggles when performing high-speed jobs consistently. This draw on power causes the drill to heat up considerably.

From this, it is evident just how far a little extra power goes in the performance of the drill. This extra power can go a long way when working with heavy-duty materials or for longer work sessions.

Attachments

Due to the multi-purpose nature of the rotary drill, any specialized tasks can be performed by the same tool, just with a different tip. The variety and number of attachments available can determine the range of tasks the drill is capable of.

On one hand, the new three-chuck attachment system in the 4300 allows for a faster transition between attachments with no extra tools necessary. On the other hand, there are currently only two kits available. However, the largest kit has a wide range of accessories included, more so than the largest 4000 kits available.

As it is an older model, the 4000 uses the old collet lock attachment system, requiring additional purchases of different-sized collets to accommodate specific specialized attachments. However, with this older system, you do get a wider variety of bits and accessories to choose from. Although, the time and energy that is needed to switch between attachments are considerably more significant in the 4000 model.

Comfort and Convenience

Using a rotary drill for extended periods of time can be a strain on your hand. The build of both the 4300 and 4000 models is almost identical, save for a slightly slimmer body in the 4300. This can be less strain on yourself when working on a big project; however, this difference in size is not immediately apparent.

Additionally, the attachments to aid in comfort and convenience, such as the detailer’s grip or the flex shaft, must be considered. These can negate any minor differences in the size of the actual rotary drill. The comfort of using the drill with either of these attachments can change the experience completely.

Pricing

The price tag of tools can be on the expensive side, so every purchase becomes an investment. As an investment, the value for money is a crucial aspect to be taken into consideration, especially for those on a budget.

Between the 4300 and the 4000, the 4300 is the more steeply-priced option of the two. Of course, this does not make the 4000 model inferior in any way. It is just a matter of whether or not you consider the added features of the 4300 worth the extra bit of cash or not.

Safety Attachments

Included in the rotary drill kit is a basic set of safety attachments to protect you and the drill from injury. However, when working with certain materials, you may need to purchase additional attachments explicitly made for that material.

It is important to take the necessary precautions to protect yourself from potential harm. Look into what safety attachments are available for a rotary drill model, and if it is suitable for the materials you are working with.

Which attachment kit should you buy?

Every rotary drill will have a general-purpose kit with a range of bits and accessories for every job you may need the tool for. As these are just the basic attachments, they are sufficient for the general public to use with no problems.

However, if you are working with a specific material or require a certain set of bits for a particular job, Dremel offers specialized kits. They are made with a particular task in mind. Be it cutting, sanding, engraving, or cleaning; there is a kit for every possible use of a rotary drill.

They include more detailed tools you would need to get the job done. It is a simple matter of finding the kit that relates to your specific task and attaching the bits to the drill.

Can the Dremel cut through metal, glass, and ceramic?

To answer this question briefly, yes, it is able to cut through these materials as both models have a motor capable of handling the strain.

However, special bits must be used in order to cut through glass and ceramic. Additionally, safety attachments must be used when working with glass and ceramic as they can cause injury or damage to the drill.

How do you use the collet lock to change attachments?

The standard collet lock mechanism can accommodate ⅛” shanks but sometimes falls short or is too large for certain bits and accessories. To remove the bit from the collet, simply twist the EZ nose and pull the bit free.

To replace the entire collet for holding a different sized attachment, press the button on the front of the rotary drill to release the EZ nose. Then, use a wrench to remove the entire collet and replace it with the appropriately sized collet and screw the nose back on.

Dremel 4300 Vs 4000 Conclusion - The Winner

After considering all the features that make each rotary drill model unique, what would be the best choice to get the most value for money?

Between the 4300 and the 4000 model from Dremel, the safe choice would be to go for the 4300 model. Although it has a higher price point, the unique features that it offers make up for the price tag.

That’s not all; the convenience of having the pivot light illuminate the surface, as well as the extra power, is what sets it apart from the 4000.

On the other hand, if a simple rotary drill with light use is what you require, or if you are on a budget, then the 4000 model is still a great option. It offers a more extensive selection of specialized accessories as it uses the older collet lock attachment system.

Both models do what they were designed to do. So, purchasing either will undoubtedly be a great decision to add to your workshop’s collection of tools.

After extensive testing, my top pick is the Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner because of its ability to cool a 300 square feet room quickly and efficiently. Even the Midea AC and SereneLife AC are reliable options for cooling small to medium-sized spaces.

The perfect air conditioner is energy efficient, operates quietly, has a high cooling capacity, and is affordably priced.

But do all air conditioners on the market fit this description? Certainly not! And finding energy efficiency 8000 BTU (British Thermal Units) air conditioners among the zillions of AC units is tricky.

To save you from investing in the wrong AC unit, I bring to you the 14 tried-and-tested 8000 BTU ACs. Dive in!

Best 8000 BTU Air Conditioner Review

1. Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner – Best With Multi-Speed Fan

What We Like

Energy star-rated
Doubles as a dehumidifier
Easy-to-clean washable filter
One-year warranty

What We Don't Like

Slightly noisy

Having been in the industry for more than a century, Frigidaire is known for pumping out premium-quality home electronic products. And its window-mounted room air conditioner is no exception.

On this window air conditioner, you can adjust the fan speed to 3 different settings to cool the room quickly and efficiently. In addition to that is the programmable timer integrated into the air conditioning unit that allows homeowners to turn it on or off in half-hour intervals for energy savings.

What’s more, this window AC unit maintains the preset temperature in every cycle, so you can rest assured that your space will remain comfortable. And if you like catnapping in the afternoon or catching forty winks during the evening, its “sleep” mode will help you sleep better. When set to “sleep” mode, the temperature slowly increases, allowing you to stay cool, no matter how hot it is outside.

Like modern window AC units, this air conditioner, which doubles as a dehumidifier, is energy star-certified, meaning it will save on energy costs.

As for adjusting the temperature, this 8000 BTU (British Thermal Unit) window air conditioner comes with a remote control, so you can increase or decrease the air temperature with ease. Using the remote, you can also adjust the fan speed from your comfort zone without having to get up.

Besides, its adjustable side panels are extendable, meaning this efficient unit can be installed on all types of windows. Another thing that I like about this AC unit is that the filter is easy to clean, meaning you can wash it to clean dust from it.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 55 dB

2. Midea EasyCool Window Air Conditioner – Best With Intuitive LED Display

What We Like

Integrated with energy saver mode
Intuitive LED display
Removable air filter
1-year warranty (labor and parts)

What We Don't Like

Installation is tricky

Supplied in multiple options, the Midea EasyCool Window Air Conditioner claims to reduce energy consumption, and its energy star status testifies to the same.

Unlike most window air conditioners, it comes with multiple custom settings that make it more energy efficient. Like, I found that this AC unit has an in-built EasyTimer that allows me to program my temperature preferences. And if someday I run the unit for long hours, I simply switch to EcoSave mode– as a result, the room is cooled without consuming too much electricity.

Compared to traditional air conditioners, this unit doubles as a dehumidifier, and that’s what makes it an excellent option for humid spaces. To reduce humidity levels in any space, all I do is switch to dehumidifier mode, and it sucks up moisture from the indoor air.

Unlike the Frigidaire air conditioner, the Midea unit has an intuitive LED display for switching between modes, adjusting temperatures and setting the time. But I like using the remote control that comes with the unit because of its convenience.

Like most newer window air conditioners, the air filter of this unit is removable and reusable. So, whenever the “clean filter” warning is displayed, you can remove it and get rid of pet hairs and dust by washing it.

I found that this AC isn’t easy to install; only people who are DIY experts will be able to mount it with ease. Installation instructions may appear simple, but they aren’t easy to follow. Although the brand sends all accessories with the unit, the screwdriver isn’t supplied.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 110 Volts | Noise Level: 55 dB

3. SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner – Best Space-Saving Unit For Small Spaces

What We Like

Sleek and lightweight
Dehumidifies a room well
Intuitive controls
Rolling wheels allow easy portability

What We Don't Like

Makes noise when operating

For someone who has to keep changing his lodging, portable AC units like the SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner make for an excellent pick.

With 900W-rated cooling power, this portable AC unit is efficient enough to cool 215+ square feet of space– that is why I prefer using it in my office space. Although it isn’t as energy efficient as window units, it has a 9.8 seasonal energy efficiency ratio, which is feasible.

Like window ACs, it comes with 3 operating modes– cooling, dehumidifier, and fan. For maximum air circulation, it also features an automatic swing mode with a moving wind vent. At times when my office space becomes humid, I switch to dehumidifier mode, which helps reduce excessive humidity from the room.

Despite being a floor-standing AC, it boasts a space-saving design, thanks to its sleek and lightweight body. Equipped with rolling wheels, it allows for easy portability and allows me to move this unit from the garage space to the living room with ease.

Towards the top of the unit is a digital control panel with touch buttons for turning the unit on/off, setting the timer, and adjusting fan speed settings and temperature. For user convenience, remote control is supplied in the package, and you can adjust all the functions with the touch of a button.

Since it’s a freestanding unit, installation won’t be much of a hassle– be sure to check the instruction manual after unboxing the unit. Although you can use it in your bedroom while sleeping, keep in mind it is noisier than most other units.

Floor Area: 215+ square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 120 Volts | Noise Level: 55 dB

4. LG Window-Mounted Air Conditioner – Best With Auto Restart Function

What We Like

220 cubic feet per minute cooling capacity
Installation doesn’t take too much time
Multiple fan speeds
Quiet operation

What We Don't Like

A few parts, like knobs and switches, are flimsy

The next entrant on my list is this window-mounted air conditioner from LG. This multinational South Korean electronics company has managed to earn loyal customers because of top-notch products.

Starting with its simple yet innovative design, this air conditioning unit boasts a modern profile with air louvers placed towards the top. Besides that is a simple control panel that allows easy adjustment of the temperature and fan speed.

Underneath the control panel and air louvers is the air filter that traps dust and pet hairs to keep your indoor air clean and fresh. Once in a while, I take it off and wash it because it is reusable, so you can also do the same.

This LG window air conditioner comes with an installation kit and easy-to-follow instructions, so installation won’t be challenging.

This Energy Star-certified air conditioning unit has 3 cooling and fan speeds, so you can customize the cooling experience. In addition, it has a 12.1 combined energy efficiency ratio, meaning you’ll save a lot despite running this unit.

Among the various features, I like the 24-hour on/off timer that allows me to turn it on and off the AC as per my needs. And when in low mode, I noticed that the air conditioning unit barely made any noise. Another interesting feature is the Auto Restart which automatically turns the unit on after it has been shut because of a power outage.

Like other window air conditioners, it comes with a remote control that makes it easy to adjust the settings without leaving your couch or bed.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 53 dB

5. TOSOT Window Air Conditioner – Best With Adjustable Air Vents

What We Like

Easy installation
Cools a room quickly
Reasonably quiet
Available in 2 styles

What We Don't Like

Unit cannot be fully controlled by the front panel buttons

Delivering unique and innovative products since 1991, Tosot is yet another brand that excels in air conditioners.

What made me pick the Tosot window air conditioner was its quiet operation, as it has a maximum noise output of 42 dB and an improved drainage outlet. Although you may hear slight noises of fan flinging water, you can minimize that by removing the improved drain plug.

Mounting this window air conditioner is fairly easy because everything from side panels and foam is included in the package. Also, no technical jargon is used in the instructions; in fact, they are written in simple language.

Right after installation, when I turned the AC on, the room was filled with cold air within a few minutes. So, it’s safe to say that this window air conditioner is highly efficient and can be used in bedrooms, apartments, dorms, and living rooms that are approximately 350 square feet.

Above the air filter sits slanted air louvers that can be adjusted to blow cool air up to 20 feet. I prefer keeping the louvers above the head to cool a room quickly.

This quietest air conditioner is also energy efficient as it has an energy efficiency ratio (EER) of 12.0 and is Energy Star-certified.

As a bonus, this window air conditioner comes with a few bonus features that you won’t find in other ACs. Like, the filter reminder will remind you to clean the filter after operating for 250 hours. Just keep the remote safe because the unit can only be fully controlled with the remote control.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 42 dB

6. TCL Home Series Window Air Conditioner – Best 8-Way Directional Cooling Unit

What We Like

Robust cooling power
Higher energy efficiency
Fairly easy to mount
Cools a space quickly

What We Don't Like

Doesn’t come with a remote control

Designed with the latest technology, TCL aims to deliver meaningful experiences. And its Home Series Window Air Conditioner is one such offering from the brand that helps you stay cool no matter the weather.

Although it is an 8000 BTU window air conditioner, it has robust cooling power. Sure, it may not be an ideal pick for cooling larger rooms, but it cools a 350 square feet space quickly and efficiently. Even then, to my surprise, the unit is comfortably quiet, so you can sleep, read or binge-watch your favorite shows without disturbance.

With 3 fans, this window air conditioner features 4-way directional vents to adjust the direction of airflow as per your needs. The air conditioning engineers have thoughtfully designed the unit, as its 4-way directional vents have an 8-way cooling fan.

In the package, you will find an easy-to-use installation kit that will come in handy for installing the unit. Following the steps mentioned in the instruction manual will ease the installation process, and you will be able to DIY install it. So, I highly recommend you go through them thoroughly before installing the unit. Since it runs on the power cord, install it on a window with a power cord nearby.

Belonging to the line of energy-efficient ACs, this window air conditioner also consumes less energy, reducing electricity bills. The Energy Star rating testifies to its energy efficiency.

Furthermore, you can switch to “eco” mode and “sleep” mode to save energy while running the AC. What I didn’t like about this AC is that it doesn’t come with a remote control.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 42 dB

7. Koldfront Window Air Conditioner – Best Through-The-Wall Unit

What We Like

High energy efficiency
Comes with remote control
Easy to maintain air filter
Can be used as a dehumidifier

What We Don't Like

Not ideal for windows less than 14”

Equipped with R-32 refrigerant, the Koldfront Window Air Conditioner is one of those units that can cut down energy costs to a great extent compared to those with R-22. As for reducing energy consumption, this unit has a SEER of 12, so it consumes 10% less energy than a 10 SEER unit. Its claims of energy efficiency are testified by the Energy Star certification it has earned.

This 8000 BTU window air conditioner has a temperature range between 62°F and 86°F, which makes it ideal for spaces up to 350 square feet. I like the fact that the air filter of this unit is easy to maintain– you need not call a professional to clean it. Simply take it off, wash it, and reinstall it on the unit, and that’s it!

What makes it the best 8000 BTU air conditioner is that it’s equipped with an LED filter that blinks whenever the filter gets dirty.

Next to the air filter is a digital display with touch controls that makes adjusting the temperature and other settings easily. And for those moments when I don’t want to leave my comfort zone, I use the remote control to change the settings from energy saver mode to sleep mode.

Much like other energy-efficient units, this window air conditioner is integrated with 3 fan settings for convenience. Furthermore, its 4-way directional air louvers ensure even distribution of air, so no corner of your room will have hot air.

With a dimension of 13.3H x 18.5W x 15.75D, this window air conditioner fits higher than 14”.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: Not measured

8. GE Window Air Conditioner – Best Wi-Fi Enabled Unit

What We Like

Smart and easy operation
Cools medium-sized rooms efficiently
Energy Star-rated
Comes with an easy-to-install kit

What We Don't Like

Filter must be cleaned every 30 days to maintain efficiency

Rated as the number 1 window air conditioner brand in the US, GE is committed to offering the best solutions to homeowners, and its window-mounted air conditioner proves the same.

Before anything else, I would like to mention that this is an energy-efficient unit, meaning it offers comfort without racking up utility bills. Like most air conditioner units, it is Energy Star-certified, so there will be more energy savings and low electricity bills.

With this AC, you can save more on energy bills if you switch to “eco” mode. On “eco” mode, the unit automatically turns off the compressor and fan, which cuts down energy consumption.

From the get-go, what I liked about this unit is that it can be integrated with the SmartHQ app, through which this AC can be controlled. For instance, you can turn the unit on/off, adjust the temperature or keep tabs on its operation from anywhere in your home or the world.

Moreover, this energy-efficient unit has 3 fan speeds and 3 cooling modes to customize the cooling experience, so you can stay comfortable.

Coming with a fixed chassis, this air conditioner is easy to install, more so since it comes with an installation kit. Similar to other air conditioners, the filter is washable– for maximum efficiency, I suggest cleaning them every 30 days.

Beneath the 2 air louvers sits a control panel from which speed, mode, and temperature can be adjusted. But that’s not the only way to adjust the settings of this air conditioner. You can use the remote control or smart assistants to make adjustments.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 58 dB

9. BLACK+DECKER Window Air Conditioner – Best With Adjustable Thermostat Control

What We Like

Small and compact
Can be installed without professional help
Comes with a digital display and a remote control
Filters dust and other particles from the indoor air

What We Don't Like

Low SEER

If you are scouting for air conditioners for your workshop or a prefab guest house, the BLACK+DECKER Air Conditioner would be a sensible pick. That’s because its 8000 BTU cooling capacity cools rooms up to 350 square feet well.

Integrated with 4 settings– auto, low, medium, and high, this air conditioner provides relief from the scorching heat, no matter the weather outside. Furthermore, its programmable thermostat adjusts the temperature automatically based on the settings you feed into the unit– that’s what adds to its versatility.

On the fore part of the unit is a digital display that features all the settings from “check filter” to “energy saver” mode, so you can adjust them with ease. Or you can simply use the remote control to change the settings from time to time without getting up.

Upon reading the product manual, I discovered that the air filter is made of nylon– which means you can detach it and wash it to circulate air (fresh and clean air).

When needed, this air conditioner can reduce moisture from space by changing the mode to dehumidifier mode. Ideal for small to medium-sized rooms, this air conditioner weighs less than 50 lbs, so mounting it will be easy.

As is expected, this unit is Energy Star-certified, like most air conditioners, so it will definitely help you save a few dollars on utility bills. Although it is integrated with R-32 refrigerant, it has a SEER of 5.2, which is very low. And that is why I suggest this for spaces where it won’t be used for too long.

Floor Area: 300 to 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 59 dB

10. TURBRO Greenland Portable Air Conditioner – Best Affordable Alternative To A Central Air Conditioning System

What We Like

Dual drainage methods
Quiet operation
Easy to install
Removes moisture from the space

What We Don't Like

Isn’t Energy Star-rated

For small spaces, the TURBRO Greenland Portable Air Conditioner will be the best bet because of its cooling capacity. This 8000 BTU air conditioner may appear simple, but it offers robust cooling and cools a 300 square feet room within a few minutes, thanks to the turbo mode.

Unlike other portable air conditioners, it’s not just an AC; rather, it’s a multifunctional unit because it doubles as a fan and a dehumidifier. Whenever I have to remove moisture from my space, I simply switch to the dehumidifier mode. Meanwhile, the 2-speed fan mode generates a draft of fresh air.

As you’d expect with portable AC units, this one comes with 4 in-built wheels for easy movability. Therefore, moving it from the dining room to the bedroom wasn’t too much of a chore.

With this portable air conditioner, you won’t have to break a sweat to install it because it’s easy to set up. Just make sure to place the unit upright for a minimum of 4 hours before powering it on.

What’s more, this portable AC unit has a control panel, but even then, the brand supplies a remote control. Noteworthily, its remote control is integrated with a temperature sensor to detect the temperature of the corner where you’re sitting; hence, it cools the room accordingly.

Although it isn’t Energy Star-rated, its programmable timer function turns the unit on/off automatically as per your schedule, saving money on energy bills. Compared to other portable air conditioners, it features dual drainage methods, allowing bucketless operation. Besides the washable filter, it is integrated with the “auto restart” function.

Floor Area: 300 square feet | Number of Speeds: 2 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 52 dB

11. Dreo Inverter Window Air Conditioner – Best Unit With Power Inverter Compressor

What We Like

Pre-assembled design
Low power and quiet operation
Helps save energy
30-month warranty

What We Don't Like

Remote screen is small

Want to beat the heat by keeping your space cool but dread energy bills? The Dreo Inverter Air Conditioner will cool your space with its low-power operation, so you won’t have to spend hundreds on utility bills.

This Energy Star-certified air conditioner has a 15.0 SEER rating, meaning it will save 35% on your energy bills compared to conventional compressors. Therefore, you can stay cool without worrying about electricity bills.

When it comes to cooling an office or other space of 350 square feet, this variable-speed air conditioner works well and cools it efficiently. Over and above that, it’s equipped with directional louvers which can be positioned in any direction.

I also appreciate the pre-assembled design of this air conditioner because of which installation doesn’t take too much time. The only thing you will have to do is slide the air conditioner inside an open window and fasten the screws to mount it securely.

Besides cooling a space efficiently, I noticed that the air filter purifies the indoor air by catching dirt and dust. Later, you can detach it and wash it to remove impurities.

Instead of 3 modes like most air conditioners, it comes with 5 modes– cool, circulate, dehumidify, auto, and sleep. Using the remote control, you can switch between modes and adjust the temperature between 61 and 88°F.

And if you find it difficult to read the settings because of the small screen of the remote, the digital panel on the unit will come in handy. A 24-hour timer is also integrated into the air conditioner.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: Adjustable | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 42 dB

12. BLACK+DECKER Portable Air Conditioner – Best Floor-Standing Unit For Cabins And Campers

What We Like

Small and compact size
Contains R-32 refrigerant, which is environmentally-friendly
Dehumidifies a space well
Self-evaporating operation

What We Don't Like

Filter requires frequent cleaning

Operating at 58 dB, the BLACK+DECKER Portable Air Conditioner is a fairly quiet device; therefore, you can carry on your chores without getting disturbed due to loud noise. And if you prefer the quietest environment when sleeping, switching to “sleep” mode will do the trick and reduce further noise.

Like other portable air conditioners, this one also is a floor-standing unit that cools a 150 square feet room quickly and efficiently. For this reason, I prefer using it in my cabin, although you can use it in the office, small bedrooms, and living rooms.

This portable air conditioner, as one would expect, comes with built-in wheels that allow me to move it from one corner of my office space to another without difficulty. Even these built-in wheels make the installation process relatively simple– wheel it to whichever room you wish to install, position it near a window, and attach the hose.

When not in use, simply unhook and store it wherever you have storage space.

Atop the unit is an LED display through which you can control the air temperature, mode, and other settings. Since the air filter traps dirt, dust, pet danders, and other particles, you will have to clean it twice a month to enhance its efficiency.

This portable air conditioner combines 3 energy-efficient functions in 1, meaning you get a dehumidifier, a cooler, and a fan in one unit. Although it’s a floor-standing unit, it is a self-evaporating unit. Rest assured, your space will remain dry, cool, and clean.

Lastly, you get a 5-year warranty on compressor parts and a 1-year warranty on other parts and labor.

Floor Area: 150 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 54 dB

13. Keystone Window-Mounted Air Conditioner – Best For Travel Trailers

What We Like

Cools a 350 square feet room quickly
Comes with an LED display
Restarts automatically after a power outage
1-year warranty on parts or labor and a 4-year warranty for a sealed system

What We Don't Like

Quite loud on high setting

Do you often go on long voyages on your travel trailer? Well, in that case, the Keystone Window-Mounted Air Conditioner is worth every cent to keep your trailer cool during hot summer afternoons.

Not just travel trailers, but this air conditioner is a reliable option for attics, home offices, small living rooms, bedrooms, and apartments.

Offering 3 fan speeds, this air conditioner allows you to customize the cooling experience as per your needs. With a built-in dehumidifier, this unit works well in humid spaces as it removes excess moisture from the indoor air. This way, it would prevent mold and mildew from thriving in the space.

On the low setting, this air conditioning unit runs at 49 dB; however, it is quite loud if you run at a high setting– so keep that in mind.

Furthermore, this small and compact air conditioning unit sports a digital display on the left-hand side. Using that, you can turn it on/off, switch between different modes, set a timer, or increase/decrease the temperature with ease.

And if you’re too lethargic to leave your couch or bed, simply make use of the remote control that comes with the unit. What I like about the remote control is that it has a built-in remote thermostat, allowing you to set the temperature from any corner of the room.

Keep in mind this unit isn’t Energy Star-rated, although the brand offers it in Energy Star style– so choose the style carefully. Still, if you go for the former option, you can turn on “energy saver” mode to save a few dollars on energy bills yearly.

Floor Area: 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 59 dB

14. PerfectAire Window Air Conditioner With Electric Heater – Best 2-In-1 AC With Built-in Electric Heater

What We Like

Made of robust materials
Comes with all supplies needed to mount it
Easy to use remote control
Usable in all seasons, including winter

What We Don't Like

Requires professional installation

Buying a separate air conditioner and a heating system is expensive for most of us. Instead of settling for either of the two, investing in the PerfectAire Air Conditioner will guarantee you comfort in all seasons.

Radiating 3500 BTU of heat and 8000 BTU of cold, this 2-in-1 air conditioner is a versatile unit that you can get hold of. With the touch of a button on the remote, you can program your desired temperature and switch to “sleep” mode, “energy saver,” or “follow me” mode.

And if it sits beside your office table, you can modify the settings using the control panel on the top left side of the unit.

This corded electric unit is available in multiple styles, from 8000 BTU to 12000 BTU– therefore, you’re spoilt for choices. Furthermore, it features an “auto restart” option, because of which the unit restarts itself in case of power outages.

However, unlike other air conditioners on this list, this unit isn’t Energy Star-certified, so definitely, it won’t cut down on energy costs. The brand, nevertheless, does offer an “energy saver” mode, so you can switch to that if your motive is to save money while running the unit.

Top rail, accordion panels, foam, screws, brackets, and seals– the brand sends all the necessary supplies that will be needed to install this air conditioning unit. So, installing it yourself won’t be a hassle; however, calling for professionals would be a better bet if you’re not confident in your DIY skills.

Professional installation is also recommended because the unit weighs about 71 pounds, which means it is too heavy.

Floor Area: 300 to 350 square feet | Number of Speeds: 3 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Noise Level: 58 dB

Best 8000 BTU Air Conditioners Comparison Table

8000 BTU ACs	Floor Area	Number of Speeds	Voltage	Noise Level
Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room AC	350 square feet	3	115 Volts	55 dB
Midea EasyCool Window AC	350 square feet	3	110 Volts	55 dB
SereneLife Portable AC	215+ square feet	3	120 Volts	55 dB
LG Window-Mounted AC	350 square feet	3	115 Volts	53 dB
TOSOT Window AC	350 square feet	3	115 Volts	42 dB
TCL Home Series Window AC	350 square feet	3	115 Volts	42 dB
Koldfront Window AC	350 square feet	3	115 Volts	Not measured
GE Window AC	350 square feet	3	115 Volts	58 dB
BLACK+DECKER Window AC	300 to 350 square feet	3	115 Volts	59 dB
TURBRO Greenland Portable AC	300 square feet	2	115 Volts	52 dB
Dreo Inverter Window AC	350 square feet	Adjustable	115 Volts	42 dB
BLACK+DECKER Portable AC	150 square feet	3	115 Volts	54 dB
Keystone Window-Mounted AC	350 square feet	3	115 Volts	59 dB
PerfectAire Window AC With Electric Heater	300 to 350 square feet	3	115 Volts	58 dB

Buying Guide for the Best 8000 BTU Air Conditioner

With so many options at your disposal, were you able to decide which one would be ideal for your needs? No? Well, I knew it, but you’re not alone– countless people get stuck in the decision-making process.

Knowing the pros and cons of the 14 best 8000 BTU air conditioners helps greatly, but choosing one remains a daunting task. That’s because there’s a lot to look for when buying an air conditioner for your home or office space other than the price.

So, if you’ve been looking for pointers on choosing the right air conditioner, this section will prove helpful. Ahead, I’ve discussed some important factors I’ve learned over the years that you must keep in mind while buying an 8000 BTU air conditioner. Let’s check them out!

Type of Air Conditioner

By now, you’ve learned that 8000 BTU air conditioners are of 2 types– window air conditioners and portable air conditioners. Out of the 2, which one you go for depends on your needs and requirements.

Window air conditioners are mounted on the windows, with a few of them mounted through the wall. Since they are immovable, they are considered a permanent cooling solution.

Furthermore, window ACs have a high cooling capacity and are larger and heavier than other air conditioners. An 8000 BTU window-mounted air conditioner makes for an excellent option for 300 to 350 square feet of space, like small to medium-sized living rooms, bedrooms, kitchens, and garages.

On the other hand, portable air conditioners are most popular when it comes to 8000 BTU air conditioners. That’s because they come with built-in wheels and can easily move from one space to another.

Instead of mounting them on the walls, you can simply place them in any corner of the room, plug the cord into the electrical outlet, and turn it on. It will start cooling your room. Nevertheless, you must keep in mind that they aren’t as powerful as portable ones.

Even when it comes to energy efficiency, window-mounted air conditioners have the edge over portable units.

Noise Level

Despite many manufacturers claiming that their AC units are the quietest, I’ve learned that not all of them live up to their claims.

For that reason, I highly recommend everyone check the noise level of whichever AC they are planning to buy. Deciding the noise level is especially difficult for first-time buyers, but don’t worry, for I’ll help you out.

Any air conditioner whose noise level falls between 44 and 56 dB (decibel) is considered less noisy or quiet. Go for a 40 dB air conditioner if you wish to have library-like silence in your home. Using an air conditioner that barely makes noise will help you sleep better and work better without distractions.

Remember that any air conditioning unit above 56 dB will be loud or noisy, which will make carrying out chores difficult, let alone sleeping.

Some ACs also come with a “sleep” mode and “eco” mode that further reduces noise levels, making them virtually silent. So, if you go for AC units whose noise levels are above 56 dB, look at whether they have these 2 modes or not.

Energy Efficiency Ratio

EER, or energy efficiency ratio, is the measurement of the efficiency of an HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) system in terms of output vs. energy consumption.

When buying an air conditioner, you should always go for units whose EER ratings are high because the higher the ratings, the more energy-efficient the unit will be. That means you will save a lot of money annually on your energy bills.

Nevertheless, units with high EER come with an expensive price tag, but it’s a one-time expenditure.

Dehumidifier Mode

Today, almost all air conditioning units come with a dehumidifier mode that makes it easy for homeowners to remove excess humidity from the space. When you switch to this mode, your room will feel less humid or muggy and a more comfortable space.

So, I highly recommend you go for air conditioners that come with a dehumidifier, especially if you live in places with humid climates. By dehumidifying your room, you can even eliminate the problems of mold and mildew.

Wi-Fi Enabled

When you’re upgrading to a new air conditioning unit, it’s wise to go for models that are Wi-Fi enabled because of the convenience it offers.

A Wi-Fi-enabled AC can be paired with a smartphone, and you can control the settings from anywhere in the world. Such ACs are also compatible with smart assistants like Alexa and Google Assistant.

One of the perks of owning a Wi-Fi-enabled AC is that you can program daily cooling regimens to turn the unit on/off as needed. However, a smart AC would cost a lot more than a regular one. So, go for it only if you can afford to spend that much money; otherwise, a standard unit would be feasible.

Installation

Installation is another factor you must consider when buying an 8000 BTU air conditioner.

Generally, portable ACs have the edge over window AC units because you don’t have to do much to install them. After unboxing them, you only have to place them in the right spot near an electric outlet, attach the hose and turn it on.

On the other hand, window-mounted air conditioners aren’t easy to install. Only if you are a pro at DIY tasks should you attempt installing such ACs inside the window. Even a seasoned DIYer should refrain from installing such ACs because even the slightest mistake could damage the whole unit.

Price

From affordable units to luxury ones, 8000 BTU air conditioners are available in various price ranges. Therefore, I suggest you prepare a budget before shopping so that you don’t end up overspending.

Most people think that affordable units aren’t of good quality and expensive ones are of premium quality. However, that’s not the case– what I suggest is to weigh down the features of the unit against the price because that will help you make a sound decision.

How much space can an 8000 BTU air conditioner cool?

Ideal for small to medium-sized spaces, 8000 BTU air conditioners work well on spaces up to 350 square feet, equivalent to 1600 cubic feet.

Will more BTUs cool my small-sized room better than an 8000 BTU air conditioner?

No, adding a unit whose BTU exceeds 8000 in a small to medium-sized room won’t be a sensible decision. In regard to air conditioners, more isn’t always better. Although the higher BTU unit will cool the room quickly, remember the room will become overly humid.

At the same time, units with fewer BTUs won’t cool the room at all but consume a lot of power.

Does an 8000 BTU air conditioner consume a lot of electricity?

Mid-size 8000 BTU air conditioners use about 715 watts of energy. At times, it may even consume less than 715 watts, so your electric bills won’t be high.

Will an 8000 BTU air conditioner be ideal for cooling a living room?

This totally depends on the dimensions of your living room. As 8000 BTU air conditioners are among the smallest units, they are highly efficient in cooling spaces of 250 to 350 square feet.

So, if your living room is about 350 square feet, an 8000 BTU air conditioning unit will be an excellent addition. Meanwhile, you will have to look for other options if your living room is spacious.

What size inverter do I need to run an 8000 BTU air conditioner?

An inverter of 6000-watt DC to AC will be efficient for running 8000 BTU air conditioners. In fact, such inverters can also be used to run 15000 BTU air conditioners. However, before you go ahead to purchase an inverter, make sure to check with the manufacturer’s recommendation in the manual. As that will give you a clear picture of the inverter you will need to run your AC efficiently.

Conclusion

To survive hot days, an air conditioner is an absolute necessity because it makes your space cooler, making summers bearable. However, you can reap these benefits only if you choose the right unit for your space.

Still unable to decide which one should you pick? Let me ease your confusion by letting out my top picks.

Amongst all the options, the Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner takes the crown because of its 3 adjustable fan speeds that allow users to customize the cooling experience. Other than its washable air filter, I like the fact that it is energy efficient and helps me save a few dollars every month on my electricity bill.

And if you’re looking for an air conditioner that comes with an intuitive LED display, you can never go wrong with the EasyCool Air Conditioner from the Midea Group. Besides being energy efficient, the unit is covered with a 1-year warranty on labor and parts.

On that note, I shall call the curtains for the day. Adios!

The Hoome window seal for portable air conditioners stands out because of its cheap cost, dual hose suitability, and universal fit. The next best is the Jeacent and Gulrear window seals, with their easy installation and durability. And if you have a casement window, the Airly window seal kit is the best option.

Portable air conditioners offer a practical and cheap cooling solution to the intense summer heat. But their efficiency is affected by their ventilation and the window gaps. To avoid hot air from the exhaust hose coming back inside, it is important to give the window an airtight seal.

Window seal kits are a temporary and cheap solution to this problem of a portable air conditioner. And today, I’ve curated a list of window seals to help you decide the best one for your portable AC unit.

Best Portable AC Window Seal Kits

Here is the list of the 5 best portable AC window seal kits that you can use to improve the efficiency of your portable air conditioner unit.

1. Hoome Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner - Best Overall

What We Like

Supports dual-hose portable air conditioners
Budget-friendly
Simple installation
Fits in most windows

What We Don't Like

Adhesive too durable to remove during the non-AC season

The Hoome portable air conditioner window seal helps keep a closed environment and prevents the warm air inside the AC hose from getting into your room. It seals around your window and then wraps around the nozzle of the hose, blocking the return flow of hot air. This protects the efficiency of your own mobile air conditioning unit.

This window seal is pretty easy to install as well. You just need to apply the adhesive hook tape to the inside of your window frame and the window itself. Hence, installation is a piece of cake. It has two zippers, so it will work even if your portable air conditioner has two hoses.

Additionally, the window seal is suitable for most portable air conditioners. They are also suitable for most windows, whether they open to the left or the right, whether it's a bottom-hung window or a skylight. Just note that the maximum allowed perimeter of the window is 400 cm or 157 inches.

Type: Dual hose | Window Size: 157 inches | Window Type: Universal kit | Price: $21.99

2. Jeacent Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner - Best for Durability

What We Like

Easy to install and remove
Durable
Dual fixing modes
Regulates air exchange

What We Don't Like

Not suitable for every portable air conditioner

The Jeacent window seal for a portable air conditioner is easy to install and comes with two different fixing methods. The product box includes most of the things you need for the installation, making it a quick and easy process.

Its exclusive bottom panel joint leads to a seamless design, keeping all the hot air out and leaving no gaps. It uses durable and thick PVC to help you keep your room cool for longer, leading to savings on energy costs.

Additionally, since it helps to regulate the air exchange efficiently, it helps keep out dust and rain. So, not only does it keep the hot air out, but it also helps to keep the indoor air clean.

Note that the seal supports hoses with an external diameter between 5.1 and 5.9 inches.

Type: Single hose | Window Size: 60 inches | Window Type: Sliding window | Price: $24.99

3. Gulrear Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner - Best for Easy Installation

What We Like

Easy to install
Durable
Sealing tape provided
Supports dual hose portable AC unit

What We Don't Like

Not compatible with many hose sizes

The Gulrear window seal for portable air conditioners is pretty easy to install, with the panels being easily adjustable due to their slider nuts. It’s designed specifically for exhaust hoses with a diameter of 5 inches so it won’t be compatible with all AC units.

The product box includes most of the tools you need for the installation, along with the user manual, making installation a breeze. The sealing tape is also provided and is posted at the connection between the sealing plate and the window. This helps to effectively avoid hot air coming in.

This window kit is designed for sliding windows that open either horizontally or vertically. Additionally, it supports two hoses. So, you can easily use it with your dual hose portable air conditioner.

Type: Dual hose | Window Size: 20 - 55 inches | Window Type: Sliding window | Price: $22.99

4. Airly Portable AC Window Seal Kit - Best for Casement Windows

What We Like

Suitable for casement windows
Insects are kept out
Easy installation
Supports any window up to 158 inches

What We Don't Like

Small gap where the zipper meets the hose

Most of the window seal kits on this list support all kinds of windows, but casement windows are very different. This Airly seal is one of the best options for window seals if you have casement windows.

Casement windows, though popular, don’t have a lot of options when it comes to window seals. So, this Airly window seal is specifically designed to fit any casement window. It is also very easy to install since all the tools you need are included in the product box.

Just note that the window seal will support casement windows measuring less than 158 inches. So, measure the perimeter of your window before purchasing to make sure it’s compatible.

Also, you don’t need to worry about bugs or insects creeping in. The sturdy zipper makes for easy hose access as well as keeping the insects and the hot air at bay.

Type: Single hose | Window Size: 158 inches | Window Type: Casement windows | Price: $22.84

5. Sikadeer Portable AC Window Seal Kit - Best for Sliding Doors

What We Like

PVC material
Easy installation
Tight seal
Pollution free

What We Don't Like

Not suitable for dual hoses

The Sikadeer window seal for a portable air conditioner comes with an instruction manual and is very easy to install. It is suitable for sliding windows as well as sliding doors. The boards included in the seal kit allow you to adjust the size of the kit freely. Thus, it supports windows measuring between 17 and 60 inches.

Make sure the diameter of your hose is 5.1 inches before purchasing to ensure compatibility. The window seal kit is made using PVC material, making it high-temperature resistant, non-toxic, and pollution-free.

The window seal can also be embedded in the window rails, leading to a tight sealing effect. This helps effectively prevent hot air from coming inside the room.

Type: Single hose | Window Size: 17 - 60 inches | Window Type: Sliding window/Sliding door | Price: $23.99

Comparison of Window Seat Kits for Portable ACs

Window Seal Kits For Portable ACs	Type	Window Size	Window Type	Price
Hoome Window Seal For Portable AC	Dual hose	157 inches	Universal kit	$21.99
Jeacent Window Seal For Portable AC	Single hose	60 inches	Sliding window	$24.99
Gulrear Window Seal For Portable AC	Dual hose	20 - 55 inches	Sliding window	$22.99
Airly Portable AC Window Seal Kit	Single hose	158 inches	Casement windows	$22.84
Sikadeer Portable AC Window Seal Kit	Single hose	17 - 60 inches	Sliding window/Sliding door	$23.99

Buying Guide for the Best Portable AC Window Seal Kit

Any portable air conditioner is bound to send some hot air back inside the room, reducing the efficiency of your portable air conditioner and also hiking up your energy bills. Window seals are an effective solution to this problem.

Here are a few things you should remember to buy the perfect window seal to meet your needs.

1. Types of Windows

You’ll obviously need to know what kind of window you have before you buy a window seal for it. Unfortunately, window seals don’t work with all kinds of windows. They only work with windows that slide or crank open, like:

Sliding windows

The most popular window style, sliding windows can be single or double-hung windows and might open horizontally or vertically.

Sliding doors

Most window seals that are compatible with sliding windows will also be compatible with sliding doors as well. Just make sure to get the measurement right.

Casement windows

Casement windows are windows that crank open. And though they offer an unobstructed view of the nearby scenery, they are pretty difficult to seal completely. So, your best option with this window type is to buy mesh kits with zippers.

Thus, windows become very important for the effective functioning of a portable air conditioner. In case you don’t have windows available, through-the-wall window conditioners are also available, which don’t require any window to cool air.

2. Window dimensions

Window dimensions are a significant measurement you need to keep in mind while purchasing a window seal. Measure all the sides of your window to get the perimeter, and then check the window dimensions for the window seal you are purchasing to make sure it is compatible.

The perfect size match will ensure a tight seal and lead to the higher efficiency of your portable air conditioner.

For sliding door seal kits, like the Sikadeer window seal for portable air conditioners, you don’t need the exact measurements. This is because you usually get a sliding door seal bracket to make the installation easier.

3. Installation

The installation process of window seals mostly depends on the type of window you have, as well as your portable air conditioner. To make sure the instruction process is as hassle-free as possible, check whether the product box comes with everything you need.

Adhesive tape, adhesive fasteners, and hose connectors are some of the things the product box absolutely needs to include. So, check the product details carefully before going all in. You can also look for installation instructions or user manuals.

For casement windows, mesh kits with zippers are the best option. You can find step-by-step instructions for the installation of this kit in the user manual or on videos online.

Installing a window seal on a sliding window is even easier as long as your measurements are correct. You can also find step-by-step instructions or video tutorials for these online to make installation an easy process.

The complete installation process of the window seal kit should not take more than 15 minutes.

4. Style of Window Seal

Many portable air conditioners are dual-hose models. In case you have a dual hose model, make sure your window seal supports that particular portable air conditioner. On the other hand, most window seals are suitable for single-hose models.

If you don’t want to go through the hassle of dual hoses, vents, and window seals, you can check out some window fans for another effective cooling solution.

What is a portable air conditioner window seal kit?

A portable air conditioner is an effective solution to the intense summer heat. But it cannot perform at its maximum efficiency without proper ventilation. Hence, a window seal is a perfect temporary solution.

The window seal helps you to seal the gap created by the exhaust hose, helping to prevent hot air from coming back inside the room. Without a proper window seal, it is like you’re basically running a window air conditioner with the windows open. This really reduces the cooling of your portable air conditioner and also drives up your energy bills.

So, after checking the type and dimensions of your window, you should buy a window seal to make the window airtight.

How do I install a portable AC window seal?

The installation of window seals for a portable air conditioner is a pretty easy task. Most of the tools you need are already included in the product box. The user manual also contains instructions to make installation an easy process. You can also find video tutorials online if needed.

Just make sure to correctly measure your window before purchasing the window seal kit to ensure a smooth installation process.

Will using a portable air conditioner window seal affect my electricity bill?

Yes, it will. But it’s all good news! Because a window seal for portable ACs is meant to drive up the efficiency of your portable air conditioner. If the efficiency goes up, your room gets cooled at a much quicker rate. This means you will need to use the AC for lesser time, leading to savings on your energy bills.

Can I use a portable AC window seal with any brand of portable AC?

Yes, you can. You can use a portable air conditioner window seal with any brand of portable air conditioner. You just need to make sure the dimensions of the window and the type of window match the window seal you’re buying. Make the measurements and calculations beforehand to make sure there is compatibility.

Your portable air conditioner can also have two hoses, so make sure your window seal is dual-hose compatible if that’s the case.

Can I still open my window with a portable AC window seal installed?

For some window seal kits that don’t block the opening of the window, yes, you can open your windows. However, for some, you might have to remove the window seal before opening the windows. However, opening the window with the window seal installed would be quite counterproductive, given why you are installing it in the first place.

Can a portable AC window seal kit be used with sliding windows?

Yes, a portable air conditioner window seal kit can be used with sliding windows, whether they open horizontally or vertically. Just make sure you get the measurements of the window and the outlet hose right before making your purchase.

Conclusion

Having a portable AC window seal kit is an excellent accessory to keep your environment temperate and energy-efficient. These kits prevent the return flow of warm air, thereby augmenting the working of your air conditioner and saving on energy bills. However, not all kits bring the same quality, support, and adaptability.

From the above 5 best portable AC window seal kits, here are the top three expert recommendations:

The Hoome Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner, due to its versatile compatibility with various windows and easy-to-install design, emerges as the best overall and is an ideal option for those looking for maximized performance and value.

Next, for people looking for longevity, the Jeacent Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner stands out as the best for durability. Its robust and thick PVC design makes it a good option offering extended service and more bang for your buck.

Lastly, for easy installation and user-friendly adjustments, the Gulrear Window Seal for Portable Air Conditioner takes the crown. If you happen to prioritize convenience and simplicity of setup, this product is the right choice.

To make the most out of these fantastic products, ensure you check out the specifications of each seal kit to match your window and hose sizes before making a purchase. Enjoy the comfort and energy savings that come with having the right seal kit for your portable AC unit.

Cartooning is so much more than simply drawing a few figures - without good writing, the best of artwork has no value.

And similarly, if the cartooning characters aren't expressive enough, even the wittiest of one-liners and jokes fall flat.

Drawing cartoons isn't just about exaggerating a few facial features or comedic timing. Every artist has a style of their own, which they display in their stories and characters and their perspectives on the goings-on of the world around us.

Such a complicated craft requires a deft master and someone you can look to for advice. If you have to reach the top, you have to stand on the shoulders of giants first.

Without further ado, the best cartooning books follow!

Best Cartooning Books

Do you want to learn how to create your own cartoon characters and comics? Cartooning is a great way to express yourself creatively and tell stories. Here is the list of 8 best cartooning books to help you get started:

Cartooning | Philosophy and Practice by Ivan Brunetti - Best for Personal Style Development

If you're new to the game and you don't know where to start, this is it. This book isn't exactly a step-by-step guidebook rather, it's about the art of cartooning itself and what it's all about.

This book takes an in-depth look at how storytelling works, what's most important when conceptualizing characters, and all the types of media and tools you can experiment with. But it also delivers solid knowledge of all the fundamental elements of comic book design.

This is the ideal book for forging your personal style and discovering your own design and virtual language. In the beginning, you'd be in dire need of some perspective, and there's no better person to learn from than Ivan Brunetti, who has been featured several times in the NY Times and the New Yorker.

Contents

Ivan Brunetti presents 15 distinct lessons on cartooning and its progression through the ages. All these lessons are very wittily worded and have a lot of detail on common terminology, popular techniques, helpful tools, and of course, theory.

Brunetti's own illustrations make this a very lively book -and you will start with spontaneous drawings and then move to single-panel strips and ultimately, complicated multi-page stories. Simple exercises and assignments will help you move past your fears and will help you become more confident in your skills.

Cartoon Faces | How to Draw Heads, Features Expressions by Christopher Hart - Best for Beginner Facial Expressions

Everything about a cartoon begins at the face -all emotions are conveyed through the face, and the comic panel starts with a cartoon character's facial expressions.

This book focuses on all the elements of a cartoon character's face and how it can be painted to elicit specific emotions from the characters and the readers. Christopher Hart is one of the best in the business when it comes to writing art books, and this one is no exception.

If the last book on our list was about getting an overall perspective, this is the step-by-step guide.

Contents

This book is the ultimate tutorial on the head, face, and expressions. This book has detailed sections on the eyebrows, mouths, and eye shapes so that you can cover a wide spectrum of emotions.

If that's not enough, there are also chapters on both male and female faces, from newborn babies to adults, in differing shapes and sizes.

It's not enough to know just how to draw a face, you will also need to learn how to turn that face in different directions, all the while maintaining the visual integrity of the character. There is also a chapter on shading the face and a bonus chapter on how to draw body parts conforming to the face.

This book is geared towards absolute beginners who have no background in art but have a knack for coming up with comic situations and witty words.

The Mad Art of Caricature | A Serious Guide to Drawing Funny Faces by Tom Richmond - Best for Mastering Caricatures

The caricature is the only form of the comic which have real-life people as their inspirations. Most celebrities and world-renowned people have a unique set of facial characteristics, which are then exaggerated to comic effect.

It can be hard to teach someone to distort facial features while still keeping the rest of the features proportional. Thus it can only be taught by someone like the award-winning Tom Richmond, who draws on three decades of experience as a caricaturist, in various fields such as books, advertising, video games, film, television animation, and even MAD magazine.

Contents

Every chapter focuses on something different, and it will teach you how to notice subtle differences in everyone, and then you can decide on what to exaggerate.

You'll be taught how to observe faces and people and then what to exaggerate to make for a successful caricature. You'll learn about all the different types of caricatures depending on what you're drawing for.

Put simply, "The Mad Art of Caricature!" is the Holy Grail of the book drawing caricatures. It is the most comprehensive and complete book on the art of caricature to ever be published with over 500 illustrations, laid out in a very reader-friendly way.

Cartooning the Head and Figure by Jack Hamm

This book is regarded as one of the classic art books and is one of the most popular cartooning books available for sale online. If Cartoon Faces only covered the face, this book provides a more holistic and all-around approach to drawing cartoons.

This book is targeted to everyone regardless of age or artistic talent or experience. The only requirement is that you are a fan of doodling and you want to get better at it.

Contents

It's hard to find a book that simplifies things to a greater extent than this one. The whole human anatomy is broken down into a series of very easily realizable shapes. It has over 3000 illustrations, to teach you how to draw everything from facial muscles to postures to motion.

The best feature about this book is that it is designed so that you can go at your own pace from one chapter to another. You can also very easily pick up where you left off, even if you took a months-long break.

However, the only drawback is that the painting style feels like the Sunday comics in a newspaper. It might feel a little dated and old-school, but it is still an excellent book for beginners.

The Cartoonist’s Big Book of Drawing Animals by Christopher Hart

This is the second book by Christopher Hart that's on our list. Anthropomorphizing animals is nothing new and has been around since Tom and Jerry. Early MGM Studios and Disney did a lot to make animal cartoons popular.

This book regularly makes the top 50 Art Books lists and is super popular online, in no small measure due to its immense simplicity and the sheer number of different animals you will learn to draw with the help of this book.

Contents

This book is divided into chapters depending on the kind of animal you wish to draw. Each of these chapters has in-depth information on how to capture every different emotion and how to draw each body part of that animal like faces, paws, feet, wings, and tails. In total, this book numbers more than 200 pages.

All the popular animals are present - which includes cats, dogs, horses, lions, penguins, bears, tigers, and elephants. Apart from that, you also have all the sidekick animals like pigs, kangaroos, giraffes, and turtles.

Simple, guided tutorials show you how to portray every emotion from cutesy-sweet with huge eyes to begging to scheme with malicious eyes. There are similar instructions for drawing animals that fit certain roles from baby animals to villains to completely clueless animals and much more.

How to Draw Cool Stuff by Catherine V. Holmes

Leaving the generic title aside, this book does have a lot of cool stuff in it. At its heart, it is a very simple drawing book aimed at teachers and students. As a result, it's mostly suited for children and early beginners.

If you've got some amount of experience as an artist, it's better to buy a more advanced book. In fact, this is a series of books. If you want a more advanced book, you could consider purchasing the other, more focused installments in this series.

Contents

Each chapter of the book starts off with a small introduction to the technique, fundamentals, and how to start your paintings with an end goal in mind.

However, right after, it wastes no time diving right into step-by-step illustrations. This book teaches you the basic principles of illustration by showing you how to draw simple shapes that eventually turn into complex drawings.

The best feature of this book is that, at the end of every chapter, there is a series of fun and hands-on exercises. These exercises will help you look at an object or a figure as an artist would - as a series of interconnected lines, shapes, and other elements. Also, these exercises will ensure you retain whatever you learned in that chapter.

From hyperrealistic portraits to holiday themes and tropes to drawings of tattoos, How To Draw Cool Stuff makes everything a cakewalk and explains everything as you would to a 5-year-old, literally.

Modern Cartooning by Christoper Hart

This is the third book by the same author on our list and is one of his best-known titles. This one takes an in-depth look at character creation for illustrators.

Creating a likable and engaging character is the most important facet of creating a cartoon character. Before you get started with telling your stories, you first have to make up an enigmatic character.

Contents

This book takes away all the guesswork and uncertainty when it comes to creating a cartoon character by simply providing the reader with a very fresh and easy approach. This book is highly influenced by the most popular cartoon characters of our times and aims to show certain similarities among them.

It's s 160 pages long and is full of lively illustrations that provide a guided approach to conceiving and creating interesting characters. Chris's guides are super detailed, and he teaches the reader to observe a drawing and then improve upon it with their own ideas.

This book is chock-a-block full of useful tips and hints, and it will give you all the help you need to let your imagination run riot.

Humongous Book of Cartooning by Chris Hart

All the other books on this list either focus on certain types of cartoons, like faces, people, animals, etc. or they are beginner's guides to getting started.

None of them are complete or all-around books, though, which cover every aspect of creating cartoons. This book aims to accomplish the hardest task of all - give the reader an artistic vision so they can give their cartoons their own distinct style and shape.

It's the most all-around cartooning book you can buy, which has a huge amount of depth and covers almost everything in today's world of cartoons, making it great value for money.

Contents

This book has over 200 pages and teaches you how to draw almost everything from fantasy characters to background designs to common pop icons.

This book has step-by-step guides on how to draw cartoon people and cartoon animals, retro-style "toons'," and even robots like Wall-E. These guides are detailed and complete in every respect from the design to the composition to explaining exactly what is appealing about the cartoon.

The Humongous Book of Cartooning isn't just big, it has a huge number of tips and hints that Chris is famous for. The eye-catching characters and extensive visuals pack with them more instructions and guidelines than any Chris Hart book before it. In short, if you want to buy one book that covers most of everything about drawing cartoons, this is it!

Best Cartooning Books Comparison Table

Product	Author	Publication Year	Format	Page Count	Target Audience	Skill Level	Key Topics Covered
Cartooning \| Philosophy and Practice by Ivan Brunetti	Ivan Brunetti	2011	Paperback	128	Adults, Art Students	Intermediate	Cartooning concepts, exercises, history
Cartoon Faces \| How to Draw Heads, Features Expressions by Christopher Hart	Christopher Hart	2014	Paperback	160	Teens, Adults, Art Students	Beginner/Intermediate	Cartooning techniques, facial features, expressions
The Mad Art of Caricature \| A Serious Guide to Drawing Funny Faces by Tom Richmond	Tom Richmond	2011	Paperback	224	Teens, Adults, Art Students	Intermediate/Advanced	Caricature techniques, exaggeration, composition
Cartooning the Head and Figure by Jack Hamm	Jack Hamm	1986	Paperback	160	Teens, Adults, Art Students	Beginner/Intermediate	Anatomy, perspective, proportions, shading
The Cartoonist’s Big Book of Drawing Animals by Christopher Hart	Christopher Hart	2016	Paperback	256	Teens, Adults, Art Students	Beginner/Intermediate	Animal anatomy, expressions, movement, composition
How to Draw Cool Stuff by Catherine V. Holmes	Catherine V. Holmes	2014	Paperback	253	Kids, Teens, Adults, Art Students	Beginner/Intermediate	Optical illusions, 3D shapes, shading, textures
Modern Cartooning by Christoper Hart	Christopher Hart	2013	Paperback	160	Teens, Adults, Art Students	Beginner/Intermediate	Cartooning styles, character design, storytelling
Humongous Book of Cartooning by Chris Hart	Christopher Hart	2011	Paperback	256	Kids, Teens, Adults, Art Students	Beginner/Intermediate	Cartooning techniques, character design, storytelling

Are there any free online resources for learning cartooning?

Yes, there are many free online resources for learning cartooning, including tutorial videos on YouTube, blogs, and forums where artists share tips and advice. However, keep in mind that not all online resources are of equal quality, and it can be difficult to gauge the accuracy and reliability of information found online.

Can cartooning books help me develop my own style?

Yes, while cartooning books typically teach a specific style or approach to cartooning, they can also provide a foundation for you to develop your own unique style. By learning the fundamentals of character design, anatomy, and composition, you can experiment with different techniques and create your own cartooning style.

Do I need to have drawing experience to read cartoon books?

No, you don’t necessarily need to have drawing experience to read cartooning books. Many books are geared toward beginners and provide step-by-step instructions for drawing basic shapes, characters, and expressions. However, having some basic drawing skills and familiarity with art supplies can be helpful.

How long does it take to learn to cartoon?

The time it takes to learn cartooning can vary depending on your level of commitment and dedication, as well as your natural talent and artistic abilities. Some people may pick up the basics quickly and be able to create simple cartoons within a few weeks, while others may need months or even years of practice to develop their skills.

Are there cartoon books specifically for children?

Yes, cartooning books specifically designed for children use simple language and illustrations to teach basic cartooning skills. Some popular options include “Cartooning for Kids” by Mark Bergin, “How to Draw Cartoons for Kids” by Christopher Hart, and “The Kids’ Guide to Drawing Cartoons” by Mark Kistler.

Can cartooning books help me make a career as a cartoonist?

While reading cartooning books can certainly help you develop your skills as a cartoonist, there are many factors that go into building a successful career in this field. In addition to artistic talent and skill, you may also need to develop business skills, build a portfolio, network with other artists, and seek out professional opportunities in the industry.

Conclusion

Thank you for taking the time to read through our article on the best cartooning books! It's evident that there are several amazing choices out there, each addressing different aspects of the art. We hope that the insights provided in this article have fueled your excitement for cartooning and will assist you in taking your skills to new heights.

Out of these 8 best cartooning books, here are our top three recommendations:

Ivan Brunetti's Cartooning | Philosophy and Practice is an ideal option for those who want to forge their personal style and discover their design and visual language. With Brunetti's lively illustrations and engaging lessons, this book is perfect for intermediate artists who want to deepen their understanding of the cartoon world.

Cartoon Faces | How to Draw Heads, Features, and Expressions by Christopher Hart is a good option for absolute beginners or intermediate artists who want a step-by-step guide on drawing cartoon faces. The detailed sections on various facial features and the coverage of different age groups make this book an essential resource for mastering the ability to convey emotions through cartoon expressions.

The Mad Art of Caricature | A Serious Guide to Drawing Funny Faces by Tom Richmond is the right choice for those who are passionate about caricature art. This book offers a comprehensive guide to observing real-life people and their features, teaching you how to exaggerate them effectively for the perfect caricature. If you want to level up your skills in this specialized form of cartooning, this book is the one for you.

As you continue to explore and develop your cartooning skills, remember that practice is key. Keep experimenting with new techniques, learn from these excellent resources, and most importantly, let your imagination run wild. Stay passionate about your art and have fun on this exciting journey! Happy cartooning!

Related Articles

8 Best Cartooning Books For Artists

11 Best Perspective Books

21 Best Manga Drawing Books

16 Best Maya Books for Beginners & Professionals

25 Best Concept Art Books for Artists

22 Best Drawing Books for Beginners

11 Best Adult Coloring Books That Will Color Your Mood

11 Best Color Theory Books for Artists

Best Watercolor Painting Books Everywhere

Children from the 90s' and earlier times had a lot of fun watching those spectacular superhero movies and cartoon shows.

But to get an action figure inspired by their favorite hero, they had to wait till their parents took them to a toy store, that too a 'good' one.

All this now seems a thing of the distant past, as online toy stores have come into the picture. There are a plethora of such stores right now, each, in turn, having hundreds of options. It's just about logging on to a suitable store and choosing the toy. Then on, it's a matter of minutes, and your toy is booked!

Selecting the right store is the only difficulty you might face, with such a huge number of websites available. This lone task will also become easy for you, as we've picked the 33 best online toy stores from the unlimited choices available.

So, let’s get started, shall we?

Best Online Toy Stores

Amazon

As one of the biggest online stores and perhaps the most obvious inclusion in the list, Amazon needs no introduction. It has a collection of millions of toys of a wide variety as well and hence is evidently the largest available online source of toys.

With great variety comes the difficulty in making the right choice, which is where several filters of Amazon can help you out. The site also lets you check best-sellers and new releases in separate sections, which are updated on a daily basis.

Amazon offers several perks, including free two-day shipping to those who have subscribed to Amazon Prime. For the rest who do not have a Prime subscription, a shipping fee is mostly applicable.

Toy Wiz

For a child who loves to own new collectible toys such as fidget spinners, and special action figures, there is no better place than ToyWiz. You may even find those rare Pokemon cards available in their collection.

Besides, if your little one is waiting for a toy scheduled to release soon, you can book one of the first of the lots through a pre-order sale. There are lots of exciting pre-orders featured on the site.

The company has been in the e-commerce business for more than a decade and hence is a trustworthy name. It is also loved by buyers for the excellent customer service it offers. As for the shipping fees, the standard costs are $5.99 for a seven to ten-day delivery and $29 for a three to five-day one.

Toy Universe

True to its name, this store is indeed a separate world of toys, with thousands of different items available on the website. Despite having started in Australia, it is now delivering orders in New Zealand and the United States as well.

Besides popular brands and new arrivals, you will also find a whole lot of creative and educational games and toys on this website. For instance, the range of art and craft games would help to instill creativity by fueling a child's imagination.

A uniform shipping charge of $9.95 is applicable for orders across Australia, excluding bulky ones. The international charge is calculated during the checkout of an item. It depends upon the location, the items in the order, and the delivery service you choose.

Walmart

The renowned retail store chain in the United States also offers a large online collection of toys to its consumers. By browsing through the toys section of the website, you will discover a lot of offers applicable to many of the items.

This store has several interesting categories of toys available, which will appeal to any child who has that creative streak in him or her. For instance, the pretend-and-play section has toys that let children dress up to be their favorite cartoon or fairytale character.

The website offers free shipping facilities for orders of $35 or more. For purchases less than that amount, a flat fee of $5.99 is charged. But additional charges may be associated with products not bought and sold directly through Walmart.

Toys R Us

An iconic name in the world of Toys, this store went through a tough time in the last few years due to the growth of online toy shopping sites.

Quite recently, it was revived by a partnership with another leading toy company. The Toys R Us website is currently alive and well and is much loved by consumers.

The large variety of toys offered by the store can give tough competition to the leading online e-commerce platforms. Besides, the website also brings you toys from the most sought-after brands such as Disney, Marvel, and Mattel.

Toys R Us has different websites dedicated to different delivery regions and ties to maintain a moderate shipping rate for consumers. The charge is calculated on the weight and dimensions of the items, the shipping method you choose, and the delivery location.

Fish Pond

Another online e-commerce platform that offers an immense variety of toys to choose from is Fish Pond. It has dozens of categories for the toy section, with each category listing hundreds of thousands of options. So there remains little doubt about whether you will get what you are looking for.

Also, you can find the most interesting collectible toys on the website, including exclusive Hot Wheels models and rare DC collectible action figures. For the little Marvel and DC comic lovers, this site has quite a lot to offer!

The icing on the cake is that Fish Pond offers free shipping to its consumers worldwide, which is a rare phenomenon indeed! Thus, gifting a toy to that little cousin of yours who lives far away won't be expensive at all.

Fat Brain Toys

The most interesting aspect of this store is that it specializes in toys that facilitate brain development in children. As such, Fat Brain Toys has carved its own niche in the toy business and is quite popular among consumers.

Each educational learning game and toy available in the store is designed to focus on the intellectual growth of a child. Also, the website has separate sections featuring its new releases and best-sellers, which cater to two different sets of consumers.

The store has a flat shipping rate for its consumers within the United States which is as low as $3.99. The items are shipped via UPS Ground. Whereas, international shipping costs include the standard shipping rate plus the customs fees for the destination country.

Hamleys

One of the earliest names in the world of toys, this store started its journey as early as in the 1700s in London with the name 'Noa's Ark'. Without a doubt, it is one of the best in the business and never fails to impress its customers.

Besides a wide variety of toys, the online store offers innumerable options that come at quite affordable prices, making it all the more popular. Also, the store offers quite a convenient return policy if the toys fail to meet your expectations.

Till now, the online toy store delivers products to 27 regions within Europe. A shipping charge of £3.99 is applicable to items shipped within the UK, while a fee of £9 is charged for delivering to 27 destinations in Europe.

Kohl's

A department store with a diverse and fun-filled toy corner, Kohl's online toy collection has an assortment of some of the finest games and toys available.

The particular categories of toys that impress Kohl's customers are its outdoor toys, children's bikes, wagons, and pools. Also, the filters available on the website are quite convenient, helping customers get just the toy they are looking for.

As for the shipping charges, orders above $75 are eligible for free standard shipping, whereby the product is delivered within 3-6 days. The store also offers a free ship-to-store option. For orders below that amount, a shipping fee of $8.95 is applicable. The 2-day shipping charge for products priced at below $100 is $19.95.

Target

This is another online store that offers a variety of products, including toys, and is quite popular among customers. The affordable prices of all the goods sold here have played a major role in increasing its popularity.

The online store has a huge variety of toys which range from the newest in the market to the antique collectible ones. And all of these come at prices hard to believe!

Target offers free shipping for orders above $35, another factor that contributes to its popularity. Besides, with a Target Red Card, you are eligible for free two-day shipping on the majority of items on the website. The store allows consumers to pick up their orders from their nearest Target store.

eBeanstalk

Are you looking to buy toys suitable for a child of a particular age? In that case, this store will be the right place to search in. There is also a great variety of toys in the store.

A great shopping tool on this site classifies the toys available according to the age and gender they are fit for. This is achieved with the help of experts in child psychology. Interestingly, this store has a collection of attractive furniture for children such as little cabinets, table and chair sets, and school house tents.

Ebeanstalk offers free shipping for orders above $49 and the delivery generally takes two to five days. The store also arranges overnight shipping or international expedited shipping for specific orders, which can be availed by calling on the toll-free number.

The Toy Shop

This is another great online store based in the United Kingdom and belongs to the Entertainer, the largest independent retail company of the country. You can get any The updated stock of the latest toys offered ensures that you get any new arrival.

Besides, a unique present finder feature on the website helps consumers to come up with a perfect toy to gift for a special occasion. Furthermore, they can also sign up for free to an email newsletter on the latest toys and hottest deals available.

As for shipping within the UK, it is free for orders above 39.99£, while a fee of 3.99£ is charged for those below that amount. The Toy Shop also delivers its products worldwide, with shipping charges depending upon the location.

Mattel Shop

The company to come up with world-famous toys such as Barbie and Hotwheels, Mattel can well be called a toy connoisseur. It is another trustworthy name in the business, which has had a steady loyal consumer base.

The online store consists of toys from reputed brands such as Jurassic World, BTS, and Disney's Toy Story. You can also find several rare collectible toys on the website, including action figures, animal figures, and classic playsets. In short, it is a wonderland for toys!

The standard shipping rate for the US is $9.95, while for Canada it is $10. The international shipping fee is as high as $60 for orders of less than $170. Signing up as a VIP member would make you eligible for free shipping offers, discounts on first orders, and many more rewards.

Learning Resources

The online store based in the UK has as much as three decades of experience in toy production, a rare distinction indeed. As the name suggests, the website brings children toys designed to make learning a playful journey.

Categorized according to a child's age, the toys help to build the intellectual ability fit for that age. Each toy is interesting in its own way and would keep a child absorbed, in addition to the fun they would get out of it. Besides, the customers are also guaranteed that the toys are proven safe for the kids.

Apart from the UK, the online store delivers toys to 80 countries across Europe, Africa, Asia, and the Middle East. The shipping charge depends upon the location. For delivery within the UK, free shipping is applicable for products priced at more than 50£.

Big Bad Toy Store

If your little one is a huge Marvel or DC fan, then this is the number one online store to browse through for toys. The store exclusively focuses on action figures inspired by the favorite comic superheroes across generations.

Interestingly, you can find a pre-order collection consisting of some of the best upcoming toys in the block. Among the currently featured toys are a Transformers 2.0 Starscream masterpiece and a statue of the popular Harry Potter character Rubeus Hagrid.

The website offers worldwide shipping, with the charges being calculated based on the product weight and dimensions. The international shipping rates do not include any taxes or customs fees that might be charged in the destination country.

Overstock

This massive online retail store also features a vast collection of new toys and games at quite affordable prices. Over the years, it has become one of the most famous and well-performing online retail platforms.

There is also immense variety in the toys that the site offers. The collection includes some rare categories such as pretend and play and outdoor gaming equipment. You are sure to find some of the most exciting new arrivals as well.

The website offers standard free shipping daily on orders over $45 in 48 states of the US, excluding Alaska and Hawaii. For orders below $45, a charge of $4.95 is applicable.

The online store also delivers to 180 countries across the globe. The international shipping rates depend on the delivery service, the product type, weight and dimensions, and the destination postal code.

Disney

Over the ages, Disney has won the hearts of children and adults alike through its legendary animated shows on t.v and grand big-screen ventures. Besides this, its online store has an ever-attractive collection of toys.

The online Disney store is heaven for kids in the true sense as it features all the legendary action figures from its television shows and animated films. It also includes toys, games, and other merchandise from popular franchises such as Marvel, National Geographic, and Star Wars.

The Disney store offers several attractive deals on toy prices, and the shipping rate varies according to the price range. As for international shipping, the charges depend upon the size of the product and the destination.

John Deere Store

Though this online store is well known for its range of industrial products, it is also a dominant name in the toy business. There are various categories of toys and games on offer in the toy & collectibles section of the website.

The toy vehicles category particularly draws the attention of visitors to the website. This category offers plenty of amazing and rare options to choose from. Some examples are toy tractors of different types, wagons, and remote-controlled monster treads.

To date, the online store delivers products to all states within the US. You will be delighted to know that it offers free shipping for any order worth more than $50. The charge applicable for orders of $25 to $49 is $11, while a fee of $8.5 is charged for orders below $25.

McFarlane Toys Store

The online store is named after the renowned comic creator Todd McFarlane who is also its founder. Hence, it goes without saying that the store features many toys based on some of the incredible characters from McFarlane comics.

The online site brings forth toys that would appeal to different age groups. For instance, while it has action figures of characters from the Batman comics, it also includes a collection of toys based on The Game of Thrones.

Currently, the McFarlane store is featured as a separate toy store on Amazon's website. It also sells its products through many other online e-commerce platforms. The shipping charges applicable for the toys would hence depend on the e-commerce site which you are using.

Imagine Toys

This online toy store based in Michigan has gained a prominent place in the toy industry. It offers a fresh collection of toys to consumers, different from the bulk that is present in mass-market toy stores.

The store offers a vast range of toys that can be plenty of fun for kids and at the same time have great educational play value. Also, the toys have been tested with children of the appropriate age to ensure psychological and educational development.

Furthermore, the store offers a hundred percent guarantee to take back a product you are not pleased with. Currently, the store delivers toys to locations within the US only. The shipping costs are calculated in the weight and dimensions of the items ordered. Deliveries are mostly completed within the next business day.

Fisher Price

A niche online store dealing exclusively in baby toys, Fisher-price is undoubtedly one of the best few out there. The variety of baby toys you will find in this subsidiary of Mattel is immense.

Ranging kick and play piano gyms for infants to play and crawl toys for toddlers, this store has it all. Moreover, the site categorizes its toys according to the age range in months. In this way, it can be all the more easy for you to select the right baby toy for a child.

As regards the shipping charges, Fisher-Price ships order worth more than $50 for free. This offer excludes orders to Puerto Rico, Alaska, and Canada. You can also sign up as a VIP member to be eligible for various offers.

Kmart

Kmart is one of the biggest online retail stores in the US and has gained immense popularity over the last few years. Evidently, the toy collection is huge and encompasses all the toy categories that you can think of.

Every kid cannot like the same kind of toy, and that's something you must always remember while you are getting a toy as a gift. This is why Kmart offers you lots and lots of different types of toys for boys and girls.

Moreover, the online store offers free shipping on orders over $49. Items sold through third-party sellers may be excluded from the free shipping list, so make sure you check the finer details.

LEGO

Another iconic company dating back to 1932, LEGO is one of the world's leading toy manufacturers. The automatic building brick or the LEGO brick, a basic unit of every building game available now, is their very own product.

Apart from the regular categories of product type, price, and popularity, the online store lets you shop by themes and interests as well. This makes the process of choosing the right toy a lot easier.

Also, LEGO often has special sales on the online store where toys are sold at slashed prices. Toys are available on the site even before they reach the shelves of the LEGO stores. Products are shipped all over North America, with standard free shipping on orders above $35.

US Toys

This popular online store features several categories of attractive merchandise for children, including toys and games. The products sold on the site are all listed at affordable prices and hence suit the budgets of one and all.

Apart from having a variety of options for toys, the site also has a classification of party themes where customers can pick their preferred toys for a particular event. The different toys available for each theme can help children explore their creativity.

You can get free shipping for toy orders worth more than $35 at the US Toys online store. For purchases of less than $35, a handling charge of $4.99 is applicable which will automatically apply during checkout.

Kiddlestix Toy Store

This leading toy store in the United States Oklahoma has a quite popular online shopping platform offering an appealing collection of toys.

Toys on this site help to foster the developmental growth of a child while encouraging them to have fun by engaging with the world. The cognitive and emotional well being of the child is also ensured in the process. Besides, there are toys available for several age groups including teens and young adults.

The site ensures a fast, fair, and efficient system of processing and shipping for you. The charges depend upon the shipping method you choose. Accordingly, the shipping cost is determined and the delivery rate is estimated during checkout.

Timbuk Toys

The renowned toy store in Denver has an efficient and popular online store with all kinds of toys that you can think of. There is hardly any toy which you won't be able to find here.

Moreover, the online store offers quite pocket-friendly prices for the items sold here, which makes it hugely popular. Also if you are confused between the innumerable options while choosing a gist, the gift suggestions page is the perfect solution. It has gift certificates, play sets, and many more options featured.

The shipping rates for products on this online store vary with the items ordered and the shipping method chosen. Also, some products may be available through specific methods of shipping such as store pick up.

Rogue Toys

In an age when online toy stores are flooded with new arrivals and pre-order collections, Rogue Toys brings you an assortment of collectible and vintage toys.

The look and feel of the website induce nostalgia, taking you back to the times when the Simpsons and Star Wars were a rage. Apart from iconic cartoon characters and television series, toys are inspired by superheroes and villains from timeless comic books as well.

The online store ships its orders via postal services such as USPS, UPS, and FedEx. You have to choose the service you prefer, and the charge varies accordingly. The shipping rate charged by such services depends upon the weight of the items ordered.

Macy's

The iconic brand that started its journey back in 1858, is currently one of the biggest online fashion retailers. Its online store features a vast section of all sorts of toys available at quite affordable prices.

You will be able to narrow down your search for toys with the help of a number of filters such as age range, toy or game type, characters, and brands. Apart from this, there is also a section that features the top-rated toys by customers.

Macy's ships its products to as many as 100 countries across the world, allowing foreign customers to get hold of their amazing toys. For international shipping, it has partnered with global e-commerce company Borderfree which calculates the cost during checkout.

Kidding Around Toys

Voted the best toys store in New City by the New York Magazine, this store has the perfect toys collection that any child will just love! The website of this store is equally amazing, with its user-friendly interface and the intact collection put forward online.

All the toys that you will find in the store are carefully chosen and organized for suiting a wide range of ages and preferences. Interestingly, the home page of the online store features the top toys on offer under the title "staff-picks".

Kidding Around ships its products within the United States via UPS or USPS. As such, the shipping costs for these postal service companies are applicable.

OP Taylor

Labeled as one of the top toy stores in the world in an article by USA Today, this famous toy store offers toys of hundreds of different kinds. The online toy store can be accessed via Amazon.

OP Taylor has three toy stores at different locations in the United States. Interestingly, many of the toys sold are produced in its store located in downtown Brevard which covers an area of 6000 square feet. The website which is featured on Amazon includes most of the products available at the store.

Amazon's shipping charges and services are applicable for this store's orders. The shipping rate is dependent on the product weight and dimensions and the delivery location.

Tantrum

This impressive online store for gifts and stationery also houses an attractive collection of handmade toys. A variety of colorful toys for different age groups are present in the store.

A unique aspect of Tantrum's toys is that they showcase a fusion of the classic and mid-century styles with the best of modern art. Also, all the toys are curated within the theme of a lively old-fashioned circus.

Any visitor to this online store would be transported to a time of nostalgic beauty and fun. Instances of toys sold on the website are French dolls, Danish mice, and a toy tea set designed in France by Djeco.

The online store ships its products to locations within the United States. The shipping charges vary with the toy being bought and the delivery location.

Buy Buy Baby

A one-stop shop for all baby care products, this online store offers a wide range of toys as well. Its user-friendly interface makes the site easily navigable by anyone.

You shall also find a number of useful filters in the toy section, such as product type, price, ratings, brands, and book themes. Besides, the online store also has a provision for a "price match promise." Consumers are offered similar prices to other stores if they can show proof of getting a better price at another store.

As regards the shipping rate, the online store provides free standard shipping on orders above $30. For orders worth less than that amount, a fee of $5.99 is charged. Currently, the store ships products within the United States only.

Miracle Mile Toy Hall

This online toy store based in Los Angeles has become a leading name in the business due to its rising popularity. Recently, it was voted the best alternative for Toys R Us in a poll conducted by LA Weekly.

You will find it all in this online store, whether it's a unique toddler toy, a building kit, or a dollhouse. There are even some great antique toys available on the website. Furthermore, the online store lets you sort the results based on a number of options such as popularity, price, rating, and the latest items.

Currently, the store delivers products within the United States only. The shipping method and subsequent costs are calculated before checkout based on the destination postal code.

Conclusion

With this, we come to the end of our comprehensive list of the 33 best online toy stores. We hope the task of choosing a suitable store will be much easier for you now.

Before we sign off, we would like to put forward the options we consider noteworthy among these online toy stores for their different useful features. Target will be a good website to log on to for someone on the lookout for pocket-friendly options.

Toy Universe offers a greater variety than many other options on the list, making sure that you find the one toy you are searching for. Niche toy stores such as Big Bad Toy Store and Fat Brain Toys will be ideal places if you are sure about the kind of toy you want.

Do let us know whether you agree with our choice in the comments section. Till next time!

Related Articles

17 Best Furniture Stores in Houston Today

40 Best Online Gardening Stores

21 Best Online Antique Stores

All 17 Online Craft Stores DIY Projects of Any Nature

15 Best Furniture Stores In Chicago Today

In every kitchen spices and salts are being used, they add flavor and taste in an unmistakable manner. Cooking is nothing without spices and most of us would love to have them at hand during the cooking process. Showcased below an organized creative kitchen storage idea has been envisioned to shelter your spices in line, at you grasp, ready to be used at any given time. The idea follows the same thread of thought as in "How to Build a Hidden Cabinet Knife Drawer Safe For Children ", article published a few days ago on Homesthetics.

In the search of incredible we have found under the cabinet spice racks that you can purchase directly if crafting is not an option, cast a glance over the items showcased below:

Hardwood Under Cabinet Organizer by Axis

The small simple solution uses natural wood, comes at a very affordable price, and uses no mechanisms, sacrificing comfort to boost resilience a great deal, you can easily nestle the item in your kitchen design by painting it.

Details here.

Handmade Hardwood Under Cabinet Mounted Spice Rack

A great ergonomic design defines this storage option. The rack is handmade and the materials used are of a very high quality. Mechanisms are making it very practical and comfortable to use throughout the day.

What do you think? Would you like to make these creative kitchen storage ideas your DIY project for this weekend or will you purchase custom storage solutions for your household? We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below.

In order to not ruin your doors and walls to hang garlands, use adhesive hooks, ribbons, garland hangers, and twisty ties. You can also use fishing lines, zip ties, and floral wires to secure your garland in its place.

Christmas décor is incomplete without a hanging garland around the front door. They help complete the look of the holiday season, like spring, fall, or Easter. It provides that cheery and merry feeling that makes a special occasion actually special. So, hanging a garland is one of my favorite things to do around Christmas.

Yet, hanging a Christmas garland usually means drilling or hammering holes to put nails on the door frame, wall, or mantels. These permanent holes really ruin the look of your wall or door, and destroy its original look. Some people are also not so handy with the required tools.

To avoid this exact problem, I have a few solutions here to help you hang a garland or a Christmas wreath without damaging your walls, doors, or mantels.

Materials You Can Use

Adhesive hooks
Decorative ribbon
Garland hangers
Twisty ties
Nylon fishing line
Craft/Floral wire
Zip ties

How to Hang Garland Around Front Door

1. Using adhesive hooks

Adhesive hooks, or command hooks, are a great way to hang a Christmas garland or wreath. They come in different varieties of strength and hold up your garland without leaving any mark on the wall or door. There is no permanence of position either. You can move the hooks around to get the exact desired look.

You can use hooks for walls, doors, and staircases as well.

Hang garland on a door/wall using adhesive/command hooks

Follow the following instructions to get the perfect garland look on a wall.

Clean and dry the surface before applying the adhesive/command hooks
Apply the adhesive/command hooks at the desired positions
Hang garland on the hooks

Helpful Trick

Check the adhesive hook’s weight limit to make sure it can support your garland for extended periods of time.

Hang garland on a staircase using adhesive hooks

Clean and dry the surface of the staircase railing
Stick the adhesive hooks at the desired positions
Hang your garlands on the hooks
Add extra hooks in between to support the garland’s weight
Spread out the garland’s foliage to hide the hooks

Helpful Trick

Use clear wire or zip ties to organize your holiday garland further.

2. Using a decorative ribbon or twine

Decorative ribbons or twines add just the right amount of cheer to any holiday décor. So, they are the perfect option to help secure your garlands and wreaths.

Hang garland on a door/wall using decorative ribbons or twines

Tie the ribbon or twine to both ends of the garland
Tie the remaining ends of the ribbon or twine to a hook or any supportive place
Make the knot as elegant and crafty as possible to enhance the look

Hang garland on a staircase using decorative ribbons or twine

Wrap the garland around the staircase railing in the way you want
Now wrap the ribbon around it
Tie the ribbon or twine around the railing to secure the garland in place

Helpful Trick

Use a Christmas-themed ribbon to enhance the look of the holiday garland.

3. Using a garland hanger

Hanging a garland is made so much easier by using a metallic garland hanger. Since it uses spring tension to secure the garland in place, there is no use in drilling or hammering holes. Garland hangers are available for both single and double doors.

How to hang a garland using a garland hanger

Mount the garland hanger and adjust it according to your door’s width
Loop the garland over the center and the corner of the hanger
Adjust and fluff the foliage of the garland to fit your doorframe

Helpful Trick

To know how much garland you need for your door, double the length of the door and add the door’s width to that.

4. Using twisty ties

Twisty ties are an easy and colorful way to secure your garland to your staircase railing. Give your hallways Christmas cheer using these.

How to hang a garland on a staircase using twisty ties

Wrap the garland around your staircase railing in the style you want
Place a twisty tie every two feet to secure the garland in place
Make sure the twisty ties are twisted enough to ensure extra support

5. Using a nylon fishing line

Nylon fishing lines are an efficient way to tie a garland around the railing of your staircase since it helps to secure its place tightly.

Hanging garland on a staircase using a nylon fishing line

Start wrapping the garland around the railing from the bottom of the staircase
Wrap the nylon line around one end of the garland and the top of the banister
Tie a knot in the nylon line to make sure the garland stays in its place
Repeat the same method at the top of the staircase
Fluff the foliage of the garland to keep the nylon line out of view

Helpful Trick

Tie the center of the garland to the railing of your staircase to showcase a draping effect.

6. Using zip ties

Using a zip tie is pretty similar to using floral wire.

Hanging garlands on a wall/door using zip ties

Tie loops onto the garland using zip ties
Hang the loop of the zip tie to existing hooks on your wall

Alternatives to garlands

Apart from a Christmas garland, you can also charm up the holiday season by hanging wreaths as well as ribbons. Christmas laser lights are also becoming extremely popular these days as Christmas and holiday décor.

You can follow the following step-by-step instructions to hang a wreath around your house this holiday season.

Hanging a wreath using adhesive hooks

Follow the same method as for the garland
Hang your wreath on the hooks in the desired position

Hanging a wreath using nylon fishing line

Place a hook on the inner side of your door frame, with the part with the hook facing downwards
Tie one end of the nylon line around the hook and make a knot to secure it in place
Make sure the nylon line can go over the top of the door and is long enough to hang your wreath from the desired height outside
Tie the other end of the nylon line tightly around the wreath
Now, suspend your wreath from the inside of your door

Hanging a wreath using ribbon/twine

Loop one end of the ribbon/twine through the center of your wreath
Secure the ribbon/twine in place by making a knot with the two ends
Find any hook in your desired location to hang the wreath using the ribbon

Helpful Trick

Bind the ribbon using an elegant knot to add a style element.

Hanging a wreath using craft/floral wire

Loop the craft/floral wire through the back of your wreath
Use the loop to hang the wreath from a hook or a peg
Twist the wire to secure it in place
Add some decorative ribbon to hide the craft wire

Hanging a wreath using an over-the-door wreath hanger

Most over-the-door wreath hangers are made to fit standard-size doors and are made using a metallic frame. Thus, they are an excellent option in case you wish to hang a heavy wreath on your front door.

Place your wreath hanger over your door
In case you have an adjustable wreath hanger, check the hanging height
Hang your wreath on the hanger
Fluff the foliage of the wreath to showcase the Christmas spirit

Helpful Trick

Use a level to ensure the wreath hanger is installed straight.

Hanging Christmas lights

Hanging Christmas lights is the best way to kickstart your holiday season. Whether you hang them from your Christmas tree or you hang them outdoors, they definitely add to the Christmas cheer.

Hanging these lights around your staircase, on your front door, or around your Christmas tree mainly uses those same methods that any Christmas garland requires. But you need to remember to exercise safety and caution while hanging any garland since it can be very easy to hurt yourself.

How do I determine the length of garland I need for my front door?

As already mentioned in a helpful trick above, you can determine the length of garland you need for your door easily. Just measure the length and width of your front door using a measuring tape. Now double the length and add it to the width of the door. This is the amount of garland you need to wrap around your door once.

If you want to tie the garland around your front door more than once, adjust the length and width accordingly to get the needed length.

Can I use suction cups to hang a wreath/garland around my front door?

Yes, you can. There are several suction cup hooks that are designed specifically to hang garlands and wreaths. Make sure to check the weight limit on the suction cup against the weight of your garland or wreath. After that, it’s pretty much the same as using an adhesive hook.

Clean the area before attaching the suction cup. Give the cup a tug, and you are ready to attach your garland or wreath.

How do I store the garland after the holiday season is over?

After the holiday season comes and goes, and the garland is done spreading its cheer, it is time to store it away safely. Follow these steps to store your garland securely. After all, you might require them during the next holiday season.

Remove any of the added ornaments, ribbons, bells, etc.
Lay the garland flat and fold it in half
Gently align all the stems in the same direction
Layer all of it in a large Sterilite bin

The Sterilite bin helps to keep the bugs and the moisture away, protecting your precious garlands from getting ruined. It also helps to preserve the shape of the garland so that you can reuse it next year.

Will the garland be secure if I use tape to hang it around my front door?

You can technically use a few pieces of scotch tape to hang a garland around your front door. But don’t expect it to stay in place for longer than a few hours. This is because the adhesive power of scotch tape is not powerful enough to secure the garland in place for a long time.

Duct tape might be powerful enough to ensure longevity. But it will surely ruin the look of your perfect Christmas garland with its dull gray color.

Can I reuse the materials I use to hang the garland next year?

It depends on what material you’re asking about. You can definitely store away the adhesive hooks, wreath hangers, garland hangers, and ribbons and use them for decoration next year as well.

However, in the case of twine, floral wire, zip ties, nylon fishing line, and twisty ties, it is best to throw those away. Buy them afresh next year to make sure they perform their functions properly.

How do I ensure that the garland hangs evenly around my front door?

You can use a leveler to ensure the garland hanger is secured in a straight line. You can also use a scale or ruler to ensure the adhesive hooks or the suction cups are attached in a straight line. Additionally, make sure the length of the garland is enough to be wrapped around your front door. All this will help ensure that the garland hangs evenly around your door.

Conclusion

Who doesn’t like to add some Christmas cheer in the form of decorations? Plus, you don’t have to ruin your precious walls or doors to hang these decorations. Whether it’s a festive garland or a charming wreath, there is no need to ruin your freshly painted walls or your newly varnished doors.

Just use all these super easy methods to hang your garlands and wreaths without using nails. Save your walls and save your doors. And have a very Merry Christmas!

Decorating your home with Christmas lights can be fun. However, it can also pose some safety risks if not done properly. Therefore, it is crucial to take certain precautions regarding assessing the space, choosing the right equipment, planning the layout, and installing lights properly.

There's nothing quite like the warm and inviting glow of Christmas lights!

However, while hanging lights can be fun and exciting, it can also be hazardous if not done correctly. According to the US Consumer Product Safety Commission, during the holiday season, there is an increase in the number of accidents related to electric shocks and fires.

In this blog post, I will provide you with tips on how to safely hang lights for a merry holiday display.

How to Safely Hang Lights For Holiday Display

Choosing the Right Location and Lights

Before starting the process of hanging Christmas lights, it's essential to take a close look at the space where you plan to hang them. Assessing the area will help you identify any potential hazards and ensure that you have the right tools and equipment for the job.

Check the area for hazards like power lines, trees, or uneven terrain.
Choose safe lights and outlets for the location.
Select lights suitable for the intended location.
Use outdoor extension cords with ground fault circuit interrupters.
Consider different styles and colors for desired aesthetics.
Use secure attachments to prevent fire hazards.

Think about the overall aesthetic you want to achieve. String lights come in various styles and colors, from classic white to multicolored and even themed designs like a winter wonderland or holiday decorations.

Once you have selected the appropriate lights, it is important to use light clips or other secure attachments to ensure that the icicle lights stay in place and do not pose a fire hazard.

Choosing the Right Equipment

Selecting the proper equipment is crucial to ensure a safe and enjoyable holiday lighting experience. Here are some tips to guide you in choosing the right Christmas lights and extension cords:

A. Selecting Lights

When choosing net lights for your holiday display, it's crucial to select those that are specifically designed for heavy snow. Outdoor Christmas lights are weather-resistant and can withstand the elements such as rain, snow, and wind. They also have safety features like waterproof connections and thicker insulation to protect against electrical shocks.

When it comes to DIY, safety should always be your top priority, especially when working with electricity and AC power plugs and sockets. Look for certification marks like the UL (Underwriters Laboratories) or ETL (Electrical Testing Laboratories) seal on the packaging of the lights. These marks indicate that the lights have been tested and approved for safety.

Before installation, test the lights to make sure they're working correctly. Plug them in and inspect for any damage or defects. Replace any faulty bulbs or strands to avoid electrical hazards.

B. Selecting Extension Cords

Extension cords are essential for outdoor holiday lighting displays. They provide additional length and flexibility to power your lights from a distance. However, not all extension cords are suitable for outdoor usage.

When selecting the proper equipment for your holiday lights, ensure it's rated for outdoor use and has a grounded plug to minimize the risk of electrical shock. Look for wires with a thick insulation layer that can withstand the weather and prevent tripping hazards.

Consider the length of the extension cord needed for your display, but be careful not to overload it with too many lights or electrical devices. Overloading an extension cord can lead to overheating and cause electrical fires.

C. Investing in a Surge Protector

A surge protector is an electrical device designed to protect your lights and extension cords from voltage spikes and surges. It's recommended to use a surge protector to avoid electrical damage and protect your investment in Christmas lights.

Choose a surge protector rated for outdoor use with enough outlets to accommodate all your electrical devices. Also, be sure to read the instructions carefully and follow the manufacturer's guidelines for proper usage.

You can ensure a safe and successful holiday lighting display by selecting the right lights, extension ladder, and surge protectors.

Planning the Layout of Christmas Lights

To ensure that your outdoor Christmas lights display is visually appealing and safe, it's important to plan the layout carefully.

Before you start hanging lights, it's a good idea to create a sketch of the display to help visualize the final result. This can help you determine the placement of the lights and identify any potential issues before you start decorating.

Start by measuring the length of the area where you plan to hang the lights using a tape measure. Identify how many light strands you'll need. Ensure to account for any corners, bends, or obstacles in the area. This can help you avoid running out of lights or buying too many.

When planning the placement of the lights, avoid overloading circuits. The United States Consumer Product Safety Commission recommends that you only connect up to three light strands per extension cord. If you're using larger bulbs, be aware that they may generate more heat and require more electricity than smaller bulbs.

Consider using cable ties to secure your Christmas tree lights in place, and make sure to check your rain gutters for any moisture buildup before starting your installation. Zip ties are also a great tool for securing your lights, especially in windy areas or on uneven surfaces.

By taking the time to plan the layout of your Christmas lights display carefully, you can create a beautiful and safe decoration that brings joy to you and your loved ones.

Installing the Christmas Lights

Once you have planned the layout of your Christmas light display, it's time to start the installation process. Here are some tips to ensure a safe and successful installation:

Following the Manufacturer's Instructions for Installation

Each set of lights may come with its own set of instructions for installation. Be sure to carefully read and follow these instructions to ensure that hanging the lights is safe and effective. This will also help you avoid any potential electrical hazards or damage to the lights.

Also, if you're planning to hang lights on the roof shingles or eaves, be sure to use proper safety precautions and consider using a residual-current device to prevent electric hazards.

Ensuring that the Lights are Secured Properly and Won't Fall or Move

It's important to ensure that your hanging Christmas lights are secured properly to avoid any accidents. Use sturdy hooks or clips to attach the lights to the surface you're hanging them from, whether it's the roof or walls.

Metal columns and porch railings would make a great place to hang lights, just be sure to use appropriate clips and hangers to avoid damaging the metal. Also, try and use clips that won't damage the surface or paint, and avoid using nails or screws.

Using Hooks or Clips to Avoid Damaging the Roof or Walls

When attaching your incandescent lights to the roof or walls, be sure to use hooks or clips that won't damage the surface. Avoid using nails or screws, as they can leave permanent damage. There are many types of hooks and clips available that are specifically designed for holiday lights and can be easily found at hardware stores or online.

By following these tips, you can ensure that your holiday lights are installed safely and securely, creating a beautiful and festive display for all to enjoy.

Keeping Your Holiday Lights in Top Shape Throughout the Season

Now that you have successfully hung your string lights, it's vital to ensure that they stay in top shape throughout the season. This means regularly checking for damage or wear and replacing damaged incandescent light bulbs or cords as needed. It also means removing the light clips promptly after the holidays are over to avoid any potential hazards or damage to the light clips.

Regularly Checking the LED Lights for Damage or Wear

It's essential to regularly check your Christmas lights for any signs of damage or wear. This includes inspecting the incandescent bulbs, cords, and plugs for any cracks, breaks, or other damage. If you notice any damage, replacing the damaged parts or the entire set of lights is important to avoid any potential hazards.

Always be aware of the temperature when hanging Christmas lights, as extreme heat or cold can affect the performance of your LED lamps.

Replacing any Damaged Bulbs or Cords

If you notice any damage or wear on your holiday lights, it's essential to address it promptly. This means replacing any damaged bulbs or cords before using the lights again. The correct replacement bulbs and cords are essential to ensure the lights function correctly and safely.

Removing the Christmas Lights Promptly After the Holidays are Over

Once the festive season has come to an end, it's important to remove your holiday lights promptly. Leaving the led lights up for an extended period of time can not only be a potential hazard, but it can also lead to damage or wear on the lights themselves. Taking the time to carefully remove the lights and properly store them for next year can help ensure they stay in top shape for years to come.

Adding Some Flair

Now that the light strings are up, it's time to add some flair to your holiday display! To add an extra festive touch to your Christmas decorations, consider adding light-up LED stars or other holiday-themed items. With a few creative touches, you can take your display to the next level and make it truly unique. Here are some ideas to consider:

Adding garlands, bows, or other decorative elements to the light strings
Using colored lights or alternating colors for a fun and festive look
Adding light-up figurines or lawn ornaments to the display
Creating a themed display, such as a winter wonderland or Santa's workshop
Incorporating music or sound effects to enhance the atmosphere

Get creative and have fun with it! Remember, the possibilities are endless when it comes to adding some flair to your holiday display. Just follow all safety guidelines and manufacturer instructions when incorporating any additional elements.

What tools do I need to hang holiday lights safely?

The tools you need to hang holiday lights safely include a ladder, power source, clips, hooks, power strip, electrical tape, and a circuit tester.

Can I hang Christmas lights in rainy or snowy weather?

If you plan to hang Christmas lights outdoors, use light strings designed for door frames that can withstand rainy or snowy weather. However, it's best to avoid hanging lights during extreme weather conditions.

How do I safely hang lights on a roof?

When hanging Christmas lights on a roof, use a sturdy ladder and have someone assist you. Secure the light strands with clips or hooks, and avoid overloading the circuit.

How do I store my outdoor Christmas lights safely after the season is over?

To store your Christmas lights safely after the season ends, wrap them around a cardboard or plastic spool, and store them in a dry and cool place.

How do I avoid overloading my electrical circuits with LED lights?

To avoid overloading your electrical circuits with LED lights, avoid connecting too many lights to a single circuit. Also, use a circuit tester to ensure that the circuit is not overloaded.

What are some common mistakes to avoid when hanging mini lights?

Some common mistakes to avoid when hanging mini lights include using damaged or worn-out light strands, overloading the circuit, using indoor lights for outdoor displays, and running cords across walkways or high-traffic areas.

Conclusion

The holiday season is a time for joy and celebration, but it's important to remember the potential hazards that come with hanging holiday lights. By taking the time to assess the space, choose the right tools and equipment, plan the layout, and properly install and maintain the lights, you can create a beautiful lighting display that lasts all season long.

Whether you’re going with incandescent lights, warm white lights, or icicle lights, these safety rules hold true for any type of festive lighting. So, no matter how many Christmas lights you’re hanging, keep these points in mind for a safe and merry experience!

Pallets are known to be quite an extraordinary resource when it comes to DIY projects or any activity around the household that requires wood as they're relatively easy to find, inexpensive and quite modular, easy to disassemble, and easy to scale at the same time. They usually contain a mix of hardwood essences filled with grain making them quite graphic yet rustic in look and in outdoor furniture and indoor rustic interior design they really shine; they're really sturdy, and resilient. An extensive gallery of epic pallet bar ideas follows to showcase how this wooden resource can be used indoors and outdoors as a bar that can emphasize your event easily and rapidly.

The DIY pallet bar is a project that in theory you would be able to realize alone in a few hours, It requires simple power tools to craft swiftly and all safety precautions and protection gear ought to be used at all times.

Cast a glance at the gallery below and find the bar able to suit your event and needs!

Pallet Bar Ideas

Here a simple bar stick-wood has been used, Stick-wood is a very graphic finish that can be purchased and applied everywhere as a sticker, it contains natural wood and the result is flawless yet easy to use, no tools or DIY skills needed. The pallet above contains no pallet wood indeed yet the same principle of embellishing a bar with wood you can realize in a DIY project, plank by plank.

via stikwood.com

Three pallets can be used as they are, two-three nails can keep them together in a U-shape while counters can be realized in a matter of minutes constituted out of OSB or MDF or any other piece of wood wide enough. The simple pallet bar design can be used indoors for various celebrations yet outdoors the design makes great sense, surrounded by greenery and possibly emphasized by string lights to create a really air, surreal design.

via etsy.com

A small portion of pallet can emphasize your entertaining experience rapidly, it can hold your liquor and special glasses in flashy, dedicated shelf behind the bar, at your grasp.

via spaceshanty.hubpages.com

An experienced DIY enthusiast will see wooden pallets as an extraordinary wood resource and with the right tools this can be brought to perfection. The farmhouse-look is cozy and warm despite its neutral colors.

via 2perfectiondecor.blogspot.com

The great benefit of the wood in pallets is their diversity, you never know what you're gonna get! Use this to your advantage and shape a patchwork look ready to emphasize.

via s-s-pallet-creations-llc.myshopify.com

Three pieces of wood angled can help you form a connection between wooden pallets rapidly, the transverse pieces of wood can now become shelves, counters behind the bar with no effort, you obtain a pallet bar within minutes, ready to use, ready to entertain !

via imgur.com

Wooden pallets components can be treated differently within a pallet bar, here the bottom half that consists of pallets used as they are have been painted-only while the counter-top features a ceramic finish that gives the project a really exquisite look.

via randyelrod.com

Pallet bars are a great tool as they're inexpensive, graphic, and easily customizable. Use them as a point of interest in your event.

via etsy.com

One could craft the pallet bar for his man-cave in the workshop or garage to reduce waste. The rough looking pallet above is a great fit for a man-cave !

via 99pallets.com

Bars constructed with pallet wood can be quite rigid, sturdy. Use natural wood to your advantage and sculpt the extraordinary.

via infarrantlycreative.net

Use two wooden pallets with a simple counter to create a pallet bar cart that can be moved around. Two three shelves can be constructed within the pallets too.

via mypinterestinglife.com

Your entire yard could receive a make-over powered by wooden pallets, an entire bar area can be constructed, a terrace is an option too. Anything that wears wood can be translated into quality, embrace it.

Source Unknown

A pallet bar can contain a fish tank, a really nice feature that could enhance your setting and space.

via Pinterest

Wooden crates and simple pallets make a great team, here the white piece of cloth creates the illusion of suspension for this diy wine bar. A really sensible setting.

via thepoorsophisticate.blogspot.com.au

An L-shape pallet bar can be achieved quite rapidly with minimum effort and the wood's sturdiness vouches for the item's resilience. How do you see this bar?

Source Unknown

Two pallets tied together by a few nails use concrete tiles as a counter to serve drinks in style, a very fast and rewardful craft to take on for your next event !

via stackeddesign.blogspot.fr

You can create a cocktail pallet bar with a really professional look by treating the wood contained as a resource, use the right tools, you have something extraordinary at hand.

via Pinterest

The simplest pallet can become a pool bar rapidly, get the party started !

via craftyincrosby.com

Tiles on the counter of two pallets can bring a really elegant look to an otherwise rustic element. The color chosen complements the design beautifully.

Source Unknown

Use light sources within simple pallets overlapped, finished off with a sheet of glass as a counter and you'll have the simplest, the most inexpensive, and the coolest pallet bar in town in a matter of minutes.

Source Unknown

Wooden pallets with exposed concrete shape a brilliant combination with following.

via internationaltimber.tumblr.com

The simplest pallets can shape the coolest bar, bring in a countertop that looks exquisite and you're all set.

via Pinterest

An outdoor pallet tiki bar might require 5-6 pallets yet the extraordinary result is definitely worth the effort invested; here string lights contribute greatly.

via 1001pallets.com

To shape your own patio bar can be a challenging project if you're not using pallets, with pallets, everything changes.

via amittenfullofsavings.com

A pallet bar can represent simple shelves with the appropriate content.

Source Unknown

In outdoor celebrations pallet bars are a great fit, greenery emphasizes their presence, wood brings in coziness.

via mtsteele.tumblr.com

Multiple colors can work to one's advantage yet the wooden grain needs to remain present, and visible.

Source Unknown

The silhouette of this bar and chairs are astonishing, a subtle and elegant pallet bar design definitely worth following.

via stackeddesign.blogspot.fr

Construct a bar and grill with pallets, you can shape something to enhance your nights of festive entertaining beautifully.

Source Unknown

The simplest craft can be encourage by its surroundings.

via diyready.com

All bars ought to be illuminated in a special way, find your own balance!

Source Unknown

You can use the patchwork surprise of wooden pallets in a portion of your pallet bar; here the countertop receives new wood with the grain carefully aligned thus creating contrast with the bar's vertical plane.

via furnishlyst.com

Use stone and a special resin to obtain something unique. Iron pipes have also been used to give one the chance to rest his feet while he enjoys a drink at the bar.

Source Unknown

Chevron patterns, chevron patterns everywhere. They're here for a reason, they simply work. Above in a setting that uses concrete and wood the pattern adds a certain dynamic.

Source Unknown

Swift, rapid and highly graphic pallet bar.

via etsy.com

One's flag is worth cheering and drinking for, raise your glass ladies and gentlemen!

Source Unknown

A small bar with the grill at hand, adorable, beautiful.

via scoop.it

A lemonade pallet stand is something that could help your child a great deal in the near future, pin this image now for later use!

Source Unknown

Scale the pallet bar to fit your event needs.

via 99pallets.com

A finish that builds on the wood's coziness, warmth, and rustic look.

Source Unknown

Oddly graphic, rough and small rustic pallet bar design.

Source Unknown

Use bottle caps on your counter-top to send a cool message, it can be a fun craft to enjoy with friends.

via woodesigner.net

Customize your pallet bar with anything that you find interesting, shape your own interior design.

via Pinterest

Photo Courtesy to Machin Chose

An entire wooden wall can be shaped with pallets to hold drinks, glasses, everything you need to keep your friends and family entertained.

via dumpaday.com

Shape a new bar with a refrigerator box, it will help you keep things cool.

Source Unknown

via woodesigner.net

Metal sheets can be introduced in a pallet bar too, use them wisely.

via woodesigner.net

The patchwork look brought forward in a simple pallet bar design.

via palletideas.info

Intricate custom pallet bars can be designed too, the project takes more time than the craft itself but the result is extraordinary, worth considering.

via jackplanwood.net

A contemporary take on the pallet bar, it looks modern, premium, and flawless thanks to the light that emphasizes it. The rustic component remains at a really small scale thanks to the wood's grain. Simple and cool.

via 1001pallets.com

Chevron patterns can be realized with wood from pallets too, sort the planks by color and create a functional piece of art.

via discardeddevelopment.blogspot.com

The simplest design may bring forward the greatest memories.

via imgur.com

Indoors the wood bar ought to be treated a tad different, more time should go into its sanding and finish to ensure a high quality surface.

Source Unknown

A high quality resin can finish your counter top beautifully. Here the rustic component is sustained by a partially rusted sheet of metal.

via 1001pallets.com

Pallet bars can be painted too and with white stark you can bring forward and airy look, give pallets a chance regardless of your design line.

via stevedowood.tumblr.com

One old fridge can become your super cool outdoor bar, fitted with a chalkboard to present the menu, an immense cool box and sufficient counter-top to serve anything, the bar above is nothing short of extraordinary.

via feelitcool.com

Simple, swift, graphic.

Source Unknown

Well established businesses can use the pallet bar too, simply design it and execute it with greater care if the regulations require it.

via 1001pallets.com

via etsy.com

A pallet bar can function as a dinning table if need be.

via palletprojectspro.tumblr.com

via rusticdecorhq.com

Great attention to details shaped the pallet bar above, notice how the nail caps create a pattern in this design.

via 1001pallets.com

Light builds even further on the wood's coziness and warmth, use it!

Source Unknown

This pallet pit looks like a great place to be, a super cool corner to enjoy a drink with friends and family .

via 1001pallets.com

The color here complements the exquisite counter top, splendid combination with a space-efficient footprint.

via etsy.com

The rustic component of wood can be enhanced through different means, use them if this is what you are aiming for.

via imgur.com

A full bar can be created with wooden pallets, shape it and underline it with light.

via julietmckeephotography.co.uk

The smallest bar can gather smiles, laughter and joy, materialize it.

via afwonline.com

Luck served with beer in a rustic bar, nothing cooler for your man-cave.

via etsy.com

Bamboo on the edges can really highlight the "tiki bar" title. A really beautiful and exotic lemonade stand for your little one.

via palletsdesigns.com

Blue paired with wood might not be everyone's cup of tea yet the design above looks remarkable and the color of the LEDs involved is surely controlled by a remote behind the bar.

via 101palletideas

The grill bar with pallets can take many shapes yet the graphic design above is one of the simplest methods you can adapt, highly rewardful craft.

Source Unknown

A pallet garden bar can serve as a potting station providing you with the counter-space and shelving that you need in your garden operations.

via recycled-things.com

A pallet's structure is quite sturdy making it easy to use as it is in bar projects. Here the counter has been beautifully finished thus greatly enhancing the quality of the end item.

via palletprojectspro.tumblr.com

In tiki bars too color should be nestled, use it to share a colorful, joyful state with your friends.

Source Unknown

via recycled-things.com

via roselypignataro.com.br

via imgur.com

The vertical plane in pallet bars can be used to nestle various type of art, messages or color plays.

via palletprojectspro.tumblr.com

Source Unknown

Pallet carts can help you a great deal, rolling around for all the right reasons, sharing drinks and joy.

via drewnolot.pl

Last but not least pallet bar in our collection showcases an extraordinary balance using all kinds of wood and typography to its advantage.

via Pinterest

The pallets are epic. Pallets are brilliantly used even to shape epic DIY chicken coops and a pallet bar is a bargain honestly, one that you actually tailor for the perfect fit.

Your next celebration might require a bar, What diy project do you use to obtain it?

We would love to hear your thoughts in the comment section below!

Related Articles

World’s Best 111 Pallet Garden Ideas to Collect

39 Spectacular Tree Logs Ideas for Cozy Households

43 Insanely Cool Basement Bar Ideas for Your Home

Top 20 Pallet Christmas Tree Designs To Pursue

27 Beautiful DIY Bathroom Pallet Projects For a Rustic Feel

Top 62 Recycled Pallet Bed Frames – DIY Pallet Collection

26 Highly Ingenious Cost Efficient Pallet DIY Projects For Kids

20 Pallet Projects You Ought To Try This Summer

25 Beautiful Cheap Pallet DIY Storage Projects to Realize With Ease

27 Ingeniously Beautiful DIY Pallet Bed Designs To Materialize Right Now

39 Insanely Smart and Creative DIY Outdoor Pallet Furniture Designs To Start

43 Super Cool Bar Top Ideas to Realize

Piece by piece, branch by branch, and twig by twig the wood texture dominates the entire world through an extraordinary allure, coziness, and warmth. Driftwood in particular is something different, something on which water has done its deed, it purified and smoothed the superb texture, slowly shaping it into an organic final form that can really highlight the world originally in your decor. Cast a glance at the gallery showcased below and pick your favorite craft, These DIY driftwood vintage decorations can serve as a starting point in your DIY endeavors but keep in mind that your solution should exude authenticity, being tailored to your own design line and furniture setup.

DIY Driftwood Decorations

#4 Pieces of Driftwood Twigs Materialized Into Heart-Shaped Decoration

via www.greenbrideguide.com

#5 Small Piece of a Wood Pillar Holding a Tiny Picture Frame

via www.casatreschic.blogspot.com

#6 Rustic Wood Shim Vase

via www.lovegrowswild.com

#7 Wooden Plank Transformed Into Coat Hanger

via www.digsdigs.com

#8 Driftwood Holding Beautiful Simple White Candle

via www.candlemaking.craftgossip.com

#9 Mirror Frame From Driftwood Plank in Scandinavian Interior Design

via www.novateasesora.com

#10 Tree Branches Doubling as Wall Art

via www.shelterness.com

#11 Wooden Planks Used as Organizers In Rustic Scandinavian Design

via www.funmag.org

#12 Driftwood Shelves In Shabby Chic Decor

via www.diy-enthusiasts.com

#13 Driftwood Welcoming Guests

via www.thespacebetweenblog.net

#14 Wooden Branches Holding Vintage Frames

via www.morningcreativity.com

#15 Driftwood Picture Frame

via www.azgathering.com

#16 Branches Transformed Into Candle Holders

via www.noimpactbride.com

#17 Driftwood Nestling Votive Candles

via www.itsoverflowing.com

#18 Driftwood Piece Holding Small Vases

via www.onewed.com

#19 Mirror Beautified By Driftwood Twigs

via www.alamodemaven.com

#20 Driftwood Centerpiece Holding Votive Candles

via www.digsdigs.com

#21 Driftwood Plank Transformed Into Bathroom Towel Hanger

via www.hestir.cafemom.com

#21 Tubes Inserted Into Driftwood Centerpiece Holding Tiny Flowers

via www.studentz.squidoo.com

#22 Small Driftwood Twigs Table Decorations

via www.diy-enthusiasts.com

#23 Driftwood Wall Decor

via www.blog.freepeople.com

#24 Exterior Candle Chandelier in Driftwood With Succulents

via www.greenweddingshoes.com

#25 Salvage Wood Wall Art Holding Brushes and Flowers

via www.etsy.com

#26 Wooden Branch Transformed Into Accessory Organizer

via www.lovelyindeed.com

#27 Elegant Twig Centerpiece Holding Flowers

via www.diy-enthusiasts.com

#28 Twigs Empowering Mirror

via www.recyclart.org

#29 Votive Candles In Driftwood Branch

via www.homestyle.co.nz

#30 Driftwood Plank Coat-hanger

via www.nauticalcottageblog.com

#31 Twigs Framing Small Seashell Into Marine-Themed Wall Art

via www.mydesiredhome.com

#32 Wall Art From Driftwood Holding Candles

via www.depositosantamariah.blogspot.com

#33 Driftwood Star Welcoming Guests

via www.diynetwork.com

#34 Driftwood Piece Organizing Jewelry

via www.homedit.com

Driftwood can be a real resource as the gallery above has beautifully showcased. In just a matter of minutes, an item purified by water can become an extraordinary centerpiece in your interior design line. We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below on these DIY driftwood vintage decorations.

There is nothing more classic than simple colors like black and white as far as bathroom décor ideas go.

Granted, there are many more modern colors and abstract design patterns that people tend to opt for. However, when used in the right way, even black and white décor can be elegant and very royal. Plus, it is essential to understand how these colors should be used to create the best possible look.

That being said, to remove the predisposition that black and white is dull, we have a few décor ideas for you to peruse. If you have been looking for ways to upgrade the look of the bathroom, this is the guide to fall back on.

Now, without further ado, let’s jump right to the good part!

Black And White Bathroom Inspiration Ideas

One of the best things about the black-and-white color combination is that it can be used to make a statement in a suitable manner. Additionally, it is possible to completely change the mood of the room - from light and airy to moody and regal.

The best part about this color is that finding black and white tiles for the bathroom is easy. This way, you can fully explore all the different designs without spending too much time hunting for the materials.

Let’s look at some of the popular designs for black and white bathrooms that people are giving a shot.

1. A Modern Outlook

While black and white have always been considered a traditional color scheme, who says the designs have to be traditional? If you are looking to create a modern design in the bathroom, why not steer clear of the traditional all-white bathroom designs? Instead, look at all-black bathrooms with minimal white elements.

Another widespread contemporary design we have taken note of is using the right fixtures. Even if you have a white interior, using the right kind of fixtures (and in darker colors) always seems to do the trick. Additionally, you can accentuate the look of the room by adding accent walls or a glass shower door instead of shower curtains.

2. Minimalistic Scandinavian Styles

If you are not too big on the designs and do not want a dark-looking bathroom, we suggest looking into Scandinavian designs. Usually, these types of designs are based on the practicality of the bathroom and are simple. This is why a lot of white is used in the forefront, like on the walls, cabinets, and floors.

However, you can make this a bit more modern or add a dramatic touch with black elements. We have seen plenty of homeowners add a black frame around the mirror, or install black fixtures to make it look less monotonous. Furthermore, the sudden splash of darker colors adds a bit of depth to the room without stripping it from its functionality.

We are also big fans of adding wooden elements when it comes to minimalistic designs. If there is a white bathtub in the bathroom, why not pair it with black floor tiles and a wooden table next to it. Plus, even wooden countertops look great and tie in well with the minimalistic interior design.

3. Add A Bit Of Gold

One of the colors that go really well with white and black is gold. Hence, many homeowners are adding gold accents to the bathrooms to create a more luxe look.

Additionally, we feel it is a great idea to incorporate in smaller spaces as it gives a warmer look to the room. The only thing you need to remember is to add it in moderation to maintain a balance.

Some of the best examples we can offer are adding golden fixtures or wall tiles with minimal gold patterns. Many people also like to have drawer pulls and towel holders in gold, especially against a white background for contrast.

But if the idea is to have a very prominent golden feature, there is nothing better than a gold accent wall.

4. Traditional Designs

We know that not everyone is looking to create something out of the box. Considering that black and white as a combination is a classic, there is a lot that can be done from a traditional standpoint as well. Moreover, it is not always easy to create something luxe or modern if there is not enough space in the bathroom.

This is why we have made it a point to incorporate this point into our list. We feel the best way to utilize both these colors is to have an elegantly designed black floor in combination with a white wall. Additionally, you can add a mix of black and white fixtures to create the right balance of colors.

A design of this sort will allow you to maintain that traditional look and still keep the bathroom looking big and bright.

5. Luxe Bathroom Ideas

For the people who love spending time in the bathroom, we understand the need for proper aesthetics. The right bathroom interior can change anyone’s mood, and besides, who wouldn’t want a luxurious bathroom in the house? Hence, adding the right elements along with a balance of both colors is essential.

We suggest using black marble, white subway tiles, and plenty of decor items to make the bathroom look more luxe. Some of the commonly used elements are lamps, flowerpots, and wall fixtures. What’s more, if budget and space permit, many homeowners like to add a freestanding tub, chandeliers, or furniture in the bathroom to give it a more regal look.

Alternatively, you can opt for an all-white interior with black granite elements like countertops for a bit of contrast. The idea is to keep a balanced black-and-white theme with additional features to tie in the luxurious feel.

6. Transforming The Master Bathroom

When it comes to the master bathroom, everyone likes to transform it into the best possible space. This is especially the case when the bedroom has an excellent look, so the bathroom needs to match up. Usually, homeowners who like the black-and-white combination tend to keep it simple, but not this time.

If you are struggling with décor ideas, we suggest going with something bold. One of the most popular design ideas is mosaic tiles. Now, the size of the patterns depends on the size of the bathroom.

The rule of thumb indicates that a bigger bathroom space requires bigger mosaic tiles. Plus, these floor tiles look exceptionally great with a plain wall of the opposite color.

So if the floor is black, opt for a white tile for the walls in a less obvious design. Alternatively, white floor tiles look amazing with black mosaic walls but the choice is yours.

7. Making The Most Of A Small Bathroom

Quite a few homeowners believe that small bathrooms are difficult to style since there is a lack of space. But, that is far from the truth. We believe that the best way to create a stylish bathroom is by using just two colors. Furthermore, the fewer colors used, the cleaner the interior looks.

In fact, you can even create themes in a tiny bathroom as very little is needed to get it done. Some of the popular themes people tend to go with are vintage, floral, and even industrial.

Additionally, you can opt for different patterns when it comes to floor and wall tiles while remaining in the black-and-white color scheme. The main idea is to create a simple, monochrome layout in the bathroom by balancing out the colors.

For that purpose, if you are using a black tile for the walls and the floor, make sure that the tub, mirror, sink, and every other aspect are white. This will allow all the elements in the bathroom to pop out more.

8. Add A Focal Point

One of our personal favorite bathroom décor ideas is adding some sort of focal point in the room. Freestanding tubs are the usual go-to idea when it comes to drawing attention, but there are tons of other ways to achieve the same result. If your bathroom is predominantly dark, then we suggest adding a white vessel sink.

However, if you are keen on using a tub, there are several things you can do. If there is space, why not get a European-style freestanding tub that can sit in the center of the room? Also, if the bathroom is primarily white, you can create a dark focal point by having black cabinet doors and fixtures.

9. Tiled Black And White Bathrooms

We have mentioned using tiles in the bathroom time and again but let’s focus a bit more on subway tiles or traditional square tiles. While most bathrooms come with tiles like these, those can often be too traditional and boring. Hence, take a look at what the industry has to offer, as there is so much versatility in tile designs these days.

One of our favorites is chevron pattern tiles, as those give the bathroom a more appealing look than some traditional tiles. On the other hand, simple plain black or white tiles give the bathroom a neutral backdrop allowing you to experiment with the rest of the look.

We particularly like the use of mosaic tiles, or tiles with any geometric pattern, since it can offer a timeless appeal without spending too much money.

10. Using Lights

When it comes to having dark bathrooms, lighting is key. Since many people tend to use the bathroom as powder rooms as well, it is necessary to have appropriate lighting without spoiling the look of the bathroom. Hence, we suggest using skylights with dark accent walls and adding small light fixtures near any wall-mounted mirror on a black tile wall.

However, it is not just adding the light but also matching it to the room’s aesthetic. If the bathroom has a modern, moody vibe to it, then we suggest adding silver light fixtures with a metallic finish. On the other hand, if the room is bright and regal, you can choose to contrast it with dark fixtures or go for gold!

For more oversized bathrooms, adding big lamps will help utilize the space and become the highlight of the room. On the other hand, if you have to work with a small space, adding just a chandelier is a smart choice for lighting and aesthetics.

11. Black Brick Tiles in Luxurious Bathroom

Sometimes it is all about the nitty-gritty when it comes to designs, and that is what we want to explore in this idea. What most people do is they opt for single-color tiles which provide a uniform look. Additionally, some might even go with white tiles that have black grout. But we know that is not what you want.

This is why we urge you to try black tiles with white grout instead. Not only are they better to look at, but they can also even provide the illusion of the room being bigger when placed in the right way. Our personal favorite is the chevron pattern, as it acts as a bold backdrop for simple mirrors or a white countertop.

12. Creating A Split

One very interesting design we once came across was a split between the colors in the bathroom. Think “his and hers” but in the form of black and white, where each color takes a half. Now, this is something that can be done on the walls as well as the floor and is ideal for smaller bathrooms that have less space to experiment.

So, the next time you are looking at potential designs, why not create a diagonal split on the wall between white and black tiles. If the bathroom is big enough, you can do it on the wall behind the sink to create that ideal his and hers split.

13. Adding A Border

The next design we were quite intrigued about had to do with borders. Now, there are a lot of people who do not want to cover the bathroom with tiles; after all, they can be difficult to clean. But, they still want to use tiles. And so, for them, we suggest creating a border on the side walls or around any large window.

The idea is to use subway tiles, preferably in both black and white, to create a toothed edge. However, this will only work in contract with the rest of the room. So, if the bathroom is dark, make sure to use bright white tiles and vice-versa for white walls.

14. Pattern-Heavy Walls

Who said patterns only have to be in bold colors? Thanks to the number of options on the market, creating a bold statement with just black and white designs is easy. If you like having patterns on the wall, why not look at some geometric or floral prints? These are excellent when the idea is to get more done with less effort.

We also suggest looking at more abstract designs if you really want the bathroom wall to stand out. Additionally, in terms of a color scheme, it is always best to have a bit of a contrast from the floor tile. We found lighter geometric patterns on the walls paired with a black tile floor to be more appealing than when the colors were reversed.

15. Powder Room Ideas

Now that we are done with bathroom ideas, let’s move on to something similar: powder rooms. These are not too different from bathrooms but are more for guests and other family members. Also known as a half bath, a powder room usually has just a sink and a toilet with no space for a shower.

If you are the kind of person who has lavish-looking bathrooms, it would be unfair if the powder room does not follow suit. After all, that is what the guests are going to be using the most. The only issue is a powder room does not have as much space as a regular bathroom, and so the design options are limited.

However, if you are smart about it, a well-designed black-and-white powder room can make the space look much larger. To make this a possibility, we suggest using black tiles in stone for the walls. Alternatively, you can have a bright white powder room with black marble and granite countertops. And, as mentioned earlier, dark rooms mean ample lighting fixtures.

Tile Designs For The Bathroom

With the advancements in the interior design industry, there is so much versatility in terms of tile designs too. Whether you are looking for something that is more traditional or eye-catching, there is an ideal tile design for everyone. Take a look at some of these patterns if you’re still unsure:

A. Herringbone

The Herringbone pattern is one of the most common ones done with a subway tile. Resembling the skeleton of the herring fish, this pattern has V-shaped tiles angled at 45 degrees. Since it is a classic, it is found in plenty of commercial spaces and hotels.

B. Brick

If you are looking to make the room look wider, we suggest going with a brick pattern. The tiles are placed like bricks and hence aren’t precisely one on top of the other. Instead, they are a bit offset which is why any room with this pattern looks much bigger.

C. Stacked

This one is for people who love traditional designs and clean lines. The stacked pattern in tiles is when one tile is placed directly on top of the other. Furthermore, it is a clean look that many homeowners opt for when tiling walls. These can either be placed in a grid-like style or horizontally, depending on preference.

D. Hopscotch

A very popular floor pattern is the hopscotch pattern, where smaller tiles are placed in the corner of larger tiles to mimic the image of a spinning wheel. While it is not very common with black and white tiles, this can be seen on neutral-colored ceramic or marble tiles.

Additionally, the hopscotch pattern is a random pattern for tiles, and if you are looking to use your creativity, random tile patterns are the best. Some of the best random patterns have one color, say white, as the base with a beautiful black tile placed randomly in various shapes.

E. Versailles

While this one is a bit difficult to do by yourself, the pattern is a classic. The Versailles tile pattern is made when different sizes of square and rectangular tiles are placed together. Additionally, this is the ideal pattern to follow in a black-and-white theme and looks great on shower walls.

F. Geometric

We have already mentioned how great a geometric pattern is when creating something modern. If your powder room or shower walls need a makeover, adding geometric tiles is the answer. Not only can they be done in black and white but many other colors too.

G. Chevron

Finally, we have the chevron pattern, which is also a favorite. Similar to the herringbone pattern, this one is basically V-shaped tiles, one on top of the other. This zig-zag pattern can be considered cleaner than the herringbone and is ideal for black and white bathrooms.

To Sum It Up

On that note, we finally come to the end of our guide on black-and-white bathroom ideas. We hope that we were able to help as you look for more inspiration and daily tips.

Remember, black and white bathrooms don’t always have to be traditional or super eccentric. Find a middle ground and let your personality come through.

We will be back soon with more advice and décor ideas. Until then, keep exploring and stay creative!

13 Best Paints for Bathroom Ceilings

19 Unexpected Bathroom Artwork That Will Take You Aback

19 Double Vanity Bathrooms That Will Make Your Lives Easier

20 Smart Bathroom Storage Ideas That Will Impress You

21 Awesomely Unexpected Christmas Bathroom Decorations To Realize

66 Epic Wood in Bathroom Design Ideas to Realize

99 Super Cool Shower Curtains to Transform Your Bathroom Today

111 World's Best Bathroom Color Schemes For Your Home

Analogous Color Schemes | All You Need To Know

A ducted air conditioning system comes with a high price tag and installation costs, which can range from $3000 to $10,000 in total. However, the overall cost of one depends on factors like buying price, installation, running cost, usage, and product specifications.

Ducted air conditioning has the benefit of cooling multiple rooms through vents or ‘ducts,’ unlike conventional air conditioners. Besides circulating cool air throughout the house, some ducted air conditioning systems have ‘zones,’ meaning you can set different rooms to different temperatures.

And to help you understand them better, I will walk you through how ducted systems work and how much they can cost. Let’s dive in!

Factors Affecting Ducted Air Conditioning Costs

Before you install ducted air conditioning, there are several factors you need to consider to get a better insight into the potential overall expenditure–short and long-term. Even professional ducted air conditioning installation services look into these facts before giving you a quote.

1. Property Size And Layout

Considering the layout and size of the room is very important to find the right spot for installation. This will also help you determine the right size and wattage required, which will play a crucial role in influencing the overall cost of installing the ducted AC.

For example, if you want to add central heating or cooling to an apartment or single-story home with three to four rooms, you will likely require a 7-10 kilo-watt system, costing $5,000- $7,000.

Likewise, if you have a two-story house and require ducted air conditioning units on both floors, you will require a 14-16 kilo-watt system with an expenditure ranging from $7,000 to $9000. However, it is important to note that if the central air conditioning is installed below the floor or above the roof space, there may be an additional expenditure of $500-$1,000.

2. Location Of Your House

Since the U.S. has different types of climates and weather conditions, several factors may lead to the corrosion of your air conditioner. If you live on the coast or near the sea, there is a high chance that salt water might corrode the condenser, the external split systems, or even your entire air conditioning unit. This usually leads to blocked airflow and higher energy consumption, leading to high electricity prices.

However, some reliable brands like Daikin or Fujitsu have an anti-corrosive outer coating and stainless steel mounting for protection and efficient energy use.

3. Control Features

It is no surprise that the ducted air conditioning cost will be higher if there are more features. And modern air conditioning systems have more efficient features, especially when it comes to control and operation, making them easy to use yet pricier. Here are the most common types of control features found in ducted air conditioners:

Standard Control- It has the most basic settings (on/off and timer) required for everyday operation
Zoned Control- This is an additional feature that lets you control the temperature in different, individual units or ‘zones’ for greater energy efficiency
E-Zone Control- The E-zone controller app helps manage the temperature in your home all year round from your phone screen. You can also restrict the airflow to empty rooms, thereby reducing your energy bills.
Amazon Alexa or Google Assistant- Most WiFi-enabled ducted air conditioning units are compatible with Alexa or Google Assistant, which will help you set the temperature from anywhere.
Voice Activation feature- a ducted air con system with its own smart app can have the voice activation option, which you can use to control the air flow or temperature.

4. Brand

Some brands cost more than others; however, you usually pay for better quality and energy efficiency in these cases. You can also find ducted air conditioning systems at low prices, but they might end up costing more in the long run.

Quality issues and warranty are the main reasons why it is always better to go for branded companies with high ratings, such as Daikin, Mitsubishi, Samsung, etc. However, I recommend talking to your ducted air conditioner installation professionals to help decide which brand will suit your needs.

5. Installation And Maintenance

The installation cost is one of the major contributors to the overall expenditure required for heating, ventilation, and air conditioning. If your unit is difficult to install, you’ll likely spend more on installation, so it is better to go for an easy installation split system.

Moreover, if your ducted aircon system has easy-to-clean, removable air ducts, you can maintain the unit at home without hiring professionals. From my experience, hiring air conditioner cleaners can be quite expensive, especially for ducted systems with a larger surface area to clean.

How Much Does Ducted Air Conditioning Installation Cost?

Installing ducted air conditioning is more expensive compared to other types of air conditioning systems. To give you a better idea, I’d say it typically costs 20-30% more than installing a split system or evaporative AC units.

For instance, covering an average one-story home with three or four bedrooms will cost $5000-$7000 in total. And if you have multiple stories, the overall installation cost will be substantially higher, so you must be prepared for a bill ranging from $7,000-$18,000.

Tip

If you live in an apartment with only one or two rooms, you should consider going for mini splits or other cooling systems to reduce installation and running costs.

The exact price you pay to professional suppliers may vary depending on a few factors such as property size, number of floors, electrical outlets, building insulation, construction types, etc. Thus, these price approximations are general, and only professional suppliers or air conditioning experts can give you the right quotes to help you understand and compare prices.

On that note, here are some of the factors that will influence the installation costs:

1. Zoning Systems

Even though categorizing the ducted air conditioning into different systems may seem to be unreasonably adding to your costs, it can actually save you money in the long run. It is an energy-efficient way to install your ducted air conditioning since you won’t need to have the entire ducted system on at all times.

2. Location

Professional installers usually charge more if they have to commute to places that are harder to reach and get transport. So, you might need to pay a higher-than-average installation fee.

3. Roof Size

For installing the ducts for the air-con system, the installers need to access the roof; however, it might be quite challenging if you have less roof space. If you have a small roof, chances are that they might install or adjust the roof trusses, further adding to the bill.

4. Distance Between Units

The distance between the outdoor and indoor air conditioning units can largely determine the installation cost. If the distance between the two is less, the technicians will require fewer materials for installation, thereby lowering the total cost.

Tip

Always look for multiple installation quotes from different installation services to be aware of the price range you’re dealing with. If there is a huge difference between them, ask them about the materials they’re providing for the ductwork.

Ducted Air Conditioning- Running Costs

It is quite difficult to come up with a decisive amount regarding the running costs of a ducted air conditioning system. These costs will largely depend on how many zones you regularly operate since your electricity and maintenance bills are directly proportional to this factor.

However, most air conditioning units nowadays have inverter technology, which is extremely energy efficient. Unlike their non-inverter predecessors, these air conditioning systems promptly go into the energy-saving mode or simply turn themselves off when it reaches the ideal temperature. This has further closed the enormous expenditure gap between ducted ACs and other cooling systems.

On average, ducted air conditioning costs a household around $170 to $350 per year, which is quite affordable, especially if you have a large house. However, it can vary depending on the electricity provider and energy taxes, which you can figure out by asking an electrician for a site visit. If you want to save more energy, there are plenty of energy-efficient ways, such as inverter compressors, temperature timers, insulation, etc.

Reasons To Choose Ducted Air Conditioning

Even though ducted air conditioning costs higher, there are several reasons why they might be more efficient in the long run:

Firstly, a ducted air con can serve as a central air system providing cooling, heating, and ventilation to larger homes with different layouts, making it quite cost-effective. They can even cool or heat hard-to-reach corners with superior airflow and circulation, unlike split systems that limit themselves to specific zones. These are great air conditioning solutions, as they won’t require multiple compressors and wall units, which can ultimately increase the upfront costs. So, even if you’re paying higher installation costs, you’re guaranteed full home coverage.

Secondly, many interior designers prefer hidden air conditioning units to achieve a cleaner, minimalist aesthetic. However, other systems like mini splits, window units, etc., cannot be completely hidden since their indoor component needs to be mounted on full display to produce cool or warm air.

Thirdly, most ducted AC air conditioning systems today come with a ducted reverse cycle, meaning it can produce both hot and cool air in the same capacity. So, going for a ducted AC unit is the best way to avoid purchasing a separate gas heating system. It is a versatile and one-time investment for homeowners who want their air conditioning to do it all through the different seasons.

Final Thoughts

Besides these variable factors, you must consider the future repair costs before buying a ducted air conditioning system. However, a ducted unit is appropriate if you have more rooms and require maximum output for heating and cooling.

Another thing I should mention is that though choosing the lowest installation quote may seem like the right thing to do, don’t forget to look into the details and check whether you’re getting durable and quality materials. And as a thumb rule, always ask for ductwork that doesn’t overheat or isn’t prone to grease so as to reduce the need for frequent maintenance services.

On that note, I’ll be signing off for now. Stick around for more such guides!

We all need a wall clock in our homes, be it as a statement piece or for knowing the time.

In this digitized era, we rely on digital technology for very much everything. Be it calling someone, performing daily chores, and even knowing what time it is. However, we all want a traditional wall clock not only for keeping accurate time but also to add a focal point to the room.

Besides, some wall clocks display helpful information like the day of the week or temperature, while others add stylish and classy design elements to your home.

And you’ve thought of purchasing a wall clock, you have some decisions to make. Do you need a digital or an analog clock face? And do you need additional features or will a simple and classy-looking watch be adequate?

In this review-based guide, we’ll review the 10 best wall clocks out there and provide a detailed buyer’s guide to help you make a viable decision.

So, without further ado, let's dig in!

Best Wall Clocks

1. Bernhard Black Wall Clock - Best for Versatile Décor

Bernhard Products is a well-known analog clock manufacturer and is committed to delivering quality pieces for its consumers. Likewise, this black wall clock is great for any work office, home, or classroom. Its classic frame is sure to align with any room decor, and with 1-year protection, you can get one with complete confidence.

Bernhard Products Black Wall Clock Silent Non Ticking 10...

10 Inch clock. Large black bold numbers against white face...
Silent non-ticking mechanism with sweeping movement. enjoy a...

Why Did We Like It?

This classy-looking Bernhard wall clock is sure to grab everyone’s attention. As mentioned, you can keep it anywhere in your room, and it will merge in with the rest of the decor. The black-colored minute and hour hands, the red-colored seconds hand, and the large numbers on the white dial make it easier for anyone to read the clock from a distance.

With a dimension of 10.25 x 10.25 x 1.75 inches and weighing 8 pounds, it's very lightweight, portable, and easy to hang. It’s made of sturdy plastic and a glass lens, which keeps dust away from the dial and is easier to clean.

Interestingly, thanks to its sweeping movement, this battery-operated clock doesn’t make a disturbing ticking sound. So, you can sleep and relax in silence. Plus, their precise Quartz movements always tell you the right time.

What Could've Been Better?

The only setback with the product is that it doesn’t come with AA batteries to operate and show accurate time. But these batteries can be purchased from any local retail store, so that wouldn’t be a significant problem per se..

Pros

Easy to hang
Runs silently
Clear display
Lightweight

Cons

Doesn’t come with a AA battery

Design: Classic | Material: Plastic Frame/ Glass cover | Dimensions: 10"W x 10"H | Weight: 0.6 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock, Lightweight

2. Jomparis Wall Clock - Best for Modern Spaces

The 12-inch non-ticking wall clock by Jomparis is considered one of the best wall clocks on the market. Its simple and modern design is suitable for any space, be it a kitchen, bedroom, office, or any other room. And it guarantees to display time accurately and maintain a quiet environment.

jomparis Wall Clock 12 Inch Non-Ticking Silent Battery...

✅ **Truly Silent Operation** – Advanced quartz movement...
✅ **Easy-to-Read Large Numbers** – Bold 3D white...

Why Did We Like It?

Firstly, this modern clock can be a quality addition to your space, thanks to its looks as well as the features it presents. Similar to the Bernhard wall clock, the precise quartz movement ensures no-ticking sound and accurate time. So, you can concentrate on your tasks without getting irritated.

Design and quality are considered absolutely important for a wall clock, and this unit doesn’t disappoint whatsoever. It boasts a stylish modern cement gray dial and 3D white numbers, making for an easy time-viewing experience. Plus, the frame is made of lightweight and sturdy ABS plastic, for optimum durability and longevity.

Moreover, its back slot design includes a hook, so you can hang it anywhere without dropping a sweat. Other than that, these analog clocks are available in several colors for you to select from. And you only need only one AA battery to run this piece for a whole year.

What Could've Been Better?

The white-colored numbers might blend with the dial of the silver clock, making it a bit difficult to read time in poor lighting. It would’ve been better to maintain a contrasting color for the numbers. But aside from this minor inconvenience, we didn’t find any other substantial limitation.

Pros

Completely silent
Sturdy and lightweight
Easy to hang
Looks great

Cons

Time-viewing might be difficult in poor lighting for silver ones

Design: Modern | Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 12"W x 1.77"H | Weight: 1.32 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock

3. Foxtop Wall Clock - Best for Humid Conditions

The Foxtop FT-12JMSRG1 is an elegant-looking analog, battery-powered wall clock that aligns perfectly with your space, irrespective of its decor. It’s easy to install and use with an easily readable face. And it runs smoothly in both dry and wet conditions, so you can get your hands on a high-quality clock.

Foxtop Modern Wall Clock 12 Inch Non-Ticking Silent Battery...

Upgraded Movement: Compatible with alkaline battery, with a...
Elegant Design: Rose gold color frame makes it the perfect...

Why Did We Like It?

If you wish to add a glamorous accent to your interior decor, this metallic analog clock by Foxtop is an ideal choice. Like our previous models, this wall clock also comes with a precise quartz sweep movement, guaranteeing accurate time display.

In terms of design, the sleek clock, with its silver, gold, and rose gold shades with large numbers, makes it easy to read. The frame is made of durable plastic, making the clock lightweight and long-lasting. Also, the clock background is made of solid plastic, keeping it dry in humid conditions.

Apart from that, it features a front glass cover that makes for convenient viewing while keeping dust away from the dial. And its easy-to-see hands and large numbers ensure easy readability. Lastly, the unit comes with a hook and a back slot for easy installation.

What Could've Been Better?

This unit makes a ticking sound which can be a bit disturbing if the room is extremely quiet, although you might not hear anything in a busy or noisy space. So, it can be a minor setback for some customers who prefer a silent room environment.

Pros

Easy to read
Displays accurate time
Simple installation
Plastic background keeps the clock dry

Cons

Makes ticking sound

Design: Elegant | Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 11.81"W x 1.57"H | Weight: 1.32 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock, Non-Ticking

4. Yoobure Wall Clock - Best for Classic Design

Yoobure, with a “high precision” principle for their product design, has developed this precise analog wall clock. With an easy-to-read and traditional clock face, silent dial movement, and sturdy frame, it becomes the perfect choice for users looking for a high-quality unit for their homes. Apart from that, its elegant design adds an aesthetic look to your interior decor.

Yoobure 10 Inch Silent Quartz Decorative Wall Clock...

Non-ticking Wall Clock: Built-in quiet sweep...
Concise Style: Special and elegant design with classic black...

Why Did We Like It?

This unit features everything one wishes for in a wall clock. To start with, its built-in sweep movement ensures it doesn’t create a ticking sound, thereby establishing a totally silent working or sleeping environment. It’s a standard feature you’ll witness with most products on our list.

Besides telling accurate time, it boasts a classic style, which suits most interior decor. Also, its black-colored numerals are huge and align perfectly with its background design, making it easier to read the time. So, you can install it anywhere you need it most.

The 10-inch clock weighs 11.6 ounces, making it a lightweight option. Furthermore, the back slot and hook allow you to hang it quickly and complete your daily tasks on time.

What Could've Been Better?

The primary issue that we faced after using the unit for some time was that it started lagging after a few months and required a reset. This is primarily because of the faulty battery holder design, twitch doesn’t allow the battery to last long.

Pros

Easily readable
Lightweight
Hassle-free installation
Doesn’t make any ticking noises

Cons

It might lag after a few months

Design: Classic | Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 10"W x 10"H | Weight: 0.62 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock

5. Hylanda Wall Clock - Best for Vintage Theme

Halfway through the list, we have a vintage-looking wall clock by Hylanda. Its elegant and classy design adds up beauty to your interior decor. What’s more, its sturdy build, superior silent hand movement, easy readability, and other user-friendly features make it a worthy option for almost any space.

HYLANDA Wall Clock - 12 Inch Vintage Battery Operated -...

🕗【SUPERIOR SILENT MOVEMENT】 - HYLANDA silent non...
🕗【SOLID & LIGHTED & STAIN-RESISTANT】 - The Sturdy...

Why Did We Like It?

There are several things that we love about this product- it’s a 12-inch round-shaped clock with a pale yellow dial face and a brown frame. Anyone who’s a fan of mid-century design and loves adding vintage-themed items in their living room will love the look on offer.

Similar to previous models, this unit also has a superior sweeping movement that ensures true silence, leaving you undisturbed. At the same time, its precise movements ensure accurate time display. Furthermore, its large numbers and HD glass lens make it easy to read and repel the dust falling on it.

Moving on, this unit is powered by one AA battery, which means operating it won’t make you scratch your head. And lastly, it comes with a 1-year warranty, where the company will replace any physically damaged parts resulting from manufacturing defects.

What Could've Been Better?

The issue we encountered with this product was its small back hole which made the overall installation process somewhat problematic. It took us an hour to set it up, as the hole wasn’t visible from the side.

Pros

Vintage looking
Non-ticking clock
Clear display for easy reading
1-year warranty

Cons

Can be difficult to install

Design: Vintage | Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 12"W x 7"H | Weight: 1.29 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock

6. Hippih Wall Clock

Up next, we bring you a classic timepiece by Hippih that has a silent mechanism and an easy-to-read dial. With this clock, not only will you be able to add aesthetics to the living room, but you can also ensure to always stay on time. And being lightweight, you can easily hang it anywhere.

HIPPIH Clock Black Wall Clock Silent Non Ticking Quality...

Easy to Read: The large black numbers of this 10-inch wall...
Easy to Use: 1 AA ordinary Carbon Zinc battery(not...

Why Did We Like It?

To begin with, this Hippih wall clock boasts a classy and elegant look with its round shape and black border frame. Hence, it makes for a perfect gifting option for your loved ones on any special occasion.

Its hands are made of aluminum, which further adds to its classy look. Aside from that, the bold black numbers on the white dial face make it easy to read.

As with most clocks on our list, it features a silent quartz movement. Hence, it doesn’t make any ticking sound and shows precise time so that you won’t get late anywhere.

Furthermore, the frame weighs a mere 1.5 pounds, meaning portability won’t be an issue. And last but not least, the package comes with a simple mounting kit that aids the installation process.

What Could've Been Better?

Our primary disappointment with the unit is its construction. The clock body is made of very lightweight plastic, which might appear flimsy to your hands. So, we didn’t find the price justified according to the construction and material being used.

Pros

Silent movement
Classy looking
Accurate time display
Easy to hang

Cons

Construction is not up to the mark

Design: Classy | Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 19.69"W x 1.97"H | Weight: 0.70 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock

7. Stonebriar Wall Clock

Stonebriar has this gorgeous vintage wall clock that brings an aesthetic look to your living room, and anyone can hang this clock without breaking a sweat. It’s battery-operated and can even be a perfect gift for elderly people on their special occasions.

Stonebriar Vintage Coastal Worn Blue 14 Inch Round Battery...

This unique clock measures 14" in diameter and is the...
Rustic clock features a vintage worn blue and white clock...

Why Did We Like It?

This Stonebriar wall clock measures 13.98 x 13.98 x 1.1 inches and weighs 1.92 pounds, making it a lightweight model and perfect for any room. And it comes with a keyhole hanger making it easy to hang on any wall.

Its design makes it a standout amongst other products on our list. Featuring a vintage worn blue color, a white clock face print, and lightly distressed black numbers, it gives out an antique farmhouse feel. Its unique look makes it a perfect gift for your loved ones on any special occasion, be it Christmas, birthdays, weddings, or others.

The unit is made from medium-density fibreboard, making it durable and long-lasting. Apart from that, you can just use a damp cloth to clean it, and it needs a single AA battery to run.

What Could've Been Better?

Unlike other models on our list, this wall clock produces a ticking sound, which might irritate many. Apart from that, distressed black numbers on a blue dial make reading difficult in some situations. You might have to get closer to it to read the time.

Pros

Uniquely designed wall clock
Easy to install
Made of durable material
Lightweight

Cons

Not soundless
Difficult to read time in some situations

Design: Vintage | Material: Engineered Wood | Dimensions: 14"W x 14"H | Weight: 1.76 Pounds | Featured: Cordless

8. Hippih Decorative Wall Clock

Bringing you another round-shaped wall clock by Hippih that features a concise style and large black numbers, making it easily readable, even from a distance. Its simple design makes it a suitable fit for any room, and its sturdy frame makes it last longer.

HIPPIH Black Wall Clock Silent Non Ticking Quality Quartz,...

Why Did We Like It?

Similar to its sibling product, it features a round face design with large black numbers, making it easy to read. Its elegant and unique design fits beautifully with any of your interior decors. Plus, its sturdy frame and high-quality aluminum pointer make it durable and long-lasting.

Its second-hand doesn’t make a ticking noise, ensuring a quiet and non-disturbing working environment. Apart from that, it comes with a 12-month manufacturer’s warranty so that you can purchase the unit with complete confidence. In case you are somewhat bothered by the clock, you can directly contact the company for their assistance.

The unit also includes a hook that ensures an easy installation. Plus, it needs an AA carbon battery to run, which is readily available.

What Could've Been Better?

The clock by Hippih is not as quiet as advertised by the manufacturer. It makes a murmurous sound, which some might find inappropriate. Apart from that, it started to lag after a few months, which was a critical issue with the unit.

Pros

Round face design
Sturdy and durable frame
Easily readable
Easy to install

Cons

Not as quiet as advertised
Starts to lag after a few months

Design: Concise | Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 10"W x 10"H | Weight: 0.63 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock

9. Bekith Round Classic Clock

Now that we’ve almost reached the end of our list, we present you with a classic wall clock by Bekith. It has an antique, wooden look with hands that move without ticking noise. Also, it features a practical design that allows easy installation.

Bekith 12-Inch Round Classic Clock Retro Non Ticking Quartz...

Non-ticking Mechanism: Precise quartz sweep movement...
Classic style suitable for classroom, office, living room,...

Why Did We Like It?

To start with, this wall clock is made of plastic and has a bronze frame with an off-white clock face contributing to its vintage, antique, and classic look. The unique designed clock aligns with any interior decor and any room that demands a peaceful environment. Thanks to its non-ticking mechanism, you won’t have to worry about it making any ticking sound.

It weighs only 1.05 pounds and becomes one of the most lightweight options to have it hung. Its 12-inch round dial and large black visible numbers make it easy to read.

Apart from that, coming with a wide back slot ensures that you can hang it anywhere easily. Plus, you’ll need 1 AA battery to run the clock. Make sure to change it on a periodical basis to avoid any time lag and risks of you getting late to work.

What Could've Been Better?

We found the battery slot to be a bit tight with this wall clock. So, getting the batteries in and out of it can sometimes be challenging. Apart from that, the battery holder seems to be faulty and a new battery seems to stop working after a few days of its use.

Pros

Antique look
Easily readable
Non-ticking clock
Easy to install

Cons

Faulty battery holder design

Design: Antique | Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 12"W x 12"H | Weight: 1.08 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock

10. Epy Huts Silent 10 Inch Wall Clock

This gorgeous-looking wall clock by Epy Huts is a beautiful piece to keep as a centerpiece of your living room. Made of crystal-clear glass lens, solid plastic case, and metal hands deliver the most value for money. Also, its precise quartz movement doesn’t make any ticking sound.

Epy Huts Modern Simple Wall Clock Indoor Non-Ticking Silent...

Size-This modern simple 10 inch round wall clock.
Clear View-The large numbers are clear to read and the front...

Why Did We Like It?

This classic-looking clock has some handy features that make it suitable for our list. For one, it ensures a silent non-ticking sound owing to its accurate quartz clock movement. And, it shows the accurate time at all times of the day, so you miss nothing.

In terms of design and looks, it features a graphic dial with baton hands and a minimalist straight-cut case, making it suitable for any room. And it comes with a range of dial colors to choose from.

It showcases white Arabic numerals on a black dial, making it easier to read. Apart from that, it’s operated by a single AA battery and is much easier to clean. All these features make it a perfect gift to loved ones on any occasion.

What Could've Been Better?

The major setback of this product is the material it is made of. Because it’s made of plastic, it is not considered a durable clock and can be damaged if it falls to the ground. Apart from that, the battery holder is also much smaller, and you have to struggle to fit in a battery.

Pros

Silent clock
Beautiful design
Easy to read
Easy to clean

Cons

Made of thin plastic
Battery holder is tight

Design: Classic | Material: Plastic | Dimensions: 10"W x 1.7"H | Weight: 0.9 Pounds | Featured: Silent Clock, Graphic Dial w/ Baton Hands, Minimalist Straight Cut Case

Best Wall Clocks Comparison Table

Product	Design	Material	Dimensions	Weight	Featured
Bernhard Black Wall Clock	Classic	Plastic Frame/ Glass cover	10″W x 10″H	0.6 Pounds	Silent Clock, Lightweight
Jomparis Wall Clock	Modern	Plastic	12″W x 1.77″H	1.32 Pounds	Silent Clock
Foxtop Wall Clock-	Elegant	Plastic	11.81″W x 1.57″H	1.32 Pounds	Silent Clock, Non-Ticking
Yoobure Wall Clock	Classic	Plastic	10″W x 10″H	0.62 Pounds	Silent Clock
Hylanda Wall Clock	Vintage	Plastic	12″W x 7″H	1.29 Pounds	Silent Clock
Hippih Wall Clock	Classy	Plastic	19.69″W x 1.97″H	0.70 Pounds	Silent Clock
Stonebriar Wall Clock	Vintage	Engineered Wood	14″W x 14″H	1.76 Pounds	Cordless
Hippih Decorative Wall Clock	Concise	Plastic	10″W x 10″H	0.63 Pounds	Silent Clock
Bekith Round Classic Clock	Antique	Plastic	12″W x 12″H	1.08 Pounds	Silent Clock
Epy Huts Silent 10 Inch Wall Clock	Classic	Plastic	10″W x 1.7″H	0.9 Pounds	Silent Clock, Graphic Dial w/ Baton Hands, Minimalist Straight Cut Case

Buying Guide For The Best Wall Clock

For wall clocks, it is challenging to select one from a range of options. We bring you this detailed buyer’s guide, which will help you navigate the market. This section will guide you through features you should look out for when going clock shopping. So, let’s start.

1. Analog Or Digital

First of all, it’s essential to decide which kind of clock you want, an analog or a digital one. Both need to be set up properly before you’re manually using them.

Analog clocks are traditional and typically have three hands, an hour hand, a minute hand, and a second hand. To tell the time, you need to read and interpret the clock face, divided into 12 (for 12 hours) divided into 5 (12 × 5 = 60 minutes).

On the other hand, a digital clock usually comes with a screen that displays the exact time, eliminating the need for interpretation and making it easy to read. Also, you can have an atomic clock to yourself to get an accurate time interpretation every time.

2. Ticking Or Silent

The ticking sound in clocks is mainly due to their second-hand movement. It typically applies to analog clocks. Some people might feel unbothered by the ticking sound, while others find it soothing. However, it can be irritating for some, worse when it's placed in places like a library or bedroom.

Luckily, most wall clocks on the market (many we have discussed on our list) come with silent quartz movement and eliminate the ticking sound.

3. Size

Another factor worth considering is the clock size. A wall clock is helpful only when visible from every corner of the room, and size plays an essential role in this respect.

4. Readability

Apart from its size, other factors come into play where readability and visibility are concerned. This includes:

Contrast between numbers and clock face
Numbering style of the clock (numbers or Roman numerals)
Contrast between face and hands of the clock
Material of the face cover, such that it doesn’t reflect light
Visible in dark

5. Power Source

The way a wall clock is powered is another factor to consider. Most wall clocks use AA batteries, which are easily available in local retail stores. However, some models use power chords to run. We’d suggest avoiding the latter one, as having a cord means the clock needs to be installed near a power source, which might not be accessible easily.

It’s best that clock batteries are changed frequently as weak batteries can stop the clock altogether.

6. Additional Features

Apart from traditional timekeeping, many clocks come with additional functions, especially digital clocks. These functionalities include date keeping, alarm, humidity, and temperature measurement.

7. Style

We’ve already mentioned that a clock is more than just a timepiece, they are a decorative item, and you should treat them as such. And so, when putting on your shopping glasses, pay attention to what it looks like. You have many styles to choose from, like the classical style, modern style, or vintage style.

It’s essential to consider factors like its color, design, and build material.

8. Durability

As for any products you’re purchasing, you might want them to last long. So, it's essential to pay attention to the material of the clock, the manufacturer’s warranty and online reviews posted by customers.

Do you need a wall clock?

It’s not an absolute necessity but is an excellent addition to any space.

Should you purchase an analog or digital clock?

It entirely depends on what you need in your space. They both work equally well, as long as you’re purchasing a reliable and high-quality brand.

How high should a wall clock be hung?

An optimum height for a wall clock is 57-60 inches above the ground. But, you can hang it anywhere you find comfortable and visible from other rooms.

How do you fix a wall clock?

Based on what’s broken, it might be helpful to call for a professional horologist, a specialist in diagnosing and fixing a broken clock.

Best Wall Clocks

Conclusion

Whether you’re looking to stay on time or want to add a new item to enhance the look of your room, a wall clock is always an option. So, whatever your reason for purchasing a wall clock, we hope to have helped get your hands to an ideal one.

Before leaving, we’d like to help you further by mentioning our favorites from the list. Bernhard wall clock will be the best wall clock you can get. Apart from its straightforward design with easy-to-read numbers, it doesn’t have any potential issues you have to worry about.

Our next favorite is the Foxtop modern wall clock which comes in a beautiful rose-gold frame that adds up to your wall decor. And, it doesn’t make any sound, and the installation is very straightforward.

With this, we’d say goodbye. See you later and take care!

Related Articles

8 Best Bauhaus Wall Clocks for Clock-A-Holics

10 Best Copper/Rose Gold Wall Clocks

8 Best Gold Wall Clock to Feature in Your Living Room

7 Best Concrete Wall Clocks

The holiday season brings lots of joy and decoration, but once it's over, the clean-up can be overwhelming. In this article, I review the best Christmas tree bags available to help store the tree and other decorations efficiently.

We've all been there, trying to squeeze our Christmas tree, but once you take the Christmas tree out of the original box, there is NO WAY it is going back in!

That's where Christmas tree storage bags come in. These bags are designed to make storing your tree easier, so you don't have to struggle with cramming it back into its box every year. In this article, I'll guide you through the best Christmas tree bags and find the perfect one for your needs.

Best Christmas Tree Bags

Looking for a tree-mendous way to keep your holiday decorations in tip-top shape? Whether you have a towering Tannenbaum or a petite pine, read on to find the perfect storage solution for your needs.

1. Zober ZCP-101-rd: Best for Storing An Artificial Christmas Tree Up To 9ft Tall

What I like

Comes with an identification card slot
Can accommodate a 9ft tree
Three stitch-reinforced handles
Dual zipper

What I don't like

The plastic material may not be as durable

Meet the Large Zober Christmas Tree Storage Bag. This storage bag is like Santa's magic sack but for your tree. This waterproof polyethylene plastic bag will shield your tree from pesky pests and unwanted moisture so it stays looking its best year after year.

This Christmas tree storage bag's durable construction is reinforced with three stitch-reinforced handles, making it a breeze to transport even the heaviest of Christmas trees.

But the real magic of this Christmas tree storage bag lies in the dual zipper. It opens wide, so you don't have to worry about wrestling with your tree to get it inside. And the attached card slot makes it easy to identify which tree is inside, in case you have more than one.

The Zober Christmas Tree Storage Bag is an excellent solution for anyone looking to store an artificial Christmas tree up to 9ft tall. This storage bag measures 65” L x 15” H x 30” W, providing ample space to hold disassembled trees.

Material: Plastic | Product Dimensions: 65" L x 30" W x 15" H | Specialty: Dual Zipper | Tree Size: ‎9 ft.

2. Handy Laundry 5035: Best for Tear Resistance

What I like

Two reinforced handles on each side
Heavy-duty tarp material
Designed to be tear-resistant
Has a loop for pulling

What I don't like

May be difficult to clean if it becomes soiled or stained

The Christmas Tree Storage Bag by Handy Laundry is made from a durable, waterproof material that ensures your tree will stay safe and dry while stored. It can accommodate a 7.5-foot disassembled artificial Christmas tree, garland, and even Christmas lights.

This strong, roomy, zippered tarp storage bag is 48 inches long by 15 inches wide by 20 inches high, providing ample space for even the largest artificial trees. The zipper is easy to use and glides smoothly.

In addition to its durability and protection, this Christmas tree storage bag also comes with two reinforced handles, which make it easy to carry and transport your tree from storage to setup. The handles are well-positioned and securely attached to the bag, making it easy to lift and maneuver even a fully-loaded bag. With its heavy-duty handles, durability, and zipper, this storage solution offers unbeatable value and peace of mind.

Material: Trap | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 15" W x 20" H | Specialty: Durable | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.

3. Primode: Best for Hassle-free and Space-saving Storage

What I like

The rectangular shape fits trees well
Sturdy and durable polyethylene
You can actually wear it like a backpack
Doesn't require you to smash the tree when storing it

What I don't like

Does not come with a wheel

The Primode Christmas Tree Storage Bag is a perfect solution for those who want to save time, hassle, and room while storing their Christmas tree. This holiday tree storage bag is made of durable polyethylene material and is designed to protect your Christmas tree from dust, dirt, and moisture when stored during the spring and summer seasons.

This Christmas tree storage bag is spacious and measures 45" L x 15" W x 20" H, making it large enough to store a disassembled 7 ft tree. The holiday tree storage case is equipped with a pair of reinforced handles for easy handling, making it easy to move your tree from one place to another.

With its spacious design, durable material, and convenient features, the Primode Christmas Tree Storage Bag is an excellent investment for anyone who wants to keep their Christmas tree safe and organized for years to come.

Material: Polyethylene | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 15" W x 20" H | Specialty: Durable | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.

4. Elf Stor: Best for Organised Packaging

What I like

Woven heavy cording handles
Folds flat when not in use
Durable, tear-resistant material
Full-length zipper

What I don't like

Not suitable for outdoor storage

With this set of two Christmas tree storage bags, you can store not one but two 4 to 6-ft artificial trees or one 7.5-ft disassembled tree! That's more space for all your jolly decorations!

Made of durable woven polypropylene and nylon, these Santa's bags will protect your tree and decorations. The full-length zipper ensures that your tree is securely stored, and the credit card slot on the front of the Christmas tree bag allows you to label what's inside. The reinforced nylon handles make it easy to transport your Christmas cargo from the living room to the garage or from hallways to storage rooms.

Plus, they fold flat when not in use, so you can easily store them on shelves or garages or in your holiday storage closet.

Overall, the Elf Stor Christmas Tree Storage Bag is a convenient, durable, and reliable organizer. It helps protect your Christmas decoration items against dust and insects and is a space-saver.

Material: Woven Polypropylene, Nylon | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 15" W x 20" H | Specialty: Durable | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.

5. HOLIDAY SPIRIT: Best Heavy-Duty Option

What I like

Durable and waterproof material
Comes with a name card
Smooth operating dual zipper
Reinforced handles for heavyweight

What I don't like

Interior support was absent

The HOLIDAY SPIRIT Christmas Tree Storage Bag is made using a dual layer of Oxford canvas material. This helps resist tears and ensures that your tree is safe from water, dust, mildew, and rodents.

In addition to being sturdy, this storage bag also has reinforced handles easing transportation, even if it's heavy. It's like a cozy little bed for your tree, protecting it from all the yucky stuff that can accumulate in storage. The material is also 100% waterproof, guaranteeing that your belongings stay dry and protected from moisture.

Overall, this Christmas tree storage bag is a wise investment that will keep your tree safe and ready to save the holidays year after year.

Material: Canvas | Product Dimensions: 47" L x 14.6" W x 19.7" H | Specialty: Durable, Waterproof | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.

6. Sattiyrch: Best for Sturdiness

What I like

Affordable Price
Moisture-resistant material
Durable reinforced handles
Wide dual zipper

What I don't like

Requires efforts to fold and pack

The Sattiyrch Christmas Tree Storage Bag is a great solution to keep your artificial Christmas tree protected and secure until the next holiday season. This storage bag has dimensions of 48” x 15” x 20”, making it a perfect fit for up to 7.5 feet tall disassembled Christmas trees.

Made from waterproof polyethylene plastic, the Sattiyrch Christmas Tree Storage Bag is moisture-resistant, ensuring that your tree stays dry and protected. This Christmas tree storage bag also features 2-stitch reinforced handles for easy carrying between storage and your living room.

The festive, bright red color of this storage bag makes it easy to identify in storage, and an attached card slot lets you know exactly what’s inside the storage container.

Plus, the two-way/dual zipper makes it easy to place and remove your tree without any assembly required. It's durable, easy to carry, and easy to access, making it a convenient and practical solution for your holiday storage needs.

Material: Plastic | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 20" W x 15" H | Specialty: Sturdy | Tree Size: 7.5 ft.

7. Covermates Keepsakes: Best for Duffel Storage

What I like

3-year manufacturer warranty
Dual zipper pulls for quick access
Wheels make it easy to move
Inside pocket for easy organization

What I don't like

Relatively expensive

The Covermates Keepsakes Christmas Tree Duffel Bag is the perfect solution for storing and transporting your Christmas tree hassle-free. Made with tough-as-nails 600D polyester, this Christmas tree storage bag is built to withstand even the most determined tree branches from poking through and wreaking havoc.

With dual zipper pulls, you can easily access your festive fir, and the reinforced handles and wheels make it a breeze to cart your tree from storage to center stage. Plus, the nifty inside pocket and ID window help you stay organized and on top of your decorating game.

Measuring in at a spacious 48W x 24D x 18H, this Christmas tree storage bag can accommodate a tree up to 3 feet tall (depending on its thickness, of course). And with its sturdy construction and oversized wheels, moving your tree around has never been easier.

But wait, there's more! The Covermates Keepsakes Christmas Tree Duffel Bag comes with a 3-year manufacturer warranty, so you can enjoy worry-free storage for many holiday seasons to come.

Material: Heavy Duty Polyester | Product Dimensions: 48" L x 24" W x 18" H | Specialty: Durable | Tree Size: 3 ft.

Comparing The Top Christmas Tree Bags

Top Bags For Christmas Trees	Material	Product Dimensions	Specialty	Tree Size
Zober	Plastic	65" L x 30" W x 15" H	Dual Zipper	9 ft.
Handy Laundry	Tarp	48" L x 15" W x 20" H	Durable	7.5 ft.
Primode	Polyethylene	48" L x 15" W x 20" H	Durable	7.5 ft.
Elf Stor	Woven Polypropylene, Nylon	48" L x 15" W x 20" H	Durable	7.5 ft.
HOLIDAY SPIRIT	Canvas	47" L x 14.6" W x 19.7" H	Durable, Waterproof	7.5 ft.
Sattiyrch	Plastic	48" L x 20" W x 15" H	Sturdy	7.5 ft.
Covermates Keepsakes	Heavy Duty Polyester	48" L x 24" W x 18" H	Durable	3 ft.

Buying Guide

1. Size

The first thing to consider when buying a Christmas tree storage bag is the size of your tree. You'll need to measure the height, width, and depth of your tree to ensure you choose a Christmas tree storage bag that fits it properly.

If your tree is a bit on the smaller side, you'll want to look for a storage bag that's designed to hold smaller trees. And if you have a towering giant of a tree, make sure you find a Christmas tree storage bag that's large enough to accommodate its size.

Make sure you pick a brand with a wide Christmas tree storage bag opening for easy loading and unloading. You can even find storage bags specifically designed for upright storage, saving you valuable floor space in your basement or attic. This makes it easier to load your tree into the Christmas tree storage bag and also makes it easier to remove when it's time to set up your tree again next Christmas.

2. Material

Now, let's talk about materials. You want a Christmas tree bag that can handle the weight of even the heaviest Christmas trees, like a steel frame or heavy-duty polyester. And don't forget about those pesky pests, like mites or rodents- so make sure to choose tear-resistant materials that will keep your tree protected all year round.

For those who prefer an upright storage bag option, the heavy-duty canvas is a popular choice. Canvas is known for its strength and durability and can be made moisture-resistant to ensure the tree remains protected during storage. Rubbermaid containers are another durable option, providing a sturdy and protective home for your disassembled tree.

Other materials to consider for Christmas tree storage include tarpaulin and reinforced plastic. These materials are moisture-resistant and provide an extra layer of protection against dust and pests. Compression strap, cinch cord, etc., are additional features to look for when choosing a storage option to ensure a tight and secure fit around the tree.

3. Durability

It is recommended to opt for bags with strong and sturdy construction to ensure that they can withstand the weight and pressure of the tree. When searching for the best Christmas tree storage bags, there are several durable options available in the market, including upright storage bags, rolling Christmas tree storage, canvas bags, and polyester bags.

There are several factors that can impact the durability of a storage bag for a Christmas tree. One of the most important is the material used to make the Christmas tree bag. Polyester bags, for example, are known for their durability, while canvas bags are often preferred for their strength and tear-resistant properties.

Another factor that can affect the durability of a storage bag is its design and construction. Santa's bags with reinforced handles, compression straps, and a cinch cord can help to keep the tree secure and prevent damage during transport.

4. Waterproof

You'll definitely want to make sure your tree stays dry, so why not go for a waterproof option? And if you're feeling extra fancy, go for a hermetic seal to really lock in that moisture resistance.

A Christmas tree storage bag that is not waterproof can result in water damage to the tree, which can cause it to deteriorate and potentially become unusable. To avoid this, it is important to select bags with waterproof materials that can protect the tree from moisture and the elements.

Sealed seams can prevent water from entering the Christmas tree storage bag and protect the tree from moisture damage. Additionally, some bags are designed with a completely waterproof material, which can provide extra protection and ensure that the tree remains dry and in good condition during storage.

How does the material of the bag affect tear-resistance and durability?

The material of the bag greatly affects its tear-resistance and durability. Santa's bags, made of tear-proof and heavy-duty materials such as polyester, are more likely to last longer and withstand heavy trees and other holiday decorations.

Can a cardboard box be used as a Christmas tree storage bag alternative?

While a cardboard box can be used as a temporary solution for storing an artificial Christmas tree, it is not an ideal long-term storage solution. Cardboard boxes are not tear-resistant or waterproof, and they do not provide adequate protection for the tree or its accessories.

Can I store things like a wreath, tree stand, tree skirt, etc., in a Christmas tree storage bag?

Yes, most Christmas tree storage bags are designed to hold not only the tree but also its accessories, such as the tree stand, tree skirt, and even wreaths.

What are the benefits of using an upright Christmas tree storage bag?

An upright Christmas tree storage bag allows for easy storage and transport of the tree while also taking up less space in a garage or storage area. It also helps to maintain the tree's shape and protect it from pests and other damage.

Are Tiny Tim Totes a good choice for Christmas tree storage?

Tiny Tim totes are a popular choice for Christmas tree storage due to their tear-resistant and waterproof polyester material, reinforced handles, compression straps, and dual zipper design.

Is it better to store an artificial Christmas tree in an upright storage bag or lay it down?

It is generally recommended to store an artificial Christmas tree in an upright Christmas tree storage bag to help maintain its shape and prevent damage to its branches. Laying it down flat may cause the branches to become misshapen and may make it more difficult to transport.

Why do Christmas tree storage bags come in only red and green colors?

Red and green are traditional holiday colors, which is why most Christmas tree storage bags come in these colors. However, some manufacturers do offer bags in other colors as well.

Final Verdict

If you're like me and dread the annual task of taking down and storing your Christmas tree, investing in a good-quality Christmas tree bag can be a game-changer.

For the first position, I've got the Primode Christmas Tree Storage Bag for hassle-free storage. Its spacious design and reinforced handles make it easy to move your tree from one place to another.

But if you're in need of a storage bag for an artificial Christmas tree up to 9ft tall, the Zober Christmas Tree Storage Bag is an excellent solution. This waterproof polyethylene plastic bag will shield your tree from pests and moisture so it stays looking its best year after year.

With the right bag, storing your tree can actually become a stress-free task (yes, it's possible!). So, don't let post-Christmas blues get the best of you. Grab yourself a top-rated Christmas tree bag and enjoy a hassle-free storage experience.

The Yinuo Christmas light projector is the best projector on this list, with its Christmas patterns and impressive coverage. The Itoeo light projector comes second with its varied smart features and holiday patterns. Another good option is the Yuegang light projector due to its easy installation and durability.

It’s the most wonderful time of the year. And it is time to decorate your houses with some festive cheer! Whether it’s garlands, icicle lights, or light projectors, your house deserves the best decoration. But are you confused about which light projector would work best for you?

No need to worry! Here is a list of the 9 best Christmas light projectors you can find in 2023. All these are easily available to order on Amazon.

Top 9 Best Christmas Laser Lights

1. Yinuo Christmas Light Projectors - Best Overall

What I like

6 different patterns
Energy efficient
Weatherproof
The package includes the necessary hardware for installation

What I don't like

Not very bright

The Yinuo Christmas light projector is a great option for a laser lighting display this Christmas. It has 6 different patterns, including Santa Claus, Bells, Snowflakes, Christmas Trees, Pentagrams and Dots, and more. These different patterns are projected in 3 colors, namely red, green, and blue.

These lights can cover up to 3900 square feet from a maximum distance of 33 feet without any effect on the clarity of the festive display. Additionally, being made from aluminum alloy, this light projector is durable and IP65 waterproof. So, you can use them outdoors, even during the rain and snow.

What’s more, the projector comes with a 180° adjustable projector head, meaning all corners of your house will be lightened up by the red, green, and blue Christmas patterns.

Moreover, these Christmas lights also come with a remote control and a built-in timer function. The signal of the RF remote can provide control through 40 feet of unobstructed distance.

The package includes a round base and a long ground stake, which means you can use the projector both indoors and outdoors. However, the power cord provided is just 10 feet long, so you will have to use an extension cord to use it outdoors.

Coverage: 5000 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB

2. Y Yuegang Christmas Projector Lights - Best Christmas Patterns

What I like

300° adjustable projector head
Timer function
3800 square feet of coverage
33 feet distance for clear patterns

What I don't like

Low adaptor waterproof rating

This Y Yuegang Christmas laser light projector is compact but impactful at the same time, with the ability to cover 3800 square feet from a maximum distance of 33 feet. The projector head can rotate 300° so you can find the angle that works the best for you. The light projector displays 5 different Christmas patterns, including Christmas trees, bells, snowflakes, and Santa Claus.

The light projector also comes with an RF remote control, using which you can change the movement speed and the timer mode of the RGB color model, i.e., red, green, and blue lights. The projector has three motor speed settings and 4 timer settings: 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, and 8 hours. You can also reset the timer function using just a button on the remote.

Additionally, you can put the light projector to both indoor and outdoor use by using the round base, and long ground stake included with the set. However, the adapter has a waterproof rating of just IP44, so you will have to be careful while using the projector outdoors. Usually, some sort of cover will make do.

Moreover, this Christmas laser light has a temperature-sensing system that will shut down the projector if it gets a bit too hot. So, this projector will definitely last you many holiday seasons.

Coverage: 3800 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP44 (adaptor) and IP65 (outer body) | Colors: RGB

3. Itoeo Christmas Laser Lights- Best Coverage

What I like

3800 square feet of coverage
Timer function
Remote control
33 feet distance for clear patterns

What I don't like

Short power cord

The Itoeo Christmas laser lights also showcase 5 different Christmas-themed patterns, including a snowflake, jingling bells, a Christmas tree, and Santa Claus in red and green lights. The projector has a coverage of 3800 square feet from a maximum distance of 33 feet. It also has an adjustable projector head, so you can easily aim the Christmas holiday wall light show wherever you want.

Like the previous projector, this one also comes with a remote control through which you can set a timer function of 2, 4, 6, and 8 hours on. This helps improve energy efficiency and save you dollars on your energy bills.

With the included round base, long ground stake, and extension cord, you can use this light projector both indoors and outdoors. However, the power cord only measures 16.4 feet, so you will probably have to use an extension cord.

Additionally, the light projector supports a temperature-sensing system, which automatically turns off the projector if it gets too hot. This one also has a low waterproof rating for the adapter, i.e., IP44 but a good waterproof rating for the outer body of the projector, IP65.

Coverage: 3800 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP44 (adaptor) and IP65 (outer body) | Colors: RGB

4. Minetom Christmas Laser Lights Projector- Best Lighting Modes

What I like

Durability
Waterproof
3 lighting modes
Easily portable

What I don't like

No included remote control

The Minetom Christmas laser lights might be more expensive than the other light projectors, but they make up for the cost in their durability. The light projector is durable and portable. Made from ABS plastic and aluminum alloy, it is quite strong. Additionally, it has a waterproof rating of IP65, so you can use it both indoors and outdoors.

Additionally, you get 3 lighting modes: breathing, dynamic, and static mode. However, all these light patterns are showcased in red and green lights. So, you don’t get a lot of variation in colors.

You also don’t get a remote control along with the projector, so you will have to use the buttons on the projector to control it. But it does come with mounting equipment, which will help the projector withstand any strong winter winds.

Coverage: NA | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB

5. MHAZDZE Christmas Laser Lights- Best Light Features

What I like

Adjustable settings
3541 square feet of coverage
Timer function
Waterproof

What I don't like

Flimsy construction

The Mhazdze Christmas laser projector provides a lot of control over the color display. You can adjust the rotating speed, flash frequency, step speed, and light color according to your preferences.

The projector head has an area coverage of 3541 square feet from a maximum distance of 41 feet, after which the patterns will start to get blurry.

The projector also supports the timer function: 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 hours. Additionally, the projector has a waterproof rating of IP65, so you don’t have to worry about the weather elements either.

However, the projector is quite lightweight and would not be able to withstand strong winds on its own. So, you will have to provide it with some support to continue using it outdoors.

Coverage: 3541 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB

6. Caiyue Christmas Laser Lights- Best Color Combinations

What I like

7 color combinations
Timer function
3541 square feet of coverage
Weatherproof

What I don't like

No memory function for the timer

The Caiyue Christmas light projector displays red, blue, and green lasers in 7 different color combinations. You also get three different lighting modes for the three colors: moving firefly effect, moving speed control, and static mode. With these variations, you can produce some interesting light settings.

You get an expansive coverage of 3541 square feet at a maximum distance of 40 feet before the elaborate patterns start to get blurry.

Additionally, you can format the timer function to automatically turn off after 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 hours. With the indoor base and outdoor pile extension, you can use this light projector outdoors as well. You don’t have to worry about the weather since the projector is IP65 waterproof and cold-resistant.

Coverage: 3541 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB

7. Lunmore Christmas Laser Lights- Best For Easy Installation

What I like

Firefly effect
Easy installation
Remote control
Waterproof

What I don't like

Small coverage area

The Lunmore Christmas laser lights emit fireflies (yellow-green) and blue lights, which would act as amazing Christmas decorations. Although it does not have dedicated Christmas light patterns, the firefly effect of the yellow lights would surely add to the holiday cheer. You can also choose to turn the individual colors on or off to get only specific colors.

It is very easy to install as well. You can install it on the wall or in the ground using the ground stake included in the package. Additionally, you also get a remote control along with the light projector, so you can easily control the colors, speed, and timer functions.

With a waterproof rating of IP65 and maximum coverage of 900 square feet, you can use this laser projector for both outdoor and indoor use. However, as you can see, the coverage is quite small.

Coverage: 900 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: Yellow, Green, and Blue

8. Sunyao Christmas Laser Lights- Best For Durability

What I like

Waterproof
18 feet Long power cord
12 months warranty
Durability
Refund policy

What I don't like

No Christmas-themed patterns
Comparatively costly

The Sunyao Christmas laser projector is a classic RGB laser light projector, having both moving and static firefly options for the Christmas display. Although it doesn’t have any specific Christmas patterns, you can use the three colors to create your own unique Christmas decoration.

Having a waterproof rating of IP65 and an 18 feet long power cord, you can easily channel your Christmas spirit using this projector both indoors and outdoors. Additionally, the projector is pretty easy to install as well. You can use the remote control included in the package to control the light displays and timer functions (2,4, and 6-hour durations).

Moreover, Sunyao provides a 12 months warranty and a 30-day return and refund policy. So, you can always return the light projector if it doesn’t meet your needs.

However, the light projector is quite pricey for not having any Christmas-themed patterns. You can buy it for durability and high quality if you don’t necessarily need a Christmas light project.

Coverage: NA | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB

9. LedMall 8 Patterns Christmas Laser Lights- Best For Varied Patterns

What I like

Sturdy metallic construction
Weather-resistance
Easy installation
Remote control included

What I don't like

High price tag

The LedMall Christmas laser projector can create beautiful light displays in eight patterns in red, blue, and green colors. Although you can’t select any one individual pattern to play, you can choose the speed and the brightness level of the light patterns using the remote control.

You can install the light projector both indoors and outdoors pretty easily. It is just a simple matter of screwing and unscrewing the ground stake or the round base of the projector stand.

Additionally, the projector is quite weather-resistant. Its metallic construction can withstand any harsh winter winds or snowfall. Even more, it comes with a security kit to ensure your projector stays where you install it.

Moreover, the coverage area is also one of the largest on this list, so this is the projector for you if you have a big house or surface to cover. So, you can easily enjoy the beautiful and twinkling RGB patterns on any surface.

However, the projector is the most expensive on this list. The high durability and weather resistance surely hike up the price.

Coverage: 3500 sq. ft. | IP Rating: IP65 | Colors: RGB

Quick Comparison Of The Top Laser Lights For Christmas

Top Christmas Laser Lights	Coverage	IP Rating	Colors
Yinuo Christmas Light Projectors	5000 sq. ft.	IP65	RGB
Y Yuegang Christmas Projector Lights	3800 sq. ft.	IP44 (adaptor) and IP65 (outer body)	RGB
Itoeo Christmas Laser Lights	3800 sq. ft.	IP44 (adaptor) and IP65 (outer body)	RGB
Minetom Christmas Laser Lights Projector	NA	IP65	RG
MHAZDZE Christmas Laser Lights	3541 sq. ft.	IP65	RGB
Caiyue Christmas Laser Lights	3541 sq. ft.	IP65	RGB
Lunmore Christmas Laser Lights	900 sq. ft.	IP65	Yellow, Green, and Blue
Sunyao Christmas Laser Lights	NA	IP65	RGB
LedMall 8 Patterns Christmas Laser Lights	3500 sq. ft.	IP65	RGB

Buying Guide For Christmas Laser Lights

Most people opt for traditional Christmas lights to decorate their houses during the holiday season. But more and more people are starting to choose laser lights for the festive season because of how easy and convenient they are to install.

Since this is such a new trend, you might be confused as to which points to look out for when buying a laser projector. Hence, this buyer’s guide. Hopefully, you will be left more informed about which laser projector to go for.

1. Patterns

The best advantage of using a laser projector instead of traditional string lights is that you can get many different patterns. Whether it’s a Christmas-themed or Halloween-themed image, you can get a variety of patterns with laser projectors. Some projectors only have a few twinkling or dot patterns, while others have up to 10 patterns.

2. Weather Resistance and Durability

You will most likely be installing the laser projector outside your house, and it will most likely be during the winter season. Keeping that in mind, you should be sure about the durability of your light projector depending on the climate in your area. Will it be able to withstand the strong winter winds? What if it rains or snows? Is it dust-resistant?

Be sure to get a laser projector with a minimum waterproofing of IP65. However, if you experience harsh weather conditions in your area, you might require an even higher rating.

3. Remote Control

It’s a cold Christmas night, and you wish to turn on your laser projector to get the Christmas cheer started. Surely, the thought of walking out into the cold weather and turning on the projector manually would be too deterring. So, projectors with remote controls help save a lot of time and energy.

A remote can allow for all kinds of adjustments from the porch or even inside the house, depending on the range of the remote. So, if convenience is a top priority for you, be sure to buy a projector with an included remote control.

4. Installation Process

The whole idea behind using a laser projector instead of traditional string lights is ease and convenience. So, what’s the point if the installation is too tricky? Most laser projectors on this list use a ground stake for outdoor installation, which is pretty easy to use. All you need to do is plug in the electrical cord, which only takes seconds.

5. Extra Features

Many laser projectors on this list are laden with multiple features like speed changes, lighting modes, timer functions, etc. All these will help increase the utility and performance of your laser light projector. Speed changes and different lighting modes offer variation. The timer function will help you save time and money in the long run.

At what distance should I install a Christmas light projector?

The best distance at which you should install a Christmas light projector varies from model to model. For some projectors, it is around 15 to 20 feet, while for others, it is 30 to 40 feet. If you place the projector beyond the given range, the light displays will start to lose clarity.

For the clearest and most defined patterns, place the projector within the given range. So, check the required distances and range before you purchase the projector.

Do Christmas light projectors work on trees?

A Christmas light projector works best on flat surfaces. But, with proper angles and placement, you can project some patterns onto a tree. Different projectors offer different levels of success with trees.

Try to project most of the patterns on the trunk of the tree than the individual branches since the trunk is obviously more broad and flat. Place the projector at the base of the tree and angle it upwards towards the trunk for the best results.

What is the advantage of using a Christmas light projector?

Christmas light projectors are becoming a popular alternative to traditional string lights. This is because they are so convenient and easy to install. No need for a ladder or anything, just place the light projector at the right place on your lawn, and you are good to go.

You don’t have to plan out where each individual light strand would go or pin the light strands in place. Additionally, you can get different Christmas-themed patterns without any extra effort.

Verdict

So, which ones are the best Christmas light projectors on this list? The Yinuo Christmas light projector stands out as the best Christmas light projector with its festive patterns and impressive coverage. It is also pretty affordable for the expansive features it offers.

The Itoeo Christmas light projector is the second best on this list because of its Christmas patterns and smart features. Another good option is the Yuegang Christmas light projector due to its elaborate projector lights and easy installation process.

Hopefully, this helped you figure out how to decorate your house the best way. Have fun light projecting, and have a very Merry Christmas!

Transform your outdoor space into a festive wonderland with the best outdoor Christmas lights of the season. Discover the best outdoor Christmas lights to create a festive and magical atmosphere.

Are you the type of person who starts counting down to Christmas as soon as Halloween is over? Do you deck the halls with twinkling holiday lights before Thanksgiving dinner is even served? Well, my friend, you're not alone.

In fact, you might just be one of us Christmas fanatics who can't wait to turn our homes into winter wonderlands. So, put on your favorite Christmas sweater, and read about the best outdoor Christmas lights that will make your house the envy of the neighborhood.

Best Outdoor Christmas Lights

1. PREXTEX Christmas Lights ESD-100/2F: Best for Those Who Prefer Incandescent Lights

What I like

Up to five sets (500 lights) can be connected
Includes flasher bulbs for a twinkle effect
Long-lasting and high-quality bulbs and wire
Comes with extra bulbs and replacement fuses

What I don't like

Limited color options

With 20 feet of clear white lights on green wire, this set includes 100 bulbs and comes with 2 extra bulbs and 2 replacement fuses. The mini lights are designed to be long-lasting and waterproof, making them suitable for use in a variety of settings.

One unique feature of these white lights is the inclusion of 2 flasher bulbs that can be used to create a twinkle effect. Simply replace one of the regular bulbs in the string with the flasher incandescent light bulb and wait a few seconds for the incandescent lights to start twinkling. Another convenient feature of the PREXTEX Christmas Lights is the ability to connect up to five sets of 500 incandescent lights end-to-end using the included plug. This makes it easy to illuminate larger spaces and create a cohesive look across multiple areas.

Overall, the PREXTEX Christmas Lights seem like a good choice for those looking for affordable and versatile Christmas string lights that can be used for a variety of occasions. The inclusion of the flasher bulbs and the ability to connect multiple sets are both nice touches that add to their value.

Light: Incandescent | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 100, 20 feet | Control Method: Remote

2. YIQU MLS-D29V6WUC-O: Best for Versatile Lighting Modes

What I like

8 different lighting modes to choose from
Memory function
Can be extended up to 5 light chains
UL certification for safe low-voltage use

What I don't like

Limited placement options

The Upgraded LED Christmas String Lights by YIQU are a great choice for anyone looking to add a festive touch to their home. With a total length of 82 feet, these LED Christmas lights come with eight lighting modes to choose from.

The LED lights are designed with a memory function that allows them to remember the previous mode or settings used, making them more convenient to use. Additionally, they come with a low voltage plug and are UL safety organization certified.

You can easily extend these outdoor Christmas lights up to a maximum of 5 Christmas light chains, with a maximum of 1000 LED lights. These Christmas string lights are made with a waterproof feature, which makes them suitable for outdoor and indoor use.

Light: LED | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 200, 82 feet | Control Method: Remote Control

3. Albelt SSLGW: Best for Environmentally Conscious People

What I like

Automatic on/off function
Built-in lighting sensor
Energy-efficient solar-powered lights
Adjustable heads

What I don't like

May not be suitable for large events

The Albelt Super-Long Solar String Lights Outdoor is a great option if you're looking to add some warm and cozy ambiance to your outdoor space. With a total length of 170 feet, the package comes with 2 sets of 85 feet LED lights, making it long enough to decorate a wide range of areas.

One of the best features of these solar string lights is that they are energy-efficient and do not require any electricity or wiring. They are powered by a rechargeable 1800mAh NI-MH battery, which charges quickly with solar power. These outdoor Christmas lights turn on automatically at dusk and have a working time of up to 10-12 hours, depending on how long they are charged.

Another great feature of these solar string lights is that they are waterproof, made of durable PVC-coated copper wire, and bright LED lights that can withstand extreme weather like rain, snow, and frost. This makes them ideal for use in your garden, roof, lawn, fence, or any outdoor space that you want to decorate.

The eight lighting modes and memory functions allow you to choose the perfect lighting mode for your occasion. You can easily switch between the modes with the mode button, and the built-in memory chip saves the last mode setting, so you don't have to reset it again. Additionally, the solar energy panel can be adjusted to face direct sunlight for optimal charging.

Light: LED | Power Source: Solar Powered | Number of Lights: 480, 170 feet | Control Method: Button Control

4. Ollny ‎HG-29V801C: Best for Wide Range of Lighting Possibilities

What I like

Super long length of 800 LED lights
Timer function with memory chip
4 brightness levels
8 modes with a remote control

What I don't like

Being corded limits its placement options

The Ollny Christmas Lights are an impressive set of holiday lights that will make your house stand out during the festive season. With a total length of 272 feet and LED Christmas lights length of 262 feet, this super-long artificial Christmas tree light can easily meet your need to decorate every corner of your house. The extension cord length of 10 feet provides you with more flexibility in positioning the outdoor lights.

These lights have 8 modes, which can be adjusted easily using the remote controller, and choose your favorite one to create a lively atmosphere.

These outdoor Christmas lights have 4 brightness levels, which you can control using the remote controller. You can dim the holiday lights to 100%, 75%, 50%, or 25%, depending on the level of brightness you prefer.

The timer function allows you to set the Christmas lights for 6 hours on and 18 hours off. The built-in memory chip of the Christmas lights indoors & outdoors saves your last-time setting. These outdoor Christmas lights are also IP44 waterproof, and the controller is also waterproof, effectively blocking rainwater from entering. This makes the brand a perfect choice for outdoor/indoor decoration during the holiday season.

Light: LED | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 800, 262 feet | Control Method: Remote Control

5. Kwaiffeo: Best for Beautiful Meteor Shower Effect

What I like

Beautiful meteor shower effect
High-quality and durable PC material
360-degree lighting angle
IP65 waterproof

What I don't like

Need to replace the first set in case of malfunction

The Kwaiffeo Outdoor Christmas Lights are a beautiful and romantic way to decorate your home or yard for the Christmas and holiday season. The meteor shower lights create the illusion of falling snow or a shooting star, providing a stunning visual effect that is sure to impress.

One of the standout features of these outdoor Christmas lights is their high quality and energy efficiency. Made of premium PC material, these outdoor lights are dust-proof, corrosion-resistant, aging-resistant, and more durable than many other options on the market. They also feature 192 LED beads attached on both sides that provide 360-degree lighting, ensuring that your entire space is filled with beautiful and bright light. Additionally, the Kwaiffeo Outdoor Christmas Lights are UL certified, meaning that they are powered by a 7V low voltage.

These string lights are ideal for both indoor and outdoor use, as they are waterproof with an IP65 rating. However, it's important to note that the plug is not waterproof, so you should be careful to keep it away from water.

Light: LED | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 192, 8 tubes×12 inch | Control Method: Touch

6. Jmexsuss EXS-S-0600: Best for Adding a Warm And Cozy Touch

What I like

Easy to put up and take down
Timer function
Made of durable polyvinyl chloride material
Automatically turns on and off

What I don't like

Not compatible with some types of controllers

The JMEXSUSS LED Outdoor Christmas Lights are an excellent choice during the holiday season. With a length of 168 feet and 600 warm white LED bulbs, these string lights are super long and super bright.

One of the standout features of these outdoor Christmas lights is the storage wheel design, making them more suitable for outdoor use and daily decorations. The reel makes it easy to put up and take down, ensuring the outdoor Christmas lights don't get tangled up while unrolling a few feet at a time. This convenience makes it easy to use them again for the next Christmas or party.

These outdoor Christmas lights have eight different lighting modes, each controlled by the button on the plug. There is also a timer function that automatically turns on for 6 hours and turns off for 18 hours.

Additionally, these string lights are waterproof and designed to withstand heavy rain and snow, making them durable and suitable for both indoor and outdoor use.

Light: LED | Power Source: Electrical Cable | Number of Lights: 600, 168 feet | Control Method: Touch

7. QUWIN: Convenient Christmas Lights With a Timer Function

What I like

Durable and weather-resistant design
End-to-end connection of up to 3 strands
Intelligent memory function
UL certified for safety

What I don't like

"Remote” is not remote, it’s attached to the lights

The QUWIN LED String Lights are durable and weather resistant, making them perfect for outdoor decorations. Plus, the wintergreen wire blends in nicely with the greenery.

You can easily switch between modes with the button on the adapter, and they even have memory technology to remember your last setting. The 24V output voltage makes them safe for children, and they have been tested to meet all safety standards.

What's great about these outdoor Christmas lights is that they're really long, coming in at 115 feet with 300 individual LED bulbs. Plus, you can connect up to 3 strands end-to-end for even more coverage.

Overall, the QUWIN Waterproof LED Outdoor Christmas String Lights are a great investment for anyone who wants to add a touch of warmth and elegance to their special events or daily decor.

Light: LED | Power Source: Source Cord Plug | Number of Lights: 300, 115 feet | Control Method: Mobile App

8. KiflyTooin JT-EL/FC300V0200: Best for Illuminating Small Areas

What I like

75 drops to create a beautiful display
Built-in timer function
Energy-efficient due to low voltage
Easy to install using zip ties or cup hooks

What I don't like

Only 2 sets are recommended to be connected together

The KiflyTooin LED Christmas Lights are made of high-quality copper and plastic designed to withstand rain, heat, and temperature, making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor use. With 400 LEDs and 75 drops, these colorful Christmas lights are 32 feet long and come with 8 different lighting modes.

One of the unique features of these outdoor Christmas lights is that they have a built-in timer function that allows you to set these indoor outdoor lights for 6 hours on and 18 hours off each day by long-pressing the button on the plug.

Additionally, they can be connected up to 3 sets end-to-end, which is enough to cover a larger area. Furthermore, they are constructed with 30V low voltage certified by UL, which makes them safer and less power-consuming.

Light: LED | Power Source: Corded Electric | Number of Lights: 400, 32 feet | Control Method: Touch

9. ‎Ollny Icicle Lights HG-29V487BC: Best for Icicle Light Lovers

What I like

Waterproof design with IP44
Saves the last mode settings
UL588 certification
Dimmable with 4 brightness levels

What I don't like

The price may be a bit high for some customers

This 40-foot Christmas light set features 486 cold white LED lights arranged in 81 drops, which creates an impressive visual effect.

One of the key features of these icicle lights is that they are IP44 waterproof, which means that they can withstand rainy, snowy, or stormy days. This makes them ideal for outdoor use, and the UL588 certification ensures that they consume less power and are safe to use with a 29V low-voltage power plug.

These icicle lights are also connectable to up to three sets, and the clear white wire is durable and resistant to pull. You can easily adjust the eight modes using the remote control that comes with the set.

The four brightness levels and three timer functions are also easy to adjust, and the built-in memory chip saves your last mode setting, making it easy to turn on the icicle lights each day.

Installing these icicle lights is easy, and they come neatly packed to avoid tangling. Overall, the Ollny Icicle Lights are an excellent investment for your Christmas decoration needs.

Light: Icicle | Power Source: Electrical Wiring | Number of Lights: 486, 40 feet | Control Method: Bluetooth

Quick Comparisons Of The Top Outdoor Christmas Lights

Top Outdoor Lights For Christmas	Light	Power Source	Number of Lights	Cable Length	Control Method
PREXTEX	Incandescent	Corded Electric	100	20 ft.	Remote
YIQU	LED	Corded Electric	200	82 ft.	Remote Control
Albelt	LED	Solar Powered	480	170 ft.	Button Control
Ollny	LED	Corded Electric	800	262 ft.	Remote Control
Kwaiffeo	LED	Corded Electric	192	6 tubes x 1 ft.	Touch
Jmexsuss	LED	Electrical Cable	600	168 ft.	Touch
QUWIN	LED	Source Cord Plug	300	115 ft.	Mobile App
KiflyTooin	LED	Corded Electric	400	32 ft.	Touch
Ollny Icicle Lights	Icicle	Electrical Wiring	486	40 ft.	Bluetooth

Outdoor Christmas Lights Buying Guide

1. Energy efficiency

Firstly, energy conservation is really important when it comes to outdoor Christmas lights because it helps to save energy and reduce our carbon footprint. It means using lights that consume less energy to light up your outdoor Christmas trees, lighting displays, and your home.

Non-energy-efficient light may use more energy and drive up your electric bill, and may require you to have an outdoor outlet nearby. Also, if they're incandescent bulbs, they may not last as long and can be more expensive to replace.

When you're purchasing outdoor Christmas lights, be sure to look for the ones that are designed for efficient energy use and fit within your budget. You can also consider solar-powered lights, which are great for outdoor use and can save you even more energy.

2. Power Source

When it comes to powering your lights, you have three main options: battery, solar, or electrical outlet.

Electric Battery powered lights are a great option if you don't have access to an outdoor electrical outlet or if you want to avoid running extension cords outside. Solar-powered lights are another option that can save you energy and money on your electric bill.

Electric lights are a traditional option that requires an outdoor electrical outlet. They can be very bright and have a longer lifespan than battery or solar-powered lights. However, they may use more energy and cost more on your electric bill.

If you want to save energy and avoid cords, solar or battery-powered lights may be a better option. If you want brighter lights and don't mind plugging in, electric lights may be the way to go.

3. Control Method

When it comes to controlling your outdoor Christmas lights, you have a few options. Many of the best outdoor Christmas lights come with a variety of control methods to choose from. The most common control method is a simple on/off switch, but you can also find lights with multiple lighting modes for more flexibility.

The remote control is another control method for outdoor Christmas lights that has become increasingly popular in recent years. With a remote control, you can easily turn your lights on and off, change the lighting mode, adjust the brightness, and set a timer without having to interact physically with the lights.

Another good option is automatic timer control, your lights will turn on and off according to a pre-set schedule. This can be done with a timer or a smart device that allows you to control your lights from your phone or Wi-Fi tablet.

4. Durability And Waterproofing

Outdoor Christmas lights will be exposed to harsh weather conditions, such as rain, snowflake, and wind. It is important to choose lights that are durable and waterproof and are specifically designed for outdoor use.

This ensures that the lights will not short-circuit or become damaged if they get wet. In the United States, lights with UL or ETL certifications are more likely to be durable and waterproof.

Investing in durable and waterproof outdoor Christmas lights will not only ensure that your lights last for many seasons but also provide a safe and enjoyable lighting display for the holiday season.

5. Length Of The String Lights

When choosing outdoor Christmas lights, the length of the string lights is an important consideration. The length of the string lights you need will depend on the size of the area you want to decorate.

For smaller areas such as balconies or small trees, a shorter rope light of around 20-30 feet may be sufficient. However, for larger areas such as the roofline of a house or a long fence, a longer string light of 30-48 feet or more may be necessary.

Therefore, it is important to choose a string light with the appropriate length and LED lamp spacing to achieve the desired lighting effect for your outdoor Christmas display.

FAQs Related To Outdoor Christmas Lights

You can hang outdoor Christmas lights on your eaves or rain gutter using clips, hooks, or adhesive tape specifically designed for outdoor use. Be mindful of the electrical connector and lead. Make sure to use a sturdy ladder and have someone hold it steady while you work.

It is not recommended to use indoor Christmas lights for outdoor use. Indoor lights are not designed to withstand the elements and may be a safety hazard. Instead, choose lights specifically labeled for outdoor use with an IP code indicating resistance to moisture and weathering.

A diode is an electronic component that allows current to flow in only one direction. In outdoor Christmas lights, light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are used to control the direction of current flow, resulting in efficient and long-lasting lights.

Consider using laser LED lights, which use less energy than traditional incandescent lights. You can also use a timer or smart plug, such as the ones offered by Walmart and Amazon, to control when the lights are on and make sure to turn them off when not in use.

Quick clip Christmas lights are designed to easily attach to gutters, shingles, glass, doors, and other surfaces without the need for hooks or other hardware. To use them for outdoor Christmas decorations, simply clip the fairy lights onto the desired surface and plug them in.

To ensure that your outdoor Christmas lights are moisture-resistant, look for lights with an IP code indicating resistance to moisture and weathering. Avoid placing the lights in areas prone to pooling water or where they may come into contact with the soil.

Final Verdict

As you can see, there's a whole world of outdoor Christmas lights out there, from the flashy and flamboyant to the cozy and classic. It can be easy to get tangled up in the different features and specifications. But don't let that dim your holiday cheer!

If you're someone who cares about the environment and wants to add a cozy ambiance to your outdoor space, the Albelt SSLGW is perfect for you. It's energy-efficient, solar-powered, and comes with a memory function, allowing you to easily customize it to your liking.

For those looking for a more versatile option with multiple lighting modes to choose from, the Upgraded LED Christmas String Lights by YIQU are also a great choice.

So go ahead and pick the one that best suits your needs and preferences, and enjoy the holiday season with the perfect outdoor Christmas lights!

Recently, mini ductless air conditioners have become one of the most popular cooling solutions due to their energy efficiency and compactness. And in my opinion, the Della 18000 BTU Mini Split, Cooper & Hunter’s 12000 BTU split, and the Pioneer Diamante Series are some of the best options to go for.

Ductless mini split air conditioners consist of small-sized compressor outdoor units, air handlers, and indoor evaporators that combine to form a wall-mounted unit. Their lack of ducts makes them easier to install and handle. They can be installed on the wall, ceiling, or floor units; and can be paired with existing air conditioning systems to save on energy bills.

On that note, here are the best energy-efficient ductless mini split AC I found on the market.

Best Mini Split Ductless AC

Here's the list of the 11 best mini split ductless AC, offering energy-efficient cooling without the need for ducts for easy installation and energy savings.

1. Best For Wi-Fi Enabled Control - DELLA Wi-Fi Enabled Mini Split Air Conditioner

DELLA Motto Series 18000 BTU Wifi Enabled Mini Split Air...

THIS ITEM IS NOT FOR SALE IN CALIFORNIA
[ENERGY EFFICIENT COOLING] This 18000 BTU/h, 17 SEER,...

What I like

18000 BTU/hour cooling capacity
Pre-charged air conditioning
Wi-Fi-enabled control
Quiet mode
Affordable

What I don't like

No installation instructions

The Della brand has manufactured this mini split air conditioner with an 18000 BTU/hour cooling and heating capacity for efficient energy use. It has a pre-charged air conditioning outdoor unit with proper certifications that has a ductless inverter, including heat pumps and dehumidifiers to help in heating, ventilation, and air conditioning. I have tested this AC to find that it has a cooling and hearing coverage of up to 650 square footage.

Moreover, these mini splits can be fully functional in cooling or heating multiple rooms, even on low temperatures such as 5 degrees Fahrenheit. While set to the cooling mode, this mini split AC unit will adjust the room temperature and show the updates in the remote control instead of the indoor unit. You can use the Wi-Fi-enabled control to adjust the temperature and airflow to your preference for improved efficiency and comfort.

What’s more, the DELLA 18000 BTU Mini Split Air Conditioner works at 40 decibels only, making it incredibly silent in quiet mode. Providing equal airflow to the entire space, its air handler can adjust itself from 60 to 90 degrees quickly. It also comes with an installation kit that can help you undertake a Do-It-Yourself installation easily.

Cooling Power: 18,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 17 | Voltage: 230 Volts | Dimensions: 8.82"D x 37"W x 12.44"H | Power Source: Corded Electric

2. Best For Compressor Warranty - Cooper & Hunter Ductless Mini Split AC

Cooper & Hunter MIA Series 12,000 BTU 115V Mini Split...

Cooper & Hunter MIA Series 12,000 BTU, 21.2 SEER, 115V, 1...
Quiet & Reliable Operation: Designed with low-noise...

What I like

AHRI-certified and ETL Intertek-approved
12,000 BTU/hour capacity
Whisper technology
Long-lasting warranty
Budget-friendly

What I don't like

Requires professional installation

AHRI-certified and ETL Intertek-approved, this ductless mini split system from Cooper & Hunter evenly cools and heats the room with its WiFi-friendly mechanism. It has a 12,000 BTU/hour capacity, and its whisper technology ensures noise reduction, making it ideal for bedrooms, living rooms, and even commercial spaces.

Running on a massive cooling power, Cooper & Hunter’s ductless mini split air conditioner evenly heats and cools down the rooms in the entire house, thus increasing its energy efficiency. It comes with pre-charged refrigerant, which easily circulates through the indoor air handlers in less time while reducing energy costs.

Moreover, the indoor and outdoor units are ready to install with their 16 feet copper line set, drainage extension, and communication wires. However, I highly recommend going for a professional installation instead of a DIY one for this product.

Lastly, Cooper & Hunter’s ductless mini splits have a 7-year warranty on the compressor and a 5-year warranty on the other parts. So, you can count on using this ductless air conditioner for a long time!

Cooling Power: 12,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Dimensions: 31.6"D x 7.4"W x 11.7"H | Power Source: Corded Electric

3. Best For Single Zone Ductless System - Pioneer Diamante Series Ductless Mini-Split Air Conditioner

PIONEER Diamante Series Ductless Mini-Split Air Conditioner...

High Efficiency Diamante Ductless Mini Split Inverter Heat...
Use for both cooling and heating: 12000 BTU/hour with 20...

What I like

Targeted performance
Double-directional air handlers
Remote control
Dimmable LED display
Strong outdoor unit

What I don't like

Requires sturdy building insulation

Pioneer’s mini split air conditioners from its Diamante Series are specifically designed for single-zone use and bring individualized comfort to the targeted areas. Ideal for residential and light commercial cooling experience and home automation, Pioneer’s ductless mini split air conditioner has a remote control operation for a wireless temperature adjustment. Its 12,000 BTU/hour capacity and automatic double-directional air handlers can control variable airflow and reduce energy costs.

These mini-split ACs deliver cooling, dehumidification, heating, and ventilation at just the touch of a button. With its large LED dimmable display, flat panel, automatic dual swing cooling system, and air louvers, the unit aims for energy efficiency and high performance. What’s more, its washable air filters make it easy to maintain while the multi-speed fan operates quietly.

Pioneer’s mini split system has a DC power inverter outdoor compressor with high efficiency in maintaining variable speed. Moreover, its galvanized metal construction coupled with electrostatic epoxy paint helps it withstand extreme climates and protect the thermostat. This unit from Pioneer also comes with different modes, including turbo mode, follow-me, ECO, sleep mode, and Freeze Protection.

Lastly, this mini split AC comes with a 16 feet line set, installation kit, free vibration absorber, and other accessories for easy professional or DIY installation.

Cooling Power: 12,000 BTU/hour | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Dimensions: 8.12"D x 32"W x 11.5"H | Power Source: Corded Electric

4. Best For Digital Assistance - MRCOOL 20 SEER Ductless Split System

MRCOOL DIY 18k BTU 20 SEER Ductless Heat Pump Split System...

Country of origin : United States
Easy DIY installation: pre-charged R-410A 25ft quick connect...

What I like

Digital assistance
740 square feet of coverage
Leak detection alarm
25-inch pre-charged line set
Low ambient cooling

What I don't like

Expensive

MRCOOL is one of the leading brands in the ductless mini split system industry in the United States and is highly rated by customers on most shopping platforms. Equipped with heat pumps and Wi-Fi-engineered remote control, the MRCOOL DIY Ductless Split System is easy to set up with just a few settings from your smartphone. These mini split air conditioners are a part of the Energy Star series, which can be installed anywhere without expensive installation equipment.

Furthermore, its 12000 BTU/hour capacity can easily heat or cool a room up to 750 square footage in dimensions. I observed that MRCOOL’s ductless mini splits are their own SmartHVAC App, compatible with Alexa and Google Assistant, so you can control them from any Android or iOS smartphone. Its leakage detection alarm is another smart feature that makes it stand out among other mini-split systems.

This ductless mini split air conditioner can be an ideal energy-efficient solution for greenhouses, server rooms, and other spaces that require cooling all year round. It can improve air conditioning with low ambient cooling even in low temperatures such as 5 degrees Fahrenheit.

Lastly, it has a 25-inch pre-charged line set that allows DIY installation without special tools or professional help. And MRCOOL’s shipping, which divides the outdoor and indoor units into two packages for reduced chances of damage, is quite innovative.

Cooling Power: 12,000 BTU/hour | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20 | Voltage: 230 Volts | Dimensions: 16"D x 30"W x 22"H | Power Source: Corded Electric

5. Best For High System Efficiency - Klimaire Ductless Mini-Split Air Conditioner

Klimaire 12,000 BTU 20.8 SEER2 Ductless Mini-Split Inverter...

𝐄𝐗𝐂𝐄𝐏𝐓𝐈𝐎𝐍𝐀𝐋...
𝐏𝐄𝐑𝐅𝐎𝐑𝐌𝐀𝐍𝐂𝐄...

What I like

High SEER rating
Self-cleaning technology
Anti-corrosive golden fin
Multiple modes
5-year warranty

What I don't like

No return policy

Klimaire promises an energy-efficient solution to modern problems of indoor air quality with their ductless mini split air conditioner with a high SEER rating of 20.8. Another unique technology I have been looking for in mini split ACs is the self-cleaning function which can be activated through the remote control. Here, it cleans and carefully dries the evaporator, preventing mold, mildew, and bad odor while operating.

Similar to the best mini split ACs, this product also has a specialized design for its outdoor compressor, which allows defrosting the unit even in very low temperatures. Moreover, the outdoor unit is pre-charged and includes a base pan and space heaters to improve the performance of the capacitor. It also has a built-in anti-corrosive Golden Fin, which helps the indoor units perform with noise as low as 25 decibels.

What’s more, the mini split system series from Kilmaire has low ambient heating and cooling, which can be operated via a remote. And unlike window air conditioners, this ductless mini split AC has multiple modes, including customizable infrared settings, auto-restart, sleep mode, turbocharger, follow-me, etc.

Kilmaire’s single-zone ductless mini splits are ideal for detached or small rooms with minimal floor space or where the ceiling or attic is not suitable for ductwork. It also comes with a 15 feet installation kit with cables, mounting brackets, and other accessories to minimize installation costs. And finally, Kilmaire provides a 5-year manufacturing warranty on their mini splits.

Cooling Power: 12,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20.8 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Dimensions: Not Specified | Power Source: DC

6. Best For Compact Spaces - OLMO Alpic Ductless Mini Split AC/Heating System

OLMO 9,000 BTU 115V Single Zone Wall Mount Ductless Mini...

OLMO Alpic 9,000 BTU, 110/120V Ductless Mini Split Air...
UL Listed, AHRI Certified. Works for heating with ambient...

What I like

Toshiba internal compressor
Programmable smart remote
Leak detection ability
Warranty
Multiple modes

What I don't like

Requires professional installation

This is a small-sized mini split AC with a ducted system suitable for bedrooms and living rooms that require energy-efficient heating and cooling all year round. I find this mini split AC reliable due to its built-in sturdy internal compressor from the trustworthy brand Toshiba. Moreover, its heat pump and indoor air handler can maintain both hot and cold temperatures for a long time, even during cold weather.

Its outdoor unit is designed to improve comfort and decrease labor costs during cleaning and maintenance. The OLMO Alpic Ductless Mini Split AC has a programmable smart remote for precise temperature control and mode navigation. You can choose the sleep mode for overnight air conditioning or the Turbo mode for fast conditioning.

Besides these, there are other modes, including intelligent defrosting, 24-hour timing, etc. Its leak detection alarm is also helpful in resolving internal damage or installation issues before it severely affects the living comfort. This mini split system comes with a pre-flared line set with accessories such as nuts and communication wires for a speedy installation. However, the company OLMO recommends professional installation over DIY.

Lastly, the Toshiba internal compressor has a 5-year limited warranty, while the rest of the air conditioner has a two-year limited manufacturer warranty.

Cooling Power: 9,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 16.5 | Voltage: 120 Volts | Dimensions: 20"D x 7"W x 7"H | Power Source: Corded Electric

7. Best For Four-Way Swing Function - ROVSUN Mini Split AC/Heating System

ROVSUN 9000 BTU Mini Split AC/Heating System with Inverter,...

【Fast Cooling】9,000 BTU mini split air conditioner with...
【Energy Saving】This 19 SEER, 115V/60Hz, AHRI Certified...

What I like

AHRI-certified AC unit
Clear instructions
Four-way swing function
Elegant design
Fast delivery

What I don't like

Lower cooling coverage

With its 9,000 BTU capacity, the ROVSUN Mini Split air conditioner can quickly circulate the cold air in bedrooms, living rooms, offices, or apartments up to 450 square feet. Its high-quality compressor unit and multiple air handlers are AHRI certified and, therefore, have higher efficiency. With its efficient 19 SEER rating, ROVSUN’s mini splits can help you save more money and energy, making it an eco-friendly option.

I found this ductless mini split air conditioner from ROVSUN quite easy-to-use since it comes with clear instructions and an easily programmable remote. You can enjoy a cooling experience ranging from 61-88 °F along with various modes, including mute mode, 24-hour timer, turbo, sleep mode, and fan speed selection. Besides, it can add an elegant touch to your space due to its minimalist, sleek design while working with noise as low as 32 dB.

Equipped with a four-Way Swing technology, it can evenly distribute hot or cool air according to your preference in just a few minutes. Further, I have noticed that this mini split AC is speedily delivered within two to six business days, while the other central air or single zone ACs take quite a long time. ROVSUN also has responsive customer service that prioritizes accurate and timely assistance.

Cooling Power: 9,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 19 | Voltage: 115 Volts | Dimensions: 31.92'' W x 8.07' D' x 11.49'' H | Power Source: Corded Electric

8. Best For Heating Seasonal Performance Factor - Classic America WiFi Ductless Wall Mount Mini Split

Vtronix Classic America 12,000 BTU (19 SEER2, 110 VAC) Mini...

WiFi AND ALEXA COMPATIBILITY: Ductless mini split heat...
SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE HEAT PUMP: Delivers 12,000 BTU/hour...

What I like

Toshiba or GMCC Compressor
10 Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF)
Alexa-enabled
Thermostat protection
PTC strip

What I don't like

WiFi connection problems

Classic America is a small business brand that manufactures energy-efficient mini splits delivered in simple, eco-friendly packages. Their One-Ton Ductless Wall Mount Mini Split operates with the help of an ETL-approved Toshiba or GMCC compressor, which makes it durable and resilient. Powered by 110-120 VAC electricity and 12 amp minimal current draw and with a 20 SEER rating, these mini split air conditioners can reduce your energy consumption.

This air conditioner also comes with a Wi-Fi, Alexa-enabled remote with easily controllable settings, including auto, heat, dry, cool, and fan speed levels. Besides, the timer function and dimmable display screen are other energy-saving features that can reduce the electric load on the mini split AC. Plus, the built-in air louver sends the airflow evenly throughout the room rather than in a single direction.

With its timer, automatic air swing, switchover, and three-speed fans, you save up to 30% energy with Classic America’s mini split ductless AC. What’s more, you need to worry about damage during low temperatures as the temperature monitor and thermostat protection prevents the air handler and compressor from freezing. Further, the additional PTC strip allows the unit to release hot air even in extremely low temperatures.

Classic America provides 16 ft. insulated refrigeration tubing, pipe wrap, and interconnecting wires for easy installation.

Cooling Power: 12,000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 20 | Voltage: 120 Volts | Dimensions: 8"D x 32"W x 11"H | Power Source: Corded Electric

9. Best For Easy-To-Clean Filter - ApooDr Mini Split Air Conditioner

ApooDr 9000 BTU Mini Split Air Conditioner Ductless Inverter...

( Inverter Technology)Energy Efficient - 9000 BTU, 16.5...
5 Modes for Your Comfort – You can choose among Auto,...

What I like

Easily washable air filter
Extra groove teeth
Reliable golden fin
Multiple accessible modes
Product Warranty

What I don't like

No installation instructions

This all-in-one ductless mini split AC has a high-performance DC fan motor with high-speed levels ranging from grade 2 to grade 10. When set to the heating mode, the high number of groove teeth on the tube increases the heat transfer area and efficiency by 7.3% while keeping the air clean. Moreover, the heat exchangers have a unique anti-corrosive golden coating which prevents damage from rain, air with high salt content, and other corrosive elements.

I found this mini split AC to be very functional and easy to maintain because of its easily washable air filter, which removes any hassle during maintenance. The ‘golden fin’ also removes any changes of interlopers, such as birds or pests, from breeding in the outdoor unit. Its backlit LCD remote with proximity sensor further allows you to access different AC modes, including auto, heat, dry, and fan modes, and also utilizes the Self Diagnosis function with just the touch of a button.

ApooDr provides a free installation kit and other accessories, including communication wires and a copper line set. ApooDr also offers a 5-year warranty on the compressor and a 2-year warranty on the other parts. However, the mini split AC unit requires professional installation to avoid system issues and wiring damage.

Cooling Power: 9000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 16.5 | Voltage: 110 Volts | Dimensions: 7.64"D x 28.15"W x 11.22"H | Power Source: Corded Electric

10. Best For High Energy Savings - TOSOT Ductless Mini-Split Air Conditioner

TOSOT 9,000 BTU Ductless Mini-Split Air Conditioner,...

Cooling and Heating：The Muse Series advanced compressor...
Powerfully Efficient：With an innovative inverter...

What I like

High SEER rating
Withstands extreme weather
Anti-corrosive copper pipes
Easy installation
Innovative compressor

What I don't like

No technical assistance

TOSOT’s ductless mini split AC has a higher SEER rating than most mini splits on the market and saves up to 62% on energy costs. Besides, its powerful and sturdy compressor can provide even airflow during extreme temperatures such as 115-degree heat or -13 degrees cold.

Equipped with innovative inverter technology, TOSOT’s mini split has a variable speed feature that automatically adjusts itself to achieve the preferred temperature. Since this is a split system, the indoor and outdoor units are separate, reducing the working noise, unlike window units. You will barely realize the indoor unit is there since it works with noise as low as 24 dB. Moreover, the TOSOT Muse series is AHRI and ETL-certified for high-quality construction, such as anti-corrosive copper pipes that can withstand high pressure.

Since it targets a single zone without wasting energy in heating the entire house, this ductless mini split can also help the space heat up better in winter. Lastly, if you know how to do electrical work and install refrigerant, the 16.5 ft. copper line set, power cord, and signal cables will equip you to perform a DIY installation. If you’re unsure, I recommend getting professional help for installation.

Cooling Power: 9000 British Thermal Units | Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio: 21 | Voltage: 230 Volts | Dimensions: Not Specified | Power Source: Corded Electric

Best Mini Split Ductless AC Comparison Table

Top Ductless Mini-Split ACs	Cooling Power	SEER Rating	Voltage	Dimensions	Power Source
DELLA Wi-Fi Enabled Mini Split AC	18000 BTU	17	230 Volts	8.82"D x 37"W x 12.44"H	Corded Electric
Cooper & Hunter Ductless Mini Split AC	12000 BTU	20	115 Volts	31.6"D x 7.4"W x 11.7"H	Corded Electric
Pioneer Diamante Series Ductless Mini-Split AC	12000 BTU	20	115 Volts	8.12"D x 32"W x 11.5"H	Corded Electric
MRCOOL DIY Ductless Split System	12000 BTU	20	230 Volts	16"D x 30"W x 22"H	Corded Electric
Klimaire 20.8 Ductless Mini-Split AC	12000 BTU	20.8	115 Volts	Not Specified	DC
OLMO Alpic Ductless Mini Split AC/Heating System	9000 BTU	16.5	120 Volts	20"D x 7"W x 7"H	Corded Electric
ROVSUN Mini Split AC/Heating System	9000 BTU	19	115 Volts	31.92'' W x 8.07' D' x 11.49'' H	Corded Electric
Classic America Ductless Wall-Mount Mini-Split	12000 BTU	20	120 Volts	8"D x 32"W x 11"H	Corded Electric
ApooDr Mini Split Air Conditioner	9000 BTU	16.5	110 Volts	7.64"D x 28.15"W x 11.22"H	Corded Electric
TOSOT Ductless Mini-Split Air Conditioner	9000 BTU	21	230 Volts	Not Specified	Corded Electric

Buying Guide For The Best Mini Split Ductless AC

For most people, technical home appliances and HVAC terms like SEER, HSPF, BTU, or cooling capacity are not common knowledge and are seldom talked about. However, knowing these terms is very important when purchasing ductless mini splits. To help you make an informed and correct decision that will suit your family’s needs, I have carefully curated a buyer’s guide that can be followed. Here are a few parameters to research and consider:

Cooling Capacity

The capacity of ductless mini splits is usually measured in BTU, or British Thermal Unit, which measures the energy it takes to change your home temperature. Unlike central heating and cooling systems, mini splits can fully function with low BTU as they mostly focus on a single zone instead of multiple rooms. Usually, the high BTU in split air conditioners is 24,000; however, mini splits for a single room range an average of 9,000 to 12,000 BTU.

Smaller rooms, such as the nursery or study, can function with an 8,000 BTU mini split. You can save energy even further by using a 5,000 BTU mini split for smaller, closed spaces or garages.

Energy Savings

The energy efficiency of each HVAC system is measured by the SEER and HSPF ratings; the more the ratings, the higher the energy-saving percentage. So, before purchasing a ductless mini split, check if the product falls below the EnergyStar listing and meets the ratios mentioned above.

Price

Of course, it is important to find products that will fall into your budget and save money in the long run. The price usually depends on the system size or ton; however, the bigger it isn’t always, the better. For a pocket-friendly purchase, consider the amount you’ll be saving in energy and the overall cost of the AC unit.

Installation

Most ductless mini splits come with full installation kits and instructions that enable you to install them yourself. However, some AC units might require professional installation, which will further cost you money. Besides, it is recommended to opt for professional services to ensure it doesn’t lead to damage.

Ductless Split AC FAQs

There are various benefits of ductless mini splits but the main advantages are their flexible zoning ability, size, and precise cooling of individual rooms. Moreover, you can find many ductless ACs that allow up to four indoor air handling units for one outdoor heat pumping system. So, you can cool up to four rooms with a single ductless mini split – how cool is that?

And if you have more rooms or zones to cover, you can simply add more mini splits to support more indoor air handlers. We recommend consulting your AC installer to best indoor handler configuration to optimize the temperature of your home.

Regardless of whether you have one or more than one indoor air handlers, they’re all connected to the outdoor unit by components called the ‘line set.’ To form this connection, your AC installer will drill a hole (about two or three inches in diameter) in the exterior wall. This helps the line consisting of copper tubes and electrical wires run between the components.

You can also find tubes and casts in local hardware stores to hide these lines in case you’re worried about messing up the aesthetics of the exterior wall.

Air conditioning systems with ducts are responsible for significant energy loss during the cooling process. Central air conditioners that utilize multiple ducts for circulating cool air often face this issue, and require frequent sealing of the ducts to maintain efficiency. Using ductless splits will eliminate AC ducts altogether, so you won’t need to worry about high energy bills or sealing them every other year.

Ductless units are also constructed with energy efficient components and technology that further help you save money and energy while cooling your home.

All ductless mini splits come with built-in control panels that allow you to seamlessly adjust the temperature and utilize different settings. They also have remote control technology with each indoor air handler unit, so you set each zone at a different temperature remotely.

These methods of control are much more efficient than the traditional thermostat control found in central air conditioning systems.

Compared to central HVAC units and portable systems, ductless mini splits are pretty quiet. Air moving through multiple ducts at high speeds can make a loud noise, but since these units are ductless, there’s no chance of that happening. That’s why people who prefer a quieter home environment most often go for ductless splits.

Conclusion

Despite its growing popularity and advanced technology, many people find themselves asking: is a ductless mini split worth it? Why not just install a window AC or normal split units? For one, they are much cheaper than traditional heating and cooling machines, and they also reduce energy bills in the long run. Besides this, there are various benefits of a mini split, and all the products on this list offer some of them.

After testing various options, I’d say the Della mini split tops the list with its massive cooling capacity, area coverage, and ultra-silent mode. Coming to a close second, both the 12,000 BTU models from Cooper & Hunter and Pioneer’s Diamante Series stand out for their targeted performance, warranty, and advanced ambient air conditioning.

That said, I’ll be signing off now. Stick around for similar product reviews and guides.

Goodbye!

The Midea EasyCool is a small air conditioner capable of cooling up to 150 square feet at an affordable price that may suit many. That said, it is up to user preference that predicates the best option for them.

Beating the summer heat without an air conditioner is tough, especially when the days only seem to be getting hotter.

For smaller spaces, you will need a smaller air conditioner, as larger ACs consume too much power for what is effectively unnecessary. And when looking for smaller ACs, you’ll be sifting through the window and portable air conditioning options.

So, wondering which smallest portable air conditioners make for the best cooling devices? Check out my recommendations for the best air conditioners to get a better idea of the best choice at the best price.

Best Smallest ACs Reviewed

Here’s the list of the 9 best smallest ACs of 2023 to help you beat the summer heat in smaller spaces efficiently and cost-effectively.

1. Best Overall: Midea EasyCool Window Air Conditioner

Midea 5,000 BTU EasyCool Small Window Air Conditioner - Cool...

PERFECT FOR SMALLER ROOMS - Midea's Affordable Window AC...
ENERGY EFFICIENT- Midea's 5,000 BTU window air conditioner...

What I like

Quiet operation
Easy to install
Energy efficient use
Affordable pricing

What I don't like

No included remote control

The Midea EasyCool Window Air Conditioner is a compact and affordable cooling device aimed to be an option for small rooms.

This is a 5,000 BTU air conditioner that can cool down a 150-square-foot room, along with several settings to alter the cooling experience. These settings include seven temperature settings, as well as two cooling and fan-only speeds. Additionally, the device has two-way air directions to cover as much area as possible.

The Midea EasyCool Window AC has a Combined Energy Efficiency Rating of 11, which makes its energy-saving capability quite high. It comes with a filter that can be removed and washed, eliminating the need to replace them frequently. On top of this, the AC is reasonably quiet and capable of removing moisture from the air at the rate of 1.27 pints per hour.

I found that the Midea EasyCool operates quite easily with mechanical controls. The buttons on the on-device console respond quickly, allowing time, temperature, and mode adjustments once pressed.

Lastly, the Midea Group AC is covered by a one-year limited warranty for parts and servicing. The device is easy to install and suitable for windows that are 23-36 inches wide and 13 inches high.

Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 5,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 11.0 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 2 | Noise Level: 57 dB

2. Most Energy Efficient: Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner

Frigidaire Energy Star 5,000 BTU 115V Window-Mounted Mini...

Compact Cooling: Don't let the miniature size of this 5,000...
Special Features: Digital display to easily control your...

What I like

Highly energy efficient
Responsive AC controls
Extending side panels
Low fan noise

What I don't like

The remote control lacks a backlight

This window-mounted Frigidaire entry in the segment is a cooling device that is designed to fit many window sizes using extending side panels. It is an Energy Star-certified air conditioner, meaning that the AC is certified to consume very little power during operation, lowering your utility bills.

The Frigidaire model is a 5,000 BTU small window AC unit that can cool air in a 150-square-foot room with little trouble. To do so, the appliance makes use of programmable temperature presets that maintain the chosen room temperature.

In addition to the on-console panel, the air conditioner can be operated using a remote control. The buttons are responsive and react quickly to each button press, meaning that you won’t have to wait for the settings to change.

The dust filter can be removed for cleaning without any hassle to speak of. Periodic maintenance allows for effective and malfunction-free operation for a long time.

I found that the Frigidaire window AC is about as quiet as the Midea EasyCool, sitting at around 50 decibels on the lowest fan setting. Even at the highest fan setting, the window unit makes very little noise that can easily go unnoticed.

And lastly, in the event of a power outage, the AC can restart automatically at its previous settings once the power is restored. You won’t have to worry about fine-tuning the settings all over again in such cases.

Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 5,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 12.0 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 2 | Noise Level: 52 dB

3. Best Portability: SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner

SereneLife 3-in-1 Portable Air Conditioner with Built-in...

HANDY AND PORTABLE: The SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner...
THREE OPERATING MODES: The compact floor AC indoor cooler...

What I like

Powerful 8,000 BTU air conditioner
Lightweight and sleek design
Built-in dehumidifier
Freestanding room air conditioner

What I don't like

The water drainage hose is not included

The SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner is one of the smallest portable air conditioners that is primarily meant to be used in small spaces. It boasts a lightweight and sleek design that is intended to blend seamlessly with all aesthetic sensibilities.

This 8,000 BTU air conditioner system has no less than four operating modes that include dehumidifier, cooling, heating, and fan modes. Additionally, it features an automatic swing mode with a moving wind vent to cover as much of the room as possible.

The built-in dehumidifier removes moisture from the air during particularly humid nights at the rate of 290 cubic meters of moisture per hour. Moreover, the functionality doubles as an energy-saving option while eliminating the need to purchase a dedicated dehumidifier.

Its remote control is responsive and gives you access to adjusting all of the aforementioned settings in a responsive manner. The remote control also allows other functions such as switching between Celsius and Fahrenheit, sleep timer, and fan speed.

Topping it all off, the SereneLife Portable Air Conditioner has a noise level of 55 dB, which is comparable to other quiet cooling window units.

Floor Area: 215 square feet | Cooling Power: 8,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 9.8 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 55 dB

4. Most Versatile Small AC: Vremi Portable Air Conditioner

Vremi 6,250 BTU Portable Air Conditioner for Rooms up to 250...

What I like

Four operating modes
Compact cooling unit
Removable and reusable air filter
Quick and easy installation

What I don't like

Not energy efficient

The Vremi Portable Air Conditioner is a small portable air conditioner that aims to be flexible with its multiple operating modes. It can be used effectively in rooms that are sized between 150 and 250 square feet.

This 6,250 BTU portable air conditioner has four distinct operating modes meant for different purposes, namely sleep, cool, fan, and dry. I found the sleep mode to be an option worth considering for light sleepers, as it only produces 51 dB of noise.

When in dry mode, the air conditioner can remove up to 63 pints of moisture every day, acting as a dehumidifier in this mode. And in fan mode, the air conditioner is capable of up to 880 r/min, depending on your settings. Lastly, the cool mode makes use of the 6,250 BTUs that the unit has access to cool air effectively.

The Vremi Portable Air Conditioner has a removable air filter that can be washed and reused to maintain its performance consistency. Ideally, it should be cleaned weekly for optimum performance.

As for the secondary features, the AC comes with an LED display screen, along with remote control storage. The latter is particularly useful if you’re worried about losing the remote in your room.

Lastly, the portable AC unit is easy to install next to an accessible window. Installing it is as simple as attaching the hose and window slide adapter, after which the cooling device can be turned on.

Floor Area: 150-250 square feet | Cooling Power: 6,250 BTUs | SEER Rating: 2.6 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 51 dB

5. Best Small AC On A Budget: TCL Window Air Conditioner

TCL Home 5,000 BTU Window Air Conditioner, Mechanical...

POWERFUL COOLING CAPACITY: The 5,000 BTU window air...
COMFORTABLY QUIET: Thoughtfully designed to not disturb you,...

What I like

Affordable pricing
Easy to install
Simple unit operation
Included installation kit

What I don't like

No included remote control

The TCL 5WR1 is one of the most affordable small air conditioners on the market while being one of the quietest models available. Its noise level is at 50 dB, which is quiet enough not to be obtrusive.

This model boasts a cooling capacity of 5,000 BTUs, which can cover an area of 150 square feet. With two fan speeds and several temperature control settings, the TCL AC allows you to choose your level of comfort. You can tweak the settings with the two knobs present on the console that turn smoothly and click into place without much trouble.

Additionally, the direction of the airflow can be customized to reach where you need it the most, providing air in 8 directions. This is made possible through two 4-way directional vents that move independently of each other.

The air conditioner can fit window sizes that are 23-36 inches wide and 14.5 inches high. It can be installed quite easily using the included installation kit, so long as the unit can fit the window.

Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 5,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 11.0 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 2 | Noise Level: 50 dB

6. Best Premium Small AC: Black + Decker Portable Air Conditioner

BLACK+DECKER Portable Air Conditioner, 8,000 BTU for Rooms...

Three-in-One Unit: Black and Decker portable air conditioner...
For Small Rooms & Living Spaces: Our room air conditioners...

What I like

High cooling capacity
The “Follow Me” function
Self-evaporating dehumidifier setting
Simple installation

What I don't like

Low energy efficiency

The Black + Decker portable air conditioner is one of the more premium models on this list, offering a high cooling capacity and several features. It is a quiet cooling unit that doesn’t surpass 54 dBs during operation, which may be helpful in an office environment.

Boasting 8,500 BTUs of cooling capacity, the Black + Decker air conditioner is powerful enough to be used during harsh summers. Using the settings incorporated in the device, the air conditioner can keep you comfortable throughout the season.

One of the first things I noticed about the Black + Decker air conditioner is the “Follow Me” function included in the remote. This allows the remote to function as a mini-thermostat that gives you precise control over the room temperature. It makes it so that you can choose how cool a specific area of the room is simply through the remote.

In addition to the normal cooling mode, the small portable air conditioner can operate in fan and dehumidifier modes. For the latter, the device has a built-in self-evaporating design that eliminates the hassle of removing accumulated moisture every week. The portable air conditioner doesn’t require maintenance as frequently as other devices, only needing general cleaning every once in a while.

Lastly, the Black + Decker portable air conditioner can be used right out of the box with no extensive installation required. You only need to attach the hose, plug it in and turn the switch on for it to begin cooling.

Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 8,500 BTUs | SEER Rating: 4.2 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 54 dB

7. Quietest Small AC: Keystone Window-Mounted Air Conditioner

No products found.

What I like

Powerful dehumidifier
Quiet operation
Energy-efficient settings
LED display

What I don't like

Built-in remote thermostat may be a little inaccurate

The Keystone Window-Mounted Air Conditioner is a cooling device that is suited for small living spaces, bedrooms, or offices. This AC comes in two variants: one with an Energy Star certification and one without, where the former is the more expensive of the pair. The model I reviewed was the one without the Energy Star rating.

Featuring 5,000 BTUs of cooling capacity, the Keystone AC can effectively cool a room up to 150 square feet in all operation modes. Even with a cooling capacity that rivals ACs at a similar price point, the Keystone air conditioner manages to be just a little quieter. Its noise levels are at 49 dBs when operating on low settings, which is low enough not to be noticeable easily.

This air conditioner is operated using a remote controller that has a built-in thermostat. The options you choose on the remote are reflected on the LED display on the AC itself, which responds the moment a button is pressed.

Alongside the cooling mode, you can also switch to the dehumidifier mode, which removes 1.3 pints of moisture from the room every hour. Moreover, you can choose from a few energy-conscious settings that can help lower your electricity bills. These include a dedicated energy-saver mode, a sleep mode, a 24-hour timer, and an auto-restart functionality.

The chassis of the Keystone portable air conditioner can be removed to allow for easier installation. Leaning into this is the included adjustable window kit to make window installation even simpler.

Floor Area: 150 square feet | Cooling Power: 5,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 11.2 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 55 dB

8. Best Visual Design: TOSOT Portable Air Conditioner

TOSOT 8,000 BTU(ASHRAE) 5,000 BTU (DOE) Portable Air...

Powerful Cooling: Cool spaces up to 300 square feet with an...
1 Product, 3 Uses: This is not only a Portable AC but also a...

What I like

Powerful portable AC unit
Lower noise mode
X-Fan Technology for self-evaporation
Visually interesting design

What I don't like

Exhaust hose limit positioning options

The TOSOT Portable Air Conditioner features a visually interesting design that strives to balance function with it. This is a powerful cooling unit that is one of the more expensive air conditioners on this list.

Rated at 8,000 BTUs (ASHRAE), the TOSOT air conditioner is capable of effectively cooling spaces up to 300 square feet. This is powerful enough to be used as a main cooling device in your living room, master bedroom, or home office.

The device features three main modes: cooling, fan, and dehumidifier. As a dehumidifier, the small portable air conditioner is capable of removing 2.3 pints of moisture per hour. Small portable air conditioners are more efficient at cooling dry air, which gives using the dehumidifier to take care of the humidity some merit.

You can switch the TOSOT Portable Air Conditioner to low noise mode during the night as well. As the name suggests, the mode lowers the noise produced by the small portable air conditioner unit to provide you with an optimal sleeping experience.

The small portable air conditioner also makes use of the X-Fan technology that keeps the fan running at a low speed. This serves as a form of self-evaporation, eliminating any residual water in the machine and the exhaust hose.

As for the installation, the device needs to be in proximity of a window by following the detailed instructions in the user manual. The process is relatively quick, taking up to 15 minutes at most to finish.

Floor Area: 300 square feet | Cooling Power: 8,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 4.4 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 3 | Noise Level: 49 dB

9. Best Medium-Range AC: Rosewill Portable Air Conditioner

Rosewill Portable Air Conditioner 7000 BTU, AC Fan Unit &...

3 CONVENIENT MODES: Use as an Air Conditioner, Fan and...
2 SPEEDS & MORE: Adjust between two fan speeds, save energy...

What I like

Self-evaporating dehumidifier
High cooling capacity
Touch-operated LED control panel
Removable and reusable air filter

What I don't like

It can be quite noisy

For a medium-range portable AC unit, the Rosewill Portable Air Conditioner is an option to consider. The air conditioner features a large touch-operated LED control panel, along with a remote control, to make AC operation easier.

This small portable air conditioner boasts a high cooling capacity of 7,000 BTUs, which is enough to cool a single room, such as a bedroom, apartment, and the like. Accompanying the powerful operation are two adjustable fan speeds and power-saving options. The power-saving options are fairly standard, offering a sleep mode and automatic timer to save energy.

Rosewill Portable Air Conditioner is a fairly compact cooling device that can be moved easily with the four mobility caster wheels. The free-standing air conditioner can also function as a dehumidifier with a self-evaporating system, drawing out moisture without the need to clean it up repeatedly.

This small portable air conditioner can cool a small room of up to 200 square feet with relative ease in all of its featured modes. It also comes with a removable and reusable EVA filter to clear out air pollution and provide you with refreshing air.

Floor Area: 200 square feet | Cooling Power: 7,000 BTUs | SEER Rating: 2.0 | Number Of Fan Speeds: 2 | Noise Level: 60 dB

Best Smallest ACs Comparison Table

Smallest ACs	Floor Area	Cooling Power	SEER Rating	Number Of Fan Speeds	Noise Level
Midea EasyCool Window Air Conditioner	150 Square Feet	5,000 BTUs	11	2	57 dB
Frigidaire Window-Mounted Room Air Conditioner	150 Square Feet	5,000 BTUs	12	2	52 dB
SereneLife SLPAC8 Portable Air Conditioner	215 Square Feet	8,000 BTUs	9.8	3	55 dB
Vremi Portable Air Conditioner	150-250 Square Feet	6,250 BTUs	2.6	3	51 dB
TCL Window Air Conditioner	150 Square Feet	5,000 BTUs	11	2	50 dB
Black + Decker Portable Air Conditioner	150 Square Feet	8,500 BTUs	4.2	3	54 dB
Keystone Window-Mounted Air Conditioner	150 Square Feet	5,000 BTUs	11.2	3	55 dB
TOSOT Portable Air Conditioner	300 Square Feet	8,000 BTUs	4.4	3	49 dB
Rosewill Portable Air Conditioner	200 Square Feet	7,000 BTUs	2	2	60 dB

Buying Guide For The Best Smallest AC

For rooms with limited area and no access to HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning), the smallest portable air conditioners are a great option to manage room temperature. They are designed to be easy to install and be as efficient at cooling small spaces as possible while being simple to use and maintain.

If you’ve never purchased a portable air conditioner before, it can be troubling to pick from the smallest portable air conditioners on the market. After all, not all air conditioners are created equal, and some are bound to be better than others. As a consumer, you will want to maximize performance for the money you invest in the new air conditioner.

There are five main considerations that predicate whether a small air conditioner suits your needs: AC size, placement, ease of maintenance, noise, and energy consumption.

Sizing The Air Conditioner

It’s nothing less than a tragic occurrence when you purchase a new, fancy mini-split ductless air conditioner, and it turns out to be of the wrong size. The AC can neither be too large nor too small for the space you use it in. An air conditioner that is too large may make your attic feel like an arctic tundra while spiking your energy bills. On the flip side, an air conditioner that is too small can barely make a dent in the overall room temperature.

Fortunately, it’s easy to tell if the smallest portable air conditioner is of the right size or not using the British Thermal Unit (BTU). Every AC is assigned a BTU rating, which increases by a factor of 20 for every square foot of the living space. For instance, a 300-square-foot room requires an AC with 8,000 BTUs.

This rating increases with the size and weight of the AC as well, in addition to the size of the room itself. As a consequence of this increase in size and power, the energy consumption of the appliance increases as well. This number will also fluctuate based on the ceiling height, solar exposure, and if the area has a kitchen.

Medium-sized spaces can require a 12,000 BTU air conditioner, while larger rooms require upwards of 20,000 BTUs. But for spaces no larger than 100 square feet, you won’t require a small portable air conditioner unit that is substantially more powerful than 2,000 BTUs.

Placing The Air Conditioner

Placing the smallest portable air conditioner to maximize the cooling capacity is fairly straightforward. What is not quite as simple, however, is to ensure that the hot air it produces can leave the room through hoses. This means that the small portable air conditioner must be placed within a few feet of a window.

Now, it is worth mentioning that not all ACs have this strict placement restriction. Chillers don’t require window ventilation and you can place them wherever you like, so long as a window is open.

Ease Of Maintenance

Small portable air conditioners don’t require much in the way of maintenance apart from clearing out the collected moisture. These devices drain moisture from the air to cool the room down, which is then collected in a pan housed inside. There are several solutions for this, such as using a gravity-based draining system, removing the pan manually, or using an external pump.

Ideally, the air conditioner that takes care of this problem on its own would be the best. These appliances make use of a fully self-evaporative design that, as the description suggests, evaporates most of the accumulated water without external aid. You will only need to clean these very occasionally, and the task takes a few minutes at most.

Apart from moisture, ACs require the filters to be cleaned as well, which house behind a panel as well. Typically, they can be removed just as easily as the moisture pan. And lastly, you will need to periodically defrost the unit if ice builds up on the cooling coils.

Of course, several models have features that take care of this problem on their own.

Noise Levels

Air conditioners are loud devices by design, a quality that has seen very little change over time. Portable ACs, in particular, can be prone to creating a loud noise that can be disruptive in your space. This is a drawback that is not shared by AC types like window ACs since their noisy parts extend out of the window.

The lower the noise an air conditioner produces, the better a model it is. Prolonged exposure to loud noises can cause hearing loss, which is far from the ideal prospect.

Energy Consumption

Energy bills rack up over time, adding to the overall costs of an AC, which makes it important for the device to be energy efficient. You can check the energy consumption and how much energy the air conditioner saves by looking at the SEER rating.

The baseline SEER rating of a small portable air conditioner is 10, but you may want to look for devices with a rating of 12. Consider 12 the golden SEER number to watch for when purchasing a portable AC, as devices with this rating are highly efficient.

Conclusion

As far as general use is concerned, I found the Midea EasyCool Window AC to be the best air conditioner. It is an affordable and functional AC that can effectively cool a small room while consuming very little energy.

That said, other air conditioners like the Black + Decker small portable air conditioner and the Vremi AC are also viable options to consider. They serve different functions at different price points, and they may serve your particular needs, depending on what you’re looking for.

When it comes to air conditioning, there is no such thing as a one-option-fits-all model. There are several variables that change which air conditioner is the best for each particular use case. At the end of the day, you alone can choose which brand is the right one for your home.

The Nicetown high-end thermal curtains, with their two-layer triple weave blackout fabric and uniquely designed silver grommets, are great for soundproofing purposes. Similarly, Deconovo soundproof curtains have a thermal insulation layer and high-density material to eliminate noise.

Soundproof curtains can prove ideal for reducing noise in your home or office. Made using mass-loaded vinyl and PVC blended with crushed limestone, these curtains are great at absorbing sounds, such as conversations and traffic noise.

They can even be used with other soundproofing techniques for better results. Due to the popularity of soundproof curtains, you can choose from numerous options, and this guide reviews some of the best ones.

Best Soundproof Curtains

Here's the list of the 11 best soundproof curtains for efficient noise reduction, perfect for quieting your space and enhancing your privacy.

1. Nicetown High-End Thermal Curtains - Best Full Blackout Curtains

NICETOWN High-End Thermal Curtains, Full Blackout Curtains...

Complete blackout curtains block light and reduce noise for...
Curtains measure 52 inches wide x 84 inches long per panel,...

What we like

Wide range of colors
High-quality construction
Does not contain any chemical substance
Reliable soundproofing

What we don't like

Aligning the curtain pleats requires some effort

With over 20 years of experience in the industry, Nicetown is among the top brands for many people looking for curtains. Based in Nicetown-Tioga, the brand manufactures these high-end thermal curtains using polyester, measuring 52 inches wide and 84 inches long, which makes them suitable for most rooms.

The curtains are available in a wide range of color options, including aqua, black, beige, bright yellow, gray, and more. This makes it easy to choose the one that fits your room the best. Along with that, they have a uniquely designed silver grommet for easy installation.

Coming to the construction, this soundproof curtain is manufactured using two layers of triple-weave blackout fabric. Because of this, it works well to regulate the temperature of the room where it is installed and ensures complete privacy.

And since the manufacturer does not use harmful materials, such as formaldehyde, in the manufacturing process, these curtains are environment-friendly and completely safe to use.

As for noise reduction, the Nicetown thermal curtains can absorb two times as much sound as standard curtains, which is possible due to their greater thickness. This provides them with greater density and prevents the entry of all loud noises in the room.

But soundproofing walls, doors, or windows is not the only purpose for which these curtains can be used, as they are full blackout curtains. This means that they can be used to darken a room completely by keeping sunlight out when you want to nap during the day.

Color: Black | Material: Polyester, polyester blend | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet, rod

2. Deconovo Soundproof Curtains - Best Low-Maintenance Option

Deconovo Blackout Curtains for Bedroom–Set of 2 52W x 96L...

Darkening & Light Control – Crafted from premium 100 %...
Noise Reduction & Energy Savings – Triple‑weave fabric...

What we like

High-quality textile
Versatile
Low maintenance
Multiple color options

What we don't like

Actual colors can be slightly different

Manufactured using polyester, these curtains are available in sets of two panels, and each drape measures 52 inches in width and 96 inches in length. They are great for absorbing ambient noise and can be used in almost any room.

The curtains come with silver grommets, which are noteworthy for having an anti-rust coating, ensuring long-lasting durability. On top of that, they are thermal insulated and can be used to regulate the temperature, depending on the weather conditions outside. You can even use them to block out sunlight and keep a room dark during the daytime.

This is possible due to the high-density blackout material, which features a triple weave for greater density. Similarly, the fabric is soft to the touch and has a silky texture, which makes this curtain suitable for contemporary home décor.

These curtains are also available in solid colors, and there are numerous options to choose from, like beige, black, khaki, etc. While testing these soundproof curtains, I discovered they are versatile and can be used in almost any room, such as the living room, gaming room, kitchen, nursery, or office.

Moreover, these curtains do not require a lot of maintenance since they can be machine-washed easily. If you have doubts regarding the right size, contact customer service and choose the most appropriate option.

Color: Light beige | Material: Polyester, polyester blend | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet

3. Nicetown Closet Curtains - Best Room Divider Curtains

NICETOWN Patio Door Curtain Sound Blocking, Bedroom Privacy...

CURTAIN DETAILS: The room divider curtain's fabric is super...
SPACE SOLUTION: Curtains can be a clever and temporary...

What we like

Suitable for smaller spaces
High-quality construction
Attractive design and colors
Durable

What we don't like

Lesser number of grommets per inch

Another option from the Nicetown brand, these soundproof curtains have been specially designed for small spaces and partitions. They are best suited for a scenario where you want to divide a larger space into multiple smaller ones without putting up walls.

The density and heaviness of the curtains make sure that objects or people are not visible from the other side. Plus, the higher shading rate of the fabric enhances this property.

Constructed using triple-weave polyester fabric, these soundproofing curtains have a high density that can block out all unwanted noise from the area. Since they work by sound absorption rather than bouncing the sound waves, they can be used with sound masking techniques, to soundproof doors and windows.

For installation, these Nicetown curtains come with 14 silver grommets that look good in modern homes and are easy to set up. What's more, you can easily remove and pack up the curtains when they need to be moved, delivering greater convenience.

Use them in a wide variety of spaces, such as your bedroom, office, study, living room, and more. The high-quality materials coupled with superior finishing ensure these soundproof curtains will last several years without any complaints.

Like other curtains from the Nicetown brand, this option is available in various colors and can be used for temperature regulation or as blackout curtains.

Color: Gray | Material: Polyester | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet

4. Miulee Soundproof Curtains - Best For Thermal Regulation

MIULEE Velvet Curtains Olive Green Elegant Grommet Curtains...

WELL MADE: Sold as 2 panels, each measuring 52"W x 84"L...
FINE DETAIL: Each curtain has 8 HOLES and the inside...

What we like

Easy to install
Modern design
Superb soundproofing
Reliable temperature regulation

What we don't like

Expensive

The next item on this list is the Miulee soundproof curtains, which also come with thermal insulation technology for room temperature regulation. This soundproof curtain is 52 inches wide and 84 inches long, adequate for most spaces, and has a set of two panels.

Similarly, the grommet top has an interior diameter of 1.6 inches and has been designed to make it easy to slide the curtain rod through them. The curtains have a velvety texture that feels good in the hand and provides an attractive appearance by adding a touch of elegance to your rooms.

Moreover, you can select from 15 colors, so it is easy to find an option that fits well with the decor of your rooms. And depending on the color, the blackout velvet curtains can block out 70% to 80% of sunlight.

But the highlight of these curtains is their thermal regulation capability, which can help keep a room warm in winter and cool in summer. This is possible because of the thick fabric that limits the amount of air entering or leaving a room to make your thermoregulator more efficient.

Besides helping reduce noise, the heavy material of the curtains also guarantees privacy, and you can use these curtains in areas like the study or home office. I would further like to point out that this curtain can be machine washed and does not require a lot of maintenance.

Color: Olive green | Material: Velvet | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet

5. Lordtex Room Divid er Curtains - Best For Privacy

LORDTEX Dark Grey Room Divider Curtains - Total Privacy Wall...

WHAT'S IN THE PACKAGE? Each set includes 1 dark grey curtain...
PREMIUM BLACKOUT MATERIAL: Our room darkening curtain is...

What we like

Wide compatibility
High-quality and safe materials
Easy to install
Durable

What we don't like

Fabric tends to snag

Room divider curtains, such as this one from Lordtex, allow you to eliminate unwanted noise from a room without occupying too much space. These curtain panels have a width of 100 inches and a length of 84 inches, including 12 silver grommets. The grommets enable the curtain to be used with both decorative and regular curtain rods, thanks to their 1.6-inch interior diameter.

For making these curtains, the manufacturer has used 100% polyester fabric with similar colors on the front and back for room darkening. But what makes them stand out from the crowd is the fact that they are manufactured in an Oeko-Tex Standard 100-certified factory.

This means that the material is completely free of harmful substances and will not cause any allergies or other adverse side effects. And the triple weave blackout fabric is also thick enough to be able to block out 90% of UV rays and sunlight. This helps in darkening rooms and can be used in areas where you want some privacy.

Alternatively, you can use the Lordtex sound-deadening curtains as room dividers for partitioning rooms and creating separate spaces. The curtains are compatible with several types of spaces and can be used in shared bedrooms, lofts, apartments, dormitories, and even classrooms.

Sound proofing can also be achieved quite easily using these curtains, and you can hang them in front of sliding doors or even as backdrops for photoshoots for sound insulation. Due to their thickness, the curtains do not deform easily and can be machine-washed.

Color: Dark gray | Material: Polyester | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet

6. Ryb Home Soundproof Curtains - Best For Soundproofing Doors

RYB HOME Soundproof Curtains 84 inches - 3 Layers Blackout...

3 LAYERS - Package includes 2 panels total width 104 inch. 1...
NOISE REDUCTION - Detachable felt fabric liner is in the...

What we like

Good-quality construction
Easy to maintain
Great for blocking light
Value for money

What we don't like

Not 100% soundproof

Ryb Home is best known for its custom curtains, blinds, shades, and other home products, but these soundproof curtains are a popular choice from the company. These curtains have three fabric layers - two layers for the front and back, and a detachable middle fabric made from felt.

This construction makes them a dependable option for any DIY soundproofing project since the three layers work well in absorbing sound. You can use them in front of doors, glass windows, and walls for effective noise control.

One of the key features of the Ryb Home soundproof curtains is that they do not contain any formaldehyde or other harmful substances, making them a safe choice. This means those with allergies can use them without experiencing any side effects.

Additionally, the three layers allow this blackout curtain to keep 100% of the sunlight out, which is not an easy feat to achieve. Because of this, harmful UV rays are kept out, and you can enjoy your daytime sleep in complete comfort.

The triple weave fabric also performs well when it comes to temperature regulation, and you can experience greater savings. With this curtain, it is possible to keep a room warm or cold easily for an extended period without the thermoregulator.

Finally, installation and maintenance are easy, and you just need to remove the detachable felt fabric liner before machine-washing the curtain. If required, you can use non-chlorine bleach while washing and even iron the curtains for a bit once they are dry.

Color: Gray | Material: Fabric | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet

7. Buhua Soundproof Curtains - Best Patterned Curtains

BUHUA White Black Out Curtains 63 Inch Long 2 Panels,...

Blackout Curtain Set: A set of 2 blackout curtain panels...
Thermal Insulation: 100% polyester, crafted with...

What we like

Elegantly patterned designs
Easy installation
Good color choices
Affordable

What we don't like

Can get wrinkled easily

When it comes to blackout curtains, Buhua takes a different approach. Instead of offering such curtains in a single bold color, the brand offers patterned curtains, such as this one. This curtain comes in various color options, and there are some unique ones to choose from, such as white and silver.

The Buhua soundproof curtain has a silky texture, and the foil branch pattern helps break up the monotony that is often created by solid color curtains. Hence, it can help add some style to your home without requiring a lot of effort.

These curtains have a width of 52 inches and a length of 63 inches, which makes them suitable for most rooms. And they can even be used in spaces such as in front of doors since these soundproof curtains work by absorbing noise. Their thick and dense material can reduce sound easily, preventing them from bouncing off surfaces and creating echoes or reverberations.

Another advantage of this construction is that you can use these curtains to block out sunlight, and they can filter out 85% to 95% of light. For people who prefer to sleep late or take a nap during the day, this curtain can provide adequate darkness for comfortable sleep.

Besides blocking light, you can use the Buhua curtains to control the temperature inside your home. The thick material helps restrict the flow of air, thus providing better heat and sound insulation. And like some of the best soundproof curtains, these can be machine washed for easy maintenance.

Color: Grayish white | Material: Polyester | Pattern: Branch | Top Style: Grommet

8. Melodieux Soundproof Curtains - Best Living Room Curtains

Melodieux Fashion Chevron Curtains for Living Room Dining...

UNIQUE DESIGN: Fun colored Chevron print pop on off-white...
PACKAGE CONTENT: 1 Curtain Drape (52"W x 84"L) + 1 Matching...

What we like

Attractive design
Easy to install
Safe
Easy to maintain

What we don't like

Package contains only one curtain

Any list of the best soundproof curtains would be incomplete without mentioning these soundproof curtains from the Melodieux brand. These are premium curtains designed for bedrooms, living rooms, and more, and they come with unique chevron-printed designs.

The curtains are available in several colors, and the off-white background with the colored chevron prints suits almost any setting. Each curtain has a width of 52 inches and a length of 84 inches, and the package includes matching tie-backs.

To make installation easy, the curtains come with eight bronze top grommets in each panel that fit up to one-and-a-half-inch curtain rods. Simply slide these grommets through the curtain rail for hanging the soundproofing curtains.

The manufacturer has used triple weave tri weave fabric for making these curtains, which works flawlessly for the purpose of noise reduction in your living room, gaming room, or bedroom. And this material does not have a chemical coating, which makes it a completely safe option.

Additionally, it can block 90% of light and UV rays, allowing you to use the curtains to darken a room. This also means that you can use these soundproof curtains to ensure privacy since the thick material can block visibility completely.

I also discovered that using these curtains can make your thermoregulator more efficient, which is due to the fact that they can block the passage of air between various rooms. This means your room will get warmer or cooler as required much faster, resulting in greater energy savings.

And you can clean the Melodieux soundproof curtains by simply machine washing them.

Color: Red | Material: Fabric | Pattern: Chevron | Top Style: Grommet, rod

9. Deconovo Blackout Curtains - Best Option With Most Attractive Design

Deconovo Total Blackout Curtains Linen Curtains Room...

PRODUCT INFO: 100% blackout curtains. Both sides of the...
DESIGN and TEXTURE: The curtains are made by faux linen...

What we like

Blocks out all light
High-quality construction
Low maintenance
Affordable

What we don't like

Colors can be slightly different from the pictures

Most blackout curtains do not block out light completely, which is why these soundproof curtains from Deconovo stand out. They are 100% blackout curtains manufactured using faux linen fabric and can filter out any light that enters your room, making them perfect for bedrooms.

The package has two curtain panels, each measuring 52 inches wide and 72 inches long. Available in multiple colors, these curtains have the same color on both sides, making them attractive from either side. And their threads are well trimmed while the fabric is wrinkle-free, which further adds to their appearance.

To make installation easy, there are eight silver grommets, each with an interior diameter of 1.6 inches through which the curtain rod can slide. This high-quality construction of these grommets and the soundproof curtains make them an extremely durable choice.

Similarly, the material of the curtains is soft and heavy, which provides them with a nice texture and allows them to block outside noise easily without costing much. But unlike the competition, this material does not fade, and the curtain will retain its original appearance for a long time.

What's more, you can use these curtains in areas where you want some privacy by creating partitions or barriers as people on the other side cannot see through the fabric. And the thick material can provide thermal insulation and can help maintain the right temperature in any room, in addition to sound reduction.

You can even machine wash and iron these budget soundproof curtains for maintenance purposes.

Color: Gray | Material: Linen | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet

10. Beauoop Curtain Panels - Best For Soundproofing Windows

Beauoop 100% Blackout Curtains 108 Inches Long 2 Panels for...

Total Blackout Performance: Crafted with double-layered,...
Thermal Insulation and Energy Efficiency: These curtains act...

What we like

Wide application
Durable construction
Effective soundproofing
Modern printed design

What we don't like

Relatively heavy

When looking for soundproof curtains, going with a renowned brand like Beauoop is a good idea, and I've reviewed one of its best offerings here. These curtain panels measure 50 inches in width and 108 inches in length, which makes them large enough to cover your doors and windows.

Manufactured using triple weave double layer thermal insulated blackout fabric, the curtain has impressive sound-dampening qualities. It can be placed in various areas of the room to absorb any sound wave that comes in through the window and ensure that the room is quiet. This construction also provides the curtain with a high level of durability, so rest assured it will last a long time.

Functionality aside, the fabric of the curtain is soft to the touch and feels pleasant, and it is available in six color options. These feature a geometric design, enhancing your interior decor and making the curtains suitable for almost any room.

Apart from that, they work well for blocking out sunlight and can keep out 95% to 99% of light, depending on which color curtain you use. So, they can be used to create the perfect environment for watching movies in your home cinema or for taking a daytime nap.

The heavy material also makes these curtains ideal if you want to create partitions and ensure privacy. And they work equally well for thermal insulation purposes, helping maintain an optimal temperature inside without excessive use of the thermoregulator.

This means you can enjoy the benefits of lower energy bills in addition to the other advantages offered by these great soundproof curtains.

Color: Spa/Gray | Material: Fabric | Pattern: Geometric | Top Style: Grommet

11. Ryb Home Thermal Insulated Curtains - Best Outdoor Curtains

RYB HOME Noise - Blackout - Thermal Insulated Curtains for...

3 LAYERS - Package includes 2 panels total width 104 inch. 1...
NOISE REDUCTION - Detachable felt fabric liner is in the...

What we like

Easy to install and remove
Safe
Superb light blocking
Easy to clean

What we don't like

Gets easily wrinkled

Next up, I have the Ryb Home thermal insulated noise-reducing curtains, which come with features like detachable felt fabric for easier installation and removal. This curtain has three layers, one at the back, one at the front, and the detachable felt fabric in the middle.

All materials used in the manufacturing process are safe, and harmful substances like formaldehyde are not present. The three layers work together to absorb sound and can provide good results, though this will depend on your environment to a certain extent.

These are also 100% blackout curtains, as the triple weave blackout fabric and the three-layer design can keep UV rays and harsh light out of your room. So, they are a great pick for rooms that are used for daytime naps.

And this construction and design also make these curtains well-suited for building insulation purposes. You can use them to keep the room warm in winter and cool in summer without spending as much energy and saving on power bills.

Apart from that, these curtains are extremely easy to install, thanks to the silver grommets that are provided with the curtains. Like all standard grommets, these have an interior diameter of 1.6 inches, which makes them compatible with most curtain rods.

Lastly, these Ryb Home sound-deadening curtains are easy to maintain, and you can simply put them in the washer when they need to be cleaned. You only need to remove the felt liner and nothing else before washing it so that it does not get damaged.

Color: Biscotti beige | Material: Fabric | Pattern: Solid | Top Style: Grommet

Best Soundproof Curtains Comparison Table

Product	Color	Material	Pattern	Top Style
Nicetown High-End Thermal Curtains	Black	Polyester, polyester blend	Solid	Grommet, rod
Deconovo Soundproof Curtains	Light beige	Polyester, polyester blend	Solid	Grommet
Nicetown Closet Curtains	Gray	Polyester	Solid	Grommet
Miulee Soundproof Curtains	Olive green	Velvet	Solid	Grommet
Lordtex Room Divider Curtains	Dark gray	Polyester	Solid	Grommet
Ryb Home Soundproof Curtains	Gray	Fabric	Solid	Grommet
Buhua Soundproof Curtains	Grayish white	Polyester	Branch	Grommet
Melodieux Soundproof Curtains	Red	Fabric	Chevron	Grommet, rod
Deconovo Blackout Curtains	Gray	Linen	Solid	Grommet
Beauoop Curtain Panels	Spa/Gray	Fabric	Geometric	Grommet
Ryb Home Thermal Insulated Curtains	Biscotti beige	Fabric	Solid	Grommet

Buying Guide For The Best Soundproof Curtain

These are the 11 best soundproof curtains as per my analysis, but the purpose for which they are required can vary significantly. That is why it is essential to consider certain factors when choosing between them. And I've mentioned such crucial information here in this buyer's guide.

Dimensions

The dimensions or size are one of the first things to consider when looking for the best soundproof curtains. To ensure that the curtains are of the correct size, measure the spot where the curtains have to be attached, such as the front of your doors and windows.

It is important to remember that the curtain should extend at least six inches on each side as well as the top and bottom. Having a curtain larger than the window frame or door will ensure that sound does not leak from the sides, especially since curtains can only block high-frequency sounds.

You should also check that the curtain reaches down to the floor for the same reason. Such long sound dampening curtains are often made from velvet since this texture is better for external noise reduction. In the case of larger windows, the curtains can even be extended to the ceiling, but avoid using such curtains over smaller windows.

Additionally, look for curtains that have some extra material, which can help create a larger number of folds. More folds result in greater thickness and ensure better sound absorption.

Weight

The weight or mass of the curtain is another factor to consider. Sound-absorbing curtains are much heavier than regular ones and also have multiple layers to prevent sound leakage. Different layers can include window liners, curtain liners, and blackout liners. Multi-layered curtains are denser and thicker and are ideal for active noise control, but the weight of the curtain will also matter when installing the curtain.

You should make sure that your curtain rod can support their weight. The best soundproof curtains can weigh over ten pounds and require special mounts as they cannot be installed using standard curtain rods. Or you can get a heavy-duty rod and wall plugs to support such heavy curtains.

Many soundproof curtains even require special mounts for the same reason.

Material

How much noise can pass through sound reducing curtains depends to a large extent on their construction. Soundproofing curtains are manufactured using various materials, with the outer fabric generally made from cotton or polyester. In contrast, the inner lining can be made from velvet, felt, wool, or suede.

These sound absorbing materials have tightly-woven fibers in multiple layers that can help absorb sound more easily. You can also go with curtains made from thermal weaves, which are similar in nature.

Layered curtains or those with thermal weaving can also help keep your home warmer and can help in efficient energy use. Also, they can block out sunlight during the summer and keep your room cooler for the same reason. Thermal insulated curtains also the additional advantage of keeping ultraviolet rays out, which can cause the flooring and furniture to fade.

However, these things will often depend upon the color of the curtain, and darker-colored curtains will provide improved acoustics. An alternative solution to blackout curtains is to get a blackout liner when using a regular curtain, which can help keep sunlight out.

Soundproofing curtains may be available as multilayered, insulated, or blackout options. Multilayered curtains are manufactured using various materials sewn together, while insulated ones provide additional protection against heat and cold.

NRC Rating

NRC rating is a measure of how good a material is in absorbing sound and is measured from zero to one. Curtains that have an NRC rating of zero absorb no sound, while those with an NRC rating of one can absorb all sound completely. Generally, an NRC rating is present only in the case of good soundproofing curtains.

When considering this factor, look for curtains with an NRC rating of 0.7 or more since they are better at noise reduction and can absorb more sound energy. That said, even the best soundproof curtains with a lot of mass usually have an NRC rating of around 0.85.

A curtain with an NRC rating of 0.85 can absorb about 85% of sound, so it is a great choice for blocking room noise, music, and other sounds. You can check out the FAQ on the product page of the curtains to learn about the NRC rating.

Price Range

Soundproof curtains are available at several different price points, so it is important to consider what you need and how much you are willing to spend. In most cases, the best soundproof curtains are not very cheap and are most suitable for people willing to spend a considerable amount.

On the flip side, many curtains are available at a very low price, but these may not be able to block all noise coming into the area. That is why finding the best budget soundproof curtains isn't easy, and you need to plan carefully when making a decision.

Installation And Maintenance

How easy it is to install soundproof curtains is a major factor you should consider when comparing various options. Most soundproof curtains that have multiple layers, especially thermal insulation ones, are heavy and will require more effort in installation. They cannot be installed using standard curtain rods due to their weight and will require a heavy-duty curtain rod.

In contrast, noise-reducing curtains made from lighter fabrics, like cotton and linen, can be easily installed. Also, curtains may come with grommets or with a hook-and-loop fastener, which can affect the installation process.

Aside from installation, you should look at the maintenance instructions. A soundproof curtain needs to be kept in good condition to ensure that it lasts longer. This is especially true if you work in a recording studio or similar profession.

Many of the options available can be machine washed, which makes cleaning them a simple process. And you can even iron them to keep them wrinkle-free, but this may not be advisable in the case of all acoustic curtains.

Soundproof Curtains FAQs

The weight or mass of the curtain plays a significant role in soundproofing. Sound-absorbing curtains are typically heavier than regular curtains and have multiple layers to prevent sound leakage. Ensure that your curtain rod can support the weight of the curtains, as some soundproof curtains may require special mounts or heavy-duty rods for installation.

Soundproof curtains are constructed using various materials. The outer fabric is often made from cotton or polyester, while the inner lining can be made from velvet, felt, wool, or suede. These materials have tightly-woven fibers in multiple layers that help absorb sound more effectively. Thermal weaves can also be used to make soundproof curtains, which offer additional benefits such as insulation and blocking out sunlight.

Soundproof curtains are available at different price points. Higher-quality soundproof curtains, which provide better noise reduction, tend to be more expensive. Cheaper options may not offer the same level of noise blocking. Consider your needs and budget when choosing soundproof curtains.

The ease of installation depends on the type of soundproof curtains. Those with multiple layers and thermal insulation are heavier and may require special mounting hardware or heavy-duty curtain rods. Lighter fabrics, like cotton or linen curtains, are easier to install. Some curtains come with grommets or a hook-and-loop fastener, which can affect the installation process.

It’s important to keep soundproof curtains in good condition for optimal performance. Many options can be machine washed, making cleaning them a simple process. However, not all acoustic curtains are suitable for ironing, so refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. Proper maintenance ensures that the curtains last longer and maintain their soundproofing capabilities.

Conclusion

There you have it! While each of these curtains possesses impressive soundproofing capabilities, it is advisable to use them along with other soundproofing techniques, such as a soundproof blanket or acoustic panels.

Now, before I sign off, I would like to mention my favorites here. My top pick would be the Nicetown High-End Thermal Curtain, which comes with two layers of triple weave fabric, manufactured using safe materials and available in multiple colors.

Another excellent option would be the Deconovo Soundproof Curtains, featuring rust-proof grommets and a high-density blackout fabric for filtering light.

When you’re often bombarded with new ideas, it’s hard to stick to a certain supply of resources. That includes brushes or even textures on designing apps such as Medibang.

With the increasing amount of users making use of the same brush designs, we normally want to venture into newer options. Lucky for us, there are numerous creators out there who come up with new brushes, different brushes each time, making sure designers get the best experience on Medibang.

And today, we’re going to share 54 Medibang brushes and textures which you can add to your collection.

Without further ado, let’s dive in!

Best FireAlpaca & Medibang Brushes & Textures

1. Blockchain Brushes

The following brushes resemble a pattern of ropes, rail tracks or can also be considered as a string design.

The brushes painting such patterns can be used to design the borders of a certain picture or can be effectively used to divide the paper into different parts or segments. And other than a simple line dividing the page into different parts, if we used the following brush, then it brings about a pleasing pattern. That looks better than a simple bold black line.

These brushes can be used to draw different patterns with the same themes as well as in different colors.

2. Fire Alpaca Simple Chain Brush

Here we come across the simple chain brush which brings about the effect of a chain pattern as a design wherever used.

The simple chain brush can be used to create a design in order to connect two objects or one figure holding another. It brings about a sense of connection between two different figures or objects exactly like its pattern, which displays in itself a connection of numerous pieces joined together to form a never-ending pattern or ending till any point used.

The simple chain brush can be used to design borders of images as well as the periphery of objects.

3. Static Textures/Brushes

The brushes used here are of digital patterns which gives a different variety of designs. These brushes can be used widely to design an image as it gives an unorthodox feel or figures as well as a modern or digital influenced look.

The digital pattern brush brings about a new and modern generation influenced look as well as a graphic feel to the picture. These brushes can be used to either design or form the borders of different pieces of art. They have a wider variety as more than a design it gives a pattern and sci-fi feel.

4. Multicolor Pen Brushes

Here we have the multicolor pens that involve the effect of all colors by combining them together. Its range of use is wider as it offers a spectrum of colors, it even offers an adjustable mode where it restricts the usage of just 3 colors as we can see in the image listed below.

A rainbow effect can be brought about to your pictures alongside a pleasing appearance. It can be used to form the borders of pictures or divide the page into different segments or just bring about a simple rainbow with its wide spectrum of colors.

5. Zig-Zag Medibang Brushes

Presenting the Zig brushes bring about the pattern of zig-zag to your picture. The Zig brushes are simple and effective and take us back to normal and simple designs among a variety of improved patterns.

The length of the zig can be adjusted as well as the zig ratio bringing to us more freedom to draw as per our intended desire. The height of the zig can be adjusted as well. Overall a recommended brush if you want to stick to the basics and bring an effective design to your image. It must be noted though that the BETA testing states it has bugs.

6. Arrows and Books Brushes

Down below we can see two varieties of brushes that can be used to decorate or paint on a picture. We have arrowhead brushes and the book brushes. If we were to show directions or the pathway inside our image, we could use these arrowhead brushes.

The book brushes can be used to design a library where it makes it much more convenient than drawing each individual book. The book brushes can be slightly adjusted with designs though the effect doesn't differ by much. The arrowhead brushes can be used to show connections inside the picture as well.

7. Medibang Paint Pro Custom Brushes

Medibang here brings us a more and highly customizable as per one’s need brush. It allows people to customize their brushes in any proportion they want and in different shapes and sizes as they desire.

On using Medibang Paint Pro, we are made available with a variety of customizable tools that we can combine to develop our own brushes and influence image with more originality, using our own patterns.

The ratio of the patterns, the stroke size, the colors used, and depth as well as the subtleness can be adjusted as per one’s own choice and can be applied to paper.

8. Flowers, Hearts, and Stars

Down below we have listed an array of patterns that can be used on a dark background to bring a subtle look to the picture being drawn by the artist. We have six different varieties of brushes in different shapes and designs. We have the flowers, hearts, stars, bubbles, babies, and Flowah design to choose from and decorate our picture.

The brushes are available to us our convenient to design night skies or decorate the borders and corners of our demonstration whether a poster or picture itself. They would form beautiful backgrounds if used properly.

9. Wavelets Medibang Brushes

Down below we can see the wave brushes which are made available to us by Medibang. The brushes form a wave pattern and can be used to bring about the feel of wave patterns around the picture.

The design of the waves is customizable and the thickness of it as well. The waves can be used to even draw and bring the same effect to objects as we can see below the effect it brings while drawing a flower.

The different shapes and sizes, dimensions, patterns, and colors give us a dynamic brush which can bring about a lot of effects to the picture.

10. Dripper Brush

Presenting the Dripper brush, the dripper brush is designed to give a dripping effect of color whenever and wherever used.

The drip pattern is beneficial when we want to express the melting of, say an ice-cream in our picture or to showcase the increased heat due to which substances melt. The effect can be successfully given to the drawn figure with this drip brush.

The drip brush is also effective in making a pattern background with the drip effect as we can see in the example below, it gives a unique angle to the picture. The thickness of the drips, as well as the shape and weight, can be adjusted and made as per our liking, with adjustable details, the dripping brush makes a good case to be often used by users.

11. Fade Out Fire Brush

Here, we have the faded out brush which can be helpful in highlighting or fading outlines, figures, images, etc. The fade-out brush effect much like the previous drip brush can be used to design the background of a picture as it has a very pleasing effect on the eye.

It can be used to design borders as well as divide the page into different segments. With a variety of colors to choose from, we can combine two different sets of colors and form an original shade to supplement the look of our picture.

Just like the former brushes, the fade-out brush can also be adjusted using tools where the intensity of colors, the ratio of fading, etc. can be adjusted and suited to one’s own preference.

12. Noise Colored Brush

Coming back to the digitally inspired brushes, the brushes made available here once again give a digital look to our picture though these sets of brushes have much more to offer than its predecessor.

The brushes have a variety of solid colors its available in, thus allowing us to freely make use of it while designing the background of our picture. Much like the rest, the thickness, color, combinations, intensity, etc. can all be adjusted according to one’s liking.

The density of the color, as well as the pattern prominence, can be adjusted as well, thus giving more control to the artist to be free in his creative thinking and execute his desired picture.

13. Zipper Medibang Brush

Here, we have the Zipper brush which is a more traditional and one of the commonly used brushes as the pattern shares the same characteristics.

The zipper brush can be used to design the borders of the picture as well as to border any figures or objects within the picture, the zipper brush can also be used to divide the page into different parts to show different images in one photo.

Like the other brushes, the zipper brush features can also be adjusted and it's customizable. The dual color or single color used on the pattern can be adjusted as well and we can either have a solid or dual shade for the brush. The length of the brush can be adjusted as well along with the design and thickness of the zip.

14. Oil-Water Brushes

Presented below are three different variations of brushes, first, we have the pencil brush which brings about a sketchy feel to the picture as we can see below in the sketch of an animated character, second is the oil-water brush which gives the effect of oil pastels being used to draw or paint an image.

Lastly, we have the Mix brush which is a combination of colors to form one color or a band of a combination of colors. The details can all be adjusted for the below-listed brushes, including the different colors used, the thickness of the brushes, length, and in case of a pencil brush we can even adjust the intensity of the sketch drawn.

15. Stars, Bubbles, and Hearts

The Stars, Bubbles, and Hearts designed brush can be used to design borders of a picture as showcased in the image below, the pattern can also be used as a decorative band across the page as well as to maybe highlight the positivity the photo wishes to portray.

The design of the pattern is simple yet very effective and elegant, much like the former brushes, the Stars, Bubbles, and Hearts brush can also be adjusted and customized as to one’s own choice and preference. Tools can be used to edit characteristics such as the width of the brush, color, design, spacing of the brush, etc.

16. Cocobunnie’s Monthlies August Brush Clouds

Below listed here we have the cloud effect brushes. These brushes give a wonderful cloud effect on the picture.

It can be used in various forms, either to draw actual clouds in a day or night sky, they can be used to form cloud shapes like those made by super jets, or you can use the brush cloud simply as a border on a page or to divide the page into different parts.

Brush clouds are so whimsical and beautiful, right?

The clouds can be drawn into different shapes as shown below, the characteristics of the cloud can be adjusted as well as the length and shape and sizes. They can be the most prominent or simple fades.

17. Colorful Patch Brushes

The brush shown below is of shade combination patches that vary slightly in texture and can be a color mix of two to three shades going side by side.

The patches made by the brushes are more of a paint job rather than a design purpose served, thus these brushes are very effective in painting a background of a picture with a variety of combinations and give a very artistic effect to the background of the picture. These brushes can be used to bring the same effect in the figurines or different parts of the picture.

18. Cocobunnie’s Monthlies September Animals

The below-listed brushes are environment influenced patterns which can be effectively used in a nature-oriented image.

As we can see these brushes form nature-oriented patterns like coconuts joined together, mud patches in different shapes and sizes, designs resembling the paw marks of domestic animals, the brushes can be used to draw or paint hay or nature associated surfaces.

These brushes can be used to design posters of environment day, eco support posters, environment day advertisement content, etc. They can simply be used to decorate the periphery of a picture as well to divide the page into different parts. They can be used to fill in color as well in wood figures etc.

19. Scatter Brushes for FireAlpaca

Listed below are some design brushes that form a banner of patterns, with a black background, these brushes form patterns such as stars and bubbles of similar design while seeing below we also notice the popping purple used to show digital brick designs giving a mosaic look to the background.

These brushes can be used to design a starry night background or modern bubbles in a nighty sky look or can go for the purple brick design as well. They can bring out a different and more modern look to the picture as well as can be used in designing posters with attractive and eye-catching colors that relate to the modern generation.

20. Mo-Fox’s FireAlpaca Leaf Brush Collection

Down below we have the Mo-Fox’s FireAlpaca leaf brush collection which provides us a variety of leaves such as the straight leaf blade, the aspen leaf, the maple leaf, the leaf side, a maple leaf side as well as the leaves blowing in the wind in three different varieties.

The different designed brushes form different patterns when used in number and give the feel of a cluster pattern showcasing numerous leaves put together to form a pleasing pattern. The leaves can be a little scattered inside the pattern as well as they can be clustered close together as well. They can be spread out with a lot of spacing between them as well.

21. Pearl Medibang FireAlpacaBrushes

Listed below are the Pearl Brushes, that draw a chain of pearls in each stroke of the brush. The pearls are a beautiful gem and as mostly it is associated with expensive jewelry as it is not that easy to attain, many can associate it with the Aquatic or Sea world as well.

The shade of the pearls can be adjusted and customized as well as the width of the pearl, the spacing of the brush, the size by pressure as well as the type of the pearl. The pearl brushes can also be used to give a bubble effect along with the pearl effect by editing the color of the pearl and making it blue.

22. FireAlpaca Custom Brushes

Here, we have three varieties of brushes, the Stipple Pen, the Sumi Pen, and the Acrylic Pen.

These brushes bring a slightly varying effect to the image or picture constructed, the stipple pen brings about a light stripe effect to the effect of the brush, the Sumi brush brings another little variable effect followed by the Acrylic brush that brings the acrylic effect into each stroke made by the brush.

More than decorating the borders of a picture or using the brushes to divide the pages into different parts or segments, the pens listed below can be more effectively used in color and outlining as well as sketching a figure within the picture for the effect that they bring about in each stroke.

23. Grass Medibang FireAlpaca Brushes

Listed below, we have the grass and feather brushes in a few varieties and types. We have 6 types of differently designed grass brushes and two types of feather brushes.

These grass brushes can be used to design the fields in a picture or can be similarly used to design or show patches of grass in a scenic picture as well.

The feather brushes can be used to symbolize feathers blowing on a windy day and give a windy effect to the picture, this effect can also be brought about if grass brush number 5 or 6 is used as well where the grass blades are swaying from one side to another thus depicting the blowing wind effect.

24. Bokeh 4-Set Brushes

Down below, we have the Bokeh Brush 4 set category of brushes to be used for art. In the photography circle, bokeh is the aesthetic quality of the blur effect showcased in the out-of-focus parts of a picture produced by a lens. Bokeh can be defined as "the way the lens renders out-of-focus points of light".

These brushes can be effectively used as a background of a picture or to decorate the borders of an image or just to denote an out-of-focus image. These patterns formed come in four varieties as shown below and the intensity of the bokeh feature differs in each type thus we can choose the prominence of the design we want among the option available.

25. FireAlpaca Chain Brushes

In this picture, you’ll see there are 3 sets of chained brushes, the chained brushes listed below differ from each other on the basis of shape as one resembles a rectangle, a circle and followed by the third which is shaped like a pentagon.

Resembling the modifications of the previous brushes, these brushes can also be adjusted to one’s own preference. The width of the brush, the spacing of the brush, size, and shape, all have options to adjust and suit one’s own choice.

These chained brushes can be used to decorate the borders of a page as well as to make margins or divisions on the page. It gives a simple yet elegant look to the picture and its simplicity throws out more when used sparingly.

26. Mo-Fox’s Sparkle/Heart Brush Collection

Mo-Fox presents us with the Sparkle and Heart brush collection, We have available to us a variety of 6 different brushes. There are two varieties of sparkle brush followed by two varieties of heart brushes, we have scattered patterns and bitmap patterns for two different groups of brushes.

These brushes can be used to decorate the borders of a picture or image, it could be used to design a night sky scenery or just some simple decorative patterns. The patterns are simple and give a subtle look to the image, these brushes can be handy as it can be often used.

27. Snowflake Brush Pack

Our list is not complete without a snowflake brush to bring that winter festive spirit to life. Luckily for you, we’ve got more than one snowflake brushes in the picture below! The picture also includes previews of what the effects will look like when choosing one of the options. Now, you can pick your favorite one from these designs.

Numbers 1, 2, and 3 are leaner and resemble floral patterns while numbers 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3 are stars-shaped and thicker, filling more spaces in between them. These brushes can most commonly be used in decorating the borders of a page or on a dark background such as black, grey, purple, etc.

28. Simple Fabric Pattern Brushes

The following brushes can be used for creating colorful pieces. On top of this, we are able to edit the color and pattern to suit our own preference.

The designs of the different varieties of brushes listed below are well detailed and when used in a cluster bring about a very beautiful pattern. For those who wish to use simple and beautiful patterns to decorate their photos or pictures can opt for these brushes, they can be used to border the page or decorate a birthday card or an achievement card, anniversary card, etc.

29. Fade-In Brushes

Here we have simple shape brushes to design our pictures, these shapes have an outline of whilst the inside fades into white, we have the heart shape, square, the shape of a circle. That of a pentagon and ending with a spiral shape.

The colors and depth of these brushes much alike the previous brushes can be adjusted as well and made to one’s own preference. The colors are simple and the fade into white results in much of the shape being white in shade, thus the drawn shapes are very pleasing to the eye.

30. Cocobunnie’s Sparkle Brush Pack

Let's get those starry effects back with the use of these sparkle brushes shown down below, the use of a dark background is to show the entire effect and impact of these brushes.

The different sparkles drawn by these brushes can be used to design a night sky or just a simple border for a picture. These brushes come in a variety of 5 different shapes and sizes, giving us a much wider range to choose from. Some of them are shaped like stars while some are shaped like diamonds and others as small circles.

31. Cocobunnie’s Square Brush Pack

Love squares? Then these are the brushes most suited for you, these brushes come in eight different varieties and their effect can be understood by seeing the picture listed below.

The squares can be multicolored with the parent shade being blurry, their quantity can be adjusted as well as their prominence. The design can be given a fade effect or a cluster effect, a paint effect, a scattered effect as well as a crayon effect.

On the use of the third brush, one could even portray a digital look in the picture. These brushes could be used to paint a picture and give it a square texture or it could be used while giving a glitch effect or a digital look.

32. 5 Unique Grunge Brushes

For those artists who have a rock or music inspiration, can go wild with this set of five unique grunge brushes. A preview of these brushes can be seen in the photo listed below.

The patterns formed are detailed and beautiful and can be conveniently used to bring effect into a music poster or a music festival is a poster. It can give a nice border or effect even when used inside the page to be a part of the background. For music lovers and those designing the same, these sets of brushes are a must use.

33. Wave Brushes for FireAlpaca

Down below we can see the wave brushes which are made available to us by Medibang. The brushes form a wave pattern and can be used to bring about the feel of wave patterns around the picture.

The different shapes and sizes, dimensions, patterns, and colors give us a dynamic brush which can bring about a lot of effects to the picture.

34. Pattern and Star Brushes

Listed below are some trendy design brushes which can bring a freshness of the modern environment into the picture.

We have four different patterns to choose from, the first being the po[p art pattern which can be used anywhere around or within the picture as one’s wish, the grid pattern resembles that of a grid and can be used to design the same as well.

The Stars/Skin texture can, like the previous brush, can be used to design a night sky and give it a starry effect, finally, we have the cool kid texture which is unique in itself and can be well used to make borders along with the photo.

35. Bubble/City Light Brushes

Bubble lovers? We have the perfect brush for our use, listed below we have the bubble brushes which form patterns of bubbles when used to draw. These bubbles can be designed and customized as per one’s own liking.

The color and size of the bubbles, as well as the space between them, can be adjusted. These bubbles are helpful in giving a lit look to the picture being drawn as the colors used are popping and not dull and thus they can stand out or be the highlight as well of the drawn picture.

36. Medibang/FireAlpaca Custom Brushes

Here listed below are a few patterns that bring about a paint effect when used on your picture. There are six different patterns along with the coffee cup pattern brush.

The coffee cup brush can be effectively used when designing a coffee house or cafe poster, it can also be used in designing a confectionery poster. The other patterns are of patches and spherical objects which form a beautiful pattern while being drawn.

The paint patches or brushes can be used to design the background of a page as well as along the borders to give a paint effect to the image.

37. Detailed Leaf Brushes

In love with nature? Below, we have twelve different real-life leaves of plant available to us to decorate or be used whilst designing our page. We have the Cirsium palsture, Geranium sanguineum, Parthenocissus, and ranunclus inundatus just to name a few. These leaves can be used by nature lovers to decorate posters or photos for their ventures. They are very detailed and very clear to the naked eye thus giving a perfect design on your image. They can be used to decorate the corners of a page or simply be used along the borders of the frame.

38. Rainbow Brushes with User Colors

The love of rainbows can be expressed through the use of this brush. The beautiful spectrum of colors throwing brush can be used to decorate the sky of a poster or be widely used in children’s oriented posters like a school or tuition or childcare poster.

The brush size, width, length, and color scheme can all be adjusted and customized as per the artist’s liking. These brushes can use a variety of shades to draw the rainbow and can also be used to design circles on paper or be used to border the pages as well as divide the page into numerous parts and form a beautiful pattern on the page.

39. Shards Brush

Pieces of glass or Shards brush is a brush made of shards of glass as their pattern. These brushes bring that edgy look to your picture while designing it. They can be used to decorate the borders or just be drawn in different places on the picture.

Their sharp edges bring a sense of directness to the picture and are eye-catching. The corners, chunk amount, and size can be adjusted and customized to one’s own liking. The color of the shards can be modified as well and form a beautiful eye-catching color through the pattern.

40. Starry Brushes

If you’re an admirer of starry nights, we have the perfect option for you in these starry brushes available in six different shapes and patterns.

The colors of these stars can be adjusted as well as their width and size, their separation apart can also be adjusted, these customizations available to us help us design it as per our own preference.

These stars can be used to design the borders of a page or be used to fill night skies on the background of an image or poster. The simplicity of these designs makes it so interesting to use.

41. Colorful Triangle Brushes

We have these miniature triangles forming the pattern of the brushes used below. These miniature triangles bring about a very subtle look to the picture and prove to be effective though simple.

These brushes can be used to design a party picture or simply to design the borders of an image. Their colors, size, and shape can all be adjusted and customized as to one’s own liking. The popping colors as demonstrated in the below picture stand out on a dark background.

The triangles can be drawn on any background can also form banners if the size is adjusted likewise. For example banners in sports meet pictures.

42. Lace Brushes

Much like the previous brushes, here we have a couple of brushes that though could be used in normal designs, these are rather theme oriented. We have a range of lace brushes that can be used widely although particularly have use for those who are making a cloth oriented poster or for a knitting contest etc.

More feminine oriented, these brushes bring about a beautiful pattern on the borders of a picture or can be used to divide the page into different parts. These can also be used to decorate the borders of garments inside the picture drawn.

43. Random Brushes

Listed below are a few random design brushes that use simple designs and can form a decent and simple border around the picture or image being drawn. We have the ‘ - ‘ design followed by two lines intersecting at regular intervals, the addition sign and so on.

These brushes are simple and can be put to a variety of use. As mentioned, they could be used on the borders or to form margins or to decorate a figure/object on the picture, coming back to the concept of simple but effective.

44. Animal Paw Print Brushes

Fans of animals - Here we are, provided with an array of paw brushes for our use. We have the paws of dogs, cats, tigers, etc. These brushes can be used to design any animal or wildlife oriented pictures, posters, cards, etc.

Their use is widespread and can be even used as symbols while decorating the picture. The size of the paws and the distance between each paw can be adjusted and customized as well. Their colors also customizable though they are best effective fully black as they can look attractive on any given background.

45. Letters and Envelopes

Still a fan of letters in this digital age? we have been provided the perfect brush for our use. These are a variety of letter brushes that we can use and incorporate into our design or poster.

Much like the previous pictures, the details are customizable and can be adjusted. Tools like the brush spacing, angle, ratio, width and type of the letters can all be adjusted. To make a copy of ancient telegrams used for communication with a modern touch, these brushes can be used as well as to most commonly be used to decorate the borders of a page or form different sections on a page. They can just be simply used to draw a letter as well.

46. Random Brushes 2

These brushes can draw simple designs, though random and not themed, these brushes can also be used to design the borders of a picture or on different positions on a picture.

Sometimes it's best to not make your design too flashy and with a lot of content, sticking to the basics and maintaining minimal decorations is advisable and these brushes can supplement an artist very effectively. These brushes can also be widely used whilst constructing a figure where the use is of many brushes, these brushes due to sit simplicity can prove to be effective then.

47. Full Brush Pack

For all black lovers, Medibang has brought to us a variety of black brushes in a pack since different shapes of black objects or shades can be used to decorate and bring about that black effect in your demonstrations.

Different impressions and patterns of black are also available that can form beautiful backgrounds and borders to the pictures. A black background is most convenient to work along with white of the same. Black is a widely used color and with the help of these brushes, we can enhance and have a more applied use of this color.

48. Chain Brush Pack for Medibang and FireAlpaca

Below we come across another chain brush pack that has a variety of chained patterned brushes to use while drawing or decorating our picture, poster. We have square-shaped brushes, to five-sided shaped, circular-shaped, etc. to choose from.

The size of these patterns can be adjusted much like the previous brushes. Most commonly these brushes can be used to highlight some important information on the image or poster being created. The Artist could use these brushes to design the borders of a picture and image as well. These could also be a fancy way to divide the page into different parts.

49. Blood Brushes

Down below listed we have six differently shaped splashes of blood which could be used to design a goth or death note image. The views of such brushes are that they are most commonly used to demonstrate the act of killing. Although these brushes have mostly one use, they could also prove to be handy in different situations.

We have six varieties to choose from and customize the quantity of splash as per our own requirement. An odd brush but an option it definitely is while decorating or designing different images on the demonstration.

50. Flower Brushes

The bottom listed image portrays the hand-drawn flower designs in a variety of six different designs. These flowers would look beautiful when placed as part of a design on the page of an art piece. They could also commonly used to design the borders of a picture or likewise on the corners of the piece.

These brushes can be adjusted and customized much like the previous brushes were the size of the flowers, their shading and transparency can be adjusted and customized as well. These brushes are simple and can be used anywhere around the image or picture by the artist, a recommended brush to use.

51. Grunge Paw Brushes

Down below we have listed another set of paw brushes though these are grunge paws giving more grunge or rugged look to the patterns. They have the same usage as most brushes as they look appealing when drawn around the picture, though the artist might have a little hindrance with the sketchiness of the image in the patterns.

These brushes can again be used to design the borders of a picture or on a poster as well as the corners of a poster or demonstration. They can be used to design even animal-oriented images and posters.

52. DNA Pen, 2-Color Gradient, and Rainbow Brushes

Here Medibang brings us a three variety brush, one DNA pen brush, a two-color gradient brush, and a rainbow brush once again though the flow and color of this brush are more enhanced.

As demonstrated below these brushes can be used to draw such images such as the sheep and the rainbow drop. The DNA brush can be used to design the borders of a picture or show the DNA symbol across a page.

The two-color gradient combinations can be adjusted and the rainbow brush we well aware of its array of uses.

53. Tiling Textures/Brushes

Finally, we have the chequered pattern brushes, these brushes are mostly used to bring about the chequered effect on a piece of art or as a background of a picture.

As shown and demonstrated below we can see the contrast of the image to its background though both use the same brush the change in color contrast makes it look appealing to the eye. It brings about a nice texture to the image in many cases it can be used to design tiles or an area where checkered patterns are most commonly used like table floors or kitchen floors.

Medibang Brushes iPhones and Android Guide

For iPhones/iPads

Open the software and look for the brush icon. Click on the icon and you’ll have a number of brushes popping up.
From this list, choose one which you would like to practice with. When you’re done, there will be two options - add or download brushes. Choose the ‘add brushes’ option to enable it for use.
Once you’ve added the brush, a settings screen will open up, allowing custom edits to your pick. Here, you can make the desired changes that will go best with your art. Now, you’re all set!

If you want to download more brushes, follow these steps below:

On the upper left corner, there is a brush panel. Within it, click on the + icon. You’ll see a menu of options, then click on Brush Download.
When you’re done, click on the Cloud to see a list of options available for download. Select your desired brushes and begin your download. Note that you can position the brushes by using the arrows which are on the right side of the board.

For Androids

Open Medibang and select the brush icon. Select a brush from the given list. Do this by clicking on the + icon to let you add a brush.
Look for the color palette icon to select a shade you want. Here you can also adjust the size of the brush.

Note that there is another location to change the size of your brush. One is located inside the brush panel, while the other is right under the HSV Bar available on the left side of the canvas. Just click on the circle and drag it. This will automatically change the size.

The same two locations are available for adjusting the opacity of the color.

If you want to download more brushes to your android device, follow the steps below:

Click the + icon on the brush panel. Look for the Cloud tab and click on it. This will take you to the Brush Cloud where numerous brushes are available for downloading. By clicking on a brush, it will directly take you to the editing screen.
After selecting a brush of your choice, tap on Set and it will save your latest addition at the bottom of your brush list.

Keep in mind that you can use already available brushes without having to create a Medibang account.

Conclusion

To make sure designing remains exciting for artists, new textures, designs, and brushes are always added from time to time. Keep looking for updates so you can use them for your latest art.

All the best!

Related Articles

14 Amazing Free Krita Brushes and Brush Packs for Digital Art

20 Free FireAlpaca Brushes for Digital Painting & Drawing

We have seen an increase in the use of pixel art as a method of creating animations.

Many artists in our generation are engaging themselves in this digital art to produce phenomenal creations. As a result, there are many existing as well as upcoming tools to help them out.

Since spotting the right tools can get difficult at times, we have selected 16 of the best programs which are compatible with many operating systems out there.

So if you’re ready to start an amazing pixel art session, take a look at what the best pixel art software can offer you!

Best Pixel Art Software Programs

GIF via steamcommunity.com

Here is the list of the 16 best pixel art programs and software to help you create amazing animations.

1. iDraw | Autodesk Graphic - Best for JRPG Style Art

Let’s kick off this list with iDraw - a simple, yet very popular pixel art program in the world of pixels.

In it, you’ll find a variety of features including the basic ones such as a customizable palette, drawing, and selection tools. iDraw is very popular among the RPG Maker group. It embraces the 90’s style of creating pixel art or in other words, the JRPG style.

In recent years, it used to be common for people to use pirated copies of iDraw and RPG Maker 2003 in order to create their own customized versions. However, today the RPG Maker 2003 is available for $5 after getting upgraded, which leaves iDraw still openly available for those who want to download it for free.

Although iDraw does not come with many up-to-date features, it still remains a good pick for those who are starting out with pixel art programs. Some may not find this to be in their favor, but it does come in handy if you want to learn the basic and simple concepts of pixel art.

There are also a tonne of video tutorials available online which can help beginners get familiar with the software. It is, in fact, still a very popular choice among pixel artists at the moment. Plus, ’90s pixel art never seems to go out of style as seen in recent movies and video games.

iDraw has been purchased by Autodesk and it is now entitled Autodesk Graphic.

Free to Use: No | Features: Customizable Pallette, Drawing, Selection Tools, & More

2. Aseprite - Best for Custom Sprite Fonts

Aseprite is another well-known program created for the sole purpose of designing pixel art.

Here’s the deal with using Aseprite - it is available for free if you’re someone who can arrange the program yourself, otherwise you can get the compiled and finished software at $15 (which includes as many modern features as you can think of).

If you’re wondering why it’s a famous software among pixel editors, that’s because Aseprite offers artists alluring creations as well as an easy user interface. It is capable of performing heavy-duty tasks effortlessly.

Let’s have a look at one of its features - onion skinning - which allows users to add frames both above and under the one they are currently creating. This option makes the work of the artist much easier and faster. Moreover, beginners will likely find the timeline easily accessible on their very first use.

It also contains exceptionally good sprite sheet exporting tools which are useful daily materials for game developers.

One other feature that contributes to its popularity is that it can edit fonts into pixels. A lot of game developers find this feature highly desirable.

Since we are on this topic, we also want to include the wrapping tool which is used for tiling, except that it repeats the process. If you’re thinking about a faster way to create roof tiles, Aseprite has got you covered.

Free to Use: Yes (Free Version) | Features: Alluring Creations, User-Friendly, Effortlessly Performs Heavy-Duty Tasks, & More

3. Photoshop - Best for Full Digital Editing Package

Adobe Photoshop is one of the best programs one can use not only for pixel art but also for digital painting and graphic designing. You can say that this software is the total digital editing package.

Because of what it provides, Adobe Photoshop is among the most popular picks when it comes to pixel editors too. It offers users all the important tools needed for creating high-quality pixel animations.

However, keep in mind that Photoshop can be pretty tough to get used to since it contains more features than any other programs intended for pixel art, given that it serves multiple purposes as well. But to make things easier for the absolute beginner, there are numerous online tutorials about designing pixel art to look up.

If your plan includes learning to create more than one type of animation, Adobe Photoshop is the right software for you. Rather than jumping from one program to the other, all your projects can be done on a single platform.

Among many uses, Photoshop is widely known for its many available resources. And the best part is that there are tutorials for almost each and every single one of them. On top of that, you can also find free plugins and scripts to gain more flexibility in using the program.

Knowing how to operate the program can increase your chances of developing games as a career.

Free to Use: Yes (Within Trial Period) | Features: Has All the Important Tools for Pixel Animations, Free Plugins & Scripts

4. GIMP - Best for Budget-Friendly Artists

A very similar program to Adobe Photoshop is GIMP. The main difference is that GIMP is available for free download.

Similar to Photoshop, it comes with a lot of tools, resources, and features to create digital art including pixel designs. Here, you’ll find there are effective tools meant for photo editing as well as digital painting.

But unlike Photoshop, GIMP has a friendly user interface that’s customizable, so it is perfect for starters. However, it includes an animation player and a timeline which are pretty much like those of Photoshop.

Since the program is popular with many digital artists out there, it receives a lot of support from creators as well as experienced users who provide video tutorials on YouTube.

Another important aspect to consider is that it saves money for those on a restricted budget who are searching for a complete package.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: User-Friendly Interface, Animation Player, Timeline, & More

5. Pixie Engine Editor - Best for Learning Basic Pixel Art

The Pixie Engine Editor is available for free download online. It provides all the fundamental tools required for creating pixel art.

It is true that many professional digital artists may not find it to be completely satisfactory when it comes to doing detailed work because of its lack of resources. However, it is well-suited for beginners who are looking forward to learning pixel art without having to pay any fees.

Although you can only create static animations, there are other benefits that come with this program such as a huge collection of colors and it also allows you to save an image after designing.

If you want to learn how to make proper use of this software, they have a separate section on their site in which you can go through the masterpieces of other experienced artists.

It also offers a tune composer for artists who want to develop games so they don’t have to look for this feature elsewhere.

Even the source code comes at no cost and is available on GitHub which you can make use of it as a base to create pixel art.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Good for Beginners, Huge Collection of Colors, Offers a Tune Composer, & More

6. PikoPixel

Here is an open-source application that can be used to design pixel art either on Linux or Mac.

PikoPixel is a program that you can work effortlessly on as it provides many useful tools and features such as layering, unlimited undos, a customizable canvas, and hotkey-activated panels that pop up.

When you think about PikoPixel, think about a fair substitute for pixel editors that run only on Windows. It comes with demos but because it is simple to operate, you probably won’t be needing them. It works wonderfully with both Linux and Mac.

Starters will find it easy to use because of its basic features even if it lacks modern ones. But we can say that given to the advanced artist, PikoPixel can provide some of the best quality pixel art.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Layering, Unlimited Undos, Customizable Canvas, Hotkey-Activated Panels, & More

7. Tile Studio

Tile Studio is a program that focuses on one area of graphics designing - creating tiles.

The software is very helpful for game developers who want to create pixel art and full-fledged tile-based games. It has several necessary features such as a bitmap editor which can be used to make tiles and a level editor to design them.

One of the good benefits we get from using Tile Studio is that it is workable with almost any type of programming language. Hence, you have full control over the outcome of the design by using your own code. Because of this, there are many game studios and designers who turn to Tile Studio for their projects. It is available free of cost for Windows.

There are several things you can do with Tile Studio such as importing tiles from other programs and using them for your design. You can also use special effects and numerous drawing tools with the help of the level editor.

Even though Tile Studio does not have as many features as expensive editors do, it still makes creating pixel art pretty easy even for beginners.

When you’re done designing frames, you can export them either as a tile sequence or a sprite sheet.

Tile Studio comes with both easy and advanced tools. However, they also provide detailed demonstrations and tutorials to help speed up the learning process.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Bitmap Editor, Level Editor, Tiles From Other Programs Can Be Imported, & More

8. Lospec Pixel Editor

The Lospec Pixel Editor is a new online graphics editor which is meant to make the work easier for its users.

We can say that this program is simple enough for beginners to use and at the same time, will still catch the interest of professionals.

Keeping in mind that the application is relatively new, there are still many features left to be developed. But the good thing is that it already appears promising with its exceptional interface as well as being easily accessible online.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Simple, Good For Beginners, Great Interface, Accessible Online, & More

9. GrafX2

GrafX2 is an application for editing bitmap images. It gained inspiration from Amiga Deluxe Paint. Ever since the program’s source code was made available as an open-source project, it has been updated with newer features and used for contemporary machines.

The software is loved by many of its users because it has a great toolset that includes a pixel palette and also a very systematic interface. It offers all the required for starting a drawing project with plenty of cool features such as the “spline” that helps the user achieve accurate curves.

There are also tools such as the “histogram” which guides users on using colors and the “merge” option to arrange colors according to their average shades. It provides an option that allows you to repeat tiling as you wish.

Besides, the program has been around for more than 20 years which makes it very popular in the world of pixel art. Therefore, you won’t find it hard to learn how to use it since there are numerous tutorials on that topic.

GrafX2 has most of the desirable features in designing pixel art. Some of which are special effects and frames. It also allows easy operation so you don’t need to practice to get started with a project.

While some people find the display to be too outdated, others love the vintage looks.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Pixel Palette, Systematic Interface, Helps Achieve Accurate Curves, Guides in Using Colors, & More

10. Pixilart

If you are looking for a free and simple drawing app online, check out Pixilart, a digital editor founded in 2013. It does not offer much but it provides cool features for artists who are learning the basic steps of drawing digital animations.

What gets the interest of users is that it hosts contests and provides a solid ground for artists to get together and share their creations.

So if you’re searching for a social platform where pixel artists come together, Pixilart is the right place to be.

This application is very interesting to use since it comes with an advanced interface and includes features that you will normally find on any pixel art software. To name a few of its features, they have an autosave option, dithering, pixel drawing, frame designing, and pixel text animation.

We also like the number of settings it offers which allow users to customize it with any kind of workflow. Therefore, it is suitable for both professionals and beginners.

You can always use the social platform to connect with other artists for help. On top of it, there are video resources to help you out with any issue within the app.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Simple, Autosave Option, Dithering, Pixel Drawing, Frame Designing, Pixel Text Animation, & More

11. Piskel

Piskel is a digital editor program meant solely for making pixel animation.

The program is free for download and at the same time, it is also available online for easy access and usage.

Having an interface that’s clear and understandable makes this software favorable to many users including learners and professionals. It comes with an animation preview that introduces its users to how to use the software.

Of course, it comes with many different features but the cool aspect about it is that it is simple to use and easy to understand.

With Piskel, you can export Sprite sheets, GIF animations or even static images.

The program has limited resources and features for a reason. They want to include only the most common aspects needed for creating professional animations. So if you’re someone who loves minimalism, this is the perfect choice for you.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Accessible Online, Simple, Good for Learners, Animation Preview, & More

12. Paint.NET

For those in the Windows community who are looking for an alternative to GIMP or Photoshop, here is Paint.NET. It works with all present Windows versions or upcoming ones based on updates.

Unlike its superior alternatives, Paint.NET is a lightweight software that supports basic functions such as image editing which serves more than just designing pixel animation.

They have a community in which many of its users interact and share designs with each other. Here you can also find help to finally get started with your projects. But for experienced users, support is available using plugins.

Even though its range of features is not as wide as those of GIMP or Photoshop, Paint.NET is pretty simple and allows users to work on it easily.

But some of its limitations include not supporting more than one image for editing. Also, it is only compatible with Windows. This is a huge drawback for those using Linux or Mac.

However, keeping aside those setbacks aside, Paint.NET is beginner-friendly and fun to work on.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Lightweight Software, Simple, Easy to Use, & More

13. Pyxel Edit

Pyxel Edit is one more popular pixel editor that artists all around the turn to for completing their professional projects.

A free version is available online for users to download but it has limited features which may not be adequate for most experienced users. So, one would usually opt for the paid version that comes at $9 as it is far better and also suits artists on a budget.

The one aspect which grabs an artist’s attention is its wonderful user-friendly interface and the fact that it includes all the basic features one requires to design animations which include the “onion skinning” to help arrange frames systematically.

The most common reason one picks Pyxel Edit is because of its exceptional tools used for creating tile-based art and games.

Pyxel Edit makes creating tile maps an effortless activity. Its tools help speed things up on the workflow. You can also export/import or even convert file types such as JSON and XML to use in engines.

There are many good reviews from game developers as per time is concerned. It is quality software for those who are practicing or taking up a career in designing pixel art.

Free to Use: Yes (Free Version) | Features: User-Friendly Interface, Helps Arrange Frames Systematically, Easy to Create Tile Maps, Export/Import/Convert Different File Types, & More

14. Krita

Many illustrators, digital painters, concept artists, and even cartoonists love Krita because it is a free open-source program that offers more than what is expected.

You can use Krita to create amazing art with the help of a few settings that are available on the application. You’ll find it easy to operate since the program is meant to serve digital painters and artists.

The program is perfect for use if the artist is well-equipped with traditional painting and makes a shift to digital art.

Krita may not include as many features as Photoshop or GIMP do but it contains some tools which are not normally found in other pixel-based programs. For instance, Krita encompassed motion into pixel art in the past few years.

The software will serve you based on your requirements. If a combination of high-resolution animation and pixel artwork is what you’re searching for in a program, then this is the best one yet. Given that it comes at zero cost, you’ll be surprised to find that Krita offers some of the best digital pieces.

A few limitations are not entirely unexpected. For example, the demonstration fails to introduce us to some important aspects of the software. But that does not mean it affects the performance of the application. Besides, there are many tutorials available online to help you out with any problems.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Easy to Use, High-Resolution Animation & Pixel Artwork, & More

15. GraphicsGale

GraphicsGale is one of the best digital editors given that it comes with a retro user interface. It is free and has a lot of features for a program that is dedicated only to designing pixel art.

It includes palette control, animation, drawing, layering, and many other features.

It is pretty flexible in that it supports both sprite sheets and GIFs. With GraphicsGale, you are able to export different files.

You can also preview your creations before finalizing them which makes it perfect for those artists with a number of projects in their hands.

One of the best features of the program is that it allows users to import image files from a camera or a scanner with the help of TWAIN imaging. Artists who prefer to first portray their concepts on paper and later convert them into digital prints find this aspect really helpful.

The only drawback is that GraphicsGale works only on Windows, therefore, setting a limit for other users.

Free to Use: Yes | Features: Palette Control, Animation, Drawing, Layering, & More

16. Pro Motion

Pro Motion is a program that helps create pixel art, animations, and even tiles more quickly.

This is perfect for artists who are looking for software that focuses on details more than anything else. Game developers for smartphones and other handheld gaming devices are known to go for Pro Motion in order to get amazing graphics.

It is also a lightweight program used to create light graphics for web games or applications. It supports tile map, bitmap, and sprite sheet designing. Moreover, it works pretty well with most popular frameworks or game engines to get started.

Free to Use: Yes (Free Version) | Features: Lightweight Program, Supports Tile Map, Bitmap, Sprite & Sheet Designing, Works w/ Popular Frameworks, & More

Best Pixel Art Programs and Softwares Comparison Table

Software/Program	Free to Use	Features
iDraw \| Autodesk Graphic	No	Customizable Pallette, Drawing, Selection Tools, & More
Aseprite	Yes (Free Version)	Alluring Creations, User-Friendly, Effortlessly Performs Heavy-Duty Tasks, & More
Photoshop	Yes (Within Trial Period)	Has All the Important Tools for Pixel Animations, Free Plugins & Scripts
GIMP	Yes	User-Friendly Interface, Animation Player, Timeline, & More
Pixie Engine Editor	Yes	Good for Beginners, Huge Collection of Colors, Offers a Tune Composer, & More
PikoPixel	Yes	Layering, Unlimited Undos, Customizable Canvas, Hotkey-Activated Panels, & More
Tile Studio	Yes	Bitmap Editor, Level Editor, Tiles From Other Programs Can Be Imported, & More
Lospec Pixel Editor	Yes	Simple, Good For Beginners, Great Interface, Accessible Online, & More
GrafX2	Yes	Pixel Palette, Systematic Interface, Helps Achieve Accurate Curves, Guides in Using Colors, & More
Pixilart	Yes	Simple, Autosave Option, Dithering, Pixel Drawing, Frame Designing, Pixel Text Animation, & More
Piskel	Yes	Accessible Online, Simple, Good for Learners, Animation Preview, & More
Paint.NET	Yes	Lightweight Software, Simple, Easy to Use, & More
Pyxel Edit	Yes (Free Version)	User-Friendly Interface, Helps Arrange Frames Systematically, Easy to Create Tile Maps, Export/Import/Convert Different File Types, & More
Krita	Yes	Easy to Use, High-Resolution Animation & Pixel Artwork, & More
GraphicsGale	Yes	Palette Control, Animation, Drawing, Layering, & More
Pro Motion	Yes (Free Version)	Lightweight Program, Supports Tile Map, Bitmap, Sprite & Sheet Designing, Works w/ Popular Frameworks, & More

Pixel Art Software Programs FAQs

Most pixel art programs support a variety of file formats, including BMP, JPG, PNG, and GIF. The specific formats supported will depend on the software you are using, so be sure to check with its documentation or support.

Most pixel art programs provide options for importing custom palettes and using pre-built color palettes. This feature helps users achieve desired color schemes more efficiently and maintain consistency across their designs.

Absolutely! There are numerous online forums, communities, and tutorial websites dedicated to pixel art. Examples include Pixel Joint, Pixelation, and Lospec. These platforms provide a wealth of resources to help improve your pixel art skills.

Conclusion

As we have analyzed and discussed a multitude of pixel art programs and software, it's now time to narrow down the best options for different needs and levels of expertise. From the above 16 best pixel art programs and software, here are the top three expert recommendations:

iDraw, which is now Autodesk Graphic, is an ideal option for beginners looking to learn the basic concepts of pixel art. With its customizable palette and drawing tools, as well as the availability of video tutorials online, those starting out can easily grasp pixel art fundamentals with this program.

For more advanced users who need feature-rich software that is tailored specifically for pixel art creation, Aseprite is a good option. With a user-friendly interface, powerful tools like onion skinning, and stellar sprite sheet exporting capabilities, Aseprite caters well to professional pixel artists.

Lastly, for artists who desire a versatile program offering pixel art creation alongside other design tasks such as digital painting and graphic design, Adobe Photoshop is the right choice. Offering powerful tools, abundant resources, and tutorials, it is an industry-standard software that can be an invaluable asset to budding and experienced game developers alike.

By choosing the right software that caters to your requirements and skill set, you can unleash your creativity and explore the endless possibilities offered by pixel art and game development. So dive in, harness the power of these top-notch programs, and bring your pixel art visions to life!

Related Articles

53 Best Medibang & FireAlpaca Brushes & Textures For Digital Artists

25 Best Free GIMP Brushes for Drawing & Painting Digitally

20 Free FireAlpaca Brushes for Digital Painting & Drawing

21 Best Manga Studio & Clip Studio Paint Brushes [Free Download]

Best Free Aseprite Tutorials For Pixel Artists & Game Designers

21 Best Paint Tool SAI Brushes and Textures

Speed Paintings 101 |What It Is, Tips, Tricks, Tools & Video Tutorials

54 Best Photoshop Brushes | Best Drawing & Painting Brush Packs

80 Best Procreate Brushes for the Realm [Free & Premium Brush Sets]

14 Amazing Free Krita Brushes and Brush Packs for Digital Art

11 Best Color Theory Books for Artists Everywhere

13 Websites With Copyright and Royalty Free Art to Consider

Types of Digital Art Right Now Explained

25 Best Concept Art Books for Artists Everywhere

8 Best Cartooning Books For Artists Today

5 Types of Concept Art to Consider Today

10 Epic Tips & Tricks for Concept Art Portfolios Today

51 Enigmatic Forest Concept Art That Will Amaze You

67 Surreal Castle Concept Art Depictions to Surge Inspiration From

13 Legendary Free Game Engines for Beginners & Professionals

8 Best Landscape Design Software for Mac User

The rise in popularity and the success of Blender can be attributed to two main reasons. One of which is because it’s free and open-source.

And the second reason is the massive community of designers and developers who dedicatedly work to build up the Blender ecosystem.

If you are a 3D artist who likes to reap the benefits of this amazing software, you must be familiar with these amazing add-ons and plugins that the community produces.

And, of course, the curiosity of finding something new like that has brought you to this article. Go ahead and give it a read.

Best Blender Addons & Plugins

Here is the list of the 17 best Blender addons & plugins to help you create stunning 3D models, animations, and visual effects.

1. Amaranth - Best for Streamlined Workflow

One of the most debated attributes of Blender is its open nature. Blender believes in giving all of the controls to its users.

That’s why you get a plethora of options and tools that riddle the UI of the software. So, if someone takes their sweet time discovering all of the nooks and crannies of this software, they can seriously enhance their productivity and the scope of their projects.

Amaranth is a plugin that is helpful in that specific area. With this plugin, you get loads of shortcuts and extensions for Blender’s most used features that seriously step up one’s workflow speed.

The aim of this plugin is to speed up the workflow by making the UI easier to manipulate with shortcuts. This removes the friction of working in this software and you’ll see a drastic improvement once you get used to the plugin.

There are too many shortcuts that this plugin offers and it’s not feasible to list them all here but we highly recommend you check out their website and learn all about it.

Overall, if you want to work well and work fast, this plugin must be in your arsenal. Once you get used to it, Blender won’t feel the same without it.

By: Pablo Vazquez | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs

2. RetopoFlow - Best for Character Modeling

If you indulge yourself in a lot of character modeling and character design work, then you are going to love this.

You may be a game developer or make 3D animations, but, in any case, if you like fleshing out your characters and modifying the minutest of details then RetopoFlow must be in your arsenal.

This add-on brings a whole slew of powerful and handy tools that will make sculpting your 3D models a piece of cake.

Even if it doesn’t make the work too easy, it’ll surely give you a lot more control and you’ll be a fan of RetoooFlow, especially, if you like to work on details.

Working with these high-res objects and animating them will first require you to craft a simpler model using the process of retopology. Unfortunately, Blender doesn’t have a lot in this regard by default.

And that is when RetopoFlow does its magic. The tools provided by it can help artists retopology their objects.

It gives you an intuitive that lets you draw new contours over the default objects and gives you immense control over its geometry. The best part is that the clean new mesh automatically covers the surfaces of your initial object and with its quad-based geometry you can even finetune the animations.

So, if your work falls in this category, there’s no reason for you to skip on RetopoFlow.

By: CG Cookie | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video

3. TexTools - Best for UV and Texturing

In the pursuit of achieving beautiful and realistic textures on your models, you’d require a nice UV Layout. But for some reason, Blender doesn’t have anything more than the bare minimum in terms of UV.

That’s why you need TexTools to get professional-looking UV and texture tools that work in Blender.

First of all, you get more than eighteen baking models to work with that can give you the best-looking textures in Blender.

But more importantly, you get all of the other tools that can help you align your UV layouts and really smoothen out your topology.

Ultimately, it’s a must-have tool.

By: Hendrik-Jan Schoenmaker | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs

4. BLAM - Best for 3D Camera Manipulation

BLAM is an amazing tool that can help you to manipulate the 3D camera in Blender.

It is extremely helpful, especially, if you work in special effects or simulations.

Basically, this plugin uses a photo to determine the focal length and orientation of the camera that was used to take the photo. Consequently, it calibrates Blender’s camera to match the imagery in the photo.

BLAM is even more useful when you do projection mapping. You can even feed vanishing lines to the plugin in reference to the photo and it’ll recreate the geometry on its own.

For obvious reasons, this trick is extremely useful and almost pure magic because you reconstruct a 3D architecture using just a photo.

By: Per Gantelius | Guide/Demo: N/A

5. Ragdoll Tools - Best for Realistic Animations

Simulation artists and game developers are going to love this tool!

Ragdoll Tools is an awesome plugin to generate hitboxes in the bones of the model that will eventually help you to achieve more realistic animations and Ragdoll physics.

The tools let you edit the armature and the settings of the rigid body without a hitch and make it extremely easy to manipulate the physics.

Apart from these basic tools that are impeccably helpful, if you want to take it up a notch, you can even take a look at the custom options of the tools.

By: XBodya13 | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video

6. Magic UV

We have already talked about TexTools that help you out UV layouts but if you want even more control over your UV workflow, then you should go for Magic UV instead.

It fulfills all of Blender’s shortcomings in the department of UV and gives you a less frustrating experience of UV work than Blender’s minimal and ineffective controls.

But if you have updated yourself to Blender 2.7, you don’t need to worry about this because, after several community requests, Blender added this plugin by default.

By: nutti | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Video

7. BookGen

This tool might seem weirdly specific to a novice but it’s one of the best examples that glorifies the freedom and helpfulness of the Blender community.

As you might have already guessed, this tool lets you generate a huge number of books on simple commands.

You can fill up 3D shells and cupboards with as many books as you may want. It also takes care of the variety of books in terms of shape, size, and colors to provide you with an interesting and unique setting every time.

The tool becomes immensely helpful once you actually deal with the tedious nature of making highly detailed backgrounds.

Artists who create models of interior decor or architects can really improve their workflow with this tool. So, be sure to check it out!

By: Oliver Weissbarth | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, Video

8. Gaffer

Lighting is one of the key components that you have to take care of while working in Blender. And Gaffer is a must-have if you are anywhere near serious in terms of lighting Blender.

Blender’s default setup is, unfortunately, not that good in terms of lighting. Not just in terms of access and organization but also in terms of its capabilities in getting natural lighting.

So, if you want to take your lighting game up a notch there’s no option for you but to opt for Gaffer.

This tool not only organizes multiple lights and makes it convenient to access but it also provides a wider range of settings so you can tinker with each and every light source to make it as realistic as possible.

Moreover, it also improves your productivity because instead of hunting for the right settings, it places them at a convenient location for you.

The best part is that each light source can be manipulated individually and the settings don’t mingle and create a mess with each other.

Along with this, you also get an HDRI handler that makes managing your HDRIs a piece of cake. It lets you cycle through them without a hitch.

So, if you want to make the lighting in your projects really realistic and natural, you can’t really skip on this handy add-on.

By: Greg Zaal | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video

9. Image Background Transform

One of the most convenient ways to get started with your project in Blender is by using a reference image.

But the tools that are provided by default in Blender are less than capable of manipulating this reference image.

And it’s a significant setback considering that most artists have to provide several views and scales of their final model as a submission.

In such cases, one really needs more convenient tools to manipulate and scale the reference image.

To avoid the pain of using Blender’s default rudimentary tools, you should really opt for this plugin to make it more convenient.

Image Background Transform plugin gives you better and more elaborate control of the reference image.

Some of the key features include the scaling of the image, managing its alignment, and snapping it to integer values.

So, no matter what your expertise is with Blender, this is a must-have.

By: LesFeesSpeciales | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, GIFs

10. FPS Setup

If you are a game developer and plan to work with the default engine of Blender for making a game, you should really be acquainted with this add-on.

FPS Setup gives you most of the necessary tools and presets to make a simple First-person shooter.

In our experience, we don’t think this tool is capable to meet the needs of a veteran developer but even then it sure helps. A more ideal user will be a video game enthusiast who is still testing waters.

It takes care of the basics like controls, motion, and collision, so, if you are interested in making a first-person shooter, you should really check it out.

By: ThaTimst3r | Guide/Demo: Video

11. FLIP Fluids

Blender, in general, is really great at generating simulations of complex surfaces such as cloth or fluid.

But if you want to improve your results beyond just the very basics, then you have to make this simulator yours.

It can make it possible for you to create high-quality cinematic fluid simulations that are otherwise not possible.

Not only does it make the settings and options more readily available and easier to manipulate but it also enhances the default capabilities of Blender.

One of the most amazing simulations that we found in the FLIP is the whitewater simulation. It's an amazing simulation that can work for any water body you can imagine.

By: RLGUY | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, Videos

12. Sculpt Tools

For Blender users who are used to using Sculpting software to make character models, etc., this tool kit will provide you with everything you need for the same experience in Blender.

It gives you complex Boolean and modifier actions that can help you to work better with models in Blender. The workflow also gets a speed boost because of it.

One of the most intuitive and amazing tools is the grease pencil. Grease pencil lets you shape 3D objects in an extremely natural way and is similar to other sculpting tools.

So, if you work a lot with sculpting in Blender, there’s no way for you to skip this because it will make your workflow faster and streamlined.

By: Piotr_Adamowicz | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Image

13. Asset Management

Asset Management is a wonderful add-on that does exactly what it says, i.e., manage your assets.

There hasn’t been anything better in improving work speed irrespective of the type of work you do with Blender than this add-on.

Basically, this tool lets you create a library of all the assets you create, like, scenes, HDRIs, etc. And the best part is that you can even share these assets across projects.

Moreover, when you actually get riddled with the huge variety of assets you create, this can help you to manage your assets in a more convenient way.

You get a plugin that is essentially a custom thumbnail generator that can help you keep track of your assets when you work with extremely complex scenes.

This add-on is also helpful with HDRI maps.

Ultimately, it’s an amazing management tool that is, according to us at least, crucial for good speed in Blender!

By: Pitiwazou | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video

14. BPainter

Texture painting is one of the cumbersome tasks in Blender and no matter what you use Blender for, if you want to make your work authentic, you'll have to do a lot of it.

In that case, you should seriously consider this fantastic add-on called BPainter. Even though Blender does have good-quality painting tools, there are a lot of factors that hamper the workflow while painting textures.

First of all, this tool adds a layering system that resembles a lot of other 2D painting software like Photoshop.

Moreover, it also cleans up the UI and makes it less cluttered. Along with that you also get a plethora of brushes and textures that smoothens out the work.

One often overlooked feature that it adds is that of blending options. So, it adds a few blending options like Overlay, Subtracts, etc. for your textures to give you more control while drawing.

The color picker tool is also improved using this add-on. All of it is awesome, but you will have to shell out about $40 for the add-on, which, in our honest opinion, is totally worth it.

By: ndee | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, Video

15. MESHmachine

Blender's default modeling system is quite impressive but it struggles with curved and round surfaces.

To avoid that hassle, one of our top recommendations is MESHmachine. It’s a fantastic modeling tool that gives you better control while modeling curved surfaces.

It provides you with more flexibility than Blender’s default beveling tools and will help you achieve a smoother workflow.

For full information, you will have to shell out a few dollars to add this to your arsenal but if you happen to deal with a lot of rounded and beveled surfaces, this is worth it.

By: MACHIN3 | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Video

16. Material Pipeline

Are you also annoyed with the default node-based material setups in Blender? You can now say goodbye to that whole array of hassle with this simple plugin called Material Pipeline.

This plugin comes with over a hundred unique PBR materials that will surely make your life easier. And if that doesn’t satisfy you, you can also create your own custom PBR-based materials with the included node group.

The best part about this node group is that it lets you simulate any material that you can imagine, which is similar to Disney’s Principled Shader.

But if you happen to be looking for a particular set of materials then you can also consider using their Material Pipeline add-on that lets you use the material packs of your choice.

So, there’s really no reason to skip this one out!

By: ONELVXE Studios | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, Video

17. Asset Sketcher

Game developers already know the pain of designing levels and any Blender user who has ever tried to work with a load of assets in a complex scene knows how hard it is to work with Blender's default tools.

While we are not saying that Blender’s default situation is bad, it sure is less than adequate for someone who has to work on such projects frequently.

One of the biggest problems that this add-on deals with is the annoying nature of constantly placing assets in your scene.

With Asset Sketcher, you can directly draw assets in the scene and that already makes it a lot less tedious.

There is also a huge variety of randomizing options and customizing features that provide the designer with a lot more control over the scene.

The quality of work is also improved as you can directly place your assets on a ground plane that snaps according to a grid. And an included physics calculation will also settle those assets accordingly.

Overall, this add-on is a godsend for level designers, and if you happen to be one, you really shouldn't skip this one.

By: ndee | Guide/Demo: Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video

Best Blender Add-ons & Plugins Comparison Table

Addon/Plugin	By	Guide/Demo
Amaranth	Pablo Vazquez	Text-Based, Images, GIFs
RetopoFlow	CG Cookie	Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video
TexTools	Hendrik-Jan Schoenmaker	Text-Based, Images, GIFs
BLAM	Per Gantelius	N/A
Ragdoll Tools	XBodya13	Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video
Magic UV	nutti	Text-Based, Video
BookGen	Oliver Weissbarth	Text-Based, Images, Video
Image Background Transform	LesFeesSpeciales	Text-Based, GIFs
FPS Setup	ThaTimst3r	Video
FLIP Fluids	RLGUY	Text-Based, Images, Videos
Sculpt Tools	Piotr_Adamowicz	Text-Based, Image
Gaffer	Greg Zaal	Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video
BPainter	ndee	Text-Based, Images, Video
MESHmachine	MACHIN3	Text-Based, Video
Material Pipeline	ONELVXE Studios	Text-Based, Images, Video
Asset Sketcher	ndee	Text-Based, Images, GIFs, Video

Blender Addons & Plugins FAQs

Both free and commercial addons/plugins are available. Blender itself is open-source, which means that many free addons are available; however, some developers also offer premium addons for a fee.

Compatibility issues may arise when Blender updates to a new version. Addons/plugins may need to be updated by their developers to function smoothly in the new version.

Simply download the addon/plugin, open Blender, go to Edit > Preferences > Addons > Install, and then locate and select the downloaded file. Make sure you have the correct file format (.zip, .py, etc.) for the addon.

In Blender, go to Edit > Preferences > Addons. Then, search for the addon you want to enable or disable, check or uncheck the box next to the addon’s name, and click Save Preferences.

If an addon/plugin is causing issues, try the following steps:

Update Blender and the addon/plugin to their latest versions
Disable other addons to determine if there is a conflict
Consult the addon/plugin’s documentation or contact the developer for technical support.

Yes, if you have knowledge of Python programming, you can create custom addons/plugins to fit your unique requirements. The Blender API documentation (https://docs.blender.org/api/current/) provides guidance to get started with addon development.

Conclusion

As we have explored the numerous addons and plugins available to enhance Blender's functionality, it becomes evident that the right tools can significantly improve an artist's workflow, modeling, texturing or the overall user experience. Based on our analysis of the top 17 options, we would like to present three expert recommendations to fit various needs and preferences.

From the above 17 best blender addons & plugins, here are the top three expert recommendations:

For those who are looking to streamline their workflow and reduce friction while working within the Blender interface, Amaranth is an ideal option.

RetopoFlow is a good option for artists focusing on character modeling and design, allowing them to retopologize objects with ease and control.

Finally, TexTools is the right choice for artists who require professional-looking UV and textures, offering extensive functionality beyond the built-in Blender tools.

Each of these plugins offers distinct advantages that cater to different areas within the world of 3D design. Whether your focus is on improving productivity, refining character models, or producing realistic textures, these addons and plugins are sure to enhance your artistic experience within Blender. Don't hesitate to explore these tools further and find the perfect fit tailored to your individual needs.

Colored pencils are some of the most under-appreciated mediums of artistry. They are easy to use, inexpensive, versatile, and can make some of the finest pieces of art.

Some artists think that colored pencil is an immature medium that is only meant for kids. This distaste might be because erasing any colored pencil drawing is simpler than other types of paintings or drawings. But that is certainly not the case.

Many professional artists have created some of the best works of their life using these handy pencils. And while there are certainly inexpensive colored pencils for the casual, the market is also saturated with professional-grade pencils.

So, today, in this discussion we are going to highlight some of our top picks of colored pencils for artists everywhere in the world – both professional and beginners alike.

So, without any further adieu, go ahead and give it a read!

Best Colored Pencils for Art

Here is the list of the 11 best colored pencils that you can use to create incredible artworks.

1. Prismacolor Colored Pencils and Sets - Best for Casual Beginners

Prismacolor Premier Colored Pencils, Soft Core, Assorted...

High Quality: Thick cores perfect for shading and shadows
Saturated Pigments: Lightfast, richly saturated pigments

By far, one of the most popular brands in the world of colored pencils is Prismacolor. The reason behind their popularity is their price-to-performance value, even if some consider them to be on the pricier side. And with flexible size options, varying from 12 to 150 different colors in a single set, we absolutely fell in love with them!

Experience

Even though these are wax-based colored pencils, like many others on this list, the performance is astoundingly good. The set that we used in our testing is one of the basic sets, but there are many other options to choose from as well.

The lead has a fairly high pigment count and even though these are wax-based pencils, the colors are significantly softer and blend more evenly than the other wax-based pencils we have used.

The colors are also very vibrant and no matter what color we used from the set, it looked attractive and gave results that are very close to something we’d expect from a professional-grade pencil.

But even though the pencils have an excellent performance, arguably the best among all the other brands of wax-based colored pencils, we’d still not recommend it for professional use. Due to the lack of any lightfast rating, we don’t trust its permanence.

Overall, the pencils are a great value for money, with each color costing roughly $0.60, for any casual beginner or even intermediate artist.

Pros

Great value-for-money option for beginners
Arguably the best wax-based colored pencil in terms of performance
Versatile set sizes ranging from 12 to 150 colors in a set

Cons

Not meant for professional use

Point Type: Fine | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 72 | Dimensions: 8.15″ x 1.15″ x 10.25″

2. Derwent Colored Pencils ColourSoft - Best for Professional Value

Derwent Colorsoft Pencils, 4mm Core, Metal Tin, 72 Count...

VIBRANT COLOUR: With a round 4 millimeters soft core, the...
SOFT TEXTURE: The velvety soft core helps emphasize the...

Derwent’s ColourSoft colored pencils perform remarkably well, which honestly surprised us. With its soft core lead and vibrant colors, these pencils are so good that they can steal the heart of a professional.

While there are a few objectively better brands of colored pencils that professionals abide by, the value these pencils offer for the price is seriously astounding.

Experience

The colors are incredibly lightfast and you can get the exact information of each color with the attractive color chart that is included in the box.

The lead is extremely soft and produces some of the most vibrant colors we have seen when a pencil is put on paper. And the soft nature of the core also makes it excellent at blending and shading.

Some of us were worried that the soft core of the pencils would break often and would chip while sharpening but, fortunately enough, the lead is extremely resistant to breaking, and there was no case where it broke off unexpectedly when we put pressure.

The lead, however, is a little on the thicker side - roughly, 4mm. While that is a problem for detailed work - because you’d need to constantly sharpen it, it proved excellent for blending and filling out the larger parts of the painting.

Overall, these pencils are excellent for professional-grade use, and they come at a fairly reasonable price, unlike some other brands of similar quality and performance.

Pros

Incredibly attractive colors and great lightfastness
Soft leads that are great for blending
A durable core that won’t break easily
Great value-for-money options for professional artists

Cons

Off-brand blenders don’t suit the pigments

Point Type: Fine | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 72 | Dimensions: 13.95″ x 1.02″ x 7.8″

3. Tombow Irojiten Color Pencils - Best for Unique Palettes

Tombow Irojiten Colorpencils with enamel finish - Pack of 3...

Elegant enamel finish
90 unique colors

Tombow Irojiten is a Japanese company that manufactures some of the most unique art products that we have had our hands on. Their products have stolen the hearts of many artists since 1913 because of their impeccable quality, and their quality of standing out in the market. And these colored pencils also stay faithful to their formula.

Experience

The colors are vibrant, and the pigments are soft and produce an even tone, which is great for blending.

As for lightfastness and permanence, it seems to be excellent in that regard. But the sources we’ve used are not very reliable.

And these unique colors are packaged according to the palette instead of size. Because of that, you get sets like Cool Grey, Seascape, Woodlands, etc. And all of these sets have a different number of colors as well.

We found this on the favorable side because you can just buy colors on the basis of the piece you are doing. If you are doing an art piece with Earth shades, then you can just go ahead and buy only those.

But this argument becomes a little redundant because the pencils are also sold individually but at an extra charge.

They also have many unfamiliar shades and colors that we hadn’t experienced before. So, if you are looking to bring some newness to your artworks, then you have found your match!

Pros

Unique palette of colors, providing 90 colors in total
Can be bought in sets on the basis of colors
Can also be purchased individually
Incredibly good performance and vibrant colors

Cons

It is kind of expensive

Point Type: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 90 | Dimensions: 9.7″ x 8.3″ x 3.6″

4. Koh-I-Noor Progresso Woodless Colored Pencils - Best for Flexible Use

Koh-I-Noor Progresso Woodless Colored 24-Pencil Set,...

Progresso woodless color pencils 24/pkg assorted colors
Brand of Chartpak

Koh-I-Noor Progresso Woodless Colored Pencils redefine the fundamentals of a pencil at an extremely inexpensive price point. And yes, you heard that right! These pencils are indeed made without wood. These are just leads that are wrapped in lacquer. The result of which is positively interesting.

Experience

Since the pencils are all-lead, you can toggle between fine lines and broad strokes with just a slight movement making them extremely flexible to use. Filling out large areas also becomes way easier.

In our experience, we couldn’t help but draw parallels between brushes and these pencils. And don’t worry, the lacquer covering is great at preventing the colors from spreading and making it all messy.

In terms of performance as well these pencils do remarkably well. The colors are vibrant and the pigment density is enough to provide softness to the colors, which is great for blending purposes.

There are two gripes that we have with this color set though. One is the lack of color charts and lightfast ratings and another is the inability to be bought individually.

But when each pencil costs about only $0.58, we couldn’t hold any grudges against it.

Overall, these pencils have a unique feature that we haven’t witnessed in other brands before. And although we would not deem it fit for professional work, we consider it an excellent product for any other use case.

Pros

Unique woodless pencils that are great to use
Extremely affordable pricing with each pencil costing about $0.58
Great colors and performance in terms of vibrancy and softness
A huge variety of possible strokes due to its woodless nature

Cons

Not fit for any professional use
Not sold individually

Point Type: Flat | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 24 | Dimensions: 7″ x 4″ x 0.91″

5. Faber-Castell Polychromos - Best for Oil-Based Blending

Faber-Castell Polychromos Artists' Color Pencils - Tin of...

Premium Quality Colored Pencils: Contains 120 assorted...
Unsurpassed Lightfastness: Features pigments that resist...

Faber-Castell is a company that needs no introduction to the art community. They make some of the best quality art products that artists all around the globe abide by.

Their oil-based Polychromos colored pencils constitute one of those fine specimens. These pencils check all the boxes of an excellent colored pencil set and offer interesting advantages over other wax-based colored pencils.

Experience

These are oil-based pencils and these are extremely reminiscent of oil pastels or oil colors in terms of flow and how the colors behave. So, it’s way smoother than wax-based colored pencils which makes it better at blending.

Oil-based colored pencils are not that common – as evident from the abundance of wax-based pencils on our list as well. Other than being better at blending, these pencils are also resistant to water, and since oil is a stronger binder, the lead is way less prone to breaking or chipping.

As for the performance of these pencils specifically, the colors are well-saturated and behave consistently. And the lightfastness is absolutely amazing! Hence, we deem it fit for professional use.

The pencils also have a thicker core - about 3.8 mm - so, you get a wider range of strokes capable of both detailing and blunt blending.

Overall, these are excellent oil-based pencils that are great for almost any kind of artist, even though the slick feeling is a departure from more popular wax-based colored pencils. And if you are unsatisfied with wax-based pencils, then surely give these a try!

Pros

Oil-based colored pencils that are great for blending
Incredibly lightfast and great permanence
A thick core that is capable of providing a wide range of strokes
Great performance in terms of color vibrancy
Great for professional use as well

Cons

Can be considered to be on the pricier side

Point Type: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 120 | Dimensions: 3.94″ x 1.97″ x 7.87″

6. Caran d’Ache Luminance Colored Pencils

Caran d'Ache Luminance 6901 Clr Pncl Set 76 Artist Rng

High lightfastness and smoothness
Swiss made

There are some brands in the art supplies industry that represent the state of the art. These brands don’t care about compromises for a smaller price tag. All they aim to do is to make the best product possible to cater to the needs of professionals all around the world. Caran d’Ache is one of those companies, and their colored pencils exhibit that commitment as well.

Experience

These pencils are at the top of the ladder. The finest pencils a professional can lay a hand on.

The pencils feature thick 8 mm lead cores that can be sharpened to the finest tip possible, and they’d still not break or chip. Of course, this provides a wide variety of strokes that’d not be otherwise possible.

They also surpass any other colored pencils in terms of lightfastness and permanence. Over 80% of their pencils belong to class I of lightfastness, which means they will remain unhindered for over 100 years. And the remaining colors belong to class II, meaning they will maintain their luster for 50 to 100 years.

The colors are also impeccably good-looking and the pencils flow smoothly no matter what kind of paper we used. And blending is also jaw-droppingly graceful.

Of course, the best of the bests will also be valued at a similar price point but that would never be a problem for a professional who is making a living from the quality of these pencils.

And you can get these pencils in 5 different set sizes.

Pros

Impeccable performance, barely rivaled by any other colored pencil brand
Impeccable durability of colors in terms of lightfastness
A balanced palette and immensely beautiful colors
Intended for serious professional use

Cons

It’s one of the most expensive pencil sets we’ve ever used

Point Type: Fine | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 76 | Dimensions: 5″ x 1″ x 1″

7. LYRA Rembrandt Polycolor Art Pencils

LYRA Rembrandt Polycolor Art Pencils, Set of 72 Pencils,...

Beautifully Pigmented - The colored pencils in this set...
Surface Versatility - These colored pencils for artists are...

A fair competition to Faber-Castell Polychromos colored pencils set is LYRA Rembrandt Polycolor Art Pencils. These are also oil-based colored pencils but these offer a different set of pros & cons compared to the aforementioned brand.

But that doesn’t change the fact that these pencils are of excellent quality as well, and hence, they are worthy of competition.

Experience

Like the Polychromos, these pencils also flow incredibly smooth and blend effortlessly as well. The colors also perform outstandingly in terms of vibrancy and vividity. The pigments can also be manipulated with turpentine or any odorless mineral spirit.

The purchase options for these pencils are also very lucrative. You can buy these in 5 different size options – 12, 24, 36, 72, and 105. But the best part is that you can buy any pencil individually, which is great news for professional artists.

What’s not so great though is that the pencils don’t come with a color chart and that’s not suitable for many professionals.

When compared to Polychromos, these pencils are indeed a little more affordable but still fall on the expensive side of the spectrum with each pencil costing roughly $1.33 when bought in a set of 24.

Some artists have complained online that the lead chips and breaks but we never had such an experience. Hence, we also recommend using manual sharpeners with these pencils instead of electric ones.

Pros

Incredibly smooth oil-based pencils
Great performance in terms of color vibrancy and consistency
Various size options are available and can also be bought individually

Cons

It is expensive

Point Type: Bold | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 72 | Dimensions: 13.19″ x 0.83″ x 7.36″

8. Stabilo CarbOthello Chalk-Pastel Colored Pencil

STABILO Chalk-Pastel Artist Colored Pencil CarbOthello ARTY...

Packaging may vary - same product, new look!
Artist quality chalk-pastel coloring pencils - available in...

All of the colors we have talked about until now were either wax-based or oil-based colors. But we wanted to vary this list with an entry from Stabilo CarbOthello. These pencils are chalk-pastel, and they bring a fairly unique experience to the table, fundamentally different from all the other entries on this list.

Experience

Chalk-pastel colored pencils are significantly different in experience from conventional colored pencils based on wax or oil. The powdery nature of the colors makes blending way more fun.

These pencils belong to the premium category, and hence, are followed by a matching price tag.

The pigments are of top-notch quality, and they are smooth and vibrant. The colors blend together extremely well and with a mix and match of different kinds of paper, you might just witness a unique artwork that’d not have been possible with any other brand of pencils.

As for lightfastness, these colors are extremely resistant to fading due to light and it defines the premium nature of these pencils. So, we think that if you love the experience, and the results you get from these pencils, then don’t be afraid to use it for professional artwork.

The pigments are also partially aquarellable, meaning that you can use these pencils with brush and water, and the contours of your artwork will remain intact. And the range of colors in the set is quite satisfactory too with 60 different colors.

Pros

Premium quality chalk-pastel colored pencils that have a unique experience
Extremely enjoyable blending because the colors are smudgeable
Top-notch quality of pigments. Vibrant and consistent colors
Can be used with brush and water to a certain extent

Cons

Falls on the expensive side of the spectrum

Point Type: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 60 | Dimensions: 13.25″ x 8.05″ x 1.35″

9. Creative Art Materials Colored Pencils

Caran D'ache Supracolor Metal Box Set Of 40 (3888.340)

Use hexagonal pencils wet or dry
Supplies

An extremely unique way to use colored pencils is by using them in a combination with other mediums, especially, watercolors. For those who are looking for colored pencils capable of such artistry, we have brought you Creative Art’s Materials colored pencils.

Experience

While we have had some other oil-based pencils on this list like Polychromos and Lyra, these pencils are better for mixed media because they are significantly softer and silkier than other oil-based colored pencils.

Hence, the pigments latch onto the paper better, and the result is more vibrant colors and expressiveness when used alongside other mediums like watercolor.

Other than that, this set of colored pencils behaves pretty much similar to any other oil-based colored pencil. Its feeling is silky, and the blends are more realistic than the ones created with waxed-based colors.

The durability of the lead is also better than wax-based pencils because oil is a stronger binder. There will be no chipping or breaking after sharpening.

Along with all these redeeming features, the lead is also sufficiently thick. This allows a wider range of strokes.

And the colors are fairly lightfast as well, which makes it capable of being used in a professional project.

Overall, it’s an outstanding colored pencil set like its other oil-based siblings. And its soft lead also makes it the best choice for mixed media.

Pros

Excellent oil-based pencils of incredible quality
Outstanding performance in terms of saturation and consistency
Superbly durable with no possibility of chipping or breaking
Incredibly lightfast and resistant to fading
Softer and silkier lead that is perfect for mixed media

Cons

Like other oil-based colored pencils, these are also very expensive

Point Type: Fine | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 40 | Dimensions: N/A

10. Holbein Artist Colored Pencils

Holbein Artist Colored Pencil 150 Colors Op945

It is adjusted to meet the high demands of professionals; It...
Soft and shaped oil-based colouring pencils with fine and...

Holbein Artist Colored Pencils is one of the most elaborate sets of colored pencils that we have seen that comes at an affordable price point. Even though the 150 different shades of colors steal the show, the pencils themselves are of remarkable quality and perform quite magnificently.

Experience

The number of colors that you get in a box can be quite overwhelming. When you get 150 different shades of colors stacked in two layers of a box, you don’t really have room to complain.

We deem it the most comprehensive set of colors for a beginner and casual artist. As for performance, the colors are quite excellent as the pigments are saturated and blend excellently.

The lightfastness and the permanence of the colors are also quite satisfactory. Although, we don’t recommend this to professional artists who need it to be pitch-perfect.

We’ll rate these colors well above average in terms of performance, meaning that it’s superb enough to deal with the needs of most artists until it’s some serious business.

One thing that was pleasing for us to note, was the thickness of the lead. It’s 3.8 mm, and since it’s on the thicker side, you get a wider range of strokes.

Overall, it’s an excellent colored pencil set for casual beginner and even intermediate artists. But unfortunately, the lightfastness of these colors makes them fall short of any professional use.

Pros

A huge number of colors with 150 colors in a single set
Great performance in terms of vibrancy and blending ability
Adequate lightfastness and permanence
An excellent comprehensive option for beginners

Cons

Not meant for professional use

Point Type: Medium | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 150 | Dimensions: 7.9″ x 2″ x 18.1″

11. Blick Studio Artists’ Colored Pencils

Blick is one of the most beloved brands in this industry. They have found a perfect balance of price-to-performance that seems to please a lot of artists all around the world. And to no surprise, Blick does it again with their colored pencils as well.

These are the perfect middle-of-the-ground pencils that are priced in a beginner-friendly fashion but perform like a professional-grade tool.

Experience

Right off the bat, the performance matches and even rivals some of the professional-grade pencils that are way more expensive than these ones.

The colors are vibrant, and they blend extremely easily. The pigment density is also high.

And the best part is that your artworks will maintain their luster for years to come because the colors are incredibly lightfast. Nothing about the performance felt short, especially, when considering the price.

And the purchase options are incredibly flexible too. First, there are 5 different sizes you can buy – 12, 24, 36, 48, and 72. If that doesn’t suit you, you can also buy them in thematic sets called Greys, Landscape, and Portrait. And if that doesn’t feel right to you, then you can also purchase them individually!

So, if you are looking to move on from rudimentary colored pencils and get into some serious works of art, there is no better option than this. And once you do move on, you won’t change soon because these are nearly gems.

Pros

Great price to performance and impeccable quality
Amazingly vibrant and attractive colors
Good quality pigments for great blending
Incredibly lightfast and great permanence
Huge variety of purchase options. Can be bought individually as well

Cons

May not suit artists who need super-premium pencils

Point Type: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Quantity (Per Set): 72 | Dimensions: 13.10″ x 8″ x 1.40″

Best Colored Pencil Sets Comparison Table

Product	Point Type	Color	Quantity (Per Set)	Dimensions
Prismacolor Colored Pencils	‎Fine	Multicolor	72	8.15″ x 1.15″ x 10.25″
Derwent Colored Pencils	‎Fine	Multicolor	72	13.95″ x 1.02″ x 7.8″
Tombow Irojiten Color Pencils	N/A	Multicolor	90	9.7″ x 8.3″ x 3.6″
Koh-I-Noor Colored Pencils	‎Flat	Multicolor	24	7″ x 4″ x 0.91″
Faber-Castell Polychromos	N/A	Multicolor	120	3.94″ x 1.97″ x 7.87″
Caran d’Ache Luminance Colored Pencils	‎Fine	Multicolor	76	N/A
LYRA Rembrandt Colored Pencils	Bold	Multicolor	72	13.19" x 0.83" x 7.36"
Stabilo Colored Pencil	N/A	Multicolor	60	13.25″ x 8.05″ x 1.35″
Creative Art Materials Colored Pencils	‎Fine	Multicolor	40	N/A
Holbein Artist Colored Pencils	‎Medium	Multicolor	150	7.9″ x 2″ x 18.1″
Blick Studio Artists’ Colored Pencils	N/A	Multicolor	72	13.10″ x 8″ x 1.40″

Buying Guide For The Best Colored Pencil Set

By now, you must have realized that there are a number of color pencil options on the market and that choosing one can be difficult. In this section, we will discuss the factors that can help you purchase the right set of colored pencils.

Type of Pencil Set

Today, most colored pencils are wax-based, which provides a smooth texture. The pigment flows well, and you can create many layers on the paper. There is no need to worry about adhesion or smearing, and the layers will be clearly visible.

The only issue is that you may see wax bloom, which may give a splotchy look to the picture. However, you can wipe the excess colors with a cloth to perfect the sketch.

Next, there are oil-based pencils that have some wax in them. These have a different consistency, and they do not cause a wax bloom. They are firmer than wax pencils but will provide a smooth finish. Also, the lead does not break easily, and the pencils last longer.

But oil-based colors can be harder to remove, and they smear easily.

Then, there are watercolor pencils where the binder is water-soluble, and the pigments can mix with water. They contain a dry watercolor pigment, which can be used along with water and brushes.

Another type to mention is chalk-pastel pencils, which are perfect for blending. These have a chalky texture, and you can use your fingers or cotton to blend them together.

Experience Level with Colored Pencil Art

If you have used pencil colors before, then you must have noticed that some are easier to use than others. The ones available for schoolchildren have a harder lead, and they do not break easily. They are easier to sketch with and have less blending capacity.

On the other hand, for advanced painters, there are more delicate and fragile pencils. These have better blending capacity and a soft lead. Also, if you are using watercolor pencils, then the colors could react with the slightest amount of water and help you blend well across surfaces.

These artist-grade colors can be more expensive as they contain more pigment and are of higher quality.

Durability

With normal use, colored pencils can easily last for two to five years at a stretch. But, if you keep them in a cool dark place in appropriate boxes, then they can easily last for a longer time. Artists who use colors regularly have even used color pencils after 25 years of storing them.

Today, there are woodless colored pencils that can last for 100 years. But, please remember that the colors are susceptible to breaking or chipping in the long run. This is especially true for thin wooden pencils. So, make sure that you keep them properly and do not drop them off often.

If you are teaching your kids how to use these colors, it is best to sit on the floor and work to prevent the pencils from dropping from a higher surface. For school use, purchase pencil colors that are thicker to prevent easy breakage.

Lightfastness Quality

Lightfastness rating helps one understand how resistant the color pigment is to fading. If you are just purchasing colored pencils to practice and do not plan to preserve your work, then this is not going to be an essential factor.

However, if you are planning to sell your work or frame them, then the colors have to be resistant to fading. Most professional-grade color pencils available today are not prone to fading.

Colored Pencils for Art FAQs

Heavyweight, acid-free paper with a slight texture is recommended for colored pencil art. The texture provides tooth for the pigment to adhere to, while the acid-free quality ensures long-lasting artwork without yellowing or deterioration.

Fixative is not always necessary for colored pencil art, but it can help prevent smudging, reduce wax bloom, and protect the artwork. However, it may alter the overall appearance of colors, so testing the fixative on a small sample is recommended.

Yes, colored pencils can be blended using various techniques like layering, burnishing, and solvents. These techniques help create smooth transitions, gradients, and more depth in your art.

Lightfastness refers to a colored pencil’s resistance to fading when exposed to light. Pencils with higher lightfastness ratings will retain their colors better over time, allowing the artwork to remain vibrant and colorful.

Artist-grade colored pencils typically have higher pigment concentration and better lightfastness than student-grade alternatives, which can result in more vibrant, long-lasting artwork. However, they are usually more expensive, so the choice depends on your budget and needs.

While you can use a regular pencil sharpener for colored pencils, specialized colored pencil sharpeners are better suited for the task. They have less aggressive blades that prevent the fragile colored cores from breaking or crumbling during sharpening.

Conclusion

Finding the best colored pencils for your artistic needs can be a challenge, as the options on the market are varied in terms of price, performance, and suitability for beginners or professionals. However, our thorough review has made it easier for you to choose the best product based on your requirements.

From the above 11 best colored pencils, here are the top three expert recommendations:

For casual beginners, the Prismacolor Colored Pencils and Sets are an ideal option. With a high pigment count, soft colors, and excellent blending capabilities, casual artists could fall in love with these pencils.

Professional artists looking for value should consider the Derwent Colored Pencils ColourSoft. With lightfast and vibrant colors, a soft lead that is great for blending, and excellent durability, these pencils are an impressive choice.

If you're looking for unique palettes, the Tombow Irojiten Color Pencils are the right choice. Featuring vibrant colors, great blending capabilities, and unique palette options, these pencils can help you explore new artistic possibilities.

Regardless of your artistic experience or preferences, our expert recommendations can help guide you to the best colored pencil product for your unique needs. So, go ahead and unleash your creative potential with these exceptional colored pencil options.

Related Articles

15 Best Electric Pencil Sharpeners

9 Best Cheap Colored Pencils

13 Best Sharpener For Colored Pencils

11 Best Adult Coloring Books

7 Best Electric Pencil Sharpener For Colored Pencils

10 Best Paper For Colored Pencils

Learn How to Shade With Colored Pencils

12 Colored Pencil Tips & Tricks

Learn How To Use Colored Pencils

6 Best Erasable Colored Pencils

You Won’t Believe What Colored Pencils Are Made Of!

10 Colored Pencil Techniques

Learn How To Blend Colored Pencils

10 Best Derwent Gift Sets

One of the most popular 3D sculpting animation programs today is ZBrush.

We are sure most animators are familiar with the tool, yet not everyone can operate it - at least not without a proper guide.

There are many tutorials about the ZBrush application available online, but choosing which one is beneficial for you can be time-consuming. Therefore, today we have prepared a list of 25 detailed and helpful video tutorials - since many people understand better if they simply see it with their own eyes.

These tutorials cover all skill levels, so, perhaps you’ll find one which suits your needs perfectly. Beginners can have a good start to using the application while advanced users will find more new steps as they progress.

So, let’s get started!

Best ZBrush Tutorials & Courses

Image via archive.zbrushcentral.com

Here is the list of the 25 best ZBrush tutorials & courses to help you to create amazing digital sculptures, master the essential tools, and take your ZBrush skills to the next level.

1. Introduction to ZBrush - Best for Beginners

Here’s a video tutorial you can find on YouTube by North Pixel whose specialization is in 3D animation and entertainment. Their video’s intro focuses on sculpting from scratch. Their aim is to let people know how to sculpt without being too hasty in the process.

The video is about an hour long, so it contains a lot of tips and lessons that can be quite useful for beginners.

While it’s true an hour is not enough to learn everything necessary, however, it does offer more information on the basics that starters need to know. It will come in pretty handy if you are self-taught as well.

By: North Pixel | Duration: 69 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes

2. Introduction to ZBrush 4R7 - Best for 4R7 Users

Here is another introduction video to the application, except that it is specifically meant for version ZBrush 4R7.

In this video, you’ll learn about 2.5D designs including some basics about 3D workflow. Other subjects include ZSpheres, ShadowBox, ZModeler, and a few more..

There aren’t a lot of differences regarding the features, but Justin Marshall gives a very detailed introduction in this 4-hour long video. You would want to watch it because there is a lot of visual guides about what and how you can do your tasks.

Moreover, the instructor also happens to be an author of Pluralsight who focuses on this area of work. Therefore, if you are a beginner this would be highly beneficial for you.

By: Justin Marshal | Duration: 271 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)

3. ZBrush for Beginners - Best for Short Learning Time

If those two are not enough, we have here another introduction to ZBrush which is meant for beginners only. The instructions are presented by Edge-CGI-3D which has its own channel on YouTube.

Before starting an actual project, one needs to have enough practice on the basics of sculpting - and this is exactly what the video provides. Besides the basic concepts, it also describes what ZBrush is all about, hence, making it perfect for the absolute beginner.

Although it can be short to include a complete fundamental guide, we also have to consider the fact that not everybody has the time to spend on more lengthy videos. So, paying close attention to the instructions will do just fine.

By: Edge-CGI 3D Tutorials and more! | Duration: 48 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes

4. The Basics and 10-part ZBrush Series - Best for Systematic Learning

A more systematic approach to help you get familiar with the basics of using ZBrush is this video by artist Richard James Cook who came up with 10-part ZBrush series. It is also one of the most viewed ZBrush tutorials on YouTube.

Every one of his videos is about 30-60 minutes long. Going through each of them at a time can help you get a wider understanding of the program. But most importantly, all of the tutorials are free, so you can learn them at your own pace without having to shed a penny.

By: Gamestar Arts | Duration: 63 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes

5. For 4 Essential Training - Best for Transitioning Users

This video tutorial is not necessarily for beginners but for users who are shifting from one sculpting program to ZBrush. So basically, it is an introductory course for those who are already familiar with 3D animation concepts.

The instructor, Ryan Kittleson, covers many of the common techniques and tools used for both sculpting and painting in a program.

Although the video is a bit old, most of the methods remain the same, making it still applicable for reference to date. And since it is a course, fees are required except for the one-month trial which is completely free of cost.

By: Ryan Kittleson | Duration: 388 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)

6. Core Skills

This one is not a video - it’s a platform. The platform allows you to sign up with Pluralsight for a free trial and have access to many video tutorials on ZBrush. Through these tutorials, you get to learn many sculpting processes you need to know in proper detail.

If you go to Pluralsight, there will be some tests to help analyze your sculpting skills on ZBrush so it can assign which level suits best for you.

By: Pluralsight | Duration: N/A | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)

7. Making Characters From Scratch

Yet, another popular video to help learners is this one by Liam Shaw. In this tutorial, the instructor takes his viewers through a process to sculpt characters from scratch.

You can follow similar steps if you’re planning to create patterns or designs. We assure you that beginners will find this guide very effective.

By: Liam Shaw | Duration: 22 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes

8. Sculpting Ears

The video focuses only on how to shape and sculpt human ears.

When you have gone through the basics of using ZBrush, this tutorial will come in handy when creating human characters.

By: MOOCHIE | Duration: About 10-15 Minutes (Article) | Free: Yes

9. Hair Texture

One of the features which make a character look more appealing is the hair. If created precisely, your character will look almost life-like. And lucky for you, here is a video that will help you achieve that. You will see how the artist sculpts perfectly fine lines to make hair or fur. Besides, it is short and is not as complicated as one might think.

By: gary bru | Duration: 09 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes

10. Human Anatomy

If you are someone who wants to create their own human characters and not download free ready-made ones, this guide might be the perfect one for you.

With this tutorial, you will be able to construct a whole realistic humanoid anatomy from nothing. The software program allows you to mould any form you desire which makes it ideal for such sculpting.

By: Jakub Chechelski | Duration: About 10-15 Minutes (Article) | Free: Yes

11. Sculpt Tiling Webs

The environment or background of your project is as important as the character itself. Therefore, you need to be very detailed with it.

This video is particularly made to achieve that purpose. The tutorial stresses making fine details on objects such as walls or rocks since they have a strong influence in making the project appear realistic.

By: Owen Shepherds | Duration: About 7-10 Minutes (Article) | Free: Yes

12. Realistic Clothes

Now, we are going to shift our focus to creating clothes for our human characters. In ZBrush, the user can color, model, as well as add a finishing touch to the characters’ clothing.

This next video by David Jones is around 3 hours long. It is about sculpting clothes, and as usual, it also aims at making them appear real so that they fit the characters’ look.

We have to admit that making clothes in 3D animations is never easy, and that is why we included this video.

It will be very helpful for those who are struggling to create clothing designs by offering them a step-by-step guide. You will also get to know the basics of where the body’s tension areas are so that it becomes easy to sculpt the clothes better.

By: David Jones | Duration: 185 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)

13. Making a Fantasy Character

Moving away from designing human anatomy, we will now introduce you to the video that teaches ZBrush users how to create a fantasy character.

The instructor, Raul Tavares, explains everything in a simple manner so that everybody, including beginners, may understand it perfectly. However, it would be much better if you already know a thing or two about using ZBrush first.

As a sample, this video will show you how to create a fictional character (or anything similar) using the methods it provides, also by starting from scratch. You can start by sketching the thumbnail, coming up with a concept, and finally creating a 3D model.

By: 3dworld | Duration: 61 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes

14. Posing a Character

In case you have ever made or at least tried designing a character, then you know that in ZBrush there is a lot of posing and modeling needed. Keep in mind that it does require a smooth workflow to accomplish the process.

Kyle Green, the artist, has had a lot of experience in the field, hence, users will find his tutorials more convenient for practicing posing in ZBrush.

His tutorials embrace easy language, tips, and techniques, so the course suits beginners and novice 3D animation designers. You can manipulate the characters’ poses in any manner possible.

By: Kyle Green | Duration: 74 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)

15. Sculpting an Alien

In this tutorial, Darrel Abney shows us how to create an alien face. By acting as a sample, you can draw inspiration from his video to create anything alike.

The reason this artist chose ZBrush for his work is due to the features it provides. Lots of tools for sculpting is one of the main reasons.

By: Darrell Abney | Duration: About 10-15 Minutes (Article) | Free: Yes

16. Quick Sculpting a Creature

A very interesting technique to enhance the realistic look of a character/creature is to use both Photoshop and ZBrush to modify it - and that’s exactly what Adam Dewhirst did.

In this project, the artist shows us the methods of using these two programs in order to create a fantasy creature.

By: ImagineFX | Duration: 78 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes

17. Modular Structures

We have here a video series that will help users design their environment by following these simple, yet very effective methods instructed in detail.

One of the important things to keep in mind is that the environment requires a lot of props and structures. This video series is perfect for those who have never tried this area of designing before but want to create realistic environments.

The video series shows how to use the different tools in ZBrush to create and mold such structures as desired.

By: Dan John Cox | Duration: 137 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)

18. Texture Painting

Besides the character and the environment, texture painting is another part of ZBrush which plays an important role in 3D animation designing.

Here, you’ll be able to see how to use texture painting for creating 3D objects. Some videos already featured the types of tools that can be used for poly painting or workflow.

In time, it will become very easy for creating amazing elements as you learn how texture painting works.

By: Alex Jerjomin | Duration: 177 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)

19. PolyPaint

As we mentioned about poly painting, here is a video by Paul Gaboury which explains what and how to use it. You will see how he creates helmet panels followed by throwing some gold paneling to the ring of this character.

By: Paul Gaboury | Duration: 16 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes

20. Creating Tile Texture

While it’s not a complete guide, this video shows how you can create tile texture by explaining how it works, therefore, it is perfect for the absolute beginner.

We recommend going through this course since tiling is a must for all 3D artists. Note that, this video also uses Photoshop to create realistic tiling.

By: Alex Jerjomin | Duration: 133 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)

21. Sculpt the Base of a Creature

This video is by ArtStation, a channel on YouTube, that places its focus on 3D animation designing. Among many of their content, we found this to be the best tutorial on using ZBrush.

There are many series providing techniques to create characters while this one shows us how to create the base of a creature.

By: ArtStation | Duration: 57 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes

22. Creating a Demon

If you’re thinking of creating a monster/demon for your project, take a look at this video where the artist, Titouan Olive, demonstrates how to model-making tips that are commonly used for Hollywood animations. The bonus is that he also provides a few tricks to use in order to make the creature looks real.

By: Titouan Olive | Duration: About 15-20 Minutes (Article) | Free: Yes

23. Make a Stormtrooper

For a more specific creation to help users have a sound understanding of using ZBrush, we have here a project of Star Wars’ Stormtrooper done by Juan Martin Gracia Forn.

Using both ZBrush and Photoshop, he tells us that we must first plan the construction carefully before proceeding to the modeling. He also mentions and proves that rendering is a hard task in ZBrush.

By: Juan Martin Garcia Forn | Duration: About 10-15 Minutes (Article) | Free: Yes

24. Basics of Environment Textures

If you are a beginner aiming to better understand the concept of environment textures, we suggest giving this video series a try. The complete time amounts to only 3 hours. It is available through the Pluralsight library which offers you a one-month free trial.

However, creating incredible environment textures is not possible without the help of 3D Max. Many artists go for this option because of the professional methods it provides.

By: Alex Jerjomin | Duration: 177 Minutes (Video) | Free: Yes (Within Trial Period)

25. Tips

Finally, after all the tutorials you might want to check out some of the tips on using ZBrush which are provided by Madeleine Scott-Spencer, the instructor who shares her own tips for sculpting with ZBrush.

By: Madeleine Scott-Spencer | Duration: About 15-20 Minutes (Article) | Free: Yes

Best ZBrush Tutorials & Courses Comparison Table

Tutorial	By	Duration	Free
Introduction to ZBrush	North Pixel	69 Minutes (Video)	Yes
Introduction to ZBrush 4R7	Justin Marshal	271 Minutes (Video)	Yes (Within Trial Period)
ZBrush for Beginners	Edge-CGI 3D Tutorials and more!	48 Minutes (Video)	Yes
The Basics and 10-part ZBrush Series	Gamestar Arts	63 Minutes (Video)	Yes
For 4 Essential Training	Ryan Kittleson	388 Minutes (Video)	Yes (Within Trial Period)
Core Skills	Pluralsight	N/A	Yes (Within Trial Period)
Making Characters From Scratch	Liam Shaw	22 Minutes (Video)	Yes
Sculpting Ears	MOOCHIE	About 10-15 Minutes (Article)	Yes
Hair Texture	gary bru	09 Minutes (Video)	Yes
Human Anatomy	Jakub Chechelski	About 10-15 Minutes (Article)	Yes
Sculpt Tiling Webs	Owen Shepherds	About 7-10 Minutes (Article)	Yes
Realistic Clothes	David Jones	185 Minutes (Video)	Yes (Within Trial Period)
Making a Fantasy Character	3dworld	61 Minutes (Video)	Yes
Posing a Character	Kyle Green	74 Minutes (Video)	Yes (Within Trial Period)
Creating a Demon	Titouan Olive	About 15-20 Minutes (Article)	Yes
Quick Sculpting a Creature	ImagineFX	78 Minutes (Video)	Yes
Modular Structures	Dan John Cox	137 Minutes (Video)	Yes (Within Trial Period)
Texture Painting	Alex Jerjomin	177 Minutes (Video)	Yes (Within Trial Period)
PolyPaint	Paul Gaboury	16 Minutes (Video)	Yes
Creating Tile Texture	Alex Jerjomin	133 Minutes (Video)	Yes (Within Trial Period)
Sculpt the Base of a Creature	ArtStation	57 Minutes (Video)	Yes
Creating a Demon	Titouan Olive	About 15-20 Minutes (Article)	Yes
Make a Stormtrooper	Juan Martin Garcia Forn	About 10-15 Minutes (Article)	Yes
Basics of Environment Textures	Alex Jerjomin	177 Minutes (Video)	Yes (Within Trial Period)
Tips	Madeleine Scott-Spencer	About 15-20 Minutes (Article)	Yes

ZBrush Tutorials and Courses FAQs

While some older tutorials and courses may not cover recent features, creators of ZBrush tutorials and courses often release updated content or additional lessons to address new software updates and techniques.

Paid ZBrush tutorials and courses usually provide more structured learning experiences, downloadable resources, and instructor feedback, which can be valuable for mastering ZBrush. However, make sure to check reviews before making a purchase.

Conclusion

Navigating the wide variety of ZBrush tutorials and courses can be overwhelming, especially for beginners and those looking to learn efficiently. To help streamline the process, we have sifted through and analyzed 25 of the best tutorials and courses to find the top three expert recommendations for various learning needs.

For beginners who want a comprehensive introduction to ZBrush basics, Introduction to ZBrush is an ideal option, offering a solid foundation in sculpting without rushing the learning process.

For users specifically working with ZBrush 4R7, Introduction to ZBrush 4R7 is a good option as it provides detailed instructions on the unique features of this version.

Finally, for those seeking a shorter learning time, ZBrush for Beginners is the right choice as it offers a concise overview of the fundamental concepts.

From these top selections, you can make an informed decision on the best ZBrush tutorial or course that best suits your learning goals, preferences, and available time. Dive in and start mastering the powerful features of ZBrush to unleash your creative potential!

Adult coloring books have been on the market for long - however, it’s only recently that they have begun to find footing as an acceptable, regular everyday product.

There is a lot of research that suggests that these coloring books are a wonderful way to let go of stress, whether it’s personal or professional.

It’s not odd to see adults, especially millennials, travel with a set of colors and books which helps them de-stress after a long time of constantly working.

To avoid burnout, a coloring book is one of the best ways. The question, then, remains: which coloring book is best for me?

Fortunately, today it’s incredibly easy to find a variety of coloring books, which are all different and created keeping particular consumers in mind. Without further ado, let’s begin!

Best Adult Coloring Books

Here is the list of the 11 best adult coloring books that can help you to relax, unwind and explore your creativity.

1. Disney Dreams Collection Thomas Kinkade Studios Coloring Book - Best for Disney Nostalgia

Disney Dreams Collection Thomas Kinkade Studios Coloring...

Kinkade, Thomas (Author)
English (Publication Language)

This book is aimed specifically at people who prefer colored pencils and can spare a few hours at a time in order to finish up their coloring. The designs come straight from Disney’s classic movies such as Pocahontas and Aladdin, and the paper is thick enough to handle all but watercolors. The coloring is done in the same manner as Thomas Kinkade’s originals!

Experience

The stories depicted in the book are typical of all that one relates to their childhood - a great way of relieving stress. The book has pages that are finished in matte rather than glossy papers you expect to see on generic children’s books.

There are sixty-three such intricate works, so you’ll be covered for a fair bit of time. Going through all of those stories like Sleeping Beauty, Snow White, The Beauty and The Beast, and so on will surely put you in a meditative state as you forget the world and immerse yourself in a time where there were no worries, where you could just be yourself.

Most books generally focus on the patterns and designs and the colors - this one, being story-based, does a great job of keeping you involved. However, if you’re just starting out, you may want to get a hang of coloring on another (easier) coloring book before going for this.

Pros

Sixty-three drawings for you to fully explore
Wonderful with colored pencils, can handle anything but watercolors
Matte finishing on the pages is a neat touch

Cons

Might be a little difficult for those just starting out

Author: Thomas Kinkade | No. of Drawings: 63 | Book Binding: Paperback

2. Mandala Coloring Book for Adults - Best for Spiritual Relaxation

Mandala Coloring Book for Adults with Thick Artist Quality...

50 Hand-Drawn Mandalas to Color. Relax and unwind with 50...
Durable Hardback Book Covers. Color anywhere at any time...

Mandalas are a class of Buddhist religious symbols, which tend to be incredibly intricate and colorful. They symbolize peace and prosperity and ultimately, attaining Nirvana. Many books use mandalas - this one does only Mandalas though it does them very well. The page quality is amazing so you can use any kind of medium in order to fill between the lines.

Experience

If you want the best quality of paper among mandala coloring books, this makes for a very interesting choice. Mandalas are complex, intricate designs and you don’t want to fumble around too much with colors - they take as much time as it is. Therefore, the card stock-esque paper quality is something to write home about - it’s that good.

Furthermore, you get to use any medium you want - from watercolors to colored markers, you can color with whatever is comfortable. Another wonderful feature is that it is spiral-bound, which means you can frame or showcase your coloring if you so wish! Hence, if it’s a calming and high-quality coloring experience you seek, this should be on top of your list.

Pros

Incredible paper quality, the lines are very neat
Mandala designs vary from the simpler to the more complex, so you can start off wherever you wish to
Comes in a spiral binding, so you can easily pin these colorings on the wall

Cons

Quite a bit more expensive than the rest

Author: ColorIt, Terbit Basuki (Illustrator) | No. of Drawings: 50 | Book Binding: Spiral-Bound

3. **Calm the F*ck Down: An Irreverent Adult Coloring Book** - Best for Adult Humor

Calm the F*ck Down: An Irreverent Adult Coloring Book

O'Hara, Sasha (Author)
English (Publication Language)

This book is meant strictly for adults because the blanks that you’ll be filling in are only relatable when you’re an adult. This book takes the concept of an “adult coloring book” to the most literal extent possible, resulting in one of the most fun and rebellious coloring books you’ll see on the market today.

Experience

The adult experience is often full of not-so-great things, but also full of other great experiences which are unique to adults. This book does a wonderful job at bringing together those parts of our lives which give us pleasure and pain - as well as happiness. The drawings themselves range between being moderate to complex.

There are twenty-one pages full of tidbits from our lives that we can color up - anyway we wish to. There are also (thankfully) two pages that serve a different purpose - these are the test pages that you can use to try out various media like colored pencils, pastels, and watercolors (we wouldn’t suggest acrylics) before going for coloring the designs.

It’s inexpensive, it’s fun, and it’s a bit different from the generic coloring books you see on the market.

Pros

A breath of fresh air in a market that is full of similar designs otherwise
Page quality is good enough to withstand most media without issues
Test pages are useful even if you go for other coloring books later

Cons

Twenty-one drawings won’t last you as long as some competing books will

Author:: Sasha O'Hara | No. of Drawings: 21 | Book Binding: Paperback

4. Butterflies and Flowers: Stress Relieving Patterns - Best for Nature Lovers

Adult Coloring Book Butterflies and Flowers: Stress...

Kohey, Cherina (Author)
English (Publication Language)

For people who are completely done with their work and can’t handle more stress, this book may come to the rescue. This book is targeted squarely at the crowd which usually attempts to color these books on getaways from work, or during breaks from high-pressure work. The pages are of decent quality as well.

Experience

This book will be perfect for those who want to do coloring, but on a budget. Further, nature lovers will be impressed by the theme of the book, which revolves around butterflies and flowers and sometimes mixes the two as well! The designs aren’t very complicated compared to many others we’ve reviewed, so feel free to get one if you’re just starting out with coloring.

The book has thirty one-sided pages which are all meant to give you a meditative experience as you go through the drawings one by one. The patterns themselves are open-ended - you can color them in any way you wish to go about it. Though we feel that there could have been more variety in some designs, the book overall does a great job.

Pros

Thirty-one relatively inexpensive and high-quality pages for you to color
Some of the designs are truly breathtaking
Easier to complete than many other books, which may get too complex for beginners

Cons

A few of the designs tend to be repetitive

Author: Cherina Kohey | No. of Drawings: 30 | Book Binding: Paperback

5. Adult Coloring Book: Design by Two Hoots Coloring - Best for Budget-Conscious Users

Adult Coloring Book: Designs

Coloring, Two Hoots (Author)
English (Publication Language)

If you’re on a shoestring budget but still want to achieve some kind of mental piece, or are unsure of whether adult coloring is really worth any of the attention it is getting - this is for you. In terms of value, nothing else on the market comes within shouting distance - you could even give away some of these if you’re a fan of coloring and want your dear ones to get started.

Experience

Who said adult coloring had to be an expensive hobby? Adult coloring can be as expensive or cheap as you want it to be - and this coloring book serves as a prime example of that. A set of 12 colors of any medium, and this book will ensure you’re well on your way to attaining mental peace at a fraction of the cost of other books. There are very few compromises, too.

The only compromise here comes in the form of paper quality, which is predictable enough because high-quality paper costs a lot. However, with this book, if you stick to colored pencils or wax crayons, you’ll be good to go - you do get forty-eight of the most diverse designs spread across experience levels. Inexpensive it may be, but it’s a pretty solid book.

Pros

Undercuts the competition by at least half the price
Designs are varied and range from easy to fairly complex
Can easily be given away as a gift

Cons

Paper quality is decidedly not the best

Author: Two Hoots Coloring | No. of Drawings: 48 | Book Binding: Paperback

6. Posh Adult Coloring Book: Soothing Designs for Fun & Relaxation

Posh Adult Coloring Book: Soothing Designs for Fun &...

Andrews McMeel Publishing (Author)
English (Publication Language)

If you’re looking for designs that are a bit out-of-the-blue and don’t have a problem with somewhat dark designs, this is what you’re looking for. A small caveat first: there are drawings on both sides of the page, so your markers will bleed through in all probability. If you stick to drier media, you’ll be alright though. Otherwise, it’s a pretty solid coloring book.

Experience

Posh coloring books are the latest trend to hit the market, and this one is no different in being as hip as the others are. These designs are much more modern and sophisticated, and sometimes a bit dark as well. It doesn’t have anything close to the mandalas and nature-based scenery we’ve covered in some other offerings - it has a different audience.

It is also much larger, having more than 100 drawings for you to fill up and make artworks out of! The paper itself can’t handle more than strong pastels - so markers and watercolors are off the table. If you can manage that, the rewards are immense - the drawings themselves hardly ever disappoint. A solid recommendation from our side!

Pros

Enough material to last multiple vacations and breaks
Wonderful, non-repetitive material which is sure to soothe you
High-quality material used for the pages

Cons

Printing on both sides of the page causes bleeding even though the pages are thick enough

Author: Andrews McMeel Publishing | No. of Drawings: 100 | Book Binding: Paperback

7. Coloring Book for Adults: Amazing Swirls Paperback

Coloring Book for Adults: Amazing Swirls and Paisley...

Works, Selah (Author)
English (Publication Language)

For the lover of all things swirl, here’s your way to all-but-guaranteed relief. The best part about this particular coloring book is that you get a large variety of swirly patterns which will definitely uplift your mood and color up all the greyness you might have been feeling. The book comes with a variety of difficulty levels, so it is easier for you to start at your ease.

Experience

Sometimes, books don’t have to follow a set subject - they can cover a variety of designs and subjects while following one certain theme. This book focuses exclusively on swirls in all the varieties that are possible - as well as some you may have never thought of. This book excels in providing a few out-of-the-world highly creative designs that you won’t find elsewhere.

It’s one of the least expensive items which are being reviewed today, and that has an obvious consequence - the paper quality suffers in comparison to a few others. Hence, it’s possible that you may see some bleeding around some parts if you do use media such as wet-erase markers, or watercolors. Otherwise, you should not face any problems.

Overall, the swirly designs in this book are abundant and you should have no problems in going about the business of bringing back some peace of mind.

Pros

Comes with a large number of drawings and designs to keep you occupied
Relatively inexpensive

Cons

Paper quality is decidedly not as good as the best

Author: Selah Works | No. of Drawings: 40 | Book Binding: Paperback

8. Good Vibes Coloring Book by Thaneeya McArdle

Good Vibes Coloring Book (Coloring is Fun) (Design...

Design Originals-Good Vibes Coloring Book
Optimism is contagious and focusing on these cheerful images...

The Good Vibes Coloring Book is a perfect fit for those who need some cheering up after a particularly hard week/month/year - it is also a brilliant gift for those who you know are going through a particularly hard time and could be helped by some positivity and optimism headed their way. So whether it’s you or people who you hold dear - this gift is wonderful for all of you!

Experience

The way in which this book unfurls alone makes it worth a purchase, with a number of positive (but not overwhelmingly so) messages lined up for you to give color to. These messages will surely help in uplifting your spirits after a hard time personally or professionally - or if you have been facing problems for a while, this can be a good place to start finding yourself.

The thing about coloring books like these is, they are not only a way to find peace but also to start working towards happiness which may have been lost for a number of reasons.

The quality of paper is such that it can handle any medium, and it’s hard enough to not let any color bleed over to the next page. There are plenty of uncolored illustrations for you to go through and fill up in any color you wish to!

Pros

One of the few books which emphasize positivity and happiness instead of indirectly leading you to peace
You can fill it up with any medium you wish to
Plenty of designs for you to fill up and rediscover happiness

Cons

Some may think it’s too expensive for what it offers

Author: Thaneeya McArdle | No. of Drawings: 30 | Book Binding: Paperback

9. Secret Garden: An Inky Treasure Hunt and Coloring Book

Secret Garden: An Inky Treasure Hunt and Coloring Book for...

Laurence king publishing Secret gardens coloring book
Laurence king publishing Secret gardens coloring book an...

The Secret Garden is one of the more niche entries on today’s list of the top coloring books for adults. It’s niche even though it’s sold millions of copies worldwide and is probably one of the most popular coloring books to have hit the shelves and online bookstores. It’s niche and popular because it’s a color-as-you-go storybook, and you can even color the back and front!

Experience

This book has been on the market for a while today, and it’s for good reason - it has a connection between each of the pages that you fill up with color, and it’s a damned good book otherwise too. The pages are of exceedingly high quality and allow one to use any medium they want to.

The creatures that the book makes you color include octopi, anemones, and more! There are tons of different scenes in the book which you can fill up and create a world that looks absolutely the same way you want it to. This book is great for all ages, should you want to get this for your kids or young ones in the family.

Pros

The coherent story flows between the pages
Not recommended for detailing and precise art
The shades are not sold individually

Cons

None

Author: Johanna Basford | No. of Drawings: N/A | Book Binding: Paperback

10. Creative Haven SeaScapes Coloring Book

Creative Haven SeaScapes Coloring Book (Creative Haven...

Used Book in Good Condition
Wynne, Patricia J. (Author)

For someone who is a fan of all the wonders that lie under the horizon, this book makes a whole world of sense! As children, many of us get to see so many of these creatures for the first time in coloring books. Hence, it makes sense to encourage the kind of peace we found in colors with books like these.

Experience

The first thing that you see about this book is that the difficulty level is tuned a few notches below the rest of the book. That’s because this book is not meant exclusively for adults - this is a book that children and adults can use all at the same time. However, the contents of this book are sure to keep you hooked if you enjoy coloring.

The paper quality is far away from children’s coloring books - which means as always, the choice is yours for which media to go to. The general medium of choice is, of course, pencil colors because they’re the lightest of the lot - but if painting with brushes is more appealing, you’re free to do that as well. A great book all around.

Pros

Comes with a number of drawings to keep you thoroughly occupied
The page quality is incredibly decent and good
One side page drawings which can be easily removed if you wish

Cons

May seem somewhat childish at times because of the low level of difficulty in coloring it

Author: Patricia J. Wynne, Creative Haven | No. of Drawings: 31 | Book Binding: Paperback

11. The 1990s Coloring Book: All That and a Box of Crayons

The 1990s Coloring Book: All That and a Box of Crayons...

Used Book in Good Condition
Grange, James (Author)

The last book on our list is a blast from the near past - a reminder of when things were much better (as is the general consensus). Seinfeld was on TV, video game graphics weren’t half as realistic and people actually talked to each other (or as the kids say, in real life - or is that IRL?). Jokes apart, this is a brilliant book.

Experience

While most of these books soothe you by teleporting you to unknown worlds, this one just takes you 20 years or so into the past. Surprisingly, however, it does the job of taking you there very well. With easy-to-fill-in pages, and a free box of crayons included in the bundle, this is one solid book for the nostalgic adult.

While it is nostalgic, the paper quality remains modern. You can bring other materials to the mix, should you wish to do so. All in all, it remains a solid addition to anyone’s coloring book collection. It’s also one of the best ones to start off with because of the ease of coloring in the beginning.

Pros

Comes with its own set of crayons so you don’t have to bother
A nostalgic trip back to the nineties is guaranteed
Wonderful designs

Cons

Might not be very relatable for younger adults

Author: James Grange | No. of Drawings: N/A | Book Binding: Paperback

Best Adult Coloring Books Comparison Table

Book	Author	No. of Drawings	Book Binding
Disney Dreams Collection	Thomas Kinkade	63	Paperback
Mandala Coloring Book for Adults	ColorIt, Terbit Basuki (Illustrator)	50	Spiral-Bound
*Calm the Fck Down**	Sasha O'Hara	21	Paperback
Butterflies and Flowers	Cherina Kohey	30	Paperback
Adult Coloring Book	Two Hoots Coloring	48	Paperback
Posh Adult Coloring Book	Andrews McMeel Publishing	100	Paperback
Coloring Book for Adults	Selah Works	40	Paperback
Good Vibes Coloring Book	Thaneeya McArdle	30	Paperback
Secret Garden	Johanna Basford	N/A	Paperback
Creative Haven SeaScapes	Patricia J. Wynne, Creative Haven	31	Paperback
The 1990s Coloring Book	James Grange	N/A	Paperback

Adult Coloring Book FAQs

While individual experiences may vary, many adults find that coloring helps to relieve stress, anxiety, and depression. Coloring allows for creative expression and can promote a sense of accomplishment and relaxation.

Consider your interests, art style preferences, theme or subject matter, paper quality, and desired level of complexity. It’s important to find a coloring book that matches your aesthetic and skill level for the best experience.

Popular themes include nature, animals, patterns, mandalas, cityscapes, fantasy, and inspirational quotes. There is a wide variety of themes catering to different tastes and interests.

The choice of coloring tool depends on your preference, skill level, and the paper quality of the book. Popular options include colored pencils, gel pens, markers, and watercolor brushes.

Yes, adult coloring books come in various levels of difficulty. Some cater to beginners with simpler designs, while others have more intricate and detailed drawings for advanced colorists.

Digital coloring books offer convenience and portability, as they can be accessed on smartphones or tablets. They also provide unlimited ways to experiment with colors without damaging original illustrations. However, physical coloring books provide a tactile experience that can be more satisfying for some users.

Conclusion

Finding the perfect adult coloring book to help you unwind and de-stress is essential, as it can greatly impact your overall coloring experience. Our list of 11 best adult coloring books provides a variety of options to cater to diverse interests and skill levels.

From the above list, here are the top three expert recommendations:

The Disney Dreams Collection Thomas Kinkade Studios Coloring Book is an ideal option for fans of Disney's classic movies who prefer colored pencils, boasting 63 drawings and matte finishing on its pages.

For those seeking spiritual and mental relaxation through the intricate patterns of mandala art, the Mandala Coloring Book for Adults is a good option with its incredible paper quality and spiral-bound design.

Lastly, if you're looking for a fun and rebellious coloring experience, Calm the F*ck Down: An Irreverent Adult Coloring Book is the right choice with its 21 drawings and adult humor.

With these top recommendations in hand, it's time to pick up your coloring tools, explore your creativity, and immerse yourself in the comforting world of adult coloring books. Happy coloring!

Related Articles

15 Best Electric Pencil Sharpeners

11 Best Colored Pencils for Beginners & Professional Artists

9 Best Cheap Colored Pencils

13 Best Sharpener For Colored Pencils

7 Best Electric Pencil Sharpener For Colored Pencils

10 Best Paper For Colored Pencils

Learn How to Shade With Colored Pencils Swiftly & Correctly

12 Colored Pencil Tips & Tricks to Enhance Your Skill

Learn How To Use Colored Pencils | 12 Brilliant Beginner Techniques

6 Best Erasable Colored Pencils

You Won’t Believe What Colored Pencils Are Made Of!

10 Colored Pencil Techniques to Enhance Your Drawings Swiftly

Learn How To Blend Colored Pencils Correctly Fast

22 Best Drawing Books for Beginners

10 Best Derwent Gift Sets

If you want to buy the most economical yet high-quality paper for colored pencils, you have come to the right place! Today, we will discuss the best paper you can buy!

There are a few kinds of paper you can buy for art with colored pencils. However, there are certain factors where you must not compromise:

Every artist wants the best possible archival properties, so there should be no yellowing with time.
The paper should not tear easily.
It should be able to absorb multiple layers of colors for compound finishes.
The paper should be of a reasonably high quality

With these qualities in mind, we’ve chosen the ten best papers for colored pencils you can buy this year. Without further ado, let’s get to the product reviews!

Best Papers For Colored Pencils

Here is the list of the 10 best papers for colored pencils that you can use to create vibrant and captivating artworks.

1. Canson XL Series Mix Media Paper Pad - Best for Beginners and Hobbyists

Canson XL Series Mixed Media Pad, Side Wire, 7x10 inches, 60...

EXPLORE YOUR WILD SIDE – Embrace worry-free creativity on...
HEAVYWEIGHT & TEXTURED – Unlock artistic possibilities...

When we talk about performance and value, very few products come close to the Canson XL Series Mix Media Paper Pad. Canson has been manufacturing papers for over five centuries. The XL Series Mix Media Paper Pad is one of the cheapest papers you can buy and has relatively decent quality too!

Experience

This Mix Media Paper Pad is terrific for beginners since it costs very less per sheet. It is available in many different sizes, ranging from 5” x 8.5” to 18” x 24”. These sheets have negligible flaws when it comes to creating art with colored pencils, but they are known to bleed with sketch pens.

The surface has a smooth and buttery texture. It is sturdy enough to bear multiple layers of pencil colors. In case you are looking for multiple pads to draw on - say one for home and one for the studio, you should probably buy two of these. The texture is quite similar to medium watercolor paper.

Pros

Excellent texture for its price
Decent quality for use by most artists
Smooth finish and offers excellent value-for-money

Cons

It is known to bleed with other media, so not the best option for liquid inks

Sheet Size: 7" x 10" | Paper Weight: 160 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 60 Sheets

2. Legion Stonehenge Colored Pad - Best for Professional Artists

Legion Stonehenge Drawing Paper Pad - 9" x 12", Warm White,...

Legion Stonehenge Drawing Paper Pad - 9" x 12", Warm White,...
Warm White

The second product in our recommendations comes from Legion, a company known for making cotton-based drawing paper pads for a long time. The Stonehenge series is renowned for being the best-colored pencil paper you can buy. It is 100% acid-free, comes with no chlorine or optical whiteners, and is made very responsibly.

Experience

The Stonehenge Pad comes with Legion’s printmaking expertise, thereby giving you an enjoyable experience overall. It is made out of cotton, which provides you with a superb drawing experience with almost every top-notch colored pencil on the market today.

The paper does not bleed ink, gives you supreme control over colors, and withstands several layers of colors on the surface without any problems. It allows you to be flexible and create almost anything that comes to your mind! We undoubtedly recommend this to professionals and experts. Beginners should not spend so much to practice.

While it is expensive, you wouldn’t expect the highest GSM paper to be value-for-money. It is definitely worth the outlay - especially if you’ve become a professional artist.

Pros

250 GSM paper, which is the best you can get for colored pencils
100% non-toxic
Features a best-in-industry texture

Cons

Expensive and suitable only for professionals and experts

Sheet Size: 9" x 12" | Paper Weight: 250 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 15 Sheets

3. Fabriano Artistico Aquarelle for Colored Pencils - Best for Heavyweight Paper Lovers

Fabriano AEW BL 4CO 25F GF Watercolour Paper - 12.5 x 18 cm...

Hoogwaardige kunstenaar aquarelkarton in de uitvoering extra...
Geschikt voor: aquarel, gouache, acryl, inkt, kolen,...

Technically, this isn’t colored-pencil paper. However, once you use it, you will fall in love with the weight and the smoothness. While using this paper and colored pencils, you’ll soon forget that it wasn’t made to be used with colored pencils at all! It is recommended for pencils that are slightly harder so that the paper won’t break the pencil nib.

Experience

Besides the Legion paper, this paper is one of the few which comes with a high GSM rating of 300. Don’t be fooled by the rating - these two papers are worlds apart in all other contexts. The Fabiano is hot-pressed, while most other papers tend to be cold-pressed, so they give a bit more texture.

You can get this paper in a variety of sizes and in different quantities as well - you may want a roll if you’re a professional, but if you’re experimenting, you might want to go for single sheets. However, there is one problem - the cost. For a paper that isn’t even technically colored-pencil paper, it’s one of the most expensive options out there.

Pros

Incredibly high GSM paper; the heaviest you can find in the market
Papers are hot-pressed, but they work well
Comes in various sizes and quantities

Cons

Incredibly expensive, even for a watercolor paper

Sheet Size: 4.92" x 7.08" | Paper Weight: 300 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 25 Sheets

4. Moleskine Art Sketchbook for Colored Pencils - Best for Portability and Travel

Moleskine Art Sketchbook, Hard Cover, A4 (8.25" x 11.75")...

MOLESKINE ART COLLECTION: From sketchbooks and sketchpads to...
DURABLE COVER & ELASTIC CLOSURE: Hold writing projects &...

Moleskine comes to the market with a wonderful product that shines because of its portability. Moleskine’s claim to fame is their notebooks, which are some of the best you can find in the market. Their sketchbook is brilliant, irrespective of which set of colored pencils you use with them.

Experience

Moleskine’s Art Sketchbook comes in four sizes, ranging from pocket-sized (5” x 5.5”) to full-fledged A3. Paper quality is one of the most important aspects of this notebook - it outshines most of its competitors when it comes to this attribute. Moleskine is known for high-quality paper, and this product certainly does its best to uphold the company’s reputation.

This sketchbook comes with a pocket up front, which is useful for storing tidbits.

We especially liked the shade of the paper, which is a toned ivory color. Another great feature of the pages is that they are acid-free and have rounded corners, which helps when you’re keeping the notebook in your pocket. For drawing something up quickly or sketching while traveling, there are very few products that come close in quality.

Pros

165 GSM paper, which is perfect for drawing something quickly
Highly portable and comes with a neat pocket
Has a rare toned ivory color, which is hard to find on sketch pads

Cons

The A3-sized Moleskine notebook has better substitutes and isn’t the best product for its price

Sheet Size: 8.25" x 11.75" | Paper Weight: 165 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 96 Sheets

5. Strathmore 300 Series Bristol Vellum Pad - Best for Unique Texture Enthusiasts

Strathmore 300 Series Bristol Paper Pad, Vellum, Tape Bound,...

Heavy Bristol weight paper for final artwork
Ideal for pencil, charcoal, sketching sticks, airbrush, pen,...

With this, we come to the real deal - the actual sketching pads which are directly aimed towards colored pencils and shading pencils. This paper is slightly more textured than the best color pencil sketch pads on the market but does the job just as well in most circumstances. Vellum used to be made from animals but is now made from plant material.

Experience

This sketchpad is a little different from regular colored pencil sketching pads, in that you get multiple ply sheets on one page and hence, a heavier sheet with a 270 GSM weight to it. This pad is ideally suited for a studio because it is too large to be used on the go. We especially liked the paper quality, which is beyond reproach.

The shade of the page is slightly light grey/yellow, because of the way vellum is prepared. The 400 series and the 300 series differ in that the 400 series is somewhat more expensive and slightly better when it comes to performance with a variety of color pencils, such as the Prismacolor and the Faber-Castell ranges.

Pros

Excellent color performance and can efficiently deal with multiple shades of colored pencils
The tone of the page is a bit different from the generic white pages you get in sketch pads
Vellum’s texture is worlds apart from usual sketch pads

Cons

If you can afford the outlay, the 400 series may be a better product for you

Sheet Size: 14" x 17" | Paper Weight: 270 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 20 Sheets

6. Strathmore 400 Series for Colored Pencils

Strathmore Colored Pencil Spiral Paper Pad 9"X12"-30 Sheets...

Excellent for use with colored pencil; great for graphite,...
Smooth, even coverage can be achieved, and the durable...

The OG Strathmore Colored Pencil Pad has 100 sheets with some of the best quality paper you can buy today. We especially liked the price of this pad - merely above the average price you would expect from normal sketchpads. It offers brilliant value for money and is one of the better choices you can make if you want the regular sketch finish.

Experience

This set of pages is very polarising among the artist community, mostly because it’s one of the few sketch pads which allow the tooth to show through the work. Hence, artists with softer leads such as Prismacolor have an affinity for the 400 series. However, it remains a solid choice, even in light of intense competition and its unique tooth property.

Strathmore has taken into account the needs of users who like to move around with their colored pencils. They have introduced a portable variant that measures approximately 6” x 8”. It will easily fit into a small bag or a purse - you can draw with ease pretty much anywhere you wish to. The paper is acid-free and comes in at around 270 GSM.

Pros

Very high GSM rating for its price, relative to other products
When used with softer tips, it can become a handy tool, somewhat like more expensive brands of papers
The pocket series fits into a small bag quite handily, giving stiff competition to the Moleskine notebook in terms of value

Cons

It is not meant for use with harder pencils

Sheet Size: 9" x 12" | Paper Weight: 163 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 30 Sheets

7. Bee Paper Bee Creative Colored Pencils Book

Bee Paper - 8.5"x 11" Bee Creative Color Pencil Drawing...

HIGH QUALITY - 50 acid free, natural white drawing sheets...
TEXTURED - 30% post consumer recycled sheets have a natural,...

It is another one of the few rare sketchbooks which were explicitly designed for colored pencils. It comes with 50 pages and is geared mostly towards those starting with colored pencil-based art. Many competitors are primarily concerned with covering all kinds of art possible, which makes this product a bit different.

Experience

It is a beginner-level colored pencil pad - it has neither the GSM heft nor the tooth expected from more premium surfaces such as those recommended above. However, it brings a few remarkable features to the forefront - including 100% acid-free paper. It is a spiral-bound notebook rather than individual sheets, which gives you great archival benefits.

The pad is available in three sizes - 5” x 8”, 5” x 11”, and 8” x 8”. Thus, it makes a lot of sense for students who are just starting out with colored pencils or want more practice to get this pad. 50 sheets for as little as this pad offers is a bargain you do not want to miss out on! It’s also great for the outdoorsy types and has gotten rave reviews from a lot of people as well.

Pros

Comes with a reasonably high GSM for its cost
Offers some tremendous archival properties, allowing you to display your work later on
Sizes available make a lot of sense

Cons

Professionals may want to look elsewhere for a better-quality paper

Sheet Size: 8.5" x 11" | Paper Weight: 147 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 50 Sheets

8. Canson Universal Sketch Paper Pad

Canson Universal Heavyweight Sketch Pads, 9 In. x 12 In.,...

Developed for Professional Artists — The Canson Artist...
Dependable Sketch Paper — A finely textured surface for...

If you’re looking for a smoother paper and want to introduce more detail into your work, the Canson Universal might be what you’re looking for. However, be warned - adding more detail to your work comes at the cost of allowing more colors into your work. Hence, it only makes sense to go for this pad if you’re sure you don’t want to mix colors too much.

Experience

This sketch pad comes with everything you need if you want to try less color but more detail. The surface is incredibly smooth for the price, which means that standard artwork will be a breeze to put on these sheets. They also come at somewhere around the average price mark, so they’re neither too cheap nor too expensive to buy.

The pages are finished in a natural white, so you won’t have any problems when it comes to color reproduction. These pages are acid-free, which means they have excellent archival properties as well - though not the best. The pages are also perforated, and it comes in a spiral binding which should give you an exceptional finish. Hence, you’ll be quite happy if you want to create art on these papers.

Pros

Decent GSM rating for the price
Acid-free papers tend to last long
It is micro-perforated, so you won’t have issues with tearing pages apart
Its natural white shade of paper is hard to come by

Cons

It cannot take too many layers of color before it starts curling up

Sheet Size: 9" x 12" | Paper Weight: 96 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 100 Sheets

9. Strathmore Medium Weight Drawing Paper Pad

Strathmore Medium Drawing Spiral Paper Pad 8"X10"-24 Sheets...

There are 24 sheets per pad of 80 pound / 130gsm paper
Perfectly suited to line drawings and technical artwork

With Strathmore’s third entry into our list of reviews, you should get an idea of how well they have mastered the art of making papers for all kinds of purposes, especially colored-pencil papers. It is a much larger pad with an 8” x 10” size, which means it is another excellent product to have around in the studio.

Experience

The papers are a fair bit heavier than you’d expect your generic sketch pad to be, but that’s a pretty good sign - in both archival properties and color absorption. It comes in at one of the best medium-weight papers that we’ve reviewed, both in terms of archival qualities as well as range.

It only comes in a specific size - which is 8” x 10”. If you’re looking for pads that come with a bit more in terms of size, you should have a look at the other offerings that we reviewed earlier.

Pros

Medium-weight papers are hard to find, which also gives you so much range
It makes a lot of sense in the home or studio setting
Great archival properties

Cons

Only comes in 8” x 10”

Sheet Size: 8" x 10" | Paper Weight: 130 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 24 Sheets

10. Strathmore Sketch Series Drawing Pad

Strathmore 400 Series Sketch Pad, 5.5x8.5 inch, 100 Sheets -...

Artist-Recommended Sketch Paper - Loved by artists for...
General Purpose & Heavyweight - Tackle sketch projects like...

Jack of all trades but master of none - this idiom sums the drawing pad up pretty well, in our opinion. The drawing pad gives you more range than you need when it comes to colors but also gives you enough tooth to get some excellent detail going. The sketch series is aimed at all artists and not just colored-pencil users, but it behaves quite nicely with it too!

Experience

As the last item on our review list, it leaves little to be desired. It is a beautiful combination of natural-looking colors, with enough heft to allow good quality designs with as much color as you wish. At the same time, it has enough smoothness for you to detail your designs as much as possible. The GSM rating is 74, the least of all here - but it does give you a great experience!

The low GSM points to it being strictly practice paper, but this is not the case. It is useful even if you want to showcase the odd drawing or two. This set of pages, in fact, turns out to be one of the best-rounded products that we have reviewed today.

Pros

It comes with a tremendous quantity-to-price ratio
Generally, one of the best papers a beginner can buy
8.5” x 11” size is decent enough for the studio or desk at home

Cons

Other papers come with more archival properties and better GSM ratings but at a higher price

Sheet Size: 5.5" x 8.5" | Paper Weight: 89 GSM | Acid-Free: Yes | No. of Sheets: 100 Sheets

Best Papers For Colored Pencils Comparison Table

Product	Sheet Size	Paper Weight	Acid-Free	No. of Sheets
Canson XL Series Paper Pad	7" x 10"	160 GSM	Yes	60 Sheets
Legion Stonehenge Colored Pad	9" x 12"	250 GSM	Yes	15 Sheets
Fabriano Artistico Aquarelle	4.92" x 7.08"	300 GSM	Yes	25 Sheets
Moleskine Art Sketchbook	8.25" x 11.75"	165 GSM	Yes	96 Sheets
Strathmore 300 Series Bristol Pad	14" x 17"	270 GSM	Yes	20 Sheets
Strathmore 400 Series Pad	9" x 12"	163 GSM	Yes	30 Sheets
Bee Paper Bee Creative Book	8.5" x 11"	147 GSM	Yes	50 Sheets
Canson Universal Sketch Paper Pad	9" x 12"	96 GSM	Yes	100 Sheets
Strathmore Medium Paper Pad	8" x 10"	130 GSM	Yes	24 Sheets
Strathmore Sketch Series Pad	5.5" x 8.5"	89 GSM	Yes	100 Sheets

Paper For Colored Pencils FAQs

Paper texture plays a crucial role in how colored pencils lay down pigment. A rougher texture provides more tooth, allowing for stronger color payoff and improved blending, while a smoother texture is better suited for fine details.

To avoid smudging, you can use a fixative spray, place a protective sheet between your hand and the paper, or carefully work on your drawing from one side to another, avoiding resting your hand directly on the artwork.

Yes, you can use toned or colored paper to create unique and dynamic effects, as it provides a base color to work with and can affect the overall appearance and mood of your artwork.

Yes, the weight of the paper is important, as heavier papers, typically around 300gsm, can handle more layers of colored pencils and prevent the paper from buckling or tearing.

Conclusion

Selecting the best paper for your colored pencils is vital to ensuring a pleasurable and quality experience in creating stunning artwork. Different paper products cater to varying needs, involving factors such as skill level, budget, paper texture, and weight.

From the above 10 best papers for colored pencils, here are the top three expert recommendations:

The Canson XL Series Mix Media Paper Pad is an ideal option for beginners and hobbyists, offering excellent value for money and a smooth finish.

The Legion Stonehenge Colored Pad is a good option for professional artists, with a high GSM and top-quality texture.

Lastly, the Fabriano Artistico Aquarelle is the right choice for heavyweight paper lovers due to its high GSM and hot-pressed variety.

Consider these top suggestions when selecting the best paper suited to your needs, requirements, and level of expertise. Enjoy the creative journey, and always remember that practice and quality materials will help elevate your work to greater heights.

Related Articles

15 Best Electric Pencil Sharpeners

11 Best Colored Pencils for Beginners & Professional Artists

9 Best Cheap Colored Pencils

13 Best Sharpener For Colored Pencils

11 Best Adult Coloring Books That Will Color Your Mood

7 Best Electric Pencil Sharpener For Colored Pencils

Learn How to Shade With Colored Pencils Swiftly & Correctly

12 Colored Pencil Tips & Tricks to Enhance Your Skill

Learn How To Use Colored Pencils | 12 Brilliant Beginner Techniques

6 Best Erasable Colored Pencils

You Won’t Believe What Colored Pencils Are Made Of!

10 Colored Pencil Techniques to Enhance Your Drawings Swiftly

Learn How To Blend Colored Pencils Correctly Fast

10 Best Derwent Gift Sets

When you invest in good quality colored pencils, you want to keep them in good shape and prolong their useful life.

For that to happen, one of the crucial things to be careful about is sharpening. Now, there are three different types of tools you can use to sharpen your pencils - a sanding block, a manual sharpener, and an electric sharpener.

While two of those tools include careful and meticulous methods of sharpening a pencil, an electric sharpener is a fast and convenient way to do the job.

However, getting the right electric sharpener for your precious colored pencils can be a little more complicated than you’d like. The primary reason for this complication is the diversity in the market and the many factors that make each sharpener unique for a specific case.

But don’t worry because we have handpicked the best electric pencil sharpeners for colored pencils in 2023!

Go ahead and give it a read!

Best Electric Pencil Sharpeners For Colored Pencils

Here is the list of the 6 best electric pencil sharpeners that you can use to quickly and easily sharpen your colored pencils for your next art project.

1. X-ACTO XLR Electric Pencil Sharpener - Best for Affordable Reliability

If you have ever bought a sharpener on your own before, there is no way you haven’t heard of X-ACTO. Their wide range of sharpeners caters to the needs of many artists around the world.

X-ACTO has also been a prominent brand for almost a century. And their expertise and experience have led them to make products that are fine-tuned to an artist’s needs.

X-ACTO Electric Pencil Sharpener | XLR Heavy Duty Electric...

Stylish electric pencil sharpener ideal for home or office
Classic design fits with most decor

Experience

XLR sharpener is an affordable product that meets most of the standard requirements while also being long-lasting. For the price, you get an excellent sharpener that does the job with no frills.

We found the product to be extremely reliable, and many of our fellow artists have been using these sharpeners for years without any complaints.

You can expect to get the sharpest tips after using this sharpener and it also doesn’t chew away the pencil with its pencil-saving technology.

The product is also safe to be kept around kids and toddlers because of its safety measures. It won’t turn on the blades if the tray is open.

One downside is that the sharpener is not portable. You’d have to use an electrical outlet to power it up. So, we don’t recommend it to painters who like to work outside mostly.

Overall, it’s an affordable, durable, and functional sharpener that will faithfully serve you for years. Also, it has a 2-year warranty.

Pros

Super affordable, extraordinary quality
Genuine and reliable brand with a legacy
2-year warranty
Safe for keeping around children

Cons

It’s not portable and doesn’t offer any bonus values as such

Dimensions: 7.25" x 4" x 6" | Weight: 1.8 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 2 Years

2. OfficeGoods Electric & Battery Operated Pencil Sharpener - Best for Portability and Flexibility

Like the EX-20, OfficeGoods Electric & Battery Operated Pencil Sharpener is a feature-packed tool that comes at an immensely modest price.

The quality is more than just satisfactory, and the product itself has been top-rated in the community, even proving to be one of the favorites of professionals.

OfficeGoods Electric Pencil Sharpener - Battery or Cord...

Sharp and versatile - This electric pencil sharpener offers...
Safe for kids and adults - The OfficeGoods automatic pencil...

Experience

OfficeGoods’ offering is akin to our previous entry, EX-20. And it is equally eligible for admiration for its value-for-money proposition.

Despite being in the moderate price range, this sharpener offers the feature of variable tip sharpening. So, you can get blunt, medium, and sharp pencil tips on the switch of just one button.

Artists have also raved about its quality and performance. Its online reviews are adorned with positive remarks for not clogging in long-term use and producing pin-sharp tips.

It can also be used with other pencils that have graphite or lead cores.

As for power options, like the EX-20, it can also be powered by batteries, USB, and directly from an outlet. And like the EX-20, it’s capable of catering to any artist’s needs.

Overall, it’s also a splendid pencil sharpener that can work even on soft and delicate pencils without chipping while also providing immense flexibility.

Pros

Affordable price and doesn’t skimp on quality
Extremely portable with 3-way power options – batteries, USB, and from the wall
Variable tip sharpening options

Cons

Only one year of extended warranty

Dimensions: 5" x 2" x 3.5" | Weight: 0.53 lb | Power Source: AC & Battery-Powered | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 1 Year

3. LINKYO Electric Pencil Sharpener - Best for Classroom Safety

LINKYO’s electric pencil sharpener is not about being full of features to attract customers. Its value stems from its impeccable design, which is both smart and gives the machine an elegant look.

And along with several safety features and intelligent design elements at an extremely reasonable price, it stands to be the best option for classroom environments.

LINKYO Electric Pencil Sharpener Pro (Heavy Duty, Black)

Experience

LINKYO Electric Pencil Sharpener is one of the most handsome sharpeners that we have laid our hands on. The design is not only beautiful but also very smart and innovative.

It has a vertical design where the pencil is fed in a top-down fashion. It’s not only unique but also incredibly smart because the shavings get collected with ease.

Also, it’s one of the safest sharpeners we have tried yet. There are several small but thoughtful safety features, such as preventing the blades from rotating when the tray is out.

In our opinion, it is perfect for use in an art class where several people use the sharpener in a day, and you’d want to ensure that no accidents happen.

Moreover, the sharpener also intelligently turns off after the pencil is sharpened. So, no worries about over-sharpening your pencils!

A 1-year warranty accompanies all of these attractive features.

Pros

Affordable and moderate pricing
Impeccable and intelligent design – elegant and smart
It has a 1-year warranty
Plenty of safety features that make it perfect for art classes

Cons

No battery option or portable usage options

Dimensions: 6.97" x 3.39" x 4.8" | Weight: 2.57 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 1 Year

4. Bostitch QuietSharp Glow

When it comes to quality, reliability, and minimal design, there’s nothing that tops this premium sharpener from Bostitch. With its excellent durability and industrial design and a warranty of 7 years, it has remained to be a professional favorite and has found its home in many art classes around the world.

Bostitch Office QuietSharp Electric Pencil Sharpener, Heavy...

Tool-Free Removeable Cutter Cartridge for fast and easy...
10x Longer Cutter Life – The SharpGlow has an extra...

Experience

For a professional, the reliability of a product is way more important than having extra features that would rarely be used.

That requirement of reliability and long-term use is the key focus of this premium sharpener from Bostitch.

It has a super quiet motor that will keep serving you without a hitch for several years. You can straight away sharpen a 170 pencil set with its stall-free motor.

Moreover, its blades can also be replaced without any hassle with just $10 worth of replacement blades, so you can keep on using it for as long as you like.

Of course, due to its impeccable reliability, it’s also an excellent choice for a classroom where all the students can use it while learning.

Ultimately, it’s a quality product that will keep running without a hiccup, and if for some reason, it does fail, you still have a 7-year warranty.

Pros

Quiet stall-free motor that will work for years without failure
Easy-to-replace blades that ensure long-term usage
Perfect for professional use and classrooms
Excellent support and a 7-year warranty back it

Cons

It is expensive or better put, a one-time investment

Dimensions: 10.63" x 6.13" x 9" | Weight: 4.03 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 7 Years

5. Smart Vertical Pencil Sharpener

The School Smart Vertical Pencil Sharpener stands out as a robust and efficient tool for classrooms and artistic environments. Designed for quick and reliable sharpening, this electric pencil sharpener handles colored and standard graphite pencils with ease, ensuring finely sharpened tips in just a few seconds.

School Smart Vertical Electric Pencil Sharpener, For...

Seriously Sharp: Made of alloy steel, the single-hole...
Smart Design: The transparent shavings bin is extra-large to...

Experience

The School Smart Vertical Pencil Sharpener boasts a range of noteworthy features. For one, its speed and efficiency are impressive thanks to a fast, high-performance motor with helical steel blades. This combo guarantees uniform results each time.

Secondly, the integrated autostop function both prevents over-sharpening and extends the life of your pencils.

Lastly, the sizeable shavings receptacle enables a hassle-free sharpening process for multiple pencils, as you can easily discard the shavings after a large amount. The clear design of the receptacle also allows users to see when it needs emptying.

Pros

Affordably priced
Quick and resilient
High-performance motor
Hassle-free sharpening process

Cons

Somewhat noisy due to its powerful motor
Blades aren’t replaceable
Designed for only one standard pencil size

Dimensions: 6.5” x 5” x 7.25” | Weight: 2.9 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: N/A

6. AFMAT Electric Pencil Sharpener

The AFMAT Electric Pencil Sharpener is a heavy-duty, classroom-ready pencil sharpener created to handle 6.5-8mm No.2 and colored pencils. With its UL-listed industrial design and robust helical blade, this top-of-the-line sharpener is an excellent choice for school classes, art settings, or home use.

AFMAT Electric Pencil Sharpener, Heavy Duty Pencil Sharpener...

Sharpen 10000 Times Without Wearing out: This heavy duty...
UL Listed Electric Pencil Sharpener: Our classroom pencil...

Experience

The AFMAT Electric Pencil Sharpener stands out due to its impressive efficiency and versatility. Its powerful motor allows users to sharpen over 200 pencils without any signs of overheating, while the large helical blade can sharpen more than 6,000 pencils throughout its life.

Perfect for regular use across various environments, this pencil sharpener works well with both wooden and colored pencils, making it an ideal tool for artists, teachers, and students alike.

Pros

Powerful motor can sharpen more than 200 pencils
Capable of sharpening more than 6000 pencils
Works well with both wooden and colored pencils
Reasonably priced

Cons

Slightly louder than other pencil sharpeners
No option to adjust the sharpening style of the pencil nib

Dimensions: 6.65” x 3.15” x 3.55” | Weight: 2.7lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Auto-Stop: Yes | Warranty: 2 Years

Best Colored Pencils Electric Sharpeners Comparison Table

Product	Dimensions	Weight	Power Source	Auto-Stop	Warranty
X-ACTO XLR Pencil Sharpener	7.25" x 4" x 6"	1.8 lbs	Corded Electric	Yes	2 Years
OfficeGoods Pencil Sharpener	5" x 2" x 3.5"	0.53 lb	AC & Battery-Powered	Yes	1 Year
LINKYO Electric Pencil Sharpener	6.97" x 3.39" x 4.8"	2.57 lbs	Corded Electric	Yes	1 Year
Bostitch QuietSharp Glow	10.63" x 6.13" x 9"	4.03 lbs	Corded Electric	Yes	7 Years
Smart Vertical Pencil Sharpener	6.5” x 5” x 7.25”	2.9 lbs	Corded Electric	Yes	N/A
AFMAT Electric Pencil Sharpener	6.65” x 3.15” x 3.55”	2.7 lbs	Corded Electric	Yes	N/A

Buying Guide For The Best Colored Pencils Electric Sharpener

Buying an electric pencil sharpener can be a tricky task if you are doing it out of the blue. There are a lot of things to consider for ensuring a sound purchase.

This section is dedicated to discussing all the factors you should keep in mind to make the right decision when buying an electric pencil sharpener.

Price

The money you have to shell out for an electric sharpener can vary drastically depending on the quality. But you can roughly estimate it to be somewhere between $15 and $45.

While, of course, you can pay more to get the best in quality, we found out from our experience that spending somewhere around $25 is enough for almost everybody.

We would recommend buyers to not cheap out when buying one of these sharpeners because a low-quality product will damage your pencils way too often, ultimately costing more in the long run.

Blades

The blades of an electric sharpener can’t be taken out and sharpened manually for long-term use. Instead, you’d have to take them out and fit new ones in the machine.

Hence, to extend the life of the machine, you’d have to consider something called replacement blades.

If you plan on using the sharpener for personal use, then you can buy it without considering this factor because the blades will likely last decades.

But if you are buying it for an office or a class, then go for brands that have cheap replacement blades, which can be purchased conveniently.

Portability

Compromising on portability is not an option for many artists who like to paint or sketch on the go. More so for artists who do live landscaping, portrait, or meet clients at their place instead of working in a studio.

A portable sharpener is the best option in such cases. These sharpeners are usually lighter and more compact than conventional sharpeners. And you can pack them in your backpack and carry them around conveniently.

These are typically powered by AA batteries and are significantly quieter than other sharpeners. But don’t just go for these for the sake of it. These are less powerful and less durable than regular corded sharpeners.

So, if you plan to only use your sharpener in and around your office, studio, or home, then opt for a non-portable one. Otherwise, these are better suited for your use.

Multi-use

Even though today we discussed all of the electrical pencil sharpeners in the context of colored pencils, these sharpeners can be used for other mediums as well.

Most electrical sharpeners can work on more than one medium and of course, we believe, the more mediums, the better overall value it has.

So, before you plan on buying one, see if it has some added value in terms of working on other tools like charcoal pencils, graphite pencils, watercolor pencils, pastel pencils, and hard pastels.

Electric Pencil Sharpener FAQs

Yes, electric pencil sharpeners are generally very easy to use. The user simply places the pencil in the sharpener and the motor does the rest. Some models may have additional features, such as automatic shutoff or adjustable sharpening angles.

Some electric pencil sharpeners may be noisy due to the sound of the motor and sharpening mechanism. However, there are many models available that are designed to be quieter and less disruptive in a classroom or office environment.

Most electric pencil sharpeners can sharpen standard-sized pencils, but some models can also sharpen larger or smaller pencils. It’s important to check the product specifications before purchasing to ensure that it can sharpen the type of pencil you need.

Electric pencil sharpeners generally require very little maintenance. It’s important to keep the blades clean and free of debris, and some models may require occasional lubrication. You should always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for care and maintenance.

The lifespan of the blades on an electric pencil sharpener will depend on the frequency of use and the quality of the pencils being sharpened. In general, the blades will last for several years with proper care and maintenance.

It is possible for electric pencil sharpeners to overheat if they are used for an extended period of time or if they are plugged in for too long without being used. Most models have built-in safety features that prevent them from overheating, but it’s important to use them properly and take breaks if necessary.

As with any electronic device, it’s important to follow the manufacturer’s instructions and safety guidelines when using an electric pencil sharpener. It’s also important to keep the device out of reach of children and to supervise their use to prevent injury.

Conclusion

The journey to find the perfect electric pencil sharpener can be daunting, considering the myriad of options available on the market today. To make this choice more accessible and enable you to pick the ideal product that meets your specific needs, we have selected six of the best electric pencil sharpeners, carefully examining their features, quality, and performance.

From the above six best electric pencil sharpeners, here are the top three expert recommendations:

The X-ACTO XLR Electric Pencil Sharpener is an ideal option for those in search of affordable reliability, backed by a trustworthy and well-established brand that ensures a durable, functional, and safe product.

The OfficeGoods Electric & Battery Operated Pencil Sharpener is a good option for artists who value portability and flexibility, offering multiple power options and adjustable tip sharpening.

Finally, the LINKYO Electric Pencil Sharpener is the right choice for classrooms prioritizing safety and an intelligently designed sharpener.

Selecting the best electric pencil sharpener ultimately depends on your specific requirements, whether you are considering aspects such as reliability, portability, or safety. We hope this article has provided valuable insights into the top options available to help you make a more informed and confident decision.

Related Articles

15 Best Electric Pencil Sharpeners

11 Best Colored Pencils for Beginners & Professional Artists

9 Best Cheap Colored Pencils

13 Best Sharpener For Colored Pencils

11 Best Adult Coloring Books That Will Color Your Mood

10 Best Paper For Colored Pencils

Learn How to Shade With Colored Pencils Swiftly & Correctly

12 Colored Pencil Tips & Tricks to Enhance Your Skill

Learn How To Use Colored Pencils | 12 Brilliant Beginner Techniques

6 Best Erasable Colored Pencils

You Won’t Believe What Colored Pencils Are Made Of!

10 Colored Pencil Techniques to Enhance Your Drawings Swiftly

Learn How To Blend Colored Pencils Correctly Fast

10 Best Derwent Gift Sets

Colored pencils are one of the mediums which children and professionals can use proficiently, shoulder to shoulder.

The first thing worth mentioning is that they are also the easiest to use since they are portable and do not require preparation except for a quick sharpening, of course.

While many out there may doubt the power of colored pencils still, good artists, however, create masterpieces through this medium.

Therefore, if you’re a beginner inspired by colored pencil artworks, we recommend getting yourself started with these affordable, yet great quality pencils for practicing before proceeding to the high-end brands. These are also ideal if you are tied with a budget but still want good pencils for your drawings.

Best Cheap Colored Pencils

Here is the list of the 9 best cheap colored pencils that provide great quality without breaking the bank.

1. Reeves Colored Pencils - Best for Beginners

Reeves Watercolor Pencil Set - Vibrant Colors for Beginners,...

SUPERIOR QUALITY PENCILS - Looking for the perfect set of...
24 VIBRANT COLORS - Add water and release rainbows of...

Reeves colored pencils can be found in many well-known art stores. They deliver very good results and come at a very affordable price.

Based on your requirements, you can find these pencils in three different sets of 36, 24, and 12. They also come in very simple and neat packaging which can be used by artists of any age.

Experience

We are surprised to find that these pencils are very smooth while applying - nearly as those expensive brands in the market.

As a result of this feature, they become pretty easy to blend when we have to mix shades or layer them on our textured surface. The pigment firmly grabs onto the paper without flaking off after leaving the artwork untouched even for hours.

The pencils also provide full coverage to every artwork and that’s something that exceeds our expectations from an inexpensive set.

We would suggest this set for those who are still learning to blend with colored pencils, and they will work well for other basic purposes too.

We can say that the only drawback with these pencils is that the number of colors is limited and that makes blending highly necessary if we want to create a desired shade outside their collection.

But all in all, the pack is an ideal starting option or a gift for learners that comes at a very low price.

Pros

The pencils deliver a smooth touch and a nice feel on the surface
They can be blended with ease on rough and textured surfaces
Great for achieving full coverage in drawings

Cons

Limited colors make blending necessary

Dimensions: 0.61" x 3.54" x 6.99" | Weight: 3.52 oz | Color: Multicolor | Blendable: Yes | No. of Pencils: 24

2. Studio Series Colored Pencil Set - Best Budget Option

PETER PAUPER PRESS Studio Series Colored Pencil Set (Set of...

30 premium pencils in a spectrum of colors
They come ready to go with an included sharpener

The Studio Series Colored Pencil Set is made by a book publisher who is mostly known for his contribution to the adult coloring books collection with Doodle Design, Tropical Paradise, and more.

The reason we included the set on this list is that it has most of the properties of good colored pencils, given that it comes from a manufacturer with much experience in coloring.

Experience

What we feel is worth mentioning first is how affordable this colored pencil set is. It's perfect for any artist with a highly restricted budget, or even better, for students who want to purchase art supplies from their own savings.

On top of this, the pack comes with a kneaded eraser and one good-quality sharpener, which we can say is free if compared to the overall price. Instead of having to choose from good brands and buy them separately, the ones included in the pack are more than enough to fulfill your needs.

While the eraser may not be as good as those from higher-end brands, we find that it leaves patches of colors that are faintly visible and will disappear once covered with another shade. And personally, we find this additional feature to be good enough for something that technically came for free.

However, they only have 30 shades in their color range for now, and this means we have to rely on blending to create the intended colors.

But keeping that aside, the pencils blend very well on paper and deliver great results altogether. With the inclusion of an eraser and a sharpener, this is the perfect pack of colored pencils for learners and budgeted artists.

Pros

This set contains colored pencils which blend pretty well on a paper surface
Very affordable, making these colored pencils accessible to anyone including students
It comes with an extra sharpener and an eraser

Cons

The number of colored pencils is limited only to 30 colors

Dimensions: 12.25" x 0.25" x 9.5" | Weight: 0.6 oz | Color: Multicolor | Blendable: Yes | No. of Pencils: 30

3. Prismacolor Scholar Colored Pencils and Sets - Best for Vibrant Artwork

Prismacolor Scholar Colored Pencils, 48 Count - Vibrant...

High-quality art pencils designed for beginning artists and...
Soft, smooth leads for superior blending and shading

Not everyone will expect to find the brand name Prismacolor on this list because of their price range but their particular Scholar Colored Pencils and Set is surprisingly affordable so we had to include it here.

The set contains a total number of 48 different shades with which we can produce more colors while mixing.

Experience

The pigments from the Prismacolor colored pencils are very rich and vibrant and they can make your drawings appear almost natural to the observer’s eye.

Working with these pencils is easier than expected since we don’t have to stress on each stroke because the colors are already vivid, which means only a few light strokes on one area are more than enough to provide full coverage.

The reason the pencils are rich in pigments is that they contain wax in their core and therefore, they are smooth to work with. At the same time, it does not take too much time or effort to blend the colors because of the waxy ingredients.

Although the pack is slightly costlier than the others on our list, we still think it’s a worthy investment considering the inexpensive price tag.

All in all, this is the ideal setting for those who are looking for a well-known and reliable brand.

Pros

Pencils blend really easily, and that is what most artists look for in a good set of colored pencils
They provide vibrant pigments without having to add too much pressure or spend too much time In the process

Cons

A little costly for artists who are strictly looking only for cheap pencils

Dimensions: 8.25" x 4.75" x 0.75" | Weight: 11.4 oz | Color: Multicolor | Blendable: Yes | No. of Pencils: 48

4. Blick Studio Artists Colored Pencils

Blick is one of the most popular brand names which many artists turn to when it comes to purchasing art supplies.

When it comes to colored pencils, their Artists’ Colored Pencils are sure to live up to your expectations too.

Experience

This widely known brand is famous for its high-quality products, and sure enough, its colored pencils are no exception.

First of all, this set is pretty cheap compared to the contents inside. It’s a good choice for anyone who seeks to experience professional quality products at the lowest price possible.

They are also available in 5 different sets including packs of 72, 48, 36, 24, and 12. We think they have a good range of sizes which can fit many requirements including children, students, beginners, and even professionals.

If you are new to this brand and want to check out the effects of these pencils, you can start with the pack that contains a minimum number of 12 pencils at a very low price.

The best feature about the Blick sets is that each pencil is also available for individual purchase. So if one of them either breaks or finishes, we can easily buy a new one without having to waste money on a whole new set. Therefore, there is no need to worry about working with a larger artwork.

Moreover, the casing is made from cedar wood which makes the pencil very comfortable to hold while working, and that will add to the improvement in your drawing.

But we can say the price for purchasing individually can be too much for some artists.

Nonetheless, there is more to gain than lose with these pencils because the lead core is also just the right size (3.8mm) to create perfect drawing strokes. So these are the perfect pick for everyone, ranging from learners to experts who are on a restricted budget.

Pros

Blick colored pencils are available in 5 different set sizes, aiming to meet most drawing needs
They are comfortable to hold which is good for producing amazing results
These professional-grade pencils come at a very low price if bought as a set
Each color is available for individual purchase

Cons

The price of buying an individual colored pencil is expensive

Dimensions: N/A | Weight: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Blendable: Yes | No. of Pencils: 72

5. Prang Groove Triangular Colored Pencils

Prang (Dixon Ticonderoga Groove Slim Colored

Triangular shape with grooves promote proper grip, even...
Smooth core delivers vivid, blendable colors and soft...

Prang is well known for producing art supplies that are affordable for everyone. For many years, it has been serving artists with wallet-friendly materials.

Their colored pencils are great for young artists who are getting themselves familiar with this line of artwork.

Experience

The colored pencils by Prang are neither too expensive nor too cheap, they come in a medium price range.

Because they are targeting mostly young artists and children who have a passion for art, the shape of the pencils is carved in a triangular barrel so they are easy to hold while at the same time, allowing the user to dominate their strokes and control the outcome of the drawing.

One aspect of these pencils that stand out from the rest is their lead core size, which is 3.3mm small. It serves both as a benefit and a loss for the artist, depending on how you want to use it.

You will achieve more precision when working with a 3.3mm lead and enhance those minor details or highlights. But when it comes to large projects, it takes a lot of time and patience to see visible effects.

Note that sharpening the triangular pencils does not require you to use a knife or blade. Instead, just a regular mechanical sharpener will work fine. We do recommend using a sharpener because the casing is really tough.

If you’re looking forward to doing small and simple artwork without spending too much time on it, these colored pencils would be the right choice. Keep in mind they need pressure for leaving vivid marks and lines.

Pros

Prang colored pencils are shaped in a triangular barrel to ensure comfort and full control while working set sizes, aiming to meet most drawing needs
The pencils are great for working on fine lines and little details

Cons

The lead core of the pencil is very thin for working on larger artwork

Dimensions: ‎7" x 9" x 0.5" | Weight: ‎4.8 oz | Color: Multicolor | Blendable: Yes | No. of Pencils: 24

6. Artlicious Colored Pencils

Artlicious Colored Pencils, 50 Colored Pencils for Adult...

Complete Set - With 50 bright, bold drawing pencils to...
Strong Materials - Our premium adult coloring pencils are...

Artlicious is a brand that produces a lot of art supplies - from wet paints to multiple extras. And not to mention, they are all of the great quality too.

Since we are looking for colored pencils, expect to find one of the best quality at a very reasonable price from this name.

Experience

Despite being cheap, it took us by surprise when we compare it with the performance it delivers - it almost seems like a steal!

Not only for this reason that we included this set on the list but also because it comes with a good-quality sharpener which saves us from spending more time and money in the search for one from a good brand.

The pencils blend pretty well when mixed together and they offer opaque coverage after a few strokes or layerings.

With 50 shades in the set, we find it to be a great deal given the very affordable price. Since they blend very well, we can mix two or more colors together if there is a shortage of one particular shade.

One amazing aspect of the pencils is they don’t contain toxic chemicals or ingredients which means they are safe for kids to use as well. So, they would make a perfect gift set for your little one who shows a keen interest in colors.

Another good feature we found with these pencils is that they have softcore lead. When it comes to sharpening, artists would take extra care of their soft leads by using either a knife or blade. But on the contrary, these pencils can be sharpened using both mechanical and electric sharpeners, and they still won’t damage the core.

As far as we know, the only setback here would be the diameter of the core which is just 3.3mm. While we can achieve perfect strokes, this can also take a lot of time and energy when working on larger pieces.

Pros

At a very low price, the pencils provide excellent performance
Blending and mixing can be done easily with these colored pencils
Since they are non-toxic, they are safe for children to use
The soft lead core does not get damaged by either mechanical or electric sharpeners

Cons

With a diameter of 3.3mm, it will be hard to create large drawings since it takes a longer time

Dimensions: 7.25" x 0.7" x 7.75" | Weight: 11.5 oz | Color: Multicolor | Blendable: Yes | No. of Pencils: 50

7. Sargent Art Premium Colored Pencils

Sargent Art Premium Coloring Pencils, Pack of 50 Assorted...

Colored Pencils: Set of 50 neon colored pencils with 12...
Sharpened: Pencils come pre-sharpened for quick use right...

Here is another brand that offers 5 different set sizes of 52, 50, 36, 24, and 12 to ensure artists find the desired one for their drawing.

The 50-colored pencil set, for example, is one of the cheapest on the list. Sargent Art has done budget-conscious beginners and artists a great service for coming up with this set that can fit both budget and quality.

Experience

One might think that the fact that it's so cheap, the quality is definitely compromised. But before we go further, we would clarify that it is not.

Of course, they may not be as great as higher-end brands but they do deliver amazing results, nonetheless. They hold all the basic properties of good colored pencils for getting started.

Because they are intended for beginners, the pencils are more than enough to fulfill this purpose. These are ideal for young artists and children to prepare themselves for a journey in this line of artwork.

The size range is also highly admirable because then it prevents artists from getting the wrong set or colors which they probably do not intend to use.

We would also recommend this pack for beginners who want to explore the world of drawings starting with a good set of colored pencils.

Pros

The pencils have most of the basic properties artists look for when getting started with this medium
They are both beginner-friendly and easy to use
With a range of 5 different set sizes, artists can choose which one will best meet their requirements

Cons

Its properties suit beginners, but might not work for advanced artists or professionals

Dimensions: 8.11" x 7.56" x 0.71" | Weight: 10.2 oz | Color: Multicolor | Blendable: Yes | No. of Pencils: 50

8. Faber Castell Premium Color Pencils

Faber Castell Premium Color Pencils, 60 colour

If you’ve been around the world of art for some time, you’ll know that Faber-Castell is one of the most popular brands which deals with a variety of art supplies.

When it comes to colored pencils, they also have a wide range of them, including their Premium Color pencils which we will review in a moment.

And if you’re a beginner looking to find a trusted brand, we assure you that Faber-Castell is one of them.

Experience

We find that the Faber-Castell Premium Color Pencil set is one of the best in terms of quality among affordable colored pencils.

These particular pencils are ideal for intermediate or professional artists who are looking for affordable colored pencils with quality that’s enough to showcase their artwork. But that does not mean beginners should shy away from them as they can be good for learning how quality pencils work.

No doubt, they are not the cheapest on the list but they are worth investing in if you want to get amazing display results.

Similar to Prismacolor and Blick’s colored pencils, these are also very smooth and they make application very easy. Because of this, we don’t have to press too hard on the paper in order to achieve brilliant and colorful lines. Instead, just consistent light touches will do the work.

And if you are looking for eco-friendly colored pencils, you’ll be glad to know the casing is made of 100% reforested wood, which means they have a lesser impact on our environment.

We would recommend these for those who are conscious of the environment while still looking for good-quality pencils which are easily removable with kneaded erasers.

Pros

These pencils are made from reforested wood, therefore, having a much lesser impact on our environment
Soft and easy to work with, so you don’t need to put too much pressure on the application process
Can be used by both learners and professionals

Cons

Might not fit the budget of some artists looking for cheaper options

Dimensions: ‎7.9" x 6.8" x 0.8" | Weight: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Blendable: Yes | No. of Pencils: 60

9. Castle Art Supplies Colored Pencils Set

Castle Art Supplies Colored Pencils Set | 120 Premium Soft...

MADE TO MAKE IT EASY Ultimate range of 120 pencils arranged...
SOFT YET DURABLE Latest advanced formulation by in-house...

Last on the list, we have these colored pencils by Castle Art Supplies, a band name that is known for producing a range of affordable art supplies.

Likewise, the colored pencils also come at a very cheap price which is a pretty good deal compared to the number of 72 colors in the box.

Experience

Among all the other sets we mentioned, this one has got the most number of colored pencils which are available at a very low price.

On top of that, the colors are all vibrant and rich in pigments, which makes this an even better deal.

With that many colors, we are able to find a lot of shades, and this reduces the necessity to mix colors in order to find the perfect shade.

The quality of these pencils is also not compromised as they can deliver amazing coverage with only a few strokes. The color sticks firmly to the paper, although they work better on a rough surface while producing natural pieces.

For their price range, the pencils are almost as good as those from professional brands, ranging from the quality of the lead core to the comfortable grip. Moreover, each pencil has a number printed on the top to prevent the artist from confusing similar shades.

Above all these, we feel that the box deserves its own attention as it is attractive and organized. It will make a perfect gift for someone who loves color

We would say that the only drawback is that the case can consume a lot of space if you’re a traveling artist.

Pros

Because the pencils are soft, they provide a smooth feel to your drawings
They come in a very attractive box with a number of 72 different shades
The pigments are rich and they offer full coverage

Cons

The case may not consume too much space for the traveling artist

Dimensions: ‎14.29" x 7.48" x 1.34" | Weight: N/A | Color: Multicolor | Blendable: Yes | No. of Pencils: 120

Best Cheap Colored Pencils Comparison Table

Product	Dimensions	Weight	Color	Blendable	No. of Pencils
Reeves Colored Pencils	0.61" x 3.54" x 6.99"	3.52 oz	Multicolor	Yes	24
Studio Series Colored Pencil Set	12.25" x 0.25" x 9.5"	0.6 oz	Multicolor	Yes	30
Prismacolor Scholar Colored Pencils	8.25" x 4.75" x 0.75"	11.4 oz	Multicolor	Yes	48
Blick Studio Artists Colored Pencils	N/A	N/A	Multicolor	Yes	72
Prang Colored Pencils	‎7" x 9" x 0.5"	‎4.8 oz	Multicolor	Yes	24
Artlicious Colored Pencils	7.25" x 0.7" x 7.75"	11.5 oz	Multicolor	Yes	50
Sargent Art Colored Pencils	8.11" x 7.56" x 0.71"	10.2 oz	Multicolor	Yes	50
Faber Castell Color Pencils	‎7.9" x 6.8" x 0.8"	N/A	Multicolor	Yes	60
Castle Art Supplies Colored Pencils	‎14.29" x 7.48" x 1.34"	N/A	Multicolor	Yes	120

Types of Colored Pencils

Wax-based colored pencils

Wax-based colored pencils are the most commonly used type of colored pencil, they have a wax core, which encases the colored pigment. The wax core is made from a combination of waxes, such as paraffin wax, carnauba wax, or other waxes.

Wax-based colored pencils have a high wax content and are easy to blend, making them ideal for creating smooth gradients and blending colors. Wax-based pencils produce a matte finish, which makes them well-suited for sketching and drawing.

Oil-based colored pencils

Oil-based colored pencils are another type of colored pencil, unlike wax-based pencils, oil-based pencils use an oil-based core instead of a wax-based one. This type of pencil has a higher pigment content and produces a more intense color.

Oil-based colored pencils are also more difficult to blend and create gradients with, as the oil-based core does not melt as easily as wax-based cores. Oil-based pencils are better suited for creating detailed, vibrant artwork, as they produce a glossy finish.

Buying Guide For The Best Cheap Colored Pencils

Color Variety

The number of colors available in a colored pencil set can greatly influence the decision of buying it. A wide range of hues, tints, and shades will allow a coloring artist to capture the desired range of tones and create a more vibrant and realistic end product.

Pigment Quality

The quality of the pigment used in colored pencils can make a huge difference in the vibrancy and longevity of the finished product. The high-quality pigment will look more vibrant and will be less prone to fading over time.

Lightfastness

Lightfastness is the ability of a colored pencil to resist fading when exposed to light. The higher the lightfastness, the more vibrant the colors will stay over time.

Durability

The durability of a colored pencil set is important for longevity. A set of pencils that is well constructed and features strong wood or metal casing will be less likely to break and last longer.

Blending Ability

A good colored pencil set should feature a variety of blending capabilities. Different types of pencils and different brands will have different levels of blending capabilities, so it is important to consider which type of pencils will be best suited for the desired effect.

Cheap Colored Pencils FAQs

While cheaper colored pencils may not provide the same vibrancy, lightfastness, or ability to blend as more expensive options, many affordable sets still offer reasonable quality. It’s essential to read reviews and do some research to find the best option within your budget.

While lightfastness is generally associated with more expensive colored pencils, several cheap options on the market have reasonable lightfast ratings. Look for pencils that specifically mention their lightfast properties and check user reviews to verify their performance.

Blending and layering abilities can vary among cheap colored pencils. Some may perform well, while others may be more challenging to blend or layer effectively. Experimenting with different techniques or using additional blending tools, like blending stumps, can help improve results.

Generally, more expensive colored pencils have better pigmentation and color opacity, meaning that you can achieve stronger and richer colors with fewer strokes. Cheap colored pencils often require more layers and pressure to attain the same level of color saturation.

Conclusion

Choosing the best cheap colored pencils can be a daunting task, but our thorough research and testing have provided great options for artists on a budget. These pencils perform well, offer a smooth touch, and are easy to blend, making them perfect for learners, students, and even professionals looking for affordable art supplies.

From the above 9 best cheap colored pencils, here are the top three expert recommendations:

The Reeves Colored Pencils deliver impressive results at an affordable price and are perfect for those still learning to blend or for basic purposes. With a smooth touch to the surface and great blending qualities, this pack is an ideal option for learners or as a gift.

On the other hand, the Studio Series Colored Pencil Set offers excellent value for money and comes with an additional sharpener and eraser. This set is accessible to students and budgeted artists alike, making it a good option for those looking for a practical and complete pack.

Lastly, the Prismacolor Scholar Colored Pencils and Sets may be slightly more expensive than other options on this list, but the rich pigments and easy blending make them well worth the investment. For those looking for a reliable and well-known brand, this set is the right choice.

Remember, exploring your creativity doesn't have to be costly. With these affordable colored pencils, you can express your artistic vision while sticking to your budget. Happy coloring!

Related Articles

15 Best Electric Pencil Sharpeners

11 Best Colored Pencils for Beginners & Professional Artists

13 Best Sharpener For Colored Pencils

11 Best Adult Coloring Books That Will Color Your Mood

7 Best Electric Pencil Sharpener For Colored Pencils

10 Best Paper For Colored Pencils

Learn How to Shade With Colored Pencils Swiftly & Correctly

12 Colored Pencil Tips & Tricks to Enhance Your Skill

Learn How To Use Colored Pencils | 12 Brilliant Beginner Techniques

6 Best Erasable Colored Pencils

You Won’t Believe What Colored Pencils Are Made Of!

10 Colored Pencil Techniques to Enhance Your Drawings Swiftly

Learn How To Blend Colored Pencils Correctly Fast

10 Best Derwent Gift Sets

Walking into a room that doesn’t feel warm and welcoming comes as no surprise, for many, home décor cannot be a priority, so dated and dark areas are common in such homes. Introducing the world of beautiful farmhouse table lamps, where style meets functionality to provide the perfect addition to your home decor.

To improve the ambiance, you’ll find people generally suggesting you bring in more natural light through the windows, neutral color paint, or even modern furniture.

But we often forget to pay attention to the small details, which have a subtle way of making the biggest impression, and in our opinion, a decorative table lamp does just that!

The entire look and feel of the room can be changed with the right lighting. If your room doesn’t have big windows, bringing in the power of natural light is not impossible, and it all comes down to selecting the right lamp design.

So, without further ado, let’s get started!

Best Farmhouse Table Lamps

Here’s the list of the 5 best farmhouse table lamps that will add a touch of rustic charm and cozy ambiance to your living spaces.

1. Signature Design by Ashley - Best for Vintage Charm

Signature Design by Ashley Shavon Contemporary 27" Textured...

VERSATILE LIGHT: Set the scene for earthy elegance with this...
BEAUTIFUL CRAFTSMANSHIP: Made of ceramic with a textured...

Farmhouse table lamp designs don’t get much more vintage than Ashley’s Signature Design lamp with its bronze finish and drum shape. It has a refreshing take on the glass that gives it a classy and expensive look that we see in old-time movies.

The bronze-finished metal on the base, fabric drum shade, and glass circular is very old-school and retro. You can easily redecorate any room by incorporating this farmhouse-style table lamp. It uses 150-watt or 25-watt max CFL, so you won’t find any challenges in setting up this piece.

You have to attach the lampshade to the base and get the light fixed before you enjoy unlimited hours of great lighting without straining your eyes. It looks like a conversation starter, and the overall quality is such that it will last you for years to come.

Dimensions: 15.5" x 15.5" x 26.5" | Weight: 6 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Wattage: 150W | Light Source Type: CFL

2. Mair Poly Table Lamp by Ashley - Best for Effortless Style

Signature Design by Ashley Mair Rustic Farmhouse Poly Table...

CASUAL TABLE LAMPS: Bring sophisticated beauty to any room...
BEAUTIFUL CRAFTSMANSHIP: 3-way switch lamps are made of...

When you’re on the lookout for a stylish yet traditional table lamp, you can’t go wrong with the designs from Ashley furniture industries. The lamps are designed in a way that emulates sheer sophistication bundled with an effortless style.

It has a timeworn black finish, which is a unique pattern on a lampstand. Plus, it’s paired with a modified silhouette drum shade that perfectly complements the warm, charming glow of almost every color light.

Furthermore, it’s also known to be energy-efficient; this helps you balance out your utility bills. You don’t have to worry much about the assembly because attaching the lampshades won’t take much of your time.

The refined weather appearance will coordinate with any style of home décor. If you want a small table lamp in your room with a simple design, then feast your eyes on this model.

Dimensions: 14" x 14" x 29.25" | Weight: 10 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Wattage: 150W | Light Source Type: CFL

3. Murphy Rustic Industrial Accent Table Lamp - Best for Rustic Appeal

Franklin Iron Works Murphy Rustic Industrial Accent Table...

【Specifications】UL listed. 23" high overall. Base is 5...
【Bedroom Ambiance】 Elevate your night stand with bedside...

This rugged metal table lamp by Franklin Iron Works has a rustic allure that blends in with any style of home décor. The weathered bronze finish on the lampstand has been thoughtfully designed to emulate the traditional coal miner’s lantern. If you’re worried about the size, then rest easy because it comes in at 23 inches.

It also features a clear glass accent in the middle that helps enhance the overall design of this unit. Plus, the soothing neutral tone and oatmeal hue of the lamps' cylindrical shade helps to dim the light giving the room a cozier appeal. The shades are not huge; it has a nice size.

You’ll love the added flair and personality that is delivered by this lamp design. All in all, it’s a functional accessory that enhances the aesthetic quality of the room and provides the right amount of lighting.

Dimensions: 13.98" x 13.98" x 22.99" | Weight: 4.84 lbs | Power Source: N/A | Wattage: 100W | Light Source Type: N/A

4. Hobie Industrial Table Lamp

No products found.

This is another table lamp that is inspired by the workshop and industrial lighting. It has a perfect combination of elegantly classic and contemporary minimalist styles. The design is such that it can bring about balance in any setting while it adds personality to the room's ergonomic design.

The open, cage base design of the lampstand can hold a 4-watt LED Edison bulb that comes included with the set. While the top light needs to be purchased separately, and it uses a maximum of 150-watt standard-medium bulb.

Plus, operating this farmhouse table lamp is very simple because of the 4-way socket switch that allows you to switch on the top and bottom lights according to your preferences. It’s a value-added product considering the quality and design of this farmhouse table lamp.

Dimensions: 16.49" x 16.49" x 27.51" | Weight: 9.7 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Wattage: 150W | Light Source Type: LED

5. Oneach Table Lamps

Oneach 23.5 Inches Rustic Farmhouse Table Lamps Set of 2 for...

【Perfect Choice】The side table lamps are handmade of top...
【Rustic Table Lamps】Comes with 2 table lamps of rustic &...

This set of table lamps is handcrafted with top-grade resins and fabric that enable it to complement any part of your house. The base of the lamp looks more like a fine artwork. With this piece, you’re getting not only a functional tool but also a decorative item that has a classy design.

The fabric shade showcases the perfect blend of minimalism and functionality. You’ll have your room bathed in a soft ambient light that makes it more cozy and welcoming.

It’s a UL-certified table lamp, which ensures that you’re purchasing a safe and quality product. And it’s also covered with two years warranty. The price tag is pretty mid-range compared to the other products, and for its construction, this is a great bargain.

Dimensions: 23.5" x 13" x 13" | Weight: ‎8.89 lbs | Power Source: Corded Electric | Wattage: 60W | Light Source Type: Type A Bulb/CFA

Best Farmhouse Table Lamps Comparison Table

Product	Dimensions	Weight	Power Source	Wattage	Light Source Type
Signature Design by Ashley	15.5" x 15.5" x 26.5"	6 lbs	Corded Electric	150W	CFL
Mair Poly Table Lamp by Ashley	14" x 14" x 29.25"	10 lbs	Corded Electric	150W	CFL
Murphy Rustic Industrial Accent Table Lamp	13.98" x 13.98" x 22.99"	4.84 lbs	N/A	100W	N/A
Hobie Industrial Table Lamp	16.49" x 16.49" x 27.51"	9.7 lbs	Corded Electric	150W	LED
Oneach Table Lamps	‎23.5" x 13" x 13"	‎8.89 lbs	Corded Electric	60W	Type A Bulb/CFA

Buying Guide For The Best Farmhouse Table Lamp

Choosing the perfect farmhouse table lamp can enhance the aesthetic appeal of your room while providing functional lighting. To help you make an informed decision, consider the following factors when purchasing a farmhouse table lamp.

Style and Design

Farmhouse table lamps often feature vintage or rustic elements. Look for lamps with bronze finishes, weathered appearances, and glass accents. Consider the shape, color, and finish of the lamp to ensure it complements your existing decor and adds a touch of farmhouse charm to your room.

Features

Determine the lighting requirements for your space. Some lamps offer adjustable lighting levels, allowing you to customize the ambiance. Check the maximum wattage the lamp can accommodate and make sure it meets your needs. Also, consider the type of bulb required and whether it is included with the lamp or needs to be purchased separately.

Size and Proportions

Measure the space where you plan to place the lamp to ensure it fits appropriately. Consider the lamp's height, width, and weight to ensure it is suitable for your intended location. Also, take into account the size and shape of the lampshade, as it can affect the overall look and lighting diffusion.

Durability and Quality

Look for lamps made from high-quality materials such as metal, resin, or wood to ensure longevity. Read customer reviews and ratings to gauge the lamp's reliability. Consider lamps from reputable brands known for their craftsmanship and attention to detail.

Ease of Assembly

Check if the lamp requires assembly and ensure it comes with clear instructions. Consider the ease of attaching the lampshade and accessing the light source for maintenance. Look for lamps with user-friendly features such as simple on/off switches or dimmable options.

Price and Value

Set a budget for your purchase and compare prices across different brands and models. Consider the overall value of the lamp, including its design, functionality, and durability. Read customer reviews to gauge whether the lamp provides good value for its price.

Important Tip

Look for lamps that come with warranty coverage to protect your investment and ensure peace of mind.

Farmhouse Table Lamps FAQs

A farmhouse table lamp is a type of table lamp that features vintage or rustic elements, often with bronze finishes, weathered appearances, and glass accents. It is designed to add a touch of farmhouse charm to a room’s decor while providing functional lighting.

A farmhouse table lamp can change the look and feel of a room by providing warm and inviting lighting. The vintage or rustic design elements add character and charm to the space, creating a cozy and welcoming atmosphere.

When purchasing a farmhouse table lamp, consider the style and design that complements your existing decor. Look for adjustable lighting levels, maximum wattage, and the type of bulb required. Also, consider the lamp’s size and proportions, durability and quality of materials, ease of assembly, and price.

Some farmhouse table lamps are designed to be energy-efficient, utilizing LED bulbs or accommodating energy-saving bulbs. It is recommended to check the product specifications or descriptions to determine the lamp’s energy efficiency features.

Some farmhouse table lamps may be compatible with dimmer switches, allowing you to adjust the brightness and create different lighting atmospheres. Check the lamp’s product specifications or descriptions to see if it is compatible with dimmer switches.

When using farmhouse table lamps, it is important to follow safety guidelines. Ensure the lamp is placed on a stable surface to prevent tipping. Use the appropriate wattage bulbs recommended by the manufacturer. Avoid placing flammable materials near the lamp, and always turn off the lamp when not in use or when leaving the room.

Conclusion

As we come to the end of our exploration into the world of farmhouse table lamps, it's time to reveal the top three expert recommendations. From their unique designs to their functional features, they offer a blend of aesthetics and functionality that will elevate any farmhouse-themed space.

For vintage charm and a touch of elegance, the Signature Design by Ashley is an ideal option with its bronze finish and classic drum shape.

If you're seeking effortless style, the Mair Poly Table Lamp by Ashley is a good option, combining sophistication with a timeworn black finish.

For those who appreciate the rustic appeal, the Murphy Rustic Industrial Accent Table Lamp is the right choice, featuring a weathered bronze finish and a clear glass accent for added flair

Now that we’ve come to the end of our guide, we hope it has helped you find the farmhouse table lamp that fits your needs.

Till next time!

Related Articles

5 Best T2000 Headlamps Today

53 100% FREE DIY Farmhouse Table Plans for Your Rustic Dinning Room

The best way to keep your cat away from the tree is to provide alternative climbing options like scratching posts and use deterrents like citrus spray. You can also cover the tree stand and hang ornaments out of your pet's reach.

The joy of decorating a Christmas tree with your loved ones is unmatched. Everyone enjoys placing the precious ornaments and Christmas lights as beautifully as possible on it.

But then your furry friend runs to your decorated tree and knocks down all the decorations. The constant stress of saving your cat from the Christmas tree (the tree can fall and cause injury to your pet!) and vice versa is something no one wants to deal with.

Unfortunately, the issue of cats wreaking havoc on Christmas trees is quite common. In this article, I will try to explain why keeping cats away from the Christmas trees is important and how one can do so easily. Let’s begin!

Why It's Important To Keep Your Cat Away From Christmas Trees

1. Choking Hazards

The furries are not intelligent enough to differentiate food from decorations, so they may eat certain ornaments or tinsels. And since these decorations are not edible, your cats may end up choking.

This may lead to potential health hazards for your cats. As a result, you may need to rush to a veterinarian as soon as possible, which may ruin your Christmas season celebrations. Hence, it is important to learn how to cat-proof your Christmas tree.

2. Electrocution From Lights

Christmas light wiring is an important component of Christmas decorations. However, if you don’t know how to cat-proof your Christmas trees, your cat might end up too close to an electrical wire. Being naturally curious creatures, your kitty might even start chewing on the electrical cords - putting themselves at risk of electrocution.

If your cat gets electrocuted, it might suffer from severe burns and require expensive treatment - not to mention how much your pet will suffer physically. Hence, to avoid a potentially hazardous accident like burns, keep your cats away from your new tree!

3. Risk Of The Tree Falling Over

If you have a Christmas tree with several decorations, your kitty will naturally be allured to it. The cat might jump on the tree trunk to play with the ornaments, making it fall over. And cat owners know most cats don't think twice before jumping on random surfaces.

Tips For Keeping Cats Away From Christmas Trees

1. Provide Alternative Climbing Options For Cats

A common reason why cats climb trees is because they like to climb up an elevated perch. Hence, they run to sit on top of such trees. An effective way to cat-proof your Christmas tree is to provide your cat with an alternative climbing option.

Tip

You can buy scratching posts or cat trees - keeping them in your house will probably distract your cat from the decorated Christmas tree.

2. Use Deterrents

If your cat is adamant about playing around your Christmas tree, no matter how many alternative options you provide, it is best to use a deterrent. For instance, you can use apple cider vinegar or a citrus spray bottle on your artificial tree. Since cats generally do not like citrus scents, doing so will probably kill their urge to play around in that space.

You can also stick double-sided tape on the floor near the Christmas tree or its lower branches for cat-proofing them. Since cats do not like the feeling of stickiness in their paws, learning how to cat-proof your trees this way will keep your cat away from the decorations.

3. Cover The Tree Stand

The water in your real tree base stand might be causing your cats to play around it since they think of it as a new water source. To avoid this issue, the best way of cat-proofing your tree is to cover its stand, so your cat won't have access to the water. This way, it may lose interest in the real tree too.

You can cover the tree stand using aluminum foil or double-sided tape. Further, you may purchase a tree stand cover to avoid the hassles of unwrapping and wrapping covers every time you need to change the water of the tree stand water reservoir.

4. Avoid Using Tinsel Or Low-Hanging Ornaments

If there’s a Christmas ornament lying within your cat’s reach, it will jump to play with it. Low-hanging ornaments and tinsels are most likely on your cat's radar since they are the most accessible decorations on your trees.

However, consuming them can lead to many health issues. Hence, it is best to hang your ornaments at a decent height where it is almost impossible for your cat to reach them. It would also help if you considered ditching the idea of using tinsels since they are easily accessible for curious cats.

5. Consider Using A Smaller Tree Or Securing The Tree To The Wall

Huge trees attract cats because they have several branches to climb on. Hence, it is best to stick to a smaller artificial Christmas tree if you have a cat in your house. Such an alternative can be less tempting to your cat since it has fewer branches and thus, less scope for climbing.

Additionally, it would help if you considered securing your Christmas tree to the wall, ceiling or furniture. A secured, well-shaped artificial Christmas tree will not fall on the cat even when they try to climb it.

How To Train Your Cat To Stay Away From The Tree?

1. Positive Reinforcements

The best way to train any pet animal is to use positive reinforcement. Consider using this technique to teach your cat to stay away from the Christmas tree. It requires you to reward your pet with a treat whenever it follows your command to encourage good behavior.

Staying consistent with the positive reinforcement method is crucial. Hence, whenever your cat starts running off to the tree, ask it to stop. You can use words like "no" and "stop" to do so. Once your cat stops, you can reward it with its favorite treat.

2. Train Your Cat With An Undecorated Tree First

To prepare your cat to behave properly around your decorated pine cones, train it to stay calm around an undecorated fake tree first. This would allow you to teach your cat to stay away from the tree without worrying about the possibility of it ingesting decorations.

Whenever your cat runs towards the tree, gently pick it up and redirect its attention to another toy. With time, your cat may develop the habit of staying away from the tree - and may not run towards it even after you decorate it with ornaments.

Why do cats like to play with Christmas trees?

Since cats are pretty playful, a Christmas tree might seem like an attractive toy to them. Additionally, if you flock to your Christmas trees, there is high chance that your cat gets attracted to the sparkly texture of the trees.

Another thing worth noting is that cats love exploring. Hence, if you place a huge tree in your house, they may see it as an opportunity to explore by climbing it. The scent of a fresh tree might also attract them.

What are some signs that my cat has been playing with the Christmas tree?

If your cat decides that it wants to play with your Christmas tree, it might imply that it has been playing around with the decorations for a while now. Missing ornaments may also indicate that your cat has been hanging around your tree.

Other common signs that your cat has been playing with the Christmas tree include broken decorations and displaced branches of the tree. An unexplained scattering of tinsels might also indicate that your cat has been climbing up and down the tree behind your back.

Are there any natural deterrents that can keep cats away from the tree?

The chemical substance in an artificial deterrent may cause harm to your cat's health, which is why it is best if you stick to natural alternatives to keep your cat away from the tree. Apart from citrus spray, you can go for options like apple-cider vinegar, lemon, and orange peel. You can spray or place the peels right below the tree, and their scent might prevent your cat from hanging around the Christmas tree.

Cats are also known to dislike the odors of essential oils, such as eucalyptus and citronella oil. Hence, you can use these types of oil at the base of your Christmas tree to keep your cats away. You may also use lavender oil for the same.

What are some safe alternatives to tinsel and other hazardous decorations?

Tinsels may look beautiful on your Christmas trees but are unsafe for a pet (or even a child!). They can be quite hazardous if ingested and can cause stomach issues like gastrointestinal tract blockage or bowel obstruction. Hence, it is best to switch to safe alternatives like fabric garland ornaments for decoration.

You can get creative with such safe ornaments as well. For instance, you may make origami decorations using paper or stick with bunting made from fabric. You can also use dried lemons and orange peels to decorate your trees while simultaneously keeping your cat away since they dislike the smell of citrus.

Should I use a Christmas tree skirt to help keep my cat away?

Cats hate putting their paws on aluminum foil surfaces. They find the creaking sounds and the texture of aluminum foil mats difficult to deal with, which is why they make the perfect Christmas tree skirts in this case.

To make such skirts, take a few aluminum foil sheets and tape them together. This quick fix will help keep your cat from playing around your trees and decorations while giving off a fancy look (if you get creative with designing the tree skirt). I’d definitely suggest placing it on the base of the tree.

What other tips for keeping my cat safe during the holiday season?

An important tip for keeping your cat safe during the Christmas and holiday season is to ditch decorating your home with real mistletoes and hollies. Since such plants can be very harmful if ingested, it is best not to buy them in a home with pets (be it a cat or a dog). It would help if you switched to artificial plants instead.

While sharing your Christmas food with your cat may be tempting, it is important not to do so. Most Christmas treats like chocolates, alcohol, and nuts can harm a cat. Hence, it is best to keep them away from your Christmas meals.

How can I provide alternative forms of entertainment for my cat during the holidays?

Holiday preparations and traditions can make you very busy, so you may not be able to give your cat the usual undivided attention. Hence, you must provide your pet with an alternative form of entertainment during this time, like puzzle feeders and interactive toys.

You can also give your cats window perches to stay stimulated and entertained. Providing them with a scratching post or cat tree is also a good idea, so they have something to climb on and thus, stay entertained.

Conclusion

Christmas trees are beautiful, so cats are attracted to them as well. Hence, the best way to keep your cat away from the tree is to make it lose interest in playing with the decorations. You can use deterrents like citrus spray, essential oils, and so on for the same.

Further, it would help if you considered training your cats to stay away from the tree by using the method of positive reinforcement. However, it is worth noting that not all cats are the same, and some are more difficult to train than others.

Pick the solution that looks the most doable to you from above and protect your trees by learning how to cat-proof them!